GBSS14.0 Feature Activation Guide(06)(PDF)-En

GBSS14.0

Feature Activation Guide Issue

06

Date

2013-04-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

GBSS14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

About This Document Purpose This document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration. Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, the guidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network. This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in GBSS. NOTE

The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.

Product Version The solution version is GBSS14.0 related to this document, for more details you can refer to the following table. Product Name

Product Version

BSC6900

V900R014C00

BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L/ BTS3900AL/DBS3900

V100R014C00

Intended Audience This document is intended for: l

Technical support engineers

l

Maintenance engineers

l

Field engineers

l

Network optimization engineers

Organization 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


ii


About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide. 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated. 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME to activate or deactivate specified features. 4 Activating the GSM License This describes how to activate the GSM license. 5 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC. 6 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12). 7 Configuring IMSI Detach This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach. 8 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover. 9 Configuring Directed Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607 Directed Retry. 10 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment. 11 Configuring Call Reestablishment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment. 12 Configuring TCH Re-assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


iii


About This Document

13 Configuring Radio Link Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do not need to be configured. 14 Configuring Faulty Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the OML detection function in the optional feature MRFD-210304 Faulty Management. 15 Configuring BTS Software Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check function introduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functions involved in the feature do not need to be configured. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 16 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 17 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP. 18 Configuring Link Aggregation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation. 19 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure. 20 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control. 21 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110802 Pre-Processing of Measurement Report. 22 Configuring System Information Sending This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101 System Information Sending. 23 Configuring Daylight Saving Time This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-116101 Daylight Saving Time (DST). 24 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


iv


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment. 25 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 26 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806 Signaling Transport Point (STP). 27 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code. 28 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX). 29 Configuring BTS Power Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management. 30 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm. 31 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter. 32 Configuring High Speed Signaling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling. 33 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call. 34 Configuring License Control for Urgency This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 35 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm. 36 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


v


About This Document

37 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment. 38 Configuring Connection with TMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 39 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 40 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity. 41 Configuring BTS Clock This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 BTS Clock. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 42 Configuring Voice Fault Detection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Detection. 43 Configuring Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis. 44 Configuring IP Performance Monitor This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor. 45 Configuring GSM PS Service Map This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map. 46 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS). 47 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) feature. 48 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC) The ALC feature adjusts the gains of uplink and downlink digital speech signals and changes the amplitude of digital speech signals at an interval of 20 ms. This retains the speech signal level in the entire network in a stable state and ensures that the speech quality is not affected by Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


vi


About This Document

the volume fluctuation of both parties. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC). 49 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, improving the speech quality. Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver. After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, the voice is transmitted back to Party A through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known as acoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminated by means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC). 50 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink and downlink speech signals and improves the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearly hear the voice. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR). 51 Configuring TFO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701 TFO. 52 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) By comparing the background noise level at the local end and the signal level at the peer end, ANC adaptively increases the speech volume of the peer end if the background noise level of the local end is high. Therefore, the ratio of the signal level at the peer end to the background noise level at the local end increases, which helps to improve the voice quality. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC). 53 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC). 54 Configuring EVAD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115711 EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection. 55 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index (VQI). 56 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115708 Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing. 57 Configuring AMR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR and GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control. 58 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


vii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment. 59 Configuring WB AMR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507 WB AMR. 60 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech (HR). 61 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR With GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell during a call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle can be prevented. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR. 62 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation. 63 Configuring VAMOS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS. 64 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 65 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 66 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23). 67 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 68 Configuring VGCS and VBS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS) and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS). 69 Configuring GSM-T Relay This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


viii


About This Document

70 Configuring LCS (cell ID + TA) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402 LCS (cell ID + TA). 71 Configuring Lb Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404 Lb Interface. 72 Configuring Resource Reservation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation. 73 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP). 74 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority. 75 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115003 Flow Control Based on User Priority. 76 Configuring PS Service in Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority. 77 Configuring GPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 78 Configuring Network Operation Mode I This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I. 79 Configuring EGPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS. 80 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic feature GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 81 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


ix


About This Document

82 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 83 Configuring QoS ARP&THP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 84 Configuring PS Active Package Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management. 85 Configuring PoC QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905 PoC QoS. 86 Configuring Conversational QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119906 Conversational QoS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 87 Configuring NC2 This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2). 88 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 89 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination. 90 Configuring PS Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 91 Configuring PS Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504 PS Power Control. 92 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds. 93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119506 Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User. 94 Configuring EDA Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


x


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA). 95 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes. 96 Configuring DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151 DTM. 97 Configuring Class11 DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM. 98 Configuring HMC DTM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404 HMC DTM. 99 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119405 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data. 100 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119406 High Speed Circuit Switched Data. 101 Configuring Active TBF Allocation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation. 102 Configuring MSRD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801 Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD). 103 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC). 104 Configuring the EGPRS2-A This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A. 105 Configuring Latency Reduction This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction. 106 Configuring IM Service Efficiency Improvement The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xi


About This Document

interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement. 107 Configuring Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement. 108 Configuring Email Service Efficiency Improvement The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement. 109 Configuring Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing. 110 Configuring P2P Resource Balancing The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. 111 Configuring WLAN Hot Spot Notification Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511608 WLAN Hot Spot Notification. 112 Configuring Multiple CCCHs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs. 113 Configuring Layered Paging This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511502 Layered Paging. 114 Configuring Dynamic Multiple CCCH In traffic surge scenarios such as holidays or emergencies, paging overload occurs, which greatly affects services. In static multiple common control channel (CCCH) configuration mode, the specific number of configured channels is difficult to determine. If the configured channels are insufficient, paging overload cannot be resolved thoroughly; if excessive channels are configured, channel resources are wasted. The Dynamic Multiple CCCH feature can resolve the preceding issues. With this feature, if the load on the CCCHs increases, the TCHs corresponding to timeslots 2, 4, and 6 on the BCCH TRX are dynamically converted to CCCHs in succession. This increases the paging capability over the Um interface. If the load on the CCCHs decreases, the CCCHs corresponding to timeslots 6, 4, and 2 on the BCCH TRX are dynamically converted to TCHs in succession. This increases the resource usage. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511503 Dynamic Multiple CCCH. 115 Configuring RACH Storm Filtration This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511505 RACH Storm Filtration. 116 Configuring Active Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602 Active Power Control. 117 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink. 118 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink. 119 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. 120 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level. 121 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xiii


About This Document

122 Configuring Active Backup Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control. 123 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type. 124 Configuring PSU Smart Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control feature. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 125 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature. 126 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off feature. 127 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment feature. 128 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation feature. 129 Configuring Flex Abis This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 130 Configuring BTS Local Switch This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch. 131 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 132 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-112013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 133 Configuring Flex Ater This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116901 Flex Ater. 134 Configuring BSC Local Switch Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xiv


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch. 135 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 136 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points. 137 Configuring PS Dummy Frame Compression This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117705 PS Dummy Frame Compression. 138 Configuring Clock over IP support 1588v2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118620 Clock over IP support 1588v2. 139 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet. 140 Configuring Abis over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP. 141 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. 142 Configuring Abis MUX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604 Abis MUX. 143 Configuring Abis IPHC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC. 144 Configuring A over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602 A over IP. 145 Configuring A IP over E1/T1 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. 146 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xv


About This Document

147 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 148 Configuring Gb over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603 Gb over IP. 149 Configuring Ethernet OAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM. 150 Configuring A Interface Transmission Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118631 A Interface Transmission Pool. When an Ethernet Layer 3 networking is used, multiple IP interface boards used by the A interface on the BSC form a resource pool and the IP addresses for these interface boards also form a resource pool. Any interface board in the resource pool is accessible to the core network (CN). The BSC selects an IP address from the resource pool for bearing incoming services based on load balancing so that interface boards share resources in the pool. 151 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 152 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface. 153 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 154 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface. 155 Configuring RAN Sharing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing. 156 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell. 157 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover. 158 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xvi


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission. 159 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 160 Configuring PICO Synchronization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization. 161 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 162 Configuring PICO USB Encryption This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption. 163 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode. 164 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 165 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510608 PICO Transceiver Redundancy. 166 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management This section describes how to manage a GBTS weather-adaptive energy conservation task on the M2000. You can perform operations such creating, modifying, starting, deleting, and viewing a task. After you create such a task and then start it on the M2000, the M2000 predicts the quantity of electricity to be generated on GBTS solar panels based on weather data, and then periodically generates power levels available to the GBTSs based on various types of information such as generated electricity, remaining electricity of batteries, and GBTS power consumption. 167 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 168 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 169 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xvii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 170 Configuring Local User Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706 Local User Management. 171 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management Intelligent battery management includes the automatic switch between battery management modes, overtemperature protection, and leftover capacity. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510710 Intelligent Battery Management. 172 Configuring PBT This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901 Power Boost Technology (PBT). 173 Configuring Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity (TD). 174 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals to optimize the quality of uplink signals. 175 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity. 176 Configuring Dynamic PBT This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT. 177 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage. 178 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing. 179 Configuring Extended Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell. 180 Configuring Concentric Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. 181 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xviii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell. 182 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network. 183 Configuring Flex MAIO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001 Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO). 184 Configuring ICC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801 ICC. 185 Configuring EICC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821 EICC. 186 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 187 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 188 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 189 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing. 190 Configuring IBCA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation). 191 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 192 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization. 193 Configuring Network Support SAIC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xix


About This Document

194 Configuring Mega BSC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113706 Mega BSC. With this feature, a BSC supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs when IP over FE/GE/ STM-1 is used over the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces. This feature enables a BSC to support more subscribers while maintaining the speech quality. 195 Configuring PS Downlink DTX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119507 PS Downlink DTX. With the PS Downlink DTX feature, the BSC decreases the number of dummy control blocks sent on PDCHs and the number of data blocks unnecessarily retransmitted over the Um interface. This reduces the BTS power consumption and network interference, improving the service quality. 196 Configuring PS Uplink DTX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119508 PS Uplink DTX. With the PS Uplink DTX feature, the BSC decreases the frequency of scheduling extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods or sends system information instructing MSs not to send dummy control blocks for extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods. This reduces the MS power consumption and network interference, improving the service quality. 197 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC). 198 Configuring Fast Move Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover. 199 Configuring Chain Cell Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover. 200 Configuring Multi-Site Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell. 201 Configuring PS Automatic Frequency Correction (PS AFC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-5101051 PS Automatic Frequency Correction (PS AFC). 202 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover. 203 Configuring Handover Re-establishment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment. 204 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xx


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report. 205 Configuring BTS power lift for handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117101 BTS power lift for handover. 206 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability. 207 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover. 208 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover. 209 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State. 210 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release. 211 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g. 212 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA. 213 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g. 214 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g. 215 Configuring BSC supporting Blind Search This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search. 216 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxi


About This Document

217 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage. 218 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality. 219 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load. 220 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover. 221 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2. 222 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted Cell Change. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 223 Configuring SRVCC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC). 224 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover. 225 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release. 226 Configuring CSFB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511313 CSFB. 227 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability. 228 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA. 229 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxii


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g. 230 Configuring Extended BCCH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH. 231 Configuring NC2 Between GSM and TD-SCDMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA. 232 Configuring Ciphering This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm. 233 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization. 234 Configuring BTS Integrated IPsec This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 235 Configuring BTS Supporting PKI The BTS Supporting PKI feature enables an NE to automatically obtain a digital certificate authorized by the Certificate Authority (CA) of an operator. With the digital certificate, the NE can pass the authentication that uses the Internet Protocol Security (IPsec), 802.1x, or Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol. This feature contains a suite of functions based on Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2) for certificate management between NEs. CMPv2 provides functions such as certificate register request, key update, key restore, certificate revocation, CA key update notification, certificate authorization notification, and certificate revocation notification. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113526 BTS Supporting PKI. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 236 Configuring Ring Topology This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology. 237 Configuring TRX Cooperation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation. 238 Configuring MSC Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 239 Configuring the SGSN Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxiii


About This Document

240 Configuring Abis Bypass This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass. 241 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113721 Robust Air Interface Signalling. 242 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup. 243 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy feature. 244 Configuring TC Pool This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission. 245 Configuring OML Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728 OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS is enabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML is disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration. 246 Configuring Access Control Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC). 247 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking. 248 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection. 249 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing. 250 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 251 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM) Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxiv


About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM). 252 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrum resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load, improving frequency utilization. 253 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Transmission in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Transmission in the GBSS Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0. 254 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504 TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 255 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Clock in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Clock in the GBSS Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0. 256 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (GSM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-211803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). (For details about operations performed on the CME, see the Configuring a GU DSS Task in the M2000-CME documentation.) 257 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (GSM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-211804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (GSM). 258 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(GSM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-211602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(GSM). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxv


About This Document

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxvi


About This Document

Convention

Description

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxvii


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

About This Document

Action

Description

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.


xxviii


Contents

Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.....................................................................1 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.................................................................8 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME...............................................................................44 3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods............................................................................................................47 3.2 Configuring Device Data..................................................................................................................................48 3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for BSCs........................................................................................49 3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for A Interfaces.............................................................................50 3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Ater Interfaces.........................................................................51 3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gb Interfaces...........................................................................52 3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (G)Iur-g Interface..............................................................53 3.8 BSC Abis IP Configuration Express................................................................................................................53 3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Abis Interfaces........................................................................55 3.10 Introduction to the BTS Topology View........................................................................................................56 3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for BTSs......................................................................................59 3.12 Configuration Express for BTS IP Addresses................................................................................................60 3.13 Introduction to the GSM Device Panel...........................................................................................................62 3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for TRXs.....................................................................................65 3.15 Introduction to the Configuration Express for GSM Cells.............................................................................66 3.16 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring GSM Cells........................................................67 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches.......................................................................................................68 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches.......................................................................................................69 3.19 Deleting GSM Cells in Batches......................................................................................................................69 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches.................................................................................................70 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches....................................................................................71 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches................................................................................................72 3.23 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration............................................................................................73

4 Activating the GSM License......................................................................................................74 5 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC...........................................................................75 6 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)..........................................................................78 7 Configuring IMSI Detach..........................................................................................................80 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxix


Contents

8 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover..........................................................................................82 9 Configuring Directed Retry.......................................................................................................95 10 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment......................................................98 11 Configuring Call Reestablishment......................................................................................100 12 Configuring TCH Re-assignment........................................................................................104 13 Configuring Radio Link Management................................................................................106 14 Configuring Faulty Management.........................................................................................108 15 Configuring BTS Software Management...........................................................................110 16 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs...................................112 17 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP.......................................................................117 18 Configuring Link Aggregation.............................................................................................120 19 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure....................................124 20 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control.................................................................................126 21 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report......................................................128 22 Configuring System Information Sending.........................................................................130 23 Configuring Daylight Saving Time.....................................................................................132 24 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment......................................................................134 25 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan........................................................................................137 26 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)...................................................................139 27 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code......................................................................145 28 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)...................................................................147 29 Configuring BTS Power Management................................................................................149 30 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm............................................................151 31 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter..................................................................156 32 Configuring High Speed Signaling ....................................................................................158 33 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call..........................................................................161 34 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................164 35 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.......................................................166 36 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface............................................173 37 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment.........................................................................175 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxx


Contents

38 Configuring Connection with TMA....................................................................................179 39 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................182 40 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.........................................................................185 41 Configuring BTS Clock..........................................................................................................187 42 Configuring Voice Fault Detection......................................................................................189 43 Configuring Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis.........................................................................192 44 Configuring IP Performance Monitor.................................................................................194 45 Configuring GSM PS Service Map......................................................................................199 46 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).....................................204 47 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)...............................................................................206 48 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)....................................................................208 49 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)................................................................213 50 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)................................................................216 51 Configuring TFO.....................................................................................................................219 52 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)......................................................223 53 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).......................................226 54 Configuring EVAD.................................................................................................................228 55 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI).............................................................................230 56 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing........................................................233 57 Configuring AMR...................................................................................................................235 58 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment...............................238 59 Configuring WB AMR............................................................................................................242 60 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)....................................................................................244 61 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR................................................246 62 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation..........................................................................255 63 Configuring VAMOS.............................................................................................................261 64 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification.......................................................................274 65 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution..........................................................................278 66 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)............................................282 67 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast..............................................................................285 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxi


Contents

68 Configuring VGCS and VBS.................................................................................................287 69 Configuring GSM-T Relay....................................................................................................290 70 Configuring LCS (cell ID + TA)...........................................................................................293 71 Configuring Lb Interface.......................................................................................................297 72 Configuring Resource Reservation......................................................................................307 73 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)................309 74 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority............................................................313 75 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority...........................................................316 76 Configuring PS Service in Priority......................................................................................318 77 Configuring GPRS..................................................................................................................320 78 Configuring Network Operation Mode I...........................................................................323 79 Configuring EGPRS................................................................................................................325 80 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access.......................................................................................328 81 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching.........................................................................332 81.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service...................................................334 81.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel.......................................................................................................335 81.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario.............................................................337

82 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)......................................................................................339 83 Configuring QoS ARP&THP................................................................................................342 84 Configuring PS Active Package Management...................................................................345 85 Configuring PoC QoS.............................................................................................................347 86 Configuring Conversational QoS.........................................................................................349 87 Configuring NC2.....................................................................................................................351 88 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC).....................................................354 89 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination...............................................................................357 90 Configuring PS Handover.....................................................................................................359 91 Configuring PS Power Control.............................................................................................363 91.1 Configuring EGPRS Downlink Power Control............................................................................................365 91.2 Configuring GPRS Downlink Power Control..............................................................................................366

92 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.................................368 93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User..........................372 94 Configuring EDA.....................................................................................................................376 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxii


Contents

95 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes............................................................................379 96 Configuring DTM...................................................................................................................381 97 Configuring Class11 DTM.....................................................................................................383 98 Configuring HMC DTM........................................................................................................385 99 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data..................................................................387 100 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data............................................................390 101 Configuring Active TBF Allocation...................................................................................393 102 Configuring MSRD...............................................................................................................396 103 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink..........................................................................398 104 Configuring the EGPRS2-A.................................................................................................400 105 Configuring Latency Reduction.........................................................................................402 106 Configuring IM Service Efficiency Improvement..........................................................404 107 Configuring Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement.....................................409 108 Configuring Email Service Efficiency Improvement.....................................................414 109 Configuring Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing.........................................419 110 Configuring P2P Resource Balancing................................................................................424 111 Configuring WLAN Hot Spot Notification......................................................................429 112 Configuring Multiple CCCHs............................................................................................432 113 Configuring Layered Paging...............................................................................................434 114 Configuring Dynamic Multiple CCCH.............................................................................436 115 Configuring RACH Storm Filtration.................................................................................443 116 Configuring Active Power Control....................................................................................446 117 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink......................................448 118 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink............................................450 119 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown...........................................452 120 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level ..........................................................................................................................................................456 121 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass.......................................................................459 122 Configuring Active Backup Power Control.....................................................................461 123 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type..........................................464 124 Configuring PSU Smart Control.........................................................................................467 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxiii


Contents

125 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization............................470 126 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off..............................................................................473 127 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment............................................................477 128 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation..........................................479 129 Configuring Flex Abis..........................................................................................................482 130 Configuring BTS Local Switch...........................................................................................490 131 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization...............................................................493 132 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution...............................................496 133 Configuring Flex Ater...........................................................................................................499 134 Configuring BSC Local Switch...........................................................................................501 135 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission................................................................504 136 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points.................................................................508 137 Configuring PS Dummy Frame Compression.................................................................511 138 Configuring Clock over IP support 1588v2......................................................................513 139 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet...................................................................................515 140 Configuring Abis over IP.....................................................................................................517 141 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.........................................................................................522 142 Configuring Abis MUX........................................................................................................525 143 Configuring Abis IPHC........................................................................................................527 144 Configuring A over IP..........................................................................................................531 145 Configuring A IP over E1/T1...............................................................................................534 146 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission...................................................................537 147 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface..........................................539 148 Configuring Gb over IP........................................................................................................543 149 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................546 150 Configuring A Interface Transmission Pool....................................................................552 151 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface...............................................555 152 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface....................................................560 153 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface...............................................563 154 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.................................................565 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxiv


Contents

155 Configuring RAN Sharing...................................................................................................567 156 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell.......................................................................................576 157 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover..................................................................................588 158 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission................................................................591 159 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning..............596 160 Configuring PICO Synchronization..................................................................................600 161 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning................................................................602 162 Configuring PICO USB Encryption...................................................................................605 163 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode....................................................................................607 164 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization...................................................................609 165 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy...................................................................611 166 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management.....................................................615 167 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning............................................618 168 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization ..........................................................................................................................................................620 169 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off................................................................623 170 Configuring Local User Management...............................................................................625 171 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management.................................................................627 172 Configuring PBT....................................................................................................................631 173 Configuring Transmit Diversity.........................................................................................633 174 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity.............................................................................635 175 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity.......................................................................637 176 Configuring Dynamic PBT..................................................................................................640 177 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage...........................................................................643 178 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing...............................................................................646 179 Configuring Extended Cell..................................................................................................650 180 Configuring Concentric Cell...............................................................................................652 181 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell.................................................................................................657 182 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network...................................................................663 183 Configuring Flex MAIO.......................................................................................................667 184 Configuring ICC....................................................................................................................670 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxv


Contents

185 Configuring EICC..................................................................................................................672 186 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping).........................674 187 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping............................................................677 188 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping......................................................................680 189 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing......................................................682 190 Configuring IBCA.................................................................................................................684 191 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network........................................................................692 192 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization...........................................................................696 193 Configuring Network Support SAIC................................................................................698 194 Configuring Mega BSC........................................................................................................701 195 Configuring PS Downlink DTX.........................................................................................704 196 Configuring PS Uplink DTX...............................................................................................708 197 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)....................................................712 198 Configuring Fast Move Handover.....................................................................................715 199 Configuring Chain Cell Handover.....................................................................................718 200 Configuring Multi-Site Cell................................................................................................720 201 Configuring PS Automatic Frequency Correction (PS AFC)........................................724 202 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover...................................................................................726 203 Configuring Handover Re-establishment........................................................................740 204 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report..................................................................742 205 Configuring BTS power lift for handover........................................................................744 206 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.................................................................746 207 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover..................................................749 208 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover......................................................752 209 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State..............................................755 210 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release............................758 211 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g..........................................761 212 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA......................................................................................764 213 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g..............................766 214 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g..............................770 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxvi


Contents

215 Configuring BSC supporting Blind Search......................................................................773 216 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE..................................................777 217 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage....................780 218 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.......................784 219 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load...................788 220 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover......................................................792 221 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE.....................................................................796 222 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE.................................................................799 223 Configuring SRVCC.............................................................................................................801 224 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover..............................803 225 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.............................................806 226 Configuring CSFB.................................................................................................................808 227 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability...........................................................811 228 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA......................................815 229 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g...........................................................................................................................................819 230 Configuring Extended BCCH..............................................................................................822 231 Configuring NC2 Between GSM and TD-SCDMA........................................................825 232 Configuring Ciphering.........................................................................................................828 233 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization..........................................................831 234 Configuring BTS Integrated IPsec.....................................................................................836 235 Configuring BTS Supporting PKI......................................................................................844 236 Configuring Ring Topology................................................................................................848 237 Configuring TRX Cooperation............................................................................................851 238 Configuring MSC Pool.........................................................................................................854 239 Configuring the SGSN Pool................................................................................................858 239.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP)........................................................................................................859 239.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR).......................................................................................................862

240 Configuring Abis Bypass.....................................................................................................866 241 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling..................................................................871 242 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup..........................................................................874 242.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission Backup (Ring Topology)...................................................................875 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxvii


Contents

242.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS).............................................................877 242.3 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement..............................................................................882

243 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy................................................................................898 244 Configuring TC Pool.............................................................................................................911 244.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM).....................................................................................................912 244.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP)...........................................................................................................916

245 Configuring OML Backup...................................................................................................924 246 Configuring Access Control Class.....................................................................................927 247 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking......................................................929 248 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection.......................................................................932 249 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.............................................................935 250 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation................................937 251 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)..........................................943 252 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)............................946 253 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS).................951 254 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)............................................................................................................................................952 255 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)...............................958 256 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (GSM)....................959 257 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (GSM).....................................................................................................................................962 258 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(GSM).............................................................................968

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


xxxviii


1

1 Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide

Changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide This chapter describes the changes in the GBSS Feature Activation Guide.

06 (2013-04-15) This is the sixth commercial release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue 05 (2012-12-31), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 05 (2012-12-31), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Content

Description

243 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy

The prerequisite, context, and activation procedure are changed.

129 Configuring Flex Abis

The activation procedure and verification procedure are changed.

124 Configuring PSU Smart Control

The prerequisite and verification procedure are changed.

125 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization


126 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off

The prerequisite, activation procedure, and verification procedure are changed.

127 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

The prerequisite, activation procedure, and verification procedure are changed.

128 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation


241 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling

The verification procedure is changed.

58 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

The prerequisite is changed.


1



Content

Description

215 Configuring BSC supporting Blind Search


231 Configuring NC2 Between GSM and TD-SCDMA


91 Configuring PS Power Control


196 Configuring PS Uplink DTX


195 Configuring PS Downlink DTX


63 Configuring VAMOS


Compared with issue 05 (2012-12-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2012-12-31) This is the fifth commercial release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content

Description

113 Configuring Layered Paging


104 Configuring the EGPRS2-A

The context is changed.

239 Configuring the SGSN Pool

The feature deactivation procedure is changed.

62 Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

The feature activation procedure is changed.

233 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization 155 Configuring RAN Sharing


04 (2012-11-07) This is the fourth commercial release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

43 Configuring Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2


l


86 Configuring Conversational QoS

Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content

Description

140 Configuring Abis over IP

The dependencies on other features is changed.

175 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity 172 Configuring PBT 174 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity 118 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink


9 Configuring Directed Retry 47 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) 118 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink


118 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink


35 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm 9 Configuring Directed Retry 212 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA


03 (2012-08-30) This is the third commercial release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue includes the following new topics: l

205 Configuring BTS power lift for handover

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content

Description

5 Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC


113 Configuring Layered Paging 245 Configuring OML Backup

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


3



Content

Description

25 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan


67 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast 34 Configuring License Control for Urgency 93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User 66 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)


93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User 149 Configuring Ethernet OAM


156 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell 242 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup 93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User


02 (2012-06-30) This is the second commercial release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content

Description

55 Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI)


56 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing 66 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) 77 Configuring GPRS 240 Configuring Abis Bypass 240 Configuring Abis Bypass 212 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA 233 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



4



Content

Description

214 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g


56 Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing



01 (2012-04-26) This is the first commercial release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue includes the following new topics: l

115 Configuring RACH Storm Filtration

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue incorporates any changes. Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2012-03-26) This is the Draft B release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue includes the following new topics: l

111 Configuring WLAN Hot Spot Notification

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue incorporates any changes. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2012-02-15) This is the Draft A release of GBSS14.0. Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05) of GBSS13.0, this issue includes the following new topics: l

45 Configuring GSM PS Service Map

l

100 Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data

l

101 Configuring Active TBF Allocation

l

106 Configuring IM Service Efficiency Improvement

l

107 Configuring Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement

l

108 Configuring Email Service Efficiency Improvement

l

109 Configuring Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing

l

110 Configuring P2P Resource Balancing

l

114 Configuring Dynamic Multiple CCCH

l

137 Configuring PS Dummy Frame Compression

l

171 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


5



l

194 Configuring Mega BSC

l


l


l

201 Configuring PS Automatic Frequency Correction (PS AFC)

l


l


l

234 Configuring BTS Integrated IPsec

l

235 Configuring BTS Supporting PKI

Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05) of GBSS13.0, this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

content

Description

151 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

The configuration of satellite transmission for Pico BTSs is added.

71 Configuring Lb Interface

The U-TDOA positioning method is added.

48 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)

The configuration of the gain monitoring switch is added.

49 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)


50 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)


52 Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)


61 Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

The configuration that level is also considered for deciding whether to assign TCHHs is added.


The limit that GBFD-115830 VAMOS cannot be used together with GBFD-117002 IBCA or GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell is deleted from Prerequisites. The configuration of channel demultiplexing optimization is added.

64 Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification

The limit for enabling the Mute SAIC MS Identification feature is added to the Prerequisites.

65 Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution

The limit for enabling the VAMOS Call Drop Solution feature is added to the Prerequisites.

190 Configuring IBCA

The limit that GBFD-117002 IBCA cannot be used together with GBFD-115830 VAMOS is deleted from Prerequisites.


6



content

Description

180 Configuring Concentric Cell

The limit that GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell cannot be used together with GBFD-115830 VAMOS is deleted from Prerequisites.

238 Configuring MSC Pool

The content on that GBFD-117401MSC Pool supports the BSC to initiate independent load reassignment is added to Background Information and Activation Procedure.

206 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability

The content on optimizing 2Quater system information (SI) is added to Background Information and Activation Procedure.

209 Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

The content on optimizing 2Quater SI is added to Background Information and Activation Procedure.

8 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover

The configuration of TCHF-TCHH handover optimization function is added.

202 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover

l The configuration of the TCHF-TCHH handover optimization, load-based handover penalty inheritance functions is added. l The configuration of the quick handover algorithm is modified.

14 Configuring Faulty Management

The configuration of the OML identification function is added.

159 Configuring PICO/Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning

The configuration for locations of BTSs in automatic planning mode is added.


The configuration of the quick handover algorithm is modified.

198 Configuring Fast Move Handover

The configuration of the quick handover algorithm is modified.


The configurations for EGPRS uplink power control and uplink dummy block slow scheduling are added.

Compared with issue 08 (2012-01-05) of GBSS13.0, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


7


2

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

GBSSFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated. Table 2-1 lists the GBSS basic features. Table 2-2 lists the GBSS optional features. Table 2-1 GBSS Basic Feature List

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Feature ID

Feature Name

Configuration Method

GBFD-110000

GBSS9.0 System Improvement

None

GBFD-110001


None

GBFD-110030

3GPP Protocol Compliance

None

GBFD-110002


None

GBFD-110101

Frequency Band

None

GBFD-114401

Multi-band Sharing One BSC


GBFD-114901

Support for E-GSM and RGSM Frequency Band

None

GBFD-110201

Telephone Service (TS11)

None

GBFD-110202

Emergency Call Service (TS12)

6 Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12)


8


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name


GBFD-110203

Point To Point Short Message Service (TS21, TS22)

None

GBFD-110204

G3 Fax (TS61, TS62)

None

GBFD-110205

Bearer Service

None

GBFD-110301

Location Updating

None

GBFD-110302

IMSI Detach

7 Configuring IMSI Detach

GBFD-110303

CS Paging

None

GBFD-110304

Authentication

None

GBFD-110601

HUAWEI I Handover


GBFD-110607

Direct Retry

9 Configuring Directed Retry

GBFD-110608

SDCCH Handover


GBFD-110401

Basic Cell Selection

None

GBFD-110402

Basic Cell Re-selection

None

GBFD-110501

Call Control

None

GBFD-110502

Assignment and Immediate Assignment

10 Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment

GBFD-110503

Call Reestablishment

11 Configuring Call Reestablishment

GBFD-112501

TCH Re-assignment

12 Configuring TCH Reassignment

GBFD-119202

Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS

80 Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access

GBFD-111001

TRX Management

None

GBFD-111002

Radio Link Management

13 Configuring Radio Link Management

GBFD-111003

Radio Common Channel Management

None

GBFD-111004

Radio Dedicated Channel Management

None

GBFD-111005

Enhanced Channel Assignment Algorithm

None


9


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name


MRFD-210301

Configuration Management

None

MRFD-210302

Performance Management

None

MRFD-210303

Inventory Management

None

MRFD-210304

Faulty Management


MRFD-210305

Security Management

None

MRFD-210309

DBS Topology Maintenance

None

MRFD-210310

BTS/NodeB Software USB Download

None

GBFD-111202

O&M of BTS

None

GBFD-111203

O&M of BSC

None

GBFD-111207

BTS Test Function

None

GBFD-111210

Integrated Network Management Interface

None

GBFD-116501

Integrated Network Management Interface

None

GBFD-116402

Maintenance Mode Alarm

None

GBFD-113523

NAT Beside OM

None

MRFD-210401

BSC/RNC Software Management

None

MRFD-210402

BTS/NodeB Software Management

15 Configuring BTS Software Management

GBFD-111213

Remote Upgrade of the BSC&BTS Software

None

MRFD-210403

License Management

None

GBFD-114601

Multi-Cell Function

None

GBFD-111501

BTS Combined Cabinet

16 Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs

GBFD-111502

BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group


GBFD-118801

BSC Cabinet/Subrack Sharing

None

MRFD-210204

Star Topology

None


10


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name


MRFD-210205

Chain Topology

None

MRFD-210206

Tree Topology

None

GBFD-118621

Connection Inter BSC over IP

17 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP

GBFD-111701

Board Switchover

None

GBFD-111705

GSM Flow Control

None

GBFD-112301

Remote EAC Maintenance

None

GBFD-111214

Operation & Maintenance System One-Key Recovery

None

GBFD-111211

Reporting the Temperature List of the BTS Equipment Room

None

MRFD-210101

System Redundancy

None

MRFD-210102

Operate System Security Management

None

MRFD-210103

Link aggregation

18 Configuring Link Aggregation

MRFD-210104

BSC/RNC Resource Sharing

None

GBFD-117804

Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure

19 Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure

GBFD-511003

Call-Based Flow Control

20 Configuring Call-Based Flow Control

GBFD-110901

Adjustment of Adaptive Timing Advance

None

GBFD-110801

Processing of Measurement Report

None

GBFD-110802

Pre-processing of Measurement Report

21 Configuring PreProcessing of Measurement Report

GBFD-111101

System Information Sending

22 Configuring System Information Sending

GBFD-111102

Forced System Information Sending by OMC

None

GBFD-111901

Supporting Three-Digit MNC

None


11


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name


GBFD-116101

Support of Daylight Saving Time

23 Configuring Daylight Saving Time

GBFD-113001

SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

24 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

GBFD-112401

Cell Frequency Scan


GBFD-111806

STP (Signaling Transport Point)

26 Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP)

GBFD-111802

14-Digit Signaling Point Code

27 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

MRFD-210801

Interface Message Tracing

None

MRFD-210802

User Signaling Tracing

None

GBFD-112203

Cell Tracing

None

GBFD-111301

LAPD Multiplexing at Abis Interface


GBFD-114802

Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

28 Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

GBFD-111601

BTS Power Management

29 Configuring BTS Power Management

GBFD-110703

Enhanced Power Control Algorithm

30 Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm

GBFD-113525

DTMF Downlink Message Filter

31 Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter

GBFD-115201

High Speed Signaling

32 Configuring High Speed Signaling

GBFD-110521

Guaranteed Emergency Call

33 Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call

GBFD-511001

License Control for Urgency

34 Configuring License Control for Urgency

GBFD-117601

HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

35 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

GBFD-111801

Ater Interface 4:1 Multiplexing

None

GBFD-119001

Gb Interface Function

None


12


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name


GBFD-111803

A Interface Circuit Management

None

GBFD-111804

A Interface Protocol Process

None

GBFD-111805

A Interface Occupation Rate Monitoring

None

GBFD-113904

Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface

36 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface

GBFD-119101

Packet Channel Combination Type

None

GBFD-119102

Packet System Information

None

GBFD-119103

MS Types

None

GBFD-119104

MAC Mode

None

GBFD-119105

RLC Mode

None

GBFD-119106

Coding Scheme

None

GBFD-119107

Networking Control Mode

None

GBFD-119108

Network Operation Mode Support

None

GBFD-119109

QoS(Best Effort)

None

GBFD-119110

Access

None

GBFD-119111

Assignment

None

GBFD-119112

PS Paging

None

GBFD-119113

Timing Advance Update

None

GBFD-119115

Power Control

None

GBFD-119116

Packet Uplink Flow Control

None

GBFD-119117

Flow Control on Gb Interface

None

GBFD-113101

PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

37 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

GBFD-119205

Dynamically Adjusting the RRBP Frequency

None

GBFD-119303

Load Sharing

None

GBFD-119501

Adaptive Adjustment of Uplink and Downlink Channels

None


13



Feature ID

Feature Name


MRFD-210601

Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

38 Configuring Connection with TMA

MRFD-210602

Remote Electrical Tilt

39 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

MRFD-210604

2-Antenna Receive Diversity

40 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity

MRFD-210501

BTS/NodeB Clock

41 Configuring BTS Clock

MRFD-210502

BSC/RNC Clock

None

GBFD-119301

Voice Fault Diagnosis

42 Configuring Voice Fault Detection

GBFD-119306

Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis

43 Configuring Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis

GBFD-119307

Spectrum Scan

None

GBFD-119308

Intermodulation Testing

None

GBFD-118607

IP Performance Monitor

44 Configuring IP Performance Monitor

GBFD-118614

GSM PS Service Map


MRFD-210701

Documentation

None

MRFD-210001

Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(GBTS)

46 Configuring Multimode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)

MRFD-210002

Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU star-connection with separate CPRI interface(GBTS)

None

Table 2-2 GBSS Optional Feature List

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item

License Configured on...


GBFD-113301

Enhanced Full Rate

Enhanced Full Rate Function (per TRX) or Enhanced Full Rate Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

47 Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)


14


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-115601

Automatic Level Control (ALC)

Automatic Level Control Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115602

Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)

Acoustic Echo Cancellation Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115603

Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)

Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115701

TFO

TFO Function (per TRX) or TFO Support Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

51 Configuring TFO

GBFD-115702

TrFO

TrFO Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-115703

Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115704

Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

53 Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

GBFD-115711

EVAD

EVAD (per TRX)

BSC6900

54 Configuring EVAD

GBFD-116801

Voice Quality Index (VQI)

Voice Quality Index (VQI) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115708

Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing

Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing (per TRX)

BSC6900



15


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-115501

AMR FR

AMR Resource FR(per TRX)

BSC6900

57 Configuring AMR

GBFD-115502

AMR HR

AMR HR Function (per TRX) or AMR HR Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

57 Configuring AMR

GBFD-115503

AMR Power Control

AMR Power Control Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

57 Configuring AMR

GBFD-115504

AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment

AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115505

AMR Radio Link Timer

AMR Wireless Link Timer Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

57 Configuring AMR

GBFD-115506

AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115507

WB AMR

WB AMR Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

59 Configuring WB AMR

GBFD-113401

Half Rate Speech

Half Rate Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

60 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)

GBFD-113402

Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115522

Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation

Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

62 Configuring Dynamic HR/ FR Adaptation


16


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-115830

VAMOS

VAMOS (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115831

Mute SAIC MS Identification

Mute SAIC MS Identification (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-115832

VAMOS Call Drop Solution

VAMOS Call Drop Solution (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-113601

Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)

Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

66 Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)

GBFD-113602

Simplified Cell Broadcast

Simplified Cell Broadcast Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

67 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

GBFD-510301

Public Voice Group Call Service

Basic Voice Group Call Service(VGCS) Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

68 Configuring VGCS and VBS

GBFD-510303

Late Group Channel Assignment

Late Group Call Channel Assignment Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510305

Single Channel Group Call Originating

Single Channel Group Call Originating Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510306

Talker Identification

Talker Identification function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510307

Group Call EMLPP

Group Call EMLPP Function (per TRX)

BSC6900



17


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-510308

Fast Group Call Setup

Fast Group Call Setup Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510309

Group Call Reliability Enhancing

Group Call Reliability Enhancing Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510302

Public Voice Broadcast Service

Basic Voice Broadcast Service(VBS) Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510304

Late Broadcast Channel Assignment

Late Broadcast Channel Assignment Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510310

GSM-T Relay

GSM-T Relay (per TRX)

BSC6900

69 Configuring GSM-T Relay

GBFD-115402

BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)

LCS(CELL ID +TA) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

70 Configuring LCS (cell ID + TA)

GBFD-115404

Lb Interface

Lb Interface

BSC6900


GBFD-116001

Resource Reservation

Channel Reserved Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

72 Configuring Resource Reservation

GBFD-115001

Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP)

eMLPP Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

73 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)

GBFD-115002

Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

Flow Control Based on Cell Priority Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

74 Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority


18


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-115003

Flow control based on User priority

Flow control based on User priority (per TRX)

BSC6900

75 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority

GBFD-119907

PS Service in Priority

PS Service in Priority (Per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

76 Configuring PS Service in Priority

GBFD-114101

GPRS

GPRS Software Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

77 Configuring GPRS

GBFD-510001

Network Operation Mode I

Network operation mode I Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

78 Configuring Network Operation Mode I

GBFD-114201

EGPRS

EDGE Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

79 Configuring EGPRS

GBFD-510002

Gb Over FR

GB Over FR Resource (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-119201

11-Bit EGPRS Access

11-Bit EGPRS Access Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900


GBFD-119203

Extended Uplink TBF

Extended Uplink TBF Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900


GBFD-119302

Packet Channel Dispatching

Packet Channel Dispatching Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

81 Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching

GBFD-119509

GPRS Fast Transmission

GPRS Packet Fast Transmission (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-119901

Streaming QoS (GBR)

GBR Qos Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

82 Configuring Streaming QoS (GBR)


19


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-119902

QoS ARP&THP

QoS Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

83 Configuring QoS ARP&THP

GBFD-119904

PS Active Package Management

PS Active Queue Management Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

84 Configuring PS Active Package Management

GBFD-119905

PoC QoS

PoC QoS Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

85 Configuring PoC QoS

GBFD-119906

Conversational QoS

Conversational Qos Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900


GBFD-116201

NetworkControlled Cell Reselection (NC2)

NC2 Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

87 Configuring NC2

GBFD-116301

Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

NACC Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

88 Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

GBFD-119801

Packet SI Status (PSI)

Packet SI Status (PSI) Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900


GBFD-119305

BSS Paging Coordination

BSS Paging Coordination Function (per TRX) or BSS Paging Coordination Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

89 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination

GBFD-119502

PS Handover

PS Handover Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

90 Configuring PS Handover


20


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-119503

Early TBF Establishment

Early TBF Establishment Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-119504

PS Power Control

PS Power Control (Per 64Kbps)

BSC6900


GBFD-119505

PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds

Two Thresholds PDCH Dynamic Adjustment (Per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

92 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds

GBFD-119506

GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing priority

GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing priority (per TRX)

BSC6900

93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User

GBFD-119401

Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA)

EDA Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

94 Configuring EDA

GBFD-119402

MS High Multislot Classes

Terminal multislot classes Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

95 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes

GBFD-114151

DTM

DTM Function (per 64Kbps) or DTM Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900

96 Configuring DTM

GBFD-119403

Class11 DTM

DTM High Multi-slot class 11 Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

97 Configuring Class11 DTM

GBFD-119404

HMC DTM

HMC DTM Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

98 Configuring HMC DTM


21


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-119405

14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

14.4Kbps Circuit Switched Data Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

99 Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data

GBFD-119406

High Speed Circuit Switched Data

High Speed Circuit Switched Data (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-119407

Active TBF Allocation

Active TBF Allocation (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510801

MSRD

MSRD Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

102 Configuring MSRD

GBFD-510802

Dual Carriers in Downlink

Dual Carriers in Downlink Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

103 Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink

GBFD-510803

Uplink EGPRS2-A

Uplink EGPRS2-A Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510804

Downlink EGPRS2-A

Downlink EGPRS2-A Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510805

Latency Reduction

Latency Reduction Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

105 Configuring Latency Reduction

GBFD-511603

IM Service Efficiency Improvement

IM Service Efficiency Improvement (per TRX)

BSC6900



22


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-511604

Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement

Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511605

Email Service Efficiency Improvement

Email Service Efficiency Improvement (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511606

Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing

Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511607

P2P Resource Balancing

P2P Resource Balancing (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511608

WLAN Hot Spot Notification

WLAN Hot Spot Notification (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511501

Multiple CCCHs

Multiple CCCH (per TRX)

BSC6900

112 Configuring Multiple CCCHs

GBFD-511502

Layered Paging

Layered Paging (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511503

Dynamic Multiple CCCH

Dynamic Multiple CCCH (per CELL)

BSC6900


GBFD-511505

RACH Storm Filtration

RACH Storm Filtration (per CELL)

BSC6900



23


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-117602

Active Power Control

Active Power Control Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

116 Configuring Active Power Control

GBFD-114801

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)Downlink

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Downlink Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

117 Configuring Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)Downlink

GBFD-114803

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink

Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Uplink Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-111602

TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

Dynamic Shutdown Trx PA Function (per TRX) or TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900

119 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

GBFD-111603

TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level

Time slot Intelligent Power Optimization Function (per TRX) or TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900

120 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level

GBFD-111604

Intelligent Combiner Bypass

Intelligent Combiner Bypass Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

121 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass


24


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-111605

Active Backup Power Control

Active Backup Power Control Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

122 Configuring Active Backup Power Control

GBFD-111606

Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

Power Optimization Based on Channel Type Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

123 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

GBFD-111608

PSU Smart Control

PSU Smart Control Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-111609

Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization

Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization Function (per TRX) or Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-111610

Dynamic Cell Power Off

Dynamic Cell Power Off Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-111611

TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

TRX Working Voltage Adjustment Function(per TRX) or RX Working Voltage Adjustment Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900



25


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-111612

Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation

Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Function (per TRX) or MultiCarrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-116701

16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface

16K LAPD Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-117301

Flex Abis

Flex Abis Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-117702

BTS Local Switch

BTS local switching Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

130 Configuring BTS Local Switch

GBFD-118401

Abis Transmission Optimization

Transmission optimization on the Abis interface Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

131 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization

GBFD-112013

Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

132 Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

GBFD-116901

Flex Ater

Flex Ater Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

133 Configuring Flex Ater

GBFD-117701

BSC Local Switch

BSC Local Switching Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

134 Configuring BSC Local Switch


26


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-116902

Ater Compression Transmission

Ater Compression Transmission Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

135 Configuring Ater Compression Transmission

GBFD-115301

Local Multiple Signaling Points

Local Multiple Signaling Points Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

136 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points

GBFD-117705

PS Dummy Frame Compression

PS Dummy Frame Compression (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-118606

Clock over IP

Clock over IP Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-118620

Clock over IP support 1588v2

Clock over IP support 1588V2 Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

138 Configuring Clock over IP support 1588v2

GBFD-118202

Synchronous Ethernet

Synchronous Ethernet(per TRX)

BSC6900

139 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

GBFD-118601

Abis over IP

Abis Over IP Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-118611

Abis IP over E1/ T1

Abis IP Over E1/T1 Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

141 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1

GBFD-118604

Abis MUX

Abis MUX Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

142 Configuring Abis MUX

GBFD-118612

Abis IPHC

Abis IPHC (per TRX)

BSC6900

143 Configuring Abis IPHC


27


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-118602

A over IP

A Over IP Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

144 Configuring A over IP

GBFD-118622

A IP over E1/T1

A IP over E1 Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

145 Configuring A IP over E1/T1

GBFD-118610

UDP MUX for A Transmission

UDP MUX for A Transmission Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

146 Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission

GBFD-118623

TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface

TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface (per TRX)

BSC6900

147 Configuring TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface

GBFD-118603

Gb over IP

GB Over IP Resource (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

148 Configuring Gb over IP

GBFD-118605

IP QOS

IP QoS Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-118630

Ethernet OAM

Ethernet OAM Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

149 Configuring Ethernet OAM

GBFD-118631

A Interface Transmission Pool

A Interface Transmission Resource Pool (per TRX)

BSC6900

150 Configuring A Interface Transmission Pool

GBFD-113901

Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

Site Supporting Satellite Transmission Resource (per Site)

BSC6900


GBFD-113902

Satellite Transmission over A Interface

Satellite Transmission over A Interface Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

152 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface


28


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-113903

Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

153 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

GBFD-113905

Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900

154 Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

GBFD-118701

RAN Sharing

RAN Sharing Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

155 Configuring RAN Sharing

GBFD-118702

MOCN Shared Cell

MOCN Common Cell (per TRX)

BSC6900

156 Configuring MOCN Shared Cell

GBFD-118703

IMSI-Based Handover

IMSI Based Handover(per TRX)

BSC6900

157 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover

GBFD-118704

Abis Independent Transmission

Abis Independent Transmission (per TRX)

BSC6900

158 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission

GBFD-510601

PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning

PICO Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

159 Configuring PICO/ Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning

GBFD-510602

PICO Synchronizatio n

PICO Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

160 Configuring PICO Synchronizatio n


29


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-510603

PICO Dualband Autoplanning

PICO Dualband Autoplanning(per TRX)

BSC6900

161 Configuring PICO Dualband Autoplanning

GBFD-510604

PICO USB Encryption

PICO USB Encryption(per TRX)

BSC6900

162 Configuring PICO USB Encryption

GBFD-510605

PICO Access Control List (ACL)

PICO Access Control List (ACL)(per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-510606

PICO Sleeping Mode

PICO Sleeping Mode(per TRX)

BSC6900

163 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode

GBFD-510607

PICO Automatic Optimization

PICO Automatic Optimization (per TRX)

BSC6900

164 Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization

GBFD-510608

PICO Tranceiver redundancy

PICO Tranceiver Redundancy (per TRX)

BSC6900

165 Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy

GBFD-111613

Weather Adaptive Power Management

Weather Adaptive Power Management (per TRX)

BSC6900

166 Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management

GBFD-510701

Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning

Easy GSM Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

159 Configuring PICO/ Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning


30


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-510702

Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

Easy GSM Solution Packet Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

167 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

GBFD-510704

Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization

Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization (per TRX)

BSC6900

168 Configuring Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization

GBFD-510705

Compact BTS Timing Power Off

Compact BTS Timing Power Off(per TRX)

BSC6900

169 Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off

GBFD-510706

Local User Management

Local User Management (per TRX)

BSC6900

170 Configuring Local User Management

GBFD-510710

Intelligent Battery Management

Intelligent Battery Management (per BTS)

BSC6900


GBFD-115901

PBT(Power Boost Technology)

Multitransceivers supporting PBT transmit Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

172 Configuring PBT

GBFD-115902

Transmit Diversity

Multitransceivers supporting diversity transmit Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

173 Configuring Transmit Diversity


31


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-115903

4-Way Receiver Diversity

Multitransceivers supporting 4way receive diversity Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

174 Configuring 4Way Receiver Diversity

GBFD-118101

Dynamic Transmit Diversity

Dynamic PBT Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

175 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity

GBFD-118102

Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)

Dynamic PBT Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

176 Configuring Dynamic PBT

GBFD-118104

Enhanced EDGE Coverage

Enhanced EDGE Coverage(per TRX)

BSC6900

177 Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage

GBFD-118106

Dynamic Power Sharing

Dynamic Power Sharing (per TRX)

BSC6900

178 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing

GBFD-114001

Extended Cell

Extended cell Resource (per Cell)

BSC6900

179 Configuring Extended Cell

GBFD-113201

Concentric Cell

Concentric Cell Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-114501

Co-BCCH Cell

Co-BCCH Cell Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

181 Configuring Co-BCCH Cell

GBFD-114402

Enhanced DualBand Network

Enhanced DualBand Network Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

182 Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network

GBFD-117001

Flex MAIO

Flex MAIO Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

183 Configuring Flex MAIO


32


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-115801

ICC

ICC(Inference Counteract Combine) Function (per TRX) or ICC Resource (per TRX)

BSC6900

184 Configuring ICC

GBFD-115821

EICC

the EICC Function (per TRX) or EICC Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900

185 Configuring EICC

GBFD-113701

Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)

Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

186 Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)

GBFD-113702

BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

187 Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

GBFD-113703

Antenna Frequency Hopping

Antenna Frequency Hopping Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

188 Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping

GBFD-118001

BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

189 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

GBFD-117002

IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)

IBCA Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-118201

SoftSynchronized Network

Soft Synchronizatio n Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

191 Configuring SoftSynchronized Network


33


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-510401

BTS GPS Synchronizatio n

BTS GPS Synchronizatio n Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

192 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronizatio n

GBFD-118103

Network Support SAIC

SAIC Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

193 Configuring Network Support SAIC

GBFD-113706

Mega BSC

Mega BSC (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-119507

PS Downlink DTX

PS Downlink DTX (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-119508

PS Uplink DTX

PS Uplink DTX (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510101

Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)

AFC Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

197 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)

GBFD-510102

Fast Move Handover

High Speed PBGT Switch

BSC6900


GBFD-510103

Chain Cell Handover

Chain Cell Handover Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

199 Configuring Chain Cell Handover

GBFD-510104

Multi-site Cell

Multi-site Cell Function (per TRX) or Maximum Slave Module number allowed Resource (per Module)

BSC6900

200 Configuring Multi-Site Cell


34


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-510105

PS AFC

PS AFC (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510501

HUAWEI II Handover

HUAWEI II Handover Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-510502

Handover Reestablishment

Handover Reestablishment Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

203 Configuring Handover Reestablishment

GBFD-117501

Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR)

Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

204 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report

GBFD-117101

BTS power lift for handover

BTS power lift for handover Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-114301

GSM/WCDMA Interoperability

Intersystem Handover & Reselection Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

206 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Interoperabilit y

GBFD-114321

GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

Intersystem Handover due to Service Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

207 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Service Based Handover

GBFD-114322

GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

Intersystem Handover due to Load Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

208 Configuring GSM/ WCDMA Load Based Handover


35


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-114323

2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-114325

Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

Fast 3G Reselection at 2G Cs Call Release Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

210 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

GBFD-511101

Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

Handover Based on Load on Iur-g Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

211 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

GBFD-511102

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

212 Configuring NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA

GBFD-511103

GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

BSC Load Balancing Based on Iur-g Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

213 Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

GBFD-511104

GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

BSC Service Distribution Based on Iur-g Function (per TRX)

BSC6900



36


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-511110

Blind Search

BSC supporting Blind Search (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-511301

Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE(per TRX)

BSC6900

216 Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

GBFD-511302

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage (per TRX)

BSC6900

217 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage

GBFD-511303

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality(per TRX)

BSC6900

218 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality

GBFD-511304

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load (per TRX)

BSC6900

219 Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load

GBFD-511305

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority

PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-511306

GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover (per TRX)

BSC6900

220 Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

GBFD-511307

eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

eNC2 Between GSM and LTE (per TRX)

BSC6900

221 Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE


37


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-511308

eNACC Between GSM and LTE

eNACC Between GSM and LTE (per TRX)

BSC6900

222 Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE

GBFD-511309

SRVCC

SRVCC (per TRX)

BSC6900

223 Configuring SRVCC

GBFD-511310

Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover

Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover (per TRX)

BSC6900

224 Configuring Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover

GBFD-511312

Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

Fast LTE Reselection at GSM CS Call Release (per TRX)

BSC6900

225 Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

GBFD-511313

CSFB

CSFB (per TRX)

BSC6900

226 Configuring CSFB

GBFD-114302

GSM/TDSCDMA Interoperability

Intersystem Handover & Reselection Function (per TRX) or GSM/ TD-SCDMA Interoperability Resources (per TRX)

BSC6900

227 Configuring GSM/TDSCDMA Interoperabilit y

GBFD-511401

Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TDSCDMA

Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TDSCDMA(per TRX)

BSC6900

228 Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TDSCDMA


38


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-511402

Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/ TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g

Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/ TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g (per TRX)

BSC6900

229 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/ TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g

GBFD-511403

Extended BCCH

Extended BCCH (per TRX)

BSC6900

230 Configuring Extended BCCH

GBFD-511405

NC2 Between GSM and TDSCDMA

NC2 between GSM and TDSCDMA (per TRX)

BSC6900

231 Configuring NC2 Between GSM and TDSCDMA

GBFD-113501

A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm

Encryption (A5/1,A5/2) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

232 Configuring Ciphering

GBFD-113503

A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm

Encryption (A5/3) Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-113521

A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

Enhanced Encryption Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

233 Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

GBFD-113522

Encrypted Network Management

Encrypted Network Management Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-113524

BTS Integrated IPsec

BTS Integrated IPsec (per BTS)

BSC6900



39


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-113526

BTS Supporting PKI

BTS Supporting PKI (per BTS)

BSC6900


GBFD-117801

Ring Topology

Ring topology Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

236 Configuring Ring Topology

GBFD-113801

TRX Cooperation

TRX Cooperation Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

237 Configuring TRX Cooperation

GBFD-117401

MSC Pool

MSC POOL Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-119701

SGSN Pool

Gb Flex Function (per 64Kbps)

BSC6900


GBFD-116601

Abis Bypass

Abis Bypass Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

240 Configuring Abis Bypass

GBFD-113721

Robust Air Interface Signalling

Robust Air Interface Signalling Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-117803

Abis Transmission Backup

Abis Transmission Backup Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

242 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup

GBFD-113725

BSC Node Redundancy

BSC Node Redundancy Function (per TRX)

BSC6900


GBFD-113726

TC Pool

TC Pool Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

244 Configuring TC Pool

GBFD-113728

OML Backup

OML Backup Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

245 Configuring OML Backup


40


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




GBFD-511002

Access Control Class(ACC)

Access Control Class(per TRX)

BSC6900

246 Configuring Access Control Class

GBFD-113729

Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking

Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking (per TRX)

BSC6900

247 Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking

GBFD-114701

SemiPermanent Connection

Semipermanent Connection Resource (per LINK)

BSC6900

248 Configuring SemiPermanent Connection

GBFD-116401

End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

249 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

GBFD-510901

2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization

2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization Function (per TRX)

BSC6900

None

GBFD-511701

Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation

Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation (per TRX)

BSC6900

250 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation

MRFD-211801

Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM)

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing

BSC6900

251 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)

MRFD-211802

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(Per Site)

BSC6900

252 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)


41


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




MRFD-211501

IP-Based Multimode CoTransmission on BS side (GBTS)

None

None

253 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission on BS side (GBTS)

MRFD-211504

TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)

None

None

254 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)

MRFD-211505

Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission (GBTS)

Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission (NodeB)(Per NodeB)

NodeB

None

MRFD-211601

Multi-mode BS Common Reference Clock(GBTS)

None

None

255 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)

MRFD-211703

2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(GSM)

2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(Per Site)

BSC6900

None

MRFD-211803

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)

Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(per BTS)

BSC6900

256 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (GSM)


42


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Feature ID

Feature Name




MRFD-211804

2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(GSM)

GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (per BTS)

BSC6900

257 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (GSM)

MRFD-211602

Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (GSM)

Co-IPSec Between GSM,UMTS and LTE (per BTS)

BSC6900

258 Multimode BS Common IPSec(GSM)


43


3

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Overview of Configurations on the CME

About This Chapter This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME to activate or deactivate specified features. Feature activation and deactivation are mainly performed on the configuration expresses on the CME. This part introduces the operations on the configuration expresses and you need to understand the operations before activating or deactivating features. 3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using the CME. 3.2 Configuring Device Data This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel. 3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for BSCs This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for BSCs. 3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for A Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for A interfaces. 3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Ater Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Ater interfaces.The configuration express for Ater interfaces cannot be used for configuration of the BSC6910. 3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gb Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Gb interfaces. 3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (G)Iur-g Interface This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for the (G)Iur-g interface. 3.8 BSC Abis IP Configuration Express Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


44



This section describes the structure of the BSC Abis IP configuration express and provides a configuration guidance. 3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Abis Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Abis interfaces. 3.10 Introduction to the BTS Topology View This section provides the introduction to the BTS topology view. The CME provides the BTS topology view to display information including networking relationships, physical connections, and port information between the BSC and the BTS, and between BTSs in an intuitive manner. The CME also allows you to perform operations including creating sites and cells, configuring frequencies and TRXs, and browsing timeslots. This improves configuration and maintenance efficiency. 3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for BTSs This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for BTSs. 3.12 Configuration Express for BTS IP Addresses This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for BTS IP addresses. 3.13 Introduction to the GSM Device Panel This section provides the introduction to the GSM device panel, including the structure and configuration guidance to device panels for the BSC and the BTS and the RXU topology view. 3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for TRXs This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for TRXs. 3.15 Introduction to the Configuration Express for GSM Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for GSM cells. 3.16 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring GSM Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for neighboring GSM cells. 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified GBSCs in batches. 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified GBTSs in batches. 3.19 Deleting GSM Cells in Batches This section describes how to delete GSM cells in batches. 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified GSM cells in batches. 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified BSC external cells in batches. 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


45



This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified TRXs in batches. 3.23 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


46



3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using the CME.

Introduction to Configuration Methods The CME enables you to configure NE features in both single and batch modes. For details, see Table 3-1. Table 3-1 Introduction to configuration methods Config uratio n Metho d

Characteristics

Single configu ration

Configures parameters for only one object (for example, a base station or a cell) each time. The CME provides configuration expresses and device panels for various types of data to configure one object. l The CME displays a navigation tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The navigation tree shows managed objects (MOs) while the table shows the parameters of the MOs and parameter values. After selecting an MO in the navigation tree, you can configure its values in the table. l The device panel is displayed on a GUI, allowing you to directly configure data for devices such as cabinet, subrack, and board.

Batch modific ation center

Applies the configuration data about an object (for example, a base station or a cell) to other objects. NOTE This method is applicable to scenarios where the parameters for multiple objects need to be configured the same.

For example, after setting the VAMOSSWITCH parameter for cell 1 to ON, you can use the batch modification function to set the VAMOSSWITCH parameters for other specified cells to ON at a time. By doing this, you do not need to configure the parameters for these cells one by one.

Introduction to Data Configuration Procedures Before using the CME to configure features, you need to be familiar with basic operations on the CME. For details, see CME Guidelines in the M2000 Help. The procedures for using the CME to activate or deactivate features are as follows: 1.

Synchronize the data in the current data area with the data on the live network.

2.

Create a planned data area and copy the data in the current data area to the planned data area for configuration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


47



3.

Modify the parameters according to the planned data.

4.

After configuring data, export the data as scripts.

5.

Deliver the exported scripts to the live network for the configuration data to take effect on NEs.

3.2 Configuring Device Data This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel. Right-click a BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree in the left pane, and choose Device Panel from the shortcut menu. The NE device panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Device panel

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


48



Operatio n

Operation description

Add

l In the upper-right part of the device panel window, click Add Cabinet. l Right-click an empty subrack on the device panel window, and choose Add Subrack from the shortcut menu. l Right-click the empty slots on the panels of each subrack, and choose the required board types from the shortcut menu.

Delete

l Right-click a cabinet to be deleted, and choose Delete Cabinet from the shortcut menu. l Right-click a subrack to be deleted, and choose Delete Subrack from the shortcut menu. l Right-click a board to be deleted, and choose Delete Board from the shortcut menu.

View or modify

Right-click a device to be viewed or modified, and choose Property to view or modify the device.

3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for BSCs This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for BSCs. The configuration express provides a window for configuring BSC-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Configuration express for BSCs

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


49



Configuration Guidance 1.

In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > GSM > BSC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring BSCs is displayed.

2.

In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3. TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for A Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for A interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-3. Figure 3-3 Configuration express for A interfaces

1.

In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > GSM > A in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring A interfaces is displayed.

2.

In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


50


3 Overview of Configurations on the CME TIP


3.


3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Ater Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Ater interfaces.The configuration express for Ater interfaces cannot be used for configuration of the BSC6910. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Configuration express for Ater interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > GSM > Ater in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Ater interfaces is displayed.

2.



3. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

In area 3, configure the data. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51



3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gb Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Gb interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for objects of interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Configuration express for Gb interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > GSM > Gb in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Gb interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



52



3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (G)Iurg Interface This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for the (G)Iur-g interface. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6 Configuration express for the (G)Iur-g interface


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > GSM > Iur-g in the Transport navigation tree. The configuration express window for configuring (G)Iur-g interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.


3.8 BSC Abis IP Configuration Express This section describes the structure of the BSC Abis IP configuration express and provides a configuration guidance. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


53



Portal to BSC Abis IP Configuration Express 1.

In area 1 of the Figure 3-7, right-click a GSM NE to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and choose Show BTS Topology from the shortcut menu. The BTS topology view is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 BTS topology view

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

In Figure 3-7, select an IP interface board in area 3, right-click an IP interface board in area 2, and choose Configure BSC ABIS IP Properties from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring BSC Abis IP addresses is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-8.


54



Figure 3-8 BSC Abis IP configuration express


In area 1 of the Figure 3-8, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 2. TIP


2.

In area 2 of the Figure 3-8, configure the parameters.

3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Abis Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Abis interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-9.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


55



Figure 3-9 Configuration express for Abis interfaces


In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > GSM > Abis in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Abis interfaces is displayed.

2.



3.


3.10 Introduction to the BTS Topology View This section provides the introduction to the BTS topology view. The CME provides the BTS topology view to display information including networking relationships, physical connections, and port information between the BSC and the BTS, and between BTSs in an intuitive manner. The CME also allows you to perform operations including creating sites and cells, configuring frequencies and TRXs, and browsing timeslots. This improves configuration and maintenance efficiency. Figure 3-10 shows the BTS topology view.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


56




1. Area for selecting interface boards

4. Area for displaying cells and TRXs

2. Area for displaying operation buttons

5. Area for displaying information

3. Area for displaying the topology view

6. Area for searching, refreshing, and Help


Right-click a BSC or BTS in the Main View navigation tree, and choose Show BTS Topology to open the BTS topology view.

2.

View the information as required. Operation View the meaning of each icon in the topology view View the description of the BTS creation procedure

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Description In area 6, click . The icon description window is displayed. You can click this button again to close the icon description window. In area 6, click . The description window of the BTS creation procedure is displayed.


57



Operation

Description

Switch to another interface board

Select the subrack number, slot number, and logical board of the BSC from area 1, switch to another interface board, and view the BTS topology information under this interface board.

Check physical connections

l Lines connecting BSCs and BTSs indicate the physical connections. If only one line exists, it indicates that only the primary connection is configured. If two or more lines exist, it indicates that secondary connections are configured. l Lines displayed on a BTS indicate the internal connections between cabinets. l The number on the left board indicates the slot number. The string on the BTS indicates the BTS name. l You can view the port numbers by clicking the ports at both ends of a line.

View the connections of the interface board

1. Click the interface board icon on the BSC side. Area 5 displays the information about the interface board. 2. In this window, you can view the following information: l Physical type and logical type of the board l Total number of BTSs connected to the board l Number of ports being used on the board and number of each port

Add BTSs

1. Right-click the interface board in area 3, and choose Add Site from the shortcut menu. The Add Site dialog box is displayed. 2. In the displayed dialog box, set BTS attributes, and click OK.

View basic BTS information

1. Click a BTS icon. Area 5 displays the basic information about the BTS. 2. In this window, you can browse basic information such as the index, name, and type of the BTS.

Add cells

1. Right-click the blank area in area 4, and choose Add Cell from the shortcut menu. The Add Cell dialog box is displayed. 2. In the displayed dialog box, set cell attributes, and click OK.

View basic cell information

1. Click a cell icon. Area 5 displays the basic information about the cell. 2. In this window, you can view the information such as the cell ID, cell name, frequency band, mobile country code (MCC), Mobile Network Code (MNC), location area code (LAC), cell identity (CI), and BCCHNo.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


58



Operation

Description

View basic TRX information

Click a TRX icon. Area 5 displays the basic information about the TRX. In this window, you can view the information such as the TRX ID, TRX number, used frequency, subrack number, slot number and channel number of the TRX board, and board type.

Select a display mode of the message box

Right-click in the blank area, and select a display mode of the window as required: l Hide Cell Panel: The message box is displayed in a fixed way and can be dragged. l Hide Bulletin: The message box is hidden.

Search for a cell or BTS

1. Click

. The search dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the option of searching by name or ID, enter the name or ID of the cell or BTS, and click OK. The retrieved cell or BTS is highlighted. View the activation status of a BTS, cell, or TRX

View the dots to the lower right of the BTS, cell, or TRX icon. l If the dot is green, the BTS, cell, or TRX is activated. l If the dot is gray, the BTS, cell, or TRX is not activated.

Refresh the GUI

In area 6, click

.

3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for BTSs This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for BTSs. The configuration express provides a window for configuring BTS-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-11.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


59



Figure 3-11 Configuration express for BTSs


In area 1, right-click a BTS to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and choose BTS Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring BTSs is displayed.

2.

In area 2, select a BTS to be configured.

3.



4.

In area 4, configure the parameters.

3.12 Configuration Express for BTS IP Addresses This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for BTS IP addresses.

Portal of the Configuration Express for BTS IP Addresses 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

In area 1 in the Figure 3-12, right-click a BTS to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and then choose Show BTS Topology from the shortcut menu. The BTS topology view is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-12.


60




2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

In area 3 in the Figure 3-12, select an IP interface board, right-click a BTS in area 2, and then choose Configure BTS IP Properties from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring BTS IP addresses is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-13.


61



Figure 3-13 Configuration express for BTS IP addresses


In area 1 in the Figure 3-13, select a BTS to be configured.

2.

In area 2 in the Figure 3-13, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3. TIP

You can also type the configuration parameters on the tab pages Parameter List and Search in area 2. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3 of the Figure 3-13, configure the parameters.

3.13 Introduction to the GSM Device Panel This section provides the introduction to the GSM device panel, including the structure and configuration guidance to device panels for the BSC and the BTS and the RXU topology view.

BSC Device Panel Right-click a BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree in the left pane, and choose Device Panel from the shortcut menu. The BSC device panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-14. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


62



Figure 3-14 Device panel

1. Cabinet device This area displays the structure between the cabinets, subrack, and boards. panel You can delete cabinets, add or delete subracks and boards, or view or modify device attributes in this area. 2. Operation buttons

You can add cabinets and cables between subracks in this area.

BTS Device Panel The BTS device panel differs by BTS type. This section introduces the BTS device panel that supports the BTS3900 in SRAN mode. Right-click a BTS to be configured in the Main View navigation tree in the left pane, and choose Device Panel from the shortcut menu. The BTS device panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


63



Figure 3-15 BTS3900 device panel

1. Cabinet navigation You can add or delete cabinets, or view cabinet attributes in this area. tree 2. RXU chain navigation tree

You can add or delete RXU chains and RXU boards, or view attributes in this area.

3. RXU topology You can switch over between the RXU topology view and the cabinet view and cabinet tab tab page in this area. page 4. Device panels of cabinets, subracks, and boards

You can add or delete boards and cabinets, or view or modify device attributes in this area.

5. Operation buttons This area displays basic information about the current BTS, including the BTS index, name, and type. You can also add cabinets in this area.

RXU Topology View In area 3 of Figure 3-15, click the RXU Topology tab, as shown in Figure 3-16.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


64



Figure 3-16 RXU topology view

The RXU topology view contains the following information: l

Cabinet number, subrack number, and slot number of the GBBP, GTMU, or UBRI board

l

Chain head or ring head/tail location of an RXU chain/ring (port number of the GBBP/ GTMU/UBRI board)

l

Cascaded location of the RXU in the RXU chain/ring

You can add or delete RXU boards and RXU chains, set breakpoints, or view device attributes in this area.

3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for TRXs This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for TRXs. The configuration express provides a window for configuring TRX-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-17.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


65



Figure 3-17 Configuration express for TRXs


In area 1, right-click a TRX in the Main View navigation tree, and choose TRX Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring TRXs is displayed.

2.

In area 2, select a TRX to be configured.

3.



4.


3.15 Introduction to the Configuration Express for GSM Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for GSM cells. The configuration express provides a window for configuring cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-18.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


66



Figure 3-18 Configuration express for GSM cells


In area 1, right-click a GSM cell to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and choose UMTS Cell Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring GSM cells is displayed.

2.

(Optional)In area 2, select a cell to be configured.

3.



4.

In area 4, configure the parameters.

3.16 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring GSM Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for neighboring GSM cells. The configuration express provides a window for cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-19.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


67



Figure 3-19 Configuration express for neighboring GSM cells


In the Main View navigation tree in area 1, right-click a GSM cell to be configured, and choose UMTS Neighboring Cell Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window is displayed for you to configure GSM neighboring cells.

2.

(Optional)Select a source cell in area 2.

3.

Select the object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree in area 3.

4.

Select the corresponding Template and NE in area 4. Select one or multiple required neighboring cells, and click Add. The information about the neighboring cell is displayed in area 5.

5.

(Optional) Right-click the neighboring cell selected in area 5, and choose Modify NCell Relationship from the shortcut menu to modify the information about the neighboring cell.

3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified GBSCs in batches.

Procedure Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed.

. The dialog box for selecting

Step 2 Select GBSCs to be modified in batches. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


68



Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified GBSCs in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified GBTSs in batches.



Step 2 Click Add and select the mode for adding GBTSs based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes. Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified GBTSs in batches.


3.19 Deleting GSM Cells in Batches This section describes how to delete GSM cells in batches.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


69



Procedure Step 1 Right click cell in the BTS topology, select Delete Cell.A dialog box is displayed for you to delete cells in batches. Step 2 Select the cells to be deleted. 1.

Select Delete 2G external cells for GSM/UMTS. If the cell to be deleted serves as the external or neighboring cell on other BSCs or RNCs, select Delete 2G external cells for GSM/UMTS. The data about this cell is also deleted from other BSCs or RNCs.

2.

Click Add, and select the cells to be deleted. The CME provides three modes for you to select cells. For detailed operations, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. In the displayed confirmation dialog box, click Yes. The CME starts to delete the cells and displays the results after the deletion is complete. Step 4 Click Finish to exit the wizard. If the CME fails to delete any of the cells, all the cells and their neighbor relationships are restored to the status before the deletion. A failure report is displayed. You can reconfigure the data based on the failure cause and perform the deletion again. ----End

3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified GSM cells in batches.



Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify all cells under an NE in batches

Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list.

Modify specified cells under an NE in batches

Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


70



NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified cells in batches.


3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified BSC external cells in batches.



Step 2 Select BSC external cells to be modified in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify all BSC external cells under an NE in batches

Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list.

Modify specified BSC external cells under an NE in batches

The following uses GBSC 2G external cell as an example. Select By BSC 2G External Cell from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding BSC external cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes. NOTE To modify BSC 3G external cells or BSC LTE external cells, select By BSC 3G External Cell or By BSC LTE External Cell from the Select mode drop-down list.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


71



NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified BSC external cells in batches.


3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified TRXs in batches.



Step 2 Select TRXs to be modified in batches. If you need to...

Then...

Modify all TRXs under an NE in batches Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list. Modify specified TRXs under an NE in batches

Select BY GSM TRX from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding TRXs based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches. NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified TRXs in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


72



3.23 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them. Figure 3-20 shows the window for configuring external cells. Figure 3-20 Window for configuring external cells


In area 1, select the BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree.

2.

In area 2, select the external cell to be configured in the Object Group navigation tree. TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be set on the Search tab page. This helps quickly locate parameters.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



73


4 Activating the GSM License

4

Activating the GSM License

This describes how to activate the GSM license.

Prerequisites l

The BSC6900 is in service.

l

The LMT is started and you are logged in to the BSC6900.

l

The valid BSC6900 license is obtained and stored in the OMU active workspace \FTP \License

Procedure Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSE and enter the name of the license file to be activated to query the file information. If...

Then...

The file information comply with the information of the Go to Step 2. file that you apply for, The file information does not comply with the information of the file that you apply for,

Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command LST CFGMODE to query the subrack configuration status. If the subrack is offline, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE to switch it to online. Step 3 Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT LICENSE to active the License. ----End

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


74


5


Configuring Multi-band Sharing One BSC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – You are advised to use this feature together with GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off to reduce the network power consumption.

l

License – This feature is not under license control.

l

Other Prerequisites – The TRXs configured for the BTS supports the corresponding frequency bands.

Context l

Huawei GSM BSS supports the following types of multiband networks: – GSM850 band + GSM900 band + DCS1800 band – GSM850 band + GSM900 band + PCS1900 band

l

The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900.

l

Huawei GSM BSS does not support the co-existence of a GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH cell and a GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cell.

l

Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900 band, DCS1800 band, PCS1900 band, and GSM850 band. Huawei GSM BSS does not support GSM450 band or GSM480 band.

The dual-band network configured on the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands of a BTS is used as an example.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Activation Procedure


75


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > ADD Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a GSM cell. In this step, set Freq. Band Type to GSM900.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click GSM cell > Activate Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the cell.

3.

Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to set Freq. Band to DCS1800.

Verification Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to set the basic handover parameters of the GSM900 and DCS1800 cells based on the network plan.

2.

Use an MS supporting the GSM900 band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normal.

3.

Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normal.

4.

Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. After the call is set up, move the MS towards the center of the 1800 MHz cell. Then, check the channel status in the monitoring window. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is kept alive. NOTE

l On the LMT, click Device Maintenance. In the Device Navigation Tree, right-click a specified cell, and then choose Monitor Channel Status. l When a call is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, the color of a channel in the Monitor Channel Status window is displayed as green. This indicates that the channel is occupied by the call handed to the 1800 MHz cell.

l

Deactivation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click GSM cell > Deactivate Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Freq. Band to GSM900.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL) to query the value Active status. Expected result: The value of Active status is DEACTIVATED.

3.

Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to deactivate the cell whose Freq. Band is DCS1800.

----End

Example //Activating Multi-band Sharing One BSC //Adding a GSM cell ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="Cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=11, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF; //Activating the GSM cell ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Adding a DCS cell ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=11, CI=12, NCC=0, BCC=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF; //Activating the DCS cell ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


76



//Verifying Multi-band Sharing One BSC SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2; //Deactivating NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


77


6


Configuring Emergency Call Service (TS12) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110202 Emergency Call Service (TS12).

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature does not depend on other features.

l


Context The emergency call service takes precedence over other services during network access even if the MS requesting the service is suspended or the telephone charge is overdue.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the emergency call service. In this step, set Emergency Call Disable to NO(No).


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query whether the emergency call service is enabled. Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Disable is No.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2.

Tracing Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the DPC of the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit.

3.

Use the MS to make an emergency call. After the call is put through, you can hear a voice prompt. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78



4.

l

Check the BSSAP messages traced on the A interface. Expected result: An EMERGENCY_SETUP message is traced on the A interface. This indicates that the emergency call service is enabled.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable the emergency call service. In this step, set Emergency Call Disable to YES(Yes).

----End

Example //Activating Emergency Call Service (TS12) SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=NO; //Deactivating Emergency Call Service (TS12) SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ERGCALLDIS=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


79



7

Configuring IMSI Detach

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110302 IMSI Detach.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context After the IMSI is detached, the MS is marked as an invalid MS by the network. The network does not send any paging message to this MS. The network informs the MS whether the IMSI attach or detach is allowed by sending the system information type 3 message.

Procedure l


l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Idle Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Attach-detach Allowed to YES(Yes).


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC to query the value of Attach-detach Allowed. Expected result: The value of Attach-detach Allowed is YES(Yes).

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, set DPC(HEX) to the DPC of the cell and select the BSSAP check box. On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID (cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell. Click Submit. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80



3.

l

After the A interface message tracing window is displayed, power off the MS. Expected result: The IMSI DETACH INDICATION message is traced on the A interface.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Idle Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Attach-detach Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating IMSI Detach SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=YES; //Deactivating IMSI Detach SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ATT=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


81



8

Configuring HUAWEI I Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware.

l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features.

l

License This feature is not under license control.

l

Other Prerequisites Neighboring 2G cells have been configured. For details, see Configuring the Radio Data.

Context Handover is used to keep the call continuity of the UE during its movement. It also helps optimize the network performance by balancing the traffic between cells. Huawei I handover is classified into high-speed railway quick handover, emergency handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, load-based handover, and normal handover. The emergency handover is classified into TA handover, bad quality (UL/DL) handover, quick level drop handover, interference handover, and no downlink measurement report handover. The normal handover is classified into edge handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, concentric cell handover, AMR handover, and better 3G cell handover.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


82



CAUTION l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the old cell. l A bad quality handover is an intra- or inter-cell handover. If Bad Quality Handover Optimization Allowed is set to YES(Yes), only an inter-cell bad quality handover can be initiated. l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited. l An interference handover is an intra- or inter-cell handover. If Interference Handover Optimization Allowed is set to YES(Yes), only an intra-cell interference handover can be initiated. However, when intra-cell handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified duration. l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load-based handovers between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a loadbased handover of a normal cell from colliding with a load-based handover between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell on the network. l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between the enhanced dual-band network cells. l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all the neighboring micro cells. l SDCCH handover supports the quick handover, TA handover, bad quality handover, quick level drop handover, interference handover, no downlink measurement report handover, edge handover, and fast-moving micro cell handover. It does not support the enhanced dual-band network handover, load-based handover, hierarchical handover, PBGT handover, AMR handover, better 3G cell handover, concentric cell handover, and tight BCCH handover.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83



4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Max. Num. of HO Attempts to an appropriate value.

6.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PWRC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw to YES(Yes). This helps to improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband frequency hopping.

7.

Activating the quick handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Chain Neighbor Cell Type to appropriate values; then, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes), and set Quick Handover Offset and Neighboring Cell Type to appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes), and set Quick PBGT Handover Enable to YES(Yes) if quick PBGT handovers are needed. NOTE

The quick handover algorithm consists of the frequency offset handover algorithm and quick PBGT handover algorithm. Quick Handover Enable controls whether to initiate frequency offset and quick PBGT handovers. Quick PBGT Handover Enable controls whether to initiate quick PBGT handovers only.

c.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Fast Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Handover Direction Forecast Enable to YES(Yes), and set Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Move Speed Threshold, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Quick Handover Offset, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Handover Direction Forecast Last Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate values.


84


8 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover NOTE

If the neighboring cell is an external neighboring cell, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value to appropriate values.

d.

8.

9.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL Frequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reported by the base station.

Activating the TA handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TA HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TA Threshold to an appropriate value.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Penalty Level after TA HO and Penalty Time after TA HO to appropriate values.

Activating the bad quality handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Optional: For non-AMR calls, run the SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set DL Qual. Threshold and UL Qual. Threshold to appropriate values.

c.

Optional: For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the SET GCELLAMRQUL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > AMR Quality Threshold Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set UULQUALIMITAMRFR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR to appropriate values.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85



Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Penalty Level after BQ HO and Penalty Time after BQ HO to appropriate values. 10. Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold to an appropriate value.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Filter Parameter A1, Filter Parameter A2, Filter Parameter A3, Filter Parameter A4, Filter Parameter A5, Filter Parameter A6, Filter Parameter A7, Filter Parameter A8 and Filter Parameter B to appropriate values.

11. Activating the interference handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Interference HO Allowed to YES(Yes), and set Intracell HO Allowed and Inter-layer HO Threshold to appropriate values. NOTE

If this cell has external neighboring cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Inter-layer HO Threshold to an appropriate value.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Forbidden time after MAX Times to an appropriate value.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis to an appropriate value.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > AMR Quality Threshold Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 2 for NonAMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 5 for NonAMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 8 for NonAMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 11 for NonHuawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86



AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR and Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR to appropriate values. 12. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set No Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes), and set No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit, Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr. HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO Last Time to appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Filter Length for TCH Qual and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual to appropriate values.

13. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/Extra Property and Same Group Cell Index Type (Not required on the CME) to appropriate values, and set Same Group Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of Same Group Cell Index Type (Not required on the CME).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Enhanced Dual-Band Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to appropriate values.

14. Activating the load-based handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Load Handover Support to YES(Yes) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold and Inter-layer HO Threshold to appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set System Flux Threshold for Load HO, Load HO Threshold, Load handover Load Accept Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87



Threshold, Load HO Bandwidth, Load HO Step Period, and Load HO Step Level to appropriate values. NOTE

If this cell has external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Load handover Load Accept Threshold to an appropriate value. If this cell has external neighboring UMTS cells, run the MOD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Load handover Load Accept Threshold to an appropriate value.

c.


15. Activating the edge handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Edge HO Allowed to YES(Yes), and set Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm I Edge HO Valid Time to appropriate values.

b.


16. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Layer of the Cell to an appropriate value.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and Inter-layer HO Threshold to an appropriate value.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MS Fastmoving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving Valid Cells, MS Fast-moving Time Threshold, Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO, and Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO to appropriate values.


88



If this cell has external neighboring GSM cells, run the Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Layer of the Cell, Inter-layer HO Threshold, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on Fast Moving HO to appropriate values.

d.


17. Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Level HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and set Inter-layer HO Threshold to an appropriate value.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority to appropriate values. NOTE

If this cell has external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority to appropriate values.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, Layer HO Watch Time, and Layer HO Valid Time to appropriate values.

18. Activating the PBGT handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PBGT HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority to appropriate values.


89



If this cell has external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority to appropriate values.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Current HO CTRL Algorithm in Source Cell to HOALGORITHM1 (Handover algorithm I), and set Neighboring Cell Type, Adjacent Cell Interlayer HO Hysteresis, PBGT Watch Time, and PBGT Valid Time to appropriate values.

19. Activating the AMR handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(Yes), and set Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, Intracell FH HO Last Time, F2H HO Threshold, and H2F HO Threshold to appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES (Yes).

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to appropriate values.

20. Activating the capacity- and quality-based TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to HOBASECAPANDQUAL(HOBASECAPANDQUAL), AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES (Yes). Set the following parameters to appropriate values: Non-AMR F-H Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90



Traffic Threshold F-H Ho Duration F-H Ho Period AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold FH ATCB Offset Overlay AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold F-H Ho Stat. Time F-H Ho Last Time AMR H-F Traffic Threshold H-F Ho Duration AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold H-F ATCB Offset Overlay Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold H-F Ho Stat. Time H-F Ho Last Time Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold Non-AMR FH Ho ATCB Threshold Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold Non-AMR HF Traffic Threshold Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold b.


c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).

d.


21. Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Handover Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) In this step, set Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed to an appropriate value.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, query the setting of Current HO Control Algorithm. Expected result: The value of Current HO Control Algorithm is HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

2.

Start the BSSAP message tracing task by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Expected result: The BSC sends the MSC a Handover Performed message with the handover cause value of better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91



– In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance. – In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or downlink-quality. – In the case of the rapid level drop handover algorithm, the handover cause value is uplink-strength. – In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplinkquality or downlink-quality. – In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality. – In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value is better-cell or traffic. – In the case of the load-based handover, the handover cause value is traffic. – In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or downlink-strength. – In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the inter-layer handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the PBGT handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the AMR handover or the capacity- and quality-based TCHF-TCHH handover, the handover cause value is downlink-quality. – In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength. l

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating HUAWEI I handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3; //Activating the quick handover algorithm MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES, CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A, ADJHOOFFSET=1; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QUICKHOEN=YES, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3; SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=36671; //Activating the TA handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


92



TAHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TALIMIT=125; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10; //Activating the bad quality handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, BQHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10; //Activating rapid level drop handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FLTPARAA1=10, FLTPARAA2=10, FLTPARAA3=10, FLTPARAA4=10, FLTPARAA5=10, FLTPARAA6=10, FLTPARAA7=10, FLTPARAA8=10, FLTPARAB=0; //Activating the interference handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=2; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67; SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60, RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55, RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50; //Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8, NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2; //Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner, DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1; SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES; //Activating the load-based handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LoadHoEn=YES, DLEDGETHRES=20, HOTHRES=25; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SYSFLOWLEV=10, TRIGTHRES=90, LoadAccThres=80, LOADOFFSET=25, LOADHOPERIOD=10, LOADHOSTEP=5; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67; //Activating the edge handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67; //Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2, QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67; //Activating the inter-layer handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, LEVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25; SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


93



MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, LEVSTAT=6, LEVLAST=4; //Activating the PBGT handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTHOEN=YES; SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3, PRIOR=PRIOR-3; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, PBGTMARGIN=68, PBGTSTAT=6, PBGTLAST=4; //Activating the AMR handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES, INFHHOSTAT=10, INFHHOLAST=8, INHOF2HTH=25, INHOH2FTH=12; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER 1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON, AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55; //Activating the capacity- and quality-based TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH= HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=HOBASECAPANDQUAL, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, AMRFULLTOHALFHOTHRESH=75, FULLTOHALFHODURATION=5, FULLTOHALFHOPERIOD=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=100, FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=20, FULLTOHALFHOATCBOFFSET=20, AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, FULLTOHALFHOSTATTIME=6, FULLTOHALFHOLASTTIME=4, AMRHALFTOFULLHOTHRESH=45, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, HALFTOFULLHODURATION=5, AMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=4, HALFTOFULLATCBOFFSET=20, AMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=108, HALFTOFULLHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=3, HALFTOFULLHOSTATTIME=6, HALFTOFULLHOLASTTIME=4, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFTHRESH=85, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=95, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=30, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, NOAMRHALFTOFULLTHRESH=25, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=14, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=103, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=2; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER 1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2; //Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH= HOALGORITHM1, SIGCHANHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


94



9

Configuring Directed Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110607 Directed Retry.

Prerequisites l


l


l

License – This feature is not controlled by a license.

Context Directed retry is a special type of handover. That is, during assignment, the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure to switch the MS to a neighboring cell if no TCH is available or the traffic load is heavy in the serving cell. The BSC does not initiate the directed retry procedure during high speed circuit switched data (HSCSD) assignment. This feature helps reduce call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell, increasing the access success rate. It also helps evenly distribute traffic load between cells.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Directed Retry to YES(Yes).

2.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable directed retry based on the actual load in a cell. In this step, set Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable to ENABLE(Enable).

3.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95



Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable directed retry based on the actual load in a cell. In this step, set Cell Directed Retry Forbidden Threshold to an appropriate value based on the actual load in the serving cell.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) if Huawei I Handover algorithm is used. In this step, set Directed Retry Load Access Threshold to an appropriate value based on the actual load in candidate neighboring cells. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) if Huawei II Handover algorithm is used. In this step, set Load handover Load Accept Threshold to an appropriate value based on the actual load in candidate neighboring cells.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I). Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOCTRL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Handover Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to an appropriate value based on the actual receive level in neighboring cells. Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) if Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM2 (Handover algorithm II). In this step, set Inter-cell HO Hysteresis and Directed Retry Handover Level Range to appropriate values based on the actual receive level in neighboring cells.

6.

Optional: Set the number of cells for directed retry and the priorities of these cells. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DRD HO Target Cell Selection Optimized to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Max. Num. of HO Attempts to an appropriate value.

Verification Procedure NOTE

The following configurations are only used for verification. For commercially used networks, configure parameters based on the network plan. After this feature is verified, restore the configurations before verification.

1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Block all TCHs in cell 0. Meanwhile, ensure that SDCCHs in cell 0 are available for use. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96


l


2.

Trace the BSSAP messages on the A interface and the RSL messages on the Abis interface in cells 0 and 1 by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

3.

Use an MS to make a call in cell 0.

4.

View the BSSAP messages traced over the A interface and RSL messages traced over the Abis interface in cells 0 and 1. Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the speech quality is good. The Handover Detection message is traced over the Abis interface in cell 1. The Assignment Complete message is traced over the A interface in cell 1.

5.

Open the Single User CS Trace page. It indicates that the value of the ucHoCause information element (IE) in the Handover Triggered Indication message is directedretry.


Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Directed Retry to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Directed Retry SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=YES; SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DRTAGCELLSEL=YES; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DTLOADTHRED=85; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINPWRLEVDIRTRY=16; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, INTERCELLHYST=68, DRHOLEVRANGE=72; //Deactivating Directed Retry SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRECTRYEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


97


10


Configuring Assignment and Immediate Assignment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Assignment and immediate assignment are two important procedures during call setup. Normal immediate and immediate assignment procedures do not require setting of any parameter. Parameter setting is required only in the immediate assignment of TCHs. The following section describes how to configure the function of immediate TCH assignment.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TCH Immediate Assignment to YES(Yes).


When an MS camps on a cell and no MS is processing services in the cell, block the SDCCHs and disable the SDCCH dynamic adjustment function. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block an SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH and Administrative State to Lock(Lock). To block more SDCCHs, run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to block.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


98



– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to disable SDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to NO(No). 2.

Use the MS to initiate a call.

3.

Check the messages traced over the Abis interface. On the Abis interface message tracing window, the CHANNEL ACTIVATION message is traced. The field Channel Mode and Type indicates that a TCH, instead of an SDCCH, is assigned during immediate assignment. During assignment, the messages Mode Modify Request and Mode Modify Acknowledge are traced.

4.

After the verification, unblock the SDCCH and enable SDCCH dynamic adjustment immediately. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to unblock an SDCCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the SDCCH and Administrative State to Unlock(Unlock). To unblock more SDCCHs, run the SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT command for each SDCCH you want to unblock. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA to enable SDCCH dynamic adjustment. In this step, set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES(Yes).

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TCH Immediate Assignment to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Assignment and Immediate Assignment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=YES; //Deactivating Assignment and Immediate Assignment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMMASSEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


99



11

Configuring Call Reestablishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110503 Call Reestablishment.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MSC supports this feature.

Context When an MS encounters a radio link failure during the call, the call reestablishment procedure can be performed to reestablish the radio link connection so that the original call can proceed. This mechanism shortens call interruption and improves user experience.

Procedure l

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to NO(No).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Timer Attributes > Timer Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TREESTABLISH to an appropriate value. If this parameter is set to a great value, the radio resources assigned previously are reserved for a long time, which results in network congestion.

Verification Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100



1.

Select a cell for test. The test cell must have two TRXs, where, TRX1 is the BCCH TRX and TRX2 is the non-BCCH TRX. TRX2 requires an independent variable attenuator or a device that can dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink signals of TRX2.

2.

Use an MS to make a call on the test cell. Block all the TCHs on TRX1 so that the MS uses a TCH on TRX2. Then, unblock all the TCHs on TRX1. For details about how to block and unblock TCHs, see SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT

3.

Attenuate the signals of TRX2 sharply by using the variable attenuator or other devices, check the signaling traced on the A and Abis interfaces, and monitor the channel status of the test cell. Expected result: – As displayed in the channel status monitoring window, the MS reestablishes a call on TRX1 of the test cell. – The signaling messages shown in Figure 11-1 are traced.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


101



Figure 11-1 Signaling messages

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Deactivation Procedure


102



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Call Reestablishment Forbidden to YES(Yes).

----End

Example //Activating Call Reestablishment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=NO; SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSIPFAILINDDELAY=10000; //Deactivating Call Reestablishment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CALLRESTABDIS=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


103


12 Configuring TCH Re-assignment

12

Configuring TCH Re-assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112501 TCH Re-assignment.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context TCH re-assignment is a procedure in which the BSC re-assigns a TCH to the MS after the MS returns to the SDCCH because a TCH fails to be assigned to the MS.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Reassign to YES(Yes).


Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD. In this step, set Frequency Band of Reassign to Same_Band(Same Band). NOTE

This parameter indicates the frequency band to be assigned during TCH re-assignment. If the parameter is set to Same_Band(Same Band), then a channel of the same frequency band as the originally assigned TCH is assigned preferentially.

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Reserve an idle TCH on the BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the BCCH TRX.


104


12 Configuring TCH Re-assignment

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block a TCH. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the TCH to be blocked and Administrative State to Lock(Lock). 3.

l

Reserve an idle TCH on the non-BCCH TRX and block other TCHs on the non-BCCH TRX. In addition, degrade the uplink signal transmitted on the TRX, for example, remove the uplink antenna for the non-BCCH TRX. Expected result: Initiate a call in the cell. In the first assignment, a TCH on the nonBCCH TRX is assigned. The call is re-assigned onto the TCH of the BCCH TRX, because the assignment over the Um interface fails for this TRX.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Reassign to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating TCH Re-assignment SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=YES; //Verifying TCH Re-assignment SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSFREQBAND=Same_Band; //Deactivating TCH Re-assignment SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REASSEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


105


13


Configuring Radio Link Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the link error indication procedure of the basic feature GBFD-111002 Radio Link Management. Other procedures of the feature do not need to be configured.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The procedures involved in radio link management are as follows: l

Link establishment indication

l

Link establishment request

l

Link release indication

l

Link release request

l

Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode

l

Reception of a transparent L3-Message in acknowledged mode

l

Transmission of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode

l

Reception of a transparent L3-Message in unacknowledged mode

l

Link error indication

The link error indication procedure enables the BTS to notify the BSC of exceptions that occur on the radio link layer.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Timer Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106



Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set parameters for a specified cell. In this step, set T200 SDCCH, T200 FACCH/F, T200 FACCH/H, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0, T200 SACCH TCH SAPI, T200 SACCH SDCCH, T200 SDCCH SAPI3, Use LAPDm N200, N200 of Release, N200 of Establish, N200 of SACCH, N200 of SDCCH, N200 of FACCH/Half Rate, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to appropriate values. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCTMR to query call control timer parameters for the corresponding cell. Expected result: The parameter values queried by running the preceding command are the same as the values set in the activation procedure.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace and display the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box. On the Basic tab page, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, select RLM under Message Type, select TRX from the Filter Flag drop-down list, and then specify the TRX ID.

3.

Use an MS to make a call and query the channel occupied by the call. Remove the battery of the MS during the call.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO to initiate a forced handover for the MS. Set Handover Scope to FREE(Free).

5.

Check messages traced in step 2. Then, check whether the interval between the DATA REQ message and the ERROR INDication message is consistent with the values of N200 and T200 set in the activation procedure. The DATA REQ message contains the Handover command message, which is transmitted over the Um interface. Expected result: The interval of the messages for the full-rate channel is the same as the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Full Rate and T200 FACCH/Full Rate. The interval of the messages for the half-rate channel is the same as the product of values of N200 of FACCH/Half Rate and T200 FACCH/Half Rate.

l


----End

Example //Activating the link error indication procedure of Radio Link Management SET GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, T200SDCCH=1, T200FACCHF=1, T200FACCHH=1, T200SACCT0=1, T200SACCH3=1, T200SACCHS=1, T200SDCCH3=1; //Verifying the link error indication procedure of Radio Link Management LST GCELLCCTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


107



14

Configuring Faulty Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the OML detection function in the optional feature MRFD-210304 Faulty Management.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – All 3900 series base stations except BTS3900B support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – TDM transmission is applied between the BSC and the BTS.

Context OML detection enables operators to determine whether the E1 link connection between the BSC and the BTS is correct immediately after the link is set up, facilitating fault locating and troubleshooting. In IP over E1 networking mode, OML detection is unnecessary because the BSC uses the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of a BTS to identify a BTS or sends transmission configuration to a BTS. If the link connection between the BSC and the BTS is incorrect, extended signaling links (ESLs) or operation and maintenance links (OMLs) fail to be set up.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Deactivate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the BTS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLDETECT (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > BTS OML Timeslot Detection Function; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set OMLDETECTSWITCH to CONCHK(Signaling link check) and Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108



BTSBARCODE to the ESN of the target BTS, that is, the bar code of the BBU backplane. 3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Activate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the BTS.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLDETECT. In this step, set OMLDETECTSWITCH to CONCHK(Signaling link check) and BTSBARCODE to the ESN which is of a non-target BTS.

2.

Log in to the LMT and then choose Alarm/Event > Browse Alarm/Event, check whether the ALM-21821 Site Signaling Link Connection Mismatch is generated on the alarm console. Expected result: The alarm is generated.

l



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLDETECT (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > BTS OML Timeslot Detection Function; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set OMLDETECTSWITCH to OFF(Off).

3.


----End

Example /*Activating OML detection*/ //Deactivating the BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Enabling OML detection SET BTSOMLDETECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, OMLDETECTSWITCH=CONCHK, BTSBARCODE="20"; //Activating the BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; /*Verifing OML detection SET BTSOMLDETECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, OMLDETECTSWITCH=CONCHK, BTSBARCODE="21"; /*Deactivating OML detection*/ //Deactivating the BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Disabling OML detection SET BTSOMLDETECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, OMLDETECTSWITCH=OFF; //Activating the BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


109


15


Configuring BTS Software Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the integrity check function introduced in the basic feature MRFD-210402 BTS Software Management. Other functions involved in the feature do not need to be configured. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The M2000 supports this feature.

Context When software and a configuration file are transmitted between the M2000 and the BSC, the software and file may be damaged because of unstable transmission links or malicious attacks. The integrity check function can check the correctness and integrity of software and configuration files.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn on the BTS software integrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature Verification Switch to ON(On).


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSDIGSIGN to check whether the BTS software integrity protection switch has been turned on. Expected result: Software Digital Signature Verification Switch is set to ON (On).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


110


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSDIGSIGN to turn off the BTS software integrity protection switch. In this step, set Software Digital Signature Verification Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=ON; //Verification procedure DSP BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSDIGSIGN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, DIGSIGNSW=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


111


16


Configuring Combined Cabinets and Cabinet Groups of BTSs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic features GBFD-111501 BTS Combined Cabinet and GBFD-111502 BTS Hybrid Cabinet Group. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The cabinets and cables of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are installed. – The DIP switches of the BTSs in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode are set. NOTE

For details about how to install cabinets, connect cables, and set DIP switches, see the relevant Product Description and Installation Guide contained in customer documents.

– The BTS3012, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the combined-cabinet installation mode. – The BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012III, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900E support the cabinet-group installation mode. l


l


Context l

Combined cabinets – Multiple BTS cabinets of the same type are connected together to serve as one BTS. In this case, the DTRU subrack is enlarged. – The cabinet configured with the DTMU is the basic cabinet, whereas the cabinet not configured with the DTMU is the extension cabinet. The extension cabinet shares the DTMU with the basic cabinet. – Figure 16-1 shows the connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


112



Figure 16-1 Connections of the BTS3012 combined cabinets

l

Cabinet groups – Multiple groups of compatible combined cabinets are connected together to serve as one BTS. In this case, the service capacity of each site is increased. The first cabinet of each cabinet group is the basic cabinet. – A cabinet group can be one basic cabinet or two combined cabinets. The cabinet group that provides synchronization clock signals is called basic cabinet group. Other cabinet groups are called extension cabinet groups. The basic cabinet of each cabinet group can be configured with one or two DTMUs. – Figure 16-2 shows the connections of the BTS3012 cabinets groups.

Figure 16-2 Connections of BTS3012 cabinet groups

l

The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. Two combined cabinets of the BTS3012 support 24 carriers, and three cabinet groups support 72 TRXs.

l

Combined cabinets and cabinet groups are distinguished in cabinet numbers. In cabinet group mode, three consecutive combined cabinets form one cabinet group. The basic cabinet group is comprised of cabinets 0 to 2, extension cabinet group 1 is comprised of cabinets 3 to 5, and extension cabinet group 2 is comprised of cabinets 6 to 8. The BTS3012 supports a maximum of two combined cabinets and three cabinet groups. The corresponding cabinet numbers are as follows: – Basic cabinet group: 0 and 1 – Extension cabinet group 1: 3 and 4 – Extension cabinet group 2: 6 and 7

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


113



Procedure l

Activation procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet. NOTE

In combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode, the principles for adding Cabinet No. are as follows: l If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, Cabinet No. is 0 and 1. l If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, Cabinet No. is 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, and 7.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add TRX boards. NOTE

If the BTS3012 does not support the separated mode, the QTRU cannot be configured.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add GSM cells.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add cell frequencies.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add cell signaling point relation.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind cells to the BTS.

8.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add TRXs for a cell.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards 11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX device attributes. 12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS to configure idle timeslots. NOTE

During the processing of PS services, perform step 8, step 11, and step 12.

13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to add the antenna board. 14. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT to configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS. 15. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSANTFEEDERBRD to modify the frequency band attributes of BTS antennas. 16. Repeat Step 2 through Step 15 to add and configure the extension cabinet and information about the cabinet according to the principles for adding Cabinet No. in combined-cabinet and cabinet-group mode. NOTE

If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, addition of cells for the extension cabinet is not required. Therefore, you do not need to repeat Step 4 through Step 8.

17. Add the BTS connection according to the type of BTS connection. – If the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet mode, go to Step 18. – If the BTS3012 is in cabinet-group mode, go to Step 19. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


114



18. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the basic cabinet to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. 19. Add the connection links from the basic cabinet group to the BSC, and add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the basic cabinet group or the BSC. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the basic cabinet group to the BSC, and then set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the basic cabinet group or the BSC – If the extension cabinet groups connect to the basic cabinet group, set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to BTS. In addition, set the following parameters related to the BTSs in extension cabinet groups: Dest Father Index Type (Not required on the CME), Dest Father BTS Index (Not required on the CME), and Dest Father BTS Port No.. – If the extension cabinet groups connect to the BSC, set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to BSC. In addition, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No.. 20. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS. l

Verification procedure 1.

Click Device Maintenance on the LMT. The Device Maintenance tab page is displayed.

2.

Click the added BTSs in Activation Procedures in Device Navigation Tree. The corresponding device panels are displayed on BTS Device Panel.

3.

Select the main and extension cabinets in the Rack No. drop-down list. Then, check the board status on BTS Device Panel. – If the board status is Normal, the BTS3012 is in combined-cabinet and cabinetgroup mode. – If the board status is Faulty, clear the alarm according to handling suggestions provided in the BSC6900 Alarm Reference.

l

Deactivation procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate a BTS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS to delete a BTS.

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Add a BTS ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3012_TDM", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, BTSDESC="3012", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM; //Add a cabinet ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3012; //Add TRX boards ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=TRU, SRN=1, SN=0; //Add GSM cells ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="10",

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


115



LAC=10, CI=11, IUOTP=Normal_cell; //Add cell frequencies ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=2; //Add cell signaling point relation ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPC=153; //Bind cells to the BTS ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSID=9; //Set the basic GPRS attributes of 2G cells SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO; //Add TRXs for a cell ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TRXID=0, FREQ=1,ISMAINBCCH=YES; //Bind logical TRXs to the channels on TRX boards ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0; //Set TRX device attributes SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8; //Add the extension cabinet of the basic cabinet group ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=1, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3012; //Add the basic cabinet of the extension cabinet group ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=3, SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3012; //Configure idle timeslots SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20; //Add the antenna board ADD BTSANTFEEDERBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=0, AORB=A; //Configure the connection relation of antennas of the BTS SET BTSANTFEEDERCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, SRN=3, SN=4, BT=DDPM_DDPU, DTRX=1, DTRXSRN=1, DTRXSN=0, DTRXPN=1,AORB=B; //Add the connection links from the basic cabinet group to the BSC ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=1; //Add the connection links from the extension cabinet groups to the basic cabinet group ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=8, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=9, FPN=1; //activate a BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ACTTYPE=ACTALL; //Deactivation procedure //Deactivate a BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Delete a BTS RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


116


17


Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – If the Abis or A interface uses IP transmission, switches can be used to interconnect the IP interface boards of two BSCs. If the Abis or A interface does not use IP transmission, a pair of IP interface boards need to be configured for each BSC.

l


l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context IP-based inter-BSC interconnection enables operators to use IP networks to interconnect the BSCs so that the BSCs can communicate with each other directly. Inter-BSC interconnection is used for exchanging information between BSCs in scenarios such as an inter-BSC softsynchronized network or interference-based channel allocation (IBCA). Only signaling can be exchanged over inter-BSC interconnection.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add a pair of IP interface boards.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add a device IP address. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Ethernet Port IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add a port IP address.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an IP route. In this step, set Destination IP address to the port IP address of the peer board (that is, the port IP address of the IP interface board at the peer BSC).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an OSP.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add a DSP.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an M3UA local entity.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an M3UA destination entity.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an M3UA link set.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an M3UA route. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an SCTP link. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) at the current BSC to add an M3UA link. After this command is executed, the configuration of links at the current BSC is complete. 13. Repeat Step 1 through Step 12 to configure the links at the peer BSC. l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC, and verify that the value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.


----End

Example //Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


118



//(Optional) Adding a pair of IP interface boards ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=0; ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=XPU, BRDTYPE=XPUa, LGCAPPTYPE=RGCP, SN=1; //Adding a device IP address for the current BSC ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.10.10.216"; //Adding a port IP address for the current BSC ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=24, PN=1, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="2.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Adding an IP route for the current BSC ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=24, DSTIP="10.10.10.217", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="2.2.2.1", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="IPRT"; //Adding an OSP for the current BSC ADD OPC: NAME="BSC216", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=H'A1; //Adding a DSP for the current BSC ADD N7DPC: NAME="BSC217", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=H'B1, DPCT=IUR_G, BEARTYPE=M3UA; //Adding an M3UA local entity ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0, NAME="BSC216"; //Adding an M3UA destination entity ADD M3DE: DENO=98, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=0, NAME="BSC217"; //Adding an M3UA link set ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=98, NAME="T0217"; //Adding an M3UA route ADD M3RT: DENO=98, SIGLKSX=1, PRIORITY=0, NAME="TO217"; //Adding an SCTP link ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, DSCP=48, LOCPN=60000, LOCIP1="10.10.10.216", PEERIP1="10.10.10.217", PEERPN=2905, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; //Adding an M3UA link ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, PRIORITY=0, NAME="TO217";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


119



18

Configuring Link Aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E. – This feature is only supported on BSC6900.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration cannot support IP PM.

l


l

Others – This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches and base stations. – This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3) networking.

Context This feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provides high bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports, and improves the transmission reliability.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a device IP address to a board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group. In Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120



this step, set the Trunk group work mode to LOAD_SHARING(Load sharing), set the Aggregation Mode to STATIC_LACP when the peer end supports the LACP protocol or set the Aggregation Mode to MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does not support the LACP protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a specified physical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group. NOTE

If the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this step until all the required physical ports are configured.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address to an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network (VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to add.

– Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a device IP address to an Ethernet port. In this step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk).

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk > Ethernet Trunk Member; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added, run this command for each port you want to add.

Verification Procedure – Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link aggregation group is available. NOTE

Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2.

Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IP address for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP address of the peer NE to 16.16.16.2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communication between the local and peer ends.


121


18 Configuring Link Aggregation NOTE

Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packet loss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.

– Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB.

l

1.

Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

2.

Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a member port of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IP address from an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operations as prompted.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.

– Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB. 1.

Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a device IP address.

2.

Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.

----End

Example //Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900 ADD DEVIP: SRN=2, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101; ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102; ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1", MASK="255.255.255.0"; /Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB //Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet port ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation group ADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0; ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0, PRI=255, FLAG=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


122



//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900 //Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groups RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0; RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2; //Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB //Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet port RMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24"; //Removing an Ethernet link aggregation group RMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


123


19


Configuring Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117804 Intelligent Shutdown of TRX Due to PSU Failure.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The following types of BTSs support the feature: the DBS3900, BTS3900, and BTS3900A

l


l


Context If a BTS uses an AC power input and the power switch unit (PSU) is faulty, the power amplifiers of some TRXs are shut down to reduce the power demand of the BTS to ensure the normal operation of the BTS.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > PSU Fault Shutdown Of TRX Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameters related to TRX shutdown of the PSU board. In this step. – Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES). – Set Tran. Cabinet Configured according to actual requirements. – Set Service Priority Policy to GSM_PRIOR. – GSM Multi Carrier BTS Standard does not need to be set.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPSUFP to query the parameters related to TRX shutdown when the PSUs are faulty in the corresponding site. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124



Expected result: – The value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled queried in step 2 is YES. – The value of Tran. Cabinet Configured queried in step 2 is the same as that set in step 1. – The value of Service Priority Policy queried in step 2 is GSM_PRIOR.

l

2.

Remove some PSUs of the site. Ensure that the remaining PSUs and the DCDU cannot supply power to all the TRXs at the site but can supply power to other equipment.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status of all TRXs at the entire site. In this step, set Object Type to SITE. Expected result: the status of some TRXs is Enabled and that of some others is Disabled. The BTS works properly and there is no call drops due to insufficient power supply.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSPSUFP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > PSU Fault Shutdown Of TRX Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO). Expected result: Some TRXs do not automatically shut themselves down when PSU faults occur.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, SRVPRIPOLICY=GSM_PRIOR; //Verification procedure LST BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID, DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=SITE, //Deactivation procedure SET BTSPSUFP: IDTYPE=BYID,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=YES, ISTRANCABCON=CONFIG, BTSID=0; IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; BTSID=0, CFGFLAG=NO;


125


20


Configuring Call-Based Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511003 Call-Based Flow Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context In cases of emergencies or disasters, a large number of fixed telephones or cell phones from external networks request to reach the emergency or disaster center. This causes considerable increase in the mobile terminated services and also causes heavy traffic in the system. This feature identifies mobile originated call (MOCs) and mobile terminated calls (MTCs) by different flags and protects either MOCs or MTCs from the effects of flow control. It also allows telecom operators to decide whether to discard signaling of MOCs or MTCs using flow control, thereby keeping the system load within a normal level.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MOC Access CPU Rate to be greater than MTC Access CPU Rate but less than Share in CPU Rate. NOTE

When the value of MOC Access CPU Rate is greater than that of MTC Access CPU Rate, the call-based flow control is triggered, and flow control is preferentially implemented on MTCs.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


126



1.

l

Retrieve the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests (MOC) and the counter L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests (MTC) on the M2000. Expected result: The value of the counter L3189A: Discarded Channel Requests (MOC) is smaller than that of the counter L3189B: Discarded Channel Requests (MTC).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MOC Access CPU Rate to a value that is smaller than or equal to the value of MTC Access CPU Rate.

----End

Example //Activating Call-Based Flow Control SET BSCFCPARA: SHAREINCPURATE=50, MOCACCESSCPURATE=51, MTCACCESSCPURATE=52; //Deactivating Call-Based Flow Control SET BSCFCPARA: MOCACCESSCPURATE=52, MTCACCESSCPURATE=51;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


127


21 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report

21

Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110802 Pre-Processing of Measurement Report.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS must support this function.

l


l


Context The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. In this manner, the BSC does not need to process the MRs, reducing the load of the BSC. The CPU load of the board for processing the signaling of the CS services is reduced, and the signaling on the Abis interface is decreased, therefore minimizing the risks of Abis transmission congestion.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Handover Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command to set MR.Preprocessing to BTS_Preprocessing and set Transfer Original MR, Transfer BTS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR as required. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing CS Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128


l

21 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report

2.

Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell.

3.

Verify that the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Handover Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command to set MR.Preprocessing to BSC_Preprocessing.

----End

Example //Activating Pre-Processing of Measurement Report SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, PRIMMESPPT=NO, BSMSPWRLEV=YES, MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps; //Deactivating Pre-Processing of Measurement Report SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BSC_Preprocessing;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


129



22

Configuring System Information Sending

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111101 System Information Sending.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context System information involves main radio network parameters on the Um interface, including network identity parameters, cell selection parameters, system control parameters, and network function parameters. Based on the received system information, an MS can properly select and access a radio network. Then, the MS can fully use various services provided by the network and well cooperate with the network.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure neighboring 3G cells based on the network plan.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130



Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable outgoing inter-RAT handovers and incoming interRAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and InterRAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). l

l


Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages on the Abis interface.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system information. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to Cell Index and the cell index to an appropriate value.

3.

Check the CS domain messages traced on the Abis interface. Expected result: The value of si2-quarter-ind in the System Information Type 3 message is 1. This indicates that the feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating System Information Sending SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=2047, NBR3GNCELLID=5100; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; //Deactivating System Information Sending SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


131



23

Configuring Daylight Saving Time

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-116101 Daylight Saving Time (DST).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context With the DST change rules, you can select the date configuration, week configuration, or hybrid configuration. Date configuration indicates the DST starts from or ends on a certain date in a certain month. Week configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day of a certain week in a certain month. Hybrid configuration indicates that the DST starts from or ends on a certain day after a certain date in a certain month.

Procedure l


l

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TZ (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Information About Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to configure DST. In this step, set DaylightSave to YES(Yes), set Start Type, StartTime, End Type, EndTime, and AdjustMethod as required.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TZ command to check whether DaylightSave is set to YES.

2.

As it was daylight saving time, the time with sign DST in MML, Alarms, and log reports shows the feature has been active, such as 2011-07-01 15:50:25 DST.

Deactivation Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TZ (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Information About Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time; CME batch modification center: not supported) command. In this step, set DaylightSave to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Daylight Saving Time SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=YES, SM=WEEK, SMONTH=MAR, SWSEQ=LAST, SWEEK=SUN, ST=02&00&00, EM=WEEK, EMONTH=OCT, EWSEQ=LAST, EWEEK=SUN, ET=03&00&00, TO=60; //Deactivating Daylight Saving Time SET TZ: ZONET=GMT-0800, DST=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


133



24

Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113001 SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – This feature does not need to be configured when PCU is inner. – This feature needs to be configured when PCU is outer. – None.

Context When the number of users in a cell increases substantially, some users may not be able to access the network because they cannot obtain SDCCHs. In this case, some TCHs need to be converted to SDCCHs. When TCHs are not sufficient enough to meet requirements of channel conversion, dynamic PDCHs are converted to SDCCHs to ensure that all the users can access the network. When the traffic load decreases, the TCHs and dynamic PDCHs used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs to increase system capacity. When SDCCHs are insufficient, channels are converted to SDCCHs in the following sequence: TCHs on the BCCH frequency band, TCHs not on the BCCH frequency band, and dynamic PDCHs.

Procedure l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Activation Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to SDCCH Allowed to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum, TCH Minimum Recovery Time, and Num of TSs Convertible to SDCCHs per TRX to appropriate values. NOTE

When TCHs on the BCCH frequency band are insufficient, set Dynamically Adjust InterFreq Band SDCCH to YES(Yes) as required.

3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Maximum Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to appropriate values.


Monitor Channel Status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status. As all the channels are occlusive except BCCH.

l

1.

The value of Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 is not smaller than the number of configured SDCCH channel, and make a CS call in the cell. Expected result: A TCH is converted to an SDCCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Maximum Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100 and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to 0.

3.

Perform PS services in the cell. Expected result: All TCHFs are converted to PDCHs.

4.

Make another CS call in the cell. Expected result: A dynamic PDCH is converted to an SDCCH.

5.

Enable the cell to remain in the idle state for two minutes. The minimum time of SDCCHs convert back to TCHs is 120 seconds. Expected result: The two channels used as SDCCHs are converted back to TCHs.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed and Dynamic PDCH Conversion to SDCCH Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=YES, PDCH2SDEN=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


135



SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, IDLESDTHRES=8, CELLMAXSD=100, MINRESTIMETCH=60; SET GCELLPSCHM: MAXPDCHRATE=30, DYNCHTRANRESLEV=2; //Deactivating SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, SDDYN=NO, PDCH2SDEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


136



25

Configuring Cell Frequency Scan

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-112401 Cell Frequency Scan. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context

CAUTION Cell frequency scan has the following impacts on other features: l Cell frequency scan occupies an idle TCH. l Cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an RF hopping loopback test is performed. l The cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an idle frame test is performed.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLFREQSCAN command to configure cell frequency scan. NOTE

No restriction is imposed on the number of commands in the batch processing file when the commands are processed in batches. In addition, 50 commands are executed per 30 seconds in sequence. Therefore, Duration cannot be set to a very small value. Otherwise, the execution of the commands cannot be completed in the specified duration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


137


l



l

Using WEBLMT, cell frequency scan is queryed.


This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Configure cell frequency scan SET GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STRTM=17&06&07, TIME=5, FREQBAND=E-GSM900, FREQLST_E900=0&975&1023; //Query the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0 LST GCELLFREQSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


138


26


Configuring Signaling Transport Point (STP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111806 Signaling Transport Point (STP).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The XPUa board is configured.

l


l


l

Others – The OPC is configured. – The physical layer and the data link layer on the A interface are configured. – The CN supports this feature.

Context According to the requirements of the operator, the BSC can be connected to the MSC directly or through STP. To use an MGW as an STP, ensure that the MGW supports MTP3/M3UA signaling transfer.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – TDM transmission

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139



DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MGW as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP function switch, Link Bear type to MTP3, and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 link set. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 link to the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MSC as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, Link Bear type to MTP3, and Adjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT).

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a CN node. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6.

– IP transmission

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Ethernet Port IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address for an Ethernet port or Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address for a trunk group.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a device IP address for a board.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA local entity. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140



4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MGW as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MGW, DSP type to STP function switch, Link Bear type to M3UA, and Adjacent flag to YES(DIRECT_CONNECT).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 3, DSP index to the DSP index set in 5.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA signaling link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 6.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 7, and set Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. to the Subrack No., Slot No., and SCTP link No. set in 4.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 7.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MSC as the destination signaling point. In this step, set DSP code[Whole Number] to the signaling point code of the MSC, DSP type to A, Link Bear type to M3UA, and Adjacent flag to NO(NO_DIRECT_CONNECT). 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to the M3UA Local entity No. set in 3, DSP index to the DSP index set in 10. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 11 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 7. l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to check that SCCP DSP state is set to Accessible. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141


l


Deactivation Procedure – TDM transmission 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the CN node.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the DPC of the MSC.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the DSP index set in 2 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MTP3 link from the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 3.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MTP3 link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the SIGLKSX set in 3.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the DPC of the MGW.

– IP transmission

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 11 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 7.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 11.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the DPC of the MSC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142



4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 6 and Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 7.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA link from the link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the Signalling link set index set in 7.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA signaling link set. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 6.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the Destination entity No. set in 6.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the DPC of the MGW.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SCTP link.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the M3UA local entity. 11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV DEVIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the device IP address from the board. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ETHIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Ethernet Port IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP address from the Ethernet port or Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP address from the trunk group. ----End

Example //Activating Signaling Transport Point (STP) //TDM transmission ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=260; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


143



ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=1, NAME="MGWMTP3LKS"; ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1, SRN=1, SN=0, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS16-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=1, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS16-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNKS1_1"; ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWRT"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3, NEIGHBOR=NO; ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCRT"; ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=2, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="share", CNID=2, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM; //IP transmission ADD ETHIP: SRN=1, SN=0, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=1, SN=0, TRKN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="9.9.9.9", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD DEVIP: SRN=1, SN=0, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; ADD M3LE: LENO=1, SPX=1, ENTITYT= M3UA_IPSP, NAME="LOCALBSC"; ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="172.17.15.253", PEERIP1="172.17.12.253", PEERPN=2905, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MGW", DPX=1, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=270, DPCT=STP, BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=YES; ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=1, DPX=1, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGW"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DENO=1, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MGWLKS"; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100, NAME="MGWLNK"; ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MGWM3RT"; ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=280, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA, NEIGHBOR=NO; ADD M3DE: DENO=2, LENO=1, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="MSCM3DE"; ADD M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MSCM3RT"; //Verifying Signaling Transport Point (STP) DSP N7DPC:; //Deactivating Signaling Transport Point (STP) //TDM transmission RMV GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1; RMV MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1; RMV N7DPC: DPX=2; RMV MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1; RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=1; RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1; RMV N7DPC: DPX=1; //IP transmission RMV M3RT: DENO=2, SIGLKSX=1; RMV M3DE: DENO=2; RMV N7DPC: DPX=2; RMV M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=1; RMV M3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGLNKID=1; RMV M3LKS: SIGLKSX=1; RMV M3DE: DENO=1; RMV N7DPC: DPX=1; RMV SCTPLNK: SRN=1, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=100; RMV M3LE: LENO=1; RMV DEVIP: IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; RMV ETHIP: SRN=1, SN=0, PN=0, IPINDEX=0; RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=1, SN=0, TRKN=0, IPINDEX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


144


27

27 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111802 14-Digit Signaling Point Code.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – The CN supports this feature.

Context Huawei GBSS can be connected to the MSC through the No.7 signaling system. The No.7 signaling system adopts the coding scheme in the 14-bit format. The signaling point code consists of three sub-fields: sub-field for identifying the world geographical zone where the network is located; sub-field for identifying the geographical area or network within a specific world zone; sub-field for identifying the signaling point within a specific geographical area or network.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


At a newly deployed site, Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set OSP code bits to BIT14(BIT14).

2.

If the OSPs in non-14-bit format have been configured, Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove all the OSPs, and then proceed with Step 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145


27 Configuring 14-Digit Signaling Point Code NOTE

A Signaling Point Code (SPC) must be unique in the signaling network and cannot be 0.BSC6900 does not support configuration of OSPs with different number of bits.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPC to check that OSPs are in the 14-bit format.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove all configured OSPs.

----End

Example //Activating 14-Digit Signaling Point Code ADD OPC: NAME="test", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=H'2cc7; //Verifying 14-Digit Signaling Point Code LST OPC:; //Deactivating 14-Digit Signaling Point Code RMV OPC: SPX=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


146


28


Configuring Discontinuous Reception (DRX)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-114802 Discontinuous Reception (DRX).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not depend on the hardware.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCHs have been configured in the test cell.

Context DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS. Each MS is mapped to a paging group, and each paging group is mapped to a paging sub-channel in the serving cell. In idle mode, the MS detects the paging messages broadcast by the system only on the mapped paging sub-channel. The MS blocks other paging sub-channels by powering off hardware, such as the receiver. This also saves power. The configuration of a BTS3012 in TDM mode is taken as an example.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Idle Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 2 and MultiFrames in a Cycle on the Paging CH to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to forcibly send the system message to the test cell.

2.

Enable an Abis Interface CS Trace task, then select RSL in the test cell.

3.

Check the messages with the type of BCCH Information over the Abis interface for the one whose system-info-type is system-information-3. In the IE controlchannel-description of this message, if bs-ag-blks-res (CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH) is 2 and bs-pa-mfrms (Multi-Frames in a Cycle on the Paging CH) is 0, the system message is correct.

4.

Use a MS to make a call to another MS (assume that the IMSI of the called MS is "M"), and ensure that the call is set up successfully.

5.

Check the CS message of the Abis Cell Pack Page Command type over the Abis interface. If the IE cs-paging-group in this message is M%1000%14%14, the paging group contained in the paging message is consistent with the settings in the system message. In this case, the MS can implement DRX by monitoring the paging subchannel. NOTE

"%" in M%1000%14%14 indicates the MOD operation, and the group number is in decimal format.

l


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, BSAGBLKSRES=2, BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD; //Verification procedure SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


148


29


Configuring BTS Power Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-111601 BTS Power Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context BTS power management enables the BTS to allocate load dynamically based on the actual power situation, thereby prolonging the working time of the BTS. Power management is applicable to the following scenarios: l

No mains supply – Soft shutdown: The BTS automatically blocks all TCH TRXs except the BCCH TRX. – Hard shutdown: When the battery capacity drops to a predefined threshold value, the BTS automatically shuts down all TRXs.

l

Unfavorable operating environment – When the temperature inside a BTS cabinet exceeds a predefined threshold value, the BTS shuts down PAs for some TRXs. – When critical faults occur on a TRX, for example, the VSWR value far exceeds the limit, the BTS shuts down the TRX.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Right click PMU Board > Properties > APMU/PMU(BTS That Support SingleRAN) Board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149



supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES (YES) and power management parameters to appropriate values. l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAPMUBP to query the value of Board Parameter Configuration Enabled. Expected result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled is set to YES, and power management parameters are set based on configurations.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Right click PMU Board > Properties > APMU/PMU(BTS That Support SingleRAN) Board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

----End

Example //Activating BTS Power Management SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, PTYPE=APM30, HTSDF=ENABLE; //Verifying BTS Power Management LST BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0; //Deactivating BTS Power Management SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


150


30


Configuring Enhanced Power Control Algorithm

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-level counters can be retrieved on the M2000.

Context Enhanced power control algorithm refers to HUAWEI II power control algorithm. Power control is a process in which the BSS controls MS or BTS transmit power. Without affecting the speech quality, power control reduces the interference in the entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control mainly applies to the network with tight frequency reuse, high traffic volume, or strong interference. In the GSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can also be performed on each MS.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR2 (Power control II). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151


l


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control II of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MR. Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes). In addition, adjust Huawei II power control parameters or set them to their default values.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband frequency hopping. In this step, set PWRC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw to YES(Yes).


Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies.

2.

Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000. Table 30-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI II power control Measurement Unit

Counter Name

Measurement of Power Control Messages in MR per Cell

Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%) Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%) Mean Strength of Downlink Signals Mean Strength of Uplink Signals Mean Quality of Downlink Signals Mean Quality of Uplink Signals

Interference Band Measurement per TRX

Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 2

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


152



Measurement Unit

Counter Name Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 5

Receive Quality Measurement per TRX

Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


153



Measurement Unit

Counter Name Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


154



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to NO(No).

4.

Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1.

5.

Check the counters for one hour and save them.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set UL PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed of cell 0 and cell 1 to YES(Yes).

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2. In this step, set MR. Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes), and set AMR MR. Compensation Allowed to YES(Yes) for cell 0 and cell 1.

9.


10. Check the counters for one hour and save them. 11. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 10 and Step 5. Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in Step 10 is smaller than that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to interference band, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than that obtained in Step 5. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 10 is larger than that obtained in Step 5. l


----End

Example //Activating HUAWEI II Power Control Algorithm SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLSW=PWR2; SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MRCOMPREG=YES, AMRMRCOMPREG=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


155


31


Configuring DTMF Downlink Message Filter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – A over TDM transmission is used.

Context

CAUTION After this feature is configured, the processing capability of DSPs is decreased by about 10%. This feature shields the downlink DTMF messages on the user plane and control plane of the A interface. In this case, after the call is set up, the called cell phone will not receive DTMF signals. By shielding downlink DTMF signals, this feature enhances the GBSS network security.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156



center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Downlink DTMF Signaling Processing Allowed set to OPEN(Open). l

l


Use an MS to make a call to another MS. During the call, press a key on either MS. Expected result: The peer end cannot hear clear DTMF tones but silence.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA with DLDTMFPRCSW set to CLOSE(Close).

3.

Repeat Step 1. Expected result: The peer end hears clear DTMF tones.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Downlink DTMF Signaling Processing Allowed set to CLOSE(Close).

----End

Example //Activating DTMF downlink message filter SET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=OPEN; //Deactivating DTMF downlink message filter SET OTHSOFTPARA: DLDTMFPRCSW=CLOSE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


157



32

Configuring High Speed Signaling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115201 High Speed Signaling.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l

Dependency on License – The license for this feature is activated.

l

Other prerequisites – The MSC supports high-speed signaling. – TDM transmission is applied over the A interface. – The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. – The OPC and DPC are configured.

Context This feature is characterized by: l

High capacity The BSC is not limited by the capacity of a single signaling point when narrowband signaling is used. This feature not only meets the requirements for signaling link bandwidth of large capacity processing capability but also saves operators' signaling resources and simplifies network topology.

l

Flexible bandwidth configuration The high-speed signaling link bandwidth is N x 64 kbit/s. Where, N ranges from 1 to 31. Operators can flexibly configure the high-speed signaling link bandwidth based on the traffic volume to reduce the transmission cost.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Short delay Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158



High-speed signaling links carry signaling data using multiple timeslots. This reduces the transmission delay of signaling data over the A interface especially in off-peak hours, reducing the call setup duration. Generally, high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission. Satellite transmission does not use high-speed signaling links.

WARNING Reconfiguring the signaling link over the A interface will disrupt the services of the BSC6900. Therefore, perform the operation when the traffic is light, for example, in the early morning. The whole process (including board restart) takes about 10 minutes.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > A Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link set.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DSP bear type to MTP2(MTP2) and Link rate type to 2M(2Mbit/s). NOTE

In BM/TC separated mode where the TCS is configured remotely, you are advised to set Ater Mask of the MTP3 signaling links on the main TCS to values rather than TS1.

4.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST MTP3LNK to query the information about the MTP3 signaling link. Expected result: The value of Link rate type is 2Mbit/s.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Signalling link set index and Signalling link code.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DSP index and Signalling link set index. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Signalling link set index.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AE1T1 (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > A Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an E1/T1 on the A interface.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Configuring an E1/T1 over the A Interface ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=0; //Configuring an MTP3 signaling link set ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="123"; //Configuring an MTP3 signaling link ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1 1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1 &TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, MTP2LNKN=1, LKTATE=2M, NAME="123"; //Adding an MTP3 signaling route ADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="111"; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Removing an MTP3 signaling link RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1; //Removing an MTP3 signaling route RMV MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0; //Removing an MTP3 signaling link set RMV MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0; //Removing an E1/T1 over the A interface RMV AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=12, PN=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


160


33


Configuring Guaranteed Emergency Call This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-110521 Guaranteed Emergency Call.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others Prerequisites – The MSC supports the TCH preemption function.

Context The Guaranteed Emergency Call feature is introduced to increase the setup success rate of emergency calls to the greatest extent. Therefore, normal communications are ensured in disaster relief activities. This feature has the following characteristics: l

Emergency calls are preferentially assigned full-rate TCHs (TCHFs) in the immediate assignment phase.

l

The system reserves TCHFs for the MSs making emergency calls.

l

The MSs making emergency calls preempt the channels occupied by low-priority calls.

Without this feature, the TCHs occupied by emergency calls can be preempted by high-priority calls. After this feature is enabled, emergency calls can preempt the TCHs that are occupied by other common calls and can be preempted when there is no idle TCH. Emergency calls, however, cannot preempt the TCHs occupied by other emergency calls.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


161



Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell) to query the value of Priority of Emergency Call. If the value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15, this feature is not activated.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Priority of Emergency Call to an appropriate value, for example, 1.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Max Channel Num Reserved for EC to an appropriate value, for example, 2.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Emergency Call Preemption Permitted to ON(On).

5.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Timer Attributes > Timer Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC to an appropriate value, for example, 15.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of Priority of Emergency Call. Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC to query the value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC. Expected result: The value of Max Channel Num Reserved for EC is 2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD to query the value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted. Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is ON(On).

4.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLTMR to query the value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC. Expected result: The value of Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC is 15.

5.

Use an MS to make an emergency call. All the TCHs in the cell are occupied by common calls and there are no idle TCHs. There exists a call whose priority is lower than the priority of the emergency call and the channel resources of the call can be preempted. Expected result: A call in the cell is released because its resources are preempted.

6.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

The MS makes the emergency call successfully. An SDCCH is assigned in the immediate assignment phase and a TCHF is assigned in the assignment phase. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Priority of Emergency Call to 15.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell) to query the value of Priority of Emergency Call. Expected result: The value of Priority of Emergency Call is 15.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Emergency Call Preemption Permitted to OFF(Off).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell) to query the value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted. Expected result: The value of Emergency Call Preemption Permitted is OFF (Off).

----End

Example //Activating Guaranteed Emergency Call LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1; SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=1; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RSVCHMFORECNUM=2; SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=ON; SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, WAITRESVCHANREFRESHTIMER=15; //Deactivating Guaranteed Emergency Call SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, EMCPRILV=15; LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1; SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PREEMPTIONPERMIT=OFF; LST GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CELLID=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


163


34


Configuring License Control for Urgency This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511001 License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context

CAUTION This feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for example, in a disaster. This function can be performed only three times for each R version and it is valid only in seven days since it is enabled. After this feature is enabled, the network capacity can reach the maximum supported by the hardware.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Bfd Protocol Switch to ON(ON). Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to check the resource items of the license. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164



The returned result shows that all the values of the resource items reach the maximum.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of Grace Protection Period Switch State. Expected result: In the returned result, there are the settings of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days, and Grace Protection Period Switch State is set to ON.

3.

On the next day (later than 1 a.m.) after this feature is enabled, check whether the event EVT-22812 Operation of Maximum License Capacity is reported by the alarm console of BSC6900.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Bfd Protocol Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=ON; /*Deactivation procedure*/ SET LICENSECTRL: SWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


165


35


Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – You are advised to use this feature together with the feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC to which the test cell belongs is connected to the M2000, and cell-level counters can be retrieved on the M2000.

Context Power control is a process in which the BSS controls MS or BTS transmit power. Without affecting the speech quality, power control reduces the interference in the entire network and decreases power consumption. Power control mainly applies to the network with tight frequency reuse, high traffic volume, or strong interference. In the GSM network, power control can be separately performed on the uplink and downlink. It can also be performed on each MS. HUAWEI III power control algorithm enhances and optimizes the GBFD-110703 Enhanced Power Control Algorithm feature in terms of the filtering algorithm, interpolation of the measurement report, power control decision algorithm, and flexibility of threshold configuration.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166



of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both UL PC Allowed and DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR3 (Power control III).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), set Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR to ON(Allowed), and set III Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes). NOTE

l Allow III Power Control For AMR is set toOFF(Not Allowed) by default, Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR is set to ON(Allowed) by default. l By default, PC Step Calculation Optimization is set to NO (No). It can be set to YES (Yes) as required to optimize the results of power control. l Power control parameters need to be adjusted based on site requirements.

l

4.

Optional: To improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PWRC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw to YES(Yes).

5.

Optional: To activate 0.2 dB Power Control, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 0.2dB Power Control Enable to YES(Yes) and set 0.2 dB Power Control Optimization to ON(On).


Configure two cells, cell 0 and cell 1, on the BSC6900 and set the frequencies of the BCCH TRXs of the two cells as non co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies while the frequencies of the non-BCCH TRXs as co-channel or adjacent-channel frequencies.

2.

Retrieve the following counters related to cell 0 on the M2000. Table 35-1 Counters for verifying HUAWEI III power control

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Measurement Unit

Counter Name

Measurement of Power Control Messages in MR per Cell

Average MS Power Level of Non-AMR Call Average BTS Power Level of Non-AMR Call


167



Measurement Unit

Counter Name Ratio of Maximum Downlink Power Duration (%) Ratio of Maximum Uplink Power Duration (%) Mean Strength of Downlink Signals Mean Strength of Uplink Signals Mean Quality of Downlink Signals Mean Quality of Uplink Signals

Interference Band Measurement per TRX

Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of SDCCHs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHFs in Interference Band 5 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 1 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 2 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 3 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 4 Mean Number of TCHHs in Interference Band 5

Receive Quality Measurement per TRX

Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


168



Measurement Unit

Counter Name Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Uplink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


169



Measurement Unit

Counter Name Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 1) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 2) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 3) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 4) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 5) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 6) Number of MRs on Downlink TCHH (Mean Receive Quality Rank 7)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR2(Power control II).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1. Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control II.

5.


6.

Check the counters for one hour and save them.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC. In this step, set Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1 to PWR3(Power control III).

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC to query the setting of Power Control Switch of cell 0 and cell 1. Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to Power control III.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3. In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed), and set Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR to ON(Allowed) for cell 0 and cell 1.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings of Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For NonAMR for cell 0 and cell 1. Expected result: Both Allow III Power Control For AMR and Allow III Power Control For Non-AMR are set to ON(Allowed). 11. Initiate a large number of calls in cell 0 and cell 1. 12. Check the counters for one hour and save them. 13. Compare the measured counter results obtained from Step 12 and Step 6. Expected result: For the counters related to power level, the power level obtained in Step 12 is smaller than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to interference Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


170



bands, the proportion of channels in low interference bands, which is obtained in Step 12, is greater than that obtained in Step 6. For the counters related to receive quality, the value of a counter with lower quality rank obtained in Step 12 is greater than that obtained in Step 6. 14. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWR3 to query the settings of 0.2dB Power Control Enable and 0.2 dB Power Control Optimization of cell 0 and cell 1. Expected result: 0.2dB Power Control Enable is set to YES(Yes) and 0.2 dB Power Control Optimization is set to ON(On). 15. Optional: Start tracing CS messages of a single MS in cell 0, and use the MS to initiate a call. 16. Optional: Check the tracing result. Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. In a BS Power Control message, the value of fine-pwr-ctrl is 1, and the value of finepwr-ctrl-value is not the maximum value. In addition, the 0.2 dB power level is reported in the measurement report. The BSC6900 sends BS Power Control messages to the BTS even if the 0.2 dB power control steps in two BS Power Control messages are different. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Switch to PWR2 (Power control II).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell) to query the setting of Power Control Switch. Expected result: Power Control Switch is set to PWR2(Power control II).

3.

Optional: To deactivate the function of optimizing handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PWRC to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw to NO(No).

4.

Optional: To deactivate 0.2 dB Power Control, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 0.2dB Power Control Enable to NO(No) and set 0.2 dB Power Control Optimization to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLSW=PWR3;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


171



SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2,PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES, AMRCALLPCALLOWED=ON, NONAMRCALLPCALLOWED=ON, PCSTEPOPT=YES; //Deactivating HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLSW=PWR2; SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=NO, AMRCALLPCALLOWED=OFF, NONAMRCALLPCALLOWED=OFF, PCSTEPOPT=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


172


36

36 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface

Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113904 Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context l

If terrestrial lines between the BSC and the external PCU cannot be installed or the installation cost of the terrestrial lines is high, satellite transmission can be deployed on the Pb interface.

l

The transmission delay over the G-Abis interface of a satellite-capable cell is longer than that over the G-Abis interface of an ordinary cell. If the same amount of data is transmitted by these two types of cell, it takes longer time for the satellite-capable cell to wait for a response message from the MS. Therefore, the transmission performance of a satellitecapable cell is worse than that of an ordinary cell. Under the condition that the average downlink rate of an MS is not affected, the network reduces the maximum number of downlink PDCHs allocated to the MS so that the time required for the RLC sending window to overflow is prolonged.

l


Procedure 1.

Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SATEL(Satellite Transmission).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


173


36 Configuring the satellite transmission on the Pb interface NOTE

The value of Start PCIC must be a multiple of 128. After satellite transmission is applied on the Pb E1 link, the Pb signaling link automatically switches to the satellite transmission mode accordingly.

2.

Configure satellite transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS. – Run the mt gcell deactive command to deactivate a cell. – Run the pcu add sattrans yes command to configure satellite transmission for the cell. – Run the mt gcell active command to activate the cell.

3. l

l

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set T3168 to 2000ms(2000ms), T3192 to 0ms(0ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 15.


Run the mt gcell deactive command to deactivate the cell.

2.

Run the pcu add sattrans yes command to configure satellite transmission for the cell.

3.

Run the mt gcell active command to activate the cell.

4.

Run the mt gcell show stat command to verify that the state of the cell is UNBLOCK.

5.

Use the MS to perform PS services. PS services are normally performed.


Disable satellite transmission on the Pb interface on the LMT. – Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PBE1T1. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

2.

Configure terrestrial transmission on the Pb interface through PCU LocalWS. – Run the mt gcell deactive command to deactivate the cell. – Run the pcu set sattrans no command to configure terrestrial transmission for the cell. – Run the mt gcell active command to activate the cell.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set T3168 to 500ms(500ms), T3192 to 500ms(500ms), and BS_CV_MAX to 10.

----End

Example /*Activating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/ ADD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, PCUNO=0, SPCIC=0, TNMODE=SATEL; /*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Pb Interface*/ MOD PBE1T1: SRN=0, SN=20, PN=0, TNMODE=SATEL, OPMODE=MODRANGETS, STARTTS=4, ENDTS=32, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


174



37

Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-113101 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.

l

License – None

l

Dependencies on Running Environment – A built-in PCU is configured. A packet switched (PS) service processing board and the Gb interface board are used.

l

Requirements for Transmission Network – None

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – The mobile station (MS) and core network (CN) supports PS services.

l

Other Prerequisites – A built-in PCU is configured. The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). – The transmission mode for the BTS is configured.

Context l

Type of PDCHs PDCHs are divided into the following types based on the type of services they carry: – Static PDCHs: PDCHs that carry only PS services. – Dynamic PDCHs: Initially speech TCHFs. TCHFs and PDCHs can be converted into each other dynamically.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

PDCH Dynamic Adjustment Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175



Static PDCHs carry only PS services. Dynamic PDCHs are TCHFs when initially configured. They can be converted into PDCHs if there are insufficient PS resources. On the hand, PDCHs can be converted into TCHFs if there are insufficient CS resources. Therefore, PDCH dynamic adjustment enhances the utility of channel resources based on practical needs, reduces the complexity of configuring and maintaining PDCHs, and reduces the impact of improper PDCH configuration on service performance. l

Data Preparation Table 37-1 Configuring a cell that supports PS services Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

GPRS

GPRS

If the operator requires that the cell supports only GPRS services, set this parameter to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

Internal planning

EDGE

EDGE

If the operator requires that the cell supports both GPRS and EDGE services, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), then set this parameter to YES(Yes).

Internal planning

Procedure l


Configure dynamic PDCHs. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CHTYPE to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) for channels to be configured to dynamic PDCHs.

2.

Optional: Activate the PDCH management algorithm optimization function. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with PDCH Management Optimization set to ON(On).

3.

Optional: Activate the GPRS channel priority type auto planning function. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with GPRS Channel Priority Type Auto-Planning set to ON(On). If the cell is not a concentric cell, set Number of EGPRS Normal Channels, Number of EGPRS Priority Channels, and Number of EGPRS Special Channels according to the number of EGPRS normal channels, EGPRS priority channels, and EGPRS special channels configured for the cell. Set Number of EGPRS Special Channels (OL Subcell), EgprsPriChnumInn, and Number of EGPRS Normal Channels (OL Subcell) to 0.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


176



If the cell is a concentric cell, set Number of EGPRS Normal Channels, Number of EGPRS Priority Channels, and Number of EGPRS Special Channels according to the number of EGPRS normal channels, EGPRS priority channels, and EGPRS special channels configured for the underlaid cell. Set Number of EGPRS Special Channels (OL Subcell), EgprsPriChnumInn, and Number of EGPRS Normal Channels (OL Subcell) according to the number of EGPRS normal channels, EGPRS priority channels, and EGPRS special channels configured for the overlaid cell. l


Verify PDCH dynamic adjustment. Use an MS to perform download services. Monitor the channel status on the LMT. The results show that some TCHFs are converted into PDCHs.

2.

Optional: Verify the PDCH management algorithm optimization function. Use several MSs to perform PS services. Monitor the channel status on the LMT. The results show that dynamic PDCHs are distributed on a few TRXs.

3.

Optional: Verify the GPRS channel priority type auto planning function. Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP CHNSTAT to query the status of channels for a cell. The results for PDCH Channel Priority Type shows the optimized PDCH type after auto planning.

l


Verify PDCH dynamic adjustment. None

2.

Optional: Verify the PDCH management algorithm optimization function. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with PDCH Management Optimization set to OFF(Off).

3.

Optional: Verify the GPRS channel priority type auto planning function. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with GPRS Channel Priority Type Auto-Planning set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Configuring dynamic PDCHs: SET GTRXCHAN: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=901, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=TCHFR; //Optional: Activating the PDCH management algorithm optimization function: SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EnPDAdminOpt=ON; //Optional: Activating GPRS channel priority type auto planning function: SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AutoGprsChPri=ON, EgprsSpeChnum=4, EgprsPriChnum=8, EgprsNorChnum=18, EgprsSpeChnumInn=0, EgprsPriChnumInn=0, EgprsNorChnumInn=0; //Optional: Deactivating the PDCH management algorithm optimization function: SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EnPDAdminOpt=OFF; //Optional: Deactivating GPRS channel priority type auto planning

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


177



function: SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AutoGprsChPri=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


178



38

Configuring Connection with TMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Hardware Dependencies for Common TMA – The RRU3004 does not support the connection with a common TMA. – The RRU3008 and RRU3908 support the connection with a common TMA. – The GRFU and MRFU support the connection with a common TMA. – The DRFU supports the connection with a common TMA through the GATM board.

l

Hardware Dependencies for Smart TMA – The 3012 series base stations do not support the configuration of the smart TMA. – A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the GATM board does not support the configuration of the smart TMA. – A 3900 or 3036 series base station with the RXU board does not support the configuration of the smart TMA in non-SRAN mode. – An antenna device is numbered uniquely within a site. In addition, the device number of a Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) and that of a TMA must be different within a site.

l


l


Context Installed on the tower top, the TMA is a device for amplifying uplink signals. As an optional component of the antenna system, the TMA compensates for the feeder loss caused by a long feeder to improve the uplink sensitivity and converge. In a network whose uplink coverage is limited, the TMA can be installed to improve the receiver sensitivity and expand the cell radius, reducing the number of BTSs and minimizing investments. If a BTS is configured with the TMA, users must configure the BTS-related parameters based on the actual RF antenna port, power supply mode, and TMA characteristics. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


179



Procedure l

Activation Procedure for a Common TMA 1.

l

l

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure TMA data after setting Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.

Activation Procedure for a Smart TMA 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to turn on the power switches for antenna ports.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to scan antenna devices.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTMA to add a smart TMA.

4.

Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA subunit, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSTMASUBUNIT.

5.

Optional: To modify the attributes of a TMA device, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSTMADEVICEDATA.

Verification Procedure for a Common TMA 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the TMA-related parameters, including Antenna Tributary 1 Flag, Antenna Tributary 1 Factor, Antenna Tributary 2 Flag, and Antenna Tributary 2 Factor.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace. On the Trace Navigation Tree pane, navigate to Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. On the Basic tab page of the displayed dialog box, select RSL under Trace Type. On the RSL tab page, select DCM(Measurement Report) under Message Type, select TRX under Filter Flag, and then specify the TRX ID.

3.

For the RRU or RFU board whose RF feeder is attached with the TMA, perform a dialing test to occupy the channel. Then, check the measured level reported by the BTS. Expected result: The Uplink RxLev specified in the Measurement Report message is normal.

Verification Procedure for a Smart TMA 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether the antenna devices are functioning.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSTMA to query the information of a smart TMA.

Deactivation Procedure for a Common TMA 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP to configure the TMA data. In this step: – Set Antenna Tributary 1 Flag to NO(NO). – Set Antenna Tributary 2 Flag to NO(NO).

l

Deactivation Procedure for a Smart TMA 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSTMA to remove a smart TMA.

----End

Example //Activating a common TMA SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


180



RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=SGL_ANTENNA, HAVETT1=YES, ATTENFACTOR1=5, HAVETT2=YES, ATTENFACTOR2=10; //Activating a smart TMA SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON, THRESHOLDTYPERET=UER_SELF_DEFINE, OverCurAlmThdRET=600, OverCurClrThdRET=300, UnderCurAlmThdRET=50, UnderCurClrThdRET=100; STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3; ADD BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1, DEVICENAME="tafang", PWRSUPPLYTYPE=SINGLE_PORT_POWER, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3, SUBUNITNUM=2; //Verifying a common TMA LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3; SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOMOD=FREE; //Verifying a smart TMA STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=3; DSP BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1; //Deactivating a common TMA SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=4, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRFU, HAVETT1=NO, HAVETT2=NO; //Deactivating a smart TMA RMV BTSTMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


181



39

Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly. – The power switch for an RET antenna is turned on. The overcurrent and undercurrent thresholds are checked since they are related to the number of RET antennas installed on a board.

l


l


Context With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimize network performance.

Procedure l

The following operations are applicable to the version V100R012 or later: Activation Procedure 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antenna scanning task.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna. NOTE

For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


182



4.

Optional: To modify parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT.

5.

Optional: To modify parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA.

6.

Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSRETTILT.


Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RET antenna scanning task has been started.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRET to query the dynamic information on an RET antenna.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT to query the dynamic information on an RET antenna subunit.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. l

The following operations are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier: Activation Procedure 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RET ALD Power Switch, RET ALD Over Current Occur Threshold, RET ALD Over Current Clear Threshold, RET ALD Under Current Occur Threshold, and RET ALD Under Current Clear Threshold to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to start an RET antenna scanning task.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRET to add an RET antenna. NOTE

For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

4.

Optional: To set the tilt angle of an RET antenna, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRETANTTILT.


Run the BSC6900 MML command STR BTSALDSCAN to check whether an RET antenna scanning task has been started.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRETANTTILT to query the tilt range of the RET antenna and it's current tilt angle.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example l

The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R012 or later: //Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON; STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


183


39 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt CTRLPORTSN=0; ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian", CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0, CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR, VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456"; MOD BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, TILT=50; MOD BTSRETDEVICEDATA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, BEARING=50, MODELNO="1"; MOD BTSRETTILT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45; //Verification procedure STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0; DSP BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0; DSP BTSRETSUBUNIT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0;

l

The following scripts are applicable to the version V100R009 or earlier: //Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME="rru1", RXUTYPE=MRRU, PwrSwitchRET=ON; STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0; ADD BTSRET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="tianxian", CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0, CTRLPORTNO=0, RETTYPE=MULTI_RET, SUBUNITNUM=1, SCENARIO=REGULAR, VENDORCODE="AA", SERIALNO="123456"; SET BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=DEVICENO, BTSIDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45; //Verification procedure STR BTSALDSCAN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CTRLPORTCN=0, CTRLPORTSRN=4, CTRLPORTSN=0; DSP BTSRETANTTILT: OPMODE=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


184


40 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity

40

Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Antenna Receive Diversity.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3006C or BTS3002E is configured with the DATM board. – The BTS3012 or BTS3012AE is configured with the DATU board. – The BTS3900, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L that uses the DRFU is configured with the GATM board.

l


l


Context Two-antenna receive diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined after processing. The following procedures assume that two-antenna receive diversity is configured for a DRFU of a BTS3900.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DRFU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185


40 Configuring 2-Antenna Receive Diversity NOTE

Based on the type and number of TRX boards, the receiving and sending mode can be set to SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Single Feeder[1TX + 2RX]), DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX + 2RX]), or DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[1TX + 2RX]) to meet site requirements.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSRXUBP to query the receiving and sending mode of the TRX board. Expected result: DRFU Sending Receiving Mode is set to Double Feeder[2TX + 2RX].


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLE_ANTENNA; //Verifying 2-Antenna Receive Diversity LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=153, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


186



41

Configuring BTS Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 BTS Clock. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – When the synchronization with the GPS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/ BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU. – When the synchronization with the BITS clock is configured, the DBS3900/BTS3900/ BTS3900A must be configured with the USCU.

l


l


Context l

The synchronization of the BTS clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The BTS uses the synchronization clock to obtain the reference clock source for the internal frame synchronization.

l

The BTS supports three clock synchronization modes: synchronization with the Abis clock, synchronization with the GPS clock, and synchronization with the BITS clock. In addition, the BTS internal clock can work in free-run mode to temporarily provide a stable reference clock source for the BTS.

l

Activation Procedure Synchronization with the Abis clock (default mode)

Procedure

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).

Synchronization with the GPS clock 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

Synchronization with the BITS clock Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


187



1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync Clock).


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to query the current configuration of the system clock. Expected result: If...

Then...

The clock information corresponds to the clock type configured

The configuration is successful.

The clock information is inconsistent with the configuration

The configuration is unsuccessful.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to query the attributes of the BTS. Here, – Set List Object to SITE(By Site). – Select CLKATTR(CLKATTR) under the BTS Attribute check box. Expected result: Clock attribute is Available.

l


----End

Example //Activation procedure //Configure the Synchronization with the Abis clock. SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK; //Configure the Synchronization with the GPS clock SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK; //Configure the Synchronization with the BITS clock SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK; //Verification procedure LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, SITEATTR=CLKATTR;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


188



42

Configuring Voice Fault Detection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Detection.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The crosstalk detection function cannot be used together with the features GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, and GBFD-118601 Abis over IP. – The one-way audio detection function cannot be used together with the features GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The crosstalk detection function can be enabled only in A over TDM transmission mode.

Context This feature provides alarm mechanisms for crosstalk and one-way audio. The BSC records the number of times of crosstalk and one-way audio occurrences periodically. If the number exceeds a specified threshold, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.

Procedure l

Activation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection NOTE

The parameters should be set to their recommended values for a commercial network. The following operations are recommended only when you want to enable this feature immediately.

1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189



Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10, Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, One-Way Audio Log Type to LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC and IP_MUTETEST_LOG_REC, and Force HO Upon Speech Problem to an appropriate value. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Mute Detect Class1 Switch to ENABLE(ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class1 to 5, Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 to 25, Mute Detect Class2 Switch to ENABLE (ENABLE), Period of Mute Detect Class2 TRAU Frame to 2, and Period of Mute Detect Class2 to 4. NOTE

If the proportion of bad frames to all speech frames exceeds the threshold specified in Exceptional Frame Threshold of Mute Detect Class1 in the measurement period specified in Period of Mute Detect Class1, one-way audio have occurred. Then the one-way audio detection class 2 starts. If no test speech frame is received in the measurement period specified in Period of Mute Detect Class2, the one-way audio is confirmed, and the BSC records a one-way audio occurrence. If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number of times of one-way audio occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force HO Upon Speech Problem is set to ON (On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to avoid voice faults when detecting one-way audio class 2.

l

Activation procedure for Crosstalk Detection 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period to 12, Speech Channel Alarm Threshold to 10, Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold to 6, Force HO Upon Speech Problem to an appropriate value, and do not set Cross Call Detect Time Threshold to 255.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > BTS Cell Parameter > BTS Soft Parameters for Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set BTS Crosstalk Detection to on. NOTE

TheBTS Crosstalk Detection is set on the BTS. The Cross Call Detect Time Threshold specifies the tolerance duration for crosstalk. If the duration of crosstalk exceeds the threshold specified in Cross Call Detect Time Threshold, the BSC records a crosstalk occurrence. If the number of times of crosstalk occurrences exceeds the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSC reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm. If the number of times of crosstalk occurrences is smaller than the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Clearance Threshold in the measurement period specified in One-Way Mute Alarm Reporting Period, the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm is cleared. If Force HO Upon Speech Problem is set to ON(On), the BSC hands over the calls to another cell to avoid voice faults when detecting crosstalk.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

When crosstalk or one-way audio occurs, view Dynamic Alarms. Expected result: The BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm exists with Failure Type being Crosstalk or One-way Audio. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190


42 Configuring Voice Fault Detection NOTE

If the number of times of actual crosstalk or one-way audio occurrences exceeds the threshold specified in Speech Channel Alarm Threshold, the LMT reports the BSS Internal Voice Channel Alarm.

l

l

Deactivation procedure for One-Way Audio Detection 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Mute Detect Class1 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE) and Mute Detect Class2 Switch to DISABLE(DISABLE).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC check box under the parameter One-Way Audio Log Type.

Deactivation procedure for Crosstalk Detection 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cross Call Detect Time Threshold to 255.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > BTS Cell Parameter > BTS Soft Parameters for Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set BTS Crosstalk Detection to OFF(OFF)

----End

Example //Activating One-Way Audio Detection by running the following commands: SET BSCBASIC: SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6, MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0&LEV2_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-1&IP_MUTET EST_LOG_REC-1&CIC_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=ENABLE, MUTECHECKCLASS1PERIOD=5, EXCEPFRAMETHRES=25, MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=ENABLE, DETECTFRAMEPERIOD=2, MUTECHECKPEIROD=4; //Activating Crosstalk Detection by running the following commands: SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=64, SpeechAlmPeriod=12, SPEECHCHANALARMTHRES=10, SPEECHCHANRESUMEALARMTHRES=6, SpeechErrorForceHOSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA: CROCALCHKSW=ON; //Deactivating One-Way Audio Detection by running the following command: SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCMUTEDETECTFLAG=DISABLE, MUTECHECKCLASS2SWITCH=DISABLE; SET BSCBASIC: MuteTestLogStyle=LEV1_MUTETEST_LOG_REC-0; //Deactivating Crosstalk Detection by running the following command: SET BSCBASIC: CROCALTMTHRD=255; SET GCELLBTSSOFTPARA: CROCALCHKSW=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


191



43

Configuring Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-119306 Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature supports only TDM transmission.

Context The Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis feature helps detect exceptions in a transmission cable that connects the BSC to a BTS when TDM transmission is used. If an exception occurs because of incorrect cable connection, the BSC reports an alarm, switches the transmission cable to the faulty status, and no longer allocates services to the cable.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRSV (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Reserved Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Reserved Parameter Index to 1 and bit 0 of Reserved Parameter Value also to 1. Specifically, when Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192



Reserved Parameter Index is set to 1, bit 0 of Reserved Parameter Value controls whether to enable the Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis feature. Set Reserved Parameter Value based on the current parameter setting. For example, if the current value of Reserved Parameter Value is 254 (0000 0000 1111 1110 in binary), set this parameter to 255 (0000 0000 1111 1111 in binary) with bit 0 set to 1. 3.

l


Verification Procedure No verification procedure is required. When this feature is enabled, the BSC reports ALM-28006 Radio Signaling Link Disconnected and switches all channels on the TRX to the faulty status after detecting an exception in signaling links.

l



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRSV (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Reserved Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Reserved Parameter Index to 1 and bit 0 of Reserved Parameter Value also to 0.

3.


----End

Example //Activating Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; SET BTSRSV: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RSVID=1, RSVVALUE=255; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL; //Deactivating Abis Crossed Pair Diagnosis DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; SET BTSRSV: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RSVID=1, RSVVALUE=254; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


193


44


Configuring IP Performance Monitor

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118607 IP Performance Monitor.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP has been configured before this feature is activated.

l

License – None

l

Dependencies on Running Environment – The GOUa/FG2a/GOUc/FG2c/GOUd/FG2d interface board is configured on the BSC side. – The GTMU/GTMUb board is configured on the BTS side.

l

Requirements for Transmission Networking – IP Over FE/GE is used over the Abis interface. Alternatively, IP over E1/T1 is used on the BTS side, E1/T1 is terminated on the intermediate router, and FE/GE interface is configured on the BSC side.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – None

l

Other Prerequisites – None

Context IP PM checks the performance of transmission between the BSC and a BTS in an IP network. By effectively monitoring the changes in QoS-related parameters, IP PM quickly checks the QoS of an IP bearer network over the Abis interface online. The check results serve as a basis for flow control and admission control.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


194



CAUTION l This feature cannot be simultaneously used with load sharing networking. Since R14, this feature can be used on the BSC when LAGs work in active/standby mode. l IP PM uses a Huawei proprietary protocol and requires support from both the BSC and BTS. l The BSC and BTS must use the same DSCP value for the same IP path. Otherwise, IP PM will not work. l The DSCP value must not be changed by any intermediate device between the BSC and BTS because the BSC and BTS summarize the calculation results of the three QoS parameters by DSCP value. If the DSCP value is changed, IP PM will not work. l When configuring an IP path on the BSC side, set Peer subnet mask to 255.255.255.255. Otherwise, IP PM cannot be activated. Data Preparation Paramete r Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Adjacent node ID

ANI

Adjacent node identifier of this IP path

BSC internal planning

IP path ID

PATHID

IP path where IP PM is to be activated


IS QOSPAT H

IS QOSPATH

Whether the path is QOSPATH


PHB

PHB

PHB type of the IPPM to be enabled


BTS Index

BTSID

Index of the BTS where IP PM is to be activated

BTS internal planning

BTS Name

BTSNAME

Name of the BTS where IP PM is to be activated


Service Type

SRVTYPE

Type of the service for which IP PM is to be activated


Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating IP PM on the BSC Side 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported)to add an IP path. In this step, set Interface Type to ABIS


195



(Abis Interface), Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, IP path type, Forward Bandwidth, and Backward Bandwidth to appropriate values. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT IPPM (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IPPM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the IP PM of the target IP path. In this step, set Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, and IS QOSPATH to appropriate values.

– Activating IP PM on the BTS Side 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSIPPM (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS IPPM Function; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the IP PM on the BTS side. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID (By Index), BTS Index (Not required on the CME) to the index of the target BTS, Service Type to the service to monitor (for example, CS Voice), and Lost Packet Detection Switch to ON(On).


After activating IP PM, users can query the QoS of the transport network between the BSC and BTS by running MML commands or starting monitoring tasks on the LMT. 1. MML commands: are used to check the operating status of IP PM and to check whether IP PM has been activated. 2. On the LMT, you can monitor the QoS of an IP transport network in real time, but only the results of real-time monitoring on the BSC side are displayed. The BSC exports monitoring results every 5s.

– Verifying IP PM on the BSC Side – By Running an MML Command 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPM to query the IP PM status of the target IP path. In this step, set Adjacent node ID and IP path ID to appropriate values. The value of IPPM State is PM_UP, and the values of all IP PM statistics are valid for the IP path that carries services.

– By Using the LMT

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Click Monitor on the LMT main page. The Monitor tab page is displayed.

2.

Choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > Link Performance Monitoring on Monitor Navigation Tree. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.


196



Figure 44-1 Link Performance Monitoring

3.

4.

In Link Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to IPPM and related parameters to appropriate values. if...

then...

QOS IP PATH

set Trace toQOSand Priority to an appropriate value.

non QOS IP PATH

set Trace toother.

Click Submit to start the monitoring. When the monitoring is started, the real-time monitoring window is displayed. The task name and related parameters are displayed in the Title bar, and the monitoring results are displayed in tables and diagrams in real time.

– Verifying IP PM on the BTS Side 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSIPPMLNK to query the status of the IP PM link. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID (By Index), BTS Index (Not required on the CME) the index of the target BTS, and Service Type to the activated service (for example, CS Voice). Expected result: The value of PM Active State is Activated, and the values of IP PM statistics on the BTS side are valid. NOTE

The parameters Jitter Sum and Jitter Var Sum measure the jitters that a network experiences. If the absolute value of the Jitter Sum parameter or the value of Jitter Var Sum parameter is small, the network is stable. It is recommended that the Jitter Var Sum parameter be set to a value less than 15 ms in terrestrial transmission or less than 40 ms in satellite transmission. If the value of the Jitter Var Sum parameter is greater than 50 ms, the network experiences large jitters and is unstable.

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating IP PM on the BSC Side 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IPPM; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197



center: not supported) to deactivate the IP PM of the target IP path. In this step, set Adjacent node ID and IP path ID to appropriate values. – Deactivating IP PM on the BTS Side 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSIPPM (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS IPPM Function; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the IP PM that has been activated on the BTS side. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), BTS Index (Not required on the CME) the index of the target BTS, and Service Type to the service to monitor (for example, CS Voice).

----End

Example // Activation procedure ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED; ACT IPPM:ANI=0, PATHID=1, ISQOSPATH=YES, PHB=BE-1&AF11-0&AF12-0&AF13-0&AF21-0&AF22-0&AF23-0&AF31-0&AF32-0&AF33-0&A F41-0&AF42-0&AF43-0&EF-0, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON; ACT BTSIPPM: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE,LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON, LOSTPKTALARMTHD=O1E2_R5E3; // Verification procedure DSP IPPM: ANI=1, PATHID=0; DSP BTSIPPMLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DSCP=CS_SPEECH; // Deactivation procedure DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1; DEA BTSIPPM: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


198



45

Configuring GSM PS Service Map

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-118614 GSM PS Service Map.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Built-in packet control unit (PCU) – PS service processing boards – Gb interface boards – NIU boards, which perform service identification – Service Aware Unit (SAU) boards

l


l


l

Others – Terminals support NC1 or NC2 mode. – The Nastar supports the feature.

Context This feature provides a grid-based geographical representation of GSM PS traffic based on the PS CHR log. This helps operators in understanding the resource distribution and bottlenecks of the entire network. This also helps operators to address the problem of data deluge and guides operators in hotspot coverage and network capacity expansion. Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks (Configuration Principle for Different Scenarios)

Data Source

PS CHR Switch

PSRCDSW

This parameter specifies whether to record PS CHR logs.

Network planning


199



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Mode Control

PSOUTMOD E

This parameter specifies the mode used to export PS CHR logs. Values:

Network planning

l COMMONUSRM(Common User Mode) - PS CHR logs of the cell specified using the SET GPSCHRSCOPE command are exported. l SPECUSRM(Specified User Mode) - PS CHR logs of the terminals specified using the ADD GPSCHRUSER command are exported. The two modes can coexist without affecting each other. IMEI Information

PSCHRIMEI

This parameter specifies whether to extract IMEI information from PS CHR logs.

Network planning

Measurement Report Information

PSCHRMR

This parameter specifies whether to extract MR information from PS CHR logs.

Network planning

Service Type Information

PSCHRServi ceType

This parameter specifies whether to extract service type information from PS CHR logs.

Network planning

Support DPI

SPTDPI

This parameter specifies whether a cell supports PS service identification. The BSC performs differentiated management for service types.

Network planning

The value BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support) is recommended. PS CHR Collect Switch

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

CHRCOLLE CTSWITCH

This parameter specifies whether to collect CHR logs for a specified object.


Network planning

200



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Network Control Mode

NCO

This parameter specifies the network control mode for cell reselection. There are three modes.

Data Source Network planning

l NC0: normal terminal control. Terminals perform autonomous cell reselection. l NC1: terminal control with MRs reported. Terminals send MRs to the network and perform autonomous cell reselection. l NC2: network control. Terminals send MRs to the network but do not perform autonomous cell reselection. When this parameter is set to NC2(NC2) and Support NC2 is set to YES(Yes) (in the SET GCELLGPRS command), the network can control cell reselection for terminals. The value NC1(NC1) or NC2(NC2) is recommended. Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode

RPTPERIOD I

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode

RPTPERIOD T

IMSI

IMSI

This parameter specifies the interval at which a terminal in packet idle mode sends MRs.

Network planning

The value 61.44sec(61.44sec) is recommended. This parameter specifies the interval at which a terminal in packet transfer mode sends measurement reports.

Network planning

The value 0.96sec(0.96sec) is recommended. This parameter specifies the international mobile subscriber identity of a terminal. Set this parameter to the valid IMSI of a terminal on the live network.

Network planning

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GPSCHRCTRL (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > PS CHR Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PS CHR Switch to ON(ON), Mode Control to COMMONUSRM(Common User Mode), IMEI Information to ON Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201



(Output) , and Measurement Report Information to ON(Output), set Service Type Information to ON(Output), and set other parameters based on the network plan. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), set Support DPI to SUPPORT(GGSN Support).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GPSCHRSCOPE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > PS CHR Scope; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set PS CHR Collect Switch to ON(ON).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the NC1(NC1) or NC2(NC2) check boxes under the parameter Network Control Mode. NOTE

If Network Control Mode is set to NC2(NC2), run the SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command with Support NC2 set to YES(Yes) so that the network can control cell reselection. If Network Control Mode has already been set to NC1(NC1) or NC2(NC2), retain the setting.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNWCTRLMSRPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Network Control Measurement Parameters in System Information of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode and Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode. To specify terminals, perform Step 6 and Step 7.

l

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GPSCHRCTRL (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > PS CHR Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PS CHR Switch to ON(ON), Mode Control to SPECUSRM(Specified User Mode). and set other parameters based on the network plan.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPSCHRUSER (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > PS CHR User; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add information about a terminal. Repeat this step if you need to add more than one terminal.


Use an MS to perform PS services.

2.

Stop the PS services on the MS.

3.

A GPHR log will be generated after five minutes. NOTE

Before verifying this feature, ensure that PS services can be processed properly.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GPSCHRCTRL (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202



PS CHR Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select PS CHR Switch to OFF(OFF), Mode Control to COMMONUSRM(Common User Mode). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GPSCHRSCOPE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > PS CHR Scope; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, select Mode Control to OFF(OFF). To specify a user, perform the following steps:

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GPSCHRCTRL (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > PS CHR Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select PS CHR Switch to OFF(OFF), Mode Control to SPECUSRM(Specified User Mode).

----End

Example //Activation procedure in common user mode //Enabling PS CHR SET GPSCHRCTRL: PSRCDSW=ON, PSOUTMODE=COMMONUSRM, PSCHRTraffic=ON, PSCHRReselect=ON, PSCHREvent=ON, PSCHRAbnormal=ON, PSCHRMR=ON, PSCHRServiceType=ON, PSCHRIMEI=ON; //Enabling cell-level logging SET GPSCHRSCOPE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CHRCOLLECTSWITCH=ON; //Enabling NC1 for a cell SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC1; SET GCELLNWCTRLMSRPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RPTPERIODI=61.44sec, RPTPERIODT=0.96sec; //Deactivation procedure in common user mode //Disabling PS CHR SET GPSCHRCTRL: PSRCDSW=OFF, PSOUTMODE=COMMONUSRM; //Disabling cell-level logging SET GPSCHRSCOPE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CHRCOLLECTSWITCH=OFF; //Activation procedure in specified user mode //Enabling PS CHR SET GPSCHRCTRL: PSRCDSW=ON, PSOUTMODE= SPECUSRM, PSCHRTraffic=ON, PSCHRReselect=ON, PSCHREvent=ON, PSCHRAbnormal=ON, PSCHRMR=ON, PSCHRServiceType=ON, PSCHRIMEI=ON; //Specifying users ADD GPSCHRUSER: IMSI="460311026110900"; ADD GPSCHRUSER: IMSI="460311026110901"; //Deactivation procedure in specified user mode SET GPSCHRCTRL: PSRCDSW=OFF, PSOUTMODE=SPECUSRM;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


203


46

46 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)

Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210001 Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – As Figure 46-1 shows, the hardware of the base station is installed. Figure 46-1 Network topology of Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface

NOTE

As Figure 46-1 shows, CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU board are respectively connected to one CPRI port on the WBBP board. CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 are connected to the RRU3908.

l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


204


46 Configuring Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface (GBTS)

Context In the traditional GSM+UMTS dual-mode solution, the GSM and UMTS base stations use the same site. Different RF modules are used for different radio standards and therefore separate optical cables are required. As a result, many optical cables are required for the entire system, which increases the deployment cost. After this feature is applied, the demand of optical cables is reduced by 50%, which helps reduce the cost of the optical modules and optical cables and reduce the expense in the installation and maintenance of the optical cables between the BBU and RF modules.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSSFPMODE (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Right click GTMU Board > Configure SFP Switch Port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the switching relation of the SFP ports and switch the data of CPRI0, CPRI1, and CPRI2 on the GTMU to CPRI3, CPRI4, and CPRI5 on the GTMU. NOTE

The switching relation of the SFP ports is configured only on the GSM side.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSSFPMODE to query the configurations of the SFP ports.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSSFPMODE (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Right click GTMU Board > Configure SFP Switch Port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SFP port switching relation.

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0, SWITCHPORTNO=3; //Verification procedure LST BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0; //Deactivation procedure RMV BTSSFPMODE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=161, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SFPPORTNO=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


205


47


Configuring Enhanced Full Rate (EFR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) feature.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – MSs support EFR.

Context EFR is used to improve voice quality.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER2 (Full-rate VER 2).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable EFR forcibly as the current speech version. In this step, set Allow Forced EFR in Cell to YES(Yes).

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206



TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function. In this step, specify the subrack number and slot number based on actual configuration of the DPUa, DPUc, or DPUf board and set Coding Mode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode). NOTE

In A over IP mode, the EFR and E-Coder cannot be forcibly enabled.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES during a dialing test or a call. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to ISDNs of MS 1 and MS 2. Then, observe the Channel Service Type field of TC Resource Info in The result area. Expected result: Available speech versions for EFR are displayed.

l

Deactivation Procedure Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to a value other than FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2).

----End

Example //Activating EFR SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER2-1; //(Optional) Enabling EFR forcibly SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FORCEDCELLEFRSWITCH=YES; //(Optional) Enabling ECODEC forcibly SET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=9, EncodeMode=ECODEC; //Deactivating EFR SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER2-0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


207


48


Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC)

The ALC feature adjusts the gains of uplink and downlink digital speech signals and changes the amplitude of digital speech signals at an interval of 20 ms. This retains the speech signal level in the entire network in a stable state and ensures that the speech quality is not affected by the volume fluctuation of both parties. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature applies only in A over TDM mode and is mutually exclusive with the following features: – GBFD-118602 A over IP – GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 – This feature takes effect only if none of the following features is applied to a call: – GBFD-115701 TFO – GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch – GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

l

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

l

Dependencies on Running Environment The DPUa/DPUc/DPUf board is started normally.

l

Dependencies on Transport Network TDM transmission is used over the A interface.

l

Dependencies on Other NEs and Third-Party Devices N/A

l

Other Prerequisites N/A

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


208



Context l

Precautions None

l

Data Preparation Table 48-1 Configuring the fixed level mode Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

ALC Switch

AlcEnFlag

OFF(Off)

Internal planning

ALC Mode

AlcAdaptMode

FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode)

Internal planning

ALC Fix Target Level

AlcFixLev

-18

Internal planning

Enable TC Performance Measurement

TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning

TC Performance Measurement Type

TCSTATISTICT YPE

ALC(ALC Measurement) not selected by default

Internal planning

Table 48-2 Configuring the fixed gain mode

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

ALC Switch

AlcEnFlag

OFF(Off)

Internal planning

ALC Mode

AlcAdaptMode

FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode)

Internal planning

ALC Fix Gain

AlcFixGain

0

Internal planning


TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning


TCSTATISTICT YPE


Internal planning


Data Source

209



Table 48-3 Configuring the adaptive mode Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

ALC Switch

AlcEnFlag

OFF(Off)

Internal planning

ALC Mode

AlcAdaptMode

ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode)

Internal planning

ALC Max Target Level

AlcMaxLev

-4

Internal planning

ALC Min Target Level

AlcMinLev

-23

Internal planning


TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning


TCSTATISTICT YPE


Internal planning

Table 48-4 Configuring ACLP (Optional) Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

ACLP Switch

ACLPENFLAG

OFF(Off)

Internal planning


TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning


TCSTATISTICT YPE

ACLP(ACLP Measurement) not selected by default

Internal planning

Data Source

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – If the fixed level mode is required, perform the following operations: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ALC Switch to ON (On), ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode), and ALC Fix Target Level to its recommended value for the DPU board.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


210


48 Configuring Automatic Level Control (ALC) NOTE

If DSPNO is not specified, the attributes of all the DSPs are set, it can be set as required. To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a larger value. Its maximum value is -4. To decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Target Level to a smaller value. Its minimum value is -23.

– If the fixed gain mode is required, perform the following operations: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ALC Switch to ON (On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to its recommended value for the DPU board. NOTE

To increase the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 12. To decrease the acoustic volume, set ALC Fix Gain to 3.

– If the adaptive mode is required, perform the following operations: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ALC Switch to ON (On) and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode) on the DPU board. In addition, set ALC Max Target Level and ALC Min Target Level to their recommended values. – (Optional) Configuring ACLP Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) with ACLP Switch set to BOTH(On for uplink and downlink) for all DSPs on the DPU. In this manner, the ACLP function is enabled on both the uplink and downlink. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to measure the gain brought by ALC/ACLP. In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes) and TC Performance Measurement Type to ALC(ALC Measurement) or ACLP(ACLP Measurement).

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Verification Procedure The following takes the fixed gain mode as an example to describe the verification operations. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 0.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set in Step 1 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully.

3.

In the same cell, use MS1 to call MS2 with a normal voice. Then, hang up the phone.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set ALC Switch of all the DSPs on the tested DPU board to ON(On), ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode), and ALC Fix Gain to 12.


211



5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check whether all the parameters set in step Step 4 are listed. If all the parameters are listed, the previous commands are executed successfully.

6.

Use MS 1 to call MS 2 again. Speak with a normal volume on MS 1. Expected result: The volume of the heard voice increases, compared with the volume heard in Step 3. NOTE

The previous steps are performed when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed gain mode). The verification steps are similar when ALC Mode is set to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed level mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive mode).

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ALC Switch to OFF(Off) for the DPU board.

----End

Example //Activating ALC when the fixed level mode is used SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDLEVEL, AlcFixLev=-18; //Activating ALC when the fixed gain mode is used SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=FIXEDGAIN, AlcFixGain=0; //Activating ALC when the adaptive mode is used SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=ON, AlcAdaptMode=ADAPTIVE, AlcMaxLev=-4, AlcMinLev=-23; //Activating ACLP SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, ACLPENFLAG=BOTH; //Deactivating ALC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AlcEnFlag=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


212


49


Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) The AEC helps reduce the acoustic echo caused by the terminal, improving the speech quality. Acoustic echo is generated when the MS speaker is not completely isolated from the MS receiver. After the voice of one party (Party A) reaches the MS, the voice is transmitted back to Party A through the receiver. Then, Party A can hear his/her own voice. The phenomena is known as acoustic echo. AEC is a feature with which acoustic echoes can be pre-assessed and eliminated by means of the analysis on forward and backward voice signals. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


213


l



Context l

Precautions None

l

Data Preparation Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

ANC Switch

AecEnFlag

OFF(Off)

Internal planning


TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning


TCSTATISTICT YPE

AEC(AEC Measurement) not selected by default

Internal planning

AEC Echo Return Loss

AecDefaultERL

20

Internal planning

AEC Echo Path Delay

AecTail

300

Internal planning

AEC Path Delay

AecPureDelay

100

Internal planning

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) with AEC Switch set to ON (On) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to measure the gain brought by AEC. In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes) and TC Performance Measurement Type to AEC(AEC Measurement).

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch set to OFF (Off) and other parameters set to their default values for the DPU board.


214



2.


3.

Use one test MS (MS 1) to make a call to another test MS (MS 2). Check that acoustic echo occurs, and then hand off the call. NOTE

The echo is easily generated when a common MS enabled with the hands-free function is placed in a sealing box.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Switch of the DPU board set to ON(On) and other parameters set to their default values.

5.


6.

Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again, and check whether acoustic echoes are reduced. If the echoes are reduced, finish the verification. If the echoes are not reduced, hand off the call and then Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with AEC Echo Return Loss set to a smaller value within the valid range. If AEC Echo Return Loss is already set to the smallest value, set AEC Echo Path Delay to a larger value. Repeat step Step 6 to check whether the echoes are reduced. NOTE

l The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. The echo generated between an MS and a fixedline phone is termed the electric echo. The electric echo problem is solved by the CN side. l When satellite transmission on the Abis or Ater interface is required, AEC Path Delay must be set, so as to eliminate the extra delay caused by satellite transmission.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) with AEC Switch set to OFF (Off) for the DPU board.

----End

Example //Activating AEC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=ON; //Deactivating AEC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AecEnFlag=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


215


50


Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) ANR reduces the background noise on the uplink and downlink speech signals and improves the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In this way, the other party of the call can clearly hear the voice. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


216



Context l

Precautions None

l


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

ANR Switch

AnrEnFlag

OFF(Off)

Internal planning


TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning


TCSTATISTICT YPE

ANR(ANR Measurement) not selected by default

Internal planning

Noise Suppression Algorithm Switch

AnrMode

MODE1(Optimized version)

Internal planning

Noise Attenuation Mode

AnrNseReductM ode

RELATIVELEVEL(Relative level)

Internal planning

Noise Suppression Mode

AnrNseReductLe v

RELATIVE_2(Relative mode level 2)

Internal planning

Transparent Transmit Thresh of Noise Lev

AnrByPassNseLe v

-43

Internal planning

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) with ANR Switch set to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink), Noise Suppression Algorithm Switch to MODE1(Optimized version), and Noise Attenuation Mode, Noise Suppression Mode, and Transparent Transmit Thresh of Noise Lev set to appropriate values for the DPU board.


217


50 Configuring Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to measure the gain brought by ANR. In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes) and TC Performance Measurement Type to ANR(ANR Measurement).

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).

2.

Ensure that two test MSs (MS 1 and MS 2) are in the same cell. Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 in a noisy environment. Check that great background noises can be heard through the MS 2, and then hand off the call.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA with ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested set to UPLINK(On for uplink) or DOWNLINK(On for dnlink).

4.


5.

Use MS 1 to make a call to MS 2 again. Speak at the normal volume on MS 1, and check that the background noises heard through MS 2 are reduced.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) with ANR Switch for all the DSPs on the DPU board to be tested set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating ANR SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=UPLINK, AnrMode=MODE1, AnrNseReductMode=RELATIVELEVEL, AnrNseReductLev=RELATIVE_2, AnrByPassNseLev=-43; //Deactivating ANR SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AnrEnFlag=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


218


51 Configuring TFO

51

Configuring TFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115701 TFO.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature applies only in A over TDM mode and is mutually exclusive with the following features: – GBFD-118602 A over IP – GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 – The following features take effect only if TFO establishment fails for a call: – GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC) – GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) – GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR) – GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC) – GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC) – GBFD-115711 EVAD – GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment – This feature cannot be used if either of the following features is applied to a call: – GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch – GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

l


l

Others Prerequisites TDM transmission is used over the A interface.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


219


51 Configuring TFO

Context TFO solves the problem of speech signal damage in repeated encoding and decoding by canceling one encoding and decoding process to improve the signal quality. If the WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO feature is activated on the 3G network when this feature is enabled, the AMR feature must be supported by the 3G network to ensure that TFO is supported during a call between the 2G and 3G networks. To enable TFO for calls using the AMR speech version, the BSC version and BTS version must meet the mapping relationship in the following table. BSC Version

BTS Version

Support TFO for Calls Using AMR

GBSS8.1

GBSS8.1

Support

GBSS8.1

GBSS9.0 and later

Not support

GBSS9.0 and later

GBSS8.1

Not support

GBSS9.0 and later

GBSS9.0 and later

Support

To enable TFO for calls using the non-AMR speech version, there is no requirements for the mapping between the BSC version and BTS version.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TFO Switch to ENABLE(Enable).

2.

Configure the speech version by performing the following operations: – For non-AMR services: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2 (Full-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1).

b.

Optional: If you need to observe counters related to TFO, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes), and set TC Performance Measurement Type to TFO(TFO Measurement).

– For AMR services: a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220


51 Configuring TFO

Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus, set Um Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus , set Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus .

3.

l

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) and FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), or FULL_RATE_VER1(Fullrate VER 1) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3).

c.

Optional: If you need to observe counters related to TFO, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes), and set TC Performance Measurement Type to TFO(TFO Measurement).

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Software Parameters for A Interface; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure TFO between MSCs. In this step, set A over TDM Speech Version Select Strategy to MSC(MSC Strategy). In this way, the BSC selects a speech version according to the speech version priorities carried in the assignment request from the MSC.


The following uses verifying the TFO function for non-AMR services as an example.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD with TCH Traffic Busy Threshold set to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned full-rate TCHs.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, only set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1). NOTE

Only FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1) is selected, two test MSs use the same FR coding scheme. This ensures the implementation of TFO.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

4.

Use MS 1 and MS 2 to access the network from the test cell, and use MS 1 to call MS 2.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES for MS 1 and MS 2 separately. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS 1 and MS 2. Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO not start in the result area.

6.

Terminate the call.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to ENABLE(Enable).

8.

Optional: If TFO is configured between MSCs when the BSC selects a speech version according to the speech version priorities carried in the request message from the MSC, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221


51 Configuring TFO

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA, set A over TDM Speech Version Select Strategy to MSC(MSC Strategy). 9.

Use MS 1 to call MS 2 again.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES for MS 1 and MS 2 separately. In this step, set User Identity Type to BYMSISDN(By MSISDN) and MSISDN to the ISDNs of MS 1 and MS 2. Check whether the value of Tfo State is TFO Instance Succeed in the result area. If the value of Tfo State is TFO Instance Succeed and the speech quality improves, TFO has been enabled. NOTE

Ensure that an inter-BSC or inter-cell handover is not performed during the call when verifying TFO. This is because the DSP CALLRES command cannot be executed after such a handover.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TFO Switch of the test cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example //Activating TFO /*Activating TFO for non-AMR services*/ SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-1&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER 1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&FULL_RATE_VER5-0; /*Activating TFO for AMR services*/ SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=ENABLE; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER 1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&FULL_RATE_VER5-0; SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/ S-0&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-0&7_40KBIT/S-1&7_95KBIT/S-0&10_2KBIT/ S-0&12_2KBIT/S-1; //Deactivating TFO SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NBAMRTFOSWITCH=DISABLE; //Configuring TFO between MSCs when the BSC selects a speech version according to the speech version priorities carried in the request message from the MSC: SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, SpVerTdmStrategy=MSC;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


222



52

Configuring Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)

By comparing the background noise level at the local end and the signal level at the peer end, ANC adaptively increases the speech volume of the peer end if the background noise level of the local end is high. Therefore, the ratio of the signal level at the peer end to the background noise level at the local end increases, which helps to improve the voice quality. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


223



Context l

Precautions None

l


Data Source

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

ANC Switch

AncEnFlag

OFF(Off)

Internal planning

ANC Target SNR

AncSnrGateRS

12

Internal planning

ANC Max Gain

AncMaxGain

6

Internal planning


TcStatisticSw

NO(No)

Internal planning


TCSTATISTICT YPE

ANC(ANC Measurement) not selected by default

Internal planning

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ANC Switch to ON(On), and set ANC Target SNR and ANC Max Gain to the recommended values for the DPU board. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to measure the gain brought by ANC. In this step, set Enable TC Performance Measurement to YES(Yes) and TC Performance Measurement Type to ANC(ANC Measurement).

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to those of the DPU board, and set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).

2.

Place MS 1 in a noisy place, and then use MS 2 to call MS 1. Expected result: MS 2 cannot hear the voice of MS 1 clearly.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to those of the DPU board. Then, set ANC Switch to ON(On), and set AncSnrGateRS and AncMaxGain to the recommended values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to check the values of ANC Switch, ANC Target SNR, and ANC Max Gain. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224



Expected result: The value of ANC Switch is ON, which indicates that the ANC feature is enabled. 5. l

Use MS 2 to call MS 1 again. Expected result: The voice of MS 1 is clearer.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ANC Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating ANC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=ON, AncSnrGateRS=12, AncMaxGain=6; //Deactivating ANC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, AncEnFlag=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


225


53


Configuring Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC).

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR, or GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch or GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.

l


Context With EPLC, frames of lost packets can be recovered and compensated. To a extent, this helps solve the problem of speech frame loss in a poor transmission or radio environment, thereby improving the network performance.

Procedure l


l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set EPLC Switch to ON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.


226


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to query the value of Speech Version. Expected result: At least one of Full-rate VER 2, Full-rate VER 3, and Half-rate VER 3 is selected for Speech Version.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to OFF(Off) and retain the default values of other parameters.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configuration information about the TC. Expected result: The value of EPLC Switch is Off.

4.

Use an MS to perform speech services in a poor radio environment where the uplink receive quality is in the range of 4-7 and record the average MOS of the voice quality.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA. In this step, set EPLC Switch to ON(On) and retain the default values of other parameters.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TCPARA to query the configuration information about the TC. Expected result: The value of EPLC Switch is On.

7.

Use an MS to perform speech services in a poor radio environment where the uplink receive quality is in the range of 4-7 and record the average MOS of the voice quality.

8.

Compare the MOSs recorded in Step 4 and Step 7. Expected result: The MOS recorded in Step 7 is greater than that recorded in Step 4.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set EPLC Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating EPLC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, EPLCSwitch=ON; //Deactivating EPLC SET TCPARA: SRN=3, SN=8, EPLCSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


227


54 Configuring EVAD

54

Configuring EVAD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-115711 EVAD, namely enhanced voice activity detection.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPUc, DPUa, or DPUf board is configured and functional.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)Downlink and GBFD-115501 AMR FR/GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113301 Enhanced Full Rate. – This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115702 TrFO, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, and GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.

l


Context The enhanced VAD technology improves the encoding effect of music and prevents damage to music by the traditional VAD algorithm.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported), in this step, set EVAD Switch to ON(On) on the DPUc, DPUa, or DPUf board. Use a UE to initiate and set up a call. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228


54 Configuring EVAD

2.

l

Have the called UE play the ring back tone (RBT). Expected result: The music received by the UE is smooth and with a good voice quality.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) with EVAD Switch to OFF (Off).

----End

Example //Activating EVAD SET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=10, EVADEnFlag=ON; //Deactivating EVAD SET TCPARA: SRN=0, SN=10, EVADEnFlag=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


229


55


Configuring Voice Quality Index (VQI) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index (VQI).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others Prerequisites – The cell is configured with neighboring cells. – The BTS of the cell supports downlink VQI.

Context The VQI establishes the mapping between radio network performance and voice quality. The VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the radio quality parameters for the uplink and downlink speech signals. The MOS analysis method is applied in VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to assess the quality of middle-rate and lowrate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1 to 5. Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11 levels. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate voice problem identification and network optimization.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating downlink VQI 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230



Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Report Downlink VQI Allowed to ENABLE(Enable). NOTE

VQI is recorded in a measurement report if only Report Downlink VQI Allowed is set to ENABLE(Enable) and a voice service is processed.

– Activating uplink VQI 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Other Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Report Speech Quality to YES (Report).

Verification Procedure – Verifying downlink VQI 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set CELLID to the index of the cell to be verified and RPTDLVQIALLOWED to ENABLE(Enable). Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI value in the measurement reports. Expected result: The downlink VQI value is not reported.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS. In this step, set VOICEVER to one that matches the channel type. Speech versions are FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2(Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2), and HALF_RATE_VER3 (Half-rate VER 3). Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI value in the measurement reports. Expected result: The downlink VQI value is reported.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set BTSMESRPTPREPROC to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and MRPREPROCFREQ to an appropriate value based on the site requirements. Perform a voice service test and check the downlink VQI value in the preprocessed measurement reports. Expected result: The downlink VQI value is reported.

– Verifying uplink VQI 1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate CS domain message tracing of a single subscriber by referring to Tracing CS domain messages of a single subscriber. Perform a voice service test, and check the uplink VQI value in the measurement reports. Expected result: The uplink VQI value is reported.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL. In this step, set BTSMESRPTPREPROC to BTS_Preprocessing(BTS preprocessing) and MRPREPROCFREQ to an appropriate value based on the site requirements. Perform a voice service test and check the uplink VQI value in the preprocessed measurement reports. Expected result: The uplink VQI value is reported.

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating downlink VQI

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


231



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Report Downlink VQI Allowed to DISABLE(Disable).

– Deactivating uplink VQI 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Other Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Report Speech Quality to NO(Not report).

----End

Example //Activating downlink VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE; //Activating uplink VQI SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTVOICE=YES; //Verifying downlink VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=ENABLE; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-1&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER 1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0; SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSMESRPTPREPROC=BTS_Preprocessing, MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps; //Deactivating downlink VQI SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTDLVQIALLOWED=DISABLE; //Deactivating uplink VQI SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, RPTVOICE=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


232


56


Configuring Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115708 Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The following types of RF modules support this feature: MRFU V2, GRFU V2, MRFUd, MRFUe, RRU3908 V2, RRU3008 V2, RRU3926, RRU3928, RRU3929, and RRU3922E.

l


l


Context Currently, the speech services using EFR and AMR-NB account for the largest proportion of speech services in live networks. When the bit error rate (BER) is high and the C/I is low, the channel decoding fail. As a result, the erroneous results of channel decoding will be discarded, which greatly degrades the voice quality. To solve the preceding problem, Huawei develops a technique based on the characteristics of EFR and AMR-NB speech frames to repair the erroneous speech frames over the Um interface. This technique increases the success rate of voice decoding, thus improving the voice quality under low C/I. This feature, applicable to only the uplink, repairs speech frames in the source and channel decoding of EFR and three types of AMR: 4.75 kbit/s, 7.40 kbit/s, and 12.2 kbit/s. Therefore, this feature improves the Mean Opinion Score (MOS) by 0.1 to 0.2 when the CIR is low.



233



1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Um Interface Speech Frame Repair Switch to YES(Yes), and then set Speech Frame Classification Threshold, BQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold, and GQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold as required.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC to query the parameters related to the Um interface speech frame repairing feature. Expected result: – The value of Um Interface Speech Frame Repair Switch is YES(Yes). – The values of Speech Frame Classification Threshold, BQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold, and GQ Speech Frame Repair BER Threshold are the same as those set in the activation procedure.

l

2.

When making calls in an area of the network with severe frame loss, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT with FER Report Enable set to YES(Yes) to allow the BTS to report the Frame Erase Ratio (FER).

3.

Query FER-related counters reported by the BTS on the M2000. To do so, choose Performance > Query Result on the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New Query. The Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MR Measurement > FER Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of the counter EFR Average FER. Expected result: After the Um interface speech frame repairing feature is enabled, the value of EFR Average FER decreases and the speech quality is improved.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Um Interface Speech Frame Repair Switch set to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UMSFRSWITCH=YES, UMSFRLLRFACTOR=4, UMSFRLLRTHRESH=60, UMSFRBERTHRESH=50; //Verification procedure LST GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FERRPTEN=YES; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UMSFRSWITCH=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


234


57 Configuring AMR

57

Configuring AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-115501 AMR FR, GBFD-115502 AMR HR and GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS, BTS, and MSC support the AMR function.

Context The adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm, which can be adjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by the protocol. With AMR, the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio network according to the measurements such as receive level, receive quality, and carrier-to-interference (C/I) ratio, and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. In this way, both the antiinterference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved. NOTE

l The AMR HR supports the 7.95 kbit/s coding scheme only when Service Mode of the Abis interface is IP or HDLC in BM/TC combined or A over IP mode. l If a BTS supports AMR but its software version does not, then AMR cannot be configured. In this case, a BTS software version that supports AMR must be obtained.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Set basic AMR parameters. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235


57 Configuring AMR

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with A Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3) and FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1)check box in the Speech Version parameter for the cell. NOTE

If the cell also supports half-rate services, select the HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3) check box simultaneously.

c.

2.

To further improve voice quality by enabling the E-Coder function, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCPARA (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click data processing Board > Properties > TC Attributes of DSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, specify the subrack number and slot number based on actual configuration of the DPU board and set Coding Mode to ECODEC(Enhanced code mode).

Set AMR call processing parameters. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AFR Radio Link Timeout and AFR SACCH Multi-Frames set to appropriate values. NOTE

If the cell also supports half-rate services, set AHR Radio Link Timeout and AHR SACCH Multi-Frames to appropriate values simultaneously.

b.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set AMR call control parameters related to full-rate and half-rate channels. NOTE

l AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] can be set to one to four coding rates respectively. In A over IP mode, their settings must be consistent with those on the CN side. l You can select different algorithms according to the setting of AMR Rate Adjustment Switch.

3.

To set parameters for AMR intra-cell handover between TCHF and TCHH, see Activating the AMR handover algorithm in 8 Configuring HUAWEI I Handover and Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH in 202 Configuring HUAWEI II Handover.

4.

Optional: Set AMR power control parameters. – When Huawei II power control algorithm is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control II of Cell; CME

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


236


57 Configuring AMR

batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set AMR power control parameters such as AMR PC Interval. – When Huawei III power control algorithm is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow III Power Control For AMR to ON(Allowed) and set other AMR power control parameters based on network conditions. 5.

Set AMR channel management parameters. a.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold set to appropriate values.


Start a call between two MSs.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES. Expected result: Available speech versions including FAMR are displayed.

l

Deactivation Procedure At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, the deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the speech version.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER 1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER5-0; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AFRSAMULFRM=48, AHRSAMULFRM=32, AFRDSBLCNT=64_Times, AHRDSBLCNT=52_Times; SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RATECTRLSW=ALG1, ACTCDSETF=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-1&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-1, ACTCDSETH=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/S-1&5_90KBIT/S-1&6_70KBIT/S-1, AMRDADTHAW=YES; SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRPCADJPERIOD=3; SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRCALLPCALLOWED=ON; SET GCELLCHMGAD IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON, AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


237



58

Configuring AMR Coding Rate

Threshold Adaptive Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS supports AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment. – An MOS tester and a vehicle for drive test are ready.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on at least one of the following features: – GBFD-115501 AMR FR – GBFD-115502 AMR HR – GBFD-115507 WB AMR The AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment function also depends on the GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) feature. – This feature cannot be used together with the following feature: – GBFD-118602 A over IP – GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 – This feature takes effect only if none of the following features is applied to a call: – GBFD-115701 TFO – GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch – GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The test cell is configured with neighboring cells.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


238



Context NOTE

BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when they use a nonoptimized DTRU.

This feature sets the target voice quality of the network and adjusts the coding rate threshold adaptively so that a proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service and therefore to gain optimal AMR voice quality. AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment, which is uplink/downlink specific, brings the following benefits: l

A proper coding rate is selected for the AMR speech service.

l

Optimal AMR voice quality is gained.

l

Activate AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment.

Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).

Verify AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment. Select a BTS that provides continuous cell coverage. In the coverage area of the test cell, select a test path where the downlink level ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm and is equally distributed along the test path. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Speech Version set to at least FULL_RATE_VER1 (FULL-RATE VER 1),FULL_RATE_VER3(FULL-RATE VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(HALF-RATE VER 3).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).

3.

Connect the MOS tester to the test MS, use the test MS to make a call, and then perform a drive test on the test path. NOTE

The recommended test scheme is as follows: The distance of the test path is 1 km to 2 km, the moving speed of the vehicle for the drive test is 20 km/h, and the drive test is performed three times (three come-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO (No).

5.

Repeat Step 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239



6.

Compared the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5 to find the difference in voice quality when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) and when it is set to NO(No). Expected result: The MOS when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS when AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to NO(No).

l

Deactivate AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO (No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell) to view the value of AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed. Expected result: AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to NO(No).

l

l

Activate AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Is RATSCCH Function Enabled to ENABLE(Enable).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Measurement Report Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report).

Verify AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment. Select a BTS that provides continuous cell coverage. In the coverage area of the test cell, select a test path where the downlink level ranges from -50 dBm to -110 dBm and is equally distributed.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Speech Version set to at least FULL_RATE_VER1 (FULL-RATE VER 1),FULL_RATE_VER3(FULL-RATE VER 3) and HALF_RATE_VER3(HALF-RATE VER 3).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to YES(Yes).

3.

Connect the MOS tester to the test MS, use the test MS to make a call, and then perform a drive test on the test path.


240


58 Configuring AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment NOTE

The recommended test scheme is as follows: The distance of the test path is 1 km to 2 km, the moving speed of the vehicle for the drive test is 20 km/h, and the drive test is performed three times (three come-and-goes). Record the MOSs and calculate the average MOS.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).

5.

Repeat Step 3.

6.

Compared the data recorded in Step 3 and Step 5 to find the difference in voice quality when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) and when it is set to NO(No). Expected result: The MOS when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to YES(Yes) is higher than the MOS when AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to NO(No).

l

Deactivate AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed set to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell) to view the value of AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed. Expected result: AMR Downlink Adaptive Threshold Allowed is set to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRUADTHAW=YES; //Deactivating AMR uplink adaptive threshold adjustment SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRUADTHAW=NO; //Activating AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRDADTHAW=YES; //Deactivating AMR downlink adaptive threshold adjustment SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AMRDADTHAW=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


241



59

Configuring WB AMR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115507 WB AMR.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when they use a non-optimized DTRU.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the TrFO feature in A over IP mode. TrFO needs to be enabled on the MGW or MSC Server.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS, MGW, and MSC server support this feature.

Context l

WB AMR is a coding scheme that can significantly improve speech quality. Using WB AMR, the sampling rate is increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extended to 0.05-7 kHz. WB AMR provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech compared with the narrow band AMR with the sampling rate of 8 kHz and the speech frequency range between 200 Hz and 3400 Hz.

l

WB AMR adopts the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports the rates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242



Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the access control parameters for the cell. NOTE

Select the FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) check box under the parameter Speech Version while retaining the default speech versions.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control AMR Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the call control AMR parameters for the cell. The call control AMR parameters are AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2[WB], AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1[WB], and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2[WB]. NOTE

When transmission quality over the Um interface is good, the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold should be relatively low. In this way, a rate can be easily increased to improve speech quality. If the value of the coding rate adjustment threshold is high, a low rate coding mode should be used to improve robustness over the Um interface. Reducing the coding rate hysteresis leads to frequent rate adjustments.

l

l


Use two MSs supporting WB AMR to call each other.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to verify that the value of Channel Service Type is AMR_WB.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear the FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5) check box under the parameter Speech Version.

----End

Example //Activating WB AMR SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-1; //Verifying WB AMR DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13818889988"; //Deactivating WB AMR SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER5-0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


243



60

Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech (HR).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables the operator to expand the network capacity and improve the frequency usage without increasing the hardware investment. In addition, a higher traffic volume can be carried on an E1.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Speech Version of a cell to FULL_RATE_VER1 (Full-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1),HALF_RATE_VER3(Half-rate VER 3), and HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2). HALF_RATE_VER2(Half-rate VER 2) of Speech Version is reserved for compliance with protocols. Currently, no service uses HR speech version 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCACCESS to view the setting of Speech Version of a specified cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244



Expected result: The activated speech versions are labeled USED. l

Deactivation Procedure At least one speech version must be configured for the BSC6900. Therefore, the deactivation procedure is unnecessary. However, you can Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the speech version.

----End

Example //Activating half rate speech (HR) SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER 1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


245



61

Configuring Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

With GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR, the full-rate (FR) channels and the half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell during a call. In this manner, the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle can be prevented. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Others Prerequisites – The cell works properly.

Context l

Precautions None

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

TCH Rate Adjust Allow

TCHAJFLAG

YES(Yes)

Network planning


246



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold

TCHBUSYTHRES

You are advised to use the default value.

Network planning

Set this parameter to a small value to increase the proportion of MSs on TCHHs and set this parameter to a large value to reduce the proportion of MSs on TCHHs. Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed

HRIUOLDRATES ELALLOW

This parameter is required for concentric cells, including coBCCH cells.

Network planning

Tch Traffic Busy Overlay Threshold

TCHTRICBUSYO VERLAYTHR


Network planning

For a concentric cell, set this parameter to a small value to increase the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the overlaid subcell and set this parameter to a large value to reduce the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the overlaid subcell.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


247



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold

TCHTRIBUSYUN DERLAYTHR


Network planning

For a concentric cell, set this parameter to a small value to increase the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the underlaid subcell and set this parameter to a large value to reduce the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the underlaid subcell. AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold

AMRTCHHPRIO RLOAD


Network planning

This parameter is required if the cell enables the AMR function. Set this value to a small value to increase the proportion of MSs on AMR TCHHs and set this parameter to a large value to reduce the proportion of MSs on AMR TCHHs. NOTE l This parameter is valid only if AMRTCHHP RIORALLOW is set to ON (On). l This parameter is invalid for concentric cells if AMRLOADO PTEN and HRIUOLDRA TESELALLO W are set to YES (Yes) at the same time.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


248



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

AMR Load Calculation Optimization

AMRLOADOPTE N

You are advised to set this parameter to YES(Yes) for a concentric cell.

Network planning

For AMR calls in a concentric cell, set this parameter to YES(Yes) if the proportion of MSs on TCHHs needs to be accurately controlled in the overlaid and underlaid subcells. NOTE This parameter is valid only if AMRTCHHPRIO RALLOW is set to ON(On).

Threshold for OL Load with AMR HR Preferred

INNAMRTCHHP RIORLOAD


Network planning

For AMR calls in a concentric cell, set this parameter to a small value if you need to increase the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the overlaid subcell. Set this parameter to a large value if you need to decrease the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the overlaid subcell. NOTE This parameter is valid only if AMRLOADOPTE N and HRIUOLDRATES ELALLOW are set to YES(Yes), and AMRTCHHPRIO RALLOW is set to ON(On).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


249



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Threshold for UL Load with AMR HR Preferred

OUTAMRTCHHP RIORLOAD


Network planning

For AMR calls in a concentric cell, set this parameter to a small value if you need to increase the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the underlaid subcell. Set this parameter to a large value if you need to decrease the proportion of MSs on TCHHs in the underlaid subcell. NOTE This parameter is valid only if AMRLOADOPTE N and HRIUOLDRATES ELALLOW are set to YES(Yes), and AMRTCHHPRIO RALLOW is set to ON(On).

TCHH Allocation Considering Signal Level

JudgeRxLevWhenAssignHr

You are advised to set this parameter to OFF(Off).

Network planning

If this parameter is set to ON(On), you need to consider the signal level when assigning the TCHHs. If the signal level is too low, assign the TCHFs. There is no need to consider the signal level if this parameter is set to OFF(Off).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


250



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Level Threshold for TCHH Allocation

MinRxLevWhenAs signHr


Network planning

This parameter specifies the lowest signal level threshold for assigning AMR calls the TCHHs. The TCHFs channels are assigned to MSs if the signal level is lower than the parameter value, and otherwise the TCHHs channels are assigned to MSs. This parameter is valid only when JudgeRxLevWhenAssignHr is set to ON(On). You are advised to set this parameter to a value smaller than the maximum transmit power of TRXs in a cell minus AMRFULLTOH ALFHOPATHTH RESH. For non-AMR calls, the decision principle is as follows: When NOAMRFULLT OHALFHOALL OW is set to NO (No), TCHFs are preferentially assigned if the RX signal level is lower than the parameter value plus 5. Otherwise, TCHHs

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


251



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

are preferentially assigned. When NOAMRFULLT OHALFHOALL OW is set to YES (Yes), TCHFs are preferentially assigned if the RX signal level is lower than the value (this parameter value + AMRFULLTOH ALFHOPATHTH RESH NOAMRFULLT OHALFHOPATH THRESH). Otherwise, TCHHs are preferentially assigned.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) for each TRX you want to configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow of a TRX to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the threshold for dynamic adjustment between TCHHs and TCHFs. – For non-AMR calls in a common cell, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to an appropriate value based on the actual requirement. For non-AMR calls in a concentric cell whose Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed is set to YES (Yes), set Tch Traffic Busy Overlay Threshold and Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold to appropriate values. – For AMR calls, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), and set other parameters as follows: – For common cells, set AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to an appropriate value based on individual needs. – For concentric cells, if Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed and AMR Load Calculation Optimization are not set to YES(Yes) at the same time, set AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to an appropriate value based on individual needs. If Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed and AMR

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


252



Load Calculation Optimization are set to YES(Yes) at the same time, set Threshold for OL Load with AMR HR Preferred for overlaid subcells and Threshold for UL Load with AMR HR Preferred for underlaid subcells to appropriate values. – When the BSC preferentially assigns TCHHs, and TCHH Allocation Considering Signal Level is set to ON(On), the BSC performs a decision on the RX signal level in addition to the traffic volume. If the RX signal level is less than the value for Level Threshold for TCHH Allocation, TCHFs are preferentially assigned. If the RX signal level is greater than or equal to the value for Level Threshold for TCHH Allocation, TCHHs are preferentially assigned. l

Verification Procedure Assume that non-AMR calls are performed in a common cell. Only the traffic volume, instead of the RX signal level, is considered in assignment of TCHHs. The verification procedure is as follows: 1.

Monitor channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned TCHHs.

3.

Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. A TCHF is converted into two TCHHs and are occupied by MSs.

4.

Terminate the call. Expected result: The TCHHs are not converted into a TCHF.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) to block all TCHFs in the cell.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 100 to ensure that new calls are preferentially assigned TCHFs. NOTE

In Step 6, if the calling party and the called party camp on the same cell, reserve a TCHF to ensure successful setup of the call.

7.

Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. The MS occupies a TCHF.

Assume that non-AMR calls are performed in a common cell. The traffic volume and RX signal level are considered in assignment of TCHHs. The verification procedure is as follows: 1.

Monitor channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to specify the corresponding cell. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold and Level Threshold for TCHH Allocation to 0.

3.

Use an MS to initiate a call in the cell. Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. The MS occupies a TCHH.

4. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Terminate the call. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253



Expected result: The TCHHs are not converted into a TCHF. 5.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD to change Level Threshold for TCHH Allocation of the corresponding cell to 63. Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. The MS occupies a TCHF.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) for each TRX you want to configure. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property) to query the setting of TCH Rate Adjust Allow. Expected result: The value of TCH Rate Adjust Allow is NO.

----End

Example //Activating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=60, JudgeRxLevWhenAssignHr=ON, MinRxLevWhenAssignHr=15; //Deactivating Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=NO; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, TCHAJFLAG=NO; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, TCHAJFLAG=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


254



62

Configuring Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115522 Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The test cell is enabled with the half-rate (HR) function. In addition, the test cell is configured with available full-rate traffic channels (TCHFs) and half-rate traffic channels (TCHHs).

Context The Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation feature specifies dynamic adjustment of TCHH/TCHF resources for established calls based on channel resource usage in the cell. l

If channel resources are sufficient, calls that use TCHHs but experience poor radio transmission quality are handed over to TCHFs to improve the speech quality.

l

If channel resources are insufficient, calls that use TCHFs and enjoy good radio transmission quality are handed over to TCHHs to improve the cell capacity.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


255



Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set its parameters based on actual conditions. – When Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I), AMR calls support this feature if Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to YES(Yes); non-AMR calls and AMR calls support this feature if Intracell FH HO Allowed is set to HOBASECAPANDQUAL (HOBASECAPANDQUAL), and AMR F-H Ho Allowed and Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed are set to YES(Yes). – When Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II), non-AMR and AMR calls support this feature if Intracell HO Allowed is set to YES(Yes), and AMR F-H Ho Allowed and Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed are set to YES(Yes). 2.

Configure FR/HR call conversion. – Convert full-rate calls to half-rate calls.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2 (Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER3(Halfrate VER 3), and FULL_RATE_VER5(Full-rate VER 5).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, if Current HO Control Algorithm is set to either HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) or HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to HOBASECAPANDQUAL (HOBASECAPANDQUAL), set the following parameters to appropriate values based on actual conditions: AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, AMR FH Ho Qual. Threshold, AMR F-H HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR F-H HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, F-H HO Load Band Optimization Allowed, TCHFTCHH HO Load Hysteresis, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, F-H Ho Stat. Time, and F-H Ho Last Time. For concentric cells, set FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay and FH ATCB Offset Overlay to appropriate values based on actual conditions. If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to YES(Yes), set Intracell F-H HO Stat Time, Intracell F-H HO Last Time, and F2H HO Threshold based on actual conditions.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256



Batches). In this step, set Ratio of AMR-HR and Ratio of TCHH based on actual conditions. d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold based on actual conditions.

– Convert half-rate calls to full-rate calls.

l

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full-rate VER 1), FULL_RATE_VER2 (Full-rate VER 2), FULL_RATE_VER3(Full-rate VER 3), HALF_RATE_VER1(Half-rate VER 1), HALF_RATE_VER3(Halfrate VER 3), and HALF_RATE_VER5(Half-rate VER 5).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, if Current HO Control Algorithm is set to either HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) or HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to HOBASECAPANDQUAL (HOBASECAPANDQUAL), set the following parameters to appropriate values based on actual conditions: AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, AMR HF Ho Qual. Threshold, AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, H-F Ho Stat. Time, and H-F Ho Last Time. For concentric cells, set H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay and H-F ATCB Offset Overlay. If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to YES(Yes), set H2F HO Threshold to an appropriate value based on actual conditions.


The following configuration is temperarily implemented to quickly bring this feature into effect. For a commercial network, implement the configuration as planned. Restore to the original configuration after the verification.

Convert full-rate calls to half-rate calls. – If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to YES(Yes):

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF(Off) in a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set F2H HO Threshold to 0 in a specified cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.

4.

Trace BSSAP messages over the A interface and RSL messages over the Abis interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface, respectively.

5.

Use an MS to make a call in a cell where the message tracing over the A interface and Abis interface is started.

6.

Check the results of message tracing over the A interface and Abis interface.

Expected result: The calls have been set up and the voice quality is good. During the call setup, the speech version in use is FAMR. During the call, the speech version changes to HAMR. The Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages can be traced over the Abis interface. – If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to either HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) or HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to HOBASECAPANDQUAL(HOBASECAPANDQUAL): 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF(Off) in a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold to 0, F-H HO Load Band Optimization Allowed to OFF(Off), F-H Ho Period to 1, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold to 7, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold to 255, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold to -63, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold to 0, Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold to 7, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold to 255, and set NonAMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold to -63.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Ratio of AMR-HR and Ratio of TCHH to 100.

4.


5.


6.


Expected result: The calls have been set up and the voice quality is good. During the call setup, the speech version in use is FAMR. During the call, the speech version changes to HAMR. The Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages can be traced over the Abis interface. Convert half-rate calls to full-rate calls. – If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to YES(Yes):

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to 0, and TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 in a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set H2F HO Threshold to 39 in a specified cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Ratio of AMR-HR to 100. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258



4.


5.


6.


Expected result: The calls have been set up and the voice quality is good. During the call setup, the speech version in use is FAMR. During the call, the speech version changes to HAMR. The Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages can be traced over the Abis interface. – If Current HO Control Algorithm is set to either HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I) or HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II) and Intracell F-H HO Allowed is set to HOBASECAPANDQUAL(HOBASECAPANDQUAL): 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to 0, and TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 in a specified cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR H-F Traffic Threshold to 100, F-H HO Load Band Optimization Allowed to OFF(Off), AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold and AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune to 0, and set Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold and Non-AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune to 0 in a specified cell.

3.


4.


5.


Expected result: The calls have been set up and the voice quality is good. During the call setup, the speech version in use is FAMR. During the call, the speech version changes to HAMR. The Handover Detection and Handover Complete messages can be traced over the Abis interface. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell) to query the value of AMR F-H Ho Allowed. Expected result: The value of AMR F-H Ho Allowed is NO(No).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to NO(No).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell) to query the value of Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259



Expected result: The value of Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed is NO(No). 5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to NO(No).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell) to query the value of Intracell F-H HO Allowed. Expected result: The value of Intracell F-H HO Allowed is NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation when handover algorithm II is used SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES; //Activating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation for AMR and non-AMR calls when handover algorithm I is used SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=HOBASECAPANDQUAL, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES; //Activating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation for AMR calls when handover algorithm I is used SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES; //Deactivating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation when handover algorithm II is used SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=NO, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=NO; //Deactivating Dynamic HR/FR Adaptation when handover algorithm I is used SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, INTRACELLFHHOEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


260



63

Configuring VAMOS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, RRU3008 V1, RRU3008 V2, RRU3928, RRU3929, MRFUd, and MRFUe of 3900 series base stations support VAMOS. – VAMOS-capable MSs are classified into Non-SAIC, SAIC, VAMOS level I, and VAMOS level II. At present, VAMOS level I and VAMOS level II MSs are not available for commercial use.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report(EMR), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell, GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell or GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC). – In Abis over TDM mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR / GBFD-113401 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. – In Abis over IP mode, the configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-117601 Configuring HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm, GBFD-115502 AMR HR/GBFD-113401 Configuring Half Rate Speech (HR), GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC, and GBFD-118601 Configuring Abis over IP / GBFD-118611 Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – VAMOS supports the following transmission modes over the Abis interface: TDM in Flex Abis mode, Ethernet IP, IP over E1, and high level data link control (HDLC).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


261



– Double-timeslot cells and repeaters do not support VAMOS. – VAMOS is incompatible with enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP), that is, resources occupied by VAMOS-capable MSs cannot be preempted. – VAMOS timeslots cannot be integrated for PS services.

Context Voice services over Adaptive Multi-user Orthogonal Subchannels (VAMOS) aims to expand the capacity of a GSM network without adding TRXs or frequencies. Without adding any configurations, VAMOS increases the traffic volume. Although VAMOS expands the network capacity and reduces the network congestion rate, it affects the voice quality and deteriorates some other KPIs. Therefore, it is recommended that the Half-Rate Service feature be enabled preferentially to expand network capacity and VAMOS be enabled only when network capacity needs to be further expanded. VAMOS is not recommended for users sensitive to voice quality. VAMOS is applicable to scenarios with loose frequency reuse. VAMOS deteriorates voice quality and causes interference to the entire network. Therefore, it is recommended that VAMOS multiplexing be enabled to increase network capacity when channels are congested in a cell and VAMOS demultiplexing be enabled to improve voice quality when the cell load is low. Call drops may occur if users dynamically add a carrier in a network where the VAMOS feature has been enabled. Therefore, it is recommended that users perform this operation in low traffic hours. VAMOS multiplexing is classified into: l

VAMOS multiplexing during assignment

l

VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover

VAMOS demultiplexing is classified into: l

VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load

l

VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality

l

Optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality NOTE

The BSS automatically resets the cell after you change the setting of the VAMOS Switch parameter. The BSS forces inter-cell handovers for ongoing calls in the cell before resetting the cell and considers a handover failure as a call drop.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set III Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262



Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On), set Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to appropriate values. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Waiting for MR on SDCCH Switch to ON(On), set Duration for Waiting MR on SDCCH to appropriate values.

– Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On), set Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to appropriate values.

– Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On), set Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to appropriate values.

– Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On), set Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On), set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to appropriate values.

– Activating optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263



Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set III Power Control Optimized Enable to YES(Yes). 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On), Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On), and BQ VAMOS Channel Demultiplex Optimize to ON(On), and set Primary TSC in VAMOS and Secondary TSC in VAMOS to appropriate values.



– Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment Assume that there are idle half-rate traffic channels (TCHHs) in cell 0, both MS 1 and MS 2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF (Off),set Load of UL-OL Cells Rate Select Allowed to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set both Ratio of TCHH and Ratio of AMR-HR to 100.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set TCH Rate Modify to YES(Yes).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to ON (On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, Channel Multiplex ATCB Thres. Offset in Asgmt. to 0, ATCB Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, Channel Multiplex Rx Qual. Thres. Offset in Asgmt. to 0, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. to 70, Path Loss Offset Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63,Load Thres. in Overlaid Subcell to 0, and set ATCB Offset in Overlaid Subcell to 128.

5.

Start channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 63-1 shows the TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-1 TCHH status 1

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

6.

Use MS 1 to call a fixed-line phone in cell 0. After the call is connected, use MS 2 to call another fixed-line phone in cell 0.

7.

Check the TCHH status in cell 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264



Expected result: The calls are processed correctly and the call quality is good. MS 1 and MS 2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 63-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-2 TCHH status 2

– Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS 1 and MS 2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF (Off).

2.


3.


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, ATCB Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and Path Loss Offset Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63.

5.


6.


7.

Check the TCHH status in cell 0. Expected result: The calls are processed correctly and the call quality is good. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs during call establishment. Figure 63-4 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-4 TCHH status 2

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


265



8.

Several seconds later, MS 1 and MS 2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 63-5 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-5 TCHH status 3

– Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS 1 and MS 2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both VAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to ON(On) and set Load Thres. of Channel Demultiplex to 100.

5.


6.


7.


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


266



8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, trigger a VAMOS multiplexing handover of an MS and check the TCHH status. Figure 63-8 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-8 TCHH status 3

9.

Check the TCHH status in cell 0 several seconds later. Figure 63-9 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-9 TCHH status 4

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performed successfully, MS 1 and MS 2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several seconds later, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs. – Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS 1 and MS 2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS. 1.


2.


3.


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both VAMOS Switch and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On) and set both UL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres.. and DL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres. to 0.

5.


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


267



6.


7.


8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, trigger a VAMOS multiplexing handover of an MS and check the TCHH status. Figure 63-12 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-12 TCHH status 3

9.

Check the TCHH status in cell 0 several seconds later. Figure 63-13 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-13 TCHH status 4

Expected result: After VAMOS multiplexing through handover is performed successfully, MS 1 and MS 2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Several seconds later, VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered and MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs. – Verifying optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, both MS 1 and MS 2 support SAIC, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, and the BTS supports VAMOS. 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0 and AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to OFF (Off). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268



2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, use MS 1 or MS 2 to perform a VAMOS handover and check the TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-16 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-16 TCHH status 3

8.

Enable the bad quality (BQ) handover algorithm to verify that the BSC allows only handovers based on VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality and prohibits other quality-based handovers (interference handovers, BQ handovers, and TCHF-TCHH handovers). To enable the BQ handover algorithm, perform the following operations: a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Intracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and BQ HO Allowed to YES (Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269



9.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set DL Qual. Threshold to 0 and UL Qual. Threshold to 0.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL. In this step, set DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR to 0 and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR to 0.

Check the TCHH status in cell 0. Expected result: MS 1 and MS 2 remain in the multiplexing state and BQ handovers are not performed.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On), BQ VAMOS Channel Demultiplex Optimize to ON(On), UL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres. to 0, and DL RX Bad Qual. Demultiplex Thres. to 0. 11. Check the TCHH status in cell 0 several seconds later. Figure 63-17 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 63-17 TCHH status 4

Expected result: VAMOS demultiplexing is triggered several seconds after optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality is activated. Several seconds later, the MS whose speech quality is better performs a BQ handover and the MS whose speech quality is poorer does not perform a BQ handover until the BQ VAMOS Channel Demultiplex Penalty Period expires. l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On) and Allow Channel Multiplex in Assignment to OFF(Off).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to OFF (Off).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Waiting for MR on SDCCH Switch to OFF(Off).

– Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270



GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On) and Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to OFF(Off). 2.


– Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On) and Channel Demultiplex on Low Cell Load to OFF(Off).

2.


– Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On) and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual to OFF(Off).

2.


– Deactivating optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On), Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to ON(On), and BQ VAMOS Channel Demultiplex Optimize to OFF(Off).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON (On) and Channel Demultiplex on Bad Qual. to OFF(Off).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > VAMOS Channel Multiplex Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VAMOS Switch to OFF (off).

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


271



Example //Activating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=ON; //Verifying VAMOS multiplexing during assignment SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON, HRIUOLDRATESELALLOW=NO; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100; SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=ON, VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosAssMultAtcbOffset=0, VamosAssUlQualThdOffset=0, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63, VamosIuoInnerAtcbThd=128, VamosIuoInnerLoadThd=0; //Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing during assignment SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosAssSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDCCHWaitMREn=OFF; //Activating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2; //Verifying VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100; SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,TCHBUSYTHRES=0; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63; //Deactivating VAMOS multiplexing through intra-cell handover SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF; //Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2; //Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100; SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


272



SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseLoadThd=100; //Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to low cell load SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosLoadReuseSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF; //Activating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2; //Verifying VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseDownLinkQualThd=0, VamosQualReuseUpLinkQualThd=0; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100; //Deactivating VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF; //Activating optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality SET GCELLPWR3: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRCTRLOPTIMIZEDEN=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualUndoPntSwitch=ON,VamosMainTsc=0, VamosSubTsc=2; //Verifying optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality SET OTHSOFTPARA: TCHRATEMODIFY=YES; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualUndoPntSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseDownLinkQualThd=0, VamosQualReuseUpLinkQualThd=0; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=OFF; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ALLOWHALFRATEUSERPERC=100, ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, BQHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DLQUALIMIT=0, ULQUALIMIT=0; SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DLQUALIMITAMRHR=0, ULQUALIMITAMRHR=0; //Deactivating optimization of VAMOS demultiplexing due to poor voice quality SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=ON, VamosQualUndoPntSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosQualReuseSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


273



64

Configuring Mute SAIC MS Identification

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – This feature cannot be used together with the GBFD-115702 TrFO feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature is not applicable to the A over IP transmission mode because the results of identifying mute SAIC-capable MSs be inaccurate.

Context VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Mute SAIC MSs are the MSs that support SAIC but report Non-SAIC in CLASSMARK3. A nonSAIC MS can only be multiplexed with a VAMOS Level II MS. However, VAMOS level II MSs are not available for commercial use at present. To improve VAMOS multiplexing rate, Huawei BSC provides an effective detection mechanism to identify the Mute SAIC MSs. A database is created at the BSC to record whether an MS is a Mute SAIC MS. The BSC differentiates Mute SAIC MSs from Non-SAIC MSs upon channel allocation. The Mute VAMOS MS Identification is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and limited network capacity. The MS drop off when the BSC When the Mute SAIC MS identification is enabled, call drops may occur during detection of SAIC-capable MSs. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


274



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with its parameters set as follows: – Set Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch and Auto Mute SAIC Identification Switch to ON(On). – Set Average RX Qual Difference Threshold, Abnormal Average RX Qual Times Threshold, and Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify to appropriate values. NOTE

The value of Abnormal Average RX Qual Times Threshold must be less than or equal to the value of Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify. If the value of Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify is constant, a larger value of Abnormal Average RX Qual Times Threshold indicates that an MS is more likely to be identified as a mute SAIC MS. It is recommended that Abnormal Average RX Qual Times Threshold be set to 1 when Periods for Auto Mute SAIC Identify is set to the default value of 3.

2.

Wait about one month.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command EXP MSSAICCAPMML to export the mute SAIC MS detection result in an MML script. In this step, set Export type to NEWDATA(New generated data) and File Name to the name of the MML script. The MML script file is saved in the \bam\version_x\ftp\ms_saic_cap path. NOTE

l Use File Manager on the LMT to locate the script file in the save path. l version_x refers to the active OMU workspace.You can run the LST OMUAREA command to query it. The value of Workarea flag in the command output indicates the active OMU workspace.

l

4.

Run the MML script to import the mute SAIC MS identification result into the SAIC MS capability database.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS to disable the mute SAIC MS detection. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On), and Auto Mute SAIC Identification Switch to OFF (Off).

Verification Procedure Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, the Abis interface uses IP transmission, the BTS supports VAMOS, and MS 1 and MS 2 are Mute SAIC MSs. NOTE

The parameters should be set to their recommended values for a commercial network. The following operations are recommended only when you want to enable this feature immediately:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On), Allow Channel Multiplex via In-Cell HO to ON(On), Channel Multiplex Load Thres. to 0, ATCB Thres. of Established SAIC Calls to 1, UL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, DL Rx Qual. Thres. of Established Calls to 70, and Path Loss Offset Thres. of VAMOS Call to 63.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275



4.

View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model and origin comprise the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP. In this step, specify MS 1 as a Mute SAIC MS, and set TAC to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag to YES(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain). NOTE

If you are not sure whether an MS is a problem SAIC MS, set Problem SAIC Flag to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP. In this step, specify MS 2 as a Mute SAIC MS, and set TAC to the initial eight digits of the IMEI, Mute SAIC Flag to YES(Yes), and Problem SAIC Flag to UNCERTAIN(Uncertain).

7.


8.

Use MS 1 and MS 2 to call each other in cell 0.

9.

Observe the TCHH status in cell 0. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs. Figure 64-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 64-2 TCHH status 2

10. Check whether two MSs are multiplexed a few seconds later. Figure 64-3 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0 after multiplexing. Figure 64-3 TCHH status 3

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VamosSwitch to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF (Off). 12. Run Step 8 through Step 10 again. The two MSs cannot be multiplexed. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


276


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Mute SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating Mute SAIC MS identification SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=ON; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=ON, MuteSaicIdeSwitch=OFF; //Verifying Mute SAIC MS identification SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, VamosMultLoadThd=0, VamosIntraHoSwitch=ON, VamosIntraHoSaicAtcbThd=1, VamosIntraHoUlQualThd=70, VamosIntraHoDlQualThd=70, VamosPathLossMaxDiffValue=63; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=0; SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES; ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=YES, ProSAICFlag=UNCERTAIN; ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=YES, ProSAICFlag=UNCERTAIN; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=OFF; //Deactivating Mute SAIC MS identification SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, MuteSaicSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


277



65

Configuring VAMOS Call Drop Solution

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. – This feature cannot be used together with the GBFD-115702 TrFO feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature is not applicable to the A over IP transmission mode because the results of identifying defective SAIC-capable MSs may be inaccurate.

Context VAMOS aims to expand the GSM network capacity without adding TRXs or frequencies. Test results, however, indicate that call drops are likely to occur after SAIC-capable MSs are multiplexed with other MSs. To obtain the desired capacity gain through VAMOS, the BSC provides a mechanism to identify defective SAIC-capable MSs so that these MSs can be multiplexed with other suitable MSs based on support capability. In addition, the BSC uses a power control policy specific to defective SAIC-capable MSs to ensure speech quality. A database is created at the BSC to record whether the MSs under the BSC have defects in SAIC. All the MSs under the BSC are classified into three types: defective SAIC-capable MSs that cannot use VAMOS, defective SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alpha hopping modulation, and normal SAIC-capable MSs that can use VAMOS but require alphaQPSK modulation. Before allocating a channel to an MS, the BSC determines the MS type and the required modulation scheme by checking the records in the database. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


278



The VAMOS call drop solution is applicable in scenarios with loose frequency reuse and limited network capacity.When the VAMOS call drop solution is enabled, call drops may occur during detection of SAIC-capable MSs with AFC defects.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with its parameters set as follows: – Set Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch and Problem SAIC Terminal Identify Switch to ON(On). – Set Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Differ Thres, Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres, and Auto Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MSto appropriate values. NOTE

If the value of Auto Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS is constant, a larger value of Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres indicates that an MS is more likely to be identified as a SAIC MS that allows VAMOS channel multiplexing using the Alpha hopping modulation. It is recommended that Faulty SAIC MS Mean RX Qual Abnor Thres be set to 1 when Auto Identify Periods for Faulty SAIC MS is set to the default value of 3.

2.

Wait about one month.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command EXP MSSAICCAPMML to export the problem SAIC MS detection result in an MML script. In this step, set Export typeto NEWDATA(New generated data) and File Name to the name of the MML script. The MML script file is saved in the \bam\version_x\ftp\ms_saic_cap path. NOTE

l Use File Manager on the LMT to locate the script file in the save path. l version_x refers to the active OMU workspace. You can run the LST OMUAREA command to query it. The value of Workarea flag in the command output indicates the active OMU workspace.

l

4.

Run the MML script to import the problem SAIC MS identification result into the SAIC MS capability database.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS with VAMOS Switch set to ON(On), Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch set to ON(On), and Problem SAIC Terminal Identify Switch set to OFF(Off).

Verification Procedure Assume that there are idle TCHHs in cell 0, IP transmission is used over the Abis interface, the BTS supports VAMOS, and MS 1 and MS 2 are SAIC-capable but MS 2 has defects in SAIC. NOTE

The parameters should be set to their recommended values for a commercial network. The following operations are recommended only when you want to enable this feature immediately:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 0.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279



4.

Initiate channel status monitoring in cell 0. Figure 65-1 shows the TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 65-1 TCHH status 1

5.

Use MS 1 and MS 2 to call each other in cell 0.

6.

Check the TCHH status in cell 0. MS 1 and MS 2 occupy their respective TCHHs. Figure 65-2 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 65-2 TCHH status 2

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, hand over an MS for VAMOS multiplexing. MS 1 and MS 2 are multiplexed on the same TCHH. Figure 65-3 shows the possible TCHH status in cell 0. Figure 65-3 TCHH status 3

8.

A call drop occurs on defective SAIC-capable MS 2 a few seconds later.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set both VAMOS Switch and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to ON(On).

10. View the International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI) on the back of each MS or input *#06# on each MS to display their respective IMEIs. The MS model comprises the initial 8-digit portion of the IMEI, known as type approval code (TAC). 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP. In this step, specify MS 1 as a normal SAIC-capable MS, and set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS 1, Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved). 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GMSSAICCAP. In this step, specify MS 2 as a defective SAIC-capable MS, and set TAC to the first eight digits of the IMEI of MS 2, Mute SAIC Flag to NOTINVOLVED(Not involved), and Problem SAIC Flag to JUMP_ALPHA(Alpha hopping modulation). 13. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to multiplex MS 1 and MS 2 on the same TCHH. MS 2 does not experience a call drop. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


280



Expected result: When Problem SAIC Flag is set to NO(No), a call drop occurs in MS 2 after being multiplexed with normal SAIC-capable MS 1. When Problem SAIC Flag is set to YES(Yes), MS 2 does not experience a call drop after being multiplexed with normal SAIC-capable MS 1. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLVAMOS. In this step, set VAMOS Switch to ON(On) and Problem SAIC Terminal Processing Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating VAMOS Call Drop Solution SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=ON; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=ON, SaicProMsIdeSwitch=OFF; //Verifying VAMOS Call Drop Solution SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=OFF; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, TCHBUSYTHRES=0; SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET FHO: OBJTYPE=CHN, TRXID=0, CHNO=1, HOMOD=VAMOSREUSE, SUBCHNO=0, DESTTRXID=1, DESTCHNO=7, DESTSUBCHNO=0; SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=ON; ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="11111111", MuteSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED, ProSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED; ADD GMSSAICCAP: TAC="22222222", MuteSAICFlag=NOTINVOLVED, ProSAICFlag=JUMP_ALPHA; //Deactivating VAMOS Call Drop Solution SET GCELLVAMOS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VamosSwitch=ON, SaicProMsSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


281


66


Configuring Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – An XPUa/XPUb board is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The cell broadcast center (CBC) works properly and supports handshake with the BSC. – The hardware and software of the CBC and the corresponding networking equipment are installed.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the attributes for a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right clink XPU Board > Properties > VLAN Attributes of XPU board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the VLAN attributes of the XPU board. In this step, specify IP Address as required and set the VLAN attributes at the BSC6900 that is connected to the CBC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET XPUPORT (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right clink XPU Board > Properties > Port Attributes of XPU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the attributes of ports on the XPU board. In this step, set Panel Port Switch to OPEN(Open).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCBSADDR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > CBC Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add CBC address. In this step, set the following parameters: – Set CBC INDEX to appropriate value. – Set OP INDEX SET to the index of the operator to which the cell to be verified belongs. – Set Subrack No., Slot No., CPU NO, and BSC IP to those of the XPU board added by Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD XPUVLAN (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right clink XPU Board > Properties > VLAN Attributes of XPU board; CME batch modification center: not supported) command. – Set BSC Port to appropriate value. – Set BSC GateWay IP to the gateway IP address of the lab. – Set CBC IP to the IP address of the CBC. – Set Mask to appropriate value. – Set CBC Port to appropriate value. – Set If CB Shake Hand to YES(Yes). – Set CBC ITF Para to appropriate value.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) to set TRX and channel attributes. In this step, specify Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH (BCCH+CBCH) or SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH). NOTE

If Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of any TRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.

6. l

Add the settings of the BSC, cell, area, channel, and user on the CBC side, and divide cells into different cell groups. In addition, send cell broadcast messages to the cells.


Connect an Ethernet cable to the port whose Panel Port Switch is set to OPEN (Open). Then, Ensure that the IP address of this port can be pinged. Expected result: The IP address can be pinged. The port works properly.

2.

Use an MS enabled with the CBC function to access the network in different cells, and initiate message tracing on the BSC-CBC(Cb interface) and Abis interfaces. Expected result: In the initial phase of connection, the messages CBCH Query and CBCH Query Response are traced on the BSC-CBC interface. When system information messages are sent, messages Write/Replace Message and Report are traced on the BSC-CBC interface. The SMS Broadcast Command message is traced on the Abis interface.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


283



The MS properly receives the cell broadcast messages sent from the CBC. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCBSADDR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > CBC Address; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, remove CBC information add in step4.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV XPUVLAN (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right clink XPU Board > Properties > VLAN Attributes of XPU board; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, remove the VLAN attributes of the XPU board add in step2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

Example /*Activating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*/ //Enabling cell broadcast MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD; //Setting the VLAN attributes of the XPU board ADD XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, MAC=0, IP="10.161.72.185", NETMASK="255.255.255.0"; //Setting attributes of the port on the XPU board SET XPUPORT: SRN=0, SN=0, PortSwitch=OPEN; //Adding CBC information ADD GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0, OPINDEXSET=OPINDEX0-1&OPINDEX1-0&OPINDEX2-0&OPINDEX3-0, SRN=0, SN=0, CPUN=1, BSCIP="10.161.72.185", BSCPORT=5000, BSCGATEWAYIP="19.168.6.1", CBCIP="19.168.6.20", MASK="255.255.255.0", CBCPORT=6000; //Setting TRX parameters SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH; /*Deactivating Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)*/ //Remove CBC information RMV GCBSADDR: CBCINDEX=0; //Remove the VLAN attributes of the XPU board RMV XPUVLAN: SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1; //Disabling cell broadcast MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


284


67


Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The XPUa/XPUb board is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23).

l


Context The Simplified Cell Broadcast feature provides simple cell broadcast services when there is no available CBC system.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR to modify the attributes of a GSM operator. In this step, set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE (SupportSimple CB).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, set Channel No., and set TRX ID to the index of the BCCH TRX in the cell to be verified and Channel Type to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH+CBCH). NOTE

If Channel Type is set to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH+CBCH), set TRX ID to the index of any TRX and Channel No. to a value within the range 0 to 3.

3.

Send cell broadcast messages. – Sending a specified message without any restrictions

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


285



a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSBC. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and set Support Cell Broadcast Name to YES(Yes). Set Chan ID, Geography Scope, Broadcast Content, Coding Scheme, and Broadcast Interval to appropriate values.

– Sending a specified message at a specified time a specified number of transmission times a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GSMSCB. In this step, set Cell Index List to the index of the cell to be verified, Geography Scope to LAC_CI(CELL IMME), Code to 1, and Update to 0. In addition, set Repeat and Broadcast Interval, set Start Time and End Time to the specified time, and set Chan ID, Coding Scheme, and Content of Message to appropriate values.

NOTE

l The time specified by End Time in the ADD GSMSCB command must be later than the current time displayed on the OMU. l When Repeat and Broadcast Interval are both set to 60, StartTime and EndTime must be set to values later than the current time displayed on the OMU and the interval between the two values must be longer than 1 hour to ensure that the simple broadcast message can be successfully transmitted 60 times.

l


On the LMT, start an Abis interface CS trace task with trace type set to RSL. For details on how to start the task, see Tracing CS Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the LMT User Guide. Set the same channel on the MS side as the channel specified by CHANID in Step 3 (the setting procedure depends on the MS brand). The SMS Broadcast Command message can be traced on the Abis interface. The MS can receive the BROADCASTCONTENT specified in Step 3. NOTE

BROADCASTCONTENT set through the SET GCELLSBC command can be received at any time. BROADCASTCONTENT set through the ADD GSMSCB command can be received only within the specified time period.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR with Support Cell Broadcast set to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Supporting Simplified Cell Broadcast MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=SPPRTSIMPLE; //Setting TRX and channel attributes SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH;// //Sending cell broadcast messages SET GCELLSBC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCELLBROADCAST=YES, GS=LAC_CI, CHANID=0, SCHEME=ENGLISH, BROADCASTCONTENT="Happy", BROADCASTINTERVAL=60; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Not supporting Simplified Cell Broadcast MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SpprtCB=NOTSPPRTBC;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


286



68

Configuring VGCS and VBS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate Voice Group Call Service (VGCS) and Voice Broadcast Service (VBS).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The test cell is configured with the VGCS function and VGCS ID at the MSC. – Non-single channel originating is configured at the MSC. – VGCS and VBS are enabled for the IMSIs used in this test at the HLR. – Two test MSs, MS1 and MS2, that support VGCS and VBS are available.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The test cell has idle TCHs. – Channel status monitoring of the test cell is started. For details, see Monitoring Channel Status. – The BTS3012/BTS3012AE (configured with QTRUs), BTS3900B, and BTS3012E do not support this feature.

Context Compared with GSM, GSM-R provides new features, such as VGCS, VBS, and enhanced MultiLevel Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) service. GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. A cell does not support VGCS or VBS by default, that is, the default value of NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. Configure VGCS and VBS by setting NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0, the BSC informs the MS of the NCH information in system information type 1. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call after receiving the message indicating that the system supports VGCS/VBS. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


287



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > GSM-R Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block to appropriate values. NOTE

l NCH Occupy Block Number must be set to a value other than 0. The sum of NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the value of CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLIDLEBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Idle Basic Parameters of Cell) to query the value of CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH.

l

Verification Procedure – Verifying VGCS 1.

Use MS1 to perform VGCS in the test cell.

2.

On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP. Expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack, VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, VGCS/VBS Assignment Result, and VGCS/ VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface.

3.

Check the status of the TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for VGCS, another TCH is occupied and this TCH is released 5 seconds later. NOTE

A calling session lasts for 5 seconds after pressing the push-to-talk (PTT) key. To prolong the calling session, press and hold down the PTT key for as long as necessary.

4.

Use MS2 to perform VGCS with the same VGCS ID as MS1 in the test cell. Expected result: MS2 is notified that the VGCS already exists. After adding MS2 to the ongoing VGCS, you can view the current VGCS ID from the screen of MS2.

5.

Press the PTT key on MS2 to occupy the uplink resources. Then check the traced messages displayed in the A Interface Trace window and on the MS1. Expected result: The messages Uplink Request, Uplink Request Ack, Uplink Request Confirmation, and VGCS/VBS Talker Information are traced on the A interface. You can use MS1 to view the MS2 phone number and hear the voice from MS2.

6.

Press the PTT key on MS2 and then on MS1 to occupy the uplink resources. The occupation attempt of MS1 is rejected.

– Verifying VBS 1.

Use MS1 to perform VBS in the test cell.

2.

On the LMT, open the A Interface Trace dialog box and select BSSAP. Expected result: The messages VGCS/VBS Setup, VGCS/VBS Setup Ack, VGCS/VBS Assignment Request, and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result are traced on the A interface.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Check the status of the TCHs in the test cell. You can see that besides the TCH for VBS, another TCH is occupied.

4.

Use MS1 to perform VBS with the same VBS ID as MS1 in the test cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288



Expected result: MS2 is notified that the VBS already exists. After adding MS2 to the ongoing VBS, you can view the current VBS ID from the screen of MS2. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > GSM-R Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0.

----End

Example /*Activating VGCS and VBS*/ //Enabling VGCS and VBS SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1, NCHSTARTBLOCK=1; /*Deactivating VGCS and VBS*/ //Disabling VGCS and VBS SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


289



69

Configuring GSM-T Relay

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The MS, MSC, and HLR need to support this feature. – The BTS has been upgraded to a version that supports trunking services. The earliest version that supports trunking services on a pulic network is BTS3000V300R009C01. The recommended version is GBSS13.0. – The MS supports trunking services.

l


l


Context If a BSC supports GSM-T Relay, the BSC is connected to both the public MSC and the trunking MSC. By routing trunking services to the trunking MSC, the BSC separates the networking of trunking services and point-to-point call services.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a signaling point of the trunking MSC. In this step, set DSP index according to the network planning, and set DSP type to A(A) and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a CN node. In this step, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290



set CN Node Index, DPC Group Index, and Operator Name according to the network planning; set MSC ID to a value that identifies a trunking MSC; set DSP index to the value specified in Step 1; set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC), Trunking MSC to YES(Yes), and Support Paging Message from Trunking MSC to YES(Yes).

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > A Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an E1/T1 on the A interface.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index according to the network planning.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 4 and set TC mode based on the subrack combination mode.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index of the signaling link set added in Step 4.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGSMR (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > GSM-R Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set NCH Occupy Block Number of the target cell to a value that is not less than 1.


On the LMT, start the A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC (Hex) to the DPC of the trunking MSC.

2.

On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the target cell specified in Step 7. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is displayed.

3.

Initiate a successful VGCS call. Then, check the messages traced on the A interface. Expected result: The A interface signaling of the VGCS initiating MS is displayed in the A interface tracing window.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Default DPC to NO(Not Default DPC), and Trunking MSC to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Configuring a DPC

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


291



ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=1111, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3; //Configuring a CN node of a trunking MSC ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=1, DPCGIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", CNID=0, DFDPC=NO, SaGsmrMsc=YES, SptPaging=YES, ATransMode=TDM; //Configuring an E1/T1 over the A Interface ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=10, PN=1, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=0; //Configuring an MTP3 signaling link set ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=0, NAME="MTP3LKS"; //Configuring an MTP3 signaling link ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=0, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1 1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1 &TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, MTP2LNKN=0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK"; //Configuring an MTP3 route ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="MTP3RT"; //Setting GSM-R parameters of a cell SET GCELLGSMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Modifying parameters of a CN node MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DFDPC=NO, SaGsmrMsc=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


292



70

Configuring LCS (cell ID + TA)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115402 LCS (cell ID + TA).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The CN must support this feature. – The MSC supports the LCS. – The test cell is operational, and idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context LCS is used to locate an MS with precision of a certain level and provide a series of specific services based on the location of the MS. For example, LCS can locate an MS that initiates an emergency call or provide information about the MS location for other value added services (VASs). LCS can be categorized into three types: NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), and simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA). In the NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC provides the cell ID and TA of an MS for the MSC, and then the MSC calculates the MS location. In the BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MSC. In the simple mode LCS (cell ID + TA), the BSC calculates the MS location based on the cell ID and TA of the MS and sends the location information to the MS through single user trace messages.


NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA) Activation Procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

293



1.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Software Parameters for A Interface; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG to OPEN (Open).

NSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) in dedicated mode Activation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported), In this setp, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Software Parameters for A Interface; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG to OPEN (Open).

BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) Activation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER(Inner). NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL) to obtain Operator Name.

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLLCS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > LCS Parameters > LCS Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure the LCS parameters of a cell.

Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) Activation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add SMLC configurations to the operator of the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to INNER (Inner). NOTE

To obtain the operator of a cell, Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL). Operator Name in the returned result specifies the operator.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLLCS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > LCS Parameters > LCS Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure the LCS parameters of the test cell.

3.

After the preceding configurations are complete, log out of the LMT and then log in to it again.

NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA) Verification Procedure 1.

Initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Select the BSSAP check box in the Trace Type area.

2.

Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294



3.

l

l

l

l

NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA) Verification Procedure 1.

Initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Select the BSSAP check box in the Trace Type area.

2.

Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive.

3.

Check the APDU information element (IE) in the CM Service Request message traced on the A interface. The APDU IE carries timing advance (TA) information of the MS.

BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) Verification Procedure 1.

Enable an Tracing Messages on the A Interface task, and select BSSAP in the test cell.

2.

Use an MS to initiate a call and hold on after the call is established successfully.

3.

Check that the Perform Location Request message and Perform Location Response message are traced over the A interface after the MSC is triggered on the MSC side to request location information query. Check that the correct MS location can be displayed on the MSC.

Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) Verification Procedure 1.

Initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. In this step, select the Location Flag check box.

2.

Use an MS to originate a call and keep the call alive.

3.

Check the traced messages. Verify that the MS location information sent to the MS is correct.

NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA) Deactivation Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add settings of the SMLC to the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) Deactivation Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Software Parameters for A Interface; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG to CLOSE (Close).

BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) Deactivation Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET AITFOTHPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Software Parameters for A Interface; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG to CLOSE (Close).

NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA) Deactivation Procedure 1.

l

Check the APDU information element (IE) in the CM Service Request message traced on the A interface. The APDU IE carries timing advance (TA) information of the MS.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295



SMLC configurations for the operator of the test cell. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). ----End

Example //Activating NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA) SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN; //Activating NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA) ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="0", SMLCMode=INNER; SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=OPEN; //Activating BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER; SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INPUTMD=D_min_sec_std, LatitudeDegreeSec="90:00:00.0000", LongitudeDegreeSec="180:00:00.0000"; //Activating Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=INNER; SET GCELLLCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INPUTMD=D_min_sec_std, LatitudeDegreeSec="90:00:00.0000", LongitudeDegreeSec="180:00:00.0000"; //Deactivating NSS-based LCS in idle mode (cell ID + TA) SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE; //Deactivating NSS-based LCS in dedicated mode (cell ID + TA) SET AITFOTHPARA: CNNODEIDX=1, ESTINDL3MSGTAFLAG=CLOSE; //Deactivating BSS-based LCS (cell ID + TA) MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT; //Deactivating Simple Mode LCS (Cell ID + TA) MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=1, OPNAME="abc", SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


296



71

Configuring Lb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115404 Lb Interface.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MSC supports location service (LCS). – The MS supports the assisted GPS (AGPS) location service when the AGPS positioning method is used. – The operator is configured. Assume that the operator name is op1. – The Abis, Ater, and Lb interfaces apply the same transmission modes if the UplinkTime Difference Of Arrival (U-TDOA) locating mode is applied. – The LMU (type B) must be configured to support the U-TDOA location mode.

Context The BSC6900 supports two types of location services: l


l

LCS based on an external Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) which is connected to the BSC6900 through the Lb interface

The first type of LCS adopt a built-in SMLC, that is, positioning is performed by the BSS internal algorithm. The last type of LCS adopts an external SMLC, that is, positioning is performed by a third-party network element. LCS based on a built-in SMLC and that based on an external SMLC cannot be used together. This feature is involved in the last type of LCS. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


297



The Lb interface is a standard interface between BSC and SMLC. The main function of the SMLC is to locate an MS based on the measurement results reported by the MS. Huawei BSS equipment supports the standard Lb interface, and can be interconnected with the SMLC of other vendorsFigure 71-1 shows the position of the SMLC in a network. Figure 71-1 Position of the SMLC in the network

Generally, one BSC is connected to only one SMLC. When the BSS Sharing feature is enabled, one BSC can be interconnected with four SMLCs of four different operators. A BSC can be connected to an SMLC in the following ways: l

By adding an Lb interface board TDM or IP transport can be used over the Lb interface. NOTE

The Lb interface can be configured on any interface boards.

l

Without adding an Lb interface board – In BM/TC separated configuration mode, if TDM transport is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the Ater interface board of the BM subrack or on the A interface board of the TC subrack. – In BM/TC combined configuration mode, if TDM transport is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A interface board. – If IP transport is used over the Lb interface, the Lb interface must be configured on the A or Abis interface board of the BM subrack.

To connect the BSC6900 to an SMLC, data needs to be negotiated and planned for the Lb interface. Table 71-1 and Table 71-2 provide Lb interface configuration examples. Table 71-1 Lb interface configuration example (TDM transport)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameters

Configuration

Data Source

OSP Code

1

Negotiated with the peer end

DSP Code

2


Network ID

NATB(NATB)



298



Parameters

Configuration

Data Source

OSP code bits

BIT14


SS7 protocol type

ITUT(ITUT)


Signalling link code

0


Link rate type

64K(64Kbit/s)


Link timeslot (A interface timeslot mask or A interface timeslot mask)

TS16(Timeslot 16)


Test Code Length

10


Test Code

170


Table 71-2 Lb interface configuration example (IP transport) Parameter

Configuration

Data Source

OSP Code

1


DSP Code

2


Network ID

NATB(NATB)


OSP code bits

BIT14


SS7 protocol type

ITUT(ITUT)


Local entity type

M3UA_IPSP(M3UA IPSP)


Destination Entity Type



Traffic mode

M3UA_OVERRIDE_MOD (Active/Standby Mode)


Work mode



In multiple local signaling points scenarios, configure the Lb interface according to the following operations. Specifically, establish the relationship between the signaling points and the SMLCs and configure related link and route information for the signaling points and the SMLCs.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure (Adding an Lb interface board) 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an interface board. In this step, set Board Class to INT, and set Slot No., Subrack No., Board type, and other parameters to appropriate values.


299



2. l

Select one of the following activation procedures based on the transport technology adopted over the Lb interface.

Activation Procedure (BM/TC Separated, Lb over TDM, and Lb Interface Configured on an Ater Interface Board in the BM Subrack) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, and OSP index to appropriate values; set DSP code to the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type to MTP3(MTP3).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SMLC. In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name to appropriate values; set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information) to query the value of SMLC Mode for the target SMLC. If the BSC6900 has the SMLC function, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name to appropriate values, and set SMLC Mode to OUTER (Outer).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 (CME single configuration: Ater Configuration Express > TDM Transport > Ater Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an E1/T1 over the Ater interface. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM); set Ater connection path index to an available path; set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to a value that is not in use.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4, TC mode to SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE(BSC Interface), Ater connection path index to the index added in Step 3, Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to values that are not in use, and Ater Mask to the negotiated value.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4.

7.

Optional: (Required if U-TDOA LCS is used) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Semipermanent Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Application Type to OTHER Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300



(OTHER); set Semipermanent Link Rate to 64K(64Kbit/s); set In BSC Subrack No., In BSC Slot No., and In BSC Port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface set in Step 3; set In BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Out BSC Subrack No., Out BSC Slot No., and Out BSC Port No. to the port that the Location Measurement Unit (LMU) is connected to; set Out BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Semipermanent Link Index to an appropriate value. l

Activation Procedure (BM/TC Separated, Lb over TDM, and Lb Interface Configured on an A Interface Board in the TC Subrack) 1.


2.



Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 (CME single configuration: Ater Configuration Express > TDM Transport > Ater Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an E1/T1 over the Ater interface. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM); set Ater connection path index to an available path; set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface.

4.


5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4, TC mode to SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE(BSC Interface), Ater connection path index to the index added in Step 3, Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to values that are not in use, and Ater Mask to the negotiated value.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

301



index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4.

l

7.

Optional: (Required if U-TDOA LCS is used) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Semipermanent Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Application Type to OTHER (OTHER); set Semipermanent Link Rate to 64K(64Kbit/s); set In BSC Subrack No., In BSC Slot No., and In BSC Port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface set in Step 3; set In BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Out BSC Subrack No., Out BSC Slot No., and Out BSC Port No. to a port on an Ater interface board in the TC subrack; set Out BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Semipermanent Link Index to an appropriate value.

8.

Optional: (Required if U-TDOA LCS is used) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Semipermanent Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Application Type to OTHER (OTHER); set Semipermanent Link Rate to 64K(64Kbit/s); set In BSC Subrack No., In BSC Slot No., and In BSC Port No. to the port in the BM subrack corresponding to that port in the TC subrack set in Step 7; set In BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Out BSC Subrack No., Out BSC Slot No., and Out BSC Port No. to the port that the LMU is connected to; set Out BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Semipermanent Link Index to an appropriate value.

Activation Procedure (BM/TC Combined, Lb over TDM, and Lb Interface Configured on A Interface Board) 1.


2.



3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > A Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an E1/T1 link to the target port on the A interface board. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No. to the port that the link is connected. Then, set other parameters to appropriate values. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

302



4.


5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link. In this step, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC) or TOGETHER(BSC/TC Together). Then set other parameters based on the negotiation or the transmission configuration. NOTE

l In BM/TC separated mode, set TC mode to SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL(Principal BSC); set Ater connection path index to the value that is in use; set Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to values that are not in use; set A interface subrack No., A interface slot No, and A interface port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface; set Ater Mask and A interface timeslot mask to the values negotiated with the SMLC. l In BM/TC combined mode, set TC mode to TOGETHER(BSC/TC Together); set Signalling link code and MTP2 link No. to the values that are not in use; set A interface subrack No., A interface slot No., and A interface port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface; set A interface timeslot mask to the value negotiated with the SMLC.

l

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1 and Signalling link set index to the index added in Step 4.

7.

Optional: (Required if U-TDOA LCS is used) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Semipermanent Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Application Type to OTHER (OTHER); set Semipermanent Link Rate to 64K(64Kbit/s); set In BSC Subrack No., In BSC Slot No., and In BSC Port No. based on the actual cable connection over the Lb interface set in Step 3; set In BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Out BSC Subrack No., Out BSC Slot No., and Out BSC Port No. to the port that the Location Measurement Unit (LMU) is connected to; set Out BSC Start Timeslot No. to a multiple of 8 and the value cannot be 0; set Semipermanent Link Index to an appropriate value.

Activation Procedure (Lb over IP) NOTE

If U-TDOA LCS is used and IP transmission is applied between the LMU and the SMLC, the LMU is connected to the SMLC through a router rather than the BSC. The router must be configured on site.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a DSP. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, and OSP index to appropriate values; set DSP code to the signaling point code of the SMLC, DSP type to LB(LB), and DSP bear type to M3UA(M3UA).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SMLC. In this step, set SMLC Index and Operator Name according to the actual Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

303



situation; set SMLC Mode to OUTER(Outer) and DSP index to the index of the DSP added in Step 1. NOTE


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA local entity. In this step, set Local entity No. to a value that is not in use; set OSP index and Local entity type based on the network plan.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA destination entity. In this step, set Destination entity No. to a value that is not in use; set Local entity No. and DSP index to the values specified in Step 3 and Step 1 respectively; set Destination entity type to an appropriate value.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., SCTP link No., and Logic Port Flag based on the network plan; set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application type to M3UA(M3UA); set First local IP address, First destination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to the values negotiated with the engineers of the SMLC.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link set. In this step, set Signalling link set index to a value that is not in use. In this step: – If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP) in Step 3, set Work Mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). – If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) in Step 3 and Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA SP) in Step 4, set Work Mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). Otherwise, set Work Mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route. In this step, set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the values specified in Step 4 and Step 6 respectively.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link. In this step, set Signalling link set index to the value specified in Step 6; set SCTP link No. to the value specified in Step 5; set Signaling link ID, Subrack No., Slot No., and M3UA Signaling link name according to the actual situation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

304


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXTSMLC to query the value of SMLC Mode. Expected result: The value of SMLC Mode is OUTER(Outer).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC. In this step, set DSP index to DSP index of the SMLC. Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible. The value of MTP3 DSP state is Available or the value of M3UA DSP state is Available.

3.

Initiate a location service on the LCS client side, as shown in Figure 71-1. Expected result: The target MS is located.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXTSMLC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > External SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) command. In this step, set SMLC Mode to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure (BM/TC separated configuration, Lb over TDM, and Lb interface configured on an Ater interface board)*/ //Adding a DPC ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB, BEARTYPE=MTP3; //Adding an SMLC ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2; //Adding an E1/T1 link over the Ater Interface ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=0, SRN=0, SN=10, PN=12;//Adding an MTP3 signaling link set ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=2, NAME="MTP3LKS"; //Adding an MTP3 signaling link ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=10, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_BSC_INTERFACE, ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS1 1-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-1&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0 &TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, MTP2LNKN=2, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK"; //Adding an MTP3 signaling route ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="LT"; /*Activation procedure (Lb over TDM and Lb interface configured on an A interface board)*/ //Adding a DPC ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB, BEARTYPE=MTP3; //Adding an SMLC ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2; //Configuring the A interface E1/T1 ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=10, PN=14, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLNULL, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC; //Adding an MTP3 signaling link set ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=2, NAME="MTP3LKS"; //Adding an MTP3 signaling link ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=0, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=10, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=14,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


305



ATSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11 -0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-1&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0& TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, LKTATE=64K, NAME="MTP3LNK"; //Adding an MTP3 signaling route ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="LT"; /*Activation procedure (Lb over IP)*/ //Adding a DPC ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=2, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=111, DPCT=LB, BEARTYPE=M3UA; //Adding an SMLC ADD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, OPNAME="op1", SMLCMode=OUTER, DPX=2; //Adding an M3UA local entity ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_ASP, NAME="m3ualocal"; //Adding an M3UA destination entity ADD M3DE: DENO=1, LENO=0, DPX=2, ENTITYT=M3UA_SGP, NAME="m3uaaim"; //Adding an SCTP link ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=10, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="10.20.30.40", PEERIP1="10.20.30.50", PEERPN=1024, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; //Adding an M3UA link set ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=1, NAME="m3uaidx"; //Adding an M3UA route ADD M3RT: DENO=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="m3uarot"; //Adding an M3UA link ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=1, SRN=0, SN=10, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="m3ua"; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Disabling the SMLC mode MOD GEXTSMLC: SMLCIDX=0, SMLCMode=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


306



72

Configuring Resource Reservation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

l


Context With the resource reservation feature, the system reserves TCHFs for high-priority users to ensure their QoS. l

Channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, therefore ensuring the QoS of the VIP users and improving user experience.

l

Resource reservation provides a segmentation function for operators. Using this function, operators can provide different levels of services for users with different priorities. In this way, the operation revenue is increased.

This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) to better guarantee the benefits of users and improve the user satisfaction.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Grade Access Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307



Allow to YES(Yes), and set Highest Priority and Reserved Channel Number to proper values. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC. In this step, set Highest Priority to 7 and Reserved Channel Number to 1.

2.

Block the TCHs in cell 0 and reserve only one idle TCH.

3.

Start Trace BSSAP Message on the A Interface of cell 0 on the LMT.

4.

Use MS 1 to make a common call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the CN in the assignment request. Expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.

5.

Use MS 1 to make an emergency call in cell 0. Then, check the priority delivered by the CN in the assignment request. Expected result: If the priority is greater than 7, the call fails. Otherwise, the call can be established and a TCHF is assigned during the assignment procedure.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Grade Access Allow to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell) to query the value of Grade Access Allow. Expected result: The value of Grade Access Allow is NO(No).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, REVCHANNUM=1; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, REVCHANNUM=1; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, LST GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=YES, HPRIOR=7, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=YES, HPRIOR=7, CELLID=0, GRADEACCALLOW=NO; BTSID=0, CELLID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL;


308



73

Configuring Enhanced Multi Level

Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MSC, HLR, and MS support eMLPP.

Context The eMLPP service offers a segmentation function. Using this feature, operators can provide differentiated services for subscribers of different priorities. The eMLPP function ensures the speech quality of high-priority MSs when the network traffic is heavy. The MS needs to support eMLPP so that it can initiate calls of different priorities. This feature ensures the service quality of high-priority calls by using methods such as preemption, queuing, direct retry, and forced handovers. eMLPP involves two mechanisms: preemption and queuing.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC) to query the value of A Interface Tag. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309


73 Configuring Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (eMLPP) NOTE

If the value of A Interface Tag is not GSM_PHASE_2Plus, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Preemption Allowed to YES(Yes) to allow high-priority MSs to preempt resources for lowpriority MSs when there is no resource available for high-priority MSs.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow EMLPP to YES(Yes).


Service preemption is used as an example to describe the verification procedure. Assume that in Step 3, Allow EMLPP is set to YES(Yes).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Prepare three test MSs (MS1, MS2, and MS3), and assign the highest priority for MS1 and the lowest priority for MS3 on the HLR side.

2.

Configure data on the MSC side. Ensure that the resources for low-priority MSs can be preempted by high-priority MSs.

3.

On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate CS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set Trace Object Symbol Type to IMSI and enter the IMSI of the MS to be traced, as shown in Figure 73-1.


310



Figure 73-1 Single User CS Trace dialog box (1)

4.

Use MS2 and MS3 to make PSTN calls in the test cell.

5.

Check the measurement reports sent by MSs on TCHs and determine the numbers of the TCHs occupied by MS2 and MS3, as shown in Figure 73-2.

Figure 73-2 Single User CS Trace dialog box (2)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


311


l


6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block remaining idle TCHs in the cell.

7.

Use MS1 to make a PSTN call in the cell.

8.

If no neighboring relationship is correctly configured, view the measurement reports sent by MS1 and check whether MS1 has preempted the TCH used by MS2 or MS3. The call of MS3 is released. MS1 and MS2 continue their calls properly. Check the measurement reports sent by MS1. The number of the TCH occupied by MS1 is the same as that of the TCH occupied by MS3 in step 6. This indicates that MS1 occupies the TCH of MS3.

9.

If neighboring relationship is correctly configured, view the measurement reports sent by MS1 to check whether MS1 has preempted the TCH used by MS2 or MS3 and check whether the preempted MS has been handed over to a neighboring cell to continue the call properly. MS1, MS2, and MS3 make calls properly. MS1 preempts the TCH of MS3, and MS3 has been handed over to a neighboring cell. Check the measurement reports sent by MS3. The number of the TCH occupied by MS3 is a TCH number of the neighboring cell.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Preemption Allowed to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag to its original value in the activation procedure.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow EMLPP to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activation procedure LST BSCBASIC SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCPMA=YES; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EMLPPEN=YES; //Deactivation procedure SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCPMA=NO; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EMLPPEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


312


74


Configuring Flow Control Based on Cell Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control has been configured before this feature is activated. The two features are recommended working together: GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority and GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority. The former one controls uplink flow and the latter one controls downlink flow.

l


Context This feature is enabled when the BSC is congested to ensure the calls in VIP cells and the paging to VIP MSs. This feature has no impact on the BSC operation or the high-priority call continuity success rate. This feature is applied to scenarios where traffic intensity becomes extremely great in case of natural disasters. When the GSM network is congested due to an unexpected traffic peak, VIP cells are created by splitting up existing cells or adding base stations. Special Location Area Codes (LACs) are assigned to the VIP cells, and roaming areas are specified for the special LACs at the CN. Only VIP MSs are allowed to camp on VIP cells, which avoids that a large number of common MSs camp on VIP cells and then VIP cells become congested again. The CN does not impose roaming area limitation on a common cell. In this case, a large number of users may camp on a common cell. Then, congestion may occur in this common cell. As a result, services provided by the cell are affected.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


313



Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > ADD Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VIP Cell to YES (Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes), and set VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELL to query the value of VIP Cell. Expected result: The value of VIP Cell to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCFCPARA to query the values of Support Priority Based Flow Control, VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority. Expected result: The value of Support Priority Based Flow Control is YES(Yes). The parameters VIP Share in CPU Rate, VIP Access CPU Rate, and VIP Priority are set to some values.

3.

When service congestion occurs in the BSC, check whether the call setup success rate of a VIP cell and the call setup success rate of VIP users are affected. Expected result: Ongoing services in the VIP cell and ongoing VIP services are normal. In addition, call setup success rates of new services in the VIP cell and new VIP services increase.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control is NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VIP Cell to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Setting a VIP cell ADD GCELL: CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="460", MNC="188", LAC=10, CI=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF, VIPCELL=YES; //Enabling the Flow Control Based on Cell Priority function SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=YES, VIPSHAREINCPURATE=50, VIPACCESSCPURATE=80, VIPPRIORITY=LEVEL0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


314



/*Deactivation procedure*/ //Disabling the Flow Control Based on Cell Priority function SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=NO; //Changing a cell from VIP to non-VIP MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VIPCELL=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


315


75

75 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority

Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115003 Flow Control Based on User Priority.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control has been configured before this feature is activated. The two features are recommended working together: GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority and GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority. The former one controls uplink flow and the latter one controls downlink flow.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The paging messages sent by the core network carries eMLPP information.

Context With this feature, user signaling is differentiated based on user priority to ensure that services of high-priority users are not affected while signaling of low-priority users may be discarded.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Priority Based Flow Control to YES(Yes) and VIP Priority to an appropriate value based on the flow control imposed on calls of different priorities. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316


75 Configuring Flow Control Based on User Priority NOTE

Flow control is not performed on users whose priority is higher than VIP Priority.

l


Initiate a large number of calls to make the traffic volume exceeds the system specification.

2.

Deliver short message paging to high-priority users and speech paging to other users at the core network side.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PAGINGNUM to query the number of discarded paging messages. Expected result: Paging messages for short message services are not discarded and those for speech services are discarded.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA with Support Priority Based Flow Control set to NO(No).

5.

Repeat Step 2.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PAGINGNUM to query the number of discarded paging messages. Expected result: Paging messages for short message services are discarded and those for speech services are not discarded.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCFCPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Support Priority Based Flow Control set to NO (No).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Activating Flow Control Based on User Priority SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=YES, VIPPRIORITY=LEVEL0; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Deactivating Flow Control Based on User Priority SET BSCFCPARA: PRIFCEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


317



76

Configuring PS Service in Priority

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board are configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before this feature is activated. – This feature cannot be used with the following feature: GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS and SGSN support this feature.

Context Using different resource scheduling policies on the Um interface, this feature makes it possible to provide differentiated services for PS users of different priorities. This ensures better experience for high-priority users.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support PS Service in Priority to SUPPORT(Support), MAC Scheduling Type to PFSCHEDULE(Proportion Fair Scheduling), and Downlink Minimum Guaranteed Rate and Rate Filter Time Window to appropriate values based on the site requirements. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318


l


Verification Procedure Assume that in the registration information, Traffic class is set to the same value: INTERACT for MS1 and MS2, and all other information is the same for both MSs except the values of Traffic handling priority and Allocation/Retention priority. 1.

When the Um interface quality is the same for MS1 and MS2, use the two MSs to perform EDGE download services with the same coding scheme and either of them occupies four PDCHs. Observe the download rate. Expected result: – If the PFC procedure is used, the ratio of MS1 download rate to MS2 download rate equals the ratio of MS1 THP-ARP priority weight to MS2 THP-ARP priority weight. – If the PFC procedure is not used, the ratio of MS1 download rate to MS2 download rate is determined by BestEffort-ARP1 Priority Weight, BestEffort-ARP2 Priority Weight and BestEffort-ARP3 Priority Weight. NOTE

THP-ARP priority weight can be configured in the MML command SET GCELLPSCHM.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support PS Service in Priority to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activating PS Service in Priority SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=SUPPORT, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=10, RATEFILTERTIMEWIN=50; //Deactivating PS Service in Priority SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PSDIFSERVICESUP=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


319


77 Configuring GPRS

77

Configuring GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used. – A packet processing board and a Gb interface board are required if the built-in PCU is used.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature should be supported by the Core Network(CN) and Mobile Station (MS). – If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Pb Interface. – If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). – The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the Transmission Data.

Context This feature implements mainly three functions: managing radio links and resources, controlling MS access, and providing routing functions for packet data transmission.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set the parameters as follows: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320


77 Configuring GPRS

– If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu), and then run the PCU set attr command on the PCU maintenance console to support GPRS. – If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). 2.

Optional: If built-in PCU is used, if Configuring CS3/CS4, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with both Downlink Fixed CS Type and Uplink Fixed CS Type set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) for at least one channel.

4.

Do the following operations according to the BTS works: – If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots. – If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH. It is recommended that IP path ID be set to QoS(QoS), BE(BE), AF11(AF11), AF12(AF12), AF13(AF13), AF21 (AF21), AF22(AF22), or AF23(AF23).

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4). NOTE

This operation affects the ongoing services of the cells. Therefore, perform the operation in low traffic hours.

2.

Use an MS to perform PING services. On the BSC6900 LMT, trace PS messages on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. You can view that the CS3 or CS4 coding scheme is used in the uplink and downlink.

CAUTION After the verification is complete, set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type to UNFIXED(UNFIXED) according to the activation procedure. l


l

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Expected result: The MS downloads or uploads data successfully.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set GPRS to NO(Not support).

----End

Example /*Activating GPRS*/ //External PCU command SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsExtPcu; PCU SET ATTR 0 460009162963A 1 02187 1 yes 2 255 true Cell-0 //Built-in PCU command SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


321


77 Configuring GPRS

SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH; //(Optional)Built-in PCU command SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=UNFIXED, DNFIXCS=UNFIXED; //(Optional)Verification procedure SET GCELLPSCS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXCS=CS3, DNFIXCS=CS4; //Deactivating GPRS SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


322


78


Configuring Network Operation Mode I This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board are required.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Gs interface (the interface between MSC/VLR and SGSN) is configured between the MSC and SGSN. If a cell is configured with MOCN, the Gs interface must be available on the MSC and the SGSN of all operators.

Context The combination of Network Operation Mode I and Gs interface supports coordinated paging and CS paging in packet transfer mode.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network Operation Mode to NMOI (Network Operation Mode I). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

323


l

l



Use a MS to perform a ping service.

2.

Use another MS to call the MS processing the ping service. Expected result: The call is successfully established and the voice quality is good.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network Operation Mode to NMOII (Network Operation Mode II).

----End

Example //Activating Network Operation Mode I SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOI; //Deactivating Network Operation Mode I SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NMO=NMOII;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


324



79

Configuring EGPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The external PCU is installed if the external PCU is used. – A packet processing board and a Gb interface board are required if the built-in PCU is used.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-114101 GPRS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature should be supported by the GPRS Support Node (GGSN/SGSN) and the Mobile Station (MS). – If external PCU is used, the Pb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Pb Interface. – If built-in PCU is used, the Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP). – The BTS transmission mode is configured. For details, see Configuring the Transmission Data.

Context Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the delay of PS services and the congestion rate, improving the service quality and enhancing the user experience.



325



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters as follows: – If external PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu) and EDGE to YES(Yes). – If built-in PCU is used, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

2.

Do the following operations according to the BTS works: – If the BTS works in TDM transmission mode, configure idle timeslots for the BTS by referring to Configuring the BTS Timeslots. – If the BTS works in IP transmission mode, configure the IPPATH by running the ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) command. It is recommended that IP path type be set to QoS(QoS), BE(BE), AF11 (AF11), AF12(AF12), AF13(AF13), AF21(AF21), AF22(AF22), or AF23 (AF23).

3.

l

Optional: If built-in PCU is used, configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > EGPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink Fixed MCS Type to UNFIXED (UNFIXED) and Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 2(According to uplink quality measurements reported by BTS).

Verification Procedure – In the case that the external PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then, start the message tracing over the Um interface on the PCU maintenance console. The result shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used. – In the case that the built-in PCU is used, use an MS to perform PING services. Then, start the task Um Interface PS Trace on the LMT. The result shows that the coding schemes MCS1 to MCS9 that are supported by EGPRS are used. Optional: verification procedure of configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding – Route downlink BTS signals to the shielding cabinet. – After combining the uplink signals and interference source signals, route the combined signals to the receive end of the TRX. – Set the interference source frequency to the uplink frequency of the TRX, set the transmit power, and then put the MS in the shielding cabinet. – Use the MS to load files through FTP. – Initiate the PS domain message tracing over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. Trace the result of uplink MCS coding adjustment. The expected result: When the interference source power increases, the rate of uplink EGPRS coding scheme decreases.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


326



– In the case that the external PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsExtPcu(Support as external Pcu) and EDGE to NO(No). – In the case that the built-in PCU is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to NO(No). – Optional: If built-in PCU is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > EGPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support EGPRS Uplink MCS Dynamic Adjust to 1(According to downlink quality measurements reported by MS). ----End

Example //Activating EGPRS SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; //(Optional)Activating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPFIXMCS=UNFIXED, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=2; //Deactivating EGPRS SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO; //(Optional)Deactivating Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ADJUSTULMCSTYPE=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


327



80

Configuring 11-Bit EGPRS Access

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access, GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF and the basic feature GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required.

l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context The extended uplink TBF can shorten the transmission delay and reduce the MS power consumption. The 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH can improve the access performance of the EDGE MS. The BTS takes over the packet and immediate assignments. This can improve the access performance of the MS and shorten the access delay. For PCU commands, see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU.Run the BSC6900 MML command

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


328



NOTE

l In external PCU mode, the PCU supports the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS and the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS by default. l In external PCU mode, if you need to disable the takeover of the immediate assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command. If you need to disable the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS, run the pcu cfgpara add g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command. After running the command, you should reset the cell.

Procedure l


Configure the extended uplink TBF. – In external PCU mode, run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0. – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF to a value greater than 0. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set EXT_UTBF_NODATA to NOTSEND to reduce the MS power consumption.

2.

Configure the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. – In external PCU mode, run the PCU ADD EGPRSPara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell. – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access to YES(Yes). – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Force MS Two-phase Access to Close(Close).

3.

Configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. – In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS. After running the command, you should reset the cell. – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS to YES(Yes).

l


Verify the extended uplink TBF. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA to check whether Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF is greater than 0. Use the MS to perform PS services. After transmitting the uplink data to the BSC, the MS does not release the uplink TBF immediately. Instead, it releases the uplink TBF after the duration equal to Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF.

2. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Verify the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

329



Use the MS that supports 11-bit EGPRS to perform PS services. If the value of random access for a channel request is 11-bit, the MS has accessed the network. 3.

Verify the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. Use the MS to make a dial-up connection to the network and then to perform the ping function. Enabling Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS can reduce the ping delay by 30 to 50 ms, which depends on the transmission over the Abis interface.

l


Deactivate the extended uplink TBF. – In external PCU mode, run the PCU set privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0. – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF to 0.

2.

Deactivate the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. – In external PCU mode, run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the function of 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH. – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE on the LMT. In this step, set Support 11BIT EGPRS Access to NO(No).

3.

Deactivate the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. – In external PCU mode, run the PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the cell not to support the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. After running the command, reset the cell. – In built-in PCU mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA on the LMT. In this step, set Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activating the extended uplink TBF*/ //External PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0 PCU ADD PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 2000 2400 //Built-in PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to a value greater than 0 SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=2000; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=NOTSEND; /*Activating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*/ //External PCU mode PCU ADD EGPRSPara 11 la 8 yes unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6 //Built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=YES; //Closing the Force MS Two-phase Access SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: Force2Phase=Close; /*Activating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*/ //External PCU mode

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


330



PCU CfgPara ADD allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 //Built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=YES; /*Deactivating the extended uplink TBF*/ //External PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0 PCU SET PrivateOptPara 11 0 120 0 2400 //Built-in PCU mode, set the duration of the inactive period timer to 0 SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY=0; /*Deactivating the 11-bit EGPRS access on the CCCH*/ //External PCU mode PCU SET EGPRSPara 11 la 8 no unfixed mcs2 unfixed mcs6 //Built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EGPRS11BITCHANREQ=NO; /*Deactivating the takeover of the packet assignment by the BTS*/ //External PCU mode PCU CfgPara SET allrppu g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 //Built-in PCU mode SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PACKASSDLSHIFT=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


331



81

Configuring Packet Channel Dispatching

About This Chapter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – An MS (GSM MS) that supports only voice service is available. – An MS (GPRS MS) that supports only GPRS service is available.

Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system uses the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and GPRS uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with the USF should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS downlink data blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the EGPRS service from the GPRS service, thus effectively increasing the downlink throughput of the EGPRS MS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332


l


This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS service and the GPRS service use the same channel, thus increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network performance, and enhancing the user experience.

81.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service. 81.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 81.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E (EGPRS) Down G (GPRS) Up scenario.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


333



81.1 Configuring EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature EGPRS Special Channel Be Used by Only EGPRS Service.

Procedure l


Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., Channel Type, and PDCH Channel Priority Type. The expected result: The values of Channel Type of six channels are PDTCH (PDTCH), and the values of PDCH Channel Priority Type are EGPRSSPECH (EGPRS Special Channel).

l


An GPRS MS(class10)that supports GPRS service and an EGPRS MS(class10) that supports EGPRS service are available.

1.

Monitor the channels used by the MSs.

2.

Use the GPRS MS to make a PDP activation.

3.

Attach the EGPRS MS to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation.

The expected result: – The GPRS MS cannot make PDP activation successes. – The EGPRS MS can be attached to the EGPRS network and the PDP activation successes. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSSPECH(EGPRS Special Channel).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


334



SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, //Deactivation Procedure SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7,

CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH,

GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSSPECH;

CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH, CHTYPE=PDTCH,

GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;

81.2 Configuring EGPRS Preferred Channel This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS Preferred Channel. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Procedure l


Configure two EGPRS TRXs for the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes) to enable the EGPRS function.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., and Administrative State. The expected result: The values of all Administrative State for all the TCHs on the BCCH TRX are Lock(Lock).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, set Channel Type and PDCH Channel Priority Type. The expected result: The values of Channel Type are PDTCH(PDTCH). PDCH Channel Priority Type of four channels is EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority Channel) and PDCH Channel Priority Type of the other four channels is GPRS (GPRS Channel).

l


The GPRS MS1 (class10), MS2 (class10), and EGPRS MS1 (class10) are attached to the GPRS cell.

1.

Record the process of configuring devices.

2.

EGPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.

3.

GPRS MS1 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.

4.

GPRS MS2 activates PDP and starts DL FTP.

5.

EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH.

6.

EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again after a period of time.

7.

Use a drive test tool to record the channels used by the MSs.

The expected result: Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


335



– After EGPRS MS1 activates PDP for the first time, it starts DL FTP and uses the EGPRS preferred channel. – After GPRS MS2 starts DL FTP, it shares packet channels with GPRS MS1. The system does notallocate the EGPRS preferred channel to GPRS MS2. – After EGPRS MS1 stops DL FTP and releases PDCH, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is swiched to the correct channel instead of sharing the PDCH with GPRS MS1. The correct channel is the EGPRS preferred channel used by EGPRS MS1. – After EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP again, GPRS MS2 or GPRS MS1 is switched out of the EGPRS preferred channel and then shares the PDCH with GPRS MS1 or GPRS MS2. – The EGPRS preferred channel is allocated to EGPRS MS1 again, and EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP on the EGPRS preferred channel. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, set TRX ID to the index of the EGPRS-capable TRX, Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate), and PDCH Channel Priority Type to any value except EGPRSPRICH(EGPRS Priority Channel).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSPRICH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS; //Deactivation Procedure SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Ulock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, ADMSTAT=Ulock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, ADMSTAT=Ulock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, ADMSTAT=Ulock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, ADMSTAT=Ulock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, ADMSTAT=Ulock; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI= EGPRSNORCH;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


336



81.3 Configuring Channel Multiplexing in the E Down G Up Scenario This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate channel multiplexing in the E (EGPRS) Down G (GPRS) Up scenario.

Procedure l


Configure an EGPRS TRX for the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TRX ID, Channel No., Channel Type, and PDCH Channel Priority Type. The expected result: The values of Channel Type are PDTCH(PDTCH), and the values of PDCH Channel Priority Type of at least two channels are EGPRSNORCH(EGPRS Normal Channel).

3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) . In this step, set Allow E Down G Up Switch to CLOSE(Close).


Two GPRS MSs (class 8) and one EGPRS MS (class10) are available.

1.

Attach GPRS MS1 to the GPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. GPRS MS1 starts UL FTP and uses an uplink channel. The uplink channels are not used.

2.

Attach EGPRS MS1 to the EGPRS network and initiate the PDP activation. EGPRS MS1 starts DL FTP and does not share the channel with GPRS MS1.

3.

Attach GPRS MS2 to the GPRS network and initiate the DPD activation. EGPRS MS1 starts UL FTP and share the uplink channel with GPRS MS1.

4.

Record the channels used by each MS.

The expected result: – After EGPRS MS1 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS1 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1. – After GPRS MS2 accesses the cell and starts DL FTP, the uplink channel of GPRS MS2 does not share the channel with the downlink channel of EGPRS MS1. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow E Down G Up Switch to OPEN(Open).

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


337



Example //Activation Procedure SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=PDTCH, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=PDTCH, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=PDTCH, SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=PDTCH, SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=CLOSE; //Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: FORBIDEDGU=OPEN;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH; GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH;


338


82 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)

82

Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS, GBFD-114201 EGPRS, GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A or GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MSs and SGSN support the PFM procedure and R99 QoS. – The cell is configured with static PDCHs.

Context In the case of streaming services, the BSC allocates radio blocks to users based on their QoS attribute GBR and ensures that the data transmission rates meet the requirements of streaming services. If streaming services support resource preemption, high-priority streaming services can preempt radio blocks of low-priority streaming services when radio resources are insufficient. This ensures that higher-priority services preferentially use radio resources. If streaming services do not support resource preemption, the GBR is decreased when radio resources are insufficient; when radio resources become sufficient, the GBR is restored to the negotiated values. When the BSC needs to decrease or restore the GBR, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBR through a PFM procedure.



339


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support). To enable streaming services to preempt PDCHs, set OccupyStreamingSwitch to ON(ON).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES (Support).

3.

On the SGSN side, enable the network service entity (NSE) to support Packet Flow Context (PFC). To enable streaming services to preempt PDCHs, configure the NSE to carry the ARP information element.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC to ensure that the NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.


Initiate Um interface PS message tracing and check the PSI13 message. Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1. This indicates that the BSC supports PDC.

2.

Initiate Gb interface PTP tracing. Perform PDP context activation on an MS whose registered traffic class is streaming. Expected result: Signaling messages such as CREATE BSS PFC and CREATE BSS PFC ACK are traced. This indicates that the PDP context is activated.

3.

Use an MS whose registered traffic class is streaming and an MS whose registered traffic class is interactive or background to perform PS services. The MSs share the same channel group. Expected result: The BSC allocates resources to the MS whose registered traffic class is streaming based on the registered GBR. The other MSs share the remaining resources.

4.

Use multiple MSs whose registered traffic class is streaming to perform PS services. Expected result: If the MSs have the same priority, the BSS allocates resources to the MS that is the first to access the network. If the MSs have different priorities and support resource preemption, a high-priority MS can preempt resources of a lowpriority MS. NOTE

The information element ARP of CREATE BSS PFC of the Gb interface specifies information such as the priority of streaming services and whether streaming services can preempt resources and be preempted.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support) and Preempt Switch of Streaming Resource to OFF(OFF).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to NO (No Support). Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 0.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC.

----End

Example //Activating Streaming QoS(GBR) SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES, OccupyStreamingSwitch=ON;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


340



MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1; //Deactivating Streaming QoS(GBR) SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO, OccupyStreamingSwitch=OFF; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


341



83

Configuring QoS ARP&THP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been configured before this feature is activated. – This feature cannot be used with the following features: – GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing priority. – GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority.

l


Context The BSC allocates radio resources to the MS according the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) in the QoS attributes. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and wider radio bandwidth. The BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS according to the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the operator allocates radio resources according to service types and user priority. As a result, the user with a higher priority can seize more bandwidth and enjoy higher data rate and services of better quality. Interactive services: The BSS allocates radio resources to users according to the ARP and THP in the QoS attributes. If the ARPs of users are the same, users with a higher THP are allocated more radio resources. If the THPs of users are the same, users with a higher ARP are allocated more radio resources. Background services: The BSS allocates radio resources to users according to the ARP of QoS. Users with a higher ARP are allocated more radio resources. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


342



The BSS allocates radio resources to services that do not support QoS in the way it allocates radio resources to best effort services.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support), set MAC Scheduling Type to BUDGET (Scheduling Based On Budget), set Support QoS Optimize to YES(Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES (Support).

3.

Configure the NSE to support PFC on the SGSN side.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset SIGBVC to ensure that the NSE on the CN side is consistent with that on the NE side.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set the values of THP1-ARP1 Priority Weight, THP1-ARP2 Priority Weight, THP1-ARP3 Priority Weight, THP2-ARP1 Priority Weight, THP2-ARP2 Priority Weight, THP2-ARP3 Priority Weight, THP3-ARP1 Priority Weight, THP3-ARP2 Priority Weight, THP3-ARP3 Priority Weight, Background-ARP1 Priority Weight, Background-ARP2 Priority Weight, Background-ARP3 Priority Weight, BestEffort-ARP1 Priority Weight, BestEffort-ARP2 Priority Weight, and BestEffort-ARP3 Priority Weight according to the weight of bandwidths occupied by users with different priorities.


To verify this feature, you can run the command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block idle channels in the cells so that as many MSs as possible are multiplexed on the same channel group. To query the channel number of each MS, initiate PS message tracing of a single user by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Perform PS download services to check the data rate of each MS.

1.

l

Use the MSs whose registered traffic classes are interactive or background to perform PS services and ensure that the MSs share the same channel group. Expected result: When the same coding scheme is used, the ratio of the transmission rate of the MSs is similar to the ratio of the weight of THP or ARP.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to NO(Not Support), set Support QoS Optimize to NO(Not Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to NO (Not Support).

3.


----End

Example //Activating QoS ARP/THP SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES, QOSOPT=YES, MACSCHEDULETYPE =BUDGET; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


343



RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, THP1ARP1PRIWEIGHT=10, THP1ARP2PRIWEIGHT=6, THP1ARP3PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, THP2ARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, THP2ARP3PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP1PRIWEIGHT=6, THP3ARP2PRIWEIGHT=3, THP3ARP3PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4, BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2, BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1, BEARP1PRIWEIGHT=8, BEARP2PRIWEIGHT=4, BEARP3PRIWEIGHT=2; //Deactivating QoS ARP/THP SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO, QOSOPT=NO; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


344



84

Configuring PS Active Package Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management.

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – Embedded PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.

l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l


Context Active queue management (AQM) is an algorithm used to maintain the buffer queue length within an appropriate range by discarding data packets in the buffer queue actively. It increases data throughput and reduces service delay at the price of buffer utilization. AQM is applicable to scenarios in which bandwidth is limited and congestion may occur. AQM not only ensures high link utilization but also reduces the delay of services that require low transfer delay. It also enhances fair utilization of bandwidth among services and increases data throughput. AQM is applicable to interactive services, background services, and BE services (namely, services without QoS requirements). It is not applicable to conversational services or streaming services.



345



1.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AQM Switch to OPEN (Open). Set AQM Congestion Threshold, AQM Target Threshold, AQM Maximum Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Initial Interval, AQM Packet Discard Interval Lower Threshold, AQM Packet Discard Interval Upper Threshold, and AQM N Update Interval according to actual network conditions. It is advised that these values be set to recommended values.


Use an MS to download a large-sized file (about 2 MB) through FTP. After the download is started, use the MS to download a small-sized file (about 200 KB) through FTP.

2.

View the result of downloading the small-sized file. The expected result: When AQM Switch is set to OPEN(Open), the time required to download the small-sized file is reduced, and the rate for downloading the large-sized file is decreased.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AQM Switch to CLOSE (Close).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter) and view the value of AQM Switch. The expected result: The value of AQM Switch is Close.

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256, AqmTarTh=384, AqmMaxTh=1024, AqmSwitch=OPEN, AqmNinit=20, AqmNLowerBound=10, AqmNUpBound=20, AqmM=20; //Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: AqmSwitch=CLOSE; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


346



85

Configuring PoC QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119905 PoC QoS.

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.

l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following features GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR).

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS and the CN support PoC service.

Context The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of group call service implemented on the GSM network. The PoC service adopts the packet switching technology and it is carried on the GPRS/EGPRS networks. Huawei GBSS equipment can correctly distinguish PoC services from other services and apply QoS mechanisms for the PoC services. The QoS mechanisms consist of GBR, reduced data transmission delay, and uplink/downlink balanced channel allocation method.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set POC Support to Support(Support). Set Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

347



Min. GBR for POC Service, Max. GBR for POC Service, and Transmission Delay of POC Service according to actual situations. l

l


Set the registration type of the MS to streaming service. Ensure that the GBR value is between the values of Min. GBR for POC Service and Max. GBR for POC Service. The transfer delay must be smaller than Transmission Delay of POC Service.

2.

Use the MS to perform PoC service. The expected result: The PoC result runs properly.

3.

Use the MS whose registration type is streaming service and the MSs of other types to perform Ping service. The MSs share the same channel group. The expected result: The Ping delay is smaller after PoC QoS is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set POC Support to NO(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, POCGBRMIN=6, POCGBRMAX=16, POCDELAY=650, PocSup=Support; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, PocSup=NotSupport;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


348



86

Configuring Conversational QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119906 Conversational QoS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board have been configured.

l

Requirements for the Network Topology – The Abis interface must use the Abis over IP and Abis over HDLC networking modes.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – The MS and SGSN must support the PFM procedure and R99 QoS.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-114101 GPRS, GBFD-114201 EGPRS, GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A, GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A, GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction.

l


l


Context As real-time services, conversational services require low transfer delay. The priorities for scheduling radio resources for the PoC service and conversational services are higher than those for other services. As defined in 3GPP specifications, the transfer delay of conversational services must not exceed 80 ms. Generally, the end-to-end transfer delay of VoIP services must not exceed 300 ms. Otherwise, user satisfaction deteriorates.



349


l

l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA with Support GBR QoS set to YES(Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD NSE with PFC Support set to YES (Support).

3.

On the SGSN side, enable the network service entity (NSE) to support Packet Flow Context (PFC).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandRST SIGBVC to reset the SIGBVC to ensure that the NSE status on the SGSN side is consistent with that on the BSC side.


Initiate PS message tracing over the Um interface and check the PSI13 message. Expected result: The value of pfc-feature-mode in the PSI13 message is 1, indicating that the BSC supports PFC.

2.

Start PTP message tracing over the Gb interface. Perform PDP context activation on an MS whose registered traffic class is Conversational. Expected result: Signaling messages such as Create BSS PFC and Create BSS PFC Ack are displayed, indicating that the PDP context has been activated.

3.

Use an MS whose registered traffic class is Conversational and an MS whose registered traffic class is interactive or background to perform PS services. Ensure that the two MSs are multiplexed on the same PDCH group. Expected result: The wireless-block scheduling delay, BER, and number of data transmission times for MS whose registered traffic class is Conversational are less than those for the MS whose registered traffic class is non-Conversational.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA with Support GBR QoS set to NO(Not Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE with PFC Support set to NO(Not Support).

3.


----End

Example //Activating Conversational QoS SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1; //Deactivating Conversational QoS SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=NO; MOD NSE: NSEI=1, PFCSUP=NO; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


350


87 Configuring NC2

87

Configuring NC2

This section describes how to configure, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116201 Network Control Mode 2 (NC2).

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – Embedded PCU should be used,the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required.

l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search when GERAN-to-UTRAN Cell Reselection.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The test cell has a neighboring cell. – The serving cell works properly. – This feature should be supported by the MS. – The serving cell and the target cell belong to the same PLMN. If they belong to different PLMNs, configure the two PLMNs as equivalent PLMNs on the SGSN. – For the GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection function, ensure that the Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable parameter has been set to YES(Yes) for the GSM cell, and at least one neighboring WCDMA cell has been configured.

Context With this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal level can reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level. Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection considers factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, and signal level of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


351


87 Configuring NC2

Procedure l

Activation Procedure –

Activating NC2 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the parameters as follows: – Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). – Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

–

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC2 (NC2).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > NC2 Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the thresholds at cell reselection.

Activating GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC0 (NC0) or NC1(NC1).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLRESELUTRANFDD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > UTRAN FDD Reselection Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network-controlled GSM-to-FDD Cell Reselection to SUPPORT (Support) and the following parameters set to appropriate values:FDD MultiRAT Reporting, FDD Reporting Offset, FDD Reporting Threshold, Min. Ec/No Threshold 2 for PS FDD Reporting, Min. RSCP Threshold 2 for PS FDD Reporting and FDD Reselection Threshold.

Verification Procedure –

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2.

Verifying NC2 1.

Use the MS to perform GPRS services on the GSM serving cell. On the LMT, trace PS messages on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

2.

Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the serving cell so that it becomes overloaded.

3.

Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced, the NC2 is enabled. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352


87 Configuring NC2

– The Packet Measurement Report message that the MS sends to the BSC. – The Packet Cell Change Order message that the BSC sends to the MS. –

Verifying GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection 1.

On the LMT, trace PS messages on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

2.

In the Um Interface PS Trace dialog box, set Trace Type to Cell and Cell ID to the index of the cell to be verified.

3.

Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced, the GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection is enabled. – The BSC sends a Packet Measurement Order message to the MS. – The MS periodically sends a Packet Measurement Report message to the BSC. – When the PS service duration exceeds the value of the FddReselTimeThd parameter, the BSC sends a Packet Cell Change Order message to the MS.

l

Deactivation Procedure –

Deactivating NC2 1.

–

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

Deactivating GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLRESELUTRANFDD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > UTRAN FDD Reselection Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network-controlled GSM-to-FDD Cell Reselection to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure //Activating NC2 SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=50; //Activating GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0; SET GCELLRESELUTRANFDD: GSMTOFDDFORCENC2=SUPPORT, PsBestFddCellNum=3, PsFddCellRptOff=0, PsFddCellRptThd=0, PsFddRptThr2Ecno=10, PsFddRptThr2Rscp=10, FddReselTimeThd=2000; //Deactivation Procedure //Deactivating NC2 SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO; //Deactivating GSM-to-WCDMA Network-Controlled Cell Reselection SET GCELLRESELUTRANFDD: GSMTOFDDFORCENC2=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


353



88

Configuring Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) and GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status(PSI). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS and Core Network (CN) must support this feature. – The test cell is a GSM cell and has a neighboring GSM cell. – The cell supports the GRPS service or EDGE service. – The serving cell support NACC. – The network control modes of the serving cell is set to NC0 or NC1. – The serving cell and the target cell belong to the same PLMN. If they belong to different PLMNs, configure the two PLMNs as equivalent PLMNs on the SGSN. – The MS detects signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and detects a neighboring cell with better signal strength.

Context NACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period of service disruption caused by cell reselection. The BSC sends the system information on the neighboring cells to the MS that works in packet transfer mode so that the MS can initiate packet access after cell reselection. After receiving the Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


354



system information on neighboring cells on the PACCH, the MS that is in packet transfer mode can keep these information for 30 seconds, during which it can attempt to access the neighboring cell according to the system information.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating Intra-BSC NACC 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES (Yes). NOTE

To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set to YES(Yes).

– Activating Inter-BSC NACC 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC0(NC0) or NC1(NC1).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES (Yes). NOTE

To further improve the performance of PS services, the parameter PACKET SI can be set to YES(Yes).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to YES(Support). NOTE

l Both the serving cell and the target cell support RIM. l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the serving cell and target cell is set to Yes. l RIM Support in the NSE assigned to the SGSN is set to Yes.

CAUTION l Before performing 4, set RIM Support to YES(Support) on both the BSC and SGSN sides. Otherwise, the RIM does not take effect. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to activate RIM. NOTE

Perform this operation when the traffic is light because it affects the services of all cells under the NSE.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Use the MS to initiate GPRS services, and monitor the signaling over the Um interface. Ensure that the MS is in the serving cell.

2.

Move the MS or increase the power of the target cell to make the receive level of the target cell higher than that of the serving cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

355



3.

Trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. After detecting signal strength deterioration in the serving cell and an external neighboring cell with better signal strength, the MS sends the PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC. Then, the BSC responds with the PACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message, which contains the SI1, SI3, and SI13 system information about the target cell. In addition, the BSC sends the PACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS, instructing the MS to proceed with the cell reselection procedure.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support NACC to NO(No) and PACKET SI to NO(No). Expected result: The value of Support NACC is NO(No) and that of PACKET SI is NO(No). The cell supports neither NACC nor PACKET SI STATUS.

----End

Example //Activating Intra-BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0; SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES, PKTSI=YES; //Activating Inter-BSC Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC0; SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES, PKTSI=YES; MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0; //Deactivating Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=NO, PKTSI=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


356


89


Configuring BSS Paging Coordination

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependency on Other Features – None

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Gs interface does not exist. – The MS supports this feature.

Context In the case the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is not configured and the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network can send CS paging messages for a user on the PACCH to enable the user in packet transfer mode to respond to the CS paging.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

357



Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BSS Paging Co-ordination to YES (YES). l


Use one test MS to perform the PING service.

2.

Use a second MS to call the test MS. The expected result: The call is set up successfully and the conversation is proper. NOTE

After a CS paging is initiated, a CS call is set up successfully but the ongoing PS service is interrupted.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BSS Paging Co-ordination to NO(NO).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


358



90

Configuring PS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BSC is configured with a built-in PCU, a packet service processing board, and a Gb interface board.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS supports PS handover. To support inter-RAT PS handover between GSM and UMTS, the MS must be a multi-mode MS. – The CN supports PS handover. – The SGSN supports PS handover. – A neighboring GSM or UMTS cell has been configured.

Context After an NSE is configured to support PS handover, all cells under this NSE support PS handover. l

Intra-RAT PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over from a GSM cell to another GSM cell under the same BSC or different BSCs.

l

Inter-RAT incoming PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over from a UMTS cell to a GSM cell.

l

Inter-RAT outgoing PS handover allows an MS performing a PS service to be handed over from a GSM cell to a UMTS cell.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


359



Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activate PFC at an NSE by performing the following operations: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PFC Support to YES(Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Support GBR QoS to YES(Support).

– Activate PS handover at the NSE by performing the following operation: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS Handover Support to YES(Support).

– Activate inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell by performing the following operation: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

– Activate inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell by performing the following operation: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support In Inter-RAT Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

– Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC. NOTE

Perform this operation when the traffic is light because it affects the services of all cells under the NSE.

l


The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure. Otherwise, some messages will not be traced successfully.

– Verify that the NSE supports PS handover by performing the following operations: 1.

Initiate Gb-interface signaling tracing of the NSE on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC.

Expected result: In the BVC-RESET message, the value of PS Handover contained in Extended Feature Bitmap is 1. – Verify that a cell supports intra-RAT PS handover by performing the following operations: 1.

Initiate Gb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2.

When the handover requirement for the cell level is met, initiate a PS handover request.

Expected result: The PS Handover Required message contains the information element (IE) "Target RNC Identifier." – Verify that a cell supports inter-RAT incoming PS handover by performing the following operations: Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


360



1.

Enable the MS to camp on a UMTS cell and upload and download files. Initiate Gb-interface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2.

Move the MS away from the UMTS cell or increase the number of MSs that upload and download files in the UMTS cell.

3.

Check the PTP messages traced on the Gb interface of the target GSM cell. Expected result: The PS Handover Request message carries the IE "Source RNC Identifier." In addition, the PS Handover Request Ack message from the BSC can be viewed.

– Verify that a cell supports inter-RAT outgoing PS handover by performing the following operations: 1.

Enable the MS to camp on a GSM cell and upload and download files. Initiate Gbinterface PTP message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2.

Move the MS away from the GSM cell or increase the number of MSs that upload and download files in the GSM cell.

3.

Check the PTP messages traced on the Gb interface of the target UMTS cell. Expected result: The PS Handover Required message contains the IE "Target RNC Identifier."

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivate inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell by performing the following operation: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– Deactivate the inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell by performing the following operation: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

– Deactivate PS handover at the NSE by performing the following operation: 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set PS Handover Support to NO(No Support).

– Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC. ----End

Example //Activating PFC at an NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PFCSUP=YES; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GBRQOS=YES; //Activating PS handover at the NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=YES; //Activating inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Activating inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


361



//Resetting the SIG BVC RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0; //Deactivating inter-RAT incoming PS handover in a cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT; //Deactivating inter-RAT outgoing PS handover in a cell SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT; //Deactivating PS handover at the NSE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, PSHOSUP=NO; //Resetting the SIG BVC RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


362



91

Configuring PS Power Control

About This Chapter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119504 PS Power Control.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in packet control unit (PCU), PS service processing boards, and Gb interface boards have been configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-114201 EGPRS

l


Context l

Note Enabling downlink power control may decrease the proportion of high-rate coding schemes.

l

Data Preparation – Scenario 1: Normal EGPRS power decrease Parameter Name DL EGPRS Closed-Loop Power Control Support

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

SUPPSDLPC

YES(Yes)


Data Source Internal planning

363



Parameter Name

Data Source

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

DL EGPRS Closed-Loop Power Control MR Optimized

SUPEGPRSDL PCMROPT

YES(Yes)

Internal planning

PS Power Control Policy

PSPCPOLICY

0(Throughput preferred)

Internal planning

– Scenario 2: Preferential EGPRS power decrease Parameter Name DL EGPRS Closed-Loop Power Control Support

PS Power Control Policy

Data Source

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

SUPPSDLPC

YES(Yes)

Internal planning

SUPEGPRSDL PCMROPT

YES(Yes)

Internal planning

PSPCPOLICY

1(Power control preferred)

Internal planning

– Scenario 3: GPRS downlink power control Parameter Name DL GPRS Closed-Loop Power Control Support

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

SUPGPRSDLP C

YES(Yes)


91.1 Configuring EGPRS Downlink Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS downlink power control. 91.2 Configuring GPRS Downlink Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate GPRS downlink power control.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


364



91.1 Configuring EGPRS Downlink Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate EGPRS downlink power control.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with GPRS set to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE set to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > PS Power Control Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with DL EGPRS Closed-Loop Power Control Support set to YES(Yes) and PC_MEAS_CHAN set to BCCH(BCCH). Set the following parameters based on network planning: – DL Power Control Coding Scheme Stat. Thres. – DL Power Control Coding Scheme Stable Thres. – DL EGPRS Power Control Enable Coding Scheme Thres. – P0 – DL EGPRS Power Control Target CIR Position – DL EGPRS Power Control Target CIR Offset – Max. Downlink Power Decrease Granularity – Downlink Power Control Precision – Dummy Power Reduce Granularity – USF Dummy Power Control Factor – PS Power Control Policy – DL EGPRS Closed-Loop Power Control MR Optimized – Downlink EGPRS MR Filtering Factor

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA with both Uplink Fixed MCS Type and Downlink Fixed MCS Type set to MCS9(MCS9).

2.

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data.

3.

Start a PS trace task over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. View the Packet Uplink Assignment, Immediate Assignment, Packet Downlink Assignment, DTM Assignment Command, and Packet Timeslot Reconfigure messages to ensure that the information elements (IEs) p0 and pr-mode are carried in these messages. NOTE

For example, in the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the value of is-p0 is 1, and the IEs p0 and pr-mode are carried in the message. (The value of is-p0 is 0 when PS power control is not enabled.)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


365


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > PS Power Control Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DL EGPRS ClosedLoop Power Control Support to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating EGPRS downlink power control and optimization of EGPRS downlink closed-loop measurement report SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PCMEASCHAN=BCCH, SUPPSDLPC=YES, MCSSTATTHR=10, MCSSTABTHR=8, DLPCSTARTTHR=MCS9, DLPCINITPR=DB0, TGTCIRPOS=3, TGTCIROFFSET=2, MAXPCSTEP=1, PSPCPRES=0.6dB, DummyPRGran=15, USFDummyPCFactor=3, PSPCPOLICY=0, SUPEGPRSDLPCMROPT=YES; //Deactivating EGPRS downlink power control SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPSDLPC=NO;

91.2 Configuring GPRS Downlink Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate GPRS downlink power control.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with GPRS set to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE set to NO(No). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > PS Power Control Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with DL GPRS Closed-Loop Power Control Support set to YES(Yes) and PC_MEAS_CHAN set to BCCH(BCCH). Set the following parameters based on network planning: – DL Power Control Coding Scheme Stat. Thres. – DL Power Control Coding Scheme Stable Thres. – DL GPRS Power Control Enable Coding Scheme Thres. – P0 – Max. Downlink Power Decrease Granularity – Downlink Power Control Precision – Dummy Power Reduce Granularity – USF Dummy Power Control Factor – Downlink EGPRS MR Filtering Factor – DL GPRS Power Control Target Level Thres.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


366



– DL GPRS Power Control Level Class Adj. Factor l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCS with both Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type set to CS4(CS4).

2.

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data.

3.

Start a PS trace task over the Um interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. View the Packet Uplink Assignment, Immediate Assignment, Packet Downlink Assignment, DTM Assignment Command, and Packet Timeslot Reconfigure messages to ensure that the information elements (IEs) p0 and pr-mode are carried in these messages. NOTE

For example, in the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the value of is-p0 is 1, and the IEs p0 and pr-mode are carried in the message. (The value of is-p0 is 0 when PS power control is not enabled.)

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSPWPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > PS Power Control Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DL GPRS ClosedLoop Power Control Support to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating GPRS downlink power control SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO; SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPGPRSDLPC=YES, GPRSDLMRFLTGENE=30, GPRSDLPCSTARTTHR=CS4, GPRSDLPCRELTHR=50, GPRSDLPCRELADJGENE=6, PSPCPOLICY=0; //Deactivating GPRS downlink power control SET GCELLPSPWPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPGPRSDLPC=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


367



92

Configuring PDCH Dynamic

Adjustment with Two Thresholds

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The cell is configured with dynamic TCHFs.

Context With this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performed according to the traffic load in the cell. This feature effectively increases the channel usage, reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and thus improves the CS access performance and PS retainability performance. l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Preparation


368



Parameter Name

Data Source

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

UPDYNCHNT RANLEV

This parameter controls dynamic channel conversion requests and releases based on the uplink load in a cell. If the proportion of PDCHs is large in a cell, you are advised to set this parameter to a large value to minimize the impact of PS services on CS services.

Networ k plannin g

Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

DWNDYNCH NTRANLEV

This parameter controls dynamic channel conversion requests and releases based on the downlink load in a cell. If the proportion of PDCHs is large in a cell, you are advised to set this parameter to a large value to minimize the impact of PS services on CS services.

Networ k plannin g

Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate

CHIDLHIGHT HR

When the proportion of idle TCHs is greater than this threshold and more than one MS is multiplexed onto a PDCH, a dynamic channel conversion request is raised.

Networ k plannin g

Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate

CHIDLLOWT HR

When the proportion of idle TCHs for CS services is less than this threshold, a dynamic channel release is triggered.

Networ k plannin g

Inter_Cell PS Resource Preempt Allowed

PSRESPREEM PT

This parameter specifies whether PS services in a cell can preempt PDCHs of other cells if Abis transmission resources or DPU resources are insufficient.

Networ k plannin g

Inter_Cell PS Resource Preempted Allowed

PSRESPREEM PTED

This parameter specifies whether PDCHs in a cell can be preempted by PS services of other cells if Abis transmission resources or DPU resources are insufficient.

Networ k plannin g

PS Service Guaranteed Rate

PDCHGBR

This parameter specifies the minimum number of Abis resources requested for PDCHs at a site. For example, if this parameter is set to 16K(16K), a minimum of 16 kbit/s bandwidth must be requested. To enable the services carried on PDCHs to use a high-rate coding scheme, set this parameter to a value indicating a high rate.

Networ k plannin g



369


l


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, Dynamic TBF DL MUX Thres. for Channel Conversion, Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, Inter_Cell PS Resource Preempt Allowed and Inter_Cell PS Resource Preempted Allowed. The value of Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate must be smaller than 100.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set PS Service Guaranteed Rate.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Customized Network Optimization Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set bit 18 of Cell ReservedParameter 4 to 1.


The following configuration is temporarily implemented to quickly bring this feature into effect. For a commercial network, it is recommended that the configuration be implemented as planned. Restore to the original configuration after the verification.

l

1.

Configure sufficient idle timeslots.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SETGCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to a small value (for example, 20), Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to a small value (for example, 5), Maximum Rate Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell to 100, and Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to 0.

3.

Configure one static PDCH and multiple TCHFs. Ensure that at least 4 PDCHs can be generated through channel conversion after PS services are initiated, and that the proportion of idle TCHs is greater than the value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate.

4.

Use two MSs to process PS services (data downloading). When the proportion of idle TCHs to all TCHs is greater than the value of Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, TCHF-to-PDCH conversion is triggered.

5.

Use more MSs to process PS services (data downloading). When the proportion of idle TCHs to all TCHs is greater than the value of Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate and the average downlink load of PDCHs in the cell is greater than the value of Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion, TCHFto-PDCH conversion is triggered.

6.

Initiate CS services to occupy more TCHs. When the proportion of idle TCHs to all TCHs is less than the value of Lower Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate, idle PDCHs are converted to TCHs.


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Downlink Multiplex Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

370



Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to the value before this feature is activated and Upper Threshold for CS Idle Channel Rate to 100. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set PS Service Guaranteed Rate to the value before this feature is activated.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Customized Network Optimization Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set bit 18 of Cell ReservedParameter 4 to 0.

----End

Example //Activating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=20, CHIDLHIGHTHR=20, CHIDLLOWTHR=10, PSRESPREEMPT=YES, PSRESPREEMPTED=YES; SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=64K; SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CellPSReservePara4=262144; //Deactivating PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV=10, CHIDLHIGHTHR=100; SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PDCHGBR=32K; SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CellPSReservePara4=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


371


93 Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/ EGPRS User

93

Configuring Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119506 Timeslot Multiplexing Priority for GPRS/EGPRS User.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in PCU, packet service processing board, and Gb interface board have been configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated: – GBFD-114101 GPRS – GBFD-114201 EGPRS – GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority – This feature cannot be used with the following features: GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Gb interface has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).

Context This feature controls the proportion of Um interface resources allocated to GPRS users and EGPRS users by adjusting GPRS/EGPRS timeslot multiplexing priority parameter settings, thereby increasing the network throughput.



372



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MAC Scheduling Type to PFSCHEDULE (Proportion Fair Scheduling).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to an appropriate value based on the network plan. NOTE

The default value of Priority Weight of EGPRS Users is 1. If this parameter is set to another value, EGPRS and GPRS users are multiplexed based on their priorities.

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Downlink Minimum Guaranteed Rate to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PDCH Management Optimization to ON(On).

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS Channel Priority Type Auto-Planning to ON(On) and set Number of EGPRS Special Channels, Number of EGPRS Priority Channels, Number of EGPRS Priority Channels, Number of EGPRS Special Channels (OL Subcell), Number of EGPRS Priority Channels (OL Subcell), and Number of EGPRS Normal Channels (OL Subcell) to appropriate values based on the network plan. NOTE

Before performing the preceding operation, back up the settings of PDCH Channel Priority Type for PDCHs in the cell.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the minimum value, 1.

2.

Use two MSs, one supporting EGPRS and the other supporting GPRS, to download data through FTP simultaneously. Check the downloading rates of the two MSs.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA. In this step, set Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the maximum value, 3. Then, check the downloading rates of the two MSs. The expected result is that the downloading rate of the EGPRS MS increases whereas the downloading rate of the GPRS MS decreases.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set GPRS Channel Priority Type Auto-Planning to ON(On), set Number of EGPRS Priority Channels to the planned value, and set Number of EGPRS Special Channels, Number of EGPRS Priority Channels, Number of EGPRS Special


373



Channels (OL Subcell), Number of EGPRS Priority Channels (OL Subcell), and Number of EGPRS Normal Channels (OL Subcell) to 0. 5.

l

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set PDCH Management Optimization to ON(On). Then, check the download rate of the two MSs. The download rate for the EGPRS MS remains or increases and that for the GPRS MS increases.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Priority Weight of EGPRS Users to the default value 1 or set MAC Scheduling Type to a value other than PFSCHEDULE (Proportion Fair Scheduling).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PDCH Management Optimization to OFF(Off).

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS Channel Priority Type Auto-Planning to OFF(Off).

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PDCH Channel Priority Type so that the PDCH priority types of PDCHs roll back to the settings before GPRS Channel Priority Type Auto-Planning is set to ON(On).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MACSCHEDULETYPE=PFSCHEDULE; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=2; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DLMINGUARANTEERATE=12; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EnPDAdminOpt =ON; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AutoGprsChPri =ON; ET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsSpeChnum=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriChnum=4; SSET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsNorChnum=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsSpeChnumInn=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriChnumInn=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsNorChnumInn=0; //Verification procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=1; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=3; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EnPDAdminOpt =ON; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AutoGprsChPri =ON; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriChnum=4; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsSpeChnum=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsNorChnum=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsSpeChnumInn=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


374



SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriChnumInn=0; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsNorChnumInn=0; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MACSCHEDULETYPE=CIRSCHEDULE, SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EgprsPriWeight=1; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EnPDAdminOpt =OFF; SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, AutoGprsChPri =OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


375


94 Configuring EDA

94

Configuring EDA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature is supported by MS.

Context Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS traffic is higher in downlink than in uplink. In specific situations (for example, sending large size email through the GPRS/EGPRS network), however, the requirement on uplink bandwidth is stricter. The EDA feature can allocate at least three timeslots for an MS in the uplink. If the high multislot class is supported, five timeslots can be allocated to the MS of high multislot class 34 in the uplink, thus meeting the requirement for higher bandwidth in the uplink. The use of the EDA feature needs the support from the MS. In the radio access capability reported to the network, the MS indicates whether it supports GPRS uplink EDA or EGRPS uplink EDA.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

376


94 Configuring EDA

Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support).


Start the Gb Interface PTP Trace window on the LMT and use the MS to dial a number (activate PDP context). The expected result: Check in the ACTIVE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message that the value of gprs-extended-dynamic-allocation-capability is 1or the value of egprsextended-dynamic-alloccation is 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGPRS to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

6.

Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services.

7.

Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS. NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check number of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs (EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support).

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGPRS to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Support. 12. Use the MS to perform FTP uploading services. 13. Record the uploading speed and the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS. NOTE

If the cell has only one MS, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to check number of PDCHs with the Number of Uplink TBFs (GPRS) or Number of Uplink TBFs (EGPRS) being 1 and record the result.

14. Compare the results obtained in Step 7 and Step 13. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


377


94 Configuring EDA

The expected result: As recorded in Step 13, the number of PDCHs occupied by the MS is greater than or equal to 3, and the uploading speed is improved to a great extent than that recorded in Step 7. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter) to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell) to check the value of Support EDA. The expected result: The value of Support EDA is Not Support.

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT; SET GCELLGPRS: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:; SET GCELLGPRS: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; LST GCELLGPRS:; DSP PDCH: IDXTYPE=BYCELL, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:; SET GCELLGPRS: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT; LST GCELLGPRS:; //Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; LST BSCPSSOFTPARA:; SET GCELLGPRS: SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; LST GCELLGPRS:;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


378


95


Configuring MS High Multislot Classes This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) when more than two timeslots are required on the uplink.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature is supported by MS.

Context The function of MS High Multislot Classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/ downlink timeslots to an MS, thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS.

Procedure l


l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support High Multislot Class to SUPPORT(Support).


379


l


1.

Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. For details, see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

2.

Use the MS to download data in the test cell.

3.

Double-click the Packet Downlink Assignment message in the traced messages, and query the value of the timeslot-allocation information element (IE). Verify that the number of 1s in the value of the IE in the corresponding binary bitmap reaches the maximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support High Multislot Class to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example \\Activation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=SUPPORT; \\Deactivation Procedure SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


380


96 Configuring DTM

96

Configuring DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114151 DTM.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell or GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2).

l


l

Other Prerequisites – If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transfer mode. For details on how to configure BSS paging coordination, see 89 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination. – Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. NOTE

ECSC can be configured by running the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches).

– The MSC and MS support DTM. – The MSC must support the COMMON ID message.

Context DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS services and PS services. That is, a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a voice call. In a 3G network, the speech and data services are Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


381


96 Configuring DTM

processed in parallel. In this sense, DTM enables the GSM subscribers to enjoy the services similar to those provided by the 3G network. In addition, the 2G network can complement the 3G network in terms of coverage.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support DTM to SUPPORT(Support).


Use the MS to make a CS call.

2.

Initiate the single-user CS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.

3.

Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.

4.

Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result. Expected result: PS downloading services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected. NOTE

One of the following messages is traced: DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activating DTM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT; //Deactivating DTM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


382



97

Configuring Class11 DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Features GBFD-114151 DTM and GBFD-119401 EDA have been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transfer mode. For details on how to configure BSS paging coordination, see 89 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination. – Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. NOTE

ECSC can be configured by running the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches).

– DTM should be supported by the MSC. Class11 DTM should be supported by the MS.

Context Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth for the uplink PS services of the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the channel assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


383



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to SUPPORT(Support).


Make a CS call.

2.


3.

Initiate the single-user PS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.

4.

Use the MS to perform PS data uploading services.

5.

Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result.

6.

Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result. Expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected. NOTE

One of the following messages is traced in the single-user CS signaling tracing: DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment. Single-user PS signaling tracing result shows that two uplink PDCHs are occupied by service messages.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), SUPPORT DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support Class11 DTM to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activating Class11 DTM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=SUPPORT; //Deactivating Class11 DTM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, CLASS11DTM=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


384



98

Configuring HMC DTM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119404 HMC DTM.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-114151 DTM, GBFD-119401 EDA, GBFD-119402 MS High multislot classes.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – If the network operation mode II or III is configured, BSS paging coordination must be configured so that CS pagings can be performed successfully in packet transmission mode. – Early Classmark Sending Control (ECSC) must be configured so that the MS can automatically send the classmark control message to the network as early as possible after the immediate assignment. – DTM should be supported by the MSC. DTM HMC should be supported by the MS.

Context Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHs respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech + 3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink. The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP specifications are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 31-33, 36-38, and 41-44. The class 31-33 are called HMC DTM. For an MS of DTM multislot class 32-33, the Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) function must be used if the MS requires more than or equal to three channels in the uplink. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


385



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to SUPPORT (Support).


Make a CS call.

2.


3.

Initiate the single-user PS signaling tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.

4.

Use the MS to perform PS data downloading services.

5.

Check the single-user CS signaling tracing result.

6.

Check the single-user PS signaling tracing result. Expected result: PS services are performed successfully while the CS call is not affected. NOTE

One of the following messages is traced in the single-user CS signaling tracing: DTM Request, DTM Assignment Command, or Packet Assignment. Single-user PS signaling tracing result shows that three PDCHs are occupied by service messages.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support DTM to SUPPORT(Support), and Support HMC DTM to UNSUPPORT (Not Support).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=SUPPORT; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT, HMCDTM=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


386


99


Configuring 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119405 14.4 kbit/s Circuit Switched Data.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BTS3012/AE/3006C/3002E does not support this feature when using non optimized DTRU. – The BTS3900B/E does not support the feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data of single-timeslot mode should be supported by the MSC.

Context Huawei GSM BSS supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with a high rate of 14.4 kbit/s for transparent data services.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

387


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT to check the value of Data service allowed. Expected result: The values of both T14_4K and NT14_5K in the Data service allowed parameter are USED.

2.

Use an MS to initiate a 14.4 kbit/s circuit switched data service. Then, trace the signaling on the A interface. Expected result: The service has been initiated. After the signaling on the A interface is parsed, the value of Channel Type in the Assignment Request message is as follows: – non-transparent data service

Figure 99-1 Non-transparent data service

– transparent data service Figure 99-2 Transparent data service

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

388



Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect NT14_5K and T14_4K in the Data Service Allowed parameter. ----End

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


389



100

Configuring High Speed Circuit Switched Data

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119406 High Speed Circuit Switched Data.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BTS3900E supports this feature. – The BTSs that use the following TRX modules also support this feature: GRFU V2, MRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V2a, MRFUd, MRFUe, RRU3008 V2, RRU3908 V2, RRU3928, RRU3929, RRU3942, and RRU3926.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is incompatible with the following features: GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS and the CN must support this feature. – The feature works in a BM/TC combined mode. – Dual-timeslot extension cells do not support multislot HSCSD. CS domain data services can only use a single timeslot.

Context With this feature, a maximum of four TCHs can be combined to form a channel group. The data rate of such a channel group reaches up to 57.6 kbps, improving user experience.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

390



Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Data Service Allowed to Choose All, and set Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels and HSCSD Channel Scanning Period to appropriate values based on the network plan.HSCSD Channel Scanning Period can be set to the default value.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HSCSD Traffic Busy Threshold to an appropriate value based on the network plan or the default value.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following reserved parameters to appropriate values: – Bit 13 of Reserved parameter 4: Specifies whether to change the primary channel when a single channel is upgraded to multiple channels or multiple channels are degraded to a single channel after the MS initiates HSCSD user rate speedup or slowdown. If bit 13 is set to 1, the primary channel is not changed. If bit 13 is set to 0, the primary channel is changed. – Bit 14 of Reserved parameter 4: Specifies whether to allow a call to preempt the secondary channel for HSCSD services. If bit 14 is set to 1, the call can preempt the secondary channel. If bit 14 is set to 0, the call cannot preempt the secondary channel. – Bit 1 of Reserved parameter 10: Specifies whether to allow HSCSD channel integration. If bit 1 is set to 1, HSCSD channel integration is not allowed. If bit 1 is set to 0, HSCSD channel integration is allowed.

l


The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has at least 2 consecutive idle TCHF channels.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels to NOT_SUPPORT(Not Support).

2.

Use a test MS to establish CS-based data services at a rate of 28.8 kbps.

3.

Initiate A interface message tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area. CS-based data services fail to be established. The Assignment Failure message is traced on the A interface.


391


l


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT. In this step, set Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels to TWO_CHANNELS(Two Channels).

5.

Use a test MS to establish CS-based data services at a rate of 28.8 kbps.

6.

Initiate A interface message tracing on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface, and select BSSAP in the Trace Type area. CS-based data services are established.

7.

Monitor the channel state in the cell. The services occupy two consecutive channels.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Maximum Number of HSCSD Channels to NOT_SUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activating High Speed Circuit Switched Data //Enabling ECSC: SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, ECSC=YES; //Setting the data service, the maximum number of channels allowed for an MS and the channel dynamic adjustment period: SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, DATATRAFFSET=NT14_5K-1&NT12K-1&NT6K-1&T14_4K-1&T9_6K-1&T4_8K-1&T2_4K-1&T1 _2K-1&T600_BITS-1&T1200_75-1, HSCSDTRAFFSET=TWO_CHANNELS, HSCSDSCANPER=4500; //Setting HSCSD traffic busy threshold: SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, HSCSDBUSYTHRES=80; //Setting interface tag: SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; //Setting that the primary channel is changed: SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCRESERVEDPARA4=57343; //Setting that a call cannot preempt the secondary channel for HSCSD services: SET OTHSOFTPARA: BSCRESERVEDPARA4=49151; //Setting that HSCSD channel integration is allowed: SET GCELLOPTREV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CELLOPTRSVPARA10=65533; //Deactivating High Speed Circuit Switched Data SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, HSCSDTRAFFSET=NOT_SUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


392



101

Configuring Active TBF Allocation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation.

Prerequisites l


l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – A built-in PCU is configured. A packet switched (PS) service processing board and the Gb interface board are used.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The test cell is configured to support GPRS in built-in PCU mode. – The test cell supports the GRPS or EDGE services.

Context On the live network, the number of TBFs multiplexed on a PDCH cannot reflect the actual PDCH usage. For low-throughput services, data transmission time is a small part of a TBF life cycle. This leads to a PDCH usage. The Active TBF Allocation feature directs the BSC to allocate PDCHs to TBFs to balance the loads between PDCHs. Enabling this feature has the following impacts on system capacity: l

Increases the downlink LLC throughput of GPRS or EGPRS MSs when the number of activated PDCHs remains unchanged or decreases.

l

Increases the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs by decreasing the number of activated PDCHs, while maintaining the cell throughput and downlink LLC throughput.

l

Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


393



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Dynamic TBF Switch

ACTIVETBFSWITCH

Set this parameter to ON(On).

Network planning

Uplink Multiplex UPDYNCHNTRANLEV Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

To increase the Network downlink LLC planning throughput of GPRS or EGPRS MSs, set Dynamic TBF Switch to ON(On). To improve the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs, set Dynamic TBF Switch to ON(On) and Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to a large value.

Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

DWNDYNCHNTRANLEV To increase the Network downlink LLC planning throughput of GPRS or EGPRS MSs, set Dynamic TBF Switch to ON(On). To improve the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs, set Dynamic TBF Switch to ON(On) and Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion to a large value.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394



Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic TBF Switch to ON(ON). l

l


Subscribe to the following counter: TX.DOWN.EGPRS.LLC.PDU.THRPUT.RATE.AVG (AL9530: Downlink Throughput of EGPRS Users LLC PDU).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) for at least one channel and set Channel Type to TCHFR (TCH Full Rate) for multiple channels.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Dynamic TBF Switch to OFF(OFF).

4.

Use multiple MSs to initiate EGPRS PS services. Ensure that most of them are lowthroughput services and few of them are FTP services.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET GCELLPSCHM. In this step, set Dynamic TBF Switch to ON(On).

6.

Maintain the EGPRS PS services in Step 4 for a period of time. Expected result: The value of TX.DOWN.EGPRS.LLC.PDU.THRPUT.RATE.AVG (AL9530: Downlink Throughput of EGPRS Users LLC PDU) increases after the Active TBF Allocation feature is enabled.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, setDynamic TBF Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activating Active TBF Allocation SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ACTIVETBFSWITCH=ON; //Deactivating Active TBF Allocation SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ACTIVETBFSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


395



102

Configuring MSRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD 510801 Mobile Station Receive Diversity (MSRD).

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS. – This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context The MSRD improves the signal receiving capability of the MS. Two antennas are used to eliminate interference, therefore achieving enhanced channel diversity capability.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > GPRS Channel Management Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MSRD PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold to 10 and MSRD MCS Threshold to MCS9 (MCS9). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

396


l



l

Assume that the interference is the same and dual carrier in the downlink is not supported. Use the MS that supports MSRD to perform packet services. Check that the rate of this MS is more stable than the MS that does not support MSRD.



----End

Example //Activating MSRD SET GCELLPSCHM: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MSRDPDCHLEV=10, MSRDMCSLEV=MCS9;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


397



103

Configuring Dual Carriers in Downlink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink (DLDC).

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114201 EGPRS. – This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature: GBFD-510801 MSRD.

l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated.

l

Other Prerequisites – The cell has sufficient resources and the cell is configured with more than two carriers. – This feature should be supported by the MS.

Context The network supports the feature of allocating downlink channel resources on the two carriers at the same time. This improves the rate of the downlink packet data. The dual carriers in downlink function can improve the rate of the downlink packet data of a single MS (100% at the most). A single MS may take up more resources, and therefore the number of MSs supported by the network is reduced.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

398



Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and Support Downlink Dual-Carrier to SUPPORT (Support). l

l


Use the MS to perform streaming services.

2.

Refer to Monitoring Channel Status to check the usage of occupied channels. Expected result:


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Downlink Dual-Carrier to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), EDGE to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating DLDC SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, DLDCSPT=SUPPORT; //Deactivating DLDC SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO, DLDCSPT=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


399



104

Configuring the EGPRS2-A

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A and GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Processing board and Gb interface board are required. – This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios, the PEUa /POUc boards are needed as Abis interface board, the DPUc boards are needed in GMPS /GEPS subrack.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization or GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The Abis interface of the cell works in HDLC or IP mode. – Only DBS3900(RRU3008) supports this feature. – The TRXs configured for the BTS should support this feature. – MS should support this feature.

Context l

After a cell is configured to support the EGPRS2-A, the network can allocate the Temporary Block Flow (TBF) in EGPRS2-A mode to the MSs in the cell.

l

Impact on the performance: The UL/DL packet rate of a single MS is improved. The uplink data rate over the air interface can be increased to 76.8 kbit/TS and the downlink to 98.4 kbit/TS.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


400



Procedure l


l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to YES(Yes).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLEGPRSPARA. In this step, Uplink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type and Downlink EGPRS2-A Fixed MCS Type to the coding types required by the test.

2.

Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. In this step, The uplink/downlink EGRPS2-A coding schemes set in Step 1 can be viewed.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).

4.

Use the MS to perform the PING service, and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface on the BSC6900 LMT. The output result shows that only the coding schemes from MCS1 to MCS9 are used.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EGPRS2-A to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=YES; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLEGPRSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPE2AFIXMCS=MCS2, DNE2AFIXMCS=MCS2; SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EGPRS2A=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


401



105

Configuring Latency Reduction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BSC6900 built-in PCU should be used, the Packet Process board and Gb interface board is required. – This feature only applies to IP networking scenarios.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization or GBFD-114201 EGPRS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BTS and MS support the latency reduction.

Context Latency reduction is introduced in the HDLC/IP transmission mode over the Abis interface to reduce the transmission latency, enhance user experience on the conversational service, and improve user satisfaction. NOTE

BTS3006C/BTS3002E/BTS3012/BTS3012AE/BTS3900B/E do not support this feature.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

402



Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), EDGE to YES(Yes), and Support Reduced Latency Capability to SUPPORT (Support). l

l


Use the MS to perform conversational services in the PS domain.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PDCH to query the status of the PDCH. Expected Result: In the displayed result, the number of RTTI TBFs on the PDCH is not zero.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support Reduced Latency Capability to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activating Latency Reduction SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, SPTREDUCELATENCY=SUPPORT; //Deactivating Latency Reduction SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES, SPTREDUCELATENCY=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


403



106

Configuring IM Service Efficiency Improvement

The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS feature. The ARP1 scheduling weight, ARP2 scheduling weight, and ARP3 scheduling weight functions of this feature depend on the GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP or GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority feature. – IM PDCH Multiplexing Weight becomes ineffective when this feature and GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation are enabled simultaneously.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment The Network Intelligence Unit (NIUa) board is configured.

l

Dependencies on Transport Network The built-in PCU is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other NEs and Third-Party Devices This feature is ineffective when the logical link control (LLC) layer is encrypted, or the subnetwork dependent convergence protocol (SNDCP) layer is compressed because the services cannot be identified.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


404


l



Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Board Class

BRDCLASS

NIU

Internal planning

Board Type

BRDTYPE

NIUa

Internal planning

Logical function type

LGCAPPTYPE

NIU

Internal planning

Subrack No.

SRN

Number of the subrack that houses the NIU board

Internal planning

Slot No.

SN

Number of the slot that houses the NIU board

Internal planning

MPU Subrack No.

MPUSUBRACK

Number of the subrack that houses the MPU subsystem

Internal planning

MPU Slot No.

MPUSLOT

Number of the slot that houses the MPU subsystem

Internal planning

GPRS

GPRS

SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU)

Network planning

Support DPI

SPTDPI

BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support)

Network planning

Protocol ID

PROTOCOLID

ID of the protocol used by PS services. Set this parameter based on customers' requirements.

Network planning

Service Type

TRAFFICTYPE

IMSERVICE(Instant Messaging Service)

Network planning

Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP1

IMARP1MAXPD CHNUM

Set this parameter based on the service priority.

Network planning


IMARP2MAXPD CHNUM


Network planning


405



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source


IMARP3MAXPD CHNUM


Network planning

IM ARP1 Scheduling Weight

IMARP1WEIGHT


Network planning


IMARP2WEIGHT


Network planning


IMARP3WEIGHT


Network planning

IM PDCH Multiplexing Weight

IMPDCHMULTIP LEXWEIGHT


Network planning

IM Downlink TBF Release Delay

IMDLTBFRELDE LAY


Network planning

IM Service Optimize

IMOPT

Whether to enable the function of optimizing IM services. If this parameter is set to ON(On), the BSC allocates radio resources to IM services based on the settings of IM service optimization parameters.

Network planning

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NIU board. In this step, set Board Class to NIU, Board Type to NIUa, Logical function type to NIU, Subrack No. and Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the NIU board, and MPU Subrack No. and MPU Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the MPU subsystem, respectively.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable service identification. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support DPI to BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

406



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRAFFICMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > the Mapping Between Protocol IDs and Service Types; CME batch modification center: not supported) to map a specific protocol ID to an instant messaging (IM) service. In this step, set Protocol ID to an appropriate value and Service Type to IMSERVICE(Instant Messaging Service). NOTE

For details about the mapping between Protocol ID and protocol name for specific services, see the Protocol List.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set IM Service Optimize to ON (On) and configure resource optimization parameters for IM services. NOTE

l Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP2 and Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP3 must be set to appropriate values simultaneously. l IM ARP1 Scheduling Weight, IM ARP2 Scheduling Weight and IM ARP3 Scheduling Weight must be set to appropriate values simultaneously.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE. In this step, set Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP2, and Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP3 to 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSCHM, In this step, set Layered Service Optimize Start Threshold to 0.

3.

Use an MS to perform an IM service for more than one minute and check whether only one PDCH is occupied by the MS on the Web LMT. Ensure that a specific protocol ID has been mapped to the IM service.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set IM Service Optimize to OFF (Off).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Adding an NIU board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=10, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting a cell to support BSC service awareness SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTDPI=BSCSUPPORT; //Adding mapping ADD TRAFFICMAP: PROTOCOLID=184, TRAFFICTYPE=IMSERVICE; //Setting resource optimization parameters for IM services SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMARP1MAXPDCHNUM=1, IMARP2MAXPDCHNUM=1,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


407



IMARP3MAXPDCHNUM=1, IMARP1WEIGHT=5, IMARP2WEIGHT=5, IMARP3WEIGHT=5, IMPDCHMULTIPLEXWEIGHT=50, IMDLTBFRELDELAY=1200, IMOPT=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IMOPT=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


408



107

Configuring Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement

The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS feature. The ARP1 scheduling weight, ARP2 scheduling weight, and ARP3 scheduling weight functions of this feature depend on the GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP or GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority feature. – Web Browsing PDCH Multiplexing Weight becomes ineffective when this feature and GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation are enabled simultaneously.

l


l


l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


409


l



Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Board Class

BRDCLASS

NIU

Internal planning

Board Type

BRDTYPE

NIUa

Internal planning


LGCAPPTYPE

NIU

Internal planning

Subrack No.

SRN


Internal planning

Slot No.

SN


Internal planning

MPU Subrack No.

MPUSUBRACK


Internal planning

MPU Slot No.

MPUSLOT


Internal planning

GPRS

GPRS


Network planning

Support DPI

SPTDPI


Network planning

Protocol ID

PROTOCOLID


Network planning

Service Type

TRAFFICTYPE

WEBSERVICE(Web Page Browsing Service)

Network planning

Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP1

WEBARP1MAXP DCHNUM


Network planning


WEBARP2MAXP DCHNUM


Network planning


410



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source


WEBARP3MAXP DCHNUM


Network planning

Web Browsing ARP1 Scheduling Weight

WEBARP1WEIG HT


Network planning


WEBARP2WEIG HT


Network planning


WEBARP3WEIG HT


Network planning

Web Browsing PDCH Multiplexing Weight

WEBPDCHMULT IPLEXWEIGHT


Network planning

Web Browsing Downlink TBF Release Delay

WEBDLTBFREL DELAY


Network planning

Web Browsing Service Optimize

WEBOPT

Whether to enable the function of optimizing web browsing services. If this parameter is set to ON(On), the BSC allocates radio resources to web browsing services based on the settings of web browsing service optimization parameters.

Network planning

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NIU board. In this step, set Board Class to NIU, Board Type to NIUa, Logical function type to NIU, Subrack No. and Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the NIU board, and MPU Subrack No. and MPU Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the MPU subsystem, respectively. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

411



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable service identification. In this step, set GPRS and Support DPI to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support), respectively.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRAFFICMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > the Mapping Between Protocol IDs and Service Types; CME batch modification center: not supported) to map a specific protocol ID to a web browsing service. In this step, set Protocol ID to an appropriate value and Service Type to WEBSERVICE (Web Page Browsing Service). NOTE


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Web Browsing Service Optimize to ON(On) and configure resource optimization parameters for web browsing services. NOTE

l Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP2 and Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP3 must be set to appropriate values simultaneously. l Web Browsing ARP1 Scheduling Weight, Web Browsing ARP2 Scheduling Weight and Web Browsing ARP3 Scheduling Weight must be set to appropriate values simultaneously.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE. In this step, set Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP2, and Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP3 to 1.

2.


3.

Use an MS to perform a web browsing service for more than one minute and check whether only one PDCH is occupied by the MS on the Web LMT. Ensure that a specific protocol ID has been mapped to the web browsing service.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set Web Browsing Service Optimize to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Adding an NIU board

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


412



ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=10, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting a cell to support BSC service awareness SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTDPI=BSCSUPPORT; //Adding mapping ADD TRAFFICMAP: PROTOCOLID=64, TRAFFICTYPE=WEBSERVICE; //Setting resource optimization parameters for web browsing services SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, WEBARP1MAXPDCHNUM=2, WEBARP2MAXPDCHNUM=2, WEBARP3MAXPDCHNUM=2, WEBARP1WEIGHT=10, WEBARP2WEIGHT=10, WEBARP3WEIGHT=10, WEBPDCHMULTIPLEXWEIGHT=50, WEBDLTBFRELDELAY=2400, WEBOPT=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, WEBOPT=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


413



108

Configuring Email Service Efficiency Improvement

The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS feature. The ARP1 scheduling weight, ARP2 scheduling weight, and ARP3 scheduling weight functions of this feature depend on the GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP or GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority feature. – Email PDCH Multiplexing Weight becomes ineffective when this feature and GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation are enabled simultaneously.

l


l


l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


414


l



Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Board Class

BRDCLASS

NIU

Internal planning

Board Type

BRDTYPE

NIUa

Internal planning


LGCAPPTYPE

NIU

Internal planning

Subrack No.

SRN


Internal planning

Slot No.

SN


Internal planning

MPU Subrack No.

MPUSUBRACK


Internal planning

MPU Slot No.

MPUSLOT


Internal planning

GPRS

GPRS


Network planning

Support DPI

SPTDPI


Network planning

Protocol ID

PROTOCOLID


Network planning

Service Type

TRAFFICTYPE

EMAILSERVICE(Email Service)

Network planning

Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP1

EMAILARP1MA XPDCHNUM


Network planning




Network planning


415



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source




Network planning

Email ARP1 Scheduling Weight

EMAILARP1WEI GHT


Network planning


EMAILARP2WEI GHT


Network planning


EMAILARP3WEI GHT


Network planning

Email PDCH Multiplexing Weight

EMAILPDCHMU LTIPLEXWEIGH T


Network planning

Email Downlink TBF Release Delay

EMAILDLTBFRE LDELAY


Network planning

Email Service Optimize

EMAILOPT

Whether to enable the function of optimizing email services. If this parameter is set to ON(On), the BSC allocates radio resources to email services based on the settings of email service optimization parameters.

Network planning

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NIU board. In this step, set Board Class to NIU, Board type to NIUa, Logic function type to NIU, Subrack No. and Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the NIU board, and MPU Subrack No. and MPU Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the MPU subsystem, respectively.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable service identification. In this step, set GPRS and Support DPI to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

416



SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support), respectively. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRAFFICMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > the Mapping Between Protocol IDs and Service Types; CME batch modification center: not supported) to map a specific protocol ID to an email service. In this step, set Protocol ID to an appropriate value and Service Type to EMAILSERVICE (Email Service). NOTE


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Email Service Optimize to ON (On) and configure resource optimization parameters for email services. NOTE

l Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP2 and Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP3 must be set to appropriate values simultaneously. l Email ARP1 Scheduling Weight, Email ARP2 Scheduling Weight and Email ARP3 Scheduling Weight must be set to appropriate values simultaneously.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE. In this step, set Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP2, and Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP3 to 1.

2.


3.

Use an MS to perform an email service for more than one minute and check whether only one PDCH is occupied by the MS on the Web LMT. Ensure that a specific protocol ID has been mapped to the email service.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set Email Service Optimize to OFF (Off).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Adding an NIU board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=10, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting a cell to support BSC service awareness SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTDPI=BSCSUPPORT; //Adding mapping ADD TRAFFICMAP: PROTOCOLID=449, TRAFFICTYPE=EMAILSERVICE; //Setting resource optimization parameters for email services

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


417



SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EMAILARP1MAXPDCHNUM=3, EMAILARP2MAXPDCHNUM=3, EMAILARP3MAXPDCHNUM=3, EMAILARP1WEIGHT=10, EMAILARP2WEIGHT=10, EMAILARP3WEIGHT=10, EMAILPDCHMULTIPLEXWEIGHT=80, EMAILDLTBFRELDELAY=80, EMAILOPT=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EMAILOPT=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


418



109

Configuring Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing

The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS feature. The ARP1 scheduling weight, ARP2 scheduling weight, and ARP3 scheduling weight functions of this feature depend on the GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP or GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority feature. – Streaming Media PDCH Multiplexing Weight becomes ineffective when this feature and GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation are enabled simultaneously.

l


l


l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


419


l



Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Board Class

BRDCLASS

NIU

Internal planning

Board Type

BRDTYPE

NIUa

Internal planning


LGCAPPTYPE

NIU

Internal planning

Subrack No.

SRN


Internal planning

Slot No.

SN


Internal planning

MPU Subrack No.

MPUSUBRACK


Internal planning

MPU Slot No.

MPUSLOT


Internal planning

GPRS

GPRS


Network planning

Support DPI

SPTDPI


Network planning

Protocol ID

PROTOCOLID


Network planning

Service Type

TRAFFICTYPE

STREAMINGSERVICE (Streaming Media Service)

Network planning

Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP1

STREAMINGAR P1MAXPDCHNU M


Network planning




Network planning


420



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source




Network planning

Streaming Media ARP1 Scheduling Weight

STREAMINGAR P1WEIGHT


Network planning




Network planning




Network planning

Streaming Media PDCH Multiplexing Weight

STREAMPDCHM ULTIPLEXWEIG HT


Network planning

Streaming Media Downlink TBF Release Delay

STREAMINGDL TBFRELDELAY


Network planning

Streaming Media Service Optimize

STREAMINGOPT

Whether to enable the function of optimizing streaming media services. If this parameter is set to ON(On), the BSC allocates radio resources to streaming media services based on the settings of streaming media service optimization parameters.

Network planning

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NIU board. In this step, set Board Class to NIU, Board Type to NIUa, Logical function type to NIU, Subrack No. and Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the NIU board, and MPU Subrack No. and MPU Slot No. to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

421



the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the MPU subsystem, respectively. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable service identification. In this step, set GPRS and Support DPI to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support), respectively.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRAFFICMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > the Mapping Between Protocol IDs and Service Types; CME batch modification center: not supported) to map a specific protocol ID to a streaming media service. In this step, set Protocol ID to an appropriate value and Service Type to STREAMINGSERVICE(Streaming Media Service). NOTE


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Streaming Media Service Optimize to ON(On) and configure resource optimization parameters for streaming media services. NOTE

l Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP2 and Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP3 must be set to appropriate values simultaneously. l Streaming Media ARP1 Scheduling Weight, Streaming Media ARP2 Scheduling Weight and Streaming Media ARP3 Scheduling Weight must be set to appropriate values simultaneously.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE. In this step, set Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP2, and Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP3 to 1.

2.


3.

Use an MS to perform a streaming media service for more than one minute and check whether only one PDCH is occupied by the MS on the Web LMT. Ensure that a specific protocol ID has been mapped to the streaming media service.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches),In this step, set Streaming Media Service Optimize to OFF(Off).

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


422



Example //Activation procedure //Adding an NIU board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=10, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting a cell to support BSC service awareness SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTDPI=BSCSUPPORT; //Adding mapping ADD TRAFFICMAP: PROTOCOLID=209, TRAFFICTYPE=STREAMINGSERVICE; //Setting resource optimization parameters for streaming media services SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STREAMINGARP1MAXPDCHNUM=4, STREAMINGARP2MAXPDCHNUM=4, STREAMINGARP3MAXPDCHNUM=4, STREAMINGARP1WEIGHT=10, STREAMINGARP2WEIGHT=10, STREAMINGARP3WEIGHT=10, STREAMPDCHMULTIPLEXWEIGHT=100, STREAMINGDLTBFRELDELAY=2400, STREAMINGOPT=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STREAMINGOPT=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


423



110

Configuring P2P Resource Balancing

The service-based differentiated PS service categorizes the specific services that have been identified into several types according to their characteristics, and allocates different Um interface resources to MSs based on the service type and the user priority. This enhances the Um interface resource usage, improves high-value services and the experience of high-priority users. Five features are included: GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement, GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing, and GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS feature. The ARP1 scheduling weight, ARP2 scheduling weight, and ARP3 scheduling weight functions of this feature depend on the GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP or GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority feature. – P2P PDCH Multiplexing Weight becomes ineffective when this feature and GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation are enabled simultaneously.

l


l


l


l


l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Other Prerequisites Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424



N/A

Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Board Class

BRDCLASS

NIU

Internal planning

Board Type

BRDTYPE

NIUa

Internal planning


LGCAPPTYPE

NIU

Internal planning

Subrack No.

SRN


Internal planning

Slot No.

SN


Internal planning

MPU Subrack No.

MPUSUBRACK


Internal planning

MPU Slot No.

MPUSLOT


Internal planning

GPRS

GPRS


Internal planning

Support DPI

SPTDPI


Internal planning

Protocol ID

PROTOCOLID


Internal planning

Service Type

TRAFFICTYPE

P2PSERVICE(P2P Service)

Internal planning

Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP1

P2PARP1MAXPD CHNUM


Internal planning


P2PARP2MAXPD CHNUM


Internal planning


425



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source


P2PARP3MAXPD CHNUM


Internal planning

P2P ARP1 Scheduling Weight

P2PARP1WEIGH T


Internal planning


P2PARP2WEIGH T


Internal planning


P2PARP3WEIGH T


Internal planning

P2P PDCH Multiplexing Weight

P2PPDCHMULTI PLEXWEIGHT


Internal planning

P2P Downlink TBF Release Delay

P2PDLTBFRELD ELAY


Internal planning

P2P Service Optimize

P2POPT

Whether to enable the function of optimizing P2P services. If this parameter is set to ON(On), the BSC allocates radio resources to P2P services based on the settings of P2P service optimization parameters.

Internal planning

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NIU board. In this step, set Board Class to NIU, Board Type to NIUa, Logical function type to NIU, Subrack No. and Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the NIU board, and MPU Subrack No. and MPU Slot No. to the number of the subrack and the number of the slot that houses the MPU subsystem, respectively.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable service identification. In this step, set GPRS and Support DPI to


426



SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and BSCSUPPORT(BSC Support), respectively. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRAFFICMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > the Mapping Between Protocol IDs and Service Types; CME batch modification center: not supported) to map a specific protocol ID to a point-to-point (P2P) service. In this step, set Protocol ID to an appropriate value and Service Type to P2PSERVICE(P2P Service). NOTE


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set P2P Service Optimize to ON (On) and configure resource optimization parameters for P2P services. NOTE

l Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP2 and Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP3 must be set to appropriate values simultaneously. l P2P ARP1 Scheduling Weight, P2P ARP2 Scheduling Weight and P2P ARP3 Scheduling Weight must be set to appropriate values simultaneously.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE. In this step, set Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP1, Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP2, and Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP3 to 1.

2.


3.

Use an MS to perform a P2P service for more than one minute and check whether only one PDCH is occupied by the MS on the Web LMT. Ensure that a specific protocol ID has been mapped to the P2P service.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Service-based Differentiated PS Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches),In this step, set P2P Service Optimize to OFF (Off).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Adding an NIU board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=10, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; //Setting a cell to support BSC service awareness SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTDPI=BSCSUPPORT; //Adding mapping ADD TRAFFICMAP: PROTOCOLID=842, TRAFFICTYPE=P2PSERVICE; //Setting resource optimization parameters for P2P services

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


427



SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, P2PARP1MAXPDCHNUM=4, P2PARP2MAXPDCHNUM=4, P2PARP3MAXPDCHNUM=4, P2PARP1WEIGHT=10, P2PARP2WEIGHT=10, P2PARP3WEIGHT=10, P2PPDCHMULTIPLEXWEIGHT=100, P2PDLTBFRELDELAY=2400, P2POPT=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLPSDIFFSERVICE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, P2POPT =OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


428



111

Configuring WLAN Hot Spot Notification

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511608 WLAN Hot Spot Notification.

Prerequisites l


l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – N/A

l

Dependencies on Transport Network – N/A

l

Dependencies on Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – A suitable WLAN traffic distribution application is installed on a terminal.

l

Other Prerequisites – This feature is supported only for a built-in packet control unit (PCU). – This feature does not apply to encryption and compression at the LLC-PDU or SNDCP layer. – This feature does not apply to encryption at the network layer. – This feature does not apply to the acknowledgement mode at the logical link control (LLC) layer.

Context As PS traffic in mobile networks soars, mobile networks face a greater challenge of traffic. The WLAN Hot Spot Notification feature helps to discover WiFi hot spots and distribute intelligent WiFi under control of mobile networks by coordinating WiFi and mobile networks, therefore Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


429



improving the usage of operators' WLANs and relieving the pressure of PS traffic in mobile networks. l

Precautions – None

l


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Service Set ID

SSID

Set this parameter to the same value as the SSID of the WLAN.

Network planning

WLAN Control Policy

WlanCtrl

Operators can enable or disable this function based on their WiFi coverage or cell load.

Network planning

WLAN Load Distribution Start Threshold

LoadThrToWlan

Set this parameter when WLAN Control Policy is set to ON(ON). The recommended value for this parameter is 60.

Network planning

WLAN Load Distribution Stop Threshold

LoadThrStpWlan

Set this parameter when WLAN Control Policy is set to ON(ON). The value of this parameter must be less than WLAN Load Distribution Start Threshold. The recommended value for this parameter is 40.

Network planning

Wi-Fi Searching Duration

WifiTmr

Duration for a terminal to search for WiFi. The recommended value for this parameter is 10.

Network planning

Wi-Fi Disable Timer

StpWifiTmr

A period of time after which WiFi is disabled automatically if no data traffic occurs from the moment when WiFi is enabled. The recommended value for this parameter is 300.

Network planning

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GWLANINFO (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Operator Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

430



WLAN Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Service Set ID to an appropriate value. 2.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLWLAN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > WLAN Distribution Control Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set WLAN Control Policy to ON(ON) and set WLAN Load Distribution Start Threshold, WLAN Load Distribution Stop Threshold, Wi-Fi Searching Duration, and Wi-Fi Disable Timer to appropriate values.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLWLAN to query parameters controlling WLAN traffic distribution in GSM cells. Expected results: WLAN Control Policy is set to ON.

2.

Verify that the following results are achieved when the cell load exceeds the value of WLAN Load Distribution Start Threshold: Expected results: The WiFi function is automatically enabled on the MS on which the WLAN distribution software is installed, and partial PS services on the GSM network are distributed to the WLAN.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLWLAN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > WLAN Distribution Control Parameters for GSM Cells; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set WLAN Control Policy to OFF (OFF).

----End

Example //Activating WLAN Hot Spot Notification ADD GWLANINFO: OPINDEX=1, SSID="CMCC"; SET GCELLWLAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, WlanCtrl=ON, LoadThrToWlan=60, LoadThrStpWlan=40, WifiTmr=10, StpWifiTmr=300; //Deactivating WLAN Hot Spot Notification SET GCELLWLAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, WlanCtrl=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


431



112

Configuring Multiple CCCHs

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Based on configuration of BCCH TRX timeslot 0 as the BCCH physical channel, the feature of Multiple CCCHs allows one to configure timeslots 2, 4, and 6 as BCCH physical channels. This increases the number of CCCHs in a cell and therefore improves the paging and random access capabilities of the cell.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) with TRX ID and Channel No. set to appropriate values and Channel Type set to BCH (BCH). NOTE

The main BCCH can be configured in only channel 0, and the extension BCCH can be configured in channel 2, 4, or 6. If an extension BCCH is configured, the CCCH parameter in the system message needs to be configured accordingly. For example, if an extension BCCH is configured in timeslot 2, the CCCH parameter in the system message needs to be configured as two uncombined CCCHs.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


432


l

l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID set to an appropriate value, Channel No. set to 2, and Channel Type set to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate) or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).

2.

Make a call.

3.

Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Expected result: The value of channel-no. in all paging messages is 0.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN with TRX ID set to an appropriate value, Channel No. set to 2, and Channel Type set to BCH(BCH).

5.

Make a call.

6.

Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Expected result: In paging messages, the value of channel-no. is 2.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) with TRX ID and Channel No. set to appropriate values, and Channel Type set to TCHFR (TCH Full Rate) or TCHHR(TCH Half Rate).

----End

Example //Activating Multiple CCCHs SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=BCH; //Deactivating Multiple CCCHs SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


433



113

Configuring Layered Paging

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511502 Layered Paging.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in PCU is configured. A packet switched (PS) service processing board and the Gb interface board are used.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – GSM, UMTS, or LTE neighboring cells are configured. – The value of the Ready timer configured on the SGSN side is obtained. – Layered Paging must be enabled for cells that correspond to the same network service entity (NSE). Otherwise, Layered Paging does not take effect.

Context The CCCHs will be overloaded when the number of PS paging messages exceeds that of CS paging messages and increases continuously, which affects the access CS users. Layered paging enables the first paging to be sent only to the last cell on which the MS camps and to its configured neighboring cells, reducing the CCCHs for PS paging.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

434



and then set PS Paging Control to FIRSTPRECISEPAGING(First precise paging) or ALWAYSNORMALPAGING(Always normal paging) according to the network planning. 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches), set Ready Timer. Note that the value of the Ready timer must be the same as that of the Ready timer configured on the SGSN side.


Connect an MS to a laptop and initiate PS services. Then, record the IP address of the MS and stop PS services.

2.

On the LMT, trace SIG messages on the Gb interface by referring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface and trace CS messages on the Um interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

3.

Wait for a period longer than the value of the Ready timer, and then ping the IP address of the MS on the FTP server to trigger the paging procedure. Expected result: – The PS PAGING message can be viewed in the SIG messages traced on the Gb interface. – In the CS messages traced on the Um interface, the Packet Ccch Command or Paging Request message can be viewed only in the cell where the MS camps when processing PS services and the configured neighboring cells.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), and then set PS Paging Control to ALWAYSNORMALPAGING(Always normal paging).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, PSPagingCtrl=FIRSTPRECISEPAGING; SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: ReadyTimer=44; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, PSPagingCtrl=ALWAYSNORMALPAGING;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


435



114

Configuring Dynamic Multiple CCCH

In traffic surge scenarios such as holidays or emergencies, paging overload occurs, which greatly affects services. In static multiple common control channel (CCCH) configuration mode, the specific number of configured channels is difficult to determine. If the configured channels are insufficient, paging overload cannot be resolved thoroughly; if excessive channels are configured, channel resources are wasted. The Dynamic Multiple CCCH feature can resolve the preceding issues. With this feature, if the load on the CCCHs increases, the TCHs corresponding to timeslots 2, 4, and 6 on the BCCH TRX are dynamically converted to CCCHs in succession. This increases the paging capability over the Um interface. If the load on the CCCHs decreases, the CCCHs corresponding to timeslots 6, 4, and 2 on the BCCH TRX are dynamically converted to TCHs in succession. This increases the resource usage. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511503 Dynamic Multiple CCCH.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment Only 3900 series base stations support this feature. BTS3900B/BTS3900E do not support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Transport Network N/A

l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


436



Context l

Precautions 1.

If timeslot 0 of the BCCH TRX is combined BCCH or BCCH+CBCH, the Dynamic Multiple CCCH feature cannot be enabled for the BCCH TRX.

2.

You are advised to enable or disable this feature in all the cells under the same location area. NOTE

The paging mode used by the Huawei BSS is: location area code (LAC) paging and BSC paging.

3.

Set BCCH TRX RSL Multiplexing Mode – TMSI paging: When Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs plus the number of static BCHs is 1, 2, and 3, you are advised to set BCCH TRX RSL Multiplexing Mode to MODE2_1, MODE1_1, and MODE1_1, respectively. – IMSI paging: When Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs plus the number of static BCHs is 1, 2, and 3, you are advised to set BCCH TRX RSL Multiplexing Mode to MODE4_1, MODE2_1, and MODE1_1. NOTE

A large value of Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs represents a high Um interface capability. To avoid message delivery congestion over the Abis interface, you need to increase the RSL bandwidth of BCCHs and set BCCH TRX RSL Multiplexing Mode by referring to the preceding suggestions.

4.

The following negative gains occur on the channels involved in baseband frequency hopping, on the channels configured as SDCCHs or static PDCHs, and on the channels reserved for VIP users in the cell: – If Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs is set to 1, the channels cannot be configured in timeslot 2. Otherwise, this feature cannot be enabled. – If Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs is set to 2, the channels cannot be configured in timeslot 2 or 4. Otherwise, this feature cannot be enabled. – If Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs is set to 3, the channels cannot be configured in timeslot 2, 4, or 6. Otherwise, this feature cannot be enabled.

l

Data Preparation Parameter Name Dynamic Multiple CCCHs

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

DynCCCHSwitch

If static BCHs are configured in a cell, remove static BCHs and enable this feature in all cells under the location area. If over 70% of all cells under a location area experience paging timeout during peak hours on the live network, disable this feature in all the cells under the location area. If over 160,000 paging messages are sent in one peak hour in a cell on the live network, enable this feature in all the cells under the location area.



437



Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Source

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Dynamic CCCH Addition Threshold

DynCCCHLoadIncrThr

Load threshold for dynamically converting a TCH to an extended CCCH. If the CCCH load is higher than the value of this parameter within the duration specified by DynCCCHLoadDuration, a TCH is dynamically converted to an extended CCCH. The larger the value of this parameter, the less the number of TCHs dynamically converted to extended CCCHs during peak hours, the lower the paging efficiency. The smaller the value of this parameter, the more the number of TCHs dynamically converted to extended CCCHs during offpeak hours, the lower the resource usage.

Network planning

Dynamic CCCH Removal Threshold

DynCCCHLoadRedcThr

Load threshold for dynamically converting an extended CCCH to a TCH. An extended CCCH can be dynamically converted to a TCH if the following conditions are met: The CCCH load is lower than the value of this parameter within the duration specified by DynCCCHLoadDuration. The BSC predicts that the message sending capability on the Um interface is adequate after the number of CCCHs decreases. The interval between two consecutive conversions reaches the value specified by DynCCCHReduceInterval. The larger the value of this parameter, the more the number of extended CCCHs dynamically converted to TCHs during peak hours, the lower the paging efficiency. The smaller the value of this parameter, the more the number of extended CCCHs dynamically converted to TCHs during offpeak hours, the lower the resource usage.

Network planning


438



Parameter Name Dynamic CCCH Load Stat. Duration

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

DynCCCHLoadDu ration

Duration during which the CCCH load is higher than the value of "DynCCCHLoadIncrThr" or lower than the value of "DynCCCHLoadRedcThr". After this duration is exceeded, the BTS triggers dynamic additions or removals of extended CCCHs. The larger the value of this parameter, the longer the time to trigger dynamic conversion between extended CCCHs and TCHs, the less the number of dynamic conversions, the lower the paging efficiency. The smaller the value of this parameter, the shorter the time to trigger dynamic conversion between extended CCCHs and TCHs, the more the number of unnecessary conversions due to inaccurate determination, the lower the resource usage.



439



Parameter Name Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

MaxDynCCCHNu m

Maximum number of extended CCCHs that can be dynamically converted in a cell. In each cell, there are a maximum of three extended CCCHs, including dynamically converted CCCHs and statically configured CCCHs. These CCCHs are carried by timeslots 2, 4, and 6 on the BCCH TRX. When the CCCH load is low, the channels on these timeslots can be occupied by signaling, CS services, or PS services. When the CCCH load is high, the channels on these timeslots are dynamically converted to extended CCCHs, which reduces the CCCH load. The larger the value of this parameter, the more the number of TCHs dynamically converted to CCCHs during peak hours, the less the number of available TCHs, the higher the TCH congestion rate. The smaller the value of this parameter, the less the number of TCHs dynamically converted to CCCHs, the lower the paging efficiency.



440



Parameter Name Interval for Dynamically Removing CCCHs

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

DynCCCHReduceI nterval

Period during which dynamic conversion from extended CCCHs to TCHs is prohibited after dynamic conversion between extended CCCHs and TCHs are performed. Specifying such period prevents ping-pong dynamic conversions due to CCCH load changes. The larger the value of this parameter, the less the number of extended CCCHs dynamically converted to TCHs during off-peak hours, the lower the resource usage. The smaller the value of this parameter, the more the number of extended CCCHs dynamically converted to TCHs, the more the number of ping-pong dynamic conversions due to paging burst, the lower the paging efficiency.


Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Multiple CCCHs to ON(ON), Dynamic CCCH Addition Threshold, Dynamic CCCH Removal Threshold, Dynamic CCCH Load Stat. Duration, Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs and Interval for Dynamically Removing CCCHs to appropriate values. To support the Dynamic Multiple CCCH feature, configure SDCCHs, static PDCHs, or channels reserved for VIP users that involve in the baseband frequency hopping in the cell by complying with the following rules: – If Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs is set to 1, the channels cannot be configured in timeslot 2. – If Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs is set to 2, the channels cannot be configured in timeslot 2 or 4. – If Maximum Number of Dynamic CCCHs is set to 3, the channels cannot be configured in timeslot 2, 4, or 6.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH. In this step, set Dynamic Multiple CCCHs to ON(ON), Dynamic CCCH Addition Threshold to 0, Dynamic CCCH Removal Threshold to 0, Dynamic CCCH Load Stat. Duration to 0.


441



2.

Trace CS messages over the RSL on the Abis interface. Initiate a large number of calls (including originated calls and terminated calls). Ensure that more than 100 paging messages are delivered within a second.

3.

On the LMT, click Device Maintenance, and then choose BTS3900 series > cell > Monitor Channel Status in Device Navigation Tree. Expected result: Timeslot 2 of the BCCH TRX is a BCH.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Multiple CCCHs to OFF (OFF).

----End

Example //Activating Dynamic Multiple CCCH SET GCELLCCCH: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, DynCCCHSwitch=ON, MaxDynCCCHNum=2, DynCCCHLoadIncrThr=90, DynCCCHLoadRedcThr=65, DynCCCHLoadDuration=10, DynCCCHReduceInterval=30; //Deactivating Dynamic Multiple CCCH SET GCELLCCCH: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, DynCCCHSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


442



115

Configuring RACH Storm Filtration

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511505 RACH Storm Filtration.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – N/A

l

Dependencies on Other Features – N/A

l


Context Table 115-1 Data preparation Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Remarks

Data Source

RACHFLTSW ITCH

RACH Storm Filter

This parameter specify whether to enable the RACH Storm Filtration feature.

Network planning

RACHFLTTA THD

RACH Storm Filter Access TA Threshold

This parameter specify the filter threshold for the TA difference between two consecutive random access request messages with the same random access reference value, which is considered as a TA filter condition. If the actual TA difference is less than or equal to this threshold, the TA filter condition is met.

Network planning

The recommended value is 4. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


443



Parameter ID

Parameter Name

Remarks

Data Source

RACHFLTFR EQ

RACH Storm Filter Access Frequency

This parameter specify the filter threshold for the number of consecutive random access request messages with the same random access reference value, which is considered as a frequency filter condition. If the number of random access request messages with the same random access reference value is greater than this threshold, the frequency filter condition is met.

Network planning

It is recommended that RACH Storm Filter Access Frequency be set to a value greater than the value of the MS MAX Retrans parameter. The recommended value is 4. RACHFLTTY PE

RACH Storm Filter Access Type

This parameter specifies whether to filter out the random access request messages whose access type is emergency call.

Network planning

RACHFLTTM INTVAL

RACH Storm Filter Access Interval

This parameter specify the filter threshold for the interval between two consecutive random access request messages with the same random access reference value, which is considered as a time filter condition. If the actual interval is less than or equal to this threshold, the time filter condition is met.

Network planning

The recommended value is 1 and the unit is 100 ms.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLREV (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Reserved Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RACH Storm Filter to YES(Yes) set RACH Storm Filter Access TA Threshold, RACH Storm Filter Access Frequency, RACH Storm Filter Access Type, and RACH Storm Filter Access Interval parameters to appropriate values.

Verification Procedure Query the values of the following counters before and after this feature is enabled: – RA303I-Success Rate of Call Setup (Immediate Assignment)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


444



– K3014-Traffic Volume on TCH Expected result: Compared with the values of the two counters before this feature is enabled, the value of the RA303I-Success Rate of Call Setup (Immediate Assignment) counter increases slightly and the value of the K3014-Traffic Volume on TCH counter remains unchanged or decreases after this feature is enabled. NOTE

When the cell traffic volume decreases greatly, set RACH Storm Filter Access Interval a small value. It is recommended that the actual value should not exceed 5s.

l

Deactivation Procedure Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLREV (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Reserved Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RACH Storm Filter to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating RACH Storm Filtration SET GCELLSOFT: RACHFLTSWITCH=YES, RACHFLTTYPE=EMERGENCY_CALL_ALLOWED-1, RACHFLTTMINTVAL=1, RACHFLTTATHD=4, RACHFLTFREQ=4; //Deactivating RACH Storm Filtration SET GCELLSOFT: RACHFLTSWITCH=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


445



116

Configuring Active Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117602 Active Power Control.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Active power control enables immediate control of MS or BTS transmit power during the MS assignment or intra-BSC handover. In such a case, the BSC can control the uplink and downlink power promptly. With active power control, the system interference is decreased, QoS is ensured, and power consumption of the MS or BTS is decreased.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Forecast Allowed to YES (Yes), set Active Power Control Algorithm Optimize to ON(On), and set Active Power Control Assign Power Offset and Active Power Control HO Power Offset to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

446



Batches). In this step, set UL PC Allowed to YES(Yes), and set DL PC Allowed to YES(Yes). l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, specify TRX ID and Channel No., and then set Administrative State to Lock (Lock) to block all TCHs on the BCCH TRX of cell 0 except SDCCH.

2.

Start tracing the CS messages of a single subscriber in cell 0 by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.

3.

Initiate a call.

4.

Check the result in Single User CS Trace window. Expected result: The call is successfully initiated and the communication is normal. The TCH occupied by the call is on a non-BCCH TRX, and the Measurement Result message regarding the call is present before the Channel Activation message is delivered. In addition, the values of bs power, ms power, phase-ii-bs-power, and phase-ii-ms-power in the Channel Activation message are not the maximum.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Forecast Allowed to NO(No) and set Active Power Control Algorithm Optimize to OFF(Off).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell) to query the setting of Power Forecast Allowed. Expected result: Power Forecast Allowed is set to No and Active Power Control Algorithm Optimize is set to Off.

----End

Example //Activating Active Power Control SET GCELLPWRBASIC:IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRBCDALLOWD=YES, PwrBCDOptimizeSwitch=ON, PwrBCDAssOffset =2, PwrBCDHoOffset=2; SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, UPPCEN=YES, DNPCEN=YES; //Deactivating Active Power Control SET GCELLPWRBASIC:IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PWRBCDALLOWD=NO, PwrBCDOptimizeSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


447



117

Configuring Discontinuous

Transmission (DTX)-Downlink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – Idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context DTX reduces data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, thereby reducing system interference and saving system resources. DTX also reduces BTS power consumption and frequency interference on the radio interface.

CAUTION DTX cannot be configured in multi-site cell mode.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448



of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set FR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). NOTE

If half-rate calls are in progress, set HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).

2.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DL DTX Strategy to BSC_STRATEGY(BSC Strategy).


Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.

2.

Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface, and then check the message tracing results. Expected result: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. In the information element (IE) channel-mode, the value of dtx-downlink is 1, indicating that the BSC supports downlink DTX.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set FR Use Downlink DTX to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=YES; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, DLDTXPOLICY=BSC_STRATEGY; //Deactivating Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRDLDTX=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


449



118

Configuring Discontinuous

Transmission (DTX)-Uplink

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – Idle channels are available in the test cell.

Context This feature reduces the data to be transmitted during inactive speech periods, reducing the system interference and saving system resources. In addition, this feature reduces the workload of the TX module of the MS, prolonging the call duration and standby time.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

450



Parameters in Batches) if HR services are processed currently. In this step, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). l


Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system messages to the test cell.

3.

Query the results for tracing CS messages over the Abis interface. Expected result: A message of the SACCH Filling type is traced. system-info-type is system-information-6 and the value of dtx2 is 01. System messages are sent correctly. NOTE

If HR Uplink DTX is set to Shall_Use(Shall Use), the value of dtx1 is 1.

l

4.

Use an MS to initiate a call. The call is successfully initiated.

5.

Query the results for tracing CS messages over the Abis interface. Expected result: A message of the Channel Activation type is traced. The value of dtx-uplink is 1. This indicates that the BSC supports the uplink DTX.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set FR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall not Use).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) if HR services are processed. In this step, set HR Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use(Shall not Use).

----End

Example //Activating full-rate uplink DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_Use; //Verifying full-rate uplink DTX SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024; //Deactivating full-rate uplink DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use; //Activating half-rate uplink DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HRULDTX=Shall_Use; //Verifying half-rate uplink DTX SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024; //Deactivating half-rate uplink DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HRULDTX=Shall_NOT_Use;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


451



119

Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. – At least two QTRUs or GRFUs need to be configured to support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature cannot be used with the following features: – GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) when one frequency hopping group is involved in baseband hopping. – GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) when inter-module RF hopping is applied. – GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell. – GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing.

l


Context The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function can be enabled during a specific period. After this function is enabled, idle TRXs can be shut down to reduce power consumption when estimated traffic load is light, and disabled TRXs can be switched on so that they are available for use when estimated traffic load is heavy. Generally, channel allocation measures are used together with this function. The channels on the BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned so that the utilization of the non-BCCH TRX channels is decreased and the overall power consumption of the BTS is reduced. In addition, the BTS allocates channels based on the priorities of TRXs. Channels on the TRXs with high Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


452



priorities are preferentially assigned to MSs. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels into a few TRXs so that as many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down. When the BCCH TRX participates in baseband FH, the cell TRX cannot be shut down. Thus, the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown cannot be used. When the BCCH TRX does not participate in baseband FH and all the TRXs (excluding the BCCH TRX) in the cell are idle, the TRXs can be shut down. Before configuring Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier on the TRX, ensure that the TRX meets the following conditions: l

The TRX is not on the BCCH.

l

The PDCH is not available on the TRX.

After confirming that all target TRXs are shutdown, wait for one minute, and then check whether the power decreases. Data Preparation Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC

BSCDynSwitchT rxPAAllow

This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX Intelligent Shutdown feature. This parameter takes effect on all BTSs under a BSC.

Networ k plannin g

Time When the Function Is Enabled

StartTimeTACloseTrxPA

Set this parameter based on the cell traffic volume. You are advised to use this feature during off-peak hours.

Networ k plannin g

Time When the Function Is Disabled

EndTimeTACloseTrxPA

Set this parameter based on the cell traffic volume. You are advised to use this feature during off-peak hours.

Networ k plannin g

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX

DYNOpenTrxPo wer

You are advised to set this parameter to YES(Yes) for all cells.

Networ k plannin g

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX

CPS

This parameter specifies whether to allow the BSC to enable or disable the TRX power amplifier based on the traffic volume.

Networ k plannin g

TRX Power-on Protection Time

ProtectTimeTrxPowerOn

This parameter is set to prevent the BSC from frequently enabling or disabling the TRX. After a TRX is powered on, the BSC is not allowed to disable the TRX within the period of time specified by this parameter.

Networ k plannin g


453



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Reserve Idle Channel Number

RsvIdleChanNu m

This parameter specifies the number of reserved idle channels. If this parameter is set too small, the TRX will be frequently enabled or disabled. If this parameter is set too large, idle TRXs will not be disabled in a timely manner.

Data Source Networ k plannin g

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Parameters of Dynamic Shutdown of TRX; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to YES(Yes), and set Time When the Function Is Enabled and Time When the Function Is Disabled according to the actual condition.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX to YES(Yes) to enable the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function for the cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX to YES(Yes), therefore allowing the BSC6900 to shut down the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCDSTPADATE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Date Range for Prohibiting Dynamic Shutdown of TRX; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled. In the period of heavy traffic, this function needs to be disabled. NOTE

l The BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPADATE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Date Range for Prohibiting Dynamic Shutdown of TRX) can be used to query the value of Prohibit DynShutdown TRX DateRangeldx. l The BSC6900 MML command RMV BSCDSTPADATE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Date Range for Prohibiting Dynamic Shutdown of TRX; CME batch modification center: not supported) can be used to remove the period in which the TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown function is disabled.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Wait for about five minutes. Then, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GTRXSTAT to query the value of Close TRX Power.


454



Expected result: The value of Close TRX Power is Yes. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Parameters of Dynamic Shutdown of TRX; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX by BSC to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX to NO(No).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the BSC SET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES, StartTimeTACloseTrxPA=19&00, EndTimeTACloseTrxPA=24&00; //Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a cell SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=YES; //Enabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a TRX SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=YES; //Setting the period during which the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function is prohibited ADD BSCDSTPADATE: DateRangeIndex=1, StartMonthDSTPA=JAN, StartDayDSTPA=10, EndMonthDSTPA=FEB, EndDayDSTPA=10; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for the BSC SET BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=NO; //Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a cell SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, DYNOpenTrxPower=NO; //Disabling the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown function for a TRX SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, CPS=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


455



120

Configuring TRX Power Amplifier

Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – DRFU, RRU3004, and DTRU (type B) support this feature. – BTSs configured with multi-transceivers do not support this feature. – The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012, and BTS3012AE do not support this feature when they use a non-optimized double-transceiver unit.

l


l


Context TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level is a function based on which the PA is controlled on a timeslot basis. In this manner, the static power consumption of the PA is 0 in the timeslots when the TRX is has no data to transmit, and thus the static power consumption of the PA is reduced. TRX power consumption is a major part of the BTS power consumption, and PA power consumption is a major part of TRX power consumption. According to network operation experiences, TRXs do not transmit signals all the time. This function shuts down the PA of the TRX when no data is transmitted in idle timeslots, reducing the cost on power greatly. Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


456



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Allow Turning Off Time Slot

TsTurningOffEnable

This parameter does not depend on other parameters.

Network planning

Procedure l

For all BTSs: – Activation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Parameters of Dynamic Shutdown of TRX; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Turning Off Time Slot to YES(Yes).

– Verification Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCDSTPA to check the value of Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable. The expected result is Yes.

– Deactivation Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCDSTPA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Parameters of Dynamic Shutdown of TRX; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Turning Off Time Slot to NO(No).

For the specified BTS: – Activation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Allow Turning Off Time Slot to YES(Yes).

– Verification Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA to check the value of Allow Turning Off Time Slot. The expected result is Yes.

– Deactivation Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Allow Turning Off Time Slot to NO(No).

----End

Example l

For all BTSs: //Activation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


457


120 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level //Deactivation procedure SET BSCDSTPA: TsTurningOffEnable=NO;

l

For the specified BTS: //Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TSSHTDOWNEN=YES; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TSSHTDOWNEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


458



121

Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs and must be configured as combining output. The TRXs supporting ICB are the DTRU (type B), RRU3004, and DRFU.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113701, Antenna Frequency Hoppingare or GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – Adjust Voltage in the MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) is set to YES(Yes). – For double-transceiver RF units of the BTS3012, Send Mode in the SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) command must be set to WBANDCOMB(Wideband Combination). – For double-transceiver RF units of the BTS3900, Send Mode in the SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) command must be set to DTIC (Transmit Independency or Combination) and RXU Sending Receiving Mode in the SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


459



Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) command must be set to DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[1TX + 2RX]).

Context The ICB can be enabled only when all the non-BCCH carriers are idle and there are idle channels on the BCCH carrier in the cell. The ICB function cannot be enabled on channels that are configured as static PDCHs. Neither can the function be enabled on dynamic PDCHs (TCHs) that are converted to PDCHs. The enabled ICB feature does not save energy in all cases. It is energy-saving only when the output power of the TRX is 40 W and the static power level is 0, when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 0, or when the output power of the TRX is 60 W and the static power level is 1. Data Preparation Parameter Name

Parameter ID

ICB Allowed

ICBALLOW

Remarks

Data Source

You can set this parameter to YES (YES) only when the SNDMD for an RF module is set to WBANDCOMB (Wideband Combination).

Network planning

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, change ICB Allowed to YES(YES).

l

Verification Procedure None.

l


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, ICBALLOW=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


460



122

Configuring Active Backup Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS must be configured with the battery and PMU. – The BTS3900B does not support this feature. – The BTS3012AE supports this feature since GBSS13.0.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – Huawei power backup device is needed, such as APM30.

Context When the BTS external power supply fails, storage batteries are started to supply power. The BTS shuts down some TRXs automatically under the control of a timer to save the backup power. Meanwhile, the BTS gradually decreases the TRX transmit power with a certain step until the entire BTS is powered off. When the BTS external power supply recovers, start the TRXs. Then, the transmit power of all the TRXs recovers. Considering the cell coverage, cell capacity, and backup power, this feature gradually decreases cell coverage and hands over MSs at the cell edge to neighboring cells. This does not degrade network performance. NOTE

Using this feature decreases the system capacity.

Operators can choose any of the following modes: Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


461


l


Coverage preferred Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit power of the remaining TRXs.

l

Capacity preferred Gradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down some of the TRXs.

l

Backup power preferred Shut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the transmit power of the remaining TRXs.

Procedure l


Coverage preferred Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Parameters of Hierarchical Backup Power Reduction; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set parameters related to hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to BYCOVER(Cover Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.

2.

Capacity preferred Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Parameters of Hierarchical Backup Power Reduction; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set parameters related to hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to BYCAP(Capability Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.

3.

Backup power preferred Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Parameters of Hierarchical Backup Power Reduction; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set parameters related to hierarchical backup power reduction of a BTS. In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Backup Power) and Backup Power Saving Policy to BYSAVING(Saving Priority), and set Drop Power Start Time[T1], Shutdown TRX Start Time[T2], Drop Power Time Interval[T3], Drop Power Step, and Max Drop Power Threshold to appropriate values.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Before the feature is activated: a.

Shut down the mains power supply of the BTS locally. The BTS reports ALM-25622 Mains Input Out of Range, and the battery starts to supply power

b.

When the BTS reports ALM-21807 OML Fault, the entire BTS is powered off.

c.

Measure the difference between the time the BTS reporting ALM-25622 Mains Input Out of Range and the time the BTS reporting ALM-21807 OML Fault. That is, measure the lasting duration. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

462


l


2.

After the feature is activated, perform the same operations as that are performed before the feature is activated at the same time of a different day.

3.

Compare the lasting duration before and after the feature is activated. If the lasting duration after feature activation is greater than that before feature activation, this feature takes effect.

Deactivation Procedure NOTE

The methods of deactivating this feature in GUL modes are the same.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSBAKPWR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Parameters of Hierarchical Backup Power Reduction; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Backup Power Saving Method to BYTRX(Turn off TRX).

----End

Example //Enabling Active Backup Power Control SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR; //Disabling Active Backup Power Control SET BTSBAKPWR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYTRX;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


463



123

Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Currently, only double-transceiver TRXs support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping, or GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

l

Dependency on License – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context The power consumption optimization based on channel type has two functions: dynamic voltage adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment. With the dynamic voltage adjustment function, different working voltages are provided for the TRX power amplifiers according to the applied modulation scheme. If all channels on a TRX are configured as TCHs and the TRX works in GMSK mode, the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in GMSK mode. If a channel on the TRX is configured as dynamic or static PDCH and the TRX works in 8PSK mode; the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in 8PSK mode. The BTS provides the TRX with appropriate working voltage, reducing the power consumption. Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

GPRS

GPRS

Set this parameter based on the current network status.

Network planning


464



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

EDGE

EDGE

Set this parameter based on the current network status.

Network planning

PDCH Power Saving Enable

PDCHPWRSAV EN

Set this parameter to YES(Yes) only for carriers with dynamic PDCHs.

Network planning

Adjust Voltage

BTSadjust

The recommended value is YES (Yes).

Network planning

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and EDGE to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PDCH Power Saving Enable to YES (Yes).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes).


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of PDCH Power Saving Enable. Expected result: The value of PDCH Power Saving Enable is Yes.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLBASICPARA to query the value of Adjust Voltage. Expected result: The value of Adjust Voltage is Yes.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PDCH Power Saving Enable to NO (No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No).

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


465



Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Enabling GPRS and EDGE SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; //Enabling the PDCH power optimization function SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=YES; //Enabling the dynamic voltage adjustment function SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=YES; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Disabling the PDCH power optimization function SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=NO; //Disabling the dynamic voltage adjustment function SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, BTSadjust=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


466



124

Configuring PSU Smart Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control feature. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU), BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature. – The BTS must be configured with storage batteries, without any alarms related to broken battery loop, unavailable batteries, AC overvoltage or undervoltage, or power module faults.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – None

l


l

Others The BTS must be configured with PMUs and PSUs. In addition, the PMU must meet the requirements described in Table 124-1. NOTE

You can run the DSP BTSELABEL command on the BSC LMT to obtain the PMU hardware type from the electric label. Table 124-1 lists the mapping between PMU hardware types and items in the electric label.

Table 124-1 PSU Smart Control requirements for PMUs

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Power System

PMU Hardware Type

ETP

PMU 10A

Item in the Electric Label 02310G WL

PMU Software Version All versions


467



PMU Hardware Type

Power System

APM30

EPS4890

Item in the Electric Label

PMU Software Version

PMU 11A

02310LY P

All versions

PMU 01B

0231727 5

All versions

EPMU01

0231511 1

GBSS8.1 or later

0231306 9

The power system does not support this feature.

PMU 01B

0231727 5

All versions

EPMU01

0231511 1

GBSS8.1 or later

0231306 9


EPS4815

EPMU03

0231600 5


SC48200

SC48200

5224005 6


APM100

AEMU01

None


APM200

AEMU01

None


Context Data Preparation Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

PSU Turning Off Enable

PSUTURNI NGOFFEN ABLE

Set this parameter to YES(YES) to enable the PSU Smart Control feature.

Network plan



468



1.

l

Enable the PSU Smart Control feature. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA on the BSC LMT with PSU Turning Off Enable set to YES (YES).

Verification Procedure On live networks, observing the gains brought by this feature is difficult because traffic loads change in various ways at long intervals and the power consumption is likely to fluctuate. Therefore, you are advised to select the site models in several different areas, for example, heavily-populated areas, urban areas, suburbs, and countryside, to observe the feature gains in a laboratory. You are advised to monitor the performance on 2 days with similar traffic volume. NOTE

Ensure that batteries are fully charged because battery charging affects the power consumption.

1.

Do as follows without enabling PSU Smart Control: a.

Use a current measurement instrument and a voltage measurement instrument to continuously measure the BTS current and voltage, respectively. – Measure the voltage only once because the voltage is stable. – Measure the current for a 24-hour period at a fixed interval, such as 5-minute, because the current fluctuates from time to time.

b.

l

Record the measured values. Use the average current and voltage measured in an hour as the current and voltage values for the hour, and then calculate the power consumption in each hour by multiplying the average current and voltage.

2.

Enable PSU Smart Control, and repeat the operations in Step 1 to obtain the power consumption per day.

3.

Compare the power consumption before and after PSU Smart Control is activated. Expected result: The power consumption decreases after the feature is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA with PSU Turning Off Enable set to NO(NO).

----End

Example //Activating PSU Smart Control SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES; //Deactivating PSU Smart Control SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


469



125

Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B does not support this feature.

l


l


Context With this feature, the transmit power of non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH carrier can be decreased. This helps decrease the BTS power consumption. Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

Power Derating Enabled

MAINBCCHPW RDTEN

Set this parameter to YES(Yes) to enable Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. When this feature is enabled, the BTS decreases the transmit power of timeslots 1 to 7 on the BCCH carrier.

Network plan

Power Derating Start Time

MAINBCCHPWRDTS TIME

Set this parameter to a time when traffic is light.

Network plan


470



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

Power Derating End Time

MAINBCCHPW RDTETIME

Set this parameter to a time later than the time specified by MAINBCCHPWRDTSTIME.

Network plan

Power Derating Range

MAINBCCHPWRDTR ANGE

Set this parameter to an appropriate value to minimize the impact on cell selection, cell reselection, and handovers.

Network plan

Power Derating Active Channel Enabled

MAINBCCHPWDTAC TCHEN

When this parameter is set to YES(Yes), the BTS performs downlink power control on occupied timeslots 1 to 7 on the BCCH carrier.

Network plan

WARNING After the transmit power timeslots 1 to 7 on the BCCH carrier is reduced in a cell, the downlink receive level measured by MSs camping on a neighboring cell is inaccurate. This may affect handovers to cell. Therefore, use this feature with caution.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the BTS to decrease the transmit power of idle timeslots 1 to 7 on the BCCH carrier. In this step, set the parameters as follows: – Set Power Derating Enabled to YES(Yes). – Set Power Derating Start Time and Power Derating End Time to appropriate values. Ensure that Power Derating End Time is later than Power Derating Start Time. – Set Power Derating Range to specify the power decrease range.

2.

l

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command with Power Derating Active Channel Enabled set to YES(Yes) to enable downlink power control on occupied timeslots 1 to 7 on the BCCH carrier. The maximum power control step is determined by Power Derating Range in Step 1.

Verification Procedure On live networks, observing the gains brought by this feature is difficult because traffic loads change in various ways at long intervals and the power consumption is likely to fluctuate. Therefore, you are advised to select the site models in several different areas, for

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


471



example, heavily-populated areas, urban areas, suburbs, and countryside, to observe the feature gains in a laboratory. You are advised to monitor the performance on 2 days with similar traffic volume. NOTE


1.

Do as follows without enabling PSU Smart Control: a.

Use a current measurement instrument and a voltage measurement instrument to continuously measure the BTS current and voltage, respectively. – Measure the voltage only once because the voltage is stable. – Measure the current for a 24-hour period at a fixed interval, such as 5-minute, because the current fluctuates from time to time.

b.

l


2.

Enable PSU Smart Control, and repeat the operations in Step 1 to obtain the power consumption per day.

3.

Compare the power consumption before and after PSU Smart Control is activated. Expected result: The power consumption decreases after the feature is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) on the BSC LMT with Power Derating Enabled set to NO (No).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Activating Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=YES, MAINBCCHPWRDTSTIME=01&00, MAINBCCHPWRDTETIME=04&00, MAINBCCHPWRDTRANGE=10; //Deactivation procedure //Deactivating Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


472



126

Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off feature.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive with GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing (the dual-PA power sharing function). – It is recommended that this feature be used with GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. If TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown is enabled alone in a cell, the BSC can disable all the TRXs except the BCCH TRX in the cell, and the cell can continue providing services for subscribers. However, if Dynamic Cell Power Off is enabled alone in a cell, the BSC disables all the TRXs in the cell when related conditions are met. In this case, the cell no longer provides services for subscribers. It is recommended that the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature be used with the TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown feature and the specified time when TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown starts be earlier than the specified time when Dynamic Cell Power Off starts. This provides the following benefits: When traffic volume in the cell decreases, TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown enables the BSC to disable idle TRXs in the cell, thereby reducing cell load. When the cell load is reduced to a predefined threshold, Dynamic Cell Power Off enables the BSC to disable the BCCH TRX, thereby decreasing the power consumption of the cell. – It is recommended that the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature be used with the Multiband Sharing One BSC feature. The 900 MHz/1800 MHz dual-band network in Multi-band Sharing One BSC is a recommended application scenario for Dynamic Cell Power Off.

l


l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Others Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

473



– The cell in which you wish to use this feature has a co-coverage cell, and the two cells are served by the same BSC.

Context When the traffic volume is low on a network enabled with the Multi-band Sharing One BSC feature, a fully covered network can carry all the traffic on the existing network. In this case, all network equipment of the other frequency band can be disabled to reduce the network power consumption. Data Preparation Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

Enable Turning Off Cell

TURNOFFENA BLE

Set this parameter to ENABLE (Enable) to enable the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature.

Network plan

Same Coverage Cell Index

SAMECVGCEL LID

This parameter specifies a cocoverage cell.

Network plan

Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold

SAMECVGCEL LLOADTHRD

Set this parameter based on historical traffic statistics.

Network plan

Dyn. Turning On Cell Load Threshold

TURNONCELL LOADTHRD

Set this parameter based on historical traffic statistics.

Network plan

Dyn. Turning Off Cell Busy Channel Num.

TURNOFFCEL LCHANNUM

Setting this parameter to a small value decreases the number of inter-cell handovers, delays cell power off, and reduces the gains provided by this feature. You are advised to use the default value of this parameter.

Network plan

Dyn. Turning Off Cell Protection Time

PROTECTTIME

Setting this parameter to a large value prevents a cell from being powered off and on frequently, shortens the period when the cell is powered off, and reduces the gains provided by this feature. You are advised to use the default value of this parameter.

Network plan


474



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

Same Coverage Cell Load Stat. Time

SAMECVGCEL LLOADSTATT M

Setting this parameter to a large value prevents a cell from being powered off and on frequently, shortens the period when the cell is powered off, and reduces the gains provided by this feature. You are advised to use the default value of this parameter.

Network plan

Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time

TURNOFFCEL LSTRTIME

Set this parameter based on historical traffic statistics. Specifically, set this parameter to a time when traffic volume is lower than the threshold specified by TURNONCELLLOADTHRD.

Network plan

Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time

TURNOFFCEL LSTPTIME

Set this parameter based on historical traffic statistics. Specifically, set this parameter to a time when traffic volume is lower than the threshold specified by TURNONCELLLOADTHRD.

Network plan

Procedure l


Enable the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Parameters for Dynamically Turning off Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) on the BSC LMT with Enable Turning Off Cell set to ENABLE(Enable). In this step, specify the co-coverage cell and set Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold, Dyn. Turning On Cell Load Threshold, Dyn. Turning Off Cell Busy Channel Num., Dyn. Turning Off Cell Protection Time, Same Coverage Cell Load Stat. Time, Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time, and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time. NOTE

If the co-coverage cell does not support part of the services in the current cell, the co-coverage cell cannot provide these services after the current cell is powered off.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Verification Procedure


475


126 Configuring Dynamic Cell Power Off NOTE

Ensure that the following conditions are met: 1. The cell to be verified has a co-coverage cell that works correctly. 2. There is no call access request in the cell to be verified. 3. The traffic of the cocoverage cell is lower than the threshold specified by Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold. Set Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold to a value close to the maximum value 100 in Step 2. In this way, the BSC can easily determine that the current cell can be powered off. After the verification, set this parameter to an appropriate value based on network planning. The time to wait before you run the DSP GCELLSTAT command in Step 3 depends on the value of the Same Coverage Cell Load Stat. Time parameter. If the value of Same Coverage Cell Load Stat. Time is n, wait n minutes and then run the DSP GCELLSTAT command. The default value of Same Coverage Cell Load Stat. Time is 5.

l

1.

Start an Abis Interface CS Trace task to trace messages over the operation and maintenance link (OML).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFFwith Cell Index set to the index of the cell to be verified, Enable Turning Off Cell set to ENABLE (Enable), Same Coverage Cell Index Type (Not required on the CME) set to the index of the co-coverage cell, and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to appropriate values so that the current time is within the period specified by the two parameters.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT after 5 minutes to query the status of the cell. Expected results: The value of Cell Dynamic Switch is Yes. The value of "operationalType" in "bsc-bts-set-trx-power" in the Set Trx Pa message is power-off.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF with Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time set to appropriate values so that the current time is not within the period specified by the two parameters.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT after about 1 minute to query the status of the cell. Expected results: The value of Cell Dynamic Switch is No. The value of "operationalType" in "bsc-bts-set-trx-power" in the Set Trx Pa message is power-on.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Parameters for Dynamically Turning off Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) on the BSC LMT with Enable Turning Off Cell set to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example //Activating Dynamic Cell Power Off SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=ENABLE, SAMECVGCELLIDTYPE=BYID, SAMECVGCELLID=1, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=23&33, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=05&33; //Deactivating Dynamic Cell Power Off SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


476



127

Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment feature.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B and multi-carrier RF module do not support this feature.

l


l


Context Data Preparation Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

Adjust Voltage

BTSadjust

Set this parameter to YES(Yes) to enable the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment feature.

Network plan

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Enable TRX Working Voltage Adjustment.Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

477



Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). on the BSC LMT with Adjust Voltage set to YES(Yes). l



1.

l

Do as follows without enabling TRX Working Voltage Adjustment: a.

Use a current measurement instrument and a voltage measurement instrument to continuously measure the current and voltage of a multi-carrier RF module, respectively. Measure the current and voltage for a 24-hour period at a fixed interval, such as 5-minute.

b.


2.

Enable TRX Working Voltage Adjustment, and repeat the operations in Step 1 to obtain the power consumption per day.

3.

Compare the power consumption before and after TRX Working Voltage Adjustment is activated. The power consumption decreases after the feature is activated.


.Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) on the BSC LMT with Adjust Voltage set to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating TRX Working Voltage Adjustment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=YES; //Deactivating TRX Working Voltage Adjustment SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSadjust=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


478



128

Configuring Multi-Carrier

Intelligent Voltage Regulation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation feature.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only multi-carrier RF modules support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell feature. – The gain brought by the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation feature is insignificant if this feature is enabled on the 2-TX RF module in any of the following scenarios: – BCCHs are configured for both channels of the RF module. – The BCCH is configured for one channel of the RF module, and transmit diversity is configured for this RF module. – The RF module works in dual-channel (2TX+2RX) mode, and all carriers are configured on one channel. – The RF module works in 1TX mode.

l


Context Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


479



Parameter Name PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage

Parameter ID

Setting Notes

Data Source

PaAdjVol

Set this parameter to YES(Yes) to enable Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation.

Network plan

Procedure l


l

Enable the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation feature. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) on the BSC LMT with PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage set to YES(Yes).



1.

l

Do as follows without enabling Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation: a.

Use a current measurement instrument and a voltage measurement instrument to continuously measure the current and voltage of a multi-carrier RF module, respectively. Measure the current and voltage for a 24-hour period at a fixed interval, such as 5-minute.

b.


2.

Enable Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation, and repeat the operations inStep 1 to obtain the power consumption per day.

3.

Compare the power consumption before and after TRX Working Voltage Adjustment is activated. The power consumption decreases after the feature is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) on the BSC LMT with PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage set to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


480



//Deactivating Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PaAdjVol=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


481



129

Configuring Flex Abis

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – For a BTS3900B or BTS3X series base station which does not support Flex Abis, – If a BTS3X series base station is a root node in a chain or tree topology, none of the base stations in the chain or tree support Flex Abis. – If a BTS3X series base station is a lower-level base station of BTSs that support Flex Abis, Flex Abis can be enabled on the upper-level BTSs only when the following conditions are met: Flex Abis Mode for the BTS is set to SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis). Flex Abis Mode for its upper-level BTSs is set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis).

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/ T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, or GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The configuration on the BTS is complete. For details, see Configuring a BTS.

Context Flex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis transmission resources among different BTSs, cells, and services and therefore improves the resource utilization. Especially for multi-cell large capacity BTSs, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE function, the dynamic Abis resource allocation can greatly improve resource utilization. Before Flex Abis is introduced, there is one-to-one mapping between the Um interface resources and the Abis interface transmission resources. After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC, the Abis Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


482



interface transmission resources work in resource pool mode to improve the utilization of the transmission resources. If a ring topology needs to be configured, only BTS ring topology I is supported. When both Huawei I BTS ring topology and Flex Abis are applied, the following conditions must be met: l

Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs. In addition, the BTSs support only the configuration of one E1 for the forward link and one E1 for the reverse link.

l

No BTS can be configured with Abis bypass.

l

No BTS can be configured with 16 kbit/s LPAD signaling links.

l

No BTS can be configured with Abis timeslot self-detection and self-healing functions.

When Flex Abis is enabled, DXX devices are supported. The limitations in using this feature are as follows: l

DXX cascading network is not supported.

l

In ring topology I network, DXX is not supported.

l

If faults occur during DXX timeslot switching, no audio will occur.

Before deploying Flex Abis, collect the information specified in Table 129-1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


483



Table 129-1 Data preparation Parameter Name Flex Abis Mode

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

FLEXABISMO DE

Configuration principles for cascaded BTSs

Network planning

l To enable Flex Abis for a cascaded BTS on a link, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS for its upperlevel BTSs. l If Flex Abis Mode is set to SEMI_ABIS for a cascaded BTS on a link, set Flex Abis Mode to SEMI_ABIS for all its lower-level BTSs. l Use the E1 port of the primary cabinet group to connect the primary cabinet group of the level-1 BTS to a BSC interface board. Use the internal connections of the primary cabinet group to connect the secondary cabinet group to a BSC interface board. Alternatively, use the E1 port of the secondary cabinet group to connect the secondary cabinet group to a BSC interface board. l Use only the E1 ports of the primary cabinet groups to connect cascaded BTSs. Use the internal connections of the primary cabinet group of a lower-level BTS to connect the BTS to an upper-level BTS. Alternatively, use the E1 port of the secondary cabinet to connect the BTS to a BSC interface board. Note that secondary cabinet groups belonging to the same BTS cannot be cascaded. l One BTS can only have one upper-level BTS. Configuration principles for other BTSs Users are allowed to run the BSC6900 MML command SET Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


484



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

BTSFORBIDTSto disable certain timeslots except timeslots in fixed allocation mode, such as signaling timeslots and monitoring timeslots on E1 links for a Flex Abis-enabled BTS. Certain timeslots need to be disabled in certain transmission modes, such as satellite mode or when only some timeslots on an E1 link can be used. Multiplexing Mode

MPMODE

If this parameter is set to a large value, the RSLs will become congested. Therefore, set this parameter to MODE5_1 or MODE6_1 only when the traffic on a BTS is light.

Network planning

Reserved Traffic Timeslots on an E1/T1

RSVTCHTSNU M

This parameter specifies the number of 64 kbit/s timeslots for TCH, dynamic PDCH, or secondary links on an E1/T1. These timeslots exclude the timeslots for OML, ESL, RSL, and static PDCH, fixedly-configured idle timeslots, monitoring timeslots, and transparent timeslots.

Network planning

Transmission Resource Preempting Support

ENPREEMPTT RANSADMT

To enable CS services to preempt the Abis transmission resources occupied by PS services when all Abis transmission resources are occupied, set this parameter to ON.

Network planning

The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Transport Type

TRANST

Set this parameter to TDM (TDM).

Network planning

Congestion remain ratio

TDMCONGTH

Set this parameter to a value smaller than that of Congestion clear remain ratio to prevent ping-pong handovers when transmission links are congested.

Network planning


485


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Congestion clear remain ratio

TDMCONGCL RTH

Set this parameter to a value larger than that of Congestion remain ratio to prevent ping-pong handovers when transmission links are congested.

Network planning

TRM Load Threshold switch

LOADTHSW

l If this parameter is set to ON, load control is enabled when transmission links are congested. In this case, set TRM load threshold index to specify the threshold used for load control.

Network planning

TRM load threshold index

TRMLOADTHI NDEX

The value of this parameter must be unique.

Network planning

LDR First

LDRFST

If this parameter is set to any value other than CLOSE, the value must be different from the values of LDR Second, LDR Third, and LDR Fourth.

Network planning

LDR Second

LDRSND

If this parameter is set to any value other than CLOSE, the value must be different from the values of LDR First, LDR Third, and LDR Fourth.

Network planning

LDR Third

LSRTRD

If this parameter is set to any value other than CLOSE, the value must be different from the values of LDR First, LDR Second, and LDR Fourth.

Network planning

LDR Fourth

LDRFOUH

If this parameter is set to any value other than CLOSE, the value must be different from the values of LDR First, LDR Second, and LDR Third.

Network planning


486



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

LDR-triggered Secondary Link Release

RelFlexAbisForLdr

This parameter specifies whether Network the BSC releases secondary links planning on a PDCH when Load Reshuffling (LDR) is triggered because transmission resources are congested under a BTS using Flex Abis. If this parameter is set to ON (On), the BSC releases secondary links when LDR is triggered. If this parameter is set to OFF(Off), the BSC does not release the secondary links currently used but cannot apply for subsequent secondary links.

UL Coding Scheme Adj. for Secondary Link Release

UlCsAdjForAbis Rel

This parameter specifies whether the BSC adjusts uplink coding schemes in real time after releasing secondary links on a PDCH. If this parameter is set to ON(On), the BSC adjusts uplink coding schemes in real time. If this parameter is set to OFF(Off), the BSC does not adjust uplink coding schemes in real time. Set this parameter to ON(On) if LDRtriggered Secondary Link Release is set to ON(On).

Network planning

Procedure l


CAUTION This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this operation during off-peak hours.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS to enable flex Abis. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and set BTS Multiplexing Mode to an appropriate value.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFLEXABISPARA. In this step, set Reserved Traffic Timeslots on an E1/T1 to appropriate values.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Transmission Resource Preempting Support to ON(On). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

487


129 Configuring Flex Abis NOTE

If Transmission Resource Preempting Support is set to ON(On) and all Abis transmission resources are occupied, new CS services require more Abis transmission resources. In this case, the CS services can preempt the Abis transmission resources occupied by PS services so that the requirements for CS services can be preferentially met. The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set Transport Type to TDM, and set TRM load threshold index, Congestion remain ratio, and Congestion clear remain ratio to appropriate values. NOTE

This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.

6.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step, specify the BTS to be configured. Set Carrier Type to TDM, and set TRM Load Threshold switch and TRM load threshold index to appropriate values. NOTE

This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required. TRM load threshold index must be set to the value specified by TRM load threshold index in ADD TRMLOADTH.

7.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR First, LDR Second, LDR Third, and LDR Fourth to appropriate values. NOTE

The setting of this parameter is effective for all BTSs under the BSC. This step is mandatory if the control over transmission resource congestion is required.

l

8.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA. In this step, set LDR-triggered Secondary Link Release and UL Coding Scheme Adj. for Secondary Link Release to appropriate values.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSPORTTS. In this step, set BTS In Port NO. to the number of the port that the base station is connected to, Port Direction to the same direction as the base station, and TS Type to ALL(ALL).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSFORBIDTS to block flex timeslots. In this step, set Start Timeslot No., Start Sub Timeslot No., End Timeslot NO., and End Sub Timeslot NO. according to the timeslot No. and sub-timeslot No. of Flex timeslots to ensure that only four consecutive 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots are used for Flex Abis. NOTE

Block only Flex Abis timeslots. Reserve only one 64 kbit/s sub-timeslot for services because timeslots are blocked in units of 64 kbit/s sub-timeslots.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be blocked. Repeat this step until there is only one cell under the BTS.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Channel No. to the number of the channel to be blocked, and Administrative State to Lock(Lock). Repeat this step until the cell under the BTS has only one BCCH, one SDCCH, and four TCHs.

5.

Use four test MSs to call a fixed-line phone in the cell and maintain the call.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to query the timeslot state. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

488



(OCCUPIED). Check that the Flex Abis timeslot corresponding to the TCH occupied by the call is the timeslot that is unblocked. 7.

End the call and block the occupied TCH by performing the previous Step 4. Then, unblock the other four TCHs.

8.

Use four test MSs to call a fixed-line phone in the cell and maintain the call.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ABISTS to check the state of timeslots. In this step, specify Subrack No., Slot No., and Port No., and set State to OCCUPIED (OCCUPIED). Check that the call initiated by the MS is carried on a new TCH whose Flex Abis timeslot is unblocked.

10. Hang up the call. l


CAUTION This operation will cause the BTS to be out-of-service. Therefore, perform this operation during off-peak hours. 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS. In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FIX_16K_ABIS(Fix Abis).

3.


----End

Example //Activating Flex Abis DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900", FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS, MPMODE=MODE4_1; SET BTSFLEXABISPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RSVTCHTSNUM=5; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL; //Deactivating Flex Abis DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, NEWNAME="bts-3900", FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACTTYPE=ACTALL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


489



130

Configuring BTS Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – In Abis over TDM transmission mode, this feature depends on the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis. – In Abis over IP transmission mode, this feature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), GBFD-115711 EVAD, GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC works in either BM/TC separated mode or BM/TC combined mode, and the TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater and A interfaces. – At sites where BTS312s and BTS3012s combine into groups, BSS local switching is enabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it. – If the calling MS and the called MS are registered on two different MSCs, BSS local switching is not supported regardless of whether the two MSCs are connected to the same MGW or different MGWs.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


490



– In High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) transmission mode, BSS local switching is not supported. – If the IP transmission mode is used over the Abis interface, BTSs enabled with the local switching function must be configured on the same MPU.

Context

CAUTION It is recommended that all cells under a BSC be configured to the same speech version and supported AMR rate set to increase the success rate of BSC local switches. BTS local switching applies only to BTSs using double-transceiver units and 3900 series base stations in TDM or IP transmission mode. When a BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, the BTS must be enabled with Flex Abis. BTS local switching saves transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduces the TC processing delay during a call. If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in BTS local switching mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a call, speech service and then fax service, and separate billing of BSS local switching.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > BSS Local Switching Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switch and Avoid Number for BTS to appropriate values. – If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When Abis Congests), you need to specify Abis Jam Rate for BTS Local Switch. – If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BTS

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to determine whether BSS local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC. NOTE

l If the BSC6900 is expected to perform BSS local switching independently based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). l If the MSC is expected to be involved in BSS local switching based on network planning, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function) and then set related parameters on the MSC side.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

When the BTS uses the TDM transmission mode, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

491



Modify Multiplexing Mode or Flex Abis Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). NOTE

1. Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Deactivate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the BTS if it has been activated. 2. After performing this step, run the MML command ACT BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Activate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the BTS.

4.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > Local Switching > BTS Local Switching Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to YES(Yes).


Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BTS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query call resources used by an MS. NOTE

If BTS local switching is enabled successfully, no Ater and Abis information is displayed.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > Local Switching > BTS Local Switching Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating BTS Local Switch SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BTSONLY, BtsLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER, MsisdnPrfxList2StartBtsLs1="139", MsisdnSegList2AvoidBtsLs1="138"; MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FLEXABISMODE=FLEX_ABIS; SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES; //Verifying BTS Local Switch DSP CALLRES: USERIDTYPE=BYMSISDN, MSISDN="13988888888"; //Deactivating BTS Local Switch SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


492



131

Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – An Abis interface processing board PEUa or POUc is configured. – In BM/TC separated scenarios, a DPUc board is configured for processing HDLC frames in the subrack where the PEUa board is located.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. – The BTS software version supports this function.

Context Abis transmission optimization allows multiple links to be multiplexed onto a channel composed of several timeslots, enabling more efficient use of transmission resources.

CAUTION l HDLC does not support bypass or Flex Abis.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


493



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS to add a BTS. In this step, set BTS Index to 1, BTS Type to BTS3012, Service Type to HDLC, Abis ByPass Mode to FALSE, and Config Ring to NO.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCABINET to add a cabinet to a BTS. In this step, set BTS Name to the BTS name specified in Step 1, Cabinet No. to 0, and Cabinet Type to the BTS type specified in Step 1.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRXBRD to add a TRX board to the BTS. In this step, set Board Type to TRU, Subrack No. to 0, and Slot No. to 0.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL to add a GSM cell. In this step, set Cell Index to 1, Cell Name to gcell-1, Freq. Band to GSM900, MCC to 502, MNC to 85, Cell LAC to H'0185, Cell CI to 2, Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell, Start Flex MAIO Switch to OFF, and Operator Name to 46000.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ to add a frequency to the cell. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and Frequency 1 to 21.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLOSPMAP to add the mapping between the cell and the Originating Signaling Point (OSP). In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and OSP Code to the Originating Signaling Point Code (OPC) of the cell.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX to add a carrier frequency. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4, TRX ID to 1, and Frequency to the frequency specified in Step 5.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CELLBIND2BTS to bind the cell to the BTS. In this step, set Cell Index to the cell index specified in Step 4 and BTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD to bind the logical carrier frequency to the physical TRX board. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, TRX Board to TRU, TRX Board Pass No. to 0, Subrack No. to 1, and Slot No. to 0.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel information about the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, Channel No. to 0, Channel Type to MBCCH, and Timeslot Priority to 1. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN to set channel information about the TRX. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7, Channel No. to 1, Channel Type to SDCCH8, and Timeslot Priority to 2. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV to set TRX attributes. In this step, set TRX ID to the TRX ID specified in Step 7 and Power Level to 7. 13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection between the BTS and the BSC6900. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1, BTS In Port No. to 0, Dest Node Type to BSC, Subrack No. to the number of the subrack where the BSC interface board is located, Slot No. to the number of the slot where the BSC interface board is located, and Port No to 0. 14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1. l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


494



1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT. Expected result: The value of Cell Initialized is Yes and the value of Channel Fault is No.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS. In this step, set BTS Index to the BTS index specified in Step 1 in the activation procedure.

----End

Example //Activating Abis Transmission Optimization ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="BTS-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3012, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=HDLC, FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO, MPMODE=MODE4_1; ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1", CN=0, TYPE=BTS3012; ADD BTSTRXBRD: IDTYPE=BYNAME ,BTSNAME="BTS-1",BT=TRU ,SRN=1, SN=0; ADD GCELL: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="gcell-1", TYPE=GSM900, MCC="502", MNC="85", LAC=H'0185, CI=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell, OPNAME="46000"; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FREQ1=21; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, OPC=H'B85; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=1, FREQ=41; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1,BTSID=1; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=1, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, SRN=1, SN=0; ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1, POWL=7; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Verifying Abis Transmission Optimization DSP BTSSTAT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSIDLST=1; //Deactivating Abis Transmission Optimization DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; RMV BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


495



132

Configuring Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-112013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR has been configured before this feature is activated. – In Abis over TDM transmission mode, the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis has also been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment This feature does not have any special requirements for the running environment.

l

Requirements for Transmission Networking This feature is applicable to the following scenarios: – The Abis interface uses IP over E1 transmission. – The Abis interface uses IP over Ethernet transmission. – The Abis interface uses TDM transmission and the feature GBFD-117301 Flex Abis has been configured.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices Both the MSC and MSs support HR speech versions.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


496



Context Table 132-1 Data Preparation Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Settings

Data Source

LDR First

LDRFST

If this parameter is set to CSPH, this feature will be activated.

Network planning

If this parameter is set to CLOSE, this feature will be deactivated. TRM load threshold index

TRMLOA DTHINDE X

The value of this parameter must be unique.

Network planning

Transport Type

TRANST

This parameter must be set to the actual type of transmission used by the Abis interface.

Network planning

Threshold type

THTYPE

This parameter can be set to Percentage or Band Width.

Internal planning

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDR configuration.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, set LDR First to CSPH and LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth to a value except CSPH.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMLOADTH. In this step, set TRM load threshold index, Transport Type, and Threshold type to appropriate values according to threshold types.

4.

In IP transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH. In this step, set the IP path-related parameters to appropriate values. For example, set TRM load threshold index to the same value as that set in Step 3.

5.

In TDM transmission mode, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCABISPRIMAP. In this step, configure the Abis priority mapping on the BSC side. For example, set TRM load threshold index to the same value as that set in Step 3.

Verification Procedure This feature can be enabled only when congestion occurs on the Abis interface. Therefore, this feature cannot be verified when the TRM load threshold is within a normal range.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LDR. In this step, query the LDR configuration. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

497



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LDR. In this step, change the value of LDR First, LDR Second, LDR Third, or LDR Fourth from CSPH to CLOSE.

----End

Example //Activating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution SET LDR: LDRFST=CSPH; ADD TRMLOADTH: TRMLOADTHINDEX=10, TRANST=ATM, THTYPE=PERCENTAGE; MOD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=10; SET BSCABISPRIMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TRANSTYPE=TDM, LOADTHSW=ON, TRMLOADTHINDEX=10; //Deactivating Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution SET LDR: LDRFST=CLOSE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


498



133

Configuring Flex Ater

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The TC subrack is located separately from the BSC. – The Ater interface uses the TDM transmission mode.

Context With this feature, the Ater resources are classified into 16 kbit/s timeslots and 8 kbit/s timeslots. The BSC allocates the Ater resources according to the channel type during the call establishment. If TCHFs are allocated on the Um interface, 16 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface. If TCHHs are allocated on the Um interface, 8 kbit/s timeslots are used on the Ater interface. Therefore, the Ater resources are fully utilized. This feature effectively reduces the transmission investment on the Ater interface in remote TC networking.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

499



center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Switch of 8K on Ater set to YES(Yes). l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERTS with BM/TC config flag set to BM or TC and Ater connection path index to the number of an Ater connection path. Expected result: The number of occupied 16 kbit/s resources is equal to that of fullrate calls. In addition, the number of occupied 8 kbit/s resources is equal to that of half-rate calls. In this case, Flex Ater is enabled.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Switch of 8K on Ater set to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Flex Ater SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=YES; //Deactivating Flex Ater SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


500



134

Configuring BSC Local Switch

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – When the Abis interface is in TDM transmission mode, this feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis, GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1. – When the Abis interface is in IP transmission mode, this feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis, GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC works in basic module (BM)/transcoder (TC) separate mode and TDM transmission mode is applied over the Ater interface. – With BSC Local Switch, neither the base station serving the calling MS nor that serving the called MS uses Abis Transmission Optimization. – In sites with a combined BTS cabinet group, BSS local switching can be enabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support it.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


501



Context

CAUTION It is recommended that all cells under a BSC be configured to the same speech version and supported AMR rate set to increase the success rate of BSC local switches. With this feature, the BSC performs a voice loopback within the BSC if the calling MS and called MS are located under the same BSC. Voice signals are no longer transmitted on the Ater or A interface, therefore releasing transmission resources on the Ater interface and the transcoder (TC) coding resources. This feature helps save local or remote transmission resources on the Ater interface. If the MSC is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable in the BSC Local Switch mode: MSC playing the announcement during a call, DTMF number receiving during a call, speech service first and then fax service, and independent billing of BSS local switching. The BSS local switching is not supported as follow: The BSC is configured the MSC Pool function. The calling MS and the called MS are registered on different MGWs, and the MGW is in IP transmission mode. The BTS is in High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC) transmission mode.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > BSS Local Switching Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only), specify Options for BSC Local Switch, and set Avoid Number for BSC to appropriate value. NOTE

l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater Congests), you need to specify Ater Jam Rate for BSC Local Switch. l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number), you need to specify Prefix Number for BSC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure whether BSS local switching is performed by the BSC only or by both the BSC and the MSC. NOTE

l If only the BSC performs BSS local switching as selected by the network plan, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). l If both the BSC and the MSC perform BSS local switching as selected by the network plan, you need to set MSC-Collaborated BSS Local Switching to BASIC(Basic Function) or ENHANCED(Enhanced Function), and then set related parameters on the MSC side to support BSS local switching.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLSW (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > Local Switching > BTS Local Switching Parameters; Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

502



CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Support BTS Local Switch to YES(Yes). l

l


Ensure that the calling and called MSs are controlled by the same BSC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CALLRES to query call resources of an MS. Expected result: When this feature is enabled, only the A interface resources of the TC subrack and Abis interface resources of the BM subrack are displayed, and the Ater resources and TC resources of the BM and TC subracks are saved.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSSLS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > BSS Local Switching Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BSS Local Switching General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start) or BTSONLY(BTS Only).

----End

Example //Activating BSC Local Switch SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY, BscLsStartMode=PREFIXNUMBER, MsisdnPrfxList2StartBscLs1="139"; MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, BSSLSMSCCOOP=NONSUPPORT; SET BTSLSW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISSUPPORTBTSLSWITCH=YES; //Deactivating BSC Local Switch SET BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=NEITHERSTART;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


503



135

Configuring Ater Compression Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The POUc board is in position. – When the Abis interface uses TDM transmission, the DPUc board is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-116901 Flex Ater.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode, and the TC subrack is configured remotely.

Context When the BM/TC subracks are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack is configured remotely, the compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface can be adopted to improve the transmission efficiency over the Ater interface and reduce the transmission cost. The Ater Compression Transmission feature is based on IP over PPP over STM-1 technology, where the IP packets of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted over the channelized STM-1. The compressed IP transmission mode over the Ater interface does not support IP over FE/GE, but only supports IP over E1 for transmitting the user plane data. The configuration on the signaling plane is similar to that in Ater over TDM mode.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


504



Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a POUc board to the BM subrack. Then, repeat the operation to add a POUc board to the TC subrack.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC with Service mode set to SEPARATE(Separate) and Ater Interface Transfer Mode to IP(IP).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater connection path between the MPS and the TCS.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML between the MPS and the main TCS.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL to add an Ater signaling link between the MPS/EPS and the TCS.

6.

Configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board by referring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type set to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC) to add an adjacent node.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE with Adjacent Node Type set to TC(Ater Interface on TC) to add an adjacent node.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the BM subrack. Then, run the command again to add an IP path to the TC subrack. To add more IP paths, run this command repeatedly.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.

2.

Verify the links at the physical layer. – Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as PPP links: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command. Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicates that the MLPPP link is functional.

– Do as follows when the links at the physical layer are configured as MLPPP links: a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state and LCP negotiated state.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP MPGRP command. Expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicates that the MLPPP link is functional.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is functional. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

505



Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal, which indicates that the LAPD link is functional.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth. Expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater than 0. That is, the adjacent node is functional.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is available. Expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0. That is, the IP path is functional.

6.

Make a call. The call is set up successfully. When the call is set up, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the usage of the Ater interface resources. Expected result: The UDP usage on the BM side and the TC side are the same.



----End

Example /*Activating the feature Ater Compression Transmission*/ //Adding a POUc board ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; ADD BRD: SRN=3, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=16, RED=NO, ISTCBRD=YES; //Setting the transmission mode over the Ater interface SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, ATERTRANSMODE=IP; //Adding an Ater connection path ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=0; ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=1; ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=2, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=2, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=2; ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=3, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=3, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=3; //Adding an Ater OML ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=1, ATERPIDX=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; //Adding an Ater signaling link ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS1 1-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0 &TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS; //Adding an Ater PPP link to the BM subrack ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1 1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1 &TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


506



BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; //Adding an Ater PPP link to the TC subrack ADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS1 1-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1 &TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; //Adding an Ater adjacent node to the BM subrack ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0; //Adding an Ater adjacent node to the TC subrack ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC; //Adding an Ater IP path to the BM subrack ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Adding an Ater IP path to the TC subrack ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


507



136

Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points.

Prerequisites l


l


l

Dependency on License – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

l

Other prerequisites – Multiple OSPs are configured. – Multiple DSPs are configured. – The route, link set, and link data are configured. The Operation State of the link is Available.

Context The local multiple signaling point feature enables one physical BSC to serve as multiple logical BSCs so that each logical BSC can exchange signaling with the MSC. The traffic load is distributed to each logical BSC. Therefore, the impact on the paging traffic of the BSC is reduced.

CAUTION The original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry after local multiple signaling points are configured. As a result, the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are increased.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


508



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) repeatedly to add the OSPs. NOTE

l The OSP Code of OSPs must be different from each other. They must also be different from the DSP code[Whole Number] of DSPs with the same Network ID. l The SPCBITS of systems with the same Network ID must be the same.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) repeatedly to add the desired DSPs. In this step, the OSP index and DSP type specified in Step 1 must be set. NOTE

After the DSP is configured, the connection from a logical BSC to the MSC is configured. Take the establishment of the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC as an example. First, you need to add two OSPs with different OSP codes. Then, add two DSPs with identical DSP code, which is the signaling code of the MSC. In this manner, the connections from two logical BSCs to the same MSC are established.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC to configure the OSP of the logical BSC. In this step, set Network ID, SPCBITS, and OSP Code according to network planning. The OPCs of multiple logical BSCs must be different.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to configure the logical link between the OSP and DSP. NOTE

If multiple logical BSCs need to be connected to the same DPC, the OSP index needs to be set to the OSP index of the logical BSC set in Step 1. The DSP bear type needs to set according to network planning. In the case of ATM/TDM transmission, select MTP3(MTP3); in the case of IP transmission, select M3UA(M3UA); in the case of co-transmission, select MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Configure the transmission link between OSP and DSP. If the bear type is MTP3, then the MTP3 link set, MTP3 link, and MTP3 route need to be configured. If the bear type is M3UA, then the M3UA link set, M3UA link, M3UA route, M3UA local entity, and M3UA destination entity need to be configured. The following takes the MTP3 bear type as an example.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS to configure the link set between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set DSP index to that configured in Step 2.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK to configure the physical link between the OSP and DSP. In this step, set the SIGLKSX as specified in Step 4.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT to configure the route from the OSP to the DSP. The route from the OSP to the DSP can be set up either in direct connection or transfer manner.


509


136 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points NOTE

In direct connection manner, the DSP index in this command must be the same as the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4. If a signaling transfer point is used, the DSP index in this command must be different from the DSP index corresponding to the link set configured in Step 4 and the DSP corresponding to the link set must provide the signaling link transfer functionality.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the status of the DSP configured in Step 2. Expected result: The value of SCCP DSP state is Accessible.

l

Deactivation Procedure NOTE

You are advised to remove traffic data and then DPCs and OPCs.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a DPC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an OPC.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Adding an OPC ADD OPC: NAME="opc1", SPX=0, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT16, SPDF=WNF, SPC=111; //Adding a DPC ADD N7DPC: NAME="dpc1", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=222, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=MTP3; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Removing a DPC RMV N7DPC: DPX=1; //Removing an OPC RMV OPC: SPX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


510



137

Configuring PS Dummy Frame Compression

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117705 PS Dummy Frame Compression.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS, and GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – None

l

Requirements for Transmission Networking – This feature can be used only in Abis over IP mode.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – The feature GBFD-117705 PS Dummy Frame Compression has been configured on the BTSs before this feature is activated.

Context l

Precautions – Modifying Abis IP Dummy Frame Optimization resets the cells.

l

Data Preparation Parameter Name Abis IP Dummy Frame Optimization

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

ABISIPDUMMY OPTSUP

Enable this feature if the transmission bandwidth is insufficient over the Abis interface.

Internal planning


511



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Abis IP Dummy Frame Optimization to SUPPORT(Support).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN. In this step, set Channel Type to PDTCH(PDTCH) to ensure that PDTCHs exist in the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST GCELL with Reset Level set to 3-LEVEL (Level-3).

3.

Run Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface on the LMT. Expected result: a.

The value of the dummy-flag information element in the PTRAU_ABIS_DL_SHAKEHANDS message is 1 or 0. NOTE

If PS DTX is set to OFF(Off), the value of dummy-flag is 1. If PS DTX is set to DTX(ON when no MS is accessed) or ENHANCEDDTX(ON when no valid data needs to be sent), the value of dummy-flag is 0.

l

b.

The values of ext-flag and dummy-flag in PTRAU_ABIS_UP_SHAKEHANDS are 1.

c.

When no PS services exist,the downlinkPTRAU_ABIS_DL_NB frames is sent over the PDCH at an interval of 240 ms if downlink dummy frames do not carry the USF and at an interval of 20 ms if downlink dummy frames carry the USF.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Abis IP Dummy Frame Optimization to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activating PS Dummy Frame Compression SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ABISIPDUMMYOPTSUP=SUPPORT; //Deactivating PS Dummy Frame Compression SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ABISIPDUMMYOPTSUP=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


512



138

Configuring Clock over IP support 1588v2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118620 Clock over IP support 1588v2.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The GTMUa board does not support 1588v2 over MAC clock synchronization. – The GTMUa board does not support two-step clock synchronization specified in the G. 8265.1 protocol.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The clock server complies with IEEE 1588v2 and G.8265.1 standards.

Context When the IP over FE/GE transmission mode is used over the Abis interface, the clock server complying with IEEE 1588v2 and G.8265.1 standards provides high-precision clock synchronization signals for its connected BTSs.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIPCLKPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS IP Clock Server; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Clock Protocol Type to PTP(PTP Protocol), set Clock Topology Mode to PTPOVERUDP(PTP over UDP Unicast), set Domain consistent with that of the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

513



clock server, and set Clock Reference Source Redundancy and Profile Type to appropriate values. l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSIPCLK to query IP Clock Protocol and Clock Topology Mode of a BTS. Expected result: IP Clock Protocol is PTP Protocol and Clock Topology Mode is UDP Unicast.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches) to set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).

----End

Example //Activating Clock over IP support 1588v2 SET BTSIPCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CLKPRTTYPE=PTP, DN=4, CLKTOPOMODE=PTPOVERUDP, SYNMODE=CONSYN, ISCLKREDUCY=UNSUPPORT, MASTERIPADDR="10.10.10.10", PRFTYPE=G.8265.1; //Deactivating Clock over IP support 1588v2 SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


514



139

Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Impact on BSC6900 hardware: IP interface boards need to be used on the Abis interface. – Impact on BTS hardware: This feature applies to only the 3900 series base stations.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.

l


Context This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of a synchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet. The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC or BTS hardware. The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer of the Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the code flow of the Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting the highly precise clock. The reception end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the data flow. In this way, the accuracy of the clock is ensured. Another benefit of the feature is that it does not require additional BTS hardware to achieve clock synchronization in the all-IP network.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

515



modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches) to set the clock type of a BTS. In this step, set Clock Type to SYNETH_CLK(SynEth Clock). l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the current clock source configuration of the system. Expected results: Selected Clock Source is SynEth Clock.


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=SYNETH_CLK, TRANSTYPE=FE, PN=0; //Verification procedure DSP BTSBRD: INFOTYPE=BASEINFO, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


516



140

Configuring Abis over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on hardware The BSC configured with the built-in PCU, that means the DPUd or DPUg board is configured. The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is in position. The BTSs that support the Abis over IP transmission mode are as follows: – Double-transceiver BTSs configured with the DPTU: BTS3012 and BTS3012A – BTS3900 series IP fault detection function based on the BFD – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support the IP fault detection function based on Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD). – BTS3900 series (excluding the BTS3900B and BTS3900E) must be configured with the GTMUb. – Devices interconnected to the BSC must support the BFD function. Built-in firewall – Only BTS3900 series (excluding BTS3900B and BTS3900E) support the built-in firewall function. – The UTRPc is required for supporting the built-in firewall function.

l

Dependencies on other features This feature cannot be used with the features GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-117301 Flex Abis, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface, MRFD-210206 Tree Topology, MRFD-210205 Chain Topology, GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking and GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis together.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


517


l


Initial data preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

l

Other prerequisites When device IP is used in transmission, the BTS is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC.

Context NOTE

When the layer 2 networking is used on the Abis interface, the BSC and BTS automatically performs the Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) on links. In this case, the BTS is not allowed to use the device IP address in communication.

With this feature, the BSC is connected to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on the location of the BSC and the BTS. This feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports the IPv4 protocol. BFD applies to the following scenarios: When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detects whether the peer device is available. With BFD, IP route reselection is triggered when the gateway or the peer entity is faulty, avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board.

2.

Configuring BTS attributes by referring to Configuring BTS Attributes.

3.

Configure data for base station equipment by referring to Configuring the Equipment Data.

4.

Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Transmission Data.

5.

Configure the radio data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Radio Data.

6.

Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS Configuration.

7.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Connectible Check; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect local ip based on the actual networking.


518


140 Configuring Abis over IP NOTE

l BFD requires support from both the local and peer devices and takes effect only when BFD is enabled for both the local and peer devices. Otherwise, services will fail. l If the Ethernet ports work in active/standby mode, set Check mode to CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT; if the Ethernet port works in independent mode, set Check mode to CHECK_ON_INDEPENDENT_PORT. l If Check type is set to SBFD, the single hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Peer IP address to an IP address that is on the same network segment as the local IP address. l If Check type is set to MBFD, the multi-hop BFD is enabled. In this case, set Multi hop BFD detect local ip to the device IP or port IP if the local board, and set Peer IP address to an IP address that is on a different network segment from the local IP address.

8.

l

Configure the built-in firewall function. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSACL (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS Access Control List; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an access control list (ACL).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSACLRULE (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS Access Control List Rule; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add access rules in the ACL.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSPACKETFILTER (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS Packet Filter; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the BTS packet filtering function.

d.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSFLOODDEFEND (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS Flood Attack Defend and Alarm Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the BTS flooding packet attack resistance and alarm configuration.

e.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIPGUARD (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS IP Security Policy; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate ARP spoofing defense and invalid packet check functions.


Verifying data at the physical layer and the data link layer. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slot number, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. Check Port state and Link Availability Status in the command execution result. The expected result: The value of Port state is Activated and Link Availability Status is Available.

2.

Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

519



The expected result: The value of Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0. b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is functional. The expected result: The value of Usage status is Normal.

3.

Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check whether the IP path is available. The expected result: The value of Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0.

4.

Optional: Verifying the BFD a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query the value of Check state. The expected result: The value of Check state is UP or DOWN.

5.

l

Verifying the built-in firewall a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPACKETFILTER to query the measurement results of BTS packet filtering.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSFLOODDEFEND to query information about BTS flood packets.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSINVALIDPKTINFO to query the source of BTS invalid packets.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSARPSPOOFING to query the BTS black list in an ARP table.


Deactivate the built-in firewall function. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSPACKETFILTER (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS Packet Filter; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete the BTS packet filtering function.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSFLOODDEFEND (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS Flood Attack Defend and Alarm Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete the BTS flooding packet attack resistance and alarm configuration.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIPGUARD (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Security Configuration and Maintenance > BTS IP Security Policy; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate ARP spoofing defense and invalid packet check functions.

----End

Example For configurations, see the typical script examples provided in section Configuring Transmission Data of Chapter Configuring GSM BTS and Cell Data in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


520



//Example of configuring the built-in firewall function //Activation procedure //Adding a BTS ACL ADD BTSACL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACLID=3001, ACLDESC="Acl Group is created"; //Adding rules in a BTS ACL ADD BTSACLRULE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RULETYPE=ADV, ACLID=3001, RULEID=10, PT=IP, SIP="1.1.1.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="2.2.2.2", DWC="0.0.255.255", MDSCP=YES, DSCP=25, MFRG=YES; //Configuring the BTS packet filtering function ADD BTSPACKETFILTER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=0, FM=ADV_ACL, ACLID=3001, MB=PERMIT; //Adding the BTS flooding packet attack resistance and alarm configuration ADD BTSFLOODDEFEND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, FLDTYPE=ARP, DFDSW=ENABLE, DFDTHD=512, ALMSW=ENABLE, ALMTHD=256; //Activating ARP spoofing defense and invalid packet check functions SET BTSIPGUARD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ARPSPOOFCHKSW=ENABLE, ARPSPOOFALMTHD=120, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=ENABLE, INVALIDPKTCHKSW=ENABLE, INVALIDPKTALMTHD=2000; Verification procedure //Querying measurement results of BTS packet filtering DSP BTSPACKETFILTER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=2, CATALOG=PORT, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Querying information about BTS flood packets DSP BTSFLOODDEFEND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, FLDTYPE=ARP, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Querying the source of BTS invalid packets DSP BTSINVALIDPKTINFO: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, FLDTYPE=FLOOD, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Querying the BTS black list in an ARP table DSP BTSARPSPOOFING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Deactivation procedure //Deleting the BTS packet filtering function RMV BTSPACKETFILTER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=0; //Deleting the BTS flooding packet attack resistance and alarm configuration RMV BTSFLOODDEFEND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, FLDTYPE=ARP; //Deactivating ARP spoofing defense and invalid packet check functions SET BTSIPGUARD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ARPSPOOFCHKSW=DISABLE, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=DISABLE, INVALIDPKTCHKSW=DISABLE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


521



141

Configuring Abis IP over E1/T1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The PEUa/POUc board is in position. – The BTS supports IP transmission.

l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature cannot be used with the features GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-117301 Flex Abis, GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface and GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis together.

l


l

Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information.

Context NOTE

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Abis over IP.

A license is required to implement Abis over IP. When TDM transmission is used over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be used to carry traffic and signaling data.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a PEUa/ POUc board. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

522


l


2.

Configuring BTS attributes by referring to Configuring BTS Attributes.

3.


4.

Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to Configuring the Transmission Data.

5.


6.

Activate the base station configuration by referring toActivating the BTS Configuration.


2.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.

b.

If the PPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address. If the link state is normal and the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

c.

If the MLPPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address, and Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query Link State and LCP Negotiation State. If the link state is normal, the value of LCP Negotiation State is Connect available, and the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

d.

If the PPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the PPP link is normal.

e.

If the MLPPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP address et to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is normal.

Verifying the control plane on the Abis interface a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is normal. If Usage status is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), the LAPD link is functional.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent node is normal.

Verifying the user plane on the Abis interface


523



a.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is functional.



----End

Example For configurations, see the typical script examples provided in section Configuring the Transmission Data of Chapter Configuring the BTS in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


524


142 Configuring Abis MUX

142

Configuring Abis MUX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118604 Abis MUX.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The BTS supports UDP multiplexing.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.

l


Context Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS serve as transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the transmitting end multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing requirements. Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then demultiplexed at the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets. Thus, the transmission efficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) with IP MUX Type set to ABISMUX and Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, and IS QOSPATH set to appropriate values. Exectution of this command aims to add an IP MUX pipe to enable the multiplexing of IP packets. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

525


142 Configuring Abis MUX NOTE

The BSC can assign a value to IP MUX Index by default. This parameter can be set to an appropriate value according to the actual situation. When IS QOSPATH is set to YES(YES), you can specify the PHB type of the IPMUX to be enabled by setting PHB.

2.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS ABIS-MUX Flow; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Service Type set to an appropriate value if required to add the ABIS-MUX flow on the BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of Abix MUX. The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable Abis MUX.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSABISMUXFLOW (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS ABIS-MUX Flow; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable Abis MUX on the BTS.

----End

Example //Activating Abis MUX ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO,IPMUXINDEX=0; ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE; //Deactivating Abis MUX RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0; RMV BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


526



143

Configuring Abis IPHC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – BTS3012 series are configured with the DPTU board. – BTS3900 series are configured with the GTMUb board. – The BSC6900 is configured with the POUc board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – If the BTSs communicate with the routers in IP over E1 mode, the IPHC function must be enabled on the routers.

Context In IP over E1/T1 mode, typical small packets (for example, speech data) of standard IP packets over the Abis interface only account for 50% to 60% of the payload, which indicates low transmission efficiency. This feature can compress IP or UDP headers to increase the payload and save IP transmission resources.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure for Newly Deployed Sites 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or ADD MPGRP (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

527



subrack number and slot number of the POUc and set IP Header Compression to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD BTSPPPLNK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or ADD BTSMPGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IP Header Compression to ENABLE(ENABLE). NOTE

If the BSC works in IP over FE/GE mode: l Enable IPHC first on the routers, then on the BTSs, but not on the BSC. l Configure the routers to support only the compression of non-TCP packet headers (that is, UDP packet headers).

l

Activation Procedure for Sites Requiring Adjustment 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD MPGRP (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the subrack number and slot number of the POUc and set IP Header Compression to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC). NOTE

If the BSC works in IP over FE/GE mode: l Enable IPHC first on the routers, then on the BTSs, but not on the BSC. l Configure the routers to support only the compression of non-TCP packet headers (that is, UDP packet headers).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD BTSPPPLNK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD BTSMPGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IP Header Compression to ENABLE(ENABLE).

CAUTION When you set IP Header Compression in this step, the BTS reinitiates a negotiation with the BSC or router on establishing a PPP link or an MP group. The negotiation may cause no audio or interrupt data transmission for less than 3s. l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP BTSPPPLNK or DSP BTSMPGRP. Expected result: The value of IPHC Negotiation Result reported by the BTS is ENABLE.

2.

Observe the traffic during a call. – If a BSC communicates with the BTSs based on PPP/MP, the BSC can monitor the transmit flow after Realtime Bandwidth is configured. For details about the

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


528



operations, see Monitoring Transmission Resources in BSC6900 LMT User Guide. – If a BSC communicates with the BTSs through routers, the transmit flow must be calculated on the transmission equipment. Expected result: Assuming that traffic volume is certain, the transmit flow is less when IP Header Compression on the BTSs is set to ENABLE(ENABLE) than that when IP Header Compression is set to DISABLE(DISABLE). l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD MPGRP (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to the subrack number and slot number of the POUc and set IP Header Compression to No_HC(No_HC).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD BTSPPPLNK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD BTSMPGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IP Header Compression to DISABLE(DISABLE).

----End

Example /*Activating Abis IPHC for newly deployed sites*/ //Activating Abis IPHC by configuring a PPP link ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC; ADD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=ENABLE; //Activating Abis IPHC by configuring an MP group ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC; ADD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=ENABLE;

/*Activating Abis IPHC for sites requiring adjustment*/

//Activating Abis IPHC by configuring a PPP link MOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC; MOD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=ENABLE; //Activating Abis IPHC by configuring an MP group MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=UDP/IP_HC; MOD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=ENABLE;

/*Deactivating Abis IPHC*/

//Deactivating Abis IPHC by configuring the PPP link MOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=No_HC; MOD BTSPPPLNK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC= DISABLE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


529



//Deactivating Abis IPHC by configuring the MP link MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=No_HC; MOD BTSMPGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=200, MPGRPN=0, IPHC= DISABLE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


530



144

Configuring A over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118602 A over IP.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is in position.

l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), GBFD-115701 TFO, GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, and GBFD-115711 EVAD.

l


l

Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, or GOUd board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

l

Other Prerequisites The MSC/MGW suports the A over IP. When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC. When IP fault detection based on BFD is configured, the device connected to the BSC supports BFD.

Context A over IP supports only the IPv4 protocol. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


531



When A over IP is enabled, the functions of the TCS are taken over by the MGW, and the BSC does not perform transcoding. The A interface uses IP over FE/GE transmission. BFD applies to the following scenarios:When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detects whether the peer device is available.With BFD, IP route reselection is triggered when the gateway or the peer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop.

Procedure l



2.

Configuring the A Interface

3.

a.

Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/ GOUa/GOUc/GOUd Board.

b.

Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

c.

Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

d.

Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Connectible Check; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect local ip based on the actual networking. NOTE


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slot number, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. The expected result: Port state is Activated, and Link Availability Status is Available. That is, the links carried on the port are normal.

b.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to display the setting of Status of ETHTRK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

532



The expected result: Status of ETHTRK is UP, which indicates that the link aggregation group is normal. c.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRKLNK to display the setting of Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port. The expected result: Status of ETHTRKLNK sub-port is UP, which indicates that the sub-port for the link aggregation group is normal.

2.

Verify the control plane on the A interface. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCP DSP state. The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that the SCCP DSP is normal.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings of Operation status and Activated status. The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status is Activated. That is, the link set is normal.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whether Operation state is Normal. The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTP link is normal.

3.

Verify the user plane on the A interface. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the Operation state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth. The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater than 0.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting of Operation state. The expected result: Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0.

4.



l



----End

Example For configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring the A Interface (over IP) in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


533



145

Configuring A IP over E1/T1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware The PEUa/POUc board is in position.

l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature is mutually exclusive to the feature GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC), GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC), GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR), GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC), GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC), and GBFD-115701 TFO.

l


l

Initial Data Preparation The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. The PEUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

l

Other Prerequisites When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC.

Context When this feature is enabled, the traffic and signaling data can be carried by the PPP based IP transmission over the A interface. The port of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

534



Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

l

2.

In the MPS/EPS, configure the physical layer and data link layer for the PEUa board by referring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board or configure the physical layer and data link layer for the POUc board by referring to Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUc Board.

3.

Configure the control plane of the A interface.

4.

Configure the mapping between service types and transmission resources for the adjacent node.

5.

Configure the user plane of the A interface.



Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State.. The expected result: Port State. is normal.

b.

Check the state of the link. – The link is a PPP link. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address. If the link state is normal and the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the value of Local IP address obtained in the preceding sub-step, and Destination IP address set to the value of Peer IP address obtained in the preceding sub-step. The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

– The link is an MLPPP link. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query the settings of Link state, Local IP address, and Peer IP address.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query the settings of Link state and LCP negotiated state. The expected result: If the link state is normal, the value of LCP Negotiation State is Connect available, and the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the value of Local IP address, and Destination IP address set to the value of Peer IP address. The expected result: The BSC receives the statistics on PING packets.

2.

Verify the control plane on the A interface. a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the setting of SCCP DSP state. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

535



The expected result: SCCP DSP state is Accessible, which indicates that the SCCP DSP is normal. b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LKS to display the settings of Operation status and Activated status. The expected result: Operation status is Available, and Activated status is Activated. That is, the link set is normal.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SCTPLNK to check whether Operation state is Normal. The expected result: Operation state is Normal, which indicates that the SCTP link is normal.

3.

Verify the user plane on the A interface. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to display the Operation state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth. The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the related bandwidth is greater than 0.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to display the setting of Operation state. The expected result: Operation state is Available, and the available bandwidth is greater than 0.

l



----End

Example For configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring A over IP in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


536



146

Configuring UDP MUX for A Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd/PEUa/POUc board is configured. The Core Network (CN) supports UDP multiplexing.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Other Prerequisites When device IP is used in transmission, the peer end is configured with a static route to the device IP of the local BSC. Enable RTCP has been set to ON(Open) by running the MOD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) command.

Context When this feature is enabled, multiple Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets are multiplexed onto one UDP packet. In this way, the proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and therefore the A interface transmission efficiency is improved.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

537



center: not supported) with IP MUX Type to UDPMUX and Adjacent Node ID, IP path ID, IS QOSPATH, Sender UDP MUX Mode, and Receive UDP MUX Mode to appropriate values. Repeat this step if this feature is to be enabled on the A interfaces between the BSC and multiple CN devices. NOTE

Max subframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum Delay Time [ms] must be set as required. The BSC can assign a value to IP MUX Index by default. This parameter can be set to an appropriate value according to the actual situation. When IS QOSPATH is set to YES(Yes), you can specify the PHB type of the UDP MUX to be enabled by setting PHB.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to display the application of UDP MUX for A Transmission. The expected result: IPMUX Status is set to Enable.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable IP MUX.

----End

Example //Activating UDP MUX for A transmission ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=UDPMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, UDPMUXMODSEND=NORTPCOMP, UDPMUXMODRECV=RTPCOMP, IPMUXINDEX=0; //Deactivating UDP MUX for A transmission RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


538



147

Configuring TDM/IP Dual

Transmission over A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – The DPUc or DPUf board is in position. – The FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, GOUd, PEUa, or POUc board is in position. – The MSC or MGW supports this feature. In addition, the configuration of this feature is complete.

l

Dependency on Other Features – This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Initial Data Preparation – The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. A over TDM transmission is used.

Context This feature enables TDM transmission and IP transmission to be used simultaneously over the A interface on the BSC side. This feature is applicable to the scenario where GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP network. Whether the user plane on the A interface uses TDM transmission or IP transmission is determined by the MSC in the assignment procedure or in the incoming BSC handover procedure.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


539



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a DPUc or DPUf board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET TCTYPE. In this step, set Subrack No. and Slot No. to those of the DPU board which configured in step 1. In addition, set The type of TC resource to ITC(Packet Conversion).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa, GOUc, GOUd, PEUa, or POUc board.

4.

Configure A over IP transmission. – When IP over FE/GE transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations by referring to 144 Configuring A over IP. – When IP over E1/T1 transmission is used on the A interface, perform operations by referring to 145 Configuring A IP over E1/T1.

l

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear type to MTP3_M3UA(MTP3 and M3UA). In addition, specify Net PRI as required.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for A Interface User Plane to TDM_IP, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability to YES(Yes).


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to display the settings of MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state. The expected result: MTP3 DSP state and M3UA DSP state are both Available.

2.

Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Make a call in the cell. The call is successfully established.

3.

Observe the speech codec list Information Element (IE) is correctly carried in the Cm Service Request message on the A interface. The expected result, "full-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both 1. NOTE

When "codec-type" is cs-data, "pcm-over-ip" and "pcm-over-tdm" in the speech codec list IE are both 1.

4.

View the assignment request message. The expected result: – The circuit-identity-code IE is carried when the Core Network (CN) instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, as shown in Figure 147-1. Figure 147-1 Assignment request message in TDM transmission

– The aoip-transport-layer-address-mgw and speech codeclist-msc-preferred IEs are carried when the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, as shown in Figure 147-2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


540



Figure 147-2 Assignment request message in IP transmission

5.

Check whether the assignment complete message carries the related IEs. The expected result: – When the CN instructs the user plane to use TDM transmission, the assignment complete message does not carry the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE. – When the CN instructs the user plane to use IP transmission, the assignment complete message carries the aoip-transport-layer-address-bss IE.

l


Change the TDM/IP dual transmission mode over A interface to TDM transmission.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE. In this step, set Bearer for A Interface User Plane to TDM, and set Report BSS Transmission Capability to NO(No).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD N7DPC. In this step, set DSP bear type to MTP3.

----End

Example /*Activating TDM/IP dual transmission over A Interface* //Configure the DPUc/DPUf ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=DPU, BRDTYPE=DPUc, SN=10, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

//Configure the TC type of the DPUc/DPUf SET TCTYPE: SRN=0, SN=10, TCTYPE=ITC;

//Configure the IP interface board when A IP over FE/GE ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=GOUa, SN=26, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

//Configure the IP interface board when A IP over E1/T1 ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=24, RED=YES, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSLOT=0;

//Configure the physical layer and data link layer when A IP over FE/GE ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0; ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.23", MASK="255.255.255.0";

//Configure the physical layer and data link layer when A IP over E1/T1 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


541



SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=24, BT=POUc, PS=ALL, WORKMODE=E1, PTTXT=E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME, PTRXT=E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME; SET OPT: SRN=0, SN=24, BT=POUc, PS=ALL, OPTM=SDH; ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=24, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=24, BRDTYPE=POUc, MPGRPN=10, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=YES, DEVIP="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="10.171.35.100", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, ANTIERRFLAG=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD MPLNK:SRN=0, SN=24, PPPLNKN=0, MPGRPN=10, DS1=191, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS121&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS2 4-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&30-1&TS31-1, BRDTYPE=POUc, RESTARTTMR=3, FCSTYPE=16bit, KEEPALIVE=2;

//Configure the control plane of the A interface ADD SCTPLNK:SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=10, APP=M3UA, PEERPN=3055, LOCIP1="10.171.35.123", PEERIP1="10.171.30.100", LOCPN=3055, SWITCHBACKHBNUM=10, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, MODE=CLIENT, DSCP=48, RTOMIN=150, RTOMAX=3000, RTOINIT=1000, RTOALPHA=12, RTOBETA=25, HBINTER=1000, MAXASSOCRETR=4, MAXPATHRETR=2, CHKSUMTX=NO, CHKSUMRX=NO, CHKSUMTYPE=CRC32, MTU=800, CROSSIPFLAG=UNAVAILABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES, BUNDLINGFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=ENABLE, VLANID1=3900, VLANFLAG2=DISABLE; ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST"; ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="TEST"; ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="TEST"; ADD M3LNK:SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=10, PRIORITY=0, LNKREDFLAG=M3UA_MASTER_MOD, NAME="TEST";

//Configure the mapping between service types and transmission resources for the adjacent node ADD ADJNODE:ANI=0, NAME="MSC_2G", NODET=A;

//Configure the user plane of the A interface ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=A, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", PEERIPADDR="10.171.35.100", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;

//Change the the beartpye of the N7DPC MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, ATransMode=TDM_IP, CodecRptFlg=YES; MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, BEARTYPE=MTP3_M3UA, NETPRI=M3UA_FIRST;

/*Deactivating TDM/IP dual transmission over A Interface* //Change the the beartpye of the N7DPC MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, ATransMode=TDM, CodecRptFlg=NO; MOD N7DPC: DPX=0, BEARTYPE=MTP3;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


542



148

Configuring Gb over IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is in position. – The built-in PCU is used. The DPUd/DPUg board is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature: GBFD-114101 GPRS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The SGSN supports Gb over IP. – The BSC and its peer device must support BFD.

Context Gb over IP enables operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR) between the BSC and the SGSN. BFD applies to the following scenarios:When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) through a router, BFD detects whether the router is available. When the BSC is connected to a peer device (such as a BTS, MGW, or SGSN) directly, BFD detects whether the peer device is available.With BFD, IP route reselection is triggered when the gateway or the peer entity is faulty, thus avoiding continuous packet loss or call drop.



543



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUc, or GOUd board.

2.

Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/ GOUd Board.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > SGSN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Operator Name and SGSN Node ID set to appropriate values to add an SGSN node.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > NSE; CME batch modification center: not supported) with NSE Identifier, Subrack No., Slot No., Subnet Protocol Type, Operator Name, SGSN Node ID, and Subnetwork Configure Mode set to appropriate values to add an NSE.

5.

Configure the NSVL. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > Local NSVL; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Local NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Local IP Address, Local UDP Port No, Subrack No., and Slot No. set to appropriate values to add an NSVL on the BSC side. NOTE

When port IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to the port IP address of the interface board in Step 2. When device IP addresses are used for the communication, Local IP Address is set to the device IP address of the interface board in Step 2.

b.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Optional: When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC (Static), Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > Remote NSVL; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Remote NSVL ID, NSE Identifier, Remote IP Address, and Remote UDP Port No. set to appropriate values to add an NSVL on the SGSN side.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) with PTP BVC Identifier set to an appropriate value, Cell Name set to the name of the GPRS cell that needs to be bound, and NSE Identifier set to that of the NSE added in Step 4. Execution of this command aims to add a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC).

7.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Connectible Check; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters Check type, Check mode, Peer IP address, and Multi hop BFD detect local ip based on the actual networking.


544


148 Configuring Gb over IP NOTE


l


Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Subrack No., Slot No., Source IP address, and Destination IP address set to appropriate values. NOTE

l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is DYNAMIC(Dynamic), you need to set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination IP Address to the same value as Server IP in ADD NSE. l When Subnetwork Configure Mode of the NSE is STATIC(Static), you need to set Source IP Address to the same value as Local IP Address in ADD NSVLLOCAL and Destination IP Address to the same value as Remote IP Address in ADD NSVLREMOTE.

The expected result: The statistics on PING packets can be received, which indicates that the IP link on the Gb interface is functional. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GBIPROUTE with NSE Identifier, Local NSVL ID, or Remote NSVL ID set to an appropriate value. The expected result: IP Path State is Normal, which indicates that the IP path at the service layer on the Gb interface is functional.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC with NSE Identifier set to an appropriate value to check whether SIG BVC State is Normal. The expected result: SIG BVC State is Normal, which indicates that the SIG PVC on the signaling plane of the Gb interface is normal.

4.



l


This feature need not be deactivated.

----End

Example For configurations, see the typical script example provided in section Configuring Gb over IP in the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


545



149

Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118630 Ethernet OAM.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured for the Abis or A interface, or the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured for the Gb interface. – The interconnected transmission equipment must comply with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah standard protocols.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support the feature. – The BBU is configured with a GTMUb board.

Context As a layer-2 protocol, Ethernet OAM reports the network status at the data link layer. Therefore, the network is monitored and managed more effectively. The BSS supports two types of Ethernet OAM: point-to-point Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.3ah standard protocol) and end-to-end Ethernet OAM (IEEE 802.1ag standard protocol).

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating point-to-point Ethernet OAM

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


546



– BSC 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > EFM OAM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the EFM OAM function.

– BTS 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > Ethernet Port of IP BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set 3ah Switch to OPEN(Open).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSETHOAMAH (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the BTS EFM OAM function.

– Activating end-to-end Ethernet OAM – BSC NOTE

The values of parameters MD Name, MD Level, MA Name, and VLAN ID must be consistent on the two ends.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MD; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a maintenance domain (MD) for the Ethernet OAM. In this step, set the parameters MD Index, MD Level, and MD Name to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet OAM maintenance association (MA). In this step, set MD Index to the value specified in 1, and set VLAN ID, MA Index, and MA Name to appropriate values.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a maintenance entity group end point (MEP) for Ethernet OAM at the local end. In this step, set MEP ID to an appropriate value, MEP Type to LocalMep(LocalMep), Port Type to ETHER, and MA Index to the value specified in 2.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MEP for Ethernet OAM at the remote end. In this step, set MEP ID to an appropriate value, MEP Type to RemoteMep (RemoteMep), and MA Index to the value specified in 2. NOTE

MEP ID must be set to the same value at the two ends.

5.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet Port OAM Continuity Check; CME batch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

547



modification center: not supported) to activate the connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity between the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MA Index to the value specified in 2 and MEP ID to the value specified in 3. – BTS NOTE

The values of parameters MD Name, MD Level, MA Name, and VLAN ID must be consistent on the two ends.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHMD (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance Domain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a MD for BTS Ethernet OAM. In this step, set the parameters MD Level and MD Name to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHMA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance Association; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a BTS Ethernet OAM MA. In this step, set MD Name to the value specified in 1, and set VLAN ID and MA Name to appropriate values.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHLCMEP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Local MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the local end. In this step, set MEP ID to an appropriate value, MD Name to the value specified in 1, and MA Name to the value specified in 2.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSETHRMMEP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Remote MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the remote end. In this step, set MEP ID to an appropriate value, MD Name to the value specified in 1, and MA Name to the value specified in 2. NOTE

MEP ID must be set to the same value at the two ends.

5.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTSETHCC (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM CC Function; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the connectivity check for the Ethernet OAM to check the connectivity between the local MEP and the peer MEP. In this step, set MD Name to the value specified in 1, MA Name to the value specified in 2, and MEP ID to the value specified in 3.

Verification Procedure – Verifying point-to-point Ethernet OAM

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

After the EFM OAM function is enabled, the alarm ALM-21371 ETHOAM 3AH Discovery Failure is reported if the transmission link is faulty or the peer end does not support the EFM OAM function.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command STR EFMLOOPTST to start EFM OAM remote loopback test. After the EFM OAM function is enabled, the alarm ALM-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported if the loopback is successful because the loopback operation blocks the ongoing services. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

548



– Verifying end-to-end Ethernet OAM 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING MAC. In this step, set MA Index and MEP ID to the values specified in ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP ID of the peer device. Expected result: The number of received packets equals the number of sent packets.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command TRC MAC. In this step, set MA Index and MEP ID to the values specified in ADD CFMMEP, and set RMEP ID to the MEP ID of the peer device. Expected result: The returned result contains "Succeed in tracing the destination address".

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating point-to-point Ethernet OAM – BSC 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > EFM OAM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the EFM OAM function.

– BTS 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSETHPORT (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > Ethernet Port of IP BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set 3ah Switch to CLOSE(Close).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSETHOAMAH (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the BTS EFM OAM function.

– Deactivating end-to-end Ethernet OAM – BSC 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet Port OAM Continuity Check; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the connectivity test of Ethernet OAM.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MEPs for Ethernet OAM at the two ends.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet OAM MA.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > IP Interface Configuration > Ethernet OAM MD; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet OAM MD.

– BTS Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


549



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTSETHCC (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM CC Function; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the connectivity test of BTS Ethernet OAM.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHRMMEP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Remote MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an MEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the remote end.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHLCMEP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Local MEP; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an MEP for BTS Ethernet OAM at the local end.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHMA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance Association; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a BTS Ethernet OAM MA.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSETHMD (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance > BTS Ethernet OAM Maintenance Domain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a BTS Ethernet OAM MD.

----End

Example //Activating Ethernet OAM Activating point-to-point Ethernet OAM //BSC ACT EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0; //BTS SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0, SWITCH3AH=OPEN; ACT BTSETHOAMAH: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0; Activating end-to-end Ethernet OAM //BSC ADD CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, LEVEL=0, MDNAME="md0"; ADD CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, VLANID=2, MAIDX=0, MANAME="ma0"; ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=LocalMep, MEPID=1, PORTTYPE=ETHER, SN=18, PN=0; ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=RemoteMep, MEPID=2, SN=18; ACT CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1; //BTS ADD BTSETHMD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MDLEVEL=0; ADD BTSETHMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", VLANID=2; ADD BTSETHLCMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2, PN=0; ADD BTSETHRMMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=1; ACT BTSETHCC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2; //Deactivating Ethernet OAM Deactivating point-to-point Ethernet OAM //BSC DEA EFMAH: SRN=0,SN=18,PN=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


550



//BTS SET BTSETHPORT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE; DEA BTSETHOAMAH: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, PN=0; Deactivating end-to-end Ethernet OAM //BSC DEA CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1; RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0,MEPID=2; RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0,MEPID=1; RMV CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0; RMV CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0; //BTS DEA BTSETHCC: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2; RMV BTSETHRMMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=1; RMV BTSETHLCMEP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0", MEPID=2; RMV BTSETHMA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0", MANAME="ma0"; RMV BTSETHMD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, MDNAME="md0";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


551



150

Configuring A Interface Transmission Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118631 A Interface Transmission Pool. When an Ethernet Layer 3 networking is used, multiple IP interface boards used by the A interface on the BSC form a resource pool and the IP addresses for these interface boards also form a resource pool. Any interface board in the resource pool is accessible to the core network (CN). The BSC selects an IP address from the resource pool for bearing incoming services based on load balancing so that interface boards share resources in the pool.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the feature GBFD-118602 A over IP. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – N/A

l

Dependencies on Transport Network – This feature applies to IP transmission only.

l

Dependencies on Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – N/A

l

Other Prerequisites – GOUc, GOUd, FG2c, and FG2d boards support a transmission resource pool.

Context l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


552


l



Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

IP TYPE

IPTYPE

-

Network planning

Source IP address

SRCIPADDR

Set this parameter to a value consistent with the IP address in commands ADD ETHIP, ADD ETHTRKIP or ADD DEVIP based on the setting of the parameter IP TYPE.

Network planning

Forward route address

NEXTHOP

IP address for a router

Network planning

Standby Next hop switch

STANDBYNEXT HOPSWITCH

This parameter is valid only if the source IP address is a device IP. This parameter is set to YES when active and standby gateways are configured.

Network planning

Standby next hop

STANDBYNEXT HOP

Another IP address for a router

Network planning

Transmission Resource Pool Name

IPPOOLNAME

-

Network planning

Transmission Resource Pool Index

IPPOOLINDEX

-

Network planning

IP Address in Transmission Resource Pool

IPADDR

Same as IP address in the ADD DEVIP command

Network planning

Is IP Pool

ISIPPOOL

-

Network planning

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Scenarios for Initial Configuration

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

See Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2c/FG2d/ GOUc/GOUd Board in Initial Configuration Guide.

2.

See Configuring the Transmission Resource Pool in Initial Configuration Guide.

3.

See Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over Transmission Resource Pool) in Initial Configuration Guide. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

553



4.

See Configuring the User Plane of the A Interface (Transmission Resource Pool) in Initial Configuration Guide.

5.

See Configuring the Mapping Between Service Types and Transmission Resources for the Adjacent Node in Initial Configuration Guide.

– Reconfiguration Scenarios – See Reconfiguring Networking Mode over the A Interface (IP->Transmission Resource Pool) in Reconfiguration Guide. – See Reconfiguring Networking Mode over the A Interface (TDM->Transmission Resource Pool) in Reconfiguration Guide. l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP ETHPORT to query the port rate and working mode. Expected results: Speed is set to 1000M and Duplex is set to Full.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP SRCIPRT to check whether the source IP address is received at and sent from the interface board in a physical slot. – If the values of both Number of Packets Sent and Number of Packets Received increase in the same slot, the route priority on the BSC side is consistent with that at the peer end. – If the value of Number of Packets Received increases in both active and standby slots, the wrongly configured equal-cost route between the router and the BSC must be replaced with a route in active/standby mode. – If the slot where the value of Number of Packets Received increases is different from the slot where the value of Number of Packets Sent increases, the route priorities on the BSC and the peer route are inconsistent and therefore must be corrected.

l

3.

Check Ping-related alarms. None of the alarms ALM-21392 Adjacent Node IP Address Ping Failure, ALM-21393 Adjacent Node IP Path Ping Failure, and ALM-21394 Transmission Resource Pool Ping Packet Loss is reported.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP IPPOOL to check whether the settings of Send bit rate of the port[bps], Receive bit rate of the port[bps], Send bit rate load of the board, Receive bit rate load of the board, Send packets load of the board, and Receive packets load of the board for outgoing ports using source IP addresses in the transmission resource pool are balanced.


----End

Example //Activating A Interface Transmission Pool // Please see typical configuration script examples in Initial Configuration Guide.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


554



151

Configuring Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used with the following feature: GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

l


l

Other Prerequisites The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels. To ensure the normal processing of PS services in satellite transmission mode, the GPRS parameters related to a PS cell need to be set as follows: T3168 is set to 1000ms, T3192 to 1000ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 15.

Context TDM or IP transmission is used over the Abis interface. Using satellite transmission over the Abis interface enables operators to deploy BTSs in areas that are difficult to reach through conventional terrestrial transmission, therefore solving the communication problem in these areas. Compared with terrestrial transmission, the information exchange latency is prolonged in satellite transmission. Satellite transmission with limited transmission bandwidth for BTS3900B (a pico base station) only supports CS services. The method of configuring satellite transmission over the Abis interface for BTS3900B is different from that for other BTSs.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


555



Procedure l

Activation Procedure – If TDM transmission is used over the Abis interface, perform the following steps: 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).

3.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLAPDWS. In this step, set RSL LAPD Window Size to an appropriate value based on the actual delay. NOTE

RSL LAPD Window Size is set to 48 by default and can be flexibly configured by operators based on the actual delay. A longer delay requires a larger value.

4.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set T200 SDCCH to 200, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 100, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to 200. Operators can adjust the settings of these parameters based on the actual delay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.

5.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set MS MAX Retrans to an appropriate value. NOTE

Setting MS MAX Retrans to a larger value increases the radio access rate and setting MS MAX Retrans to a smaller value lightens the load of the RACH and SDCCH.

6.


7.

Configuring a Clock for a BTS. NOTE

If the BTS has a difficulty in using the original clock, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK. In this step, set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).

– If IP transmission is used over the Abis interface, perform the following steps: – For a BTS, 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of DL DTX Strategy. If the value of DL DTX Strategy is set to MSC Strategy, the downlink DTX is consistent with the MSC. In this case, ensure that DTX is enabled at the CN.

4.


5.

Configuring a Clock for a BTS. NOTE


– For a pico BTS with limited transmission bandwidth, NOTE

Pico satellite transmission is supported only when an FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board serve as the Abis interface board.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


556



1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to PICO_AND_SAT_TRANS(Pico and Satellite).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW. In this step, set Service Type to CSVOICE(CS Voice), and set Maximum Delay Time to 90.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCJBF. In this step, set IP-overSatellite JitterBuffer Init Time to 300.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX. In this step, set IP MUX Type, Adjacent node ID, IP path ID, IS QOSPATH, and Maximum Delay Time[ms] to 90.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS with Speech Version set to FULL_RATE_VER1(Full Rate VER 1) and HALF_RATE_VER3(Half Rate VER 3).

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAMR. In this step, set AMR ACS[H] to 4_75KBIT/S, set AMR Starting Mode[H] to 0.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD. In this step, set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed to ON(On), and set Tch Traffic Busy Overlay Threshold and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold to 0.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set HR Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes) and HR Uplink DTX to Shall_Use (Shall Use).

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of DL DTX Strategy. If DL DTX Strategy is set to MSC Strategy, the downlink DTX is consistent with the MSC. In this case, ensure that DTX is enabled at the CN. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLTMR. In this step, set T3101 to 4000. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate the BTS. 13. Configuring a Clock for a BTS. NOTE


l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT to query the status of the cell. Expected result: Cell Service State is set to Yes.

2.

Use the MS to initiate a call.

3.

Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface In this step, click RSL under Trace Type. Expected result: A complete signaling procedure for the mobile-originated call is traced.

4. l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

(Optional): When IP transmission is used over the Abis interface, access the internet by dialing and perform a ping service. The ping service is successful. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS to deactivate the BTS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

557



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS. In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission).

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set T200 SDCCH to 60, T200 SACCH SDCCH to 60, and T200 SDCCH SAPI3 to 60. Adjust settings of these parameters based on the actual delay over the Abis interface. A longer delay requires a larger value.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set MS MAX Retrans to 2_Times(2_Times). Set MS MAX Retrans to an appropriate value as required.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set T3168 to 500ms, T3192 to 500ms, and BS_CV_MAX to 10.

6.


----End

Example /*Activating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/ //Deactivating a BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Setting a transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=SAT_TRANS; //Activating a pico BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Setting a clock mode SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK; /*Activating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface for a Pico*/ //Deactivating a BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Setting a transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=PICO_AND_SAT_TRANS; //Setting IP MUX on the BTS side ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SRVTYPE=CSVOICE, TIMEOUT=90; //setting IP-over-Satellite JitterBuffer Init Time SET BSCJBF: IPOSATJttTime=300; //Setting IP MUX on the BSC side ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, FPTIMER=90; //setting Speech Version SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-0&HALF_RATE_VER 1-0&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER5-0; //Setting AMR call control parameters for the cell SET GCELLCCAMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTCDSETH=4_75KBIT/S-1&5_15KBIT/ S-0&5_90KBIT/S-0&6_70KBIT/S-0&7_40KBIT/S-0&7_95KBIT/S-0, INITCDMDH=0; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHBUSYTHRES=0, AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=ON, AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=0; //Setting half rate downlink DTX SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HRDLDTX=YES, HRULDTX=Shall_Use; //Setting 3101 timer SET GCELLTMR: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ESTABINDTIMER=4000; //Activating a BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Setting a clock mode SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK; /*Deactivating Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface*/ //Deactivating a BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


558



//Setting a transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TransMode=TER_TRANS; //Activating a pico BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


559



152

Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.

Context Satellite transmission can be applied on the A interface in situations where terrestrial transmission cannot be established between the BSC and MSC (for example, in sites where an emergency situation occurs temporarily or in scenarios where satellite works as a backup transmission means). If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellite transmission over the Ater interface.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > A Interface E1/T1; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an E1/T1 link on the A interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

560


152 Configuring Satellite Transmission over A Interface NOTE

An EIUa board provides 32 E1s/T1s. Each E1 has thirty-two 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each T1 has twenty-five 64 kbit/s timeslots. Each timeslot corresponds to a CIC. For example, if Start CIC of the first E1/T1 is 0, then Start CIC of the second E1/T1 must belong to a CIC group that is different from the CIC group of Start CIC of the first configured E1/T1. Here, if E1 is used, Start CIC of the second E1 must be greater than 31. If T1 is used, Start CIC of the second T1 must be greater than 24. When the MSC Pool feature is enabled, the Start CIC of the E1s/T1s that have the same pair of originating and destination signaling points must be unique.

l

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 signaling link set on the A interface.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Satellite flag set to YES(YES) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MTP3 route on the A interface.


Use an MS to originate a call. The call is set up successfully.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MTP3LNK to query the status of the MTP3 signaling link. Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.

3.

Trace the messages on the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In this step, click BSSAP under Trace Type. Trace the CS domain messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In this step, click RSL under Trace Type. Expected result: Complete signaling procedure of the mobile-originated call can be seen.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the MTP3 signaling link.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > TDM Transport > MTP3 Signalling Link Set > MTP3 Signalling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Satellite flag set to NO(NO) to add an MTP3 signaling link on the A interface.

----End

Example /*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*/ //Configuring the A interface E1/T1 ADD AE1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100; //Configuring an MTP3 link set over the A interface ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=0, NAME="SATTRAN";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


561



//Configuring an MTP3 link over the A interface ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1, LKTATE=64K, STFLG=YES NAME="0"; //Configuring an MTP3 route over the A interface ADD MTP3RT: DPX=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="SAT"; /*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over A Interface*/ //Removing an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to YES(YES) RMV MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1; //Adding an MTP3 link with Satellite flag set to NO(NO) ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=TOGETHER, ASRN=0, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1, LKTATE=64K, STFLG=NO NAME="1";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


562



153

Configuring Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The EIUa/OIUa board is configured.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites The initial configuration of the BSC is complete. The cell to be verified is in the normal state and has idle channels.

Context In BM/TC separated mode with the TC configured remotely, satellite transmission over Ater interface can be used when installing transmission lines is geographically impossible. If satellite transmission is applied over the A interface, you are advised to configure satellite transmission over the Ater interface.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH to add an Ater connection path between the MPS and the TCS. NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC needs to be configured through the ADD ATERE1T1 command.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


563



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML to add an Ater OML.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PBE1T1 with Transmission Mode set to SATEL(Satellite Transmission) to add an E1/T1 link on the Pb interface. NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC needs to be configured through the ADD ATERSL command.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERCONSL with Window Size set to an appropriate value according to the actual delay. NOTE

If the TC pool feature is supported, the command only applies to the main BSC. The sub-BSC needs to be configured through the MOD ATERSL command. The longer the delay in satellite transmission, the larger the value to be set.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ATERSL to query the status of the Ater signaling link. Expected result: UsageStatus is set to Normal.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATERSL with Transmission Mode set to TRRS(Terrestrial Transmission).

----End

Example /*Activating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*/ //Adding an Ater connection path ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=0, BMSRN=0, BMSN=16, BMPN=0, TCSRN=3, TCSN=16, TCPN=0; //Adding an Ater OML ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; //Adding an Ater signaling link with Transmission Mode set to SATEL (Satellite Transmission) ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS1 1-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0 &TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0, TNMODE=SATEL; /*Deactivating the feature Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface*/ //Modifying the transmission mode of the Ater signaling link MOD ATERCONSL: ATERSLID=0, TNMODE=TRRS;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


564



154

Configuring Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPUb board is configured.

l


l


Procedure l


l

The procedure for configuring the satellite transmission on the Gb interface is the same as the procedure for configuring the terrestrial transmission on the Gb interface. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) (CME single configuration: see the Configuring the Gb Interface (FR) in the M2000-CME documentation; CME batch modification center: not supported) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP) (CME single configuration: see the Configuring the Gb Interface (IP) in the M2000CME documentation; CME batch modification center: not supported).


After an NSE is added, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SIGBVC to query the state of an SIG BSSGP virtual connection (SIG BVC) by checking the setting of SIG BVC State. Expected result: If SIG BVC State is set to Normal, it indicates that the SIG BVC works properly.

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

After a PTP BVC is added, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the state of the PTP BVC by checking the setting of Service State. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

565



Expected result: If Manage State is set to Unblock and Service State is set to Normal, it indicates that the PTP BVC works properly. l



----End

Example For configurations, see the typical script example of the Gb interface configuration in the Initial Configuration.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


566



155

Configuring RAN Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell feature is mutually exclusive with the RAN Sharing feature. – The GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing feature is mutually exclusive with the RAN Sharing feature. – The GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network feature is mutually exclusive with the RAN Sharing feature. – The GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell is mutually exclusive with the RAN Sharing feature.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC supports service processing board sharing by multiple operators. Operators that share the BSC do not have their respective service processing boards. – The MSCs of different operators use the same signaling system No. 7 (SS7) rate. – RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators, including the primary operator. – RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four CBCs. – The DPC of the SS7 signaling and the total number of SGSNs remain unchanged after RAN Sharing is enabled. – The devices of all operators are connected to the same M2000, and the information about all alarms and performance counters can be viewed on the M2000. Such information is not displayed on a per operator basis. – The BSC clock of one operator is used as the reference clock for other operators. Operators ensure the clock synchronization among their MSCs.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


567



– If a network service entity (NSE) and a cell belong to different operators, a packet pointto-point BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC) cannot be configured between the NSE and the cell.

Context The RAN sharing function allows multiple operators with independent core networks to share GBSS network resources, such as BSC, BTS, antenna, and transmission devices. A single cell under a site provides services for only one operator, and different cells under a site provide services for multiple operators. Table 155-1 Data preparation Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Source

Parameter ID

Remarks

Support RAN Sharing

SptRanSharing

Set this parameter to YES(Yes).

Engineering design

Operator Type

OperatorType

Configure a primary operator and multiple secondary operators.

Radio network planning (internal planning)

Operator Name

OPNAME

Set this parameter based on the operator information.


MCC

MCC


Radio network planning (Negotiated with the peer end)

MNC

MNC



Handover Between Operators Allow

HOBTWNOTHOP ALLOW

Set this parameter to YES(Yes) when handovers between cells of different operators are allowed.

Engineering design

DSP name

NAME


Transmissio n network planning (internal planning)


568



Parameter Name

Data Source

Parameter ID

Remarks

DSP code[Whole Number]

DPC


Transmissio n network planning (Negotiated with the peer end)

Operator Name

OPNAME



MSC ID

CNID



Default DPC

DFDPC

On the CN of the primary operator:

Engineering design

When only one DSP is configured, set this parameter to YES(Default DPC), indicating that all calls of this operator are accessed on this CN. When multiple DSPs are configured, set this parameter to YES(Default DPC) for the DSP used to generate an equipment serial number (ESN) and set this parameter to NO(Not Default DPC) for other signaling points. On the CN of a secondary operator: When only one DSP is configured, set this parameter to YES(Default DPC), indicating that all calls of this operator are accessed on this CN. When multiple DSPs are configured, this parameter is invalid.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


569



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Operator Name

OPNAME



SGSN Node ID

CNID


Device planning

Sharing Allow

SHARINGALLOW

Set this parameter to YES(YES) to share a BTS.

Device planning

Operator Name

OPNAME



Procedure l


Configure the BSC data by referring to BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. For a BSC to be deployed, the following substeps are required for initial configuration. For a deployed BSC, the following substeps are required for enabling the RAN Sharing feature. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support RAN Sharing set to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Operator Type to SEC(Secondary Operator). Set Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, MNC and Handover Between Operators Allow based on actual conditions, and set other parameters to appropriate values.

c.

Add DSPs for secondary perators based on actual conditions as in initial configuration. NOTE

If a BSC needs multiple originating signaling points (OSPs) to communicate with operators, configure multiple OSPs by enabling the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature. For details, see 136 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points.

d.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

If the A interface uses IP transmission, add M3UA local entities and destination entities for secondary operators based on actual conditions as in initial configuration. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

570


155 Configuring RAN Sharing NOTE

If a BSC needs multiple OSPs to communicate with operators, configure M3UA local entities for secondary operators.

e.

Add the A interface and Gb interface data for secondary operators as in initial configuration. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Operator Name to the name of a secondary operator and set other parameters to appropriate values. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > SGSN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Operator Name to the name of a secondary operator and set other parameters to appropriate values. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > NSE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Operator Name to the name of a secondary operator and set other parameters to appropriate values.

2.

Configure the BTS data. – Transfer cells of the primary operator to secondary operators. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) for a specific target BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES). NOTE

For details about how to configure independent resource transmission for operators, see 158 Configuring Abis Independent Transmission.

b.

If a PTP BVC has been configured, Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete PTP BVCs in a cell.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Operator Name set to the name of a secondary operator. NOTE

When a cell has been configured with neighboring cells, delete the existing neighbor relationships before changing the operator of the cell.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

d.

If a BSC uses multiple OSPs to communicate with operators, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Relation between Cell and OSP; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with OSP Code set to the OPC of the BSC assigned by a secondary operator.

e.

After Handover Between Operators Allow is set to YES(Yes), adjust neighbor relationship between cells of different operators. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

571



f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add PTP BVCs from cells to SGSNs of secondary operators.

– Configure new cells for secondary operators. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. a.



b.

(Optional) Add a radio frequency unit (RFU) for the BTS as in initial configuration.

c.

Configure the cell data and the binding relationship between cells and BTSs, and between logical TRXs and physical TRX modules, channel information, attributes and neighbor relationship of TRXs as in initial configuration. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of a secondary operator and set other parameters based on the secondary operator information.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add PTP BVCs from cells to SGSNs of secondary operators.

– Configure new BTSs for operators to share. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. a.

Add a BTS and configure the related device data as in initial configuration.

b.



l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

c.

Add transmission-related data as in initial configuration.

d.

Configure the cell data and the binding relationship between cells and BTSs, and between logical TRXs and physical TRX modules, channel information, attributes and neighbor relationship of TRXs as in initial configuration. In this step, set Operator Name to the name of a secondary operator and set other parameters based on the secondary operator information.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add PTP BVCs from cells.

f.



572



1.

Get two test MSs ready: MS1 and MS2. MS1 belongs to operator A, and MS2 belongs to operator B.

2.

Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing on the LMT with Trace Type set to RSL. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

3.

Initiate A-interface CS message tracing on the LMT with Trace Type set to BSSAP. For details, see Tracing Messages on the A Interface.

4.

Enable MS1 to camp on cell1 and make a successful call to a fixed-line phone. Check the tracing results of cell1. Expected result: The complete MOC signaling procedure of MS1 is displayed.

5.

Enable MS2 to camp on cell2 and make a successful call to a fixed-line phone. Check the tracing results of cell2. Expected result: The complete MOC signaling procedure of MS2 is displayed.

6.

Initiate Um-interface PS message tracing on the LMT for cell1 and cell2. For details, see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

7.

Enable MS1 to perform PS services in cell1, and check Um-interface PS message trace results in cell1. Expected result: The signaling procedure for PS services of MS1 is displayed.

8.

Enable MS2 to perform PS services in cell2, and check Um-interface PS message trace results in cell2. Expected result: The signaling procedure for PS services of MS2 is displayed.

l


Disable the BTS data. – Transfer cells of secondary operators to the primary operator.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

If a PTP BVC has been configured, Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to PTP BVCs from cells to SGSNs of secondary operators.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Operator Name set to the name of the primary operator.

c.

If a BSC uses multiple OSPs to communicate with operators, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLOSPMAP (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Relation between Cell and OSP; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with OSP Code set to the OPC of the BSC assigned by the primary operator.

d.

After Handover Between Operators Allow is set to YES(Yes), adjust neighbor relationships between cells of different operators. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add PTP BVCs from cells to SGSNs of primary operators. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

573



f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) for a specific target BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to NO(NO).

– Delete cells of secondary operators. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click Cell > Delete Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Deleting GSM Cells in Batches) to delete the secondary operator cells.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) for a specific target BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to NO(NO).

– Delete the shared BTS.

2.

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Deactivate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate a target BTS.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Delete BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete the target BTS.

Disable the BSC data. a.

Delete the secondary operator information, DSPs, M3UA destination entities, CN nodes, A interface data, and Gb interface data involved in BSC data configuration.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support RAN Sharing to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activating BSS Sharing*/ //Enabling RAN Sharing SET BSCBASIC: SptRanSharing=YES; //Configuring parameters related to BTS sharing SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES; //Deleting the original PTP BVCs for a cell RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10; //Modifying the operator information MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPNAME="B"; //Modifying the Cell-OSP mapping MOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPC=H'000A12; //Adding PTP BVCs for a cell ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2; /*Deactivating BSS Sharing*/ //Deleting PTP BVCs in cells of secondary operators RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=10; //Modifying the operator information

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


574



MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPNAME="A"; //Modifying the Cell-OSP mapping MOD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, OPC=H'000B00; //Adding PTP BVCs for a cell ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=11, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2; //Disabling RAN Sharing for a BTS SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=NO; //Disabling RAN Sharing SET BSCBASIC: SptRanSharing=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


575



156

Configuring MOCN Shared Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The features GBFD-117401 MSC Pool and GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool have been configured before this feature is activated. – GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing is mutually exclusive with the MOCN Shared Cell feature. – GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) is mutually exclusive with the MOCN Shared Cell feature. – The single-user dynamic measurement function in the GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation) feature is mutually exclusive with the neighboring cell filtering function in the MOCN Shared Cell feature.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – If MS routing is determined by the CN, the list of VLRs in which an MS is allowed to roam needs to be configured on the HLR, or the list of LAIs in which an MS is allowed to roam needs to be configured on the MSC server. – Operator have enabled the features MSC Pool and SGSN Pool in their networks. – MSCs or SGSNs that belong to different operators are configured with different Network Resource Indication (NRI) values with the same length. – It is recommended that CNs of different operators use the same transmission over the A or Gb interface to connect the shared BSC. – The Abis transmission bandwidth is shared by all operators in a network with MOCN Shared Cell enabled.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


576



– To resolve the incorrect network name display on MSs, MSs support the Network Identity and Time Zone (NITZ) feature. – The equivalent PLMN function is recommended on the CN side. In scenarios where an MOCN cell is adjacent to a private cell, if these two cells correspond to different PLMNs, enabling the equivalent PLMN function prevents subscribers from periodically reselecting to the PLMN corresponding to the private cell after these subscribers access the MOCN cell and therefore reduces the power consumption of the MS.

Context The BSS sharing function enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basis while using their respective core network (CN) equipment. With this feature, different operators cannot share the same cell. The MOCN shared cell function, however, enables multiple operators to share BSS equipment on a per cell basis while using their respective CN equipment. Table 156-1 Data preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

MOCN Switch

MocnCtrl

If this parameter is set to CNSEL (CN Select), the proportion of subscribers distributed in the network of each operator is determined by the CN. If this parameter is set to BSCSEL (BSC Select), the proportion of subscribers distributed in the network of each operator is determined by the BSC.

Engineering design

Routing Sharing Area Code

Srac

N/A

Engineering design

Routing Sharing Area Description

SracDscrpt

N/A

Engineering design

Location Area Record Index

LaOpIndex

N/A

Engineering design

MCC

MCC

N/A



Data Source

577



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

MNC

MNC

Remarks (Configuration Principle for Different Scenarios) You are advised to set this parameter to a new public land mobile network (PLMN) identifier. Currently, only one PLMN identifier can be broadcast in a GSM cell. If the PLMN identifiers for two operators are 25001 and 25002 respectively, the PLMN identifier to be broadcast in a shared GSM network with MOCN Shared Cell enabled can either be the new one (for example, 25003) or an old one (25001 or 25002).

Data Source Radio network planning (Negotiated with the peer end)

Whether to use the new PLMN identifier depends on whether the forbidden PLMN list EFFPLMN is available in the SIM cards of served subscribers. If the forbidden PLMN list is available in SIM cards of subscribers served by an operator and the PLMN identifier of the other operator is contained in the list, the new PLMN identifier must be used. For example, if 25002 is contained in the forbidden PLMN list in the SIM cards of the operator whose PLMN identifier is 25001, 25002 must not be used as the new PLMN identifier to be broadcast. Otherwise, MSs that use the PLMN identifier 25001 cannot access any service because they will never register with PLMNs whose identifier is 25002. Cell LAC

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

LAC

N/A



578


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Operator Name 1

OPNAME1

N/A


Operator Name 2

OPNAME2

N/A


Operator Name 3

OPNAME3

N/A


Routing Sharing Area Record Index

SraLaMapIndex

N/A

Engineering design

MOCN Sharing Cell

MocnCmCell



IMSI Segment Index

ImsiGrpIndex

N/A

Engineering design

Description of the IMSI segment

ImsiGrpDscrpt

N/A

Engineering design

Start IMSI value

ImsiMin

N/A

Engineering design

End IMSI value

ImsiMax

N/A

Engineering design

Subscriber Category Index

UsrCatIndex

N/A

Engineering design

Rate of Operator 1

OpShare1

N/A


Rate of Operator 2

OpShare2

N/A



Data Source

579


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Rate of Operator 3

OpShare3

N/A


IMSI Category Index

ImsiMapIndex

N/A

Engineering design

Handover Sharing Area

SHAC

N/A

Engineering design

Operator Name

OPNAME

N/A


Handover Sharing Area Description

SHACDscrpt

N/A

Engineering design

Handover Sharing Area Record Index

ShaIndex

N/A

Engineering design

Ignore LAC

IgnorLac

N/A


Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List

CSScnIdHoFilter

Recommended value: YES (Yes)

Engineering design

Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List

PSScnIdHoFilter

Recommended value: NO(No)

Engineering design

Re-Routing Occasion

ReDirectOpt

N/A

Engineering design


Data Source

580



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Re-Route Cause Value

CauseVal

This parameter is carried by the Location Updating Reject, Routing Area Updating Reject, and Attach Reject messages as defined in 3GPP TS 24008.

Engineering design

Re-Route Cause Value Index

CauseRkIdx

N/A

Engineering design

Add Frequency Using PMO

PMOAddFreqAllow

Set this parameter to OFF(Off).


N(U) in Attach Request

ModifyAttReqNu

The N(U) value needs to be modified for rerouting an Attach Request message. The value of this parameter is determined by the SGSN connected to the BSC. If the N(U) value in an Attach Request message does not need to be modified, set this parameter to 512.


Setting this parameter to 512 means that the N(U) value in an Attach Request message cannot be modified.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Configure the BSC data by referring to BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. a.

When configuring operator information for the BSC, all BSC-shared secondary operators must be configured. The MSC Pool and SGSN Pool features must be enabled.

b.

When configuring destination signaling points (DSPs), all DSPs of the BSC must be configured.

c.

In IP transmission mode, when configuring M3UA destination entities, all M3UA destination entities of the BSC must be configured.

d.

When configuring the A and Gb interfaces, the A and Gb interface data for all operators must be configured. It is recommended that CNs of different operators use the same transmission over the A or Gb interface to connect the shared BSC. When configuring CN nodes, all CN nodes used by each operator must be configured. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

581



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MOCN Switch to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL(BSC Select).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Routing Sharing Area; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Routing Sharing Area Code and Routing Sharing Area Description to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD LAOPMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > LA-Operators Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mapping between LAs and operators. In this step, set Location Area Record Index, MCC, MNC, Cell LAC, Operator Name 1, Operator Name 2, and Operator Name 3 to appropriate values. NOTE

The names of all the operators that share BSS equipment must be configured.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SRALAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > SRA-LA Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mapping between shared routing areas and LAs. In this step, set Routing Sharing Area Record Index, Routing Sharing Area Code, MCC, MNC, and LAC to appropriate values.

6.

Configure the BTS data. For details about how to configure the BTS data, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. When configuring the data for a shared cell, set MOCN Shared Cell to YES(Yes), configure PLMN and LAC information as planned, and configure PTP BVCs from the cell to all operators that share the cell.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Subscriber IMSI Segment; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IMSI segment. In this step, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI segment, Start IMSI value, and End IMSI value to appropriate values.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USRCAT (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Subscriber route category; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a subscriber route category. In this step, set Subscriber Category Index, Operator Name 1, Rate of Operator 1, Operator Name 2, Rate of Operator 2, Operator Name 3, and Rate of Operator 3 to appropriate values.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISRAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Routing category of an IMSI segment; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the routing category of an IMSI segment. In this step, set IMSI Category Index, Routing Sharing Area Code, IMSI Segment Index, and Subscriber Category Index to appropriate values.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Handover Sharing Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a shared handover area. In this step, set Handover Sharing Area, Operator Name, and Handover Sharing Area Description to appropriate values. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


582



11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHALAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Mapping Between Handover Sharing Area and Location Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mapping between shared handover areas and the LAs. In this step, set Handover Sharing Area Record Index, Handover Sharing Area, MCC, MNC, Cell LAC, and Ignore LAC to appropriate values. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to configure parameters for neighboring cell filtering based on inter-operator handover and the rerouting occasion parameter. In this step, set Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List, Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List, and Re-Routing Occasion to appropriate values. 13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD RDRTCAUSE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Re-Route Cause; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a rerouting cause. In this step, set Re-Route Cause Value, Re-Route Cause Value Index to appropriate values. 14. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Add Frequency Using PMO set to an appropriate value. 15. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with N(U) in Attach Request set to an appropriate value. l

Verification Procedure (CS Services) 1.

On the BSC LMT, click the Trace tab.

2.

In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services. Doubleclick Single User CS Trace.

3.

In this displayed Single User CS Trace dialog box, set Trace Object Symbol Type to IMSI and Trace Interface Type to A Interface. Then, click Submit. The CS message tracing for a single subscriber function requires subscribers' data, such as IMSI. This function provides an anonymous data processing method. For details, see section Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber in BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide. You are advised to comply with local laws when executing the task and take ample measures to fully protect subscribers' personal data, such as setting User Identity Anonymity Switch to ON(On) and deleting the folder that saves tracing records after you finish processing data.

4.

In a shared cell, use a dual-roaming MS to access the network and perform CS services.

5.

View the traced single-subscriber CS messages for this MS. Expected result: The dual-roaming MS accesses the network of an operator according to the routing rules of MOCN Shared Cell. Location update-related signaling is traced in the singlesubscriber CS message tracing for this operator.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


583



The following is an example: MOCN Shared Cell is used by operators A and B. The percentage of routing of operator 1 is 30%, and that of operator 2 is 70%. If the value for the last two digits of the dual-roaming MS IMSI is less than 30, location update-related signaling is traced in the single-subscriber CS message tracing for operator A. If the value for the last two digits of the dual-roaming MS IMSI is greater than or equal to 30, location update-related signaling is traced in the single-subscriber CS message tracing for operator B. l

Verification Procedure (PS Services) 1.

On the BSC LMT, click the Trace tab.

2.

In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree, choose Trace > GSM Services. Doubleclick Single User PS Trace.

3.

In this displayed Single User PS Trace dialog box, set Trace Object Symbol Type to IMSI and Trace Interface Type to Gb Interface. Then, click Submit. The PS message tracing for a single subscriber function requires subscribers' personal data, such as IMSI. This function provides an anonymous data processing method. For details, see section Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber in BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide. You are advised to comply with local laws when executing the task and take ample measures to fully protect subscribers' personal data, such as setting User Identity Anonymity Switch to ON(On) and deleting the folder that saves tracing records after you finish processing data.

4.

In a shared cell, use a dual-roaming MS to access the network and perform PS services.

5.

View the traced single-subscriber PS messages for this MS. Expected result: The dual-roaming MS accesses the network of an operator according to the routing rules of MOCN Shared Cell. Access-related signaling of this MS is traced in the singlesubscriber PS message tracing for this operator. The following is an example: MOCN Shared Cell is used by operators A and B. The percentage of routing of operator 1 is 30%, and that of operator 2 is 70%. If the value for the last two digits of the dual-roaming MS IMSI is less than 30, accessrelated signaling of this MS is traced in the single-subscriber PS message tracing for operator A. If the value for the last two digits of the dual-roaming MS IMSI is greater than or equal to 30, access-related signaling of this MS is traced in the single-subscriber PS message tracing for operator B.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MOCN Switch to CLOSE(Close), Filter CS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List and Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

584



Filter PS Based on Operator Neighboring Cell List to NO(No), Re-Routing Occasion to NOTREDIR(Not Redirect). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to modify PLMN and LAC information. In this step, set MOCN Sharing Cell to NO(No).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete PTP BVCs from the shared cell to all secondary operators.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SRALAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > SRA-LA Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the mapping between shared RAs and the LAs.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV LAOPMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > LA-Operators Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the mapping between LAs and operators.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SRA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Routing Sharing Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the shared RA.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IMSISRAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Routing category of an IMSI segment; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the routing category of the IMSI segment.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IMSIGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Subscriber IMSI Segment; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the subscriber IMSI segment.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USRCAT (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Subscriber route category; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the subscriber route category.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SHALAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Mapping Between Handover Sharing Area and Location Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the mapping between shared handover areas and LAs. 11. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SHA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Handover Sharing Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the shared handover area. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV RDRTCAUSE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Re-Route Cause; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the rerouting cause. 13. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPSSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PS Software Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


585



Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Add Frequency Using PMO set to OFF(Off). 14. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with N(U) in Attach Request set to its original value. 15. Delete the initially configured BSC data such as secondary operators, DSPs, M3UA determination entities, CN nodes, and A and Gb interface data. ----End

Example /*Activating MOCN Shared Cell*/ //Enabling the MOCN control switch on the BSC side SET OTHSOFTPARA: MocnCtrl=CNSEL; //Adding a shared RA ADD SRA: Srac=0, SracDscrpt="Srac 0"; //Adding the mapping between LAs and operators ADD LAOPMAP: LaOpIndex=0, MCC="460", MNC="30", LAC=h'3030, OPNAME1="OperatorA", OPNAME2="OperatorB"; ADD LAOPMAP: LaOpIndex=1, MCC="460", MNC="30", LAC=h'3040, OPNAME1="OperatorA", OPNAME2="OperatorB"; //Adding the mapping between shared RAs and the LAs ADD SRALAMAP: SraLaMapIndex=0, Srac=0, MCC="460", MNC="30", LAC=h'3030; ADD SRALAMAP: SraLaMapIndex=1, Srac=0, MCC="460", MNC="30", LAC=h'3040; //Adding an IMSI segment ADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0, ImsiGrpDscrpt="ImsiGrp1", ImsiMin="460101234000000", ImsiMax="460101234999999"; ADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=1, ImsiGrpDscrpt="ImsiGrp2", ImsiMin="460205678000000", ImsiMax="460205678999999"; //Adding a subscriber route category ADD USRCAT: UsrCatIndex=0, OPNAME1="OperatorA", OpShare1=70, OPNAME2="OperatorB", OpShare2=30; ADD USRCAT: UsrCatIndex=1, OPNAME1="OperatorA", OpShare1=40, OPNAME2="OperatorB", OpShare2=60; //Adding the routing category of an IMSI segment ADD IMSISRAMAP: ImsiMapIndex=0, Srac=0, ImsiGrpIndex=1, UsrCatIndex=1; ADD IMSISRAMAP: ImsiMapIndex=1, Srac=0, ImsiGrpIndex=0, UsrCatIndex=0; //Adding a shared handover area ADD SHA: SHAC=0, OPNAME="OperatorA", SHACDscrpt="OperatorA Share Ho Area"; ADD SHA: SHAC=1, OPNAME="OperatorB", SHACDscrpt="OperatorB Share Ho Area"; //Adding the mapping between shared handover areas and LAs ADD SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=0, SHAC=0, MCC="460", MNC="30", LAC=h'3030, IgnorLac=NO; ADD SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=1, SHAC=1, MCC="460", MNC="30", LAC=h'3040, IgnorLac=NO; //Configuring parameters for neighboring cell filtering based on interoperator handover and the rerouting occasion parameter SET OTHSOFTPARA: CSScnIdHoFilter=YES, PSScnIdHoFilter=NO, ReDirectOpt=ALL; //Adding a rerouting cause ADD RDRTCAUSE: CauseVal=17, CauseRkIdx=0; //Configuring the Add Frequency Using PMO switch SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: PMOAddFreqAllow=OFF; //Modifying the N(U) value in an Attach Request message SET OTHSOFTPARA: ModifyAttReqNu =512;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


586



/*Deactivating MOCN Shared Cell*/ //Disabling the MOCN control switch on the BSC side SET OTHSOFTPARA: MocnCtrl=CLOSE, ReDirectOpt=NOTREDIR, CSScnIdHoFilter=NO, PSScnIdHoFilter=NO; //Disabling the MOCN control switch on the cell side MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MCC=460, MNC=20, LAC= H'1214, MocnCmCell=NO; MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, MCC=460, MNC=20, LAC= H'1214, MocnCmCell=NO; //Removing PTP BVCs from the shared cell to all secondary operators RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=2; RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=11, BVCI=22; //Removing the mapping between shared RAs and the LAs RMV SRALAMAP: SraLaMapIndex=0; RMV SRALAMAP: SraLaMapIndex=1; //Removing the mapping between LAs and operators RMV LAOPMAP: LaOpIndex=0; RMV LAOPMAP: LaOpIndex=1; //Removing the shared RA RMV SRA: Srac=0; //Removing the routing category of the IMSI segment RMV IMSISRAMAP: ImsiMapIndex=0; RMV IMSISRAMAP: ImsiMapIndex=1; //Removing the IMSI segment RMV IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0; RMV IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=1; //Removing the subscriber route category RMV USRCAT: UsrCatIndex=0; RMV USRCAT: UsrCatIndex=1; //Removing the mapping between shared handover areas and LAs RMV SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=0; RMV SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=1; //Removing the shared handover area RMV SHA: SHAC=0; RMV SHA: SHAC=1; //Removing the rerouting cause RMV RDRTCAUSE: CauseVal=0; //Disabling the Add Frequency Using PMO switch SET BSCPSSOFTPARA: PMOAddFreqAllow=OFF; //Modifying the N(U) value in an Attach Request message SET OTHSOFTPARA: ModifyAttReqNu =512;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


587



157

Configuring IMSI-Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – A test MS (MS1) is available and its IMSI is recorded.

l

Dependency on Other Features – This feature does not depend on other features.

l


l

Others – The Common Id and Handover Request messages sent by the MSC need to carry IMSI. – A BTS is configured with two test cells (CELL1 and CELL2) of the same operator. These cells are in the normal state and support the GPRS function. – Idle channels are available in CELL1. CELL1 and CELL2 are neighboring cells of each other. The two cells are in different location areas.

Context According to the network planning and service requirements, an operator can divide the network into multiple areas (called handover shared areas) and restrict the service area of an MS by configuring the mapping between the IMSI range and the handover shared area.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set IMSI Handover Switch to YES(Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

588


l


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSIGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Subscriber IMSI Segment; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IMSI segment. In this step, set IMSI Segment Index, Description of the IMSI segment, Start IMSI value, and End IMSI value according to the actual situation (assume that IMSI of MS1 is within the configured IMSI segment).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Handover Sharing Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a handover shared area. In this step, set Handover Sharing Area, Operator Name, and Handover Sharing Area Description according to the actual situation (assume that Operator Name is the name of the operator of CELL1).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SHALAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Mapping Between Handover Sharing Area and Location Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the mapping between a handover shared area and a location area. In this step, set Handover Sharing Area Record Index, Handover Sharing Area, MCC, MNC, and Cell LAC according to the actual situation (assume that MCC, MNC, and Cell LAC are those of CELL2).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMSISHAMAP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > IMSI Support Handover Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IMSI-supported handover area. In this step, set IMSI Index of Handover Sharing Area Record, Handover Sharing Area, and IMSI Segment Index according to the settings specified in Step 2 and Step 3.

Verification Procedure (CS Services) 1.

MS1 camps on CELL1 to call a fixed-line phone. The call is set up successfully.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor 2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FHO. In this step, set Object Type to CELL (Cell), Handover Scope to OUTCELL(Outgoing cell), and Cell Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1.

4.

On the LMT, start the message tracing over the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. Select RSL in the Trace Type area.

5.

On the RSL tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to those of CELL1 and CELL2. Then, click Submit. The Abis Interface CS Trace message interface is displayed. Run steps 1 through 5 to enable the MS to perform a handover from CELL1 to CELL2. Expected result: – If idle channels are unavailable in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abis interface of CELL1 indicate that handover cannot be performed and measurement reports are reported continuously. – If an idle channel is available in CELL2, the CS tracing messages on the Abis interface of CELL2 indicate that the incoming internal inter-cell handover procedure for MS1 is performed properly and measurement reports are reported normally.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Verification Procedure (PS Services) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

589



1.

MS1 camps on CELL1 and processes PS services.

2.

On the LMT, start the PS message tracing for a single user by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber. Set IMSI to the IMSI of MS1.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS. In this step, set Cell Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE. In this step, set Cell Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Network Operation Mode to NC2(NC2).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By index), Source Cell Index to the index of CELL1, and Neighbor 2G Cell Index to the index of CELL2.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set Cell Index or Cell Name to the index or name of CELL1; set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit) and MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold to 2.

7.

Move the MS to a location where CELL2 has better coverage than CELL1. Then, check the PS tracing messages of MS1. Expected result: The signaling procedure for cell reselection of the MS from CELL1 to CELL2 is displayed.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set IMSI Handover Switch to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Turning on the IMSI-based handover switch SET OTHSOFTPARA: ImsiHoCtrl=YES; //Adding a subscriber IMSI segment ADD IMSIGRP: ImsiGrpIndex=0, ImsiGrpDscrpt="IMSI", ImsiMin="460000000000000", ImsiMax="460100000000000"; //Adding a handover sharing area ADD SHA: SHAC=1, OPNAME="OP1", SHACDscrpt="Share1"; //Configuring mapping between a handover sharing area and a location area ADD SHALAMAP: ShaIndex=0, SHAC=1, MCC="460", MNC="133", LAC=H'1234; //Adding an IMSI-supported handover area ADD IMSISHAMAP: ImsiShaMapIndex=0, SHAC=1, ImsiGrpIndex=0; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Turning off the IMSI-based handover switch SET OTHSOFTPARA: ImsiHoCtrl=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


590



158

Configuring Abis Independent Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-118701 BSS Sharing has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context In a BSS sharing network, multiple telecom operators share a base station and associated auxiliary devices. Cells of different telecom operators can reside under one base station, but each cell can only belong to one telecom operator. The transmission resources under the base station can be shared among telecom operators or exclusively used by their respective telecom operators. In Abis over TDM mode, transmission resources can be configured independently based on only the level of an E1 port. In Abis over IP mode, transmission resources can be configured independently based on only the level of logical resources.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Activation Procedure (TDM Transmission) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Deactivate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the target BTS.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

591



Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable independent transmission over the Abis interface for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to NO(NO). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the connection between the BTS and the BSC. In this step, set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to BSC, set Operator Name to the name of the operator that the BTS belongs, and set other parameters to appropriate values. NOTE

If multiple operators share one BTS or if there are multiple BTSs, run Step 3 repeatedly to add the connection between each BTS and the BSC for each operator.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Timeslot Management > Idle Timeslot; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), set BTS Index (Not required on the CME) and Cabinet Group No. to appropriate values, set Operator Name to the name of the operator that the BTS belongs, and set Idle TS Count to the number of idle timeslots for the operator. NOTE

If multiple operators share the idle timeslots on an E1 cable, run Step 4 repeatedly to set the number of idle timeslots for each operator.

5.

l


Activation Procedure (IP Transmission) 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable independent transmission over the Abis interface for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to NO(NO).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPSEPINFO (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Separate Information for Operators; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index of Separate Information for Operators and the Count of the Operators Selected, set Transport Type to IP(IP), and set The type of operator to GSM(GSM). Then, based on the field configuration and number of operators, set Index of 1st Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 1st Operator, Load Threshold of 1st Operator, Index of 2nd Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 2nd Operator, Load Threshold of 2nd Operator, Index of 3rd Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 3rd Operator, Load Threshold of 3rd Operator, Index of 4th Operator, Bandwidth Ratio of 4th Operator and Load Threshold of 4th Operator to appropriate values. NOTE

The sum of bandwidth ratio of all the operators must be 100%.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


592


l


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Resource Management Mode to SHARE, Operator Separated Flag to ON(ON), and Operator Separated Index to the value set in Step 3. In addition, set the parameter related to an IP logical port in this step.

5.



Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPLOGICPORT to query Operator Separated Index.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OPSEPINFO to query the number of operators and operator index. In this step, set Index of Separate Information for Operators to the value displayed in Step 1.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPLOGICPORT to query the realtime bandwidth of an IP logical port. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., and Logic Port No. to appropriate values. Expected result: The realtime bandwidth of the IP logical port is displayed. Assume that the realtime bandwidth is A.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPLOGICPORT to query the realtime bandwidth of an IP logical port of a specified operator. In this step, set Subrack No., Slot No., Logic Port No., The type of operator, and CN Operator index to appropriate values. Expected result: Assume that two operators share an IP logical port for independent transmission over the Abis interface. The realtime bandwidth of operators 1 and 2 is X1 and X2 respectively. Then, X1 + X2 ≤ A.

5.


6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING to enable transmission over the Abis interface for a BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to YES(Yes).

7.


8.

Repeat Step 4. Expected result: A message is displayed, indicating that the information fails to be queried.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Deactivation Procedure (TDM Transmission) 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable transmission sharing for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to YES(Yes).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Operator Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

593



Name to the name of the primary operator and set other parameters to appropriate values. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Timeslot Management > Idle Timeslot; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the number of idle timeslots for the secondary operator to 0. In this step, set Idle TS Count to 0 and Operator Name to the name of the secondary operator. NOTE

If there are multiple secondary operators, run Step 4 repeatedly to release the idle timeslots for all secondary operators.

l

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIDLETS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Timeslot Management > Idle Timeslot; CME batch modification center: not supported) to return all idle timeslots to the primary operator. In this step, set Idle TS Count to the number of idle timeslots that the primary operator have and Operator Name to the name of the primary operator.

6.


Deactivation Procedure (IP Transmission) 1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSSHARING (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS RAN Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable transmission sharing for the BTS. In this step, set Sharing Allow to YES(YES) and Transmission Sharing Support to YES(Yes).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Logical Port; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Operator Separated Flag to OFF(OFF).

4.


----End

Example /*Activation procedure (TDM transmission)*/ //Deactivating a BTS //DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Enabling independent transmission over the Abis interface //SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=NO; //Adding a connection between BTS and BSC //ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=1, SN=14, PN=0, OPNAME="op1"; //Setting idle timeslots of the BTS //SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20, OPNAME="op1"; //Activating the BTS //ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; /*Activation procedure (IP transmission)*/

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


594



//Deactivating a BTS //DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Enabling independent transmission over the Abis interface //SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=NO; //Configuring operator separation parameters //ADD OPSEPINFO: OPSEPINDEX=0, OPCOUNT=TWO, TYPE=IP, OPTYPE=GSM, OPINDEX1=1, BWRATIO1=30, OPINDEX2=2, BWRATIO2=70; //Configuring an IP logical port //ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=10, BT=GOUa, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=ON, OPSEPINDEX=0; //Activating the BTS //ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; /*Deactivation procedure (TDM transmission)*/ //Deactivating the BTS //DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Disabling independent transmission over the Abis interface //SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=YES; //Modifying the connection of the BTS to the primary operator MOD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=1, SN=14, PN=0, OPNAME="OP1"; //Setting the number of idle timeslots for the secondary operator to 0 //SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=0, OPNAME="op2"; //Returning all idle timeslots to the primary operator //SET BTSIDLETS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CGN=1, TSCOUNT=20, OPNAME="op1"; //Activating the BTS //ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; /*Deactivation procedure (IP transmission)*/ //Deactivating the BTS //DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Disabling independent transmission over the Abis interface //SET BTSSHARING: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SHARINGALLOW=YES, SptTRMShare=YES; //Turing off the operator separation switch //MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=10, BT=GOUa, LPN=0, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; //Activating the BTS //ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


595



159

Configuring PICO/Compact BTS

Automatic Configuration and Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning and GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The matching version of the M2000 is available. – The initial parameters required for BTS automatic planning algorithm are set in online mode through the M2000 client. – Automatic frequency optimization tasks are created by using the M2000.

Context l

The compact BTS refers to the BTS3900E. If the feature is applied to the BTS3900E, a maximum of two carriers can be configured and the cells of the BTS3900E are configured in O2 mode.

l

The PICO refers to the BTS3900B.

l

After being installed and powered on, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E automatically connect to the BSC with the network automatic detection feature. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS, and then performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS39000B and BTS3900E. This feature can be applied in newly deployed or swapped

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


596



sites. By using this feature, site deployment duration is decreased and operator intervention is reduced. As a result, OM costs are reduced. l

Before the automatic planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm must be configured in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS adjacency information, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS GSM automatic planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Product Documentation.

l

If the BSC version is V900R012 or later, the BSC supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 128 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode, and the M2000 supports the automatic configuration and automatic planning of 512 BTS3900Es or BTS3900Bs in parallel mode.

l

In the BSC version is V900R014 or later, the M2000 determines the location where a BTS in automatic planning mode is installed, avoiding using the BTS in a location that the operator does not allow.

l

Activation procedure

Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to establish the BTS in automatic planning mode. The established BTS is enabled with the automatic planning feature by default. The automatic planning algorithm switch and automatic optimization algorithm switch are set to ON. NOTE

l The established BTS that is in automatic planning mode enables the automatic planning feature automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first automatic planning scan succeeds, the BTS does not enable the automatic planning feature automatically after the BTS is powered off again or reset. If the site data needs to be planned again, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO. l For the BTS3900E, set BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM(BTS3900E GSM), and set Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. l For the BTS3900B, set BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM(BTS3900B GSM), and set Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch, CGI and RAC Plan Switch, and Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON(ON). Then, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically.

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to enable the location control function for a BTS in automatic planning mode. In this step, set Relocation Restricted to ON(ON).


597



CAUTION l If the CGIs of all neighboring cells under the BTS are changed, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to restart auto planning for the BTS. In this step. set Relocation Allowed During Replanning to YES(YES). Otherwise, the M2000 determines that the BTS location is changed because all neighboring cells under this BTS are changed, causing an automatic planning failure. l If a BTS in automatic planning mode is relocated to an area with neighboring cells from an area without neighboring cells, the M2000 fails to determine the BTS location. However, the BTS can access the network properly during automatic planning. l If a BTS in automatic planning mode is relocated to an area without neighboring cells from an area with neighboring cells, run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to restart auto planning for the BTS. In this step. set Relocation Allowed During Replanning to YES(YES). Otherwise, the M2000 determines that the BTS location is changed because all neighboring cells under this BTS are changed, causing an automatic planning failure. 3. l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG to check whether BTS Configuration Mode is set to ON(ON).

2.

Optional: If the location control function for a BTS in automatic planning mode is required, run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG to check whether Relocation Restricted is set to ON(ON).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG. In this step, set BTS Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

CAUTION 1. After BTS Configuration Mode is set to NORMAL(NORMAL), all the automatic planning and automatic optimization switches are deactivated. 2. The deactivation of the feature during the automatic planning will result in the reset of the BTS. 2.

Optional: If the location control function for a BTS in automatic planning mode is not required, run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG. In this step, set Relocation Restricted to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure //Step 1 Add a BTS in auto-planning mode. The added BTS is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. The auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set to ON. ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="btsname01", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


598



SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.30.2", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="10.161.10.1", MAINDEVTAB="tab01", SRANMODE=NOT_SUPPORT, CELLNAME="cellname01", TYPE=DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=1, CLKPRTTYPE=HW_DEFINED, MASTERIPADDR="139.139.139.1"; SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="btsname01", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, CGIRACSWITCH=ON, FQBSICSWITCH=ON, NBRCELLSWITCH=ON, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=ON; //Step 2 Activate the BTS. ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //(Optional) Enabling the location control function for a BTS in automatic planning mode SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="btsname01", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE= BTS3900B_GSM, POSITIONRESTRICTSWITCH=ON; //Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="btsname01"; //Deactivation procedure ///Disabling automatic configuration and planning SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="btsname01", CFGMODE=NORMAL; //(Optional) Disabling the location control function for a BTS in automatic planning mode SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="btsname01", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE= BTS3900B_GSM, POSITIONRESTRICTSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


599


160 Configuring PICO Synchronization

160

Configuring PICO Synchronization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Neighboring cells of the BTS3900B are available and the neighboring relations are configured. – This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.

l


l


Context l


l

In the GSM network, the 13 MHz frequency synchronization is mandatory among multiple BTSs to maintain the network QoS, such as the MS handover success rate. The clock synchronization function of the BTS3900B implements the Um frequency synchronization with the neighboring macro BTSs through software. The output synchronization clock is 13 MHz.

l

After the feature is activated, you do not need to configure a clock server for the BTS3900B.

l


Procedure 1.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches), and then set Clock Type to UM_CLK(Um Clock).

Verification procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

600


l

160 Configuring PICO Synchronization

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSCLK to check whether the correct clock source is configured. Expected result: Clock Type is UM_CLK(Um Clock).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSATTR to check whether the clock source is available. Expected result: Clock attribute is Available.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches), and then set Clock Type to INT_CLK(Internal Clock).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, //Verification procedure LST BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, DSP BTSATTR: OBJTP=SITE, //Deactivation procedure SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

BTSID=0, ClkType=UM_CLK; BTSID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL; IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SITEATTR=OPSTAT&CLKATTR; BTSID=0, ClkType=INT_CLK;


601


161 Configuring PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

161

Configuring PICO Dual-band Autoplanning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The M2000 supports the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature.

Context l

The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is license-controlled.

l

The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. Pico auto-planning indicates that the BTS3900B scans the uplink and downlink frequencies of operators according to the frequency band capability of the BTS3900B. The M2000 evaluates the interference condition of each frequency according to the scanning result. In addition, considering the neighboring relationship of the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the frequency of the BTS3900B. PICO Dual-band Auto-planning supports the 900 MHz/1800 MHz and 850 MHz/1900 MHz dual-band scenarios on the basis of the original single-band auto-planning function. PICO auto-planning helps operators to implement fast network deployment and flexible network adjustment and reduce the workload of manual configuration.

l

Before the auto-planning, the following parameters used for the planning algorithm should be set in advance on the M2000 client: operator frequency data, BTS neighboring relations, BSIC data, and CGI resource data. You can view the progress and result of the BTS3900B

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


602



GSM auto-planning and perform data analysis and fault location on the M2000 client. For details, see the M2000 Product Documentation. l

The auto-planning function is mostly used in the site setup scenario. During the execution of the auto-planning function, the services within the network coverage of the BTS3900B are disrupted.

l


Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the auto-planning BTS3900B, and set Is Support SingleRAN Mode to SUPPORT(Support). The added BTS3900B is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition, the auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch are set to ON, and the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is set to NO(NO) by default. NOTE

l The added BTS3900B that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan succeeds, the BTS3900B does not enable the auto-planning function automatically during the subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needs to be enabled again, Run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch, auto-optimization algorithm switch and Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch according to the actual conditions. Then, Run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN to plan the site data automatically. The Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch has impacts on the auto-planning result. Operators can determine whether to enable the switch according to the actual conditions. For details, see the following note. l Operators can select appropriate planning modes to perform auto-planning according to the actual conditions. The BTS3900B supports the following planning modes: l If the BTS3900B is configured with one or two TRXs in band A, the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch is invalid. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 or O2 site in band A according to the number of configured TRXs. l If the BTS3900B is configured with two TRXs and the two TRXs are in band A and band B respectively, the BTS3900B will scan the frequencies of band A and band B. The frequency bands and site types of the frequencies planned by the BTS3900B, however, vary with the status of the Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed switch. a. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to YES(YES): The M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the working frequency according to the reported scanning results of the two frequencies. The frequency band where the frequency exists is the working frequency band of the BTS3900B. The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O1 site in corresponding frequency bands b. Frequency Band Adaptation Allowed is set to NO(NO): The M2000 plans the BTS3900B as the O2 site in dual-band. The M2000 selects the BCCH frequencies in low frequency bands (such as 900 MHz or 850 MHz) and selects the TCH frequencies in low frequency bands or high frequency bands.

2. l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG aand check that BTS Configuration Mode is set to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

603


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

CAUTION The deactivation operation during the execution of the auto-planning function will result in the reset of the BTS3900B. ----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="pico", BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="18.18.18.150", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18", MAINDEVTAB="2102311045AB09000005", SRANMODE=SUPPORT, CELLNAME="gsm", TYPE=GSM900_DCS1800, MAXFQNUM=2, MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254"; SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FREQSELFADAPT=YES; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico"; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


604


162 Configuring PICO USB Encryption

162

Configuring PICO USB Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510604 PICO USB Encryption.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only BTS3900B supports this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The M2000 version supports the USB security protection tool.

Context l

A PICO BTS is also named BTS3900B.

l

When a newly deployed BTS3900B is locally commissioned by using a USB flash drive, the configuration file is stored in the USB flash drive as plain text. This file contains important configuration information, such as the IP addresses of network elements. If the information is saved as plain text, it may be stolen or disclosed.

l

When the PICO USB Encryption feature is introduced, the configuration file is encrypted by using an encryption software on the M2000 side and then is decrypted on the BTS side, ensuring information security.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Copy the configuration file DataCfg.xml to the PC where the M2000 client is installed and save the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config\DataCfg.xml directory. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

605


162 Configuring PICO USB Encryption NOTE

The USB security protection tool does not support file decryption. Therefore, the file must be backed up before being encrypted.

2.

Choose Start > All Programs > iManager M2000 Client > Start USB Protector Tool. The USB Protector Tool dialog box is displayed.

3.

Choose Setting > Set USB Root Directory, select D:\USB, and click OK.

4.

Choose Setting > Set Security Policies. The Set Security Policies dialog box is displayed. a.

Set Save Path to D:\USB\GBTS3900B.

b.

Set Encryption Algorithm and Integrity Algorithm based on your individual needs.

c.

Click OK.

5.

Choose File > Open, and select the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B \Config directory.

6.

Select IsEncrypted:Index. NOTE

In the file list area, if IsEncrypted:Index before a file is selected, the file is encrypted. Otherwise, only integrity protection is performed on the file.

l

l

7.

Click Execute Protect.

8.

Delete the source file in the USB flash drive and copy the GBTS3900B folder to the root directory of the USB flash drive.


Open the DataCfg.xml file in the D:\USB\GBTS3900B\Config directory. If garbled characters are displayed, the file is encrypted successfully.

2.

Connect the USB flash drive to the BTS3900B. The BTS3900B sets up links properly.

Deactivation Procedure N/A

----End

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


606


163 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode

163

Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Currently, the BTS3900B and BTS3900E support the sleeping mode feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The M2000 supports the PICO Sleeping Mode feature.

Context l

The PICO refers to the BTS3900B. The PICO Sleeping Mode feature helps to save the site energy by enabling or disabling the cells in a period. When the BTS3900B is used at night when the traffic is unavailable in the scenarios, such as offices, warehouses, and exhibition halls, users can specify the period for enabling or disabling the PICO cells, such as, 00:00 to 6:00 am. In this period, the power amplifiers of all the carriers (including BCCH carriers) in the cells are shut down.

l

When the PICO Sleeping Mode feature takes effect, the PICO cells do not provide radio network services.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Parameters for Dynamically Turning off Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), and then set Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING(Sleeping) and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

607


163 Configuring PICO Sleeping Mode NOTE

When Enable Turning Off Cell is set to SLEEPING(Sleeping), the BSC6900 disables the cell within the disabling period unconditionally and enables the cell within the enabling period unconditionally. Currently, the Enable Turning Off Cell parameter of only the BTS3900B and BTS3900E can be set to SLEEPING(Sleeping).

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING(Sleeping), and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is within the period specified by the two parameters.

2.

Wait for about five minutes and Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH(Dynamic Switch) to check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set to Yes, it indicates that the PICO Sleeping Mode feature is effective.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF, and then set Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified and Enable Turning Off Cell to SLEEPING(Sleeping), and set Dyn. Turning Off Cell Start Time and Dyn. Turning Off Cell Stop Time to ensure that the current time is beyond the period specified by the two parameters.

4.

Wait for about one minute and Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP GCELLSTAT, and then set Cell Attribute to DYNSWITCH(Dynamic Switch) to check the current status of the cell. If Cell Dynamic Switch of the verified cell is set to No, it indicates that the cell is enabled.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Parameters for Dynamically Turning off Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), and then set Enable Turning Off Cell to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=SLEEPING, TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME=10&00, TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME=12&00; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLDYNTURNOFF: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TURNOFFENABLE=DISABLE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


608



164

Configuring PICO Automatic Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The M2000 supports the PICO Automatic Optimization feature.

Context l

The PICO Automatic Optimization feature is license-controlled.

l

The Pico is also called the BTS3900B. During the operation of the BTS3900B, the automatic optimization task is created on the M2000 and the BTS3900Bs to be optimized and the counter thresholds are specified. When the working frequencies are severely interfered, the M2000 triggers the BTS3900B to restart the uplink and downlink frequency scan. In addition, the M2000 selects the working frequency with the minimum interference for the BTS3900B through the automatic optimization algorithm. Through automatic optimization of working frequencies, the BTS3900B can shield itself from the frequencies that are severely interfered. In this case, the communication quality within the coverage of the BTS3900B and the KPIs are improved significantly. In addition, the handover success rate of the MS in the coverage of the BTS3900B is increased and the call drop rate is reduced.

l

The progress and result of the PICO Automatic Optimization feature can be viewed on the M2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 Product Documentation.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


609



Procedure l


l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN), BTS Type to BTS3900B_GSM (BTS3900BGSM), and Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Then, set the related auto-planning algorithm switch and auto-optimization algorithm switch according to the actual conditions. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG and check that Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch is set to ON.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=ON; //Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900B_GSM, FQBSICOPTSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


610



165

Configuring PICO Transceiver Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510608 PICO Transceiver Redundancy.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Two radio frequency (RF) cards for transceiver redundancy must be work on the same frequency band. – This feature is supported by only the BTS3900B.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BTS3900B configured with two TRXs does not support this feature. – TRX switchovers are not allowed within five minutes after a BTS3900B is started successfully. – When a BTS3900B is interconnected to a Distributed Antenna System (DAS), the antenna of the DAS must be connected to the transmitting port of another antenna system for the BTS3900B before a TRX switchover is triggered.

Context l


l

This feature enables the standby RF card of a BTS3900B configured with a single TRX to take over the services of the active RF card when the active RF card is faulty, preventing service disruption.

l

PICO Transceiver Redundancy can be applied in the following scenarios: – No traffic is available on a BTS3900B for a long time.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


611



– MSs fail to access the network. – Voice quality is poor. – The RF Unit TX Channel Gain Out of Range alarm (alarm ID: 26520) and RF Unit Clock Problem alarm (alarm ID: 26538) are generated on a BTS3900B. – RF cards are faulty. Users can switch over TRXs to the standby RF card to restore services or improve service quality.

CAUTION A TRX switchover will lead to service interruption for less than three minutes.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRXBACKUP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > BTS TRX Backup Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported), and then set TRX Backup Switch to ON(ON). NOTE

This feature is disabled by default for a BTS3900B before delivery.

CAUTION After PICO Transceiver Redundancy is enabled, adding TRXs dynamically is not allowed. l

Verification procedure –

Verify TRX backup switch status.

1.

Click Trace on the LMT interface, and then double-click Abis Interface CS Trace. In the displayed Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, set Trace Mode to OML. Then, click Submit. The TRX backup status is displayed in Set Site Extend Attribute2 Ack.

–

Verify TRX switchover status. NOTE

Assume that TRX 0 is switched over from RF card 0 to RF card 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Click Device Maintenance on the LMT interface. The Device Maintenance dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click BSC under Device Navigation Tree, and then select the corresponding BTS. Then, observe the TRX status before the switchover on the right of BTS Device Panel. TRX 0 is configured on RF card 0, as shown in Figure 165-1.


612



Figure 165-1 TRX switchover status before switchover

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SWP GTRX to switch over TRX.

4.

Click Device Maintenance on the LMT interface. The Device Maintenance dialog box is displayed.

5.

Click BSC in Device Navigation Tree, and then select the corresponding BTS. Then, observe the TRX status after the switchover on the right of BTS Device Panel. TRX 0 is switched over to RF card 1, as shown in Figure 165-2. Figure 165-2 TRX switchover status after switchover

NOTE

If another switchover is performed, the TRX switchover status is restored to the status shown in Figure 165-1.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRXBACKUP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > BTS TRX Backup Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported), and then set TRX Backup Switch to OFF(OFF).


613



CAUTION If a TRX switchover is performed on a BTS3900B, the BTS3900B will reset automatically when TRX Backup Switch is set to OFF(OFF). ----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSTRXBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRXBPSW=ON; //Verification procedure SWP GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSTRXBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TRXBPSW=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


614



166

Configuring Weather Adaptive Power Management

This section describes how to manage a GBTS weather-adaptive energy conservation task on the M2000. You can perform operations such creating, modifying, starting, deleting, and viewing a task. After you create such a task and then start it on the M2000, the M2000 predicts the quantity of electricity to be generated on GBTS solar panels based on weather data, and then periodically generates power levels available to the GBTSs based on various types of information such as generated electricity, remaining electricity of batteries, and GBTS power consumption.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only BTS3900E supports this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – History weather data of the corresponding district is available. – The third-party system for uploading weather data properly communicates with the M2000 through FTP.

Procedure l


Choose Maintenance > Energy Power-Saving Management > GBTS Weather Adaptive Energy Management. The GBTS Weather Adaptive Energy Management window is displayed.

2.

Import history weather data. a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

on the toolbar. The District History Weather Setting dialog box is Click displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

615



b.

Click Export Template or select a district in the navigation tree, and then click Export. In the displayed dialog box, select a type of monthly average radiant intensity of the horizontal plane, specify a save path on your local computer, and then click OK.

c.

Type history weather data to the weather data table that is already exported, and then change the name of the table to the name of the district for which history data is to be imported.

d.

In the District History Weather Setting dialog box, click Import. After the data is imported, the name of the district corresponding to the weather data table is displayed in the navigation tree of the District History Weather Setting dialog box.

CAUTION If the name of the imported table is the same as that of an existing table in the M2000 system, this table replaces the existing one. e. 3.

Click Close.

Manage a GBTS weather-adaptive energy conservation task. Perform operations as required in the GBTS Weather Adaptive Energy Management dialog box.

If you need to... Then... View a task

All created GBTS weather-adaptive energy conservation tasks are displayed in the task list. l Status displays the current running status of a GBTS weatheradaptive energy conservation task. l Information displays the result of the last execution of a task. NOTE The M2000 executes the energy conservation algorithm once an hour.

Double-click a task to be viewed in the task list, or select a task and then click . The Property dialog box is displayed, in which you can view parameters related to the task.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


616



If you need to... Then... Create a task

1. Click

. The New Task dialog box is displayed.

2. Select a GBTS from the NE navigation tree, and then set task parameters in the right pane. You can create only one weather-adaptive energy conservation task for each GBTS. 3. Click OK. You can view the new task in the task list. NOTE A task is in stopped state by default after it is created, and therefore you need to manually start it.

Start a task

Select a task whose Status is Stopped from the task list, and then click

.

NOTE A task is in stopped state by default after it is created, and therefore you need to manually start it.

Modify a task

1. Select a task whose Status is Stopped from the task list, or click to stop a task. 2. Double-click a task, or click in the Property dialog box.

and then modify task parameters

3. Click OK. Delete a task

Select a task whose Status is Stopped from the task list or click to stop a task, and then click

l


l

.

Select a task, and then click to view the execution report of the task in the displayed web page. The execution report of a task contains task execution records and basic task information such as related GBTS, district, and weather conditions.

Deactivation Procedure N/A

----End

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


617



167

Configuring Compact BTS

Automatic Capacity Planning

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – This feature is supported by only the Compact BTS.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The initial parameters required for BTS auto-planning algorithm are set in online mode through the M2000 client. – Before this feature is configured, the BTS has performed automatic configuration and planning. – The automatic optimization task of the GSM BTS is created on the M2000 client before the feature is activated. For details, see the M2000 Product Documentation.

Context l

The Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning feature is license-controlled.

l

The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.

l

According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output power of the TRX in real time to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the network. A cell is initially configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the traffic volume, another TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and thus these two TRXs share the 30 W power.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


618



NOTE

After the feature is activated, the M2000 measures the traffic volume of the BTS within 24 hours, and then compares the measurement result with the threshold of the actual traffic volume. If the traffic volume of the BTS exceeds the threshold, the BTS adds a TRX automatically for expansion.

Procedure l


l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO, BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to ON(ON). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch is set to ON.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example // Activation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=ON; // Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; // Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="pico", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, CAPCOVEROPTSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


619



168

Configuring Compact BTS

Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature is supported by only the BTS3900E.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The scanning frequency set and neighbor cell list are configured on the M2000 in advance. – The parameters related to automatic optimization are set on the M2000 in advance.

Context l

The Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature is licensecontrolled.

l

The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E.

l

Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning – The automatic neighboring cell planning feature is mostly applied in the site deployment scenario. – The automatic neighboring cell planning feature indicates that the M2000 triggers the BTS3900E to perform downlink frequency scan. The BTS3900E reports the information about the neighboring cells to the M2000. Then, the M2000 configures the

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


620



scanned cells as the neighboring cells of the BTS3900E. In addition, the M2000 adds the cells of the BTS3900E in the scanned cells to the neighboring cell list to set up the bidirectional neighboring relation. If the scanned cells are beyond the serving area of the M2000, the M2000 can set up only the unidirectional neighboring relation and prompt users to manually configure neighboring cells. l

Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization – The automatic neighbor cell optimization feature is used during the operation of the BTS. – During the operation of the BTS3900E, the automatic optimization task is created on the M2000. With this feature, the M2000 determines that redundant neighboring cells exist in the BTS3900E or certain neighboring cells are missed according to the analysis of the measurement reports. Then, the M2000 triggers the neighbor cell optimization process automatically and updates the neighboring relation.

l

The Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization feature can improve network quality, increase handover success rate, and reduce call drop rate automatically, reducing the workload of manual configuration and improving OM efficiency.

l

The progress and result of the automatic planning and optimization can be viewed on the M2000 client for data analysis and fault location. For details, see the M2000 Product Documentation.

l

Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning

Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSAUTOPLAN to add the BTS3900E in auto-planning mode. The added BTS3900E is enabled with the auto-planning function by default. In addition, the related auto-planning algorithm switch and autooptimization algorithm switch supported by the BTS3900E are set to ON. You can Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG to modify the status of the switches. NOTE

l The added BTS3900E that is in auto-planning mode will enable the auto-planning function automatically when it is powered on for the first time. If the first auto-planning scan succeeds, the BTS3900E does not enable the auto-planning function automatically during the subsequent powering-off and resetting operations. If the auto-planning function needs to be enabled again, Run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN. l To enable this feature on a BTS that is configured as a common BTS on the BSC6900, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN). Then, set Neighbor Cell Plan Switch to ON(ON). Then, Run the BSC6900 MML command RST AUTOPLAN command to plan the site data automatically.

2. l

Procedure for activating Automatic Neighbor Cell Optimization 1.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to AUTO(AUTOPLAN), BTS Type to BTS3900E_GSM, and set Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch to ON(ON).


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS to activate a BTS.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then check that Neighbor Cell Plan Switch and Neighbor Cell Optimize Switch are set to ON.

Deactivation procedure Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

621



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG, and then set BTS Configuration Mode to NORMAL(NORMAL).

----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD BTSAUTOPLAN: BTSNAME="micro", BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=26, PN=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, BTSIP="10.161.101.101", BTSMASK="255.255.255.0", BSCIP="18.18.18.18", MAINDEVTAB="11112222223333334444", SRANMODE=SUPPORT, CELLNAME="micro_cell0", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="111", LAC=1214, CI=1000, MASTERIPADDR="18.18.18.254"; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CELLNAMELIST="micro_cell0", SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=AUTO, BTSTYPE=BTS3900E_GSM, NBRCELLSWITCH=ON, NBRCELLOPTSWITCH=ON; //Verification procedure LST BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro"; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSAUTOPLANCFG: IDTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="micro", CFGMODE=NORMAL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


622



169

Configuring Compact BTS Timing Power Off

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The solar controller is connected to the BTS. – Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The version the solar controller should not be earlier than POWER2000 V1R1C04. – The time of the solar controller is consistent with that of the BTS3900E.

Context l

The compact BTS is the BTS3900E. Within the coverage of the BTS3900E, if the BTS3900E uses solar boards to supply power, users can set the enabling and disabling time of the BTS3900E on the BSC when the traffic is unavailable or is light. By using the solar controller, the BTS3900E can enable or disable automatically in the specified periods, reducing the power consumption of the site, the number of solar boards, and construction cost.

l

The BTS3900E does not provide services when the Compact BTS Timing Power Off feature takes effect.

l


Procedure

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


623



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON(ON), and set Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the actual conditions. NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPWR to query the power information about the BTS.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set BTS Index (Not required on the CME) to the index of the BTS to be verified, Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES), and BTS Power-off Enabled to ON(ON), and set Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time according to the verification time at the site to ensure that the verification time is within the period specified by Power-off Start Time and Power-off End Time.

2.

On the main interface of the LMT, click Alarm. The Alarm tab page is displayed.

3.

Double-click OML Fault on the Fault tab page under Browse Alarm. The Alarm Detailed Information dialog box is displayed.

4.

Check Alarm Cause of Location Info, if Alarm Cause is displayed as Green Base Station Power-off, it indicates that the BTS3900E is powered off. NOTE

The OML Fault alarm is generated after the BTS is powered off. Thus, check the alarm after Power-off Start Time.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP, and then set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO) or set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and BTS Power-off Enabled to OFF (OFF).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=ON, SHUTDNST=16&15&19, SHUTDNET=18&15&34; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSAPMUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=7, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, BTSSHUTDNASW=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


624



170

Configuring Local User Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510706 Local User Management.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900E is in IP over FE transmission mode.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The PC installed with the Local User Management software is in normal communication with the BTS3900E.

Context l

The Local User Management feature is license-controlled.

l

Currently, only the BTS3900E supports the Local User Management feature.

l

This feature can be used to deploy a special commercial mode. When the BTS3900E is used in rural areas, operators can contract the BTS3900E to entrepreneurs. The entrepreneurs manage the local users through a PC and provide the registration and deregistration services, local services, public network services, and local services in singlesite mode. – The entrepreneurs gain profits by increasing the number of local users. The entrepreneurs are responsible for registration and communication charging (including charging strategies) of local users. – The transmission in rural areas is unstable. This feature ensures that the local user management can be performed even if the transmission is disrupted. In addition, the communication and charging between local users are supported.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


625



– The BTS3900E contracted to the entrepreneurs can also provide services for public network users of operators. In this case, the communication requirements of public network users can be ensured when the BSC transmission is disrupted. l

The calls between local users support only full rate.

l

When the transmission on the Abis interface is disrupted, the BTS3900E enters the singlesite mode. The handover procedure lasts for six minutes, during which services are disrupted.

l

During the communication between local users, only the reporting of the original measurement report is supported.

l


Procedure 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported), and then set Local Call Support Flag to YES(YES).

Verification procedure –

Local services and public network services

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local call support flag is set to YES.

2.

Use MSs to perform the service dialing test. Expected result: The call services between local services, between public network users, and between local users and public network users are normal. NOTE

The local signaling process of call services between local users is different from the common call process. You can observe the signaling information through message tracing on the Web LMT.

–

Local services in single-site mode

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOTHPARA, and then check that local call support flag is set to YES.

2.

Disconnect the BTS3900E from the BSC and wait for six minutes. Then, perform the local service dialing test. Expected result: The call services between local users are normal.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported), and then set Local Call Support Flag to NO(NO).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=YES; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SPRTLU=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


626



171

Configuring Intelligent Battery Management

Intelligent battery management includes the automatic switch between battery management modes, overtemperature protection, and leftover capacity. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510710 Intelligent Battery Management.

Prerequisites l


l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – BTSs configured with the APM30H(Ver.C), BTS3900AL, and TP48600A cabinets support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Transport Network – This feature does not depend on the transport network.

l

Dependencies on Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – This feature does not depend on other NEs or third-party devices.

Context l


l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Preparation


627



Parameter Name

Parameter ID Parameter Setting

Data Source

Battery Intelligent Management Switch

BATIMS

The value of this parameter is Internal planning valid only when The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

High Temperature Shutdown Flag

HTSDF

l To enable automatic battery power-off protection in the overtemperature environment, set this parameter to ENABLE (ENABLE).

Network plan

l To decrease the charging voltage and maintain the battery backup capability in the overtemperature environment, set this parameter to DISABLE (DISABLE). Set this parameter to ENABLE(ENABLE) in high-temperature regions.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


628



Parameter Name

Parameter ID Parameter Setting

Shutdown Temperature

SDT

Data Source

This parameter specifies the Network plan power-off temperature. The default value is 53°C. If the battery operating temperature has been higher than the value of this parameter lasts for 5 minutes, the power monitoring unit (PMU) performs one of the following operations to protect batteries: l If HTSDF is set to ENABLE(ENABLE), the PMU triggers battery power-off protection. l If HTSDF is set to DISABLE(DISABLE), the PMU decreases the battery charging voltage from the busbar.

Temperature Alarm Upper Threshold

TUTHD

Temperature alarm upper Network plan threshold = Float charging trigger threshold + 5°C If the battery operating temperature has been higher than the float charging trigger threshold lasts for 5 minutes, equalized charging is changed to float charging to protect batteries. The default value of this parameter is 50°C.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activate the automatic switch between battery management modes. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Battery Intelligent Management Switch to ON(On).

– Activate battery overtemperature protection. 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Battery overtemperature protection is automatically activated after Battery Intelligent Management Switch is set to ON(On).


629


171 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAPMUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Right click PMU Board > Properties > APMU/PMU(BTS That Support SingleRAN) Board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set battery overtemperature protection parameters. In this step, set High Temperature Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(ENABLE), and set Shutdown Temperature and Temperature Alarm Upper Threshold to appropriate values.

– The battery leftover capacity query function does not need to be activated. l

Verification Procedure – Verify the automatic switch between battery management modes. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSPWR to query the BTS power information. This function has been activated if Battery Intelligent Management Capability is Support and Battery Intelligent Management Switch is On. Otherwise, this function has not been activated.

– Verify battery overtemperature protection. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query battery management parameters. This function has been activated if the values of High-Temperature Battery Power-off Allowed State, High-Temperature Battery Power-off Temperature, and High Cell temperature 1 Alarm are the same as the configured ones.

– Query the battery leftover capacity. 1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSBRD to query the battery leftover capacity.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Battery Intelligent Management Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating Intelligent Battery Management SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BATIMS=ON; //Querying BTS Power Information DSP BTSPWR: INFOTYPE=BTSPWR, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9; //Querying the BTS Battery Leftover Capacity DSP BTSBATCAP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=7, SRN=0, SN=15;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


630


172 Configuring PBT

172

Configuring PBT

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115901 Power Boost Technology (PBT).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – DTRU, DRFU, and RRU3004 support this feature. – When a double-transceiver TRX board uses PBT, only channel 0 is configured with one carrier.

l


l


Context PBT aims to increase the downlink transmit power to extend network coverage. In PBT mode, only one carrier is configured for a double-transceiver TRX board. A signal transmitted from the carrier is modulated and then converted into a radio frequency (RF) signal, known as DA conversion. Then, the RF signal is transmitted to two power amplifiers (PAs). After being amplified, the two signals are combined and output. The transmit power is increased because the two signals are aligned accurately. This increases downlink signal strength. PBT is applicable to wide coverage areas.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Send Mode to PBT(PBT). NOTE

In PBT mode, the single carrier must be configured on channel 0.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


631


l

172 Configuring PBT


Optional: Use an MS to make a call. NOTE

This operation is required if the test TRX does not carry a BCCH carrier. This operation can be skipped if the test TRX carries a BCCH carrier.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to NONE(None). Then, use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record the measurement result.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to PBT(PBT).

4.

Use the optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record the measurement result.

5.

Compare the measurement result obtained in step 2 with that obtained in step 5. Expected result: The power measured in step 5 is greater than that measured in step 2. This indicates that PBT has taken effect.


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT; //Verification procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=PBT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


632



173

Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity (TD).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The following base stations support this feature: BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU), BTS3012AE(DTRU), DBS3900(modules except RRU3926), BTS3900 (DRFU/MRFUd), BTS3900A(DRFU/MRFUd), BTS3900L(DRFU/MRFUd), and BTS3900AL(DRFU/MRFUd). – When a double-transceiver TRX board uses TD, only channel 0 is configured with one carrier. – The cell where TD is applied has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two singlepolarized antennas.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features: GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping and GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell. – This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when multi-carrier RRU dynamic TX diversity is used: GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing(Dual PA power sharing)

l


Context In TD mode, one baseband signal is transmitted through two radio frequency (RF) channels. This prevents signal levels from changing dramatically and also prevents signal quality from dropping since there is no correlation between two antennas. As an effect of this, service quality for users that move at a low speed is improved and the downlink network coverage is expanded. To sum up, TD improves the downlink signal quality and meets the requirements of high signal quality in some special areas. The following procedure illustrates how to configure TD for the DRRU on a GSM DBS3900. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


633



Procedure l

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Send Mode to DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to NONE(None).

2.

Use an optical power meter to measure the power of the test base station, and record the measurement result. Expected result: The power is 0.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLE_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+2RX]).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV. In this step, set Send Mode to DIVERSITY(Transmit Diversity).

5.

Use an optical power meter to measure the power of channel B, and record the measurement result. Expected result: The power is not 0, which indicates that TD has taken effect.


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY; //Verification procedure SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, SNDMD=NONE; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, SRN=0, SN=3, RXUTYPE=DRRU, SndRcvMode=DOUBLE_ANTENNA, Lvl1Vswr=22, Lvl2Vswr=30; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWL=8, SNDMD=DIVERSITY;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


634


174 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity

174

Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver Diversity. The 4-way receive diversity combines 4-way receive signals to optimize the quality of uplink signals.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The following base stations support this feature: BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU), BTS3012AE(DTRU), BTS3900(DRFU), BTS3900A(DRFU), BTS3900L (DRFU), and BTS3900AL(DRFU). – A DTRU board that adopts the 4-way receive diversity technique can be configured with only one carrier. – The cell has two dual-polarized antennas or four single-polarized antennas.

l


l


Context The 4-way receive diversity enables signals from four directions to be transmitted to a single carrier simultaneously. The carrier then combines these 4-way receive signals to improve uplink receive sensitivity. In this way, this technique optimizes the quality of uplink signals to meet the demanding requirements for radio communications in certain cases and to improve the uplink performance in wide network coverage scenarios. The following procedures assume that the 4-way receive diversity is configured for two associated DRFUs of a BTS3900.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


635


174 Configuring 4-Way Receiver Diversity

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DRRU Sending Receiving Mode to DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA(Double Feeder[2TX+4RX]). NOTE

The two associated DRFUs must be configured simultaneously.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Receive Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). NOTE

l If the carrier of a double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 0, Receive Mode can be set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination), PBT(PBT), DIVERSITY (Transmit Diversity), DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity), or DPBT(DPBT). l If the carrier of the double-transceiver TRX board is configured on channel 1, Receive Mode must be set to DTIC(Transmit Independency or Combination).

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the attributes of the TRX board. Expected result: Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver).


----End

Example //Activating 4-Way Receiver Diversity SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1, RXUTYPE=DRFU, SndRcvMode1=DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENNA; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY; //Verifying 4-Way Receiver Diversity LST GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, TRXID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


636



175

Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The following base stations support this feature: BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3012 (DTRU), BTS3012AE(DTRU), DBS3900(modules except RRU3926), BTS3900 (DRFU/MRFUd), BTS3900A(DRFU/MRFUd), BTS3900L(DRFU/MRFUd), and BTS3900AL(DRFU/MRFUd). – The test cell has at least one dual-polarized antenna or two single-polarized antennas.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. – This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features: GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping and GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell. – This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when multi-carrier RRU dynamic TX diversity is used: GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing(Dual PA power sharing)

l


Context In dynamic transmit diversity mode, the transmit diversity technique is applied to two carriers' same timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these timeslots are released, they stop using the transmit diversity technique to transmit signals. The dynamic transmit diversity technique makes full use of idle timeslots, improves signal quality in rural areas, and strikes a balance between system capacity and network coverage by dynamically adjusting network coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in the live network. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


637



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DDIVERSITY(DDIVERSITY).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Send Mode to DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity) for the TRXs in the overlaid subcell. NOTE

l You can Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Hw_concentric Attribute > Hw_concentric Attribute) to query the attributes of TRXs in the overlaid subcell. l If the dynamic transmit diversity technique is to be applied to a DTRU, two carriers must be configured and the technique must not be applied to the BCCH carrier.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and those carriers whose send mode is DDIVERSITY(Dynamic Transmit Diversity).

CAUTION Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may causes congestion in the cell where the TRX is located. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH of the BCCH carrier.

CAUTION Setting Administrative State for the TCH of main BCCH carrier to Lock(Lock) may causes congestion in the cell where the TRX is located. 4.

Monitor the status of the TCH by referring to Monitoring Channel Status, and use an MS to make a call. NOTE

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the SDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-level threshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplink receive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimumlevel threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-level threshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channel to the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


638



Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT, you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in the Subordinate Channel state. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches), in this step, set Send Mode for TRXs in the overlaid subcell to other send modes supported by the TRXs.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), in this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY; SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=DDIVERSITY; //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt; SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock; //Deactivation procedure SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=2, SNDMD=NOCOMB; SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=NOTSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


639



176

Configuring Dynamic PBT

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – DTRU, DRFU, RRU3004 support the feature Dynamic PBT currently.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell. – This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features: GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping and GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

l


Context In dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) mode, the PBT is applied to two carriers' same timeslots only. The two carriers belong to a double-transceiver TRX board. After these timeslots are released, they stop using the PBT to transmit signals. The dynamic PBT makes full use of idle timeslots, improves signal quality for the areas with poor signal quality, and strikes a balance between system capacity and network coverage by dynamically adjusting network coverage or system capacity according to the actual situation in the live network. Moreover, the dynamic PBT increases the handover success rate for MSs located at the edge of a cell, and therefore improves the performance of a concentric cell where the Co-BCCH function is enabled. The following operation illustrates how to configure the dynamic PBT for the DTRU on a BTS3012.



640



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Transmission Div Supported to DPBT(DPBT).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Send Mode to DPBT(DPBT) for TRXs in the overlaid subcell. NOTE

l You can Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXIUO (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Hw_concentric Attribute > Hw_concentric Attribute) to query the attributes of TRXs in the overlaid subcell. l If the dynamic PBT is to be applied to a radio frequency (RF) module, two carriers must be configured for the module and the dynamic PBT must not be applied to the RF module where the BCCH carrier is located..

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to SysOpt(System optimization).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for carriers except the BCCH carrier and those carriers whose send mode is not DPBT(DPBT).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock(Lock) for the TCH or TCHF of the BCCH carrier.

4.

Monitor the status of the TCH or TCHF by referring toMonitoring Channel Status, and use an MS to make an emergency call. NOTE

A TCH in the overlaid subcell is assigned to the MS only when the uplink receive level of the SDCCH meets the following conditions: The difference between the assign-optimum-level threshold and the PBT gain is smaller than the SDCCH uplink receive level. The SDCCH uplink receive level is smaller than the assign-optimum-level threshold. The default assign-optimumlevel threshold is 35 while the default PBT gain is 4. You can change the assign-optimum-level threshold according to the SDCCH uplink receive level to enable the system to assign a channel to the overlaid subcell. In this way, dynamic transmit diversity can be triggered.

Expected result: Checking the channel monitoring tab page on the BSC6900 LMT, you can find that the emergency call occupies channels of the two carriers' same timeslots. One channel is in the Working state while the other one is in the Subordinate Channel state. l


----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2, SNDMD=DPBT; //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OPTILAYER=SysOpt;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


641



SET GTRXADMSTAT: TRXID=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, ADMSTAT=Lock;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


642



177

Configuring Enhanced EDGE Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware Enhanced EDGE coverage is supported by the following BTSs and TRXs. – Double-transceiver series base stations DTRUs and DTRMs of BTS3012, BTS3012II, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E. – 3900 series base stations DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900E. NOTE

Neither QTRUs nor BTS3900B supports enhanced EDGE coverage. l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114201 EGPRS. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell or GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping. enhanced EDGE Coverage of RRU3004/ DRFU cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown or GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level.

l


Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature described in this feature only applies to the 8PSK modulation mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

643



l

The Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature improves the average power of PS services through the coverage enhancement technology and power sharing technology, thus ensuring that data services can have the same cell coverage capability as speech services. This feature is applicable to both the DTRU and QTRU.

l

After the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature is activated, the Cell 8PSK Power Attenuation Grade parameter becomes invalid automatically.

l

Table 177-1 list the conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the BTS3012 series. Table 177-1 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3012 series)

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Prerequisite

Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage Is Supported

The TRX module is DTRU (type B).

Supported.

The power of two carriers configured on the DTRU is 60 W, and the static power levels of both carriers are equal to 0.

Supported.

The TRX module is DTRU (type A) or QTRU.

Not supported.

A single DTRU module is configured with one carrier.

Not supported.

When a single DTRU module is configured with two carriers, the intelligent shutdown function is performed on one of the carriers.

Not supported.

The two carriers configured on the DTRU module belong to two cells.

Not supported.

When one of the carriers is configured as the BCCH, the other non-BCCH carrier of the DTRU module is supported or not.

Not supported.

The transmit mode of the DTRU is configured as PBT (excluding dynamic PBT) or transmit diversity (excluding dynamic transmit diversity).

Not supported.

A channel of the DTRU is faulty.

Not supported.

Table 177-2 list conditions for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature for the BTS3900E.


644



Table 177-2 Prerequisites for implementing the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature (BTS3900E) Prerequisite

Whether Enhanced EDGE Coverage Is Supported

Not FH, RF FH, and baseband FH

Supported.

RanSharing

Supported.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), and then set High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to ALLOWED(Allowed), set Enable Enhanced EDGE Coverage to ALLOWED (Allowed). NOTE

l The support of High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed by the BCCH is determined by the High-Order Modulation Power Increase on BCCH TRX Allowed parameter. l The Power Increase in 8PSK parameter is used to control the increased amplitude of the maximum power in 8PSK modulation mode.

l


Check traffic statistics information about the measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX on the M2000, and then determine the effect of the Enhanced EDGE Coverage feature. For details, see the M2000 product documentation. NOTE

The measurement unit High-Order Modulation Power Increase Measurement per TRX contain 11 counters, such as Number of Bursts in High-Order Modulation Scheme and Number of Bursts with High-Order Modulation Power Increase of n dB. The value of n can be either of the following values: 0.4, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.4, 2.8, 3.2, 3.6, or 4.0.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), and then set High-Order Modulation Power Increase Allowed to NOT_ALLOWED(Not Allowed).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=ALLOWED, EDGEPWREN=ALLOWED; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HIGHMODPWREN=NOT_ALLOWED;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


645



178

Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing.

Prerequisites l

Dependency on Hardware – Only multi-carrier RF modules support this feature. – The RRU3926 does not support the dual-PA power sharing function. – When a GRFU or MRFU is mixed with an MRFUe, to support the dual-PA power sharing function, the MRFUe must support 6 or less TRXs, and the difference between TRX numbers configured on the GRFU/MRFU and MRFUe must be less than or equal to 1. – When a GRFU is mixed with an MRFU or MRFUe that supports dual modes, the dualPA power sharing function is not supported. – When an MRFUd is mixed with an RFU that has one transmit channel and two receive channels, the inter-module power sharing function is not supported.

l

Dependency on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm. – The single-PA power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the following features: GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell. – For the radio frequency unit (RFU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping), GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, and GBFD-114001 Extended Cell. – For the remote radio unit (RRU), the dual-PA power sharing function cannot be used together with any of the following features: GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


646



GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, and GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell. – If the Dynamic Power Sharing feature has been enabled in a cell, you do not need to enable the GBFD-117602 Active Power Control feature because the Dynamic Power Sharing feature contains all of its functions. – If power control parameters are not properly set, there will be a high percentage of high signal levels. When this occurs, network performance will not be improved even if Dynamic Power Sharing is enabled and the number of peak clipping attempts is minimized. Therefore, set downlink power control parameters to appropriate values and enable the GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink function before enabling Dynamic Power Sharing. l


l

Other Prerequisites – Dependency on frequency bands and cells: All activated TRXs of a multi-transceiver unit must work on the same frequency band and must be configured in the same cell. In the case of a concentric cell, all activated TRXs must be configured in the underlaid or overlaid subcell. – Restriction on PS channel allocation: If the remaining power of the timeslot of a PS channel is lower than the maximum transmit power of the TRX, the channel cannot be converted into a packet data channel (PDCH). – Restriction on cell configuration: To avoid cell congestion and enhance network performance after this feature is enabled, the Channel Assign Allow for Insuff Power parameter must be set to YES(Yes) and the recommended value of the C/I Estimate Value parameter is 10 dB. – Restriction on TRX configuration: The percentage of stand-alone dedicated control channels (SDCCHs) and PDCHs must be less than or equal to 30% the total number of channels in a cell. It is recommended that static PDCHs be configured on BCCH carriers and only one SDCCH be configured on each timeslot.

Context With this feature, the transmit power of a TRX can be improved if the transmit power of the TRX cannot meet the actual requirements. In addition, if the total transmit power of TRXs in a TRX group exceeds the transmit power threshold of the TRX group, calls with different power requirements are grouped into different timeslots to ensure that the total power of the same timeslot on the TRX group does not exceed the transmit power threshold. Therefore, this feature decreases the number of peak clippings and improves the network performance.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Activation Procedure for Single- or Dual-PA Power Sharing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Multi-Density TRX Power Sharing to DYNAMIC(Dynamic power sharing).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

647



Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) to improve the transmit power of the TRX. In this step, set Power Type based on the network plan. l

Activation Procedure for Inter-Module Power Sharing The procedure for configuring inter-module power sharing for the GRFU is the same as that for the MRFU. The following uses the MRFU as an example to describe how to configure inter-module power sharing. 1.

Deploy a BTS on the BSC6900. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXUBRD (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Board > BTS RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) set Power Class based on your individual needs. If an MRFU V1 is deployed, set Power Class to CLASS0 or CLASS2. Otherwise, set Power Class to CLASS0, CLASS1, or CLASS2.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRX (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click Cell > ADD TRX). Perform subsequent configuration operations on power sharing based on the query results. Example result: TRX ID 24 25 2000 2001 2002 22 23 2004 2005

Freq. 35 45 49 71 40 75 80 65 30

TRX No. 3 4 0 1 2 8 9 6 5

Subrack No. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Slot No. 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

TRX Board Pass No. 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 2

Configure five carriers for the BCCH TRX module and four carriers for another TRX module. Then, perform power sharing on the two TRX modules.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable inter-module power sharing. In this step, set Associated Board Function to POWERSHARING(Power Sharing Between Boards) and other parameters to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Type for each TRX module in the cell to an appropriate value and ensure that the maximum output power of each TRX module is higher than the output power required for enabling this feature.


Log in to the M2000 client, choose Performance > Query Result. Click New Query in the display window. Then, the New Query dialog box is displayed. Choose BSC6900 GSM > BTSM Measurement > TRX State Measurement per TRX to check the values of counters such as The total BURST count cut 0.5dB power, The total BURST count cut 1.0dB power, The total BURST count cut 1.5dB power, and The total BURST count cut 2.0dB power before and after this feature is activated. The expected result: After this feature is activated, the probability of peak clipping for timeslots is decreased.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


648


178 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing NOTE

When the transmit power of all the calls on a timeslot of a TRX group is greater than the maximum transmit power of the BTS, the BTS decreases the power of all the calls to ensure its normal operation. Number of Timeslots with Power Decreased provides the number of timeslots whose transmit power is decreased.

l

Deactivation Procedure for Single- or Dual-PA Power Sharing 1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Multi-Density TRX Power Sharing to NONE(None).

Deactivation Procedure for Inter-Module Power Sharing 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to stop inter-module power sharing. In this step, set Associated Board Function to OFF(OFF) and other parameters to appropriate values.

----End

Example //Activating dynamic power sharing: single- or dual-PA power sharing SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=DYNAMIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, POWT=50W; //Activating dynamic power sharing: inter-module power sharing ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=20, BT=MRFU, RXUSPEC=MRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, RXUNAME="RXU", RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=YES, PWRMODE=CLASS0; LST GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=20, CELLID=200; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=20, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, RELATEDMODFUNC=POWERSHARING, RELATEDCN=0, RELATEDSRN=4, RELATEDSN=1; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=22, POWL=0, POWT=25W; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=23, POWL=0, POWT=25W; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2000, POWL=0, POWT=25W; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2001, POWL=0, POWT=25W; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=2002, POWL=0, POWT=25W; //Deactivating dynamic power sharing: single- or dual-PA power sharing SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QTRUPWRSHARE=NONE; //Deactivating dynamic power sharing: inter-module power sharing SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=20, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, RELATEDMODFUNC=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


649



179

Configuring Extended Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114001 Extended Cell.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

l

Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

l


Context The Extended Cell feature expands the cell radius and improves the capability of the BTS for wide coverage. This feature is applicable to areas with a small population and low signal fading such as deserts, seashores, islands, and water areas.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Extension Type set to DualTS_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell).


Monitor the channel status by referring to Monitoring Channel Status. Expected result: One of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number is not displayed, as shown in Figure 179-1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


650



Figure 179-1 Channels in a cell enabled with Extended Cell

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Cell Extension Type set to Normal_cell(Normal cell).

2.

Verify that Extended Cell has been deactivated by monitoring the channel status. For details, see Monitoring Channel Status. Expected result: Both of the two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX number are displayed, as shown in Figure 179-2.

Figure 179-2 Channels in a cell not enabled with Extended Cell

----End

Example //Activating Extended Cell MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=DualTS_ExtCell; //Deactivating Extended Cell MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTTP=Normal_cell;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


651



180

Configuring Concentric Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The cell is configured.

Context l

When tight frequency reuse is adopted, the concentric cell technology can be used to avoid or reduce radio interference and therefore to ensure voice quality.

l

The concentric cell technology divides an ordinary cell into two service layers: overlaid (OL) subcell and underlaid (UL) subcell. Compared with the UL subcell, the OL subcell is configured with more channels and therefore it becomes the primary traffic bearer layer. The OL subcell aims to absorb most subscribers in the concentric cell. The UL subcell aims to provide services for areas that are not covered by the OL subcell.

Table 180-1 Data preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Cell IUO Type

IUOTP

Remarks (Configuration Principle for Different Scenarios) Set this parameter to Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell).


Data Source BSC internal planning

652



Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID


Data Source

Enhanced Concentric Allowed

ENIUO

Set this parameter to ON (On).


UL to OL HO Allowed

ULTOOLHOALLO W

Set this parameter to YES (Yes).


OL to UL HO Allowed

OLTOULHOALLO W



RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed

RECLEVUOHOAL LOW



RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed

RECQUALUOHOA LLOW

Set this parameter to NO (No).


TA for UO HO Allowed

TAFORUOHOALL OW

Set this parameter to NO (No).


Concentric Circles ATCB HO Allowed

ATCBHOEN

Set this parameter to NO (Close).


Assign Optimum Layer

OPTILAYER

Set this parameter to SysOpt (System optimization).


Assignoptimum-level Threshold

OPTILEVTHRES

Decrease the value of this parameter in steps of 2 dB if the underlaid subcell is congested.


TA Threshold of Assignment Pref

OPTITATHRES

Set this parameter to 63.

Network planning

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed

UTOOTRAFHOAL LOW

Set this parameter to YES (Yes) if overlaid-underlaid load balance needs to be enabled.


Pref. Subcell in HO of IntraBSC

HOALGOPERMLA Y

Set this parameter to SysOpt (System optimization).


Incoming-toBSC HO Optimum Layer

ACCESSOPTILAY

Set this parameter to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).



653



Parameter ID


UO HO Watch Time

IUOHOSTATIME



UO HO Valid Time

IUOHODURATIM E



UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

UTOORECTH

Decrease the value of this parameter in steps of 2 dB if the underlaid subcell is congested. Increase the value of this parameter in steps of 2 dB if the overlaid subcell is congested.

Network planning

PS OtoU HO Receive Level Threshold

OTOURECEIVETH


Network planning

Parameter Name

Data Source

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell) and Enhanced Concentric Allowed to an appropriate value. NOTE

After enhanced concentric cell is enabled, the BSC automatically configures the OL subcell and the UL subcell as neighboring cells. The neighboring cell relationship cannot be removed.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXIUO (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Hw_concentric Attribute > Hw_concentric Attribute; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Concentric Attribute to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID(Underlaid Subcell) based on the network plan. NOTE

It is recommended that Concentric Attribute on the BCCH TRX be set to UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES (Yes).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification


654



center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command to set the handover parameters in the concentric cell based on the current network status. l


CAUTION The following configurations are used only for verification. For commercial networks, configure parameters based on the network plan. After this feature is verified, restore the configurations before the verification. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).

2.

Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell. NOTE

To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.

Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the channel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock (Lock). Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

CAUTION Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion in the cell where the TRX is located. 4.

Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX in the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHs on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock (Unlock).

7.

Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell. Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


655



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).

----End

Example //Activating Concentric Cell MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=ON, FLEXMAIO=OFF; SET GTRXIUO: TRXID=0, IUO=UNDERLAIDOVERLAID; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, CONHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES, OLTOULHOALLOW=YES; //Verifying Concentric Cell //Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, OPTILAYER=USubcell; //Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the underlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of TRX 2047 is occupied) SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; //Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the overlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; //Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock; //Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell; //Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Deactivating Concentric Cell MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=Normal_cell;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


656



181

Configuring Co-BCCH Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependency on Other Features – The feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BTS supports the configured frequency band.

Context Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, reduces handovers and interference, and supports continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots. A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The frequency band configuration is as follows: l

If the overlaid subcell is configured to be work at DCS1800M, then the underlaid subcell must be configured to be work at GSM900M or GSM850M.

l

If the overlaid subcell is configured to work at PCS1900M, then the underlaid subcell must be configured to work at GSM850M. NOTE

The signal loss of DCS1800M changes with the transmission distance. At the distance of 0.5-1 km, the signal power of DCS1800M is about 15 dB lower than the signal power of GSM900M.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


657



Table 181-1 Data preparation

Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Support High Frequency Band

HiFreqBandSupport

Set this parameter to PCS1900 if a cell supports GSM850_1900.


BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell

DBFREQBCCHI UO

l Set this parameter to Extra(Extra) if the coverage area in the underlaid subcell is large and tight frequency reuse is used in the overlaid subcell.


l Set this parameter to Inner(Inner) if the coverage areas in the overlaid and underlaid subcells are similar and tight frequency reuse is used on the BCCH.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Cell IUO Type

IUOTP

Set this parameter to Concentric_cell (Concentric Cell).


Enhanced Concentric Allowed

ENIUO

Set this parameter to ON(On).


UL to OL HO Allowed

ULTOOLHOAL LOW



OL to UL HO Allowed

OLTOULHOAL LOW



RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed

RECLEVUOHO ALLOW




658



Parameter ID


RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed

RECQUALUOH OALLOW

Set this parameter to NO(No).


TA for UO HO Allowed

TAFORUOHOA LLOW

Set this parameter to NO(No).


Concentric Circles ATCB HO Allowed

ATCBHOEN

Set this parameter to NO(Close).


Assign Optimum Layer

OPTILAYER

Set this parameter to SysOpt(System optimization).


Assignoptimum-level Threshold

OPTILEVTHRE S

Decrease the value of this parameter in steps of 2 dB if the underlaid subcell is congested.


TA Threshold of Assignment Pref

OPTITATHRES


Network planning

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed

UTOOTRAFHO ALLOW

Set this parameter to YES(Yes) if load balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell needs to be enabled.


Pref. Subcell in HO of IntraBSC

HOALGOPERM LAY

Set this parameter to SysOpt(System optimization).


Incoming-toBSC HO Optimum Layer

ACCESSOPTIL AY

Set this parameter to USubcell (Underlaid subcell).


UO HO Watch Time

IUOHOSTATIM E



UO HO Valid Time

IUOHODURATI ME



Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Data Source

659



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

UTOORECTH

Decrease the value of this parameter in steps of 2 dB if the underlaid subcell is congested. Increase the value of this parameter in steps of 2 dB if the overlaid subcell is congested.

Network planning

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

OTOURECEIVE TH


Network planning

Procedure l


Optional: When the frequency band of a cell is GSM850_1900, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELL (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > ADD Cell, Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a cell and set the parameters Freq. Band and BCCH IUO of Double Frequency Cell. NOTE

If the frequency band of the cell to be added is GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800, perform the following steps:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric Cell) and Enhanced Concentric Allowed to an appropriate value.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click GSM cell > Activate Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the cell.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the handover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

660



parameters Current HO Control Algorithm and UL to OL HO Allowed for the concentric cell. l


CAUTION The following configurations are used only for verification. For commercial networks, configure parameters based on the network plan. After this feature is verified, restore the configurations before the verification. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to USubcell(Underlaid subcell).

2.

Use an MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell. NOTE

To facilitate the verification, ensure that only one call is made in the serving cell.

Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the underlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block the channel that is occupied by the call. In this step, set Administrative State to Lock (Lock). Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX in the underlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

CAUTION Setting Administrative State for the TRX to Lock(Lock) may cause congestion in the cell where the TRX is located. 4.

Repeat step 3 to block all available channels on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. Expected result: You can learn that the call is handed over to another TCH on the TRX in the overlaid subcell by using the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO. In this step, set Assign Optimum Layer to OSubcell(Overlaid subcell).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT to block all TCHs on the TRX in the underlaid subcell. In this step, set Administrative State to Unlock (Unlock).

7.

Use the MS to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell. Expected result: You can obtain the call setup procedure by performing the operations given in Tracing Messages on the A Interface and Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. You can learn that the call occupies a TCH on the TRX in the overlaid subcell by running the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


661



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GCELL (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click Cell > Delete Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Deleting GSM Cells in Batches) to remove the co-BCCH cell to be deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating Co-BCCH Cell //Assuming that the cell ID is 2047 //Setting Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900 SET BSCBASIC: HiFreqBandSupport=PCS1900; //Adding a co-BCCH cell with the frequency band set to GSM850_1900 and the cell type set to concentric cell ADD GCELL: CELLID=2047, CELLNAME="PCS1900", TYPE=GSM850_1900, MCC="460", MNC="08", LAC=0808, CI=0001, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO= OFF, DBFREQBCCHIUO=Extra, FLEXMAIO=OFF; //Modifying concentric cell attributes MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=OFF; //Setting the concentric cell handover algorithm to handover algorithm I and allowing handover from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ULTOOLHOALLOW=YES; //Verifying Co-BCCH Cell //Configuring the underlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, OPTILAYER=USubcell; //Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the underlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Blocking the channel that the call occupies (assuming that channel 2 of TRX 2047 is occupied) SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; //Checking that the call is successfully handed over to a channel of the overlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Blocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Lock; //Making a call. Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Unblocking TCHs of all the TRXs of the underlaid subcell SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT: TRXID=2047, CHNO=2, ADMSTAT=Unlock; //Configuring the overlaid subcell to be preferentially assigned SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047, OPTILAYER=OSubcell; //Making a call Checking that the call occupies a channel of the overlaid subcell DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047; //Deactivating Co-BCCH Cell //Removing the configured co-BCCH cell RMV GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2047;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


662



182

Configuring Enhanced Dual-Band Network

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context The enhanced dual-band network is an improved version of the existing dual-band network. In the enhanced dual-band network, two single-band cells at the same level and layer with different coverage areas logically form a cell group with two bidirectional neighboring cells. One is an overlaid subcell and the other is an underlaid subcell. In the enhanced dual-band network algorithm, channel resources can be shared and cell load can be balanced between the two cells in a cell group. NOTE

l If the two cells belong to different operators, an enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured. l Before changing the relationships between the cells and the operator, check whether an enhanced dualband network is configured. If an enhanced dual-band network is configured, modify the parameters for the enhanced dual-band network.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

A GSM900 cell and a DCS1800 cell are configured in the BSS. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

663



2.

3.

l

Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the GSM900 cell as a unidirectional neighboring 2G cell of the DCS1800 cell. Repeat Step 1 to configure the DCS1800 cell as a unidirectional neighboring 2G cell of the GSM900 cell, so that the two cells are configured as bidirectional neighboring cells of each other. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), Cell Inner/Extra Property to Extra(Extra), Same Group Cell Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), and Same Group Cell Index to the index of the DCS1800 cell.

Verification Procedure – Verify the call access function in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the following operations: 1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Directed Retry of the two cells to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, and both Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries to 0. Set Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No). Make MS1 and MS2 (both supporting the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Then, use MS1 to make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS1 is assigned a channel in the GSM900 cell. Maintain the call of MS1 and use MS2 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the GSM900 cell. MS2 is assigned a channel in the DCS1800 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call in the underlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in the overlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is heavy and the signals in the overlaid subcell are strong enough. Terminate the calls. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, and UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Min Power Level For Directed Retry to 0. Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call. MS1 is assigned a channel in the underlaid GSM900 subcell because the load of the underlaid subcell is not higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. This indicates that the call in the overlaid subcell can be assigned a channel in the underlaid subcell when the traffic in the underlaid subcell is light.

– Verify the handover in the enhanced dual-band network by performing the following operations: Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


664



1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set the parameters for enabling each type of handover to NO(No) and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold to 4.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step. set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 80, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.

3.

Make MS1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and make a call to a fixed-line phone. MS1 is assigned a channel in the overlaid subcell. Then, MS1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is lower than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

4.

Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step. set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to YES(Yes), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 10, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 5.

5.

The call is handed over from the GSM900 cell back to the DCS1800 cell because the load in the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

6.

Keep the call alive. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA to set the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step. set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No), UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold to 1, Load HO Allowed to NO(No), Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No), Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH to 63, and Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH to 62. Set Inner Cell EDGE HO Enable to YES(Yes).

7.

MS1 is handed over to the GSM900 cell because the receive level of MS1 is lower than Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH. On the A interface, the HANDOVER PERFORM message is traced and the handover cause value in the message is better cell. NOTE

This type of edge handover requires that the underlaid subcell is more preferably selected as the target cell for handover than the overlaid subcell. You can adjust the levels of the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, so that the level of the underlaid subcell is higher than the level of the overlaid subcell.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the parameters for the GSM900 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

665



center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the parameters for the DCS1800 cell. In this step, set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal Cell). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the DCS1800 cell from the neighboring cell list of the GSM900 cell.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the GSM900 cell from the neighboring cell list of the DCS1800 cell.

----End

Example //Activating Enhanced Dual-Band Network ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Extra, DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=2; //Deactivating Enhanced Dual-Band Network MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, IUOTP=Normal_cell; MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2, IUOTP=Normal_cell;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


666



183

Configuring Flex MAIO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117001 Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO).

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping). – This feature is mutually exclusive to the features GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – Frame offset is not configured for the BTS. – A cell is configured for frequency hopping, and the MAs list used by the same timeslot have the same length.

Context Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency reuse is adopted. When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. This reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. It also achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and therefore improves the system capacity.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


667



CAUTION l PS services provided by an external PCU do not support dynamic MAIO. l Flex MAIO must be configured for all the cells under the same BTS, and the settings of flex MAIO parameters must be the same in all the cells. l Each cell can be configured with a maximum of two MAs. Flex MAIO cannot be enabled simultaneously in both the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Start Flex MAIO Switch and HSN Modification Switch set to ON(On).


Trace RSL signaling over the Abis interface for cells with Flex MAIO enabled.

2.

Select the same timeslot on the same TRX board from the RSL signaling at different time points.

3.

Compare MAIOs allocated to channels at different time points. Expected result: The Flex MAIO feature is enabled when the MAIOs allocated to channels at different time points are different, as shown in the Figure 183-1 and Figure 183-2. Figure 183-1 MAIO IE 1

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


668



Figure 183-2 MAIO IE 2

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Start Flex MAIO Switch set to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating Flex MAIO MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=ON, HSNSW=ON; //Deactivating Flex MAIO MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXMAIO=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


669


184 Configuring ICC

184

Configuring ICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115801 ICC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Currently, the following BTSs support ICC: the BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900E GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3900L GSM, BTS3900AL GSM and DBS3900 GSM.

l


l


Context Interference Cancellation Combining (ICC) is a technology that combines signals of multiple antennas to suppress interference. Generally, the interference received by different antennas is generated by the same interference source. Thus, there are correlations between the interference signals received by different antennas. ICC uses the correlations when combing signals to eliminate some interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell), In this step, Set Interference Cancel Mode Selection to ICC(ICC). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT, to query the value of Interference Cancel Mode Selection. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

670


184 Configuring ICC

Expected result: the value of Interference Cancel Mode Selection is ICC(ICC). 2.

l

Perform an FTP service in the existing network and then view the upload rate. If the ICC function is enabled, the upload rate is increased. If the ICC function is disabled, the upload rate is decreased.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, Set Interference Cancel Mode Selection to MRC(MRC).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ICTYP=ICC; //Verification procedure LST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Deactivation procedure SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ICTYP=MRC;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


671



185

Configuring EICC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-115821 EICC.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3012 that uses the QTRU, BTS3012AE that uses the QTRU, BTS3900E, and BTS3900B do not support the feature. – The RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 do not support the feature when they are configured with more than four carriers.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – It is recommended that this feature be used together with the features GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network and GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).

l


Context l

The interference between signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and intersymbol interference (ISI). ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently. EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the maximum signal-tonoise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC achieves better uplink signals.

l

EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the training sequence of desired signals. For each receive signal, the network estimates a channel model based on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the desired signal, and subtracts the desired signal from the receive signal to obtain the interference signal. By doing so, the network estimates the matrix of each interference signal and analyzes the statistical dependency of these interference signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


672



interference is eliminated during the combination of receive signals to maximize combination gains.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable EICC for a cell. In this step, set EICC Allowed to YES(Yes). NOTE

l Enable the adaptive diversity combining function by setting Interference Cancel Mode Adaptation to ON(On). This function checks whether the existing call is in an interferencelimited or noise-limited scenario. If the call is in an interference-limited scenario, the BTS uses EICC. If the call is in a noise-limited scenario, the BTS uses MRC. l Enhance the correctness of the adaptive diversity combining function scenario detection by setting Enhanced Interference Cancel Mode Adaptation to ON(On).

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLSOFT to query the value of EICC Allowed.

2.

Perform an FTP upload in a live network with interference. Then, check the upload rate. If the EICC function is enabled, the upload rate increases. If the EICC function is disabled, the upload rate decreases.

3.

Make a call in a live network with interference. Then, check the counters related to uplink receive quality on the M2000 in the following way: Choose Performance > Query Result from the menu bar. In the displayed window, click New Query. The Query Result window is displayed. Navigate to BSC6900 GSM > MR Measurement > Receive Quality Measurement per TRX. Then, check the value of the counter Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) and calculate the proportion of this counter to the sum of Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF (Mean Receive Quality Rank 0) through Number of MRs on Uplink TCHF(Mean Receive Quality Rank 7). If the EICC function is enabled, the proportion is high, indicating that the speech quality is good. If the EICC function is disabled, the proportion is low, indicating that the speech quality is poor.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable EICC for a cell. In this step, set EICC Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating EICC SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=YES; //Verifying EICC LST GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Deactivating EICC SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STIRCALLOWED=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


673



186

Configuring Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Baseband hopping is mutually exclusive with the following features: – GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass – GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type – GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity – GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)

l


l

Other Prerequisites – In baseband FH mode, all carriers in a baseband FH group in a cell must be in transmit diversity mode, or none of the carriers can be in transmit diversity mode.

Context FH can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase system capacity. When the PS services use coding schemes of high rate such as CS3, CS4, and MCS5 through MCS9, applying FH will affect PS services. In this case, FH is not recommended. If the cell is in Active mode, quick activation for FH can be used.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


674



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP to add a FH group. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), and set Cell Index, Hop Index, Hop Mode, and the frequencies to appropriated values. NOTE

Hop Mode can be set to BaseBand_FH(Baseband FH) or RF_FH(RF FH). If the BCCH participates in baseband FH, the cell must be configured with at least two FH groups.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), and set Cell Index and Frequency Hopping Mode to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type to appropriate values.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP. In this step, set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO to appropriate values. NOTE

If the same FH group is used, the mobile allocation index offset (MAIO) of the same channel on a TRX must be different.

6. l

Procedure for Quick Activation 1.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly activate FH for a cell. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID (By Index), and set Cell Index, Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX, and TRXID LST to appropriate values.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), and set Cell Index to an appropriated value, then set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH (Baseband frequency hopping) and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).

2.

Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the Assignment Command message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rfhopping-channel in the message is 1.


----End

Example //Activation procedure DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11; SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH; SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


675



SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=0, TRXMAIO=1; ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Verification procedure SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


676



187

Configuring BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) has been configured before this feature is activated. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping).

l


Context Frequency hopping (FH) can simplify frequency planning, reduce interference, improve voice quality, and increase system capacity. When PS services use higher order coding schemes such as CS3, CS4, and MCS-5 through MCS-9, the application of FH has a negative impact on the PS services. In this case, enabling FH is not recommended. When the cell activation state is Active, BCCH carrier FH can be activated quickly.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GCELL to deactivate the cell.

2.

To configure multiple FH groups and include the BCCH frequencies to the FH groups, Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP for each FH group you Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

677



want to add. In this step, set Hop Mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH) and Cell Index, Hop Index, and EARFCN to appropriate values. NOTE

To enable the BCCH TRX to participate in FH, at least two FH groups need to be configured with one FH group containing the BCCH frequency.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPTP to set the FH type of a cell to baseband FH. In this step, set Cell Index and Hop Mode to appropriate values.

4.

To configure multiple frequencies and set the FH type of the TRXs participating in FH (including the BCCH TRX) to baseband FH, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXHOP for each frequency you want to set. In this step, set TRX ID and Hop Type to appropriate values.

5.

To configure multiple channels and set the FH index and mobile allocation index offset (MAIO) of the channels, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP for each channel you want to set. In this step, set Channel Hop Index and Channel MAIO to appropriate values. NOTE

l When the same FH group is used for the TRXs, the MAIO of the same channel of the TRXs must be different. l Channel 0 on the BCCH TRX does not participate in FH, and therefore its FH index should be set to 255.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GCELL to activate the cell. NOTE

In addition to the preceding activation procedure, you can quickly activate this feature by performing the following step: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP to quickly set FH for a cell. In this step, set Cell Index, Frequency Hopping Mode, Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX, and TRXID LST (which contains the BCCH TRX ID) to appropriate values.

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set CELLID to the index of the cell to be verified, Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping), and Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to Hop(Hop).

2.

Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell to be verified. The call is initiated successfully and the voice quality is good. In the Um interface CS tracing window, the Assignment Command message is traced, and the value of the information element (IE) h:rfhopping-channelin the message is 1.


----End

Example //Activating BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping DEA GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Configuring FH groups and setting FREQ2 to the BCCH frequency ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1, FREQ2=11, FREQ2=12; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=1, HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH, FREQ1=1,FREQ3=12; SET GCELLHOPTP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


678



//Running the follow command for all TRXs participating in FH SET GTRXHOP: TRXID=0, HOPTYPE=BaseBand_FH; //Running the follow command to set the channels of all TRXs participating in FH SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=0, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=1; ACT GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Verifying BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=Hop, TRXIDLST="0";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


679



188

Configuring Antenna Frequency Hopping

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The following BTSs support this feature: – The BTS3012 series not using the QTRU support this feature. – The 3900 series base stations using the DRFU or RRU3004 support this feature. – There are at lease two antennas in a cell participating in antenna frequency hopping.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is exclusive with the features GBFD-510104 Multi-site cell, GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage, GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology), GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity, GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass, and GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type.

l


Context Antenna frequency hopping enables downlink data on each TRX to be randomly transmitted on other TRXs. This improves receive quality of the MS from the BCCH TRX and transmit quality of the BCCH TRX, thereby improving network performance. If a cell supports both baseband frequency hopping and antenna frequency hopping, the TRX involved in baseband frequency hopping must also participate in antenna frequency hopping. When the cell is active, the antenna frequency hopping feature can be configured quickly.



680


l


1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to YES_HPANT(Yes).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP to configure antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Cell Index and TRX ID to appropriate values.

4.


Quick Configuration Procedure 1.

l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP to quickly configure antenna frequency hopping. In this step, set Cell Index and Cell Antenna Hopping to appropriate values. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOPANT to query Cell Antenna Hopping. Expected result: Cell Antenna Hopping is set to YES_HPANT(Yes).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANT. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No). NOTE

When the cell is active, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPANTQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Cell Antenna Hopping to NO_HPANT(No).

----End

Example //Activating Antenna Frequency Hopping DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=YES_HPANT; ADD GCELLHOPANTGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPTRXINDEX=0, TRXID1=1, TRXID2=2; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Verifying Antenna Frequency Hopping LST GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Deactivating Antenna Frequency Hopping SET GCELLHOPANT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HPANTMODE=NO_HPANT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


681



189

Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell or GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell.

l


Context The BCCH dense frequency multiplexing technique is used in networks with limited frequency resources. It helps to reduce the number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH TRXs so that more frequencies can be used as TCHs, increasing the system capacity. NOTE

If BCCH dense frequency multiplexing is applied with the increase of the cell load, the handover from a non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX will be triggered, leading to the increase on the handover of the entire network.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TIGHT BCCH Switch to ON(On). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

682


l

l


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Level Thresh for Assign BCCH Under TBCCH and Quality Thresh for Assign BCCH Under TBCCH based on the site requirements.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Non-BCCH Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO to an appropriate value.


Make a call in the cell configured with this feature. Expected result: The call is successfully set up and the voice quality is good.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT. In this step, set Object Type to CELL(Cell) and Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified. Expected result: The value of Sub Channel Status is Occupied.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Basic Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TIGHT BCCH Switch to OFF(Off).

----End

Example //Activating BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=ON; //Deactivating BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing SET GCELLCHMGBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


683



190

Configuring IBCA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A built-in PCH and a pair of service processing boards are required. An IP interface board is required to support inter-BSC IBCA.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping), GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization, GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm. If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature depends on the following features: GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP (when inter-BSC IBCA is supported). – This feature and the following features and functions are mutually exclusive: GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, the very early assignment function in GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment, GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell, GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing, GBFD-119406 High Speed Circuit Switched Data, GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell, and GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell features. . If Soft-Synchronized Network is enabled, this feature and the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP are mutually exclusive.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The IBCA feature is implemented on a synchronous network. Therefore, the transmission and power supply must be stable. If the transmission or power supply is unstable, for example, the power supply is often disconnected, or transmission links are disconnected intermittently, frequent synchronizations are performed and therefore call drops occur. Only one transmission link disconnection and one out-of-lock alarm are allowed each month at each site.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


684



Context When the network admits a new call, the interference between the established calls and the new call is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network and therefore enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. In addition, this increases the network capacity while ensuring the voice quality in the entire network. Table 190-1 Data preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

IBCA Info Report Period Within BSC

IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD

Recommended value: 200

Dyn Measurement on a Non-IBCA Neighbor

NONIBCADYNM EAEN

Recommended value: NO (NO)

IBCA RxLev Offset

IBCARXLEVOFF SET



Interf. Priority Allowed

INTERFPRIALL OW

Recommended value: NO (No)


IBCA Allowed

IBCAALLOWED



IBCA Soft Block Switch

IBCASOFTBLKS WITCH



IBCA FR/EFR Soft Block Threshold

IBCAFRSOFTBLKTHRD



If this parameter is set to a large value, the IBCA interference measurement result reporting is delayed and the channel assignment is affected.

Data Source Engineering design


Setting this parameter to YES (YES) affects the accuracy of the IBCA interference measurement.

If the congestion rate is high and TCH Traffic Busy Threshold is set to a value greater than 90, you can adjust the value of this parameter in steps of 1 or 2 dB.


685


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

IBCA HR Soft Block Threshold

IBCAHRSOFTBLKTHRD


IBCA AMR FR Soft Block Threshold

IBCAAFRSOFTBLKTHRD


IBCA AMR HR Soft Block Threshold

IBCAAHRSOFTBLKTHRD


IBCA WAMR FR Soft Block Threshold

IBCAWAFRSOFTBLKTHRD


IBCA Soft Block SAIC Offset

IBCASOFTBLKS AICOFF



IBCA Max. Interference Source Num.

IBCAMAXINTFS RCNUM



IBCA Downlink Path Loss Offset

IBCADLPATHLO SSOFF



IBCA Service Cell Pathloss

IBCASCELLPAT HLOSS







If this parameter is set to a small value, the calculated interference is incorrect and therefore the IBCA evaluation is inaccurate, affecting the network performance.


Data Source BSC internal planning




686


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

IBCA Pathloss Offset

IBCAPATHLOSS OFF



IBCA Call Information Filter

IBCACALLINFO FILTERLEN



IBCA ICDM Switch

IBCAICDMSWIT CH

Recommended value: NO (No)


IBCA Path Lose Filter Factor

IBCAPLFILTFAC TOR



IBCA Pathloss Est of Non. MR Ncell

IBCANCELLPAT HLOSSESTIMAT E



IBCA Non Measurement Ncell Stat. Num

IBCANONMEAN CELLSTATNUM



IBCA MAIO Using Method

IBCAMAIOUSM TD

Recommended value: 0(Max. BSC internal optimized MAIO) planning

IBCA Init. Power Control RexLevDL Offset

IBCAINITPCRXL EVDLOFFSET


IBCA Init. Power Control RexLevUL Offset

IBCAINITPCRXL EVULOFFSET


IBCA Init. Pwr Ctrl Rx Qual DL Offset

IBCAINITPCRXQUALDLOFFSE T


IBCA Init. Pwr Ctrl Rx Qual UL Offset

IBCAINITPCRX QUALULOFFSE T


Target CIR Offset of IBCA New Call

IBCANEWCALL CIROFFSET



Target CIR Offset of IBCA Set-up Call

IBCACALLTAR GETCIROFFSET



If this parameter is set to a large value, the downlink initial transmit power increases.

If this parameter is set to a large value, the uplink initial transmit power increases.

If this parameter is set to a large value, the downlink initial transmit power increases.

If this parameter is set to a large value, the uplink initial transmit power increases.


Data Source





687




Parameter Name

Parameter ID

IBCA Set-up Call Soft Block Threshold Offset

IBCACALLSOFT BLOCKTHOFFS ET



Idle TCH Threshold on BCCH TRX

IBCAFREEBCCH CHANTHRSHOL D



If this parameter is set to a large value, the congestion rate increases.

Data Source

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an XPUa or XPUb board to the MPS or EPS. In this step, set Logical function type to MCP.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXBASE (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Basic Attributes of TRX > TRX Base; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) command with Maximum Number of PDCH of the TCH TRX set to 0. NOTE

Disable dynamic PDCH conversion on the FH layer because it is not supported by IBCA.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) command with Hop Mode set to RF_FH(RF FH) and Hop Mode set to an appropriate value.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command to set its parameters as listed in Table 190-1.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLMAIOPLAN (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to with MAIO 1, MAIO 2, …, and MAIO 24 set to appropriate values based on the cell MAIO plan.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) command with Channel MAIO set to an appropriate value based on the MAIO plan. Channel MAIO specifies the MAIO of the channel in the TRX. Eight channels in the same TRX have the same MAIO.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


688


190 Configuring IBCA NOTE

The MAIOs configured for TRXs in a cell are part of the MAIOs planned for the cell. For example, two TRXs are configured for a cell but three MAIOs are planned for the cell. The first two MAIOs are configured for the two TRXs.

7.

Configure the IBCA interference neighboring cells. – If Neighboring Cell Type of both a source cell and its neighboring cell on the original network is HANDOVERNCELL(Handover Neighboring Cell), run the MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) command with Neighboring Cell set to HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL(Handover and IBCA Neighboring Cell) and IBCA RxLev Offset to 10. – If no neighboring cells have been configured for the source cell on the original network, run the ADD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported)command to add a neighboring cell for the source cell. In this step, set Neighboring Cell Type to IBCANCELL(IBCA Neighboring Cell) and set IBCA RxLev Offset to 10.

8.

l

Configure the BSC software parameters.Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with IBCA Info Report Period Within BSC set to 200 and Dyn Measurement on a Non-IBCA Neighbor set to NO(NO).


Trace the RSL signaling over the Abis interface in an IBCA-enabled cell.

2.

Select the RSL signaling over the same timeslot of the same TRX board at different time points.

3.

Step 3 Compare MAIOs allocated to channels at different time points. Expected result: The MAIOs are different, indicating that the IBCA algorithm takes effect. Figure 190-1 and Figure 190-2 show different MAIOs. Figure 190-1 MAIO 1

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


689



Figure 190-2 MAIO 2

l


Remove an IBCA interference neighboring cell. – If Neighboring Cell Type of both a source cell and its neighboring cell on the original network is HANDOVERNCELL(Handover Neighboring Cell), run the MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) command with Neighboring Cell Type set to HANDOVERNCELL (Handover Neighboring Cell). – If no neighboring cells have been configured for the source cell on the original network, run the RMV G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to remove the configured neighboring cell.

2.

Run the SET GCELLCHMGAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Channel Management > Advanced Channel Management Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command with IBCA Allowed to NO(No).

CAUTION Changing the HSN will cause cell resets. Therefore, perform this operation only when the traffic is light. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELLMAGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set HSN to the value used before IBCA is deployed.

----End

Example //Activating IBCA SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=SDCCH8; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=1, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=PDTCH; SET GTRXBASE: TRXID=10, MAXPDCHNUM=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


690



MOD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HSN=0, TSC=4, HOPMODE=RF_FH; SET GCELLMAIOPLAN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, MAIO1=0, MAIO2=3, MAIO3=6; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1, CHNO=0, TRXMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1, CHNO=1, TRXMAIO=0; …… SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1, CHNO=7, TRXMAIO=0; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERANDIBCANCELL, IBCARXLEVOFFSET=10; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=IBCANCELL, IBCARXLEVOFFSET=10; SET OTHSOFTPARA: IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD=200, NONIBCADYNMEAEN=NO; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IBCAALLOWED=YES; //Deactivating IBCA MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE= HANDOVERNCELL; RMV G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1; SET GCELLCHMGAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IBCAALLOWED=NO; MOD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPINDEX=0, HSN=12;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


691


191 Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network

191

Configuring Soft-Synchronized Network

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUa/GOUc/GOUd board is configured. – The BTS supports the feature Soft-Synchronized Network.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP has been configured before this feature is activated. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell. – You are advised to use this feature together with GBFD-115801 ICC,GBFD-115821 EICC,GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC and GBFD-117002 IBCA.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BSC initial configuration is complete. The BSC is configured with at least two BTSs. – Each BTS is configured with at least two cells. In addition, the longitude, latitude, and antenna azimuth of each cell are configured.

Context The soft-synchronized network applies to the scenario of tight frequency reuse and requires the cooperation of network planning and features such as IBCA. It can effectively improve the performance of the KPIs associated with the wireless network. In addition, this feature can convert an asynchronous network into a synchronous network. In cooperation with other associated technologies, this technology eliminates random and unpredictable interference and therefore increases the system capacity. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


692



NOTE

l The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. l This feature can be used together with the feature GBFD-117002 IBCA to improve the frequency utilization and increase the network capacity. l This feature is applicable to the scenario where TDM transmission is used between the BSC and BTS, that is, Abis TDM over E1/T1/STM-1. In a scenario where an IP network is used between the BSC and BTS, including Abis IP over E1/T1/STM-1 and Abis IP over FE/GE, the Soft-Synchronized Network feature is not supported.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure Configuring an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS. In this step, specify BTS Index (Not required on the CME) or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized task. To configure multiple BTSs, run this command for each BTS you want to add. Site Sync Zone of each BTS must be set to the same value. NOTE

BTS Symbol Offset is optional. This parameter specifies the frame offset between BTSs and is set as required.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG. In this step, set Reference BTS Index (Not required on the CME) to the index of the BTS that supports the softsynchronized network. In addition, set both Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON) and Support BSC AISS to NO (NO).

3.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NCELL to add a pair of neighboring cells in the BSC. In this step, set AISS Task Index to the index of the soft-synchronized network task specified in Step 1. Then, set First Cell Index and Second Cell Index to appropriate values. NOTE

A pair of neighboring cells in the BSC are automatically generated based on certain rules. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells as required.

Configuring an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network The configuration of the soft-synchronized network between BSC1 and BSC2 is used as an example. Each BSC has only one BTS. IP-based inter-BSC interconnection is configured.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSAISS at BSC1 and BSC2 respectively. In this step, specify BTS Index (Not required on the CME) or BTS Name of the BTS to participate in the intra-BSC soft-synchronized task. Site Sync Zone of each BTS must be set to the same value.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC1. In this step, set Reference BTS Index (Not required on the CME) to the index of the BTS that supports the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Time Adjustment Switch and Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON), and set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to YES(YES).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AISSCFG at BSC2. In this step, set Reference BTS Index (Not required on the CME) to the index of a BTS that supports Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

693



the soft-synchronized network. In addition, set Offset Time Adjustment Switch and Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON), Support BSC AISS to YES, Base BSC to NO, and Control BSC DPC to the DPC of BSC1. 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT2GCELL at BSC1 to configure a cell under BSC2 as an external cell of BSC1.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL at BSC1 to configure the external cell added in Step 4 as a neighboring cell of a cell under BSC1.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD EXTNCELL at BSC1 to add a pair of neighboring cells between BSCs. NOTE

A pair of neighboring cells between BSCs are automatically generated according to certain rules. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements, reconfigure the neighboring cells as required. Steps 4 to 6 are performed to add a pair of optimal neighboring cells between BSCs.

l

Verification Procedure Verifying the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information about the soft-synchronized network. NOTE

If you do not specify AISS Task Index, the information about all the soft-synchronized network tasks is queried.

Expected result: Check whether AISS Task Index of the added intra-BSC softsynchronized network exists. If the index exists, the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network is added successfully. 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP NCELLTBL to query information about neighboring cell pairs within a BSC.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AISSRUNSTATE to query the BTS synchronization information.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset in the synchronization between BTSs.

Verifying the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST AISSCFG to query the information about the soft-synchronized network. Expected result: The value of Support BSC AISS for BSC1 is YES and the value of Control BSC DPC for BSC2 is the signaling point of the control BSC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BSCSYNCINFO to query the information about the synchronization between BSCs. NOTE

l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC1 to query the state of the local BSC. l Set Adjacent BSC DPC to the signaling point of BSC2 to query the state of the collaborative BSC.

Expected result: The value of BSC Sync State for BSC1 and BSC2 is Adjusted. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSYNCINFO to query the frame offset in the synchronization between BTSs. Expected result: The value of BTS status for the BTS is Synchronized.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


694


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV AISSCFG to remove a soft-synchronized network task. In this step, specify BTS Index (Not required on the CME) or BTS Name of the BTS involved in the intra-BSC or inter-BSC soft-synchronized network.

----End

Example //Activating Soft-Synchronized Network SET BTSAISS: IDTYPE=BYIDX, BTSID=0, SYMOFFSET=12, SITESYNCZONE=1; ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0, GATHON=ON, ADTON=ON, BASEBTSID=0, REINITTBL=NO, ISSPTBSCAISS=NO, ISBASICBSC=YES, GATHST=00&10, GATHET=08&50, BSCGATHST=10&00, BSCGATHET=12&00; //Deactivating Soft-Synchronized Network RMV AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


695


192 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization

192

Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization

This section describes how to activate the optional feature GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3006C, BTS3002E, and BTS3900B/E do not support the feature. – In the case of the BTS3012/BTS3012AE, the DGPS board needs to be added. – In the case of the DBS3900/BTS3900/BTS3900A, the USCU board needs to be added.

l


l


l

Others – In Frame Bit Offset can be changed only in TDM mode.

Context Converting an asynchronous network into a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference, increase the network capacity, and improve the performance of the KPIs related to the radio network. The following procedure takes how to configure the GPS synchronization of the BTS3900 GSM as an example.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBRD (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Board > BTS Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a USCU board. In this step, set Board Type to USCU(USCU). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

696


192 Configuring BTS GPS Synchronization

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > Right click USCU Board > Properties > USCU Board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES), set GPS or Glonass to GPS (GPS), GPS Antenna Delay to 800, and Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power). NOTE

GPS or Glonass needs to be set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. Antenna Power Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPS Antenna Delay needs to be set according to the feeder length.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches) at the sites where same frequencies and TSCs are configured. In this step, set In Frame BitOffset to 0 for one BTS.

5.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Clock Type of BTS; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying GBTS Parameters in Batches). In this step, set In Frame BitOffset to 80 for the other BTS.

l

Verification Procedure None.

l


----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, BT=USCU; SET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNALONG=800, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER; SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK; SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK, FRAMEBITOFFSET=0; SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK, FRAMEBITOFFSET=80;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


697



193

Configuring Network Support SAIC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS supports Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC).

Context SAIC is a technique that restraints both intra-frequency and inter-frequency interference when the MS receives signals through a single antenna. SAIC aims to minimize the impact of interference on the receive quality of downlink signals through signaling processing. The SAIC-capable MS has a greater capability of bearing interference than the SAIC-incapable MS. Therefore, the power control policy can be adjusted for the SAIC-capable MS to reduce the transmit power of the BTS, reducing interference in the entire network.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SAIC Allowed to YES(Yes).

2.

Set power control adjustment. – When Huawei II power control algorithm is used:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


698



a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR2 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control II of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 1.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to ON(On).

– When Huawei III power control algorithm is used: a.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWR3 (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Parameters for Power Control III of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Threshold Adjust for SAIC to 3.


On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate A interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Use the MS to make a CS voice call. Check the value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance in the information element (IE) classmark-information-type3 of the Classmark Update message. This value indicates the SAIC capability of the MS. Expected result: The value of Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance is Support SAIC.

2.

On the BSC6900 LMT, initiate Abis interface RSL message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain RSL Messages on the Abis Interface. Check the value of the userdefined IE MS Capability in the channel activation command sent from the BSC6900 to the BTS during the assignment request process. Expected result: The value of SAIC support capability is 1. This indicates that the MS supports SAIC.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPWRBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > Basic Parameters for Power Control of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SAIC Allowed to NO(No).

2.

When Huawei II power control algorithm is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC PC Adjust to OFF (Off).

----End

Example //Activating Network Support SAIC SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICALLOWED=YES; SET GCELLPWR2: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICTHREDAPDTVALUE=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=ON;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


699



//Deactivating Network Support SAIC SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SAICALLOWED=NO; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


700



194

Configuring Mega BSC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113706 Mega BSC. With this feature, a BSC supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs when IP over FE/GE/ STM-1 is used over the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces. This feature enables a BSC to support more subscribers while maintaining the speech quality.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118602 A over IP, and GBFD-118603 Gb over IP.

l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated with the license items Maximum TRX number allowed Resource (per TRX) and Mega BSC (per TRX) set to 8192 both.

l

Dependencies on Running Environment – The BSC6900 hardware version must be V900R013 or later. The BSC boards must be DPUf, DPUg, XPUb, SCUb, GCUa, GCGa, OMUc, FG2c, FG2d, GOUc, GOUd, or POUc. – 10GE ports numbered from 8 to 11 are recommended for the interconnection between SCUb boards. The SCUbs are connected in star mode, and support 8192 TRXs in only three subracks that are fully configured. – The TRX specification of each interface board, DPU board, and XPU board does not change. The BSC capacity expansion is achieved by adding the number of configured interface boards, DPU boards, and XPU boards.

l

Requirements for Transmission Network – IP over FE/GE/STM-1 is used over the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – This feature does not have any requirements for other NEs or third-party devices.

l

Other Prerequisites – This feature does not have any other prerequisites.

Context l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Note Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

701



– None l

Data Preparation – This feature does not require data preparations.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – For a newly deployed site: 1.

The activation method is the same as that for initial configuration. For details, see the BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. A BSC supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs.

– For reconfiguration: To enable a BSC to support a maximum of 8192 TRXs, perform the following steps:

l

1.

Add a TRX board by referring to Configuring RF Units.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLFREQ (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click GSM cell > Assign Frequency; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a frequency for the cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GTRX (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click Cell > ADD TRX; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a TRX.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click GSM cell > Add TRX; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the binding relationship between the logical TRX and the physical TRX board.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHAN (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Channel Type > Channel Type; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) to set the TRX channel information.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) to set the attributes for the TRX board.


Query the channel usage of newly added TRXs by referring to Monitoring Channel Status. Expected result: The channels of newly added TRXs can be used.

l



----End

Example /*Activation Procedure*/ //Adding a frequency for the cell ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FREQ1=2; //Adding a TRX ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXID=1, TRXNAME="TRX_1", FREQ=2, ISMAINBCCH=NO, TRXNO=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


702



//Adding the binding relationship between the logical TRX and the physical TRX board ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXIDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=1, IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, TRXTP=TRU, TRXPN=0, CN=0, SRN=1, SN=4; //Setting the TRX channel information SET GTRXCHAN: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=1, CHNO=0, CHTYPE=TCHFR, GPRSCHPRI=EGPRSNORCH, TSPRIORITY=0, CHANRSV=NO; //Setting the attributes for the TRX board SET GTRXDEV: IDTYPE=BYID, TRXID=1, POWL=3, POWT=DEFAULT, OPTL=L0, SDFLAG=ENABLE, TCHAJFLAG=NO, PL8PSK=0, PWRSPNR=DEFAULT, RCVMD=INDEPENDENT, SNDMD=NOCOMB, CPS=YES, FREQREUSEMODE=LOOSE, PAOPTILEVEL=L3, OUTHOPWROVERLOADTHRESHOLD=15, INHOPWROVERLOADTHRESHOLD=8, PL16QAM=0, PL32QAM=0, DSSTRXOFFLINE=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


703



195

Configuring PS Downlink DTX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119507 PS Downlink DTX. With the PS Downlink DTX feature, the BSC decreases the number of dummy control blocks sent on PDCHs and the number of data blocks unnecessarily retransmitted over the Um interface. This reduces the BTS power consumption and network interference, improving the service quality.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – A built-in PCU is configured. That is, the DPUd or DPUg board is configured.

l

Requirements for Transmission Network – This feature does not have any special requirements for the transmission network.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – This feature does not have any special requirements for other NEs or third-party devices.

l

Other Prerequisites – Support DL PACK Retransmission is set to YES(YES).

Context This feature applies to two scenarios: no MS access and no valid data to be sent. l

No MS access indicates that no uplink or downlink TBF is established on a PDCH. When PS Downlink DTX is enabled in this scenario, downlink dummy blocks are not sent on this PDCH, achieving downlink discontinuous transmission.

l

No valid data to be sent indicates that no single block assignment is triggered on a PDCH, or an uplink or downlink TBF is established on a PDCH but are not scheduled by Uplink State Flag (USF) or Relative Reserved Block Period (RRBP). When PS Downlink DTX is

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


704



enabled in this scenario, downlink dummy blocks are not sent on this PDCH, achieving downlink discontinuous transmission. l

When the downlink PACK retransmission function is enabled, the frequency for sending downlink PACK blocks can be modified.

l


l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

PS DTX

PSDTX

Setting this parameter to Network DTX(ON when no MS is planning accessed) or ENHANCEDDTX(ON when no valid data needs to be sent) shuts down the TRX power amplifier in off-peak hours. This reduces power consumption and network interference over the Um interface. Setting this parameter to ENHANCEDDTX(ON when no valid data needs to be sent) enhances the optimization effect, but deteriorates the accessibility because MSs with poor compatibility cannot properly send uplink data.


Data Source

705



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

DL PACK Block DlPACKSENDPERIOD If this parameter is set to a Network Send Period large value, the number of planning PACK blocks sent by the BSC decreases. Therefore, interference with the network decreases, and the PS delay and retransmission rate increase when the block error rate is high. If this parameter is set to a small value, the number of PACK blocks sent by the BSC increases. Therefore, interference with the network increases, and the PS delay and retransmission rate decrease when the block error rate is high.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Customized Network Optimization Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PS DTX to DTX(ON when no MS is accessed) or ENHANCEDDTX(ON when no valid data needs to be sent).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DL PACK Block Send Period to any values other than 0.

Verification Procedure – No MS access 1.

Start Um Interface PS Trace and select Dummy Message to query whether Packet Downlink Dummy Control Block messages are sent on non-occupied PDCHs on non-BCCH TRXs. Expected result: Packet Downlink Dummy Control Block messages are not sent on non-occupied PDCHs on non-BCCH TRXs.

– No valid data to be sent 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Start Um Interface PS Trace and select Dummy Message to query whether Packet Downlink Dummy Control Block messages are sent on non-occupied PDCHs on non-BCCH TRXs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

706



Expected result: Packet Downlink Dummy Control Block messages are not sent on non-occupied PDCHs on non-BCCH TRXs. 2.

Use an MS supporting GPRS or EGPRS to perform a PS ping test. During the ping test, check in the Um Interface PS Trace results: – The period of sending PACK blocks during the delayed downlink TBF release period after the downlink data transmission is complete. – Packet Downlink Dummy Control Block message is displayed after Packet Downlink Ack/Nack or Egprs Packet Downlink Ack/Nack whose FAI is 1 in the Um Interface PS Trace results. Expected result: – The period of sending PACK blocks during the delayed downlink TBF release period is longer than or equal to the period specified by DL PACK Block Send Period. – No Packet Downlink Dummy Control Block message is displayed after Packet Downlink Ack/Nack or Egprs Packet Downlink Ack/Nack whose FAI is 1.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Customized Network Optimization Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PS DTX to OFF(OFF).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set DL PACK Block Send Period to 0.

----End

Example /*Activating PS Downlink DTX*/ //No MS access SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PSDTX=DTX; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DlPACKSENDPERIOD=5; //No valid data to be sent SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PSDTX= ENHANCEDDTX; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DlPACKSENDPERIOD=5; /*Deactivating PS Downlink DTX*/ SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PSDTX=OFF; SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DlPACKSENDPERIOD=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


707



196

Configuring PS Uplink DTX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119508 PS Uplink DTX. With the PS Uplink DTX feature, the BSC decreases the frequency of scheduling extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods or sends system information instructing MSs not to send dummy control blocks for extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods. This reduces the MS power consumption and network interference, improving the service quality.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – A built-in PCU is configured. That is, the DPUd or DPUg board is configured.

l

Requirements for Transmission Network – This feature does not have any special requirements for the transmission network.

l


Context When PS Uplink DTX is enabled, if an MS confirms that the BSC has correctly received all uplink data blocks, and no uplink dummy block is sent on the uplink extended TBF in the inactive period, the BSC does not abnormally release uplink TBF even if N3101 overflows. With PS Uplink DTX enabled, the BSC can reduce the frequency for scheduling the uplink TBF in the inactive period. l


l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Preparation Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

708



Parameter Parameter ID Name

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Not Send EXTUTBFNODATA Dummy Message with Extended Uplink TBF

Network Set this parameter to SEND (SEND) if the Inactive Period of planning Extended Uplink TBF parameter in the SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Customized Network Optimization Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command is set to 0. Set this parameter to SEND(SEND) or NOTSEND(NOTSEND) if the Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF parameter in the SET GCELLPRIVATEOPTPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Customized Network Optimization Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command is set to a value other than 0. If this parameter is set to SEND (SEND), the traffic volume on the Um interface and the MS power consumption increase. If this parameter is set to NOTSEND(NOTSEND), the traffic volume on the Um interface and MS power consumption decrease.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


709



Parameter Parameter ID Name

Parameter Setting

Scheduling Period for Inactive Periods

The larger the value of this Network parameter, the longer the planning minimum access delay in transmitting uplink data for extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods and the fewer uplink dummy control blocks sent by the MS. The smaller the value of this parameter, the shorter the minimum access delay in transmitting uplink data for extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods and the more uplink dummy control blocks sent by the MS.

INACTSCHPERIOD

Data Source

Inactive UPEXTTBFINACTDELAY Setting this parameter to a large Network Period of value increases the uplink TBF planning Extended release delay, wasting uplink Uplink TBF resources. Setting this parameter to a small value leads to frequent uplink TBF releases and establishments, increasing the delay in the delay tests for the Attach and Ping services. Set the release delay a little longer than the duration of the interval between two discontinuous uplink transmissions.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Not Send Dummy Message with Extended Uplink TBF to NOTSEND(NOTSEND), PS Uplink DTX Optimization to ON (On) and Scheduling Period for Inactive Periods to any values other than 0.


Start Um Interface PS Trace and select Dummy Message to query the value of extutbf-no-data in Packet PSI13. Expected result: The value of ext-utbf-no-data is 1.

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Use an MS that supports PS Uplink DTX, that is, an MS that does not send dummy control blocks when extended uplink TBFs are in inactive periods, to perform PS service verification. In the PS Um tracing result, check whether there is a Packet Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

710



Uplink Dummy Control Block message after the Uplink Data Block message whose countdown field is 0. Expected result: The MS does not send the Packet Uplink Dummy Control Block message after confirming that the BSC has sent all uplink data blocks. 3.

Use an MS that does not support PS Uplink DTX, that is, an MS that still sends dummy control blocks when extended uplink TBFs are in inactive periods, to perform PS service verification. In the PS Um tracing result, check whether there is a result on whether the interval between two times of scheduling is greater than or equal to the specified period of scheduling extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods after the Uplink Data Block message whose countdown field is 0. Expected result: After an MS confirms that all uplink data blocks have been sent on the network side, the interval between two times of scheduling is greater than or equal to the specified period of scheduling extended uplink TBFs in inactive periods.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Not Send Dummy Message with Extended Uplink TBF to SEND(SEND), PS Uplink DTX Optimization to OFF(Off) and Scheduling Period for Inactive Periods to 0.

----End

Example //Activating PS Uplink DTX SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=NOTSEND, PsDtxLaOptiSwitch=ON, INACTSCHPERIOD=5; //Deactivating PS Uplink DTX SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EXTUTBFNODATA=SEND, PsDtxLaOptiSwitch=OFF, INACTSCHPERIOD=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


711



197

Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115821 EICC, GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. – Only the RRU3008 V1 and RRU3908 V1 supports this feature in the downlink.

l


l


l


Context AFC is a frequency correction algorithm used on the base station side for fast-moving MSs. It ensures reliability of radio links carrying high-quality speech services for MSs moving at 500 km/h and also ensures service continuity.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


712



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

UL Frequency Adjust Switch

FREQADJ

The parameter determines whether to enable the automatic frequency correction function in the uplink for the BTS. Enable this function in highspeed railway scenarios. Use the default value of this parameter in other scenarios.

Network plan

DL Frequency Adjust Switch

DLFREQADJ

The parameter determines whether to enable the automatic frequency correction function in the downlink for the BTS. This function must be enabled with the automatic frequency correction function in the uplink.

Network plan

Procedure l


l

If...

Then...

The AFC function needs to be enabled in the uplink

Set UL Frequency Adjust Switch to YES(Yes).

The AFC function needs to be enabled in the downlink

Set both UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to YES(Yes).


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches).

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXT.


713



2.

If...

Then...

The value of UL Frequency Adjust Switch is YES(Yes)

The AFC function is enabled in the uplink.

The values of both UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch are YES(Yes)

The AFC function is enabled in the downlink.

Initiate a call in a fast-moving vehicle. On the LMT, click Trace. In the navigation tree, choose Trace > GSM Services > Abis Interface CS Trace. In the displayed dialog box, click RSL in the Trace Type area. Then, check the value of Uplink Receive Quality in the measurement report. If the AFC function has been activated, the value of Uplink Receive Quality decreases. NOTE

Uplink Receive Quality is specified by the "rxquel-ul" field in the measurement report. The value ranges from 0 to 7. A small value indicates good quality, for example, 0 indicates that the quality is the best. A large value indicates poor quality, for example, 7 indicates that the quality is the worst.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch and DL Frequency Adjust Switch to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES; //Verifying Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) LST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0; //Deactivating Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=NO, DLFREQADJ=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


714



198

Configuring Fast Move Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support the feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.

l


Context Handovers along railway lines need to be completed quickly because users move fast from the coverage of one cell to that of another cell. To reduce failures, a second handover must be initiated quickly upon a handover failure (for example, interference occurs abruptly on the radio interface). The fast move handover algorithm, which is optimized on the basis of the current algorithm, can trigger better cell handover within a short period.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both Quick Handover Enable and Quick PBGT Handover Enable to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Fast Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

715



Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration to appropriate values. NOTE

You can Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell) to query information about the neighboring cells of this cell. If this cell is configured with external neighboring cells, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value to appropriate values.

3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch and UL Frequency Adjust Value to appropriate values.


Move the MS away from the serving cell until the frequency offset in the measurement report, CH RQD, or HO DETECT message is a negative value and the moving speed of the MS is greater than Quick Move Speed Threshold. When the frequency offset information fails to be reported or the frequency offset information is invalid, the uplink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, the downlink level in the serving cell is lower than Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, and the path loss of chain neighboring cells is lower than the path loss of the serving cell minus the sum of Quick Handover Offset and Quick Handover Offset for Neighbor Cell.

2.

On the LMT, trace BSSAP messages over the A interface. Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Performed message to the MSC with the handover cause value "better-cell".

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Quick PBGT Handover Enable set to NO (No). NOTE

Quick handover algorithms consist of the frequency offset handover algorithm and the quick PBGT handover algorithm. Quick Handover Enable is the switch that controls the frequency offset handover and the quick PBGT handover. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, you can deactivate the quick PBGT handover by setting Quick Handover Enable to NO(No), but the frequency offset handover is also deactivated.

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


716



Example // Activating Fast Move Handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=YES; SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, FREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=255; //Deactivating Fast Move Handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, QUICKPBGTHOEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


717



199

Configuring Chain Cell Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context This feature enables fast-moving MSs to move in chain cells by predicting the moving direction and thereby increases the handover success rate and improves service quality.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring cell. In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). If a cell has been added as a neighboring cell, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Neighboring Cell Type to HANDOVERNCELL(Handover Neighboring cell) and Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST G2GNCELL to query the value of Chain Neighbor Cell. Expected result: The value of Chain Neighbor Cell is YES(Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

718


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Chain Neighbor Cell to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Chain Cell Handover ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ISCHAINNCELL=YES; //Verifying Chain Cell Handover LST G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542; //Deactivating Chain Cell Handover MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1024, NBR2GNCELLID=2542, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


719



200

Configuring Multi-Site Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510104 Multi-Site Cell.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The base station must be DBS3900. – Table 200-1 lists the rules for mixed RXU configuration. Table 200-1 Rules for mixed RXU configuration Scenario

Rules for Mixed RXU Configuration

RXUs configured in the same subsite

Only the following mixed RXU combinations can be configured: l RRU3008 V1+RRU3008 V2 l RRU3908 V1+RRU3908 V2

RXUs configured in different subsites in a multi-site cell

All RRUs (except the RRU3004) that use the same frequency band can be configured in a mixed manner.

– Table 200-2 shows the hardware for supporting this feature. Table 200-2 Dependencies on hardware TRX/Subsite x Subsite

GTMU Type

RF Module

CPRI Rate (Gbit/ s)

O8*30

GTMUb

RRU3926

Equal to or greater than 2.5

O12*18

RRU3928 RRU3929 RRU3942

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


720



TRX/Subsite x Subsite

GTMU Type

RF Module

CPRI Rate (Gbit/ s)

O8*18

GTMUb

RRU3008 V2


O12*10

RRU3908 V2

O6*24

RRU3926 RRU3928 RRU3929 RRU3942

O6*12

GTMUb

RRU3004

O8*9

RRU3008 V1

O9*8

RRU3908 V1


O10*6 O6*6

GTMU and GTMUb

All types of RRUs


NOTE

Oa*b indicates a TRXs/subsites x b subsites. For example, O8*30 indicates 8 TRXs/subsites x 30 subsites. When a multi-site cell is configured with several different RXUs, the specification of the multi-site cell is the lowest among all specifications of these RXUs. For example, the specification of multi-site cell A, which consists of RRU3008 V1 and RRU3926, is the specification of RRU3008 V1.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with any of the followings: GBFD-115830 VAMOS, GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown, GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass, GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type, GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation, GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing, GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity, GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology), GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping, GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network, GBFD-114001 Extended Cell, MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM), GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage, GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface, GBFD-119308 Intermodulation Testing, GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing (The multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with dual-PA power sharing), and GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) (The multi-site cell feature cannot be used together with cross-module RF hopping)

l


Context The multi-site cell feature enables multiple subsites to be configured as one logical cell. Such cell is also called a cascaded cell. A subsite is defined as an area physically covered by multiple RRUs that are served by one BBU. In coverage scenarios such as high-speed railways, tunnels, Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


721



or indoor space, the use of cascaded cells can reduce handovers, increase coverage efficiency, and therefore improve user experience. l

In a multi-site cell, only one primary subsite can be configured.

l

A TRX board bound with carriers can be added only to the primary subsite. TRX boards that are not bound with any carriers can be added only to the secondary subsite.

l


Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > BTS Location Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the primary subsite with Location Group No. set to the desired one and Is Main Local Group set to YES(YES).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSLOCGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > BTS Location Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the secondary subsite with Location Group No. set to a desired one and Is Main Local Group set to NO(NO).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > Board To Location Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RXU to the primary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No..

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > Board To Location Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RXU to the secondary subsite after specifying Location Group No., Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No..

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Board > Location Group Binding Relations; CME batch modification center: not supported) to bind a carrier in the primary subsite to an idle channel on the TRX board in the secondary subsite after specifying Main Location Group No., Sub-Location Group No., TRX ID, Cabinet No., Subrack No., Slot No., and Sub-Location Group TRX Board Pass No.. NOTE

l This configuration takes effect only when the TRXs in the primary subsite are the same as those in the secondary subsite. For example, in a multi-site cell with four subsites, subsite A is the primary subsite and is configured with three logical TRXs, and subsites B, C, and D are the secondary subsites. In this situation, you must bind the three logical TRXs in the primary subsite to the idle channels on the TRX boards in subsites B, C, and D. l All the subsites under a BTS or cell will be deleted when the BTS or cell is deleted.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Directly Magnifier BTS Flag set to YES(Yes).

7.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

722


l

l


If...

Then...

Only the power amplifier for the carriers under the operating subsite needs to be started,

Set Location Group Power Switch to OnlyCurPwrLoc(Only Current Working Location TRXes be Turned On).

The power amplifier for carriers under all subsites needs to be started,

Set Location Group Power Switch to ALLPwrLoc(All Location TRXes be Turned On).


Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. For details, see Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber in the BSC6900 LMT User Guide.

2.

Use the MS to call a phone in the test subsite.

3.

Check the result of CS single user tracing. The expected result: The location group no carried in the Channel Activation message is the test location group number.


----End

Example //Activation procedure ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, ISMAINLOCGRP=YES; ADD BTSLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, ISMAINLOCGRP=NO; ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=0; ADD BTSRXU2LOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, LOCGRPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1; ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=1, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=0; ADD BTSBINDLOCGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, MAINLOCGRPNO=0, SLAVELOCGRPNO=1, TRXID=2, CN=0, SRN=3, SN=1, TRXPN=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DIRMAGANSITEFLAG=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


723



201

Configuring PS Automatic

Frequency Correction (PS AFC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-5101051 PS Automatic Frequency Correction (PS AFC).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS has been activated before this feature is activated. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115821 EICC, GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – 3012 series base stations, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E do not support this feature. – The DRRU and DRFU do not support this feature.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature supports only LSR services modulated in Gaussian minimum shiftfrequency keying (GMSK) or 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) mode.

Context The PS AFC feature corrects the frequency offset for PS services processed by fast-moving MSs. This reduces the Doppler frequency shift caused by high-speed movement, increasing the throughput of the packet switched (PS) domain. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


724



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

UL PS Automatic Frequency Correction

PSULFREQADJ

The parameter determines whether to enable the PS automatic frequency correction function for the BTS. Enable this function in highspeed railway scenarios. Use the default value of this parameter in other scenarios.

Network plan

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches).In this step, set UL PS Automatic Frequency Correction to YES(Yes).


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHEXTto query UL PS Automatic Frequency Correction. Expected results: UL PS Automatic Frequency Correction is set to YES(Yes).

2.

l

Initiate PS services, and check the uplink throughput and proportions of high-rate (8PSK) EGPRS coding schemes before and after the PS AFC feature is activated. For MSs moving at a speed of 200 km/h (900 MHz carrier) or 100 km/h (1,800 MHz carrier), the uplink throughput and proportion of high-rate EGPRS coding schemes increase after the PS AFC feature is activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL PS Automatic Frequency Correction to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating PS Timeslot AFC SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PSULFREQADJ =YES; //Verifying PS Timeslot AFC LST GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CELLID=0; //Deactivating PS Timeslot AFC SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PSULFREQADJ =NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


725



202

Configuring HUAWEI II Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context Huawei II handover algorithm will traverse all the handover types in the handover decisionmaking phase. In the process of traversing the handover types, Huawei II handover algorithm does not execute a handover immediately but creates a candidate target cell list when the triggering conditions of the handover are met, compared with the common handover algorithm. After all the handover types are traversed, the intersection of the candidate cell lists that meet the handover triggering conditions is selected as the final target cell list. Compared with the common handover algorithm, Huawei II handover algorithm considers comprehensively all handover decision-making results so that the final handover decision-making result is accurate. Huawei II handover algorithm is classified into emergency handover, intra-cell handover, and inter-cell handover. l

The emergency handover is classified into directed retry, quick handover, bad quality handover, TA handover, and edge handover.

l

The intra-cell handover is classified into interference handover, concentric circles handover, BCCH dense frequency multiplexing handover, handover between TCHF and TCHH, and VAMOS Demultiplexing Due to Poor Voice Quality.

l

The inter-cell handover is classified into no downlink measurement report handover, enhanced dual-band network handover, fast-moving micro cell handover, load handover, better cell handover, and 2G/3G handover.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


726



CAUTION l After quick handover, bad quality handover, and TA handover are successful, penalty is applied on the old cell during the penalty time to prevent an immediate handover back to the old cell. l In Huawei II handover algorithm, the serving cell must not be selected as the target cell of bad quality handover. l During TA handover, if the TA Threshold of a co-site neighboring cell is lower than or equal to the TA Threshold of the serving cell, a handover to the cell is prohibited. l Intra-cell handover is allowed for the interference handover. However, when intra-cell handover is triggered several times continuously, it will be forbidden within a specified duration. In Huawei II handover algorithm, only the serving cell can be selected as the target cell of interference handover. l On the enhanced dual-band network, the MS should not be handed over to a cell in the same underlaid/overlaid cell group when the load-based handovers between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell (specified by Load HO From UL Subcell to OL Subcell Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled) are allowed. This is to prevent a loadbased handover of a normal cell from colliding with a load-based handover between the overlaid cell and the underlaid cell on the network. l PBGT handover toward a cell of the same group is not allowed once it is triggered between the enhanced dual-band network cells. l After the fast-moving micro cell handover is successful, penalty is applied on all the neighboring micro cells. l A load-based handover is not treated as an independent handover type for handover decisionmaking. The load-based handover decision is made in the network adjustment phase. The selection of a target cell should be processed by the better cell handover. That is, the loadbased handover is triggered when the triggering conditions of load-based handover and better cell handover are met simultaneously. l Better cell handover is an optimization of inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in Huawei I handover algorithm. It is specific to Huawei II handover algorithm.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

727



GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II). 4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOIUO (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MAX Consecutive HO Times to an appropriate value.

6.

Optional: To improve the effect of handover and power control when the BCCH participates in baseband frequency hopping, run the SET GCELLCCCH (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Common Control Channel Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command with PWRC set to YES(Yes) and run the SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command with Power Control and Handover CMP CON Sw set to YES(Yes).

7.

Activating directed retry.

8.

Activating the quick handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type to appropriate values; then, set Chain Neighbor Cell to YES(Yes), and set Chain Neighbor Cell Type to appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Quick Handover Enable to YES(Yes), and set Quick PBGT Handover Enable to YES(Yes). if quick PBGT handovers are needed. Then set Quick Handover Offset for Neighbor Cell to appropriate values. NOTE

The quick handover algorithm consists of the frequency offset handover algorithm and quick PBGT handover algorithm. Quick Handover Enable controls whether to initiate frequency offset and quick PBGT handovers. Quick PBGT Handover Enable controls whether to initiate quick PBGT handovers only.

c.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFAST (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Fast Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following parameters to appropriate values: Quick Move Speed Threshold, Quick Handover Up Trigger Level, Quick Handover Down Trigger Level, Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, Quick Handover Punish Value, Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number, Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number, Ignore Measurement Report Number, EN Quick PBGT HO ALG When MS Leaves BTS, Handover Direction Forecast Enable, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

728



Handover Direction Forecast Statistic Times, Frequency Shift Handover Statistic Time, and Frequency Shift Handover Duration. NOTE

If external neighboring cells are configured, set Quick Handover Offset, Quick Handover Punish Time, and Quick Handover Punish Value by running the BSC6900MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command.

d.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHEXT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > Extended Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL Frequency Adjust Switch, DL Frequency Adjust Switch, and UL Frequency Adjust Value according to the frequency offset information reported by the base station.

Activating the TA handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TA HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TA Threshold to an appropriate value.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Penalty Time after TA HO and Penalty Level after TA HO to appropriate values.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, TA HO Watch Time, and TA HO Valid Time to appropriate values.

10. Activating the bad quality handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BQ HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Optional. For non-AMR calls, run the SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual. Threshold to appropriate values.

c.

Optional. For AMR FR calls or AMR HR calls, run the SET GCELLAMRQUL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

729



Call Control > AMR Quality Threshold Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, DL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR, and DL Qual. Limit for AMR HR to appropriate values. d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Penalty Time after BQ HO and Penalty Level after BQ HO to appropriate values.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, TA HO Watch Time, and BQ HO Watch Time to appropriate values.

11. Activating the interference handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Interference HO Allowed to YES(Yes), set Intracell HO Allowed to YES(Yes). and set Interfere HO Valid Time, Inter-layer HO Threshold and Interfere HO Static Timeto appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Inter-layer HO Threshold, Interfere HO Static Time, and Interfere HO Valid Time to appropriate values. NOTE


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this stepset Forbidden time after MAX Times, MAX Consecutive HO Times and Interval for Consecutive HO Jud..

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, and Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis to appropriate values.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > AMR Quality Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

730



Threshold Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following parameters to appropriate values: Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 1 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 2 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 3 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 4 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 5 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 6 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 7 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 8 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 9 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 10 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 11 for Non-AMR FR, Interfere HO Qual. Thresh 12 for Non-AMR FR, and Interfere HO Qual. Thresh Offset for AMR FR. 12. Activating the concentric cell algorithm, refer to 180 Configuring Concentric Cell. 13. Activating the BCCH dense frequency multiplexing algorithm, refer to 189 Configuring BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing. 14. Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEMG (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Emergency Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set No Dl Mr.HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and set UL Qual. Threshold, Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit, No Dl Mr. HO Statistic Time, and No Dl Mr. HO Last Time to appropriate values.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLAMRQUL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > AMR Quality Threshold Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this setp, set UL Qual. Limit for AMR FR, UL Qual. Limit for AMR HR.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Filter Length for TCH Qual. and Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. to appropriate values.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, UL BQ HO Static Time, and UL BQ HO Last Time to appropriate values.

15. Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > GSM CELL; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced Double Frequency Cell), set Cell Inner/Extra Property and Same Group Cell Index Type (Not required on the CME) to appropriate values, and set Same Group Cell Name or Same Group Cell Index based on the value of Same Group Cell Index Type (Not required on the CME).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOEDBPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Enhanced Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

731



Dual-Band Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following parameters to appropriate values: Load HO Allowed, UL Subcell General Overload Threshold, Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Thred, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Incoming OL Subcell HO Level TH, UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold, UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Periods, MOD Step LEN of UL Load HO Period, Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO, UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, Subcell HO Allowed Flow Control Level, Outgoing OL Subcell HO Level TH, OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period, Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO, Distance Between Boundaries of Subcells, and Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries 16. Activating the edge handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Edge HO Allowed to YES(Yes) and then set Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Watch Time, and Handover Algorithm II Edge HO Valid Time.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, Inter-cell HO Hysteresis, Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time, and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time to appropriate values.

c.

Optional: Run the following commands when the edge handover thresholds need to be different for neighboring cells. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset to an appropriate value.

17. Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Layer of the Cell to an appropriate value. NOTE

If this cell has external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Layer of the Cell to an appropriate value.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


732



b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MS Fastmoving Time Threshold, MS Fast-moving Watch Cells, MS Fast-moving Valid Cells, Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO, and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO to appropriate values. NOTE

If this cell has external neighboring GSM cells, run the MOD GEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) command. In this step, set Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO and Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO to appropriate values.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Inter-layer HO Threshold to an appropriate value. NOTE


e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis, HCS HO Watch Time, and HCS HO Valid Time to appropriate values.

18. Activating the better cell handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Better Cell Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and set Pathloss Ho. Enable to an appropriate value.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, Neighboring Cell Type, Better Cell HO Watch Time, and Better Cell HO Valid Time to appropriate values.

c.

Optional: Run the following commands when the better cell handover thresholds need to be different for neighboring cells. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

733



a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G2GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 2G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Neighboring Cell Penalty Switch to YES(Yes), and set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Source Cell Index, Neighbor 2G Cell Index, and Neighboring Cell Type, Enhanced Outgoing Cell Handover Offset, Penalty Stop Level Threshold, Penalty Timer Length, and Level Penalty Value on Neighboring Cell to appropriate values.

19. Optional Activating the load-based handover penalty inheritance algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Load Handover Support to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Filter/Penalty Parameters of Cell Handover; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Load HO Penalty Optimization to ON(On).

20. Optional Activating the optimized TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set F-H HO Load Band Optimization Allowed to ON(On).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TCHF-TCHH HO Load Hysteresis to an appropriate value.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Non-AMR FH HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR F-H HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR F-H HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR F-H HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold to appropriate values to ensure that the TCHF-TCHH handover quality threshold ranges from 0 to 70.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

734



ATCB Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold to appropriate values to ensure that the TCHF-TCHH handover ATCB threshold ranges from -63 to 255. 21. Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the following parameters to appropriate values: AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), Allow AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes), Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Allow Non-AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes). Then, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, F-H Ho Duration, F-H Ho Period, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step, AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, F-H Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, F-H ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, F-H Ho Stat. Time, F-H Ho Last Time, AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, H-F Ho Duration, AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, H-F ATCB Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold, H-F Pathloss Offset Overlay, AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold, H-F Ho Stat. Time, H-F Ho Last Time, Non-AMR F-H Traffic Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step, Non-AMR FH Ho ATCB Adjust Step, Non-AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR F-H Ho Qual. Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Traffic Threshold, Non-AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold, Non-AMR HF Ho Pathloss Threshold, and Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold

b.


c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Speech Version to at least FULL_RATE_VER1, FULL_RATE_VER3 and HALF_RATE_VER3.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Um Interface Tag, Abis Interface Tag and A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

22. Activating the 2G/3G handover algorithm, refer to 207 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover and 208 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover. 23. Activating SDCCH handover

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), In this step, set SDCCH HO Allowed to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOCTRL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Handover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

735



Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), set Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed to an appropriate value. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, query the setting of Current HO Control Algorithm. Expected result: The value of the Current HO Control Algorithm is HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

2.

On the LMT, start the message tracing over the A interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. Select BSSAP in the Trace Type area. Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover performed message to the MSC. – In the case of the quick handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the TA handover, the handover cause value is distance. – In the case of the BQ handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality or downlink-quality. – In the case of the interference handover, the handover cause value is uplinkquality or downlink-quality. – In the case of the no downlink measurement report handover, the handover cause value is uplink-quality. – In the case of the enhanced dual-band network handover, the handover cause value is better-cell or traffic. – In the case of the load-based handover, the handover cause value is traffic. – In the case of the edge handover, the handover cause value is uplink-strength or downlink-strength. – In the case of the fast-moving micro cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the better cell handover, the handover cause value is better-cell. – In the case of the handover between TCHF and TCHH, the handover cause value is downlink-quality. – In the case of the SDCCH handover, the handover cause value is better-cell, distance, uplink-quality, downlink-quality, traffic, uplink-strength, or downlink-strength.

3.

Optional Verifying the load-based handover penalty inheritance algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Load Handover Support for cell A to YES(Yes). Assume that there are three cells: cell A, cell B, and cell C

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOFITPEN. In this step, set Load HO Penalty Optimization for cell A to ON(On) to ensure that a loadbased handover is performed from cell C to cell B and then from cell B to cell A.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD. In this step, set Load HO Threshold, LoadAccThres, Load HO Bandwidth, and Load HO Step Level for cell A to appropriate values to ensure that the conditions for a loadbased handover from cell A to cell C are met.

Expected result: The load-based handover from cell A to cell C is not triggered. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


736



4.

Optional Verifying the optimized TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), Allow Non-AMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes), Non-AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES(Yes), and Allow NonAMR H-F Quality-based HO to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set F-H HO Load Band Optimization Allowed to ON(On).

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR F-H Traffic Threshold and TCHF-TCHH HO Load Hysteresis for cell A to appropriate values to ensure that the load in cell A is lower than the value of AMR F-H Traffic Threshold minus the value of TCHF-TCHH HO Load Hysteresis after full-rate AMR calls are converted to half-rate AMR calls.

Expected result: Only AMR full-rate calls support AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold to -10.

Expected result: Only the AMR half-rate calls whose TCHF-TCHH handover ATCB threshold is lower than or equal to -10 support AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step. set Non-AMR H-F Ho Qual. Threshold to 3 and Non-AMR H-F HO Quality Thres. Fine Tune to 9.

Expected result: Only the AMR half-rate calls whose TCHF-TCHH handover quality threshold exceeds 39 support AMR TCHF-TCHH handovers. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM1(Handover algorithm I).

----End

Example //Activating HUAWEI II handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2; SET GCELLHOIUO: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOTRYCNT=3; //Activating the quick handover algorithm MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ISCHAINNCELL=YES, CHAINNCELLTYPE=QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A, ADJHOOFFSET=1; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QUICKHOEN=YES, QUICKPBGTHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOFAST: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOUPTRIGE=50, HODOWNTRIGE=50, MOVESPEEDTHRES=35, SCELLFILTER=4, NCELLFILTER=4, IGNOREMRNUM=1, TIMEPUNISH=10, HOPUNISHVALUE=63, HOOFFSET=68, MSLEVSTRQPBGT=NO, HODIRFORECASTEN=YES, HODIRSTATIME=3, HODIRLASTTIME=2, AFCHOSTATTIME=4, AFCHOLASTTIME=3; SET GCELLOTHEXT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQADJ=YES, DLFREQADJ=YES, FREQADJVALUE=36671;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


737



//Activating the TA handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TAHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, TALIMIT=125; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSTAPUNISH=40, TIMETAPUNISH=10; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, TASTATTIME=1, TALASTTIME=1; //Activating the bad quality handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BQHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DLQUALIMIT=55, ULQUALIMIT=60; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SSBQPUNISH=63, TIMEBQPUNISH=10; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, BQSTATTIME=1, BQLASTTIME=1; //Activating the interference handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTRACELLHOEN=YES, INTERFHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25, INTERFERESTATTIME=3, INTERFERELASTTIME=2; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BANTIME=20; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67; SET GCELLAMRQUL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, RXQUAL1=70, RXQUAL2=60, RXQUAL3=59, RXQUAL4=58, RXQUAL5=57, RXQUAL6=56, RXQUAL7=55, RXQUAL8=54, RXQUAL9=53, RXQUAL10=52, RXQUAL11=51, RXQUAL12=50; //Activating the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm SET GCELLHOEMG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, NODLMRHOEN=YES, NODLMRHOQUALLIMIT=50, NODLMRHOALLOWLIMIT=8, NODLMRHOSTATTIME=1, NODLMRHOLASTTIME=1; SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, DATAQUAFLTLEN=4, SIGQUAFLTLEN=2; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, ULBQSTATTIME=1, ULBQLASTTIME=1; //Activating the enhanced dual-band network handover algorithm MOD GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, IUOTP=EDB_cell, CELLINEXTP=Inner, DBLFREQADJIDTYPE=BYID, DBLFREQADJCID=1; SET GCELLHOEDBPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OUTASSOPTEN=YES; ///Activating the edge handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20, EDGESTAT1=6, EDGELAST1=4; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, INTELEVHOHYST=67; //Activating the fast-moving micro cell handover algorithm SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LAYER=3; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, QCKMVHOEN=YES, HOTHRES=25; SET GCELLHOAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QCKSTATCNT=3, QCKTRUECNT=2, QCKTIMETH=15, SPEEDPUNISH=30, SPEEDPUNISHT=4; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTELEVHOHYST=67, HCSSTATTIME=3, HCSLASTTIME=2; //Activating the better cell handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLHOEN=YES, PATHLOSSHOEN=YES; MOD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=0, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, BETTERCELLSTATTIME=6, BETTERCELLLASTTIME=4; //Activating the algorithm for the handover between TCHF and TCHH SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


738



AMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, AMRFULLTOHALFHOTHRESH=75, FULLTOHALFHODURATION=5, FULLTOHALFHOPERIOD=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=100, FULLTOHALFHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=20, FULLTOHALFHOATCBOFFSET=20, AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, FULLTOHALFHOSTATTIME=6, FULLTOHALFHOLASTTIME=4, AMRHALFTOFULLHOTHRESH=45, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, HALFTOFULLHODURATION=5, AMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=4, HALFTOFULLATCBOFFSET=20, AMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=108, HALFTOFULLHOPATHOFFSET=10, AMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=3, HALFTOFULLHOSTATTIME=6, HALFTOFULLHOLASTTIME=4, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOALLOW=YES, NOAMRFULLTOHALFTHRESH=85, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHADJSTEP=1, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBADJSTEP=2, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOPATHTHRESH=95, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=30, NOAMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=0, NOAMRHALFTOFULLTHRESH=25, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALALLOW=YES, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOATCBTHRESH=14, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOPATHTHRESH=103, NOAMRHALFTOFULLHOQUALTHRESH=2; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=0, TCHAJFLAG=YES; SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, VOICEVER=FULL_RATE_VER1-1&FULL_RATE_VER2-0&FULL_RATE_VER3-1&HALF_RATE_VER 1-1&HALF_RATE_VER2-0&HALF_RATE_VER3-1&FULL_RATE_VER5-0; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; //Activating the load-based handover penalty inheritance algorithm SET GCELLHOFITPEN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, LoadHoPunishInheritSwitch=ON; //Activating the optimized TCHF-TCHH handover algorithm SET GCELLPWRBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, F2HHOLOADSTFSWITCH=ON; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, AMRFULLTOHALFHOATCBTHRESH=-63, AMRFULLTOHALFHOQUALTHRESH=6, AMRF2HHOQUALTHFINE=8; //Activating the SDCCH handover algorithm SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, SIGCHANHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOCTRL: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INRBSCSDHOEN=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


739


203 Configuring Handover Re-establishment

203

Configuring Handover Reestablishment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – An available neighboring cell is configured for the test cell. The TRX of the test cell supports handover re-establishment.

Context If receiving an Error Indication message from the BTS during a handover, the BSC attempts to re-establish the call on the original channel instead of treating it as a call drop. Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits: l

Reducing the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Activate L2 Re-establishment to YES (Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

740


l

203 Configuring Handover Re-establishment



1.

Configure two cells: cell0 and cell1. Configure these two cells as neighboring cells on the same frequency band. Ensure that they operate properly.

2.

Initiate RSL message tracing on the Abis interface for cell0 on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G2GNCELL. In this step, set Better Cell HO Watch Time and Better Cell HO Valid Time to 1, and PBGT HO Threshold to 64.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC. In this step, set Current HO Control Algorithm to HOALGORITHM2(Handover algorithm II).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCTMR. In this step, set Use LAPDm N200 to ON(On), T200 FACCH/F and T200 FACCH/H to 5, N200 of FACCH/Half Rate to 30, and N200 of FACCH/Full Rate to 34.

6.

Use a test MS to make a call in cell0.

7.

Rapidly decrease the BTS transmit power in cell0 to initiate a handover for better cell to cell1.

8.

After issuing the handover command, the BSC receives an Error Indication message from cell0. The MS cannot receive the handover command. Then, increase the transmit power in cell0.

9.

Check the result of RSL message tracing on the Abis interface for cell0. Expected result: The test MS continues with the call in cell0. The following messages can be traced on the Abis interface for cell0: Handover Command, Error Indication, Establish Request, and Establish Confirm.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Activate L2 Re-establishment to NO (No).

----End

Example /*Activating Handover Re-establishment*/ //Enabling handover re-establishment SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTL2REEST=YES; /*Deactivating Handover Re-establishment*/ //Disabling handover re-establishment SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACTL2REEST=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


741



204

Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS supports enhanced measurement report (EMR). – The test cell is configured with neighboring cells and supports the EMR feature.

Context EMR is a new downlink measurement report available from 3GPP R99. Measurement results, such as Bit Error Probability (BEP) and Frame Erase Ratio (FER), are added to an EMR. This improves the performance of power control algorithms and handover algorithms. This feature brings the following benefits: l

This feature improves the capability of voice quality monitoring and the performance of power control algorithms and handover algorithms.

l

As many as 15 3G neighboring cells can be configured with EMR. This provides a better performance of interoperability between the GSM, WCDMA, and TD-SCDMA systems.

l


Procedure 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

742



System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Measurement Report Type of cell0 to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report). l

Verification Procedure Assume that cell0 and cell1 are neighboring 2G cells of each other. 1.

Use an MS to make a call in cell0.

2.

Check whether the RSL message traced on the Abis interface of cell0 contains the EMR information element (IE). Expected result: Calls are established successfully and the voice quality is good. The RSL message traced on the Abis interface of cell0 contains the EMR IE(In an original measurement report, the EMR IE is enhanced-measurement-report-struct. In a preprocessed measurement report, the EMR IE is pre-proc-emr). NOTE

A common MR is reported if the MS does not support EMR.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Measurement Report Type of cell0 to ComMeasReport(Common Measurement Report).

----End

Example //Activating Enhanced Measurement Report SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport; //Deactivating Enhanced Measurement Report SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1024, MEASURETYPE=ComMeasReport;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


743



205

Configuring BTS power lift for handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117101 BTS power lift for handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – None

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


Context The BTS power lift for handover function determines whether the BTS of the serving cell transmits signals at the maximum power during a handover. After the function is enabled, the BTS adjusts its transmit power to the maximum value before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. This ensures that the handover can be performed successfully.

Procedure l


l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Other Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Boost before HO Enabled or Not to YES(StartUp). Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLOTHBASIC. Expected result: Power Boost before HO Enabled or Not is set to StartUp. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

744


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLOTHBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Other Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Boost before HO Enabled or Not to NO(Not StartUp).

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=YES; //Verification Procedure LST GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLOTHBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, HOPOWERBOOST=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


745



206

Configuring GSM/WCDMA Interoperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. – The BSS and NSS support the GSM/WCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedures during inter-RAT handovers.

l


l


l

Initial Data Preparation The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Context The GSM/WCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect a GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA network or in an area with weak WCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the WCDMA cell is higher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a WCDMA cell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided by the WCDMA network. The feature GSM/WCDMA Interoperability is applied to scenarios such as cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. This feature has no impact on services. The network elements involved are the BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


746



Optimization focuses on the delivery mode of the 2Quater system information (SI) and measurement information (MI). The information elements (IEs) in the first 2Quater SI are streamlined, and the neighboring UMTS cell lists of the 2Quater SI and MI are delivered in dense coding mode. In this way, the amount of system information to be delivered is reduced and the PS service interruption period during a cell reselection is shortened.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a 3G external cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to FDD(FDD). Optional: When Utran Cell Type is set to FDD(FDD), Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the UTRAN system information parameter related to the cell call control. In this step, set SI 2Quater Optimization to YES(Yes).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring 3G cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag and Um Interface Tagto GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER to YES(Yes), Send 3G Class Flag to YES(Yes), and Classmark Enquiry With 3G Request to YES(Yes).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Query Classmark after In-BSC HO Enabled to YES(Yes).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set basic call control parameters of a cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch C to 7, Qsearch P to 7, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

747


l

l



Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value of Utran cell type. Expected result: The value of Utran cell type is FDD.

2.

Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Allow InterRAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based. On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.

3.

On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface. Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".

4.

Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) are normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If the following conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate a cell reselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset or CPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin.

5.

When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the GSM cell. When the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the neighboring 3G cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the 3G external cell.

----End

Example //Activating GSM/WCDMA Interoperability ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, RNCINDEX=255, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=FDD, RA=1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QUERYCMAFTERINBSCHO=YES; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7; //Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Interoperability RMV G3GNCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048"; RMV GEXT3GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


748


207 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

207

Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114321 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. – The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data. – On the MSC, the BSC is set to support service handovers, and the service handover attribute of the IMSI for the MS is set to support handovers for 2G CS services.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

749


l


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to CnService-based.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > UTRAN FDD Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the UTRAN FDD handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to YES(Yes), Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_3G_Cell(Preference for 3G cell), RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0, and Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO to 0.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set FDD 3G Better Cell HO Watch Time, FDD 3G Better Cell HO Valid Time, RSCP Offset, and Ec/No Offset according to the actual requirements.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Service Based Handover Switch to OPEN(Open) and Service Handover Reassign to YES (Yes).


Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.

2.

On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface. Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "better-cell" or "directed-retry".

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > UTRAN FDD Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

----End

Example //Activating GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


750



SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=CnService-based; SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=YES, HOOPTSEL=Pre_3G_Cell; SET OTHSOFTPARA: OUTSYSSERVICEHOEN=OPEN, OUTSYSSERVHOREASSIGNEN=YES; //Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO; SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=NO, HOOPTSEL=Pre_2G_Cell;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


751


208 Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

208

Configuring GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. – The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability.

l


l

Initial Data Preparation The basic data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Context The MSC transparently transmits the load information of the WCDMA network to the BSC. Then, the BSC makes a decision on the inter-RAT handover based on its own load and the load in the WCDMA network. In addition, the BSC sends a handover request carrying its own load information to the WCDMA network for reference in the decision on the inter-RAT handover.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


752



2.

3.

4.

5.

Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set inter-RAT handover parameters. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Load handover Load Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Advanced Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Load handover Load Accept Threshold according to the actual requirements.

l

Verification Procedure 1. Use an MS to access the 2G cell and then initiate a call. After the call is initiated normally, move the MS to the coverage area with strong 3G signals. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In this step, set Inter-rat HO Preference to Load-based(Load-based). On the CN side, set Service Handover to Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed. 2. On the LMT, trace the BSSAP messages over the A interface. Expected result: The BSC sends a Handover Required message to the MSC with the handover cause value of "reduce load in serving cell".

l

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters of the cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to NO(No) and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No). 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > UTRAN FDD Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Better 3G Cell HO Allowed to NO(No) and Inter-rat HO Preference to Pre_2G_Cell(Preference for 2G cell).

----End

Example //Activating GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


753



INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based; //Deactivating GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO; SET GCELLHOUTRANFDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BET3GHOEN=NO, HOOPTSEL=Pre_2G_Cell;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


754



209

Configuring 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114323 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The MS supports both the GSM and WCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and WCDMA. – The BSS and NSS support the inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedures during inter-RAT handovers.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116201 NetworkControlled Cell Reselection (NC2).

l


l

Initial Data Preparation The basic data has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Context This feature is designed to enable dual-mode MSs in the idle state or in the packet transfer state to adopt different reselection policies to access the GSM network or WCDMA network as required.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

755



Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters for a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes). 2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set Qsearch I to 7, Qsearch P to 15, and Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).

3.

Optional: If Utran Cell Type is set to TDD(TDD), Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the UTRAN system information parameters for call control in the cell. In this step, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES(Yes).

4.

Optional: When Utran Cell Type is set to FDD(FDD), Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to modify the UTRAN system information parameter related to the cell call control. In this step, set SI 2Quater Optimization to YES(Yes). NOTE

Optimization focuses on the delivery mode of the 2Quater system information (SI) and measurement information (MI). The information elements (IEs) in the first 2Quater SI are streamlined, and the neighboring UMTS cell lists of the 2Quater SI and MI are delivered in dense coding mode. In this way, the amount of system information to be delivered is reduced and the PS service interruption period during a cell reselection is shortened.

l

l


Move the MS within the GSM cell or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) are normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If the following conditions are met within five seconds, then the MS will initiate a cell reselection from GSM to UMTS: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset or CPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin.

2.

When the MS is in the GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the GSM cell. When the MS is in the UMTS cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS is in the UMTS cell.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters for a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=15;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


756



//Deactivating 2G/3G Cell Reselection Based on MS State SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


757



210

Configuring the Fast WCDMA

Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Cell Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The network involves the GSM network and the WCDMA network – The UE supports the GSM and WCDMA frequency bands at the same time. – The UE supports 3GPP Release6 and later specifications.

Context When an UE terminates a call in the GSM network, it camps on the WCDMA network according to the cell selection indicator after release information in the Channel Release message

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a WCDMA FDD cell 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

758



batch modification center: not supported) to configure the WCDMA cell 1 as the neighboring cell of the GSM cell 0. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 2G External Cell; CME batch modification center: Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches)to add a GSM cell 0 on the WCDMA side.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the GSM cell 0 as the neighboring cell of the WCDMA cell 1.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

6.

configure the fast WCDMA reselection at 2G CS call release. – When the Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable set to YES(Yes) a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable of Cell 0, set to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Select 3G Cell After Call Release of Cell 0, a GSM cell, set to YES(Yes).

– When the Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable set to NO(No)

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable of Cell 0, set to YES(Yes).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Optimization of Cell 0, set to ON(On).

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Select 3G Cell After Call Release of Cell 0, a GSM cell, set to YES(Yes).


On the Um Interface Trace window, it shows that the UE camps on Cell 0 and initiates a call successfully. In addition, the call is still being maintained.

2.

After the call is released, on the screen of the UE, it shows that the UE has camped on a 3G cell. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

759


210 Configuring the Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release NOTE

If the GSM and WCDMA networks use the same indicator, the UE must be equipped with a function through which a user can query that the currently camped cell is a GSM or WCDMA cell.

3.

l

On the Um Tracing window, the signaling procedure of the cell shows that the downlink Channel Release message carries an information element (IE) "cellselection-indicator-after-release".


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Select 3G Cell After Call Release of Cell 0, the GSM cell, set to NO (No).

----End

Example //Activating the feature Fast WCDMA Reselection at GSM CS Call Release ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=7572, EXT3GCELLNAME="Cell1", MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=50, SCRAMBLE=200, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=FDD,OPNAME="main"; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRC3GNCELLNAME="Cell0", NBR3GNCELLNAME="Cell1"; ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=1, GSMCellIndex=0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="Cell0", CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=YES; //Deactivating the feature Fast WCDMA Reselection at GSM CS Call Release SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1234, CELLSELECTAFTERCALLREL=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


760


211 Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iurg

211

Configuring Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A GSM/UMTS dual-mode MS is required. – IP Interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. – This feature depends on features WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g and GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover.

l

License – The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the GSM License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. –

NOTE

The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.

l

Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.

l

IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.

l

A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

l

Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

Context This feature is implemented through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE containing load information over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the decision on handover that is not caused by insufficient Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


761



coverage can be more accurate, thus reducing the possibility of ping-pong handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA network.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES (Yes) .

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient. Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10 is recommended.


l If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, the configuration fails.

1.

3G-to-2G Load Based Handover Enhancement

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Trace signaling on the Iu interface on the LMT. RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported. The RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. Trace signaling on the A interface on the LMT. Handover Request message is reported. The Handover Request message contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. NOTE

After the verification, set the value of system to the value before the verification.

2.

l

a.

Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell, and the call is successfully established.

b.

When the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state, the MS hand over to 3G neighbor cell. Trace signaling on the A interface. Check that Assignment Request, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages are reported and cause in the Handover Required message is directed-retry(13).


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2G-to-3G Load Based Handover Enhancement

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate MBSC Handover based on Load Enhancement Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

762



on the GSM side. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Connect State to NO(No). ----End

Example //Activating Handover based on Load Enhancement /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; //Deactivating Handover based on Load Enhancement SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


763

212 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA


212

Configuring NACC(Network

Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. – This feature depends on feature WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g.

l


NOTE

The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.

l

IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.

l

The MS supports NACC.

l

Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.

l

A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

l

GPRS is set to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) in the MML command SET GCELLGPRS.

l

Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can refer to For details you can refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


764

212 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA


Context This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management (RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS services from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell does not require the information transfer via the CN.

Procedure l

l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GNRNC (CME single configuration: (G) IURG Configuration Express > Neighboring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to allow NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface. In this step, set Allow Info Exchange at Iur-g to YES(Support) and Info Exchange Content to NACCRELATED(NACC Info).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).


Trace Iur-g and Um interfaces on the LMT.

2.

Use a dual-mode MS to download data in the UMTS cell and then switch the MS to the GSM cell.

3.

Check that INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ and INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP messages are reported on the Iur-g interface. The value of informationTypeItem in the INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ message is nACC-Related-Data(8) and the INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP message contains nACC-Related-Data.


Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD GNRNC (CME single configuration: (G) IURG Configuration Express > Neighboring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to allow NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface. In this step, set Allow Info Exchange at Iur-g to NO(No Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NACC to NO(no).

----End

Example //Activating NACC Procedure Optimization /*Allowing NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface*/ MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=YES, INFOEXCHGLIST=NACCRELATED-1; /*Setting basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell*/ SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES; //Deactivating NACC Procedure Optimization MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=NO; SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


765



213

Configuring GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. – This feature depends on features GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover or WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

l


NOTE

The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.

l

2G and 3G networks cover the same area.

l

IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.

l

The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should be performed.

l

The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent from the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.

l

A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


766



Context This feature implements the load-based GSM/WCDMA handover through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on the basis of the service handover indicator and load of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network. In this way, a load balance is achieved between the GSM network and WCDMA network.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based), 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to an appropriate value.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS 2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to an appropriate value.


If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, the configuration fails.

1.

3G-to-2G Load Balancing


The verification procedure consists of the RRC setup phase and the RAB connection phase. The verification in the latter phase involves CS speech services and PS data services. a.

Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSM cell2 at the RRC setup phase 1)

b.

Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GPRS cell3 at the RAB connection phase 1)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call is successfully established. Initiate Uu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. The RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ and RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messages are reported, and the RRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT message contains GSMTargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell2 is contained, indicating that the MS accesses cell2.

Use the MS to browse the Internet.


767



c.

2.

2)

Initiate Uu-interface message tracing on the LMT. You can find that the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN are reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CN to the RNC and then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP message is sent from the RNC to the CN.

4)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND and RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from the CN to the RNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the RNC to the CN.

5)

When the MS attempts to reselect cell3, Internet browsing is slightly affected. After the MS reselects cell3, Internet browsing returns to normal.

Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSM cell2 at the RAB connection phase 1)

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call is successfully established.

2)

Initiate Uu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP, RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM are reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from the RNC to the CN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND and RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from the CN to the RNC.

4)

Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from the RNC to the CN.

2G-to-3G Load Balancing

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell. The directed retry procedure is triggered so that the MS accesses the neighboring UMTS cell. The call is successfully established. Initiate A-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find that the Assignment Request, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages are reported and that the value of cause in the Handover Required message is directed-retry(13). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

768


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate 2G-to-3G load balancing. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example //Activating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g /*Enabling load balancing*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10; /*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="0", INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting load difference thresholds*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110; //Deactivating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


769



214

Configuring GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required. – IP Interface board should be configured to support Iur-g.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete. – This feature depends on features GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover and WRFD-070007 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

l


NOTE

The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.

l

2G and 3G networks cover the same area.

l

IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.

l

The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should be performed.

l

The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sent from the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed or Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should not be performed.

l

A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


770



Context This feature supports GSM/WCDMA handover based on service. With this feature, services are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical network planning, and the load of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable traffic steering. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Service-based(Service-based).


The verification procedure of 3G-to-2G Traffic Steering


Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Initiate Iuinterface tracing on the LMT. You can find that the RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported and the handover cause value in the message is resource-optimisation-relocation. Initiate A interface tracing. You can find that the Handover Request message is reported and the handover cause value in the message is traffic.

CAUTION Ensure that the GSM cell is not in the congestion state. 2.

The verification procedure of 2G-to-3G Traffic Steering

CAUTION The verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state. a.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the GSM cell. Initiate CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber tracing on the LMT. You can find that the call is in GSM cell, and don't hand over to UMTS cell.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Inter-RAT Handover Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

771



Parameters in Batches) to disable traffic steering. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to OFF(Off). ----End

Example //Activating 3G-to-2G traffic steering /*Enabling inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based; //Deactivating 3G-to-2G traffic steering SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


772



215

Configuring BSC supporting Blind Search

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability or GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability. – GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA feature. – GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search is mutually exclusive with the following functions: – Forced NC2 between GSM and WCDMA function – GSM-to-WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network-controlled cell reselection function in the GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) feature

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – This feature does not depend on the running environment.

l

Requirements for Transmission Networking – This feature does not have any special requirements for transmission networking.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – The MS must support blind search.

l

Other Prerequisites – If 3G ARFCN Type is set to FDD, 3G ARFCN 1 through 3G ARFCN 8 are valid, whereas ARFCN9 through ARFCN16 are invalid. – If 3G ARFCN Type is set to TDD, 3G ARFCN 1 through 3G ARFCN 16 are valid.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


773



Context Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

3G ARFCNs for Cell Reselection

INPUT3GARFCNE N

This parameter specifies whether to allow configuring only 3G ARFCNs for GSM-to-UMTS cell reselections.

Network Planning

Procedure l


2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes). If...

Then...

Each cell uses its customized neighboring 3G ARFCNs

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELL3GARFCN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > UARFCNs for a Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a 3G ARFCN.

All cells controlled by the BSC use the same neighboring 3G ARFCNs

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET G3GARFCN (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > UARFCNs for the BSC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a 3G ARFCN. SET GCELL3GARFCN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > UARFCNs for a Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 3G ARFCNs for Cell Reselection to YES(Yes).

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC


774



Parameters in Batches). In this step, set A Interface Tag,Um Interface Tag and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

l

3.


4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the UTRAN system message parameters for call control in a cell. In this step, set Qsearch I, Qsearch C, and Qsearch P to 7, and set Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).


Perform received signal level (RSL) tracing over the Abis interface. The system information 2Quater carries information about neighboring 3G ARFCNs.

2.

Enable the Blind Search function to configure FDD ARFCNs. Move the MS within the GSM or UMTS cell, and ensure that the Ec/No and Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) are normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the UMTS cell (FDD). If the following conditions are met within five seconds, the MS initiates a GSM-to-UMTS cell reselection: CPICH RSCP > RLA_C + FDD Q Offset and CPICH Ec/No > FDD Qmin – When the MS is in a GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS camps on the GSM cell. – When the MS is in a UMTS cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS camps on the UMTS cell.

3.

Enable the Blind Search function to configure TDD frequencies. Move the MS within the GSM or TD-SCDMA cell, and ensure that Qsearch I and the RSCP of the CPICH are normal during the neighboring cell measurement of the TD-SCDMA cell (TDD). If the following condition is met within five seconds, the MS initiates a GSM-to-TDSCDMA cell reselection: CPICH RSCP > TDD Cell Reselect Diversity – When the MS is in a GSM cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS camps on the GSM cell. – When the MS is in a TD-SCDMA cell, the frequency information of the MS indicates that the MS camps on the TD-SCDMA cell.

l

Deactivation Procedure If...

Then...

Each cell uses its customized neighboring 3G ARFCNs

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELL3GARFCN (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Other Attributes > UARFCNs for a Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, do as follows: 1. Set all ARFCNs to 65,535. 2. Set 3G ARFCNs for Cell Reselection to YES(Yes).

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


775



If...

Then...

All cells controlled by the BSC use the same neighboring 3G ARFCNs

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET G3GARFCN (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > UARFCNs for the BSC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, do as follows: 1. Set all ARFCNs to 65,535. 2. Set 3G ARFCNs for Cell Reselection to YES(Yes).

----End

Example // Activation procedure If each cell uses its customized neighboring 3G ARFCNs SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES; SET GCELL3GARFCN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INPUT3GARFCNEN=YES, INPUT3GARFCNENTYPE=FDD, ARFCN1=10; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7; If all cells controlled by the BSC use the same neighboring 3G ARFCNs SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES; SET G3GARFCN: INPUT3GARFCNEN=YES, INPUT3GARFCNENTYPE=FDD, ARFCN1=10; SET GCELL3GARFCN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INPUT3GARFCNEN=YES; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7; // Deactivation procedure If each cell uses its customized neighboring 3G ARFCNs SET GCELL3GARFCN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INPUT3GARFCNEN= YES, ARFCN1=65535, ARFCN2=65535, ARFCN3=65535, ARFCN4=65535, ARFCN5=65535, ARFCN6=65535, ARFCN7=65535, ARFCN8=65535, ARFCN9=65535, ARFCN10=65535, ARFCN11=65535, ARFCN12=65535, ARFCN13=65535, ARFCN14=65535, ARFCN15=65535, ARFCN16=65535; SET GCELL3GARFCN: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INPUT3GARFCNEN=NO; If all cells controlled by the BSC use the same neighboring 3G ARFCNs SET G3GARFCN: INPUT3GARFCNEN=YES, ARFCN1=65535, ARFCN2=65535, ARFCN3=65535, ARFCN4=65535, ARFCN5=65535, ARFCN6=65535, ARFCN7=65535, ARFCN8=65535, ARFCN9=65535, ARFCN10=65535, ARFCN11=65535, ARFCN12=65535, ARFCN13=65535, ARFCN14=65535, ARFCN15=65535, ARFCN16=65535; SET G3GARFCN: INPUT3GARFCNEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


776



216

Configuring Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature requires support from the MS, BTS, BSC, MSC, PCU, SGSN, GGSN, and HLR.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS supports both GSM and LTE and supports bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and LTE. – The BSS and the NSS support bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and LTE.

Context Cell reselection between GSM and LTE enables an MS in an LTE network to reselect the GSM network when the MS is in a blind area of the LTE network or in an area with weak LTE coverage. When the MS reenters the LTE network coverage or when the MS detects that an LTE cell provides strong coverage, the MS can reselect the LTE network when the cell reselection conditions are met.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC LTE External Cell; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

777



batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add an external LTE cell. In this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation.

l

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES (Yes).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Cell Priority and EUTRAN System Information Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GERAN Priority smaller than EUTRAN Priority.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring LTE cell. In this step, set Source Cell Index to the index of the cell to be verified, Neighbor Cell Index to the index of the added LTE cell, and Support Cell Reselection to SUPPORT (SUPPORT).

5.



Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to check the value of LTE Cell Reselection Allowed. Expected result: The value of LTE Cell Reselection Allowed is Yes.

2.

Enable the MS to camp on a GSM cell. Initiate RSL message tracing on the Abis interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. On the RSL tab page, set Filter Flag to Cell and Cell ID (cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the index of the cell to be verified. Then click Submit and an Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box is displayed. Expected result: The MS reselects the LTE cell successfully. The result of RSL message tracing on the Abis interface shows that BCCH Information is traced and its message type is System Information 2Quater.

l


Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable cell reselection from a GSM cell to all neighboring LTE cells. In this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to NO(No).

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific LTE cell. In this step, set Support Cell Reselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


778



Example /*Activating Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE*/ //Adding an external LTE cell ADD GEXTLTECELL: EXTLTECELLID=8048, EXTLTECELLNAME="cell", MCC="460", MNC="188", ENODEBTYPE=HOME, CI=0, TAC=1, FREQ=2, PCID=3, EUTRANTYPE=FDD; //Enabling LTE cell reselection SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LTECELLRESELEN=YES; //Setting the cell priority and the parameters about EUTRAN system information SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GERANPRI=1, EUTRANPRI=7, THREUTRANHIGH=2, EUTRANQRXLEVMIN=10; //Enabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific neighboring LTE cell ADD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=8048, SPTRESEL=SUPPORT; //Enabling System Information 2Quater sending SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES; /*Deactivating Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE*/ //Disabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to all neighboring LTE cells SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, LTECELLRESELEN=NO; //Disabling cell reselection from a GSM cell to a specific neighboring LTE cell MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=8048, SPTRESEL=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


779



217

Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.

l


l

The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.

l

The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE.

l

The SGSN support the PFC procedure.

l

The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells support the cell reselection. NOTE

You can Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC LTE External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring LTE cell, in this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation, and Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure the neighboring LTE cells to support the cell reselection, in this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.


780



Context l

When an NSE is configured to support the PS handover, all the cells under the NSE support the PS handover.

l

The BSC supports the PS handover between E-UTRAN and GERAN. In this way, the access time of the MS to the target cell is reduced.

l


Procedure – Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). – Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU). – Set Support NC2 to YES(Yes). – Set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > NC2 Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). – Set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit). – Set Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period as required, for example, 10. – Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6. – Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10. – Set Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold as required, for example, 1. – Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15. – Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30. – Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4. – Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6. – Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Cell Priority and EUTRAN System Information Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set EUTRAN Priority to 7.

– Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

781



Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support). l

Verification Procedure – Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), Cell Load Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), and Cell Service Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid).

2.

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3.

Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that the level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

4.

Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage is enabled. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN to BSC. – Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.

– Verifying the PS Handover from LTE to GSM 1.

Use an MS that camps on the LTE serving cell to download or upload data. Trace the PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

2.

Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so that the level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

3.

Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gb interface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Um interface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PS handover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled. – Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC – Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT (Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

782



UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). ----End

Example //Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELWATCHPERIOD=10, RESELWORSENLEVTHRSH=1, RESELINTERVAL=2; SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7; //Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


783



218

Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


l



l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality.


784



Context l


l


l




2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > NC2 Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). – Set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit). – Set MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold as required, for example, 200. – Set Cell Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold as required, for example, 30. – Set EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 7. – Set EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold as required, for example, 16. – Set GPRS Quality Threshold as required, for example, 5. – Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15. – Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6. – Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30. – Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10. – Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4. – Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6. – Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.

4.


– Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


785



1.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid).

2.

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3.

Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target cell so that the level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

4.

Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on quality is enabled. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN to BSC. – Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.



2.

Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power in the target GSM cell so that the level of the target GSM cell is higher than that of the serving cell.

3.

Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gb interface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Um interface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PS handover from LTE to GSM based on quality is enabled. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC – Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT (Support) for these cells.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

786



Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). ----End

Example //Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, MSRXQUALSTATTHRSH=200, CELLRXQUALWORSENRATIOTHRSH=30, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, EGPRSBEPLIMITGMSK=7, EGPRSBEPLIMIT8PSK=16, GPRSRXQUALLIMIT=5; SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7; //Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


787



219

Configuring PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l


l


l


l



l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.


788



Context l


l


l




2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > NC2 Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). – Set Cell Load Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit). – Set Load Reselection Start Threshold as required, for example, 85. – Set Load Reselection Receive Threshold as required, for example, 6. – Set Load Reselect Level Threshold as required, for example, 40. – Set Cell Reselection Level Threshold as required, for example, 15. – Set Cell Reselection Hysteresis as required, for example, 6. – Set Cell Penalty Level as required, for example, 30. – Set Cell Penalty Duration as required, for example, 10. – Set Allowed Measure Report Missed Number as required, for example, 4. – Set Filter Window Size as required, for example, 6. – Set Cell Reselect Interval as required, for example, 2.

4.



Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

789



Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support). l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid).

2.

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace the PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface.

3.

Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.

4.

Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on cell load is enabled. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN to BSC. – Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.



2.

Use more MSs to perform GPRS services in the serving cell.

3.

Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gb interface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Um interface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PS handover from LTE to GSM based on cell load is enabled. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC – Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT (Support) for these cells.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU), Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

790



Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). ----End

Example //Activating the PS Handover from GSM to LTE SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, MINACCRXLEV=15, RESELHYST=6, PENALTYRXLEV=30, PENALTYLASTTM=10, ALLOWEDMEASRPTMISSEDNUM=4, FILTERWNDSIZE=6, LOADRESELSTARTTHRSH=85, LOADRESELRXTHRSH=6, LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, RESELINTERVAL=2, LOADRESELMAXRXLEV=40; SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7; //Activating the PS Handover from LTE to GSM SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID, TrafficReselAllow=FORBID; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


791



220

Configuring GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The dual-mode MS supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE. – The SGSN supports the PS handover between GSM and LTE. – The SGSN carries the Service E-UTRAN CCO IE. – The SGSN support the PFC procedure. – The GSM cell is configured with neighboring LTE cells, and the neighboring LTE cells support the cell reselection. NOTE


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


792



– The LTE cell is configured with neighboring GSM cells. In addition, the LTE cell supports the feature of PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage.

Context l


l


l




2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > NC2 Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches), set Cell Service Reselection Allowed to PERMIT (Permit).


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (Support as built-in PCU) and Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to SUPPORT(Support).

Verification Procedure – Verifying the PS Handover from GSM to LTE

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA. In this step, set Cell Normal Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid), set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed to FORBID(Forbid) and Cell Load Reselection Allowed to FORBID (Forbid).

2.

Use an MS that camps on the serving cell to download or upload data. Trace PS messages over the Um interface and PTP messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface and Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

793



3.

Inform an engineer at the NSE to configure the subscription information of this MS to ensure that the LTE network is preferentially selected. NOTE

The following message from the SGSN to the BSC can be traced over the Gb interface: the DLUNITDATA message with the Service E-UTRAN CCO IE setting to Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure should be performed.

4.

Check the messages traced over the Um and Gb interfaces. If the following messages are traced, the PS handover from GSM to LTE based on coverage is enabled. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge message from SGSN to BSC. – Um interface: the PS Handover Command message from BSC to MS.



2.

Inform an engineer at the LTE to trigger the handover of this service from LTE to GSM.

3.

Check the PS services on the Um interface and the messages traced over the Gb interface on the target GSM cell. If PS services are processed normally on the Um interface and the following messages are traced over the Gb interface, the PS handover from LTE to GSM based on coverage is enabled. – Gb interface: the Handover Request message from SGSN to BSC – Gb interface: the PS Handover Request Acknowledge message from BSC to SGSN – Gb interface: the PS Handover Complete message from BSC to SGSN NOTE

Before the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT (Not Support) for all cells except the target GSM cell. After the verification, set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover back to SUPPORT(Support) for these cells.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Out LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support) and set Support In LTE Inter-cell PS Handover to UNSUPPORT(Not Support).

----End

Example //Activation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TrafficReselAllow=PERMIT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


794



SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=SUPPORT; //Verification Procedure SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=FORBID, LOADRESELALLOW=FORBID, NORMALRESELALLOW=FORBID; //Deactivation Procedure SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


795



221

Configuring eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNC2 is short for Network Control Mode 2.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the optional features GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.

l


l

The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).

l



Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

This feature can be configured to implement the network-controlled cell reselection from GSM to LTE for an MS. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

796



l

With this feature, an MS in a cell with poor signal quality, heavy load, or low signal level can reselect a neighboring cell with good signal quality, light load, or high signal level. Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, the network-controlled cell reselection considers factors such as the service type of the MS, and receive level, traffic load, and signal level of neighboring cells so that the MS can reselect a better cell.

l


Procedure

l

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to YES(Yes).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network Control Mode to NC2(NC2).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNC2PARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > NC2 Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed, Cell Load Reselection Allowed, Cell Normal Reselection Allowed, and Cell Service Reselection Allowed to PERMIT(Permit). Set the related parameters as required according to network plan.

4.



Make the MS camp on the serving GSM cell. Then, use the MS to perform GPRS services, and trace the signaling on the Um interface by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

2.

Move the MS, increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell, or increase the number of MSs in the serving cell.

3.

Check the messages traced over the Um interface. If the following messages are traced, the eNC2 between GSM and LTE is enabled. – The Packet Measurement Report message from MS to BSC. – The Packet Cell Change Order message from BSC to MS.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic GPRS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Support as built-in PCU) and Support NC2 to NO(No).

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


797



Example //Activating eNC2 Between GSM and LTE SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=YES; SET GCELLPSBASE: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, NCO=NC2; SET GCELLNC2PARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, URGENTRESELALLOW=PERMIT, LOADRESELALLOW=PERMIT, NORMALRESELALLOW=PERMIT, TRAFFICRESELALLOW=PERMIT; SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EUTRANPRI=7; //Deactivating eNC2 Between GSM and LTE SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NC2SPT=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


798



222

Configuring eNACC Between GSM and LTE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE. Here, eNACC is short for External Network Assisted Cell Change. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is installed.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. This feature depends on the optional features GBFD-114101 GPRS and GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE.

l


l

The Gb interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the Gb Interface (over FR) and Configuring the Gb Interface (over IP).

l


You can Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL to add a neighboring LTE cell, in this step, set EUTRAN Cell Type according to the actual situation, and Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to configure the neighboring LTE cells to support the cell reselection, in this step, set LTE Cell Reselection Allowed to YES(Yes).

Context l

The eNACC between E-UTRAN and GERAN supports only the relocation of MSs from E-UTRAN to GERAN.

l

The eNACC can be configured to accelerate the cell reselection of an MS and shorten the period of service disruption caused by cell reselection.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


799



NOTE

The verification procedure must be performed immediately after the activation procedure; otherwise, the verification cannot be performed.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to YES(Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC. NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation when the traffic volume is low.

l


Trace SIG messages over the Gb interface on the LMT by referring to Tracing SIG Messages on the Gb Interface.

2.

Check the messages traced over the Gb interface. If the following messages are traced, the eNACC between GSM and LTE is enabled. – The RAN INFORMATION REQ message from SGSN to BSC. – The RAN INFORMATION message from BSC to SGSN.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD NSE. In this step, set RIM Support to NO (No Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RST SIGBVC to reset the SIG BVC. NOTE

This operation affects the services of all the cells under the NSE. Perform the operation when the traffic volume is low.

----End

Example //Activating eNACC Between GSM and LTE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=YES; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0; //Deactivating eNACC Between GSM and LTE MOD NSE: NSEI=0, RIMSUP=NO; RST SIGBVC: NSEI=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


800



223

Configuring SRVCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511309 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC).

Prerequisites l


l


l


Context l

The SRVCC feature enables the speech services that are carried on the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) to be handed over to the GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN). An MS accesses the IMS to maintain the speech service through the CS domain in the GERAN or the PS domain in the Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN).

l

The SRVCC feature supports only handover of speech services from E-UTRAN to GERAN. It is available only when the E-UTRAN and the GERAN cover the same area.

l


Procedure 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SRVCC Handover Allowed to YES (Yes), and set the following parameters value same as the value settings on the MSC Server: – LTE SAI MCC – LTE SAI MNC

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


801



– LTE SAI LAC – LTE SAI SAC l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC to query SRVCC Handover Allowed. Expected result: The value of SRVCC Handover Allowed is Yes.

2.

Tracing the A interface signaling on the LMT by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. On the Basic tab page, specify the DPC of the test cell for the DPC (Hex) in the DPC Configuration. Click BSSAP tab in the Trace Type. On the BSSAP tab page, specify the ID of the test cell for the Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) in the Cell. Then click Submit.

3.

After the A interface signaling tracing window is displayed, use a GSM/LTE dualmode MS to camp on the LTE cell and then make a call. Expected result: The Handover Request and Handover Complete messages are traced over the A interface.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SRVCC Handover Allowed to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating SRVCC SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SRVCCHOEN=YES, LTESAIMCC=538, LTESAIMNC=735, LTESAILAC=2497, LTESAISAC=3685; //Deactivating SRVCC SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SRVCCHOEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


802



224

Configuring Multi Technology

Neighbour Cell Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature GBFD-119502 PS Handover.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS and SGSN support the PS handover. – GSM neighboring cells, UMTS neighboring cells, and LTE neighboring cells are configured.

Context This feature allows the users to configure priorities to GSM, UMTS, and LTE neighboring cells of a GSM cell on the BSC. If handover conditions (for example, level) are met, the MS is handed over to a neighboring cell with a higher priority. NOTE

Assume that the serving GSM cell and two LTE external cells are configured as neighboring cells.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

803



batch modification center: not supported) to set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the serving GSM cell, Neighbor Cell Index to the index of LTE neighboring cell 1, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 4. 2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Neighbor Cell Index to the index of LTE neighboring cell 2, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 5.


Use an MS to perform the download service in the GSM cell.

2.

On the LMT, On the MT, trace PTP messages on the Gb interface and PS domain messages on the UM interface by referring to Tracing PTP Messages On the Gb Interface and Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface.

3.

Relocate the MS to trigger the PS handover.

4.

Check the messages traced over the Gb and Um interfaces. If the following messages exist, it indicates that the MS is handed over to LTE neighboring cell 2 to perform the PS service. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN. In this message, Target eNB identifier is LTE neighboring cell 2. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge from SGSN to BSC. – Um interface: the PS Handover Command from BSC to MS.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL to set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Neighbor Cell Index to the index of LTE neighboring cell 2, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 2.

6.

Use an MS to perform the download service in the GSM cell. Relocate the MS to trigger the PS handover.

7.

Check the message process over the Gb interface and Um interface. If the following messages exist, it indicates that the MS is handed over to LTE neighboring cell 1 to perform the PS service. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required message from BSC to SGSN. In this message, Target eNB identifier is LTE neighboring cell 1. – Gb interface: the PS Handover Required Acknowledge from SGSN to BSC. – Um interface: the PS Handover Command from BSC to MS.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Neighbor Cell Index to the index of LTE neighboring cell 1, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 255.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), Source Cell Index to the index of the GSM serving cell, Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

804



Neighbor Cell Index to the index of LTE neighboring cell 2, and Neighboring Cell Priority to 255. ----End

Example //Activation Procedure MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9001, NCELLPRI=4; MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9002, NCELLPRI=5; //Deactivation Procedure MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9001, NCELLPRI=255; MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRCLTENCELLID=0, NBRLTENCELLID=9002, NCELLPRI=255;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


805



225

Configuring Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The network is covered by both a 2G network and an LTE network. – The UE supports both 2G and LTE frequency bands.

Context When the 2G network and the LTE network cover the same area and this feature is activated, a UE can process services in the LTE network immediately after the UE releases a 2G call. This accelerates cell reselection.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXTLTECELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC LTE External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add an LTE external cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

806



batch modification center: not supported) to configure the LTE cell 1 as a neighboring cell of the 2G cell 0, and in this step, set Support Rapid Reselection to SUPPORT (SUPPORT). NOTE

The cell 0 must be configured as a neighboring cell of the LTE cell 1 on the LTE side.

l

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Basic Attributes of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) to set basic attributes of the BSC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Cell Priority and EUTRAN System Information Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set EUTRAN Priority to a value greater than UTRAN Priority.


Initiate Um interface message tracing. Enable the UE to camp on cell 0, initiate a call in cell 0 successfully, and maintain the call.

2.

Hang up the call and check the network indicator displayed on the UE. The network indicator indicates that the UE is camping on the LTE cell. NOTE

If the 2G network and LTE network use the same network indicator, the UE must be capable of identifying which cell the UE is camping on, a 2G cell or an LTE cell.

3.

l

Trace the Um interface message by referring to Tracing CS Domain messages on the Um interface. An information element (IE) "cell-selection-indicator-after-release" is contained in the downlink Channel Release message transmitted over the Um interface.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GLTENCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC LTE Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Support Rapid Reselection to UNSUPPORT(UNSUPPORT).

----End

Example //Activating Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release ADD GEXTLTECELL: EXTLTECELLID=8048, EXTLTECELLNAME="Cell1", MCC="460", MNC="10", ENODEBTYPE=MACRO, CI=0, TAC=1, FREQ=100, PCID=0, EUTRANTYPE=FDD; ADD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRCLTENCELLNAME="Ce110", NBRLTENCELLNAME="Cell1", SPTRAPIDSEL=SUPPORT; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; GCELLPRIEUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME=Ce110, UTRANPRI=0, EUTRANPRI=1; //Deactivating Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release MOD GLTENCELL: IDTYPE=BYNAME, SRCLTENCELLNAME="Ce110", NBRLTENCELLNAME="Cell1", SPTRAPIDSEL=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


807



226

Configuring CSFB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511313 CSFB.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Others – A SGs interface is configured between the MSC server and the Mobile Management Entity (MME). – The MS is a GL dual-mode MS and supports CSFB. – It is recommended that the CSFB be used together with the GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE and the GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release.

Context Circuit Switch FallBack (CSFB) is a function based on which the MS camping on the E-UTRAN network moves to the GERNAN or UTRAN network by using PS handover or PS cell reselection and processes CS services on the GERNAN or UTRAN network. This feature can be enabled only when the E-UTRAN network covers the same area as the GERAN or UTRAN network.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – when the MSC Pool function is disabled

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


808



Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, specify a target cell and set CSFB Support to SUPPORT(Support). – when the MSC Pool function is enabled Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, specify a target cell and set CSFB Support to SUPPORT(Support), set Unknown Paging Response Support to YES (Yes). l


Start CS single user tracing on the LMT. In this step, enter the IMSI or TMSI of the test MS and click OK. For instructions on how to start CS single user tracing on the LMT, see Tracing CS Domain Messages of a Single Subscriber.

2.

Enable CSFB for LTE NEs on the E-UTRAN side and for the MSC on the GERAN side. NOTE

For instructions on how to enable CSFB for LTE NEs and for the MSC, see the related feature configuration guide.

3.

Trigger a CS paging to the MS after the MS operates services normally on the EUTRAN network.

4.

Query the result of CS single user tracing. Expected result: The MS sets up a call successfully at the BSC. Both signaling and speech services are normal.

l

Deactivation Procedure – when the MSC Pool function is disabled Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, specify a target cell and set CSFB Support to UNSUPPORT(Not Support). – when the MSC Pool function is enabled Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, specify a target cell and set CSFB Support to UNSUPPORT(Not Support), set Unknown Paging Response Support to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Enabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is enabled SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=SUPPORT, CSFBPAGRSPBCSWITCH=YES; //Enabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is disabled

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


809



SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=SUPPORT; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Disabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is enabled SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=UNSUPPORT, CSFBPAGRSPBCSWITCH=NO; //Disabling CSFB when the MSC Pool function is disabled SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SUPPORTCSFB=UNSUPPORT;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


810


227 Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

227

Configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The MS supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA networks. It also supports bidirectional cell reselection and handovers between GSM and TD-SCDMA. – The BSS and NSS support the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, and location update. In addition, they support measurement control, handover decision, and handover signaling procedure during inter-RAT handovers.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is not under license control.

l


l

Initial Data Preparation The basic data has been configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data.

Context The GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselect a GSM cell if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the TD-SCDMA network or in the area with weak TD-SCDMA coverage. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the TDSCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the signal quality in the TD-SCDMA cell is higher than that in the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselect a TD-SCDMA cell if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can enjoy the various services provided by the TD-SCDMA network.



811



1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Configure parameters for an inter-RAT neighboring cell reselection or handover. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a 3G external cell. In this step, set Utran Cell Type to TDD(TDD).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring 3G cell.

c.


d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support Sent 2QUATER, Send 3G Class Flag, and Classmark Enquiry With 3G Request all to YES(Yes).

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Query Classmark after In-BSC HO Enabled to YES(Yes).

f.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed and Neighboring 3G Cells Filtering Mode to appropriate values.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic call control parameters of the cell. In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes).

h.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSBASE (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Basic PS Attributes of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Network Control Mode to an appropriate value.

i.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(Yes). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

812



j.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the UTRAN system message parameters for call control in a cell. In this step, set Qsearch I, Qsearch C, and Qsearch P to 7, and set Qsearch C Initial to Always(Always).

Enable GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability optimization for MSs in idle mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES(Yes), and set TDD MI System INFO Broadcasting Prohibit and TDD MI System Information Optimized to appropriate values.

3.

Disable GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT CS handover if necessary. Enable GSM/TDSCDMA interoperability optimization for MSs in dedicated mode. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TDD MI System INFO Broadcasting Prohibit to YES(Yes), TDD MI System Information Optimized to NO(No), and set TDD Cell Reselect Diversity, Best TDD Cell Number, TDD Reporting Offset, and TDD Reporting Threshold to appropriate values.

l

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL to query the value for Utran cell type. Expected result: The value for Utran cell type is TDD(TDD).

2.

Query the MS frequency when the MS is in a GSM cell. Expected result: The MS frequency indicates that the MS is in a GSM cell.

3.

Move the MS to initiate a call reselection from a GSM cell to a TD-SCDMA cell. When measuring neighboring TD-SCDMA (TDD) cells, the MS initiates a cell reselection if the Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) of Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) is normal and CPICH RSCP is greater than the value for TDDCELLRESELDIV.

4.

Query the MS frequency again. Expected result: The MS frequency indicates that the MS is in a TD-SCDMA cell.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a neighboring 3G cell.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a 3G external cell.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

813



Parameters in Batches) to set the basic handover parameters of a cell. In this step, set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(No). ----End

Example // Activating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048", MCC="11", MNC="11", LAC=11, CI=1, RNCID=11, DF=1, SCRAMBLE=1, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048; SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QUERYCMAFTERINBSCHO=YES; SET OTHSOFTPARA: Send2QuterFlag=YES, SendUtranECSCFlag=YES, CLASSMARKQUERY=YES; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, QI=7, QCI=Always, QP=7, QSEARCHC=7; // Deactivating GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability RMV G3GNCELL: EXT3GCELLID=5048, EXT3GCELLNAME="5048"; RMV GEXT3GCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=0, NBR3GNCELLID=5048; SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


814



228

Configuring Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The IP interface board is installed.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA modes. – The UE supports full-rate AMR. – The related parameters for the transmission between GSM and TD-SCDMA are negotiated.

Context The Iur-g interface is used for information exchange between the BSC and the TD-RNC. Through the information exchange and common measurement procedures, the BSC and TDRNC can obtain the capacity and load information of each other.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set DSP type to IUR_G (IUR_G) and DSP bear type to M3UA(M3UA). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

815



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add an M3UA local entity.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add an M3UA destination entity.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP interface board.

5.

Configure the physical layer and the data link layer. – The FG2a, GOUa, FG2c, GOUc, FG2d and GOUd boards adopt IP over FE/GE transmission. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click Board > Properties > Ethernet Port Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the attributes of the Ethernet port.

b.

(Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHREDPORT (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Right click Board > Properties > Ethernet Red Port; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add active and standby Ethernet ports if required.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > Ethernet Port IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address for the Ethernet port. In this step, set Local IP address based on the network plan. When multiple VLAN gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to add.

d.

(Optional) When device IP is used in communication, Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a device IP address for the interface board. In this step, set Device IP Address Type and IP address to appropriate values.

– The PEUa/POUc board adopts IP over E1/T1 transmission.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the device IP address of the interface board. In this step, set Device IP Address Type and IP address to appropriate values.

b.

Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MP link group) and perform the corresponding step. If the E1/T1 link carries a/an...

Then...

PPP link

Go to step c.

MP link group

Go to step d.


816



6.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a PPP link. In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc. To add more PPP links, run this command for each PPP link you want to add.

d.

Add MP link group data. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MP link group. In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an MP link. In this step, set Board Type to PEUa or POUc. To add more MP links, run this command for each MP link you want to add.

Configure the control plane data (over IP). a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link. In this step, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD) and Application type to M3UA(M3UA). To add multiple SCTP links, run this command for each SCTP link you want to add.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link set. NOTE

l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP), set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). l If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP) and Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP(M3UA_SP), set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP(M3UA_IPSP). In other cases, set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_ASP(M3UA_ASP).

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: (G)IURG Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link. To add multiple M3UA links, run this command for each M3UA link you want to add.


l

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP N7DPC to query the SCCP DSP state. In this step, set DSP index to the index of the adjacent TD RNC. The result shows that the SCCP DSP is in the accessible state.



817



1.


----End

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


818


229 Configuring Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g

229

Configuring Radio Resource

Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UE supports both the GSM and TD-SCDMA modes. – The UE supports full-rate AMR. – The related parameters for the transmission between GSM and TD-SCDMA are negotiated. – The neighboring cell relationship is properly configured on the TD-RNC. Iur-g Interface Existence Symbol is set to YES(Yes) and Iur-g Interface Supporting Inter-RAT CS Handover is set to YES(Yes).

Context In this feature, radio resource reservation is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handover procedure through the information exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and the TD-RNC. In this way, the resource reservation procedure is completed without CN forwarding.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


819



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index), specify the cell ID, and set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) and Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g to YES(Yes). NOTE

Carry Speech Data at Iur-g can be set to YES(Yes) to enable the Iur-g interface to carry the user plane data.

2.

l

Set the local BSC as the neighboring BSC of the TD RNC and set Handover Type Supported by the Iur-g Interface to Carrying Signaling Plane Handover on the TD-RNC side.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLHOBASIC. The returned result shows that Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g is set to Yes.

2.

Use a UE to initiate a call in the TD-SCDMA network. The call is established. Attenuate the signal of the TD-SCDMA cell or add path loss between the UE and the TD-SCDMA cell until the UE is handed over from the 3G cell to a 2G cell.

3.

Trace the messages transmitted on the interface between BSCs by referring to Tracing Messages on the Inter-BSC Interface. You can view additional handover signaling in the tracing window. Figure 229-1 shows the messages traced on the interface between BSCs. Figure 229-1 Messages traced on the interface between BSCs

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME) to BYID(By Index) and specify the cell index. In addition, set Allow Incoming BSC Handover at Iur-g to NO(No). If the user plane transmission over the Iur-g interface also needs to be deactivated, set Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO(No). NOTE

If Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable is set to NO(No) before this feature is activated, set this parameter to NO(No) when deactivating this feature.

----End

Example //Activating Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES, InterRatIurgInBscHoEn=YES; //Deactivating Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


820



SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=NO, InterRatIurgInBscHoEn=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


821



230

Configuring Extended BCCH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS supports this feature.

Context SI2Quater and SI13 messages are sent on the same normal BCCH as other system information messages. Only one message is sent in a scheduling period, leading to a long delay. If SI2Quater and SI13 messages are specified to be broadcast on an extended BCCH, only these two types of messages are broadcast on the extended BCCH. In addition, one SIQuater or SI13 message is broadcast in each scheduling period. This speeds up the scheduling and broadcasting of SI2Quater and SI13 messages. As a result, MSs quickly obtain system information messages for inter-RAT cell reselection, and the delay in cell reselection decreases.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Idle Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to a value greater than 0.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

822



System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 2Quater Message Transmission Channel to BCCH_Ext(BCCHExt). 3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Channel of Sending SI13 Message to BCCH_Ext(BCCH Ext).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SND GCELLSYSMSG to send system information messages. Initiate Abis interface message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Trace Type area, click RSL to trace RSL messages on the Abis interface. If the value of si2-quater-position in SI Type 3 is 1, SI2quater is sent on the extended BCCH, as shown in Figure 230-1. Figure 230-1 BCCH message

2. l

If the value of si13-position in SI Type 3 is 1, SI13 is sent on the extended BCCH, and this feature has been activated.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLIDLEBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Idle Mode > Idle Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CCCH Blocks Reserved for AGCH to 0.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control UTRAN System Message Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 2Quater Message Transmission Channel to BCCH_Norm(BCCH Norm).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCAD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Advanced Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Channel of Sending SI13 Message to BCCH_Norm (BCCH Norm).

----End

Example //Activating Extended BCCH SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSAGBLKSRES=1; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: POS2QUATER=BCCHExt; SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, POSSI13=BCCH_Ext;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


823



//Verifying Extended BCCH SND GCELLSYSMSG: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0; //Deactivating Extended BCCH SET GCELLIDLEBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, BSAGBLKSRES=0; SET GCELLCCUTRANSYS: POS2QUATER=BCCHNorm; SET GCELLCCAD: IDTYPE=BYID, POSSI13=BCCH_Norm;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


824



231

Configuring NC2 Between GSM and TD-SCDMA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPU board that supports the built-in PCU is configured.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: GBFD-114101 GPRS, GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability, and GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA (dependent on this feature if the neighboring TD-SCDMA cell load is a prerequisite to cell reselection). – The feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared, Cell GBFD-114151 DTM, and GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search. The TD-SCDMA neighboring cell load acquisition function in the NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA feature is mutually exclusive with the GSM/TD-SCDMA cell reselection optimization for MSs in packet transfer mode in the GBFD-114302 GSM/ TD-SCDMA Interoperability feature.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS must support all of the following: GSM and TD-SCDMA, bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and TD-SCDMA, NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA, and the processing of neighboring TD-SCDMA cell information contained in the Packet Measurement Order message. – The BSS and NSS support bidirectional cell reselection between GSM and TDSCDMA. – A GSM cell is configured with a neighboring TD-SCDMA cell, and the neighboring TD-SCDMA cell supports cell reselection.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


825



Context With this feature, a dual-mode MS in a GSM cell can reselect a neighboring TD-SCDMA cell if the neighboring cell is not overloaded and the signal quality in the neighboring cell is good. This feature improves users experience. It also reduces the traffic load in GSM and improves the resource utilization in TD-SCDMA.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed to FORCENC2(Force NC2 Mode).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLRESELECTUTRANTDD (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > UTRAN TDD Reselection Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING, TDD_REPORTING_OFFSET, TDD_REPORTING_THRESHOLD, TDD Neighboring Cell Overload Threshold, and TDD Reselection time Threshold to appropriate values.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMEIGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > IMEI group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IMEI Group Index. IMEI Group Description, Start IMEI and End IMEI to appropriate values. NOTE

The BSC initiates the NC2 procedure only to the GSM/TD-SCDMA MSs in the IMEI group.

l


Initiate Um interface PS message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface. In this step, Select Cell from the Trace Type drop-down combo box, and specify Cell ID.

2.

Use a dual-mode MS to perform PS services in a GSM cell. Expected result: The following messages are traced in the PS domain on the Um interface, which indicates that this feature takes effect: – Packet Measurement Order: sent by the BSC to the MSs using configured IMEIs. – Packet Measurement Report message: periodically sent by the MS to the BSC. – Packet Cell Change message: sent by the BSC to the MS when the signal level of a neighboring TD-SCDMA cell carried in a Packet Measurement Report message exceeds the RSCP threshold for layer of 3G cell and the MS keeps processing PS services for the duration longer than TddReselTimeThd. The RSCP threshold for layer of 3G cell can be queried by running the BSC6900 MML command LST GEXT3GCELL.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > GPRS Attributes > Other GPRS Parameters of 2G Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell


826



Parameters in Batches). In this step, set GSM-to-TD Cell Reselection Allowed to NORMAL(Normal NC Mode). ----End

Example //Activating NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GSMTOTDALLOWED=FORCENC2; SET GCELLRESELECTUTRANTDD: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, PsBestTddCellNum=1, PsTddCellRptOff=0, PsTddCellRptThd=0, TddNCellLoadThd=60, TddReselTimeThd=2000; ADD IMEIGRP: ImeiGrpIndex=0, ImeiGrpDscrpt="Test_MS", ImeiMin="353043040000000", ImeiMax="353043045000000"; //Deactivating NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA SET GCELLPSOTHERPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GSMTOTDALLOWED=NORMAL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


827



232

Configuring Ciphering

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional features GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm and GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MSC and the MS supports ciphering.

Context There are eight ciphering algorithms specified in the GSM protocols: A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7. In A5/0, ciphering is not supported. In A5/1, A5/2, and A5/3, safety of CS and PS data of a user transmitted over the air interface is guaranteed.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

828


232 Configuring Ciphering NOTE

l This procedure takes A5/3 as an example. The configuration procedures of other ciphering algorithms are similar as this procedure. l A5/0 in the Encryption Algorithm drop-down list must be selected.

3.

Optional: Set the encryption algorithm priority. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Encryption Algorithm 1 to Encryption Algorithm 7 separately. For example, set Encryption Algorithm 1 to A51(A5/1), Encryption Algorithm 2 to A52(A5/2), Encryption Algorithm 3 to A53(A5/3), Encryption Algorithm 4 to A54(A5/4), Encryption Algorithm 5 to A55(A5/5), Encryption Algorithm 6 to A57(A5/7), and Encryption Algorithm 7 to A56(A5/6). NOTE

l The default priority of the encryption algorithm in descending order is A5/7 to A5/0. If you do not perform any configurations on the priority, use the default priority. l Each priority corresponds to an encryption algorithm, and different priorities cannot correspond to the same encryption algorithm.

l


The verification procedures take A5/3 as an example.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA. In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 and A5/3.

3.

Double-click A Interface Trace on the LMT to create a trace task. On the Basic tab page, specify the DPC of the test cell in the DPC(HEX) text box. Click BSSAP in the Trace Type area. Specify the ID of the test cell in the Cell ID (cell1, cell2, ...cell16): text box in the BSSAP tab page. Then, click Submit.

4.

After opening the A interface tracing window, use the MS to initiate a call in the test cell. Expected result: The call is set up, and the IE chosen-encryption-algorithm in the Cipher Mode Complete message is gsm-a5-3.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLBASICPARA (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Cell Attributes > Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Index to the index of the test cell and Encryption Algorithm to A5/0.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Setting Interface Tags SET BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, UmVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus, AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus; //Setting ciphering algorithms SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


829



ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-1&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0; //Setting encryption algorithm priority SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, EncryptionAlgorithm1st=A51, EncryptionAlgorithm2nd=A52, EncryptionAlgorithm3rd=A53, EncryptionAlgorithm4th=A54, EncryptionAlgorithm5th=A55, EncryptionAlgorithm6th=A57, EncryptionAlgorithm7th=A56; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Setting Encryption Algorithm to A5/0 SET GCELLBASICPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-0&A5/4-0&A5/5-0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


830



233

Configuring A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

This section describes how to activate, verify, deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization.

Prerequisites l


l

Dependencies on Other Features – A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization depends on the A5/1 ciphering algorithm in the GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm feature. – The Flex TSC function is mutually exclusive with the GBFD-115830 VAMOS feature.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The A5/1 encryption algorithm has been enabled. For details, see 232 Configuring Ciphering. – The MSC and MSs support encryption.

Context Based on features related to transmission over the Um interface, the A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization feature provides an optimized encryption procedure, enhancing network transmission security. This feature provides several security functions, which can be enabled as required.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating SDCCH fast handover Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


831



Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with SDCCH HO Allowed set to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with SD Quick HO set to ON(On). – Activating TCH scheduled handover Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Handover Data > Basic Handover Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Intracell HO Allowed set to YES(Yes). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with TCH Time Handover Switch set to ON(On) and TCH Time Handover Period set to a required value. – Activating Flex Training Sequence Code (TSC) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Flex TSC Switch set to ON(On). – Activating dummy bit randomization Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Dummy Bit Randomization Switch set to ON (On). – Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryption Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5ter after Encrypt set to ON (On). – Activating the randomization of the filling information of SI 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with SI 6 Filling Random Bits After Cipher set to YES (Yes). l

Verification Procedure – Verifying SDCCH fast handover 1.

Use an MS to initiate a call and Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface. Expected result: The Handover Performed message is displayed.

– Verifying TCH scheduled handover 1. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Use an MS to initiate a call and Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

832



Expected result: The call is initiated successfully and the Handover Performed message can be observed after the call lasts for a period specified by TCH Time Handover Period. – Verifying Flex TSC 1.

Use an MS to initiate a call, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface, and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.

2.

Terminate the call.

3.

Use an MS to initiate a call again, Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Um Interface, and record the TSC value in a Assignment Command message.

4.

Compare the two TSC values. Expected result: The two TSC values are different.

– Verifying dummy bit randomization 1.

Use an MS to initiate multiple calls, Tracing LAPDm Messages Through BTS Signaling Trace, and select the TRX carrying the SDCCH on the LAPDm tab. Then, enter the number of the timeslot or sub-timeslot to be traced. Expected result: When a call is assigned to the traced SDCCH, the lapdm-rr-frame information element contained in the MailBox Trace message shows that not all dummy bits are 2B. This indicates that dummy bits are randomized.

– Verifying the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryption 1.

Use an MS to initiate a call, and use a drive test device to trace messages over the Um interface. Expected result: SI 5, 5bis, and 5ter is not found in Um interface messages over the SACCH on the SDCCH after the BTS sends a Ciphering Mode Command message to the MS.

– Verifying the randomization of the filling information of SI 6 1.

Use an MS to initiate a call, and use a drive test device to trace messages over the Um interface. Expected result: The tail filling bit of SI 6 in Um messages is not 2B. This indicates the filling information of SI 6 is randomized.

l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating SDCCH fast handover Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with SD Quick HO set to OFF(Off). – Deactivating TCH scheduled handover Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with TCH Time Handover Switch set to OFF(Off). – Deactivating Flex TSC Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter >

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


833



Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Flex TSC Switch set to OFF(Off). – Deactivating dummy bit randomization Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Dummy Bit Randomization Switch set to OFF (Off). – Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryption Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Stop Send SI 5/5bis/5ter after Encrypt set to OFF (Off). – Deactivating the randomization of the filling information of SI 6 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Software Parameter and Reserved Parameter > Software Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with SI 6 Filling Random Bits After Cipher set to NO (No). ----End

Example /*Activating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/ //Activating SDCCH fast handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SIGCHANHOEN=YES; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=ON; //Activating TCH scheduled handover SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTRACELLHOEN=YES; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=ON, TCHTIMEHOPERIOD=60; //Activating Flex TSC SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=ON; //Activating dummy bit randomization SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=ON; //Activating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryption SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=ON; //Activating the randomization of the filling information of SI 6 SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SI6RandomBit=YES; /*Deactivating A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization*/ //Deactivating SDCCH fast handover SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SDFASTHOSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating TCH scheduled handover SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, TCHTIMEHOSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating Flex TSC SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FLEXTSCSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating dummy bit randomization SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, DUMMYBITRANDSWITCH=OFF; //Deactivating the function of stopping sending system information 5, 5bis, or 5ter after encryption SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, STOPSI5SWITCH=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


834



//Deactivating the randomization of the filling information of SI 6 SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, SI6RandomBit=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


835



234

Configuring BTS Integrated IPsec

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on other Features – This feature and the GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch feature are mutually exclusive. – It is recommended that this feature be used together with the GBFD-113526 BTS Supporting PKI feature.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – The multi-core UTRPc board is required. – BTS3900 series (excluding BTS3900B and BTS3900E) support this feature.

l

Requirements for the Network Topology – The Abis interface uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode.

l


Context This feature encrypts the transmission data between the BTS and the BSC to ensure the privacy, integrity, anti-replay capability of the transmission data. (IPSec on the BSC side is configured through the external security gateway.) Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


836



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Local Name

IKELNM

Set this parameter to be consistent with that on the peer end.

Network planning Peer end negotiation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Keepalive Interval

IKEKLI

Keepalive Timeout

IKEKLT

NAT Keepalive Timeout

NATKLI

DSCP

DSCP

ACL ID

ACLID

Description

ACLDESC

Rule Type

RULETYPE

Rule ID

RULEID

Action

ACTION

Protocol Type

PT

Source IP Address

SIP

Source Wildcard

SWC

Match Source Port

SMPT

Source Port Operate

SOP

Source Port 1

SPT1

Source Port 2

SPT2

Destination IP Address

DIP

Destination Wildcard

DWC

Match Destination Port

DMPT

-


Network planning

837



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Destination Port Operate

DOP

Destination Port 1

DPT1

Destination Port 2

DPT2

Match DSCP

MDSCP

Differentiated Services Code Point

DSCP

Match Fragment Message

MFRG

VLAN ID Filter Criteria

VLANIDOP

VLAN ID 1

VLANID1

VLAN ID 2

VLANID2

Proposal ID

PROPID

Encryption Algorithm

ENCALG



Authentication Algorithm

AUTHALG

Authentication Method

AUTHMETH

-

Network planning

DiffieHellman Group

DHGRP



PRF Algorithm

PRFALG


Network planning

ISAKMP SA Duration

DURATION



IKE Peer Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

PEERNAME

-


Network planning

838


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Version

IKEVERSION

Exchange Mode

EXCHMODE



Local ID Type

LOCALIDTYPE

-

Remote IP Address

REMOTEIP

Network planning

Remote Name

REMOTENAME

Pre-shared Key

PKEY



DPD Mode

DPD

DPD Idle Time

DPDIDLETIME

Network planning

DPD Retransmissio n Interval

DPDRETRI

DPD Retransmissio n Count

DPDRETRN

The dead peer detection (DPD) is enabled by default. It is recommended that DPD-related parameters be set to consistent values on the two ends of the Internet Key Exchange (IKE). Otherwise, the end with a shorter timer interval first detects that its peer end becomes ineffective and triggers IKE negotiation again.

NAT Traversal

NATTRAV

-

Local IP Address

LOCALIP

Network planning

Pre-shared Key

PKEY

IPSec Proposal Name

PROPNAME

Encapsulation Mode

ENCAPMODE

You are advised to use the tunnel mode.

Network planning


Peer end negotiation

Transform

TRANMODE

AH Authentication Algorithm

AHAUTHALG

ESP Authentication Algorithm

ESPAUTHALG



839


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

ESP Encryption Algorithm

ESPENCALG

Policy Group Name

SPGN

IPSec Sequence No.

SPSN

Perfect Forward Secrecy

PFS

SA Duration Mode

LTCFG

Lifetime Based On Time

LTS

Lifetime Based On Traffic

LTKB

Anti-Replay Window

REPLAYWND

Cabinet No.

CN

Subrack No.

SRN

Slot No.

SN

Port Type

PT

Port No.

PN

Policy Group Name

SPGN

Master Policy Group Name

MSPGN

Master IPSec Sequence No.

MSPSN

Slave Policy Group Name

SSPGN

Slave IPSec Sequence No.

SSPSN

BFD Session ID of Master Tunnel

MBFDSN

Remarks

Data Source

-

Network planning



-


Network planning

840



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

BFD Session ID of Slave Tunnel

SBFDSN

BFD Session No.

BFDSN

Source IP Address

SRCIP


DSTIP

Hop Type

HT

Time for Waiting to Restore

BTSWTR

Minimum TX Interval

MINTXINTERVA L

Minimum RX Interval

MINRXINTERV AL

Detect Period

DETECTMULT

DSCP

DSCP

Remarks

Data Source

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Activation Procedure To configure active and standby IPSec tunnels, perform Step 1 to Step 12. Otherwise, perform Step 1 to Step 9. 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIKECFG to set IKE local configurations.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSACL to add an access control list (ACL).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSACLRULE to add access rules in the ACL.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIKEPROPOSAL to configure IKE security proposals.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIKEPEER to add an IKE peer.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECPROPOSAL to add IPSec security proposals.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECPOLICY to add IPSec security policies.


841



8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECBIND to bind the IPSec security policy to the output port to validate the security policy.

9.

Optional: When the BTS uses an IP clock, the clock server is in a non-security domain, and Clock Topology Mode is set to PTPOVERUDP, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIPCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock Protocol Type to PTP (PTP Protocol), Clock Topology Mode to PTPOVERUDP(PTP over UDP Unicast), and Client IP Address to the IP address used for the communication between the BTS and the clock server.

10. Optional: Repeat Step 1 to Step 9 to configure the second IPSec tunnel. 11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBFD to configure a Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) session for the two IPSec tunnels respectively. 12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECDTNL to configure the active/standby relationship between the two IPSec tunnels. l

Verification Procedure If the active and standby IPSec tunnels have been configured, perform Step 1 to Step 3. Otherwise, perform Step 1 and Step 2. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSIPSECSA to check the IPSec tunnel status. Expected result: The results contain IPSec security association (SA) data, indicating that the IPSec tunnels are set up.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSACLRULE to determine whether service data is protected by the IPSec as planned by checking ACL rules and check whether the protected services are normal. For example, if speech services are protected by the IPSec, you can check whether the speech services are normal by initiating calls. If management packets are protected by the IPSec, you can check whether the corresponding BTS is online from the topology window on the M2000. Expected result: Service data is protected by the IPSec as planned and the protected services are normal.

3.

Remove the Ethernet cable connecting to the active channel, and Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSIPSECDTNL to check whether Current Used IPSec Policy is Slave IPSec Policy. Use an MS to initiate a call and observe whether the call is normal. Check whether the corresponding BTS is online from the topology window on the M2000. Expected result: Current Used IPSec Policy is Slave IPSec Policy, the call initiated by the MS is normal, and the corresponding BTS is online.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSIPSECBIND to delete the binding relationship between the IPSec security policy and the corresponding port.

----End

Example The following descriptions assume that the BTS is in IP over FE transmission mode. //Activation procedure //Setting BTS IKE basic configurations SET BTSIKECFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, IKELNM="IKECFG1", IKEKLI=20, IKEKLT=60, NATKLI=20, DSCP=48;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


842



//Adding a BTS ACL ADD BTSACL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACLID=3001, ACLDESC="Acl Group is created"; //Adding rules in a BTS ACL ADD BTSACLRULE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RULETYPE=ADV, ACLID=3001, RULEID=10, PT=IP, SIP="1.1.1.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="2.2.2.2", DWC="0.0.255.255", MDSCP=YES, DSCP=25, MFRG=YES; //Adding BTS IKE security proposals ADD BTSIKEPROPOSAL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PROPID=10, AUTHALG=MD5, DURATION=86400; //Adding a BTS IKE peer ADD BTSIKEPEER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, LOCALIDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="2.2.2.2", PKEY="*****", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1"; //Adding BTS IPSec security proposals ADD BTSIPSECPROPOSAL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PROPNAME="prop1", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5, ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding BTS IPSec security policies ADD BTSIPSECPOLICY: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SPGN="policy", SPSN=1, ACLID=3001, PROPNAME="prop1", PEERNAME="ike", LTCFG=LOCAL; //Binding a BTS IPSec policy group to a port ADD BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=0, SPGN="policy"; ADD BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN=" PolicyGroup1"; //Adding a BFD session on the BTS side ADD BTSBFD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BFDSN=1, SRCIP="1.1.1.1", DSTIP="2.2.2.2", HT=SBFD, MINTXINTERVAL=100, MINRXINTERVAL=100; ADD BTSBFD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BFDSN=2, SRCIP="3.3.3.3", DSTIP="4.4.4.4", HT=SBFD, MINTXINTERVAL=100, MINRXINTERVAL=100; //Adding IPSec dual channels ADD BTSIPSECDTNL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DUALID=0, MSPGN="policy", MSPSN=1, SSPGN="PolicyGroup1", SSPSN=1, MBFDSN=1, SBFDSN=2; Verification procedure //Querying the BTS IPSec SA status DSP BTSIPSECSA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, SPGN="policy", SPSN=1; //Querying the configuration information about the rules in the BTS ACL LST BTSACLRULE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RULETYPE=ADV, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Querying the status of the IPSec dual channels DSP BTSIPSECDTNL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DUALID=0; //Deactivation procedure //Deleting the binding relationship between the IPSec security policy group the corresponding port RMV BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=0; RMV BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


843



235

Configuring BTS Supporting PKI

The BTS Supporting PKI feature enables an NE to automatically obtain a digital certificate authorized by the Certificate Authority (CA) of an operator. With the digital certificate, the NE can pass the authentication that uses the Internet Protocol Security (IPsec), 802.1x, or Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol. This feature contains a suite of functions based on Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2) for certificate management between NEs. CMPv2 provides functions such as certificate register request, key update, key restore, certificate revocation, CA key update notification, certificate authorization notification, and certificate revocation notification. This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113526 BTS Supporting PKI. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on other Features – It is recommended that this feature be used together with the GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec feature.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – The UTRPc board is required. – DBS3900, BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900AL support this feature.

l

Requirements for the Network Topology – The Abis interface uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode.

l

Requirements for Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – Certificate services are provided by third-party CA servers.

Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Preparation


844



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Certification deploy position type

DEPLOYTYPE Do not set Certification deploy position type to NULL.

Certificate Authority Name

CANAME

This parameter specifies Network planning the name of the certificate issuing authority.

Certificate Authority URL

URL

l This parameter Network planning specifies the uniform resource location (URL) address of the certificate issuing authority. The value of this parameter cannot contain spaces.

Network planning

l The URL address must start with http:// or https://. l The URL address must be a valid IPv4 address. l The number of a specified port must be range from 1 to 65535.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

File Name

FILENAME

This parameter specifies the name of BTS certificate request files.

Network planning

FTP Server IP

IP

This parameter specifies the IP address of an FTP server.

Network planning

Source File Name

SRCF

This parameter specifies Network planning the name of source files for downloaded or uploaded certificate files (excluding path names).

Destination File Name DSTF

This parameter specifies Network planning the name of target files for downloaded or uploaded certificate files (excluding path names).


845



Parameter Name

Parameter ID


Data Source

Certificate File Name CERTNAME

This parameter specifies Network planning the file name of trust certificates or certificate chains. The file name must not contain the following characters: \, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, or |.

Application Type

This parameter specifies Network planning the application types of device certificates. Device certificates are classified into Internet Key Exchange (IKE) and SSL. The GSM system can be configured only with the IKE.

APPTYPE

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCERTDEPLOY to set the deployment position of BTS certificates. In this step, set Certification deploy position type to SPECIFIC, and set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. for the UTRPc to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCA to add a certificate issuing authority. In this step, set Certificate Authority Name and Certificate Authority URL based on your individual needs.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSCERTREQ to modify the contents of BTS certificate request files.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command CRE BTSCERTREQFILE to create a BTS certificate request file.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ULD BTSCERTFILE to upload the BTS digital certificate file to the CA server.

6.

Send the BTS digital certificate file to the CA administrator through Emails or storage devices. Then, the CA administrator sends a request to the CA for issuing device certificates.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DLD BTSCERTFILE to download a BTS digital certificate file.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTRUSTCERT to add a BTS trust certificate.

9.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCERTMK to add a BTS device certificate. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

846



10. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTSAPPCERT to modify the in-use BTS device certificate. l


Run the BSC6900 MML command TST BTSAPPCERT to perform an IPSec connection attempt using the device certificate. Check the reported result on the M2000. Expected result: The command is executed successfully.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCERTMK to delete the mapping between BTS certificate files.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCERTDEPLOY with Certification deploy position type set to NULL.

----End

Example //Activation Procedure //Setting the BTS certification deployment position SET BTSCERTDEPLOY: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DEPLOYTYPE=SPECIFIC, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4; //Adding a BTS certificate issuing authority and setting the authentication mode for the SSL to be the same as that for the CA: ADD BTSCA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CANAME="Certificate Authority", URL="http://192.168.119.156:80/pkix/"; //Modifying the contents of the BTS certificate request file MOD BTSCERTREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, COMMNAME=ESN, USERADDINFO="huawei.com", COUNTRY="cn", ORG="ITEF", ORGUNIT="hw", STATEPROVINCENAME="sc", LOCALITY="cd", SIGNALG=SHA1, KEYSIZE=KEYSIZE1024; //Creating a BTS certificate request file CRE BTSCERTREQFILE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FILENAME="PKI.cer"; //Uploading the BTS digital certificate file to the CA server ULD BTSCERTFILE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, IP="10.145.17.100", SRCF="PKI.cer", DSTF="SSL.cer"; //Downloading a BTS root CA certificate DLD BTSCERTFILE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, IP="10.145.17.100", SRCF="rootcert.pem", DSTF="rootcert.pem "; //Downloading a BTS device certificate DLD BTSCERTFILE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, IP="10.145.17.100", SRCF="BTSCert.pem", DSTF="BTSCert.pem"; //Adding a BTS trust certificate ADD BTSTRUSTCERT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CERTNAME="rootcert.pem"; //Adding a BTS device certificate ADD BTSCERTMK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, APPCERT="BTSCert.pem" //Modifying the in-use BTS device certificate MOD BTSAPPCERT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, APPTYPE=IKE, APPCERT="BTSCert.pem"; //Verification Procedure //Performming an IPSec connection attempt using the device certificate TST BTSAPPCERT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, APPTYPE=IKE, APPCERT="ssc", IKEPEER="ssa"; //Deactivation Procedure //Deleting the mapping between BTS certificate files MOD BTSAPPCERT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, APPTYPE=IKE, APPCERT="null"; RMV BTSCERTMK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, APPCERT="BTSCert.pem"; //Setting the BTS certification deployment position SET BTSCERTDEPLOY: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DEPLOYTYPE=NULL;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


847



236

Configuring Ring Topology

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B does not support this feature. – This feature cannot be enabled when a DXX device is used. – Reverse and forward links can be connected to the same Abis interface board or different Abis interface boards in the same BM subrack, but cannot be connected to different subracks.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/ T1, GBFD-113728 OML Backup, and GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass. – GBFD-117301 Flex Abis cannot be used together with BTS ring topology II.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – BTS ring topology I – When this feature is simultaneously enabled with Flex Abis, Flex Abis must be configured on all BTSs, and only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward and reverse links. – BTS ring topology II – Only a single E1 link can be configured on the forward and reverse links. – HDLC ring topology (only BTS ring topology II is supported) – Hybrid networking of HDLC and TDM is not supported. Secondary link is not supported. – The cabinets of the BTS30 or BTS312 cannot be used in cabinet groups.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


848



– The configuration of exclusive timeslots is supported, but the configuration of monitoring timeslots is not supported. – Local switching is not supported. – The conversion of the bearing modes, that is, the conversion from the HDLC ring topology to the TDM ring topology, is not supported. – Timeslots cannot be manually allocated.

Context A ring topology is a special type of chain topology. In a ring topology, BTSs connect to each other to form a common chain first, and then the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through a transmission link, thereby forming a ring. If the transmission link is disconnected at a point of the ring, the topology of BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains unchanged. BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain in the reverse direction. Compared with a common chain topology, the ring topology has the following advantage: When a transmission link is disconnected at a point, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In this way, BTSs that precede and follow the breakpoint can work normally, improving system robustness.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Interface Board > ADD BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Config Ring (CME: Support Ring Topology) to YES (Yes).

2.


3.

Configure the transmission data for the base station by referring to TDM/HDLC. NOTE

In the forward direction, a BTS in a ring connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port 0, and it connects to a lower-level BTS or BSC through port 1.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > Ring Attribues; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the attributes of the ring. – To enable BTS ring topology I, set Configure Ring II to NO(No), and set Ring I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try Rotating Duration Time based on your individual needs. – To enable BTS ring topology II, set Configure Ring II to YES(Yes), and set Ring II Wait Time Before Switch, Ring II Try Rotating Duration Time, Ring II Rotating Penalty Time, T200, T203, andN200 based on your individual needs.

l

5.


6.

Activate the base station configuration by referring to Activating the BTS Configuration.


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSRINGPARA. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

849



Expected result: The parameter settings in the query results are consistent with the configured values. l



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Config Ring (CME: Support Ring Topology) to NO(No).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a reverse ring connection.

4.


----End

Example //Activating Ring Topology ADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES, SRANMODE=SUPPORT; ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0; ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=14, PN=1; SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, FASTCNETFLAG=YES, BREAKTIME=0, BUILDTIME=60, ESTTIME=0, T200=12, T203=1, N200=3; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Verifying Ring Topology DSP BTSRINGPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Deactivating Ring Topology DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; MOD BTS:IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO; RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


850



237

Configuring TRX Cooperation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113801 TRX Cooperation.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The cell supports TRX cooperation. – At least two TRXs in the same band are configured in the cell. – The cell supports BCCH TRX cooperation. – The cell supports baseband FH TRX cooperation. – The cell supports switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation. – The cell supports switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation.

Context TRX cooperation enables the BSC to automatically designate an available TRX in the cell to replace a faulty BCCH TRX or baseband FH TRX. This ensures that the cell can work properly when faults occur on some TRXs in the cell. There are two types of TRX cooperation: BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

BCCH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to use the TRX cooperation algorithm to select an available TRX as the new BCCH TRX when the original BCCH TRX is faulty. This ensures that the cell can work properly. When the fault on the original BCCH TRX is rectified, the BSC can switch the BCCH back to the original TRX.


851


l


Baseband FH TRX cooperation enables the BSC to remove a TRX involved in baseband FH from the FH group when the TRX is faulty in a cell, whereas other TRXs in the FH group remain in baseband FH.

TRX cooperation is specific to each cell. That is, you can separately enable or disable the TRX cooperation function for each cell.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TRX Aiding Function Control to AllowReImmed(Allowed & Recover Immediately) and Switchback Policy of Baseband FH Mutual Aid to PART(Part).

Verification Procedure Verifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation 1.

Power off the BCCH TRX for the cell. In this way, the BCCH TRX becomes faulty, and therefore BCCH TRX cooperation is triggered.

2.

Wait for about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Type of channel 0 of a TRX (not the initially configured BCCH TRX) is set to Main BCCH.

3.

Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the BCCH TRX cooperation function and make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality is clear.

4.

Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 1 to enable switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation.

5.

Wait about 15 minutes for cell initialization, and then Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. Verify that Channel Type of channel 0 of the initially configured BCCH TRX is set to Main BCCH.

6.

Use an MS to access the cell enabled with the switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation function and make a call. Verify that the call is set up successfully and the voice quality is clear.

Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP. In this step, set Frequency Hopping Mode to BaseBand_FH(Baseband frequency hopping) and BCCHTRXHP Frequency Hopping Mode of BCCH TRX to NO_Hop(No hop). NOTE

l There are at least two operational TRXs in a baseband FH group to ensure the baseband FH when a TRX in the same group is faulty. l Operations such as performing a level-4 reset of a base station, adding a base station after removing it, activating a base station, and deactivating a base station clear the base station state recorded at the BSC. As a result, the cell participating in baseband FH TRX cooperation returns to the initial state.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANADMSTAT with Administrative State for the TCH carrying the BCCH set to Lock(Lock).

3.

Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

852



OML tab. Then, power off a TRX in the baseband FH group to enable baseband FH TRX cooperation.

l

4.

Wait 15 minutes, and then check that the IE "arfcnList" in the Set Channel Attributes message of the faulty TRX contains only one frequency whereas "arfcnList" in the Set Channel Attributes message of other TRXs in the same baseband FH group contains multiple frequencies except the frequency of the faulty TRX.

5.

Initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In the A Interface Trace dialog box, click the BSSAP tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing task. Initiate Abis-interface CS message tracing by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. In the Abis Interface CS Trace dialog box, click the RSL tab, and set related parameters to start the tracing task. Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice is clear during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that the field h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message carried in the Data Request message is 1.

6.

Power on the TRX mentioned in Step 3 to enable switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation.

7.

Wait 15 minutes, and then verify that the IE "arfcnList" in the Set Channel Attributes message of the fault-rectified TRX contains all frequencies in the baseband FH group.

8.

Use an MS to access the test cell and then originate a call. Verify that the voice is clear during the call and that the messages traced over the Abis and A interfaces are correct. Ensure that h in the IE "hopping-channel" of the ASSIGNMENT COMMAND message carried in the Data Request message is 1.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCACCESS (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Access Control Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set TRX Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow(TRX Aiding Not Allowed).

----End

Example //Activating TRX Cooperation SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReImmed, BHPREPOLICY=PART; //Verifying TRX Cooperation Verifying BCCH TRX cooperation and switchback of BCCH TRX cooperation DSP CHNSTAT: OBJTYPE=CELL, CELLIDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1; Verifying baseband FH TRX cooperation and switchback of baseband FH TRX cooperation SET GCELLHOPQUICKSETUP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, FHMODE=BaseBand_FH, BCCHTRXHP=NO_Hop; //Deactivating TRX Cooperation SET GCELLCCACCESS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=1, TRXAIDSWITCH=TRXAid_NotAllow;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


853



238

Configuring MSC Pool

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117401 MSC Pool. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – Two MSs are available, and they are registered at the HLR. – The MSCs and the MGWs are fully interconnected, and the MSC pool function is configured on the MSC side. – The interconnection data between the BSC6900 and the MSC is negotiated. – The M2000 feature WOFD-230100 MSC Pool Management has been enalbed. – An original signaling point (OSP) and at least two destination signaling points (DSPs) are configured. For details, see Configuring the OSP and DSP. – The transmission over the A interface is configured. For details, see Configuring the A Interface (over TDM) or Configuring the Control Plane of the A Interface (over IP).

Context An MSC pool consists of multiple MSCs processing traffic from one MSC pool area. A BSC6900 belonging to an MSC pool area is connected to each MSC in the MSC pool. All MSCs in the MSC pool share load and resources for equal distribution of traffic in the MSC pool, reducing inter-MSC handovers and providing disaster-tolerant redundancy capabilities. This feature enables the BSC to independently initiate the load reassignment function. One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of 32 MSCs. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


854



When the MSC does not support the function A Interface Circuits Managed by the MGW or the function is disabled, DPCs in an MSC pool are configured for different DPC groups. NOTE

This section uses the configuration of two DSPs whose DPX Index are set to 0 and 1 as an example.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNOPERATOR to add a GSM operator. In this step, set Operator Type, Operator Index, Operator Name, MCC, and MNC to appropriate values; set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes); and set Length of NRI in TMSI and MSC NULL-NRI Value based on the data negotiated with the MSC.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the first DSP. In this step, set DSP index to 0, set Operator Name to the value set in Step 1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSC Administrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability based on the data negotiated with the MSC.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE to add a CN node for the second DSP. In this step, set DSP index to 1, set Operator Name to the value set in Step 1, set CN Node Index and DPC Group Index appropriately, and set MSC Administrable State, MSC ID, and MSC Available Capability based on the data negotiated with the MSC. NOTE

Repeat the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCNNODE if there are more than two DSPs.

l

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to add the mapping between an NRI and an MSC. In this step, set NRI Value based on the data negotiated with the MSC. Ensure that the NRI value is the same as that on the MSC side.

5.

If you need to adjust the number of MSs served by an MSC, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE with MSC Administrable State set to OFFLOAD (Offload), Reallocation Proportion set to 100, and Reallocation Duration set to 1. Then, run the BSC6900 MML command STR MSCRSL with CN Node Index set to an appropriate value to start a BSC load reallocation task on the MSC. Reallocation Proportion is set according to the proportion of MSs that can be migrated from this MSC, and Reallocation Duration is set according to the task duration.


Enable the TMSI reallocation function on the MSC side.

2.

On the LMT, initiate A-interface message tracing by referring to Tracing Messages on the A Interface. In this step, set Trace Type to BSSAP and DPC(Hex) to the DSP of MSC 1.

3.

On the BSSAP tab page, set Cell ID(cell1,cell2,...cell16) to the ID of the cell where MS 1 camps on. Then, click Submit. The A Interface Trace message window is displayed. NOTE

Initiate A-interface message tracing with the DSP of MSC 2 by using the method described in Step 2 and Step 3.

4.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Power on MS 1. Use MS 1 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC 1 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

855



5.

Power on MS 2. Use MS 2 to initiate a location update procedure on the MSC 2 side. The CN assigns a TMSI to MS 2. NOTE

To enable the MS to initiate a location update at a specific MSC, Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNNODE to set MSC Administrable State for all other MSCs to UNAVAIL (Unavailable). After the location update, set the parameter to NORMAL(Normal).

6.

Move MS 1 to the coverage area of MSC 2. Then, use MS 1 to originate a call and check the A interface message tracing. Expected result: MS 1 sets up the call through MSC 1, and the registered MSC of MS 1 remains unchanged.

7.

Move MS 2 to the coverage area of MSC 1. Then, use MS 2 to originate a call and check the A interface message tracing. Expected result: MS 2 sets up the call through MSC 2, and the registered MSC of MS 2 remains unchanged. NOTE

In the TMSI reallocation procedure, the MSC assigns the TMSI that contains NRI (configured by the CN) to the MS. With this information, the BSC6900 can allocate the service to an appropriate MSC when the MS originates a call service. Note that the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the BSC6900 side must be consistent with the mapping between the NRI and the MSC on the CN side. You can use the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRIMSCMAP to configure the mapping on the BSC6900 side.

8.

If the BSC load reallocation task is started, run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MSCRSL with CN Node Index set to an appropriate value to query the BSC load reallocation task status. After the task is started on the MSC, MS 1 initiates the periodic location update procedure. Check the LA of MS 1 in the A interface message tracing. Expected result: MS 1 registers with MSC 2, the home MSC for MS 1 changes, and the load reallocation task is in the started state.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR. In this step, set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No).

2.

If the BSC load reallocation task is started, run the BSC6900 MML command STP MSCRSL with CN Node Index set to an appropriate value to stop the task.

----End

Example /*Activating MSC Pool*/ //Adding a GSM operator and enabling the MSC pool function ADD GCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, OPINDEX=0, OPNAME="op1", MCC="460", MNC="188", MSCPOOLALLOW=YES, MSCNRILEN=3, MSCNULLNRI=0, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO; //Adding a CN node ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800, CNID=0, DFDPC=YES, ATransMode=TDM; ADD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=1, DPX=0, DPCGIDX=1, OPNAME="op1", MSCCAP=1800, CNID=1, DFDPC=NO, ATransMode=TDM; //Adding an NRI-to-MSC mapping ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=10, CNNODEIDX=0; ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=11, CNNODEIDX=1; //Starting a load reallocation task

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


856



MOD GCNNODE: CNNODEIDX=0, MSCSTATUE=OFFLOAD, PROPORTION=100, PERIOD=1; STR MSCRSL: CNNODEIDX=0; /*Deactivating MSC Pool*/ //Disabling the MSC pool function MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, MSCPOOLALLOW=NO; //Stopping the load reallocation task STP MSCRSL: CNNODEIDX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


857



239

Configuring the SGSN Pool

About This Chapter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. 239.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool. 239.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


858



239.1 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPUd/DPUg/XPUa/XPUb/FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/GOUd board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The basic BSC data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data. – The communication is normal between the BSC and the SGSN. – The BSC supports SGSN Pool. – The P-TMSI allocation function must be enabled on the SGSN side when the SGSN Pool feature is enabled on the BSC. – The interface board is configured with a device IP address or port IP address.

Context SGSN Pool enables multiple SGSNs to form an SGSN pool. The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.

Procedure l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value.

2.

Configure the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d/GOUc/ GOUd Board.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PCU Type; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the type of the packet control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > SGSN Node; CME batch modification center: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

859



not supported) to add an SGSN node. In this step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.

l

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > NRI-SGSN Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the mapping between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > NSE; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a network service entity (NSE).

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLLOCAL (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > Local NSVL; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a network service virtual link (NSVL) on the BSC6900 side. If the NSE is in static configuration mode, Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVLREMOTE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > Remote NSVL; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an NSVL on the SGSN side.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NSE Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.

9.

Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in the SGSN pool.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the status of a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record it.

2.

Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.

3.

Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download properly. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on one PTP BVC.

4.

Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Ensure that the MS acessses the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download properly. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on another PTP BVC.


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NSE Identifier and PTP BVC Identifier corresponding to the current cell to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSVLREMOTE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > Remote NSVL; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the remote NSVL.


860



3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSVLLOCAL (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > Local NSVL; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the local NSVL.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > IP Transport > NSE; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the NSE.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NRISGSNMAP (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > NRI-SGSN Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the mapping between the NRI and the SGSN.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SGSNNODE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > SGSN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SGSN node.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to NO(No).

CAUTION The BSC allows new MSs to evenly access the SGSNs in an SGSN pool based on the capacity percentages configured for the SGSNs. The BSC cannot change the distribution of the existing MSs under the SGSNs in the SGSN pool. After the capacity percentages for SGSNs are added or modified, or if SGSNs are deleted, MSs under these SGSNs must be migrated to other SGSNs. This ensures that the MS distribution percentages under the SGSNs quickly reaches the specified values. ----End

Example //Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: MOD GCNOPERATOR:OPINDEX=0, OPNAME="abc", SPPRTCB=NOTSPPRTBC, HOBTWNOTHOPALLOW=NO, MSCPOOLALLOW=NO, SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=4, SGSNNULLNRI=0; //Configure SGSN Pool (IP transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE:TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE:OPNAME="abc", CNID=0, SGSNSTATUS=ALLOW, SGSNCAP=1000; ADD SGSNNODE:OPNAME="abc", CNID=1, SGSNSTATUS=ALLOW, SGSNCAP=3000; ADD NRISGSNMAP:NRI=8, OPNAME="abc", CNID=0; ADD NRISGSNMAP:NRI=2, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE:NSEI=23800, SRN=0, OPNAME="abc", PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=DYNAMIC, SVRIP="131.131.131.134", SVRPORT=23800, CNID=0, RIMSUP=NO, PFCSUP=NO, SN=0, PSHOSUP=NO; ADD NSE:NSEI=62380, SRN=0, OPNAME="abc", PT=GB_OVER_IP, ISNCMODE=DYNAMIC, SVRIP="131.131.131.136", SVRPORT=62380, CNID=1, RIMSUP=NO, PFCSUP=NO, SN=0, PSHOSUP=NO; ADD NSVLLOCAL:LOCALNSVLI=238, NSEI=23800, IP="132.134.131.133", UDPPN=23800, SRN=0, SN=18, SIGLW=100, SRVLW=100; ADD NSVLLOCAL:LOCALNSVLI=38, NSEI=62380, IP="132.134.131.131", UDPPN=62380, SRN=0, SN=18, SIGLW=100, SRVLW=100;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


861



ADD PTPBVC:NSEI=23800, BVCI=3, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2; ADD PTPBVC:NSEI=62380, BVCI=6, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2; //Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=23800, BVCI=3; DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=62380, BVCI=6; //Deactivate SGSN Pool: RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=23800, BVCI=3; RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=62380, BVCI=6; RMV NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=238; RMV NSVLREMOTE: REMOTENSVLI=38; RMV NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=238; RMV NSVLLOCAL: LOCALNSVLI=38; RMV NSE: NSEI=23800; RMV NSE: NSEI=62380; RMV NRISGSNMAP: NRI=8, OPNAME="abc"; RMV NRISGSNMAP: NRI=2, OPNAME="abc"; RMV SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=0; RMV SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

239.2 Configuring SGSN Pool (Gb over FR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The DPUd/XPUa/PEUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The basic data of the BSC is configured. For details, see Configuring the Basic Data. – The communication is normal between the BSC and the SGSN. – The BSC supports SGSN Pool. – The P-TMSI allocation function must be enabled on the SGSN side when the SGSN Pool feature is enabled on the BSC.

Context The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share load and resources in the pool. Configuring SGSN Pool can expand network capacity, reduce investment in equipment, implement redundancy, and improve network reliability. In addition, it reduces the number of inter-SGSN cell reselections, which improves network performance.



862


l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to YES(Yes); specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSNNULLNRI.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCPCUTYPE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > PCU Type; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the type of the packet control unit (PCU). In this step, set PCU Type to INNER(Built-in PCU).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SGSNNODE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > SGSN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SGSN node. In this step, set Operator Name and SGSN Node ID.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NRISGSNMAP (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > NRI-SGSN Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the mapping between the network resource identifier (NRI) and the SGSN.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > NSE; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a network service entity (NSE).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > Bearer Channel; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a bearer channel (BC).

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD NSVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > Network Service Virtual Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a network service virtual connection (NSVC).

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NSE Identifier. The mapping between CELL_1 and the first SGSN is complete.

9.

Repeat Step 2 through Step 8 to add mapping between CELL_1 and other SGSNs in the SGSN pool.


Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PTPBVC to query the status of a PTP BSSGP virtual connection (PTP BVC) and then record it.

2.

Trace PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in CELL_1 by referring to Tracing PTP messages on the Gb interface, and check the FLOW CONTROL BVC messages sent from the BSC to the SGSN through all functional PTP BVCs. If these messages are correct, SGSN Pool is enabled and functional.

3.

Ensure that the MS accesses the network in cell 1. Use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download properly. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on one PTP BVC.

4.

Block the PTP BVC carrying services discussed in step 3. Ensure that the MS accesses the network in cell 1 and use the MS to perform PS services. The MS can perform attach, PDP context activation, upload, and download properly. According to the traced PTP BVC messages on the Gb interface in cell 1, the PS services are carried on another PTP BVC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

863


l



Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV PTPBVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > PTP BVC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NSE Identifier and PTP BVC Identifier corresponding to the current cell to appropriate values.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSVC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > Network Service Virtual Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the NSVC.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BC (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > Bearer Channel; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the BC.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NSE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > FR Transport > NSE; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the NSE.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV NRISGSNMAP (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > NRI-SGSN Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the mapping between the NRI and the SGSN.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SGSNNODE (CME single configuration: Gb Configuration Express > SGSN > SGSN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SGSN node.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GCNOPERATOR (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > GSM Operator; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Allow SGSN Pool to NO(No).

CAUTION The BSC allows new MSs to evenly access the SGSNs in an SGSN pool based on the capacity percentages configured for the SGSNs. The BSC cannot change the distribution of the existing MSs under the SGSNs in the SGSN pool. After the capacity percentages for SGSNs are added or modified, or if SGSNs are deleted, MSs under these SGSNs must be migrated to other SGSNs. This ensures that the MS distribution percentages under the SGSNs quickly reaches the specified values. ----End

Example //Enable SGSN Pool and specify SGSN NRI Length and SGSN NullNRI Value: MOD GCNOPERATOR:OPINDEX=0, OPNAME="abc", SPPRTCB=NOTSPPRTBC, HOBTWNOTHOPALLOW=NO, MSCPOOLALLOW=NO, SGSNPOOLALLOW=YES, SGSNNRILEN=4, SGSNNULLNRI=0; //Configure SGSN Pool (FR transmission mode is used on the Gb interface): SET BSCPCUTYPE:TYPE=INNER; ADD SGSNNODE:OPNAME="abc", CNID=0, SGSNSTATUS=ALLOW, SGSNCAP=1000; ADD SGSNNODE:OPNAME="abc", CNID=1, SGSNSTATUS=ALLOW, SGSNCAP=3000; ADD NRISGSNMAP:NRI=8, OPNAME="abc", CNID=0; ADD NRISGSNMAP:NRI=2, OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; ADD NSE: NSEI=134, SRN=0, SN=0, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME=" abc", CNID=0,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


864



RIMSUP=NO, PFCSUP=NO, PSHOSUP=NO; ADD NSE: NSEI=136, SRN=0, SN=0, PT=GB_OVER_FR, OPNAME=" abc", CNID=1, RIMSUP=NO, PFCSUP=NO, PSHOSUP=NO; ADD BC: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=24,BCID=0, TS=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS 12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1 & TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS2 7-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; ADD BC: SRN=0, SN=26, PN=25, BCID=1, TS=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1 & TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS2 2-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1 &TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=0, NSVCI=134, NSEI=134, SRN=0, SN=26, BCID=0, DLCI=16; ADD NSVC: NSVCIDX=1, NSVCI=136, NSEI=136, SRN=0, SN=26, BCID=1, DLCI=17; ADD PTPBVC:NSEI=134, BVCI=134, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2; ADD PTPBVC:NSEI=136, BVCI=136, IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2; //Query the state of a PTP BVC: DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=134, BVCI=134; DSP PTPBVC: NSEI=136, BVCI=136; //Deactivate SGSN Pool: RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=134, BVCI=134; RMV PTPBVC: NSEI=136, BVCI=136; RMV NSVC: NSVCIDX=0; RMV NSVC: NSVCIDX=1; RMV BC: SRN=0, SN=26, BCID=0; RMV BC: SRN=0, SN=26, BCID=1; RMV NSE: NSEI=23800; RMV NSE: NSEI=62380; RMV NRISGSNMAP: NRI=8, OPNAME="abc"; RMV NRISGSNMAP: NRI=2, OPNAME="abc"; RMV SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=0; RMV SGSNNODE: OPNAME="abc", CNID=1; MOD GCNOPERATOR: OPINDEX=0, SGSNPOOLALLOW=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


865



240

Configuring Abis Bypass

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B and BTS3900E do not support this feature. – The BTS3006C and BTS3002E in TDM transmission mode are configured with the DMCM board that supports Abis Bypass. – The BTS3012 (DTRU/QTRU) and BTS3012AE (DTRU/QTRU) in TDM transmission mode are configured with the DABB board that supports Abis Bypass.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch, GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, or GBFD-117301 Flex Abis.

l


l

Others – The physical transmission link is connected to the GTMU. – In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the BTS uses the logical IP address for communication. – In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, the local and peer IP addresses for the PPP links or MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the BTS and the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0, as shown in Figure 240-1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


866



Figure 240-1 IP address planned for links in IP over E1 transmission mode

Context Abis bypass is applicable to GBSS chain topologies. When power supply to a BTS fails, this function makes the BTS bypassed to function only as the path so that signals of lower-level BTSs can be transmitted to the BSC6900. After power supply is restored, the BTS and lowerlevel BTSs in the chain topology automatically reset and restore. To enable the Abis bypass function for cascaded BTSs, you only need to set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE(Support) for each cascaded BTS. A maximum of five levels of cascaded BTSs support Abis bypass. For BTS3900 series, this function is effective only after DIP switches are set properly. l

When the Abis interface uses the TDM transmission mode, DIP switches S4 and S5 are required for supporting this function.

l

When the Abis interface uses the IP over E1 transmission mode, only DIP switch S4 is required for supporting this function.

Table 240-1 and Table 240-2 describe the bits of DIP switches. Table 240-1 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S4 DIP Switch

S4

Bit Status of S4

Remarks

BIT1

BIT2

BIT3

BIT4

ON

ON

ON

ON

Abis Bypass is supported.

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Abis bypass is not supported.

Other Prerequisites Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Unavailable 867



Table 240-2 Meanings of bits on DIP switch S5 DIP Switch

S5

Bit Status of S5

Remarks

BIT1

BIT2

BIT3

BIT4

ON

ON

ON

ON

Abis bypass is not supported.

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

The firstlevel BTSs support Abis bypass.

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

The secondlevel BTSs support Abis bypass.

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

The thirdlevel BTSs support Abis bypass.

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

The fourthlevel BTSs support Abis bypass.

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

The fifthlevel BTSs support Abis bypass.

Others

Unavailable

Assuming that the Abis Bypass function is activated when the Abis interface uses the IP over E1 transmission mode: l

When an upper-level BTS experiences a power failure, call drops or mute occur in lowerlevel BTSs and last for approximate 5s. As shown in Figure 240-1, when BTS1 is powered off, the PPP or MP link between BTS1 and BTS2 is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with the BSC about reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and OML is reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover.

l

When the upper-level BTS is powered on again, the services in lower-level BTSs are interrupted. As shown in Figure 240-1, when BTS1 is powered on again, the PPP or MP link between BTS2 and BSC is interrupted. BTS2 renegotiates with BTS1 about reestablishing a PPP or an MP link. After the negotiation is complete and OML is reestablished, the services in the lower-level BTSs recover. The laboratory test data shows

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


868



that the adjacent lower-level BTS is affected for 4 to 15 minutes. The impact duration increases by 1 or 2 minutes for a BTS of a higher level.

Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Interface Board > ADD BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an upper-level BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE (Support).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > ADD Site; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a lower-level BTS. In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to TRUE (Support).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a connection for the lower-level BTS. Repeat this step for each cascaded BTS you want to add, including: – Set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to BTS. – Set Dest Father BTS Port No. to the number of the port that connects the lowerlevel BTS to the upper-level BTS. NOTE

A BTS connects to an upper-level BTS or BSC through port 0, and it connects to a lower-level BTS through port 2.

4.

In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 link is PPP: – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add PPP links. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSPPPLNK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS PPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add BTS PPP links. NOTE

Local IP Address and Peer IP address for PPP links over the port connecting the BTS and the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.

5.

In Abis IP over E1 transmission mode, if the type of links carried on the E1/T1 link is MLPPP link group: – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add MLPPP link groups. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > MP Group > MP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add MLPPP links. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS MP Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add BTS MLPPP link groups.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


869


240 Configuring Abis Bypass NOTE

Local IP Address and Peer IP Address for MLPPP link groups over the port connecting the BTS and the BSC or connecting the BTS and the upper-level BTSs must be set to 0.0.0.0.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMPLNK (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Transmission > BTS MLPPP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) command to add BTS PPP links. l

l


Power off the upper-level BTS.

2.

On the LMT, click Device Maintenance and enter the lower-level BTS maintenance page. Select a BTS that is configured with GPS clock synchronization. Then, rightclick the GTMU board and choose Query Board Information from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, click Basic Information. If basic information about the GTMU board is displayed and the OML Faulty message is not displayed, the Abis bypass function has been enabled.


Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Modify Abis Bypass Attribute; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Abis ByPass Mode to FALSE(Not Support). NOTE

Before performing this step, run the MML command DEA BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Deactivate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the BTS if it has been activated.

----End

Example //The following uses the Abis over TDM transmission mode as an example. //Activating Abis Bypass ADD BTS: BTSID=0, BTSNAME="3900", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE, SRANMODE=SUPPORT; ADD BTS: BTSID=1, BTSNAME="3900-1", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, ABISBYPASSMODE=TRUE, SRANMODE=SUPPORT; ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=0, DESTNODE=BTS, UPBTSIDTYPE=BYID, UPBTSID=0, FPN=2; //Deactivating Abis Bypass MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


870



241

Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113721 Robust Air Interface Signalling.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Since GBSS12.0, the following RF modules support Repeated SACCH: RRU3004, DRFU, RRU3008 V1, RRU3008 V2, RRU3908 V1, RRU3908 V2, MRFU V1, MRFU V2 – Since GBSS13.0, the following RF modules support Repeated SACCH: RRU3926, RRU3929, RRU3942, MRFUe, MRFUd, and RRU3928 – Since GBSS13.0, the following BTSs support Repeated SACCH: BTS3900B, BTS3900E, BTS3012, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E configured with DTRUs or DDRMs – BTS312 do not support Repeated SACCH. – BTS3012 and BTS3012AE that are configured with QTRUs do not support Repeated SACCH. – Except BTS312, BTS3012 configured with QTRUs, and BTS3012AE configured with QTRUs, all BTSs (including BTS3900B and BTS3900E) and RF modules support Repeated Downlink FACCH.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – Repeated Downlink FACCH does not require support from MSs. Repeated SACCH requires the support from R6 MSs.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


871



Context When the radio quality is poor, by retransmitting FACCH or SACCH frames, the antiinterference capability of the FACCH or SACCH is improved, thereby increasing the possibility that the MS and BSC receive signaling messages successfully. The robust air interface signaling function includes retransmission of downlink FACCH frames and retransmission of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.

Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set ECSC to YES(Yes), Repeated Downlink FACCH to YES(Yes) , Repeated Downlink FACCH Threshold to 5, and Repeated SACCH to YES(Yes).


Verify Repeated Downlink FACCH. Measure the value of the S4233A:Number of Retransmitted Downlink FACCH Frames counter for all transceivers (TRXs) in the cell with the Robust Air Interface Signalling feature enabled. Expected result: The value of the S4233A:Number of Retransmitted Downlink FACCH Frames counter is greater than 0 for consecutive seven days in certain measurement periods.

2.

Verify Repeated SACCH. Measure the value of the following counters for all TRXs in the cell with the Robust Air Interface Signalling feature enabled: – S4233B:Number of Retransmitted Downlink SACCH Frames – S4233C:Number of Indications to MS for Retransmitting SACCH Frames Expected result: The value of either counter is greater than 0 for consecutive seven days in certain measurement periods.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH set to NO(No).

----End

Example //Activating Robust Air Interface Signalling SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ECSC=YES, REPEATDLFASET=YES, REPEATDLFATHRED=5, REPEATSASET=YES; //Deactivating Robust Air Interface Signalling SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, REPEATDLFASET=NO, REPEATSASET=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


872


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



873



242

Configuring Abis Transmission Backup

About This Chapter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup. 242.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission Backup (Ring Topology) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the satellite transmission backup (ring topology) function in the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup. 242.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the satellite transmission backup (dual-logical BTS) function in the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup. 242.3 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the Abis transmission backup enhancement function in the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


874



242.1 Configuring Satellite Transmission Backup (Ring Topology) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the satellite transmission backup (ring topology) function in the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Resources are available for terrestrial transmission and satellite transmission. – The BTS supports the Ring I topology.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the feature GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface and GBFD-117801 Ring Topology.

l


Context When a disaster-caused failure occurs in the active SDH transmission link over the TDM-based Abis interface, the GBSS automatically switches transmission link to a backup satellite transmission link. In this manner, the normal operation of the network is ensured. With the satellite transmission backup enabled, the transmission mode in the forward link is different from that in the reverse link. That is, the forward link uses terrestrial transmission and the reverse link uses satellite transmission, as shown in Figure 242-1. Figure 242-1 Network topology when the satellite transmission backup is enabled



875


l


1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Modify Ring Topology Attribute; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Config Ring (CME: Support Ring Topology) to YES.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRINGATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > Ring Attribues; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Configure Ring II to NO(No) and Ring I Wait Time Before Switch and Ring I Try Rotating Duration Time to appropriate values.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a reverse ring connection.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Transfers Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite).

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Activate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the target BTS.


(Optional) Use the MS to make a call. NOTE

Before verification, ensure that the MS can make a call through terrestrial transmission in a nonring topology network.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTS to query the value of Config Ring (CME: Support Ring Topology). Expected result: The value of Config Ring (CME: Support Ring Topology) is YES.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GTRXDEV to query the value of Transmission Mode. Expected result: The value of Transmission Mode is TER_AND_SAT_TRANS.

4.

Interrupt the terrestrial transmission between the BTS and the BSC. For example, remove the E1 cable from port 0 on the BTS. Expected result: The BTS is reset. Five minutes later, the MS can make a call.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Transfers Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Transmission Mode to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

876



TER_TRANS(Terrestrial Transmission) or SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission). 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a reverse ring connection.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Modify Ring Topology Attribute; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Config Ring (CME: Support Ring Topology) to NO(No).

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT BTS (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click BTS > Activate BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the target BTS.

----End

Example /*Activating Satellite Transmission Backup*/ //Deactivating the target BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Enabling ring topology for a BTS MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=YES; SET BTSRINGATTR: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, FASTCNETFLAG=NO, WTBS=90, TBS=90; //Adding a reverse ring connection ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=18, PN=1; //Setting BTS transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_AND_SAT_TRANS; //Deactivating the target BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; /*Deactivating Satellite Transmission Backup*/ //Deactivating the target BTS DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1; //Setting BTS transmission mode SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TransMode=TER_TRANS; //Removing a reverse ring connection RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, INPN=1; //Disabling ring topology for a BTS MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO; //Activating the target BTS ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1;

242.2 Configuring Satellite Transmission Backup (DualLogical BTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the satellite transmission backup (dual-logical BTS) function in the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Link resources are required for terrestrial and satellite transmission modes.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


877



– An interface board for TDM transmission is required on the BSC side. – BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, and BTS3900AL must be configured with GTMUa or GTMUb boards to support this feature. – The terrestrial BTS occupies port 0 on the physical BTS as the main port, and the satellite BTS occupies port 1 on the physical BTS as the main port. l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the GBFD-117301 Flex Abis feature. – This feature cannot be used together with the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, and MRFD-210205 Chain Topology.

l


Context The dual-logical BTS solution provides two logical BTSs for a physical BTS. One logical BTS uses satellite transmission, and the other uses TDM terrestrial transmission. If the TDM terrestrial transmission is faulty, the system automatically switches over the transmission link to the backup satellite transmission. The satellite station begins to process services to ensure normal network communication. The requirements for naming the two logical BTSs are as follows: l

The type of a BTS (a terrestrial BTS or a satellite BTS) must be identified.

l

The mapping between two logical BTSs and a physical BTS must be identified.

For example, two logical BTSs in site A can be named as terrestrial BTS A and satellite BTS A.

Procedure l


2.

Configure the terrestrial BTS. a.

Configuring BTS Attributes

b.

Configuring the Equipment Data

c.

Configuring the Transmission Data

d.

Configuring the Radio Data

e.

Activating the BTS Configuration

Configure the satellite BTS. NOTE

The configuration data about boards, RXU, cells, and TRXs of the satellite BTS must be consistent with that of the terrestrial BTS.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Configuring BTS Attributes

b.

Configuring the Equipment Data

c.

Configuring the Transmission Data Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

878


l


d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOTHPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > Other Parameters of BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set BTS Port Detection Sequence to CUSTOMIZDE(Customized Sequence), Number of Customized Detection Types to 2, Preferential Customized Detection Type to TDME1_1(TDM E1 1 Port), and Subsidiary Customized Detection Type to TDME1_O(TDM E1 0 Port).

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSTRANS (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Transfers Mode; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Transmission Mode to SAT_TRANS(Satellite Transmission).

f.


g.



Use an MS to process a call. NOTE

Ensure that the MS processes a call properly in terrestrial transmission mode and non-ring topology mode.

2.

Remove the E1 cable from port 0 of the BTS to disconnect the terrestrial link between the BTS and the BSC. Expected result: The original call is interrupted and the BTS resets. The MS can process a call 10 minutes later.

l

Deactivation Procedure None

----End

Example /*Activating Satellite Transmission Backup (Dual-Logical BTS)*/ //Configuring the terrestrial BTS: ADD BTS: BTSID=9, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Terrestrial", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, BTSDESC="BTS3900_Terrestrial", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, SRANMODE=SUPPORT; ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3900; ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=0; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=1; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=2; ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0", RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO; ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1", RXUCHAINNO=1, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO; ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=2, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2", RXUCHAINNO=2, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO; ADD GCELL:CELLID=5,CELLNAME="cell-11", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


879



ADD GCELL:CELLID=6,CELLNAME="cell-22", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=2; ADD GCELL:CELLID=7,CELLNAME="cell-33", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=3; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5, FREQ1=513,FREQ2=515; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6, FREQ1=517,FREQ2=519; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7, FREQ1=521,FREQ2=523; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=5, OPC=261; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=6, OPC=261; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=7, OPC=261; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,BTSID=9; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,BTSID=9; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,BTSID=9; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=9, FREQ=513, ISMAINBCCH=YES; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=5,TRXID=10, FREQ=515, ISMAINBCCH=NO; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,TRXID=11, FREQ=517, ISMAINBCCH=YES; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=6,TRXID=12, FREQ=519, ISMAINBCCH=NO; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,TRXID=13, FREQ=521, ISMAINBCCH=YES; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=7,TRXID=14, FREQ=523, ISMAINBCCH=NO; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=9, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=10, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 0"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=11, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=12, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 1"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=13, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=14, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Terrestrial 2"; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=9, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=11, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=11, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=13, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=13, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=9, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=10,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=11, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=12, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=13, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=14,RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=9, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=0; ACT BTS:IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=9; //Configuring the satellite BTS: ADD BTS: BTSID=10, BTSNAME="BTS3900_Satellite", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, BTSDESC="BTS3900_Satellite", SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=TDM, MAINPORTNO=1, SRANMODE=SUPPORT; ADD BTSCABINET: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, TYPE=BTS3900; ADD BTSBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, CN=0, SRN=11, SN=0, BT=FMU; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=0; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=1, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=1; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, RCN=2, TT=CHAIN, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6, HPN=2; ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0",

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


880



RXUCHAINNO=0, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO; ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=1, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1", RXUCHAINNO=1, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO; ADD BTSRXUBRD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, BT=GRFU, RXUSPEC=GRFU_V1, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=2, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2", RXUCHAINNO=2, RXUPOS=1, ISCONFIGTHD=NO; ADD GCELL: CELLID=8, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 1", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=4; ADD GCELL: CELLID=9, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 2", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=5; ADD GCELL: CELLID=10, CELLNAME="cell-Satellite 3", TYPE=DCS1800, MCC="460", MNC="164", LAC=6, CI=6; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8, FREQ1=514,FREQ2=516; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9, FREQ1=518,FREQ2=520; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10, FREQ1=522,FREQ2=524; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=8, OPC=261; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=9, OPC=261; ADD GCELLOSPMAP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=10, OPC=261; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,BTSID=10; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,BTSID=10; ADD CELLBIND2BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,BTSID=10; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,TRXID=15, FREQ=514, ISMAINBCCH=YES; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=8,TRXID=16, FREQ=516, ISMAINBCCH=NO; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,TRXID=17, FREQ=518, ISMAINBCCH=YES; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=9,TRXID=18, FREQ=520, ISMAINBCCH=NO; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,TRXID=19, FREQ=522, ISMAINBCCH=YES; ADD GTRX: IDTYPE=BYID,CELLID=10,TRXID=20, FREQ=524, ISMAINBCCH=NO; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=15, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=16, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 0"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=17, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=18, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 1"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=19, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=0, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2"; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD: TRXID=20, TRXTP=GRFU, TRXPN=1, RXUIDTYPE=RXUNAME, RXUNAME=" BTS3900_Satellite 2"; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=15, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=15, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=17, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=17, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=19, CHNO=0,CHTYPE=MBCCH, TSPRIORITY=1; SET GTRXCHAN: TRXID=19, CHNO=1, CHTYPE=SDCCH8, TSPRIORITY=2; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=15, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=16, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=17, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=18, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=19, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=20, RCVMD=MAINDIVERSITY, SNDMD=DTIC; ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=25, PN=1; SET BTSOTHPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, SENDSAMBE=NO, ISSUPERBTS=YES, PROBESEQ=CUSTOMIZDE, PRIVATEPROBENUM=2, PRIVATEPROBEFST=TDME1_1, PRIVATEPROBESND=TDME1_O; SET BTSTRANS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=10, TransMode=SAT_TRANS; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID,BTSID=10;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


881



242.3 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the Abis transmission backup enhancement function in the optional feature GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Dependencies on Running Environment – This feature requires the BSC to be configured with interfaces supporting both IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE. Of these interface boards, the POUc supports IP over E1 and the GOUc and FG2c boards supports IP over FE/GE. – This feature supports BTS3900, BTS3900A, BTS3900L, BTS3900AL, and DBS3900. However, these BTSs must be configured with GTMUb boards.

l

Dependencies on Transport Network – The IP over FE/GE and IP over E1 transmission links are used between the BSC and the BTS. In addition, The IP over E1 transmission link must be configured in an endto-end (E2E) manner.

l

Dependencies on Other NEs and Third-Party Devices – N/A

l

Other Prerequisites – This feature supports only the built-in PCU.

Context l

Precautions – When deploying this feature, a BTS must be deactivated, activated or reset. Therefore, services on the BTS will be interrupted for a short period. – When primary and backup links are switched over, ongoing services will be interrupted for less than 1 minute. – Changing the value of the parameter Wait Time Before Link Switchover shortens or prolongs the interruption, and therefore the default value is used.

l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Preparation


882



Parameter Name

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

Switch for Abis link backup

AbisLnkBKFLAG

This parameter is set to ON when the Abis transmission backup enhancement is supported.

Network planning

Path flag

PATHFLAG

Set this parameter to Primary for the primary link and to Backup for the backup link.

Network planning

BTS IP in Backup Link

BAKBTSIP

The setting of this parameter depends on the actual IP address of the backup link on the BTS side.

Network planning

BSC IP in Backup Link

BAKBSCIP

The setting of this parameter depends on the actual IP address of the backup link on the BSC side.

Network planning

Wait Time Before Switch to Peer BSC

WTBTBSCS

N/A

Network planning

Bear Type

BAKCFGFLAG

This parameter can be set to NULL, IPLGCPORT, or RSCGRP based on actual demands.

Network planning

Slot No.

BAKSN

This parameter is valid only if Bear Type is set to IPLGCPORT.

Network planning

Logical Port No. in Backup Link

BAKLPN

This parameter is valid only if Bear Type is set to IPLGCPORT.

Network planning

Resource Group No. in Backup Link

BAKGRPID

This parameter is valid only if Bear Type is set to RSCGRP.

Network planning

Wait Time Before Link Switchover

WTBS

N/A

Network planning

Detect Packet Transmit Interval

DETECTTXINT

N/A

Network planning


883



Parameter Name Detect Packet Retransmission Times

Parameter ID

Parameter Setting

Data Source

DETECTCOUNT

N/A

Network planning

Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Scenarios for Initial Configuration 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add interface boards supporting IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Interface Board > ADD BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP BTS. In this step, set IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_FE/GE_AND_E1.

3.

Configuring the Equipment Data NOTE

TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock) is recommended when this feature is enabled.

4.

Configuring the Transmission Data – Configuring IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1 transmission data – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPBAK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > a BTS IP Address with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a communication address for the backup link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the primary link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Primary. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the backup link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Backup. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change the backup link attribute of this feature. However, the backup link attribute is usually set to the default value. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled) to query the backup link attribute.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


884



– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the IP packet multiplexing function only on a primary link. The primary link can be an IP over FE/GE link or an IP over E1 link. 5.


6.


– Changing TDM to Abis Transmission backup enhancement 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add interface boards supporting IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE.

2.


3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_FE/ GE_AND_E1.

4.

Configuring the Transmission Data – Configuring IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1 transmission data – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Properties > IP BTS Communication Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the communication address for the primary link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPBAK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > a BTS IP Address with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a communication address for the backup link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the primary link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Primary. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the backup link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Backup. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change the backup link attribute of this feature. However, the backup link attribute is usually set to the default value. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled) to query the backup link attribute.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


885



– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the IP packet multiplexing function only on a primary link. The primary link can be an IP over FE/GE link or an IP over E1 link. 5.

Configuring a Clock for a BTS NOTE


6.


– Changing IP over E1 to Abis transmission backup enhancement 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add interface boards supporting IP over FE/GE.

2.


3.


4.

Configuring IP over FE/GE transmission data – Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP packet multiplexing function if the IP packet multiplexing function is enabled on the IP over E1 link. – Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IPPM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate IP PM if IP PM is enabled on the IP over E1 link. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path) to query the configured IP path. – Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the configured IP path. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Properties > IP BTS Communication Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the communication address for the primary link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPBAK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > a BTS IP Address with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a communication address for the backup link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the primary link. In

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


886



this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Primary. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the backup link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Backup. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change the backup link attribute of this feature. However, the backup link attribute is usually set to the default value. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled) to query the backup link attribute. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the IP packet multiplexing function only on a primary link. The primary link can be an IP over FE/GE link or an IP over E1 link. 5.



6.


– Changing IP over FE/GE to Abis transmission backup enhancement 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Add Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add interface boards supporting IP over E1.

2.


3.


4.

Configuring IP over E1 transmission data – Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP packet multiplexing function if the IP packet multiplexing function is enabled on the IP over FE/ GE link. – Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IPPM; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the IP PM function first if the IP PM function is enabled on the IP over FE/GE link.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


887



– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path) to query the configured IP path. – Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the configured IP path. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Properties > IP BTS Communication Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the communication address for the primary link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPBAK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > a BTS IP Address with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a communication address for the backup link on an IP BTS. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the primary link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Primary. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path for the backup link. In this step, set Switch for Abis link backup to ON, and set Path flag to Backup. – Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change the backup link attribute of this feature. However, the backup link attribute is usually set to the default value. – Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSLNKBKATTR (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > BTS Backup Link Attributes with Abis Link Backup Enabled) to query the backup link attribute. – Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP MUX Pipe; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the IP packet multiplexing function only on a primary link. The primary link can be an IP over FE/GE link or an IP over E1 link. 5.



6. l



Verify data at the physical layer and the data link layer. – IP over E1 a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP E1T1 to check the setting of Port State. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

888



b.

If the PPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address. If the link state is normal and the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

c.

If the MLPPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPGRP to query Link State, Local IP Address, and Peer IP Address, and Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP MPLNK to query Link State and LCP Negotiation State. If the link state is normal, the value of LCP Negotiation State is Connect available, and the values of Local IP Address and Peer IP Address are consistent with data configurations, proceed to the following steps. Otherwise, the transmission link is faulty. Locate and rectify the fault.

d.

If the PPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP PPPLNK command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the PPP link is normal.

e.

If the MLPPP link is used, Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to the same value as Local IP address in the DSP MPGRP command and Destination IP address set to the same value as Peer IP address in the DSP MPGRP command. If the statistics on PING packets can be received, the MLPPP link is normal.

– IP over FE/GE

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT with subrack number, slot number, and port number are those of the peer interface board connected to the BTS. Check Port state and Link Availability Status in the command execution result. If Port state is Activated and Link Availability Status is Available, the link is normal.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP with Source IP address set to BSC IP and Destination IP address set to BTS IP in LST BTSIP for the active link and with Source IP address set to BSC IP in Backup Link and Destination IP address set to BTS IP in Backup Link in LST BTSIPBAK.

Verify the control plane on the Abis interface. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LAPDLNK to check whether the LAPD link is normal. If Usagestatus is set to Normal, the LAPD link is functional. After the command is executed to query Abis signaling link by BTS index, if the command output shows that Usagestatus is set to Normal for an operation and maintenance link (OML) whose Link flag is set to Primary, the primary link is working; if the command output shows that Usagestatus is set to Normal for an OML whose Link flag is set to Backup, the backup link is working. Under common circumstances, Usagestatus is set to Faulty for a link that is not working.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ADJNODE to obtain the state of an adjacent node, the number of paths to the adjacent node, and available bandwidth by checking related parameters, for example, Operation state. If Operation state is Available and the related bandwidth is greater than 0, the adjacent node is normal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

889



3.

Verify the user plane on the Abis interface. a.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH check whether the IP path is available. If Operation state is Available and the available bandwidth is greater than 0, the IP path is functional.



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP path of the primary link.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Properties > IP BTS Communication Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the communication address for the primary link on an IP BTS.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSCONNECT (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > Chain Management > Add Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the BTS connection if the IP over FE/GE transmission is used.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD BTS (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set IP Phy Trans Type to IP_OVER_E1 or IP_OVER_FE/GE.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP path of the backup link.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSIPBAK (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Transmission Link > a BTS IP Address with Abis Link Backup Enabled; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the communication address for the backup link on an IP BTS.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP path.

9.


----End

Example /*Activating Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement*/ // Configuring Abis transmission backup enhancement with IP over FE/GE transmission link to be used as the primary link and IP over E1 transmission link to be used as the backup link: ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=8, RED=YES, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; ADD BRD: SRN=2, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=FG2c, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=14, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=2,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


890



MPUSLOT=0; ADD BTS:BTSID=0, BTSNAME="BTS-0", BTSTYPE=BTS3900_GSM, SEPERATEMODE=SUPPORT, SERVICEMODE=IP, FLEXABISMODE=FIX_16K_ABIS, ABISBYPASSMODE=FALSE, ISCONFIGEDRING=NO, MPMODE=MODE4_1, WORKMODE=E1, BTSDESC="-", MAINPORTNO=0, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/GE_AND_E1, SRANMODE=SUPPORT, MAINBMPMODE=MODE_NULL, INTRABBPOOLSWITCH=OFF; ADD BTSCABINET:CN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TYPE=BTS3900, CABINETDESC="btscabinet-0", SRANMODE=SUPPORT, ISMAINCABINET=DEFAULTRULE; ADD BTSRXUCHAIN:RCN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TT=CHAIN, HPN=0, HCN=0, HSRN=0, HSN=6; ADD BTSRXUBRD:BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, IDTYPE=BYID, RXUCHAINNO=0, BT=DRFU, RXUNAME="DRFU-0", RXUPOS=1; ADD GCELL:CELLID=0, CELLNAME="cell0", MCC="502", MNC="86", LAC=390, CI=2, NCC=0, BCC=0, EXTTP=Normal_cell, IUOTP=Normal_cell, FLEXMAIO=OFF, CSVSP=3, CSDSP=5, PSHPSP=4, PSLPSVP=6, BSPBCCHBLKS=1, BSPAGBLKSRES=4, BSPRACHBLKS=1, TYPE=GSM900, OPNAME="g-xiwu0", VIPCELL=NO, MOCNCMCELL=NO, HYBHIFREQBANDSUPPORT=NO; ADD GCELLFREQ: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, FREQ1=123; ADD GCELLOSPMAP:CELLID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, OPC=2950; ADD GTRX:TRXID=0, TRXNAME="cell00", FREQ=123, TRXNO=0, CELLID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, ISMAINBCCH=YES, ISTMPTRX=NO; SET GTRXCHAN:TRXID=0, CHNO=7, CHTYPE=TCHFR, TSPRIORITY=0, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS, CHANRSV=NO, IDTYPE=BYID; SET GTRXCHAN:TRXID=0, CHNO=6, CHTYPE=TCHFR, TSPRIORITY=0, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS, CHANRSV=NO, IDTYPE=BYID; SET GTRXCHAN:TRXID=0, CHNO=5, CHTYPE=PDTCH, TSPRIORITY=0, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS, CHANRSV=NO, IDTYPE=BYID; SET GTRXCHAN:TRXID=0, CHNO=4, CHTYPE=TCHFR, TSPRIORITY=0, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS, CHANRSV=NO, IDTYPE=BYID; SET GTRXCHAN:TRXID=0, CHNO=3, CHTYPE=TCHFR, TSPRIORITY=0, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS, CHANRSV=NO, IDTYPE=BYID; SET GTRXCHAN:TRXID=0, CHNO=2, CHTYPE=TCHFR, TSPRIORITY=0, GPRSCHPRI=GPRS, CHANRSV=NO, IDTYPE=BYID; SET GCELLGPRS:CELLID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=NO, NACCSPT=NO, PKTSI=NO, NC2SPT=NO, RA=0, SUPPORTDTM=UNSUPPORT, DLDCSPT=UNSUPPORT, SPTREDUCELATENCY=UNSUPPORT, EGPRS2A=NO, SPTINTERRATOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTINTERRATINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEINBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTLTEOUTBSCPSHO=UNSUPPORT, SPTDPI=UNSUPPORT, PSPAGINGCTRL=ALWAYSNORMALPAGING, SUPPORTEDA=NOTSUPPORT; ADD CELLBIND2BTS:CELLID=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID; ADD TRXBIND2PHYBRD:TRXID=0, TRXIDTYPE=BYID, TRXTP=DRFU, TRXPN=0, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


891



BTSID=0, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, IDTYPE=BYID; ADD ETHIP:SRN=2, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="50.50.50.50", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHREDPORT:SRN=2, SN=14, PN=0; ADD IPLOGICPORT:SRN=2, SN=14, BT=FG2c, LPNTYPE=Leaf, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=500, CBS=4500, OAMFLOWBW=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, FCINDEX=0, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=8, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1; & TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS10-1;&TS11-1;&TS12-1;&TS13-1; &TS14-1; & TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&TS21-1;&TS22-1;&TS23-1;&T S24-1;&TS25-1; &TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="40.40.40.40", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="40.40.40.1", PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD BTSCONNECT:BTSID=0, INPN=0, IDTYPE=BYID, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=8, PN=0, OPNAME="g-xiwu0"; ADD BTSPPPLNK:PPPLNKN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, PN=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1;&TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS 10-1;&TS11-1; & TS12-1;&TS13-1;&TS14-1;&TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&T S21-1;&TS22-1; & TS23-1;&TS24-1;&TS25-1;&TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;, LOCALIP="40.40.40.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="40.40.40.40", PFC=YES, ACFC=YES, MRU=1500, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, RSTIME=3000, IPHC=DISABLE, PPPEAAT=10, PPPEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; SET BTSETHPORT:PN=1, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, RATE=AUTO, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE, MACEAAT=10, MACEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; SET BTSETHPORT:PN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, RATE=AUTO, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE, MACEAAT=10, MACEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; ADD BTSDEVIP:PN=0, BTSID=0, PT=ETHPORT, IPIDX=1, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, IP="60.60.60.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", ISINNERIP=NO; SET BTSIP:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="50.50.50.50", BTSIP="60.60.60.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, GWIP="255.255.255.255", CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF, BTSMUTIP=NO; ADD BTSIPBAK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BAKBTSIP="40.40.40.1", BAKBSCIP="40.40.40.40", BAKCFGFLAG=NULL; ADD BTSESN:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, MAINDEVTAB="21021127229T8B001500", OMBEARBOARD=PANEL; ADD IPRT:DSTIP="60.60.60.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0",

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


892



NEXTHOP="50.50.50.2", SRN=2, SN=14, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH; ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, DSTIP="50.50.50.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="60.60.60.2"; ADD ADJNODE:ANI=0, NAME="IP_over_FE&E1", NODET=ABIS, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ECHOIP="60.60.60.1", PERIOD=4, CHECKCOUNT=3, CHECKT=UDP, AbisLnkBKFLAG=ON; ADD IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=1, ECHOIP="40.40.40.1", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PERIOD=5, CHECKCOUNT=3, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, ICMPPKGLEN=64, CHECKT=UDP, ABISLNKBKFLAG=ON, PATHFLAG=Backup; ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, IPMUXINDEX=0; ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Changing TDM to Abis transmission backup enhancement with IP over FE/GE transmission link to be used as the primary link and IP over E1 transmission link to be used as the backup link: ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=8, RED=YES, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; ADD BRD: SRN=2, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=FG2c, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=14, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=2, MPUSLOT=0; DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/ GE_AND_E1; ADD ETHIP:SRN=2, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="50.50.50.50", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHREDPORT:SRN=2, SN=14, PN=0; ADD IPLOGICPORT:SRN=2, SN=14, BT=FG2c, LPNTYPE=Leaf, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=500, CBS=4500, OAMFLOWBW=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, FCINDEX=0, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=8, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1; & TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS10-1;&TS11-1;&TS12-1;&TS13-1; &TS14-1; & TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&TS21-1;&TS22-1;&TS23-1;&T S24-1; &TS25-1;&TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="40.40.40.40", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="40.40.40.1", PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD BTSCONNECT:BTSID=0, INPN=0, IDTYPE=BYID, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


893



SRN=0, SN=8, PN=0, OPNAME="g-xiwu0"; ADD BTSPPPLNK:PPPLNKN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, PN=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1;&TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS 10-1;&TS11-1; & TS12-1;&TS13-1;&TS14-1;&TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&T S21-1;&TS22-1; & TS23-1;&TS24-1;&TS25-1;&TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;, LOCALIP="40.40.40.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="40.40.40.40", PFC=YES, ACFC=YES, MRU=1500, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, RSTIME=3000, IPHC=DISABLE, PPPEAAT=10, PPPEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; SET BTSETHPORT:PN=1, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, RATE=AUTO, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE, MACEAAT=10, MACEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; SET BTSETHPORT:PN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, RATE=AUTO, MTU=1500, FC=CLOSE, SWITCH3AH=CLOSE, MACEAAT=10, MACEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; ADD BTSDEVIP:PN=0, BTSID=0, PT=ETHPORT, IPIDX=1, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, IP="60.60.60.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", ISINNERIP=NO; SET BTSIP:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="50.50.50.50", BTSIP="60.60.60.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, GWIP="255.255.255.255", CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF, BTSMUTIP=NO; ADD BTSIPBAK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BAKBTSIP="40.40.40.1", BAKBSCIP="40.40.40.40", BAKCFGFLAG=NULL; ADD BTSESN:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, MAINDEVTAB="21021127229T8B001500", OMBEARBOARD=PANEL; ADD IPRT:DSTIP="60.60.60.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="50.50.50.2", SRN=2, SN=14, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH; ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, DSTIP="50.50.50.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="60.60.60.2"; ADD ADJNODE:ANI=0, NAME="IP_over_FE&E1", NODET=ABIS, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ECHOIP="60.60.60.1", PERIOD=4, CHECKCOUNT=3, CHECKT=UDP, AbisLnkBKFLAG=ON; ADD IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=1, ECHOIP="40.40.40.1", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PERIOD=5, CHECKCOUNT=3, PATHT=QoS, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, ICMPPKGLEN=64, CHECKT=UDP, ABISLNKBKFLAG=ON, PATHFLAG=Backup; ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, IPMUXINDEX=0; ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Changing IP over E1 transmission to Abis transmission backup enhancement

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


894



with IP over FE/GE transmission link to be used as the primary link and IP over E1 transmission link to be used as the backup link: ADD BRD: SRN=2, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=FG2c, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=14, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=2, MPUSLOT=0; DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/ GE_AND_E1; ADD ETHIP:SRN=2, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="50.50.50.50", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD ETHREDPORT:SRN=2, SN=14, PN=0; ADD BTSDEVIP:PN=0, BTSID=0, PT=ETHPORT, IPIDX=1, IDTYPE=BYID, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, IP="60.60.60.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", ISINNERIP=NO; RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0; DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0; RMV IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=0; SET BTSIP:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="50.50.50.50", BTSIP="60.60.60.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, GWIP="255.255.255.255", CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF, BTSMUTIP=NO; ADD BTSIPBAK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BAKBTSIP="40.40.40.1", BAKBSCIP="40.40.40.40", BAKCFGFLAG=NULL; ADD IPRT:DSTIP="60.60.60.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", NEXTHOP="50.50.50.2", SRN=2, SN=14, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH; ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, DSTIP="50.50.50.0", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="60.60.60.2"; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ECHOIP="60.60.60.1", PERIOD=4, CHECKCOUNT=3, CHECKT=UDP, AbisLnkBKFLAG=ON; ADD IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=1, ECHOIP="40.40.40.1", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PERIOD=5, CHECKCOUNT=3, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, ICMPPKGLEN=64, CHECKT=UDP, ABISLNKBKFLAG=ON, PATHFLAG=Backup; ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, IPMUXINDEX=0; ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Changing IP over FE/GE transmission to Abis transmission backup enhancement with IP over FE/GE transmission link to be used as the primary link and IP over E1 transmission link to be used as the backup link: ADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=POUc, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, SN=8, RED=YES, ISTCBRD=NO, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0; DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/ GE_AND_E1; ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=8, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


895



& TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS10-1;&TS11-1;&TS12-1;&TS13-1; &TS14-1; & TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&TS21-1;&TS22-1;&TS23-1;&T S24-1; &TS25-1;&TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="40.40.40.40", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="40.40.40.1", PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF; ADD BTSCONNECT:BTSID=0, INPN=0, IDTYPE=BYID, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=BSC, SRN=0, SN=8, PN=0, OPNAME="g-xiwu0"; ADD BTSPPPLNK:PPPLNKN=0, BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, PN=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1;&TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS 10-1;&TS11-1; & TS12-1;&TS13-1;&TS14-1;&TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&T S21-1;&TS22-1; & TS23-1;&TS24-1;&TS25-1;&TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;, LOCALIP="40.40.40.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="40.40.40.40", PFC=YES, ACFC=YES, MRU=1500, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, RSTIME=3000, IPHC=DISABLE, PPPEAAT=10, PPPEADT=5, IPEAAT=10, IPEADT=5; RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0; DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0; RMV IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=0; SET BTSIP:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="50.50.50.50", BTSIP="60.60.60.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, GWIP="255.255.255.255", CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF, BTSMUTIP=NO; ADD BTSIPBAK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BAKBTSIP="40.40.40.1", BAKBSCIP="40.40.40.40", BAKCFGFLAG=NULL; ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ABIS, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ECHOIP="60.60.60.1", PERIOD=4, CHECKCOUNT=3, CHECKT=UDP, AbisLnkBKFLAG=ON; ADD IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=1, ECHOIP="40.40.40.1", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PERIOD=5, CHECKCOUNT=3, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, ICMPPKGLEN=64, CHECKT=UDP, ABISLNKBKFLAG=ON, PATHFLAG=Backup; ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, IPMUXINDEX=0; ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; /*Deactivating Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement*/ //Changing Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement to IP Over E1: DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0; DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0; RMV IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=0; SET BTSIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BTSCOMTYPE=PPP/MP, BTSIP="40.40.40.1", BSCIP="40.40.40.40", CFGFLAG=NULL; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_E1; RMV IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


896



RMV BTSIPBAK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; ADD IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=0, ECHOIP="40.40.40.1", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PERIOD=5, CHECKCOUNT=3, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, ICMPPKGLEN=64, CHECKT=UDP; ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, IPMUXINDEX=0; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Changing Abis Transmission Backup Enhancement to IP Over FE/GE: DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; RMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=0; DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0; RMV IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=0; SET BTSIP:BTSID=0, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="50.50.50.50", BTSIP="60.60.60.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, GWIP="255.255.255.255", CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF, BTSMUTIP=NO; RMV BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, INPN=0, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6; MOD BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SERVICEMODE=IP, IPPHYTRANSTYPE=IP_OVER_FE/ GE; RMV IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=1; RMV BTSIPBAK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; ADD IPPATH:ANI=0, PATHID=0, ECHOIP="60.60.60.1", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PERIOD=5, CHECKCOUNT=3, PATHT= EF, TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=ENABLED, ITFT=ABIS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2, ICMPPKGLEN=64, CHECKT=UDP; ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=ON; ADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=ABISMUX, ANI=0, PATHID=0, ISQOSPATH=NO, IPMUXINDEX=0; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


897



243

Configuring BSC Node Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy feature.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – IP interface boards are required for the BSC and BTS. – The A, Abis, and inter-BSC interfaces use IP transmission. No restrictions concerning transmission are imposed on the Gb interface. – BTSs other than the BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E are used, because the BTS3006C, BTS3002E, BTS3900B, and BTS3900E are not supported.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – Prerequisite features: – The BSC Node Redundancy feature depends on the GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 feature over the Abis interface. – The BSC Node Redundancy feature depends on the GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 feature over the A interface. – The BSC Node Redundancy feature depends on the GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points feature if the BSC has single-homed BTSs or works in load sharing mode. – The WOFD-231100 BSC Redundancy Management -GBSS feature for the M2000 is enabled.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


898


243 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy NOTE

If the electronic serial numbers (ESNs) for BSC 1 and BSC 2 are ESN 1 and ESN 2, respectively: l In scenarios where only dual-homed BTSs are configured, license 1 is generated when the order of BSC 1 is bound to ESN 1 and ESN 2, and license 2 is generated when the order of BSC 2 is bound to ESN 1 and ESN 2. Then, licenses 1 and 2 are combined into one license file, which is loaded on both BSCs. l In scenarios where both single- and dual-homed BTSs are configured, license 1 is generated when the order of BSC 1 is bound to ESN 1, and license 2 is generated when the order of BSC 2 is bound to ESN 2. Then, license 1 and license 2 are loaded on BSC 1 and BSC 2, respectively. The licenses for enabling this feature on BSCs 1 and 2 have been obtained.

l

IP transmission is used between the BSC and CN/BTS.

l

A BTS cannot directly connect to a BSC over the Abis interface. Therefore, BTSs use routers to connect to the two BSCs in a redundancy group.

l

For a BTS under two BSCs in a redundancy group, if the BTS is single-homed, it must be configured only under one BSC; if the BTS is dual-homed, it must be configured as a primary-homed BTS under one BSC and a secondary-homed BTS under the other BSC.

l

The MSC is configured with M3UA links and M3UA link sets that connect to BSCs.

l

Cell broadcast center (CBC) services do not support this feature.

l

A redundancy group consists of only two BSCs.

l

The two BSCs in a redundancy group connect to only one MSC or MSC pool.

l

The two BSCs in a redundancy group connect to only one SGSN or SGSN pool.

l

Only built-in packet control units (PCUs) support this feature.

l

If both BSCs in a redundancy group are configured with dual-homed service objects, the size of data for the single- and dual-homed service objects configured under one BSC must not exceed the specification of the BSC.

Context

CAUTION l Services are interrupted for 10 to 20 minutes when service objects are being migrated or migrated back. l Disable the BSC Node Redundancy feature before upgrading a BSC and enable this feature after the upgrade is complete. The data configuration for the BSC Node Redundancy feature consists of the following steps: 1. Configure signaling points and signaling links over the A interface. 2. Configure BTS data. 3. Configure signaling links over the inter-BSC interface. 4. Configure the BSC Node Redundancy feature. You can configure other BSC data using the same method as that in common scenarios. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


899



NOTE

When BSC Node Redundancy is enabled, the data about BTSs and OPCs is configured in redundancy mode on two BSCs. Therefore, after configuring data on one BSC, you can copy the configuration scripts to the other BSC, thereby improving operation and maintenance (O&M) efficiency. However, you need to manually modify some parameters because they must be set to different values on the two BSCs. These parameters are classified into two types: l Parameters related to device IP, port IP, next-hop IP, and destination IP. Setting these parameters to different values on the two BSCs prevents conflicts of IP addresses. l Parameters related to BSC Node Redundancy, including The host type of signalling point, HostType, Local BSC ID, Peer BSC ID, BSC IP, and Peer BSC IP.

Table 243-1 Data Preparation

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Parameter Name

Parameter ID

The host type of signalling point

Setting Notes

Data Source

HOSTTYP E

See section "Dual- and Single-Homed Service Objects" in BSC Node Redundancy Feature Parameter Description.

Engineering design

HostType

HOSTTYP E

See section "Dual- and Single-Homed Service Objects" in BSC Node Redundancy Feature Parameter Description.

Equipment plan

Peer BSC IP

PEERBSCI P

-

Radio network plan (negotiated with the peer end)

Peer BTS ID

PEERBTSI D

-

Equipment plan

Peer BSC Mask

PEERBSC MASK

-

Transmission network plan (negotiated with the peer end)

Peer BSC ID

PEERBSCI D

-

Transmission network plan (internal plan)

BSC Node Redundancy Group Index

GROUPIN DEX

-

Engineering design

BSC Node Redundancy Group Name

GROUPNA ME

-

Engineering design

Interval for Sending Heartbeat

BEATSEN DINGDIS

See section "Fault Detection" in BSC Node Redundancy Feature Parameter Description.

Engineering design


900



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Master Service Active Delay

Setting Notes

Data Source

MSTSERV ACTDELA Y

-

Engineering design

Slave Service Active Delay

SLVSERV ACTDELA Y

-

Engineering design

CN Fault Delay

CNFAULT DELAY

-

Engineering design

CN State Policy For Group

CNSTATE POLICYFO RGROUP

Set this parameter to AINTFBLOCK(AInterf Block).

Engineering design

Local BSC ID

LocalBSCI D

-

Engineering design

Peer BSC ID

PeerBSCID

-

Engineering design

ReHost Type

REHOSTT YPE

See section "Migrating Back Dual-Homed Service Objects" in BSC Node Redundancy Feature Parameter Description.

Engineering design

ReHostDelayT ime

REHOSTD ELAYTIM E


Engineering design

ReHost Absolute Time

REHOSTA BSTIME


Engineering design

Procedure l


Configuring data on BSC 1 LMT a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Configure signaling points and signaling links over the A interface.


901


243 Configuring BSC Node Redundancy NOTE

In load sharing mode, configure both primary- and secondary-homed OPCs and signaling links. In active/standby mode, configure primary- or secondary-homed OPCs and signaling links. If the BSC has single-homed BTSs, configure single-homed OPCs and signaling links in the same method as that in common scenarios. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. To configure primary-homed OPCs and signaling links, run the following steps: (You can configure secondary-homed OPCs and signaling links using the same method. For details, see "Configuring data on BSC 2 LMT.")

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set OSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point data format, and OSP code to appropriate values. In addition, set The host type of signalling point to PRIMHOST(PRIMHOST).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a destination signaling point (DSP) for the primary-homed OPC. In this step, set DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point data format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate values.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA local entity for the primary-homed OPC. In this step, set OSP index to the same value as that for the primary-homed OPC.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA destination entity for the primaryhomed OPC. In this step, set DSP index to the same value as that for the primary-homed OPC.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link set for the primary-homed OPC. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the same value as that for the primaryhomed OPC.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route for the primary-homed OPC. In this step, set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the same values as those for the primaryhomed OPC.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link for the primary-homed OPC. In this step, set First local IP address, First


902



destination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to appropriate values. h.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link for the primary-homed OPC. In this step, set SCTP link No. to the same value as that for the primary-homed OPC.

Configure BTS data. NOTE

l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS must be consistent on BSC 1 and BSC 2.When configuring BTS homing attributes on the two BSCs, the value of BTS ID may be different, but the value of BTS NAME may be the same. During routine maintenance, when you change the value of a BTS-related parameter on BSC 1, you must simultaneously change the value of this parameter on BSC 2. To improve O&M efficiency, set BTS ID to the same value on both BSCs. l Configure a single-homed BTS using the same methods as that in common scenarios. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. l When configuring BTS homing attributes, set BSC IP, HostType, and Peer BSC IP to the values negotiated between the two BSCs. l To configure a dual-homed BTS for BSC 1 and BSC 2, run the following steps: (To configure multiple dual-homed BTSs for BSC 1 and BSC 2, repeat these steps.)

c.

a.

Add a BTS onto BSC 1. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Properties > IP BTS Communication Address; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set BTS IP, BSC IP, HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC ID, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values. BSC IP and Peer BSC IP indicate the IP addresses of the two BSCs.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Transmission > BTS Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add routes from the BTS to the two BSCs.

d.

Configure neighboring cells by following the principles described in BSC Node Redundancy Feature Parameter Description. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

e.

Configure PTP BVCs for the cells served by the dual-homed BTS on the two BSCs. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

Configure signaling links over the inter-BSC interface. NOTE

When configuring signaling links over the inter-BSC interface, set First local IP address/ Second local IP address for BSC 1 to the same values as those of First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC 2, respectively. In addition, set First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC 1 to the same values as those of First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC 2, respectively. Set Local SCTP port No./Destination SCTP port No. for BSC 1 to the same values as those of Destination SCTP port No./Local SCTP port No. for BSC 2, respectively. Configure multiple signaling links over the inter-BSC interface, and ensure that the configuration data is consistent on both BSCs.

a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link;


903



CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD), and set Application type to BBAP(BBAP). b.

d.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP route from BSC 1 to intermediate equipment if BSC 1 connects to BSC 2 through the intermediate equipment.

Configure the BSC Node Redundancy feature. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure data for a redundancy group. In this step, set Local BSC ID and Peer BSC ID for BSC 1 to the same values as those of Peer BSC ID and Local BSC ID for BSC 2, respectively. In addition, set CN State Policy For Group to AINTFBLOCK(AInterf Block).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group Prime Host Policy; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set ReHost Type to an appropriate value.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group. Set Active Status to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the redundancy group.

Configuring data on BSC 2 LMT a.

Configure signaling points and signaling links over the A interface. NOTE

In load sharing mode, configure both primary- and secondary-homed OPCs and signaling links. In active/standby mode, configure primary- or secondary-homed OPCs and signaling links. If the BSC has single-homed BTSs, configure single-homed OPCs and signaling links in the same method as that in common scenarios. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. To configure secondary-homed OPCs and signaling links, run the following steps: (You can configure primary-homed OPCs and signaling links using the same method. For details, see "Configuring data on BSC 1 LMT.")

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > OSP; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set OSP name, OSP index, Network ID, OSP code bits, Signal point data format, and OSP code to appropriate values. In addition, set The host type of signalling point to SLAVEHOST(SLAVEHOST).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a DSP for the secondary-homed OPC. In this step, set


904



DSP name, DSP index, OSP index, Signal point data format, DSP code, DSP type, and DSP bear type to appropriate values.

b.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA local entity for the secondary-homed OPC. In this step, set OSP index to the same value as that for the secondaryhomed OPC.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA destination entity for the secondaryhomed OPC. In this step, set DSP index to the same value as that for the secondary-homed OPC.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link set for the secondary-homed OPC. In this step, set Destination entity No. to the same value as that for the secondaryhomed OPC.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route for the secondary-homed OPC. In this step, set Destination entity No. and Signalling link set index to the same values as those for the secondary-homed OPC.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link for the secondary-homed OPC. In this step, set First local IP address, First destination IP address, and Destination SCTP port No. to appropriate values.

h.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link for the secondary-homed OPC. In this step, set SCTP link No. to the same value as that for the secondary-homed OPC.

Configure BTS data. NOTE

l The configuration data for a dual-homing BTS must be consistent on BSC 1 and BSC 2.When configuring BTS homing attributes on the two BSCs, the value of BTS ID may be different, but the value of BTS NAME may be the same. During routine maintenance, when you change the value of a BTS-related parameter on BSC 1, you must simultaneously change the value of this parameter on BSC 2. To improve O&M efficiency, set BTS ID to the same value on both BSCs. l Configure a single-homed BTS using the same methods as that in common scenarios. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide. l When configuring BTS homing attributes, set BSC IP, HostType, and Peer BSC IP to the values negotiated between the two BSCs. l To configure a dual-homed BTS for BSC 1 and BSC 2, run the following steps: (To configure multiple dual-homed BTSs for BSC 1 and BSC 2, repeat these steps.)

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


905



c.

a.

Add a BTS onto BSC 1. For details, see Configuring a BTS in BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Properties > IP BTS Communication Address; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set BTS IP, BSC IP, HostType, Peer BTS ID, Peer BSC ID, Peer BSC ID, and Peer BSC Mask to appropriate values. BSC IP and Peer BSC IP indicate the IP addresses of the two BSCs.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT (CME single configuration: BTS IP Configuration Express > BTS IP Transmission > BTS Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add routes from the BTS to the two BSCs.

d.

Configure neighboring cells by following the principles described in BSC Node Redundancy Feature Parameter Description. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

e.

Configure PTP BVCs for the cells served by the dual-homed BTS on the two BSCs. For details, see BSC6900 GSM Initial Configuration Guide.

Configure signaling links over the inter-BSC interface. NOTE

When configuring signaling links over the inter-BSC interface, set First local IP address/ Second local IP address for BSC 1 to the same values as those of First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC 2, respectively. In addition, set First destination IP address/Second destination IP address for BSC 1 to the same values as those of First local IP address/Second local IP address for BSC 2, respectively. Set Local SCTP port No. for BSC 1 to the same value as that of Destination SCTP port No. for BSC 2. Configure multiple signaling links over the inter-BSC interface, and ensure that the configuration data is consistent on both BSCs.

d.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: A Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT(CLIENT MOD), and set Application type to BBAP(BBAP).

b.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP route from BSC 2 to intermediate equipment if BSC 1 connects to BSC 2 through the intermediate equipment.

Configure the BSC Node Redundancy feature. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GBSCREDGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure data for a redundancy group. In this step, set Local BSC ID and Peer BSC ID for BSC 2 to the same values as those of Peer BSC ID and Local BSC ID for BSC 1, respectively. In addition, set CN State Policy For Group to AINTFBLOCK(AInterf Block).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group Prime Host Policy; CME batch


906



modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set ReHost Type to an appropriate value. c.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GBSCREDGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group. Set Active Status to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the redundancy group.

Verification Procedure This section verifies the BSC Node Redundancy feature by activating this feature on BSC 1 and deactivating this feature on BSC 2 when the queried BTS, M3UA link, and OPC are all normal. – Querying information about BSC Node Redundancy when both BSCs work correctly 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to check the homing status of the dual-homed BTS on BSC 1 LMT. Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LNK to check the status of an M3UA link. Expected result: The value of Administrative state is Uninhibited.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP OPC to check the homing status of the dual-homed OPC. Expected result: The value of OPC host state is Yes.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to check the homing status of the dual-homed BTS on BSC 2 LMT. Expected result: The value of Hosted is No.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LNK to check the status of an M3UA link. Expected result: The value of Administrative state is Inhibited.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP OPC to check the homing status of the dual-homed OPC. Expected result: The value of OPC host state is No.

– Verifying BSC Node Redundancy when a BSC fails 1.

Power off BSC 1 and wait 20 minutes.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to check the homing status of the dual-homed BTS on BSC 2 LMT. Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.

3.


4.


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

5.

Power on BSC 1 and wait 20 minutes.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 LMT and BSC 2 LMT to check the homing status of the dual-homed BTS controlled by each BSC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

907



Expected result: The value of Hosted for BSC 1 is Yesand the value of Hosted for BSC 2 is No. 7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LNK to check the status of an M3UA link connecting to each BSC. Expected result: The value of Administrative state for BSC 1 is Uninhibitedand the value of Administrative state for BSC 2 is Inhibited.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP OPC to check the homing status of the dual-homed OPC of each BSC. Expected result: The value of OPC host state for BSC 1 is Yesand the value of OPC host state for BSC 2 is No.

– Verifying BSC Node Redundancy when all the signaling links on the A interface of a BSC do not work correctly 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA M3LNK on BSC 1 LMT to deactivate all the M3UA links on the A interface. Then, wait 20 minutes.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 2 LMT to check the homing status of the dual-homed BTS. Expected result: The value of Hosted is Yes.

3.


4.


5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT M3LNK on BSC 1 LMT to activate all the M3UA links on the A interface. Then, wait 20 minutes.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT on BSC 1 LMT and BSC 2 LMT to check the homing status of the dual-homed BTS controlled by each BSC. Expected result: The value of Hosted for BSC 1 is Yesand the value of Hosted for BSC 2 is No.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP M3LNK to check the status of an M3UA link connecting to each BSC. Expected result: The value of Administrative state for BSC 1 is Uninhibitedand the value of Administrative state for BSC 2 is Inhibited.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP OPC to check the homing status of the dual-homed OPC of each BSC. Expected result: The value of OPC host state for BSC 1 is Yesand the value of OPC host state for BSC 2 is No.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GBSCREDGRP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Redundancy Backup Configuration > BSC Node Redundancy Group. Set Active Status to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) on BSC 1 LMT and BSC 2 LMT to deactivate BSC Node Redundancy on each BSC.

----End Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


908



Example //Configuring data on BSC 1 LMT //Configuring signaling points and signaling links over the A interface ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST; ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0"; ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0"; ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0"; ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="192.3.0.111", PEERIP1="192.3.0.2", PEERPN=6000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0"; //Configuring BTS attributes SET BTSIP:BTSID=72, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.124", BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=PRIMHOST, PEERBTSID=172, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.69", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255", PEERBSCID=1, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF; //Configuring BTS routes ADD BTSIPRT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=72, DSTIP="172.18.125.124", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="1.5.1.5"; ADD BTSIPRT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=72, DSTIP="172.18.125.69", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="1.5.2.5"; //Configuring neighboring cells (Cells 1 and 2046 are both dual-homed cells.) ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2046, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2046, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; //Configuring PTP BVCs ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=0, BVCI=6, IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="cell-11"; //Configuring signaling links over the inter-BSC interface ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=5000, LOCIP1="192.3.0.111", LOCIP2="10.161.39.111", PEERIP1="192.3.0.110", PEERIP2="10.161.39.110", PEERPN=58000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; //Configuring BSC Node Redundancy SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, CNSTATEPOLICYFORGROUP=AINTFBLOCK, LocalBSCID=0, PeerBSCID=1; SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY, REHOSTDELAYTIME=60; ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0; //Configuring data on BSC 2 LMT //Configuring signaling points and signaling links over the A interface ADD OPC: NAME="A", SPX=0, NI=NATB, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=2730, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST; ADD N7DPC: NAME="A to MSC", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=4369, DPCT=A, BEARTYPE=M3UA; ADD M3LE: LENO=0, SPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0"; ADD M3DE: DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0"; ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, WKMODE=M3UA_IPSP, NAME="0"; ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="0";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


909



ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, MODE=CLIENT, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="192.3.0.110", PEERIP1="192.3.0.2", PEERPN=6000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=1, NAME="0"; //Configuring BTS attributes SET BTSIP:BTSID=172, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="172.18.125.69", BTSIP="166.253.121.10", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SLAVEHOST, PEERBTSID=72, PEERBSCIP="172.18.125.124", PEERBSCMASK="255.255.255.255", PEERBSCID=0, CFGFLAG=NULL, BTSGWIPSWITCH=OFF; //Configuring BTS routes ADD BTSIPRT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=172, DSTIP="172.18.125.124", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="1.5.1.5"; ADD BTSIPRT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=172, DSTIP="172.18.125.69", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="1.5.2.5"; //Configuring neighboring cells (Cells 1 and 2046 are both dual-homed cells.) ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=1, NBR2GNCELLID=2046, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; ADD G2GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC2GNCELLID=2046, NBR2GNCELLID=1, NCELLTYPE=HANDOVERNCELL, SRCHOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1; //Configuring PTP BVCs ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1, BVCI=6, IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="cell-11"; //Configuring signaling links over the inter-BSC interface ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=2, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=CLIENT, APP=BBAP, LOCPN=58000, LOCIP1="192.3.0.110", LOCIP2="10.161.39.110", PEERIP1="192.3.0.111", PEERIP2="10.161.39.111", PEERPN=5000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; //Configuring BSC Node Redundancy SET GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0, CNSTATEPOLICYFORGROUP=AINTFBLOCK, LocalBSCID=1, PeerBSCID=0; SET GREDGRPPRIMHOSTPOLICY: REHOSTTYPE=REHOSTDELAY, REHOSTDELAYTIME=60; ACT GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0; //Activating BSC Node Redundancy DEA GBSCREDGRP: GROUPINDEX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


910



244

Configuring TC Pool

About This Chapter This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool. The A interface boards of the BSC that supports the TC Pool feature can use only TDM transmission. The Ater interface boards can use TDM transmission or IP transmission. 244.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 244.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


911



244.1 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over TDM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over TDM transmission mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The EIUa/OIUa board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa/ OIUa board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive with the features GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – Network Topology – At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is configured remotely. – The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks. – Initial Data Preparation – The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. – The EIUa/OIUa board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. – The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

Context l

To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the primary BSC and secondary BSCs in a TC pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.

l

All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the primary BSC. The secondary BSC is only configured with the BM subrack. The primary BSC and secondary BSCs are connected to the TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.

l

The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the primary BSC and secondary BSCs.

l

If TFO Switch of the secondary BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the primary BSC. For details on the setting of TFO, see 51 Configuring TFO.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


912



Procedure l


2.

Configure the Ater interface link for the primary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the primary BSC. In this step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support TC Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the primary BSC to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the primary BSC to add the OML on the Ater interface between the primary BSC and the TCS.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the primary BSC to add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the primary BSC and TC subrack.

Configure the A interface link for the primary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the primary BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the primary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the primary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the primary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route. NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the primary BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the primary BSC, MTP2 links are automatically added to the primary BSC.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Configure the Ater interface link for the secondary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the secondary BSC. In this step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support TC Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC Pool.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the secondary BSC to add an Ater connection path on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM).

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the primary BSC to add an Ater connection path on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the secondary BSC specified in 3.1.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the secondary BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM).

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the primary BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

913



CFGTC(TC), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the secondary BSC specified in 3.1. 4.

Configure the A interface link for the secondary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the primary BSC to add an A interface E1/T1 link to the secondary BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC), and set ID of slave BSC in TC Pool to the ID of the secondary BSC specified in 3.1.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the secondary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the secondary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the secondary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route. NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links, because the secondary BSC is not configured with the TCS.

e.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the primary BSC to add an MTP2 link to the secondary BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2(MTP2), and set BSC ID in the TC pool to the ID of the secondary BSC specified in 3.1. In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate.


In a cell under the primary BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the primary BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the primary BSC works properly.

3.

In a cell under a secondary BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the secondary BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC (SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool. Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the secondary BSC works properly.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the primary BSC. In this step, set Is Support TC Pool to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the secondary BSC. In this step, set Is Support TC Pool to NO(No).

----End

Example l

Configuration on the primary BSC //Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interface SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES,

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


914


244 Configuring TC Pool IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=TDM; //Configuring the Ater conpath or the Ater OML ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=14, TCPN=1; ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&T S11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0& TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0 &TS31-0; ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0; //Configuring the A E1/T1 on the primary BSC ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100; ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF, NAME="BM1"; ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1& TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1 &TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS301&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1"; ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1"; //Configuring the Ater E1T1 on the TC side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0; //Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS; //Configuring the A E1/T1 for the secondary BSC ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=2, OPCIDX=2, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0; //congfiguring the semilink for the secondary BSC ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&T S11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1& TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1 &TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16, OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1& TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1 &TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS301&TS31-1;

l

Configuration on the secondary BSC //Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interface SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM; //Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0; //Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


915


244 Configuring TC Pool 0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS; //Configuring the MTP3 links for the secondary BSC ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2"; ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=2, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1& TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1 &TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS301&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM2"; ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="BM2";

244.2 Configuring TC Pool (Ater over IP) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113726 TC Pool in Ater over IP transmission mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured, and there are idle ports on the configured EIUa/OIUa/POUc board.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature is mutually exclusive to features GBFD-118602 A over IP and GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – Network Topology – At least two BSCs are configured in the network. The BM/TC subracks of the two BSCs are in separated configuration mode and the TC subrack of the two BSCs is configured remotely. – The configuration of the clock source is the same for the two BSCs. For details on the configuration of the clock source, see Configuring the Clocks. – Initial Data Preparation – The global data is configured. For details, see Configuring the Global Information. – The EIUa/OIUa/POUc board is configured. For details, see Configuring a Board. – The BSC clock is configured. For details, see Configuring the Clocks.

Context l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

To synchronize the frequency of the GSM network, the primary BSC and secondary BSCs in a TC pool should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one TC pool. One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

916



l

All TCSs in a TC pool are configured and controlled on the primary BSC. The secondary BSC is only configured with the BM subrack. The primary BSC and secondary BSCs are connected to the TCS over the Ater interface, and the TCS is connected to the MSC over the A interface.

l

The settings of TC CRC Allow must be the same on the primary BSC and secondary BSCs.

l

If TFO Switch of the secondary BSCs is set to ENABLE(Enable), the TFO setting is effective only when TFO Option Switch of each TCS is set to ON(On) on the primary BSC. For details on the setting of TFO, see 51 Configuring TFO.

l


Procedure 1.

Configure the Ater interface link for the primary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the primary BSC. In this step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support TC Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to YES(Yes), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONPATH for the primary BSC to add an Ater connection path between the BM subrack and TC subrack.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATEROML for the primary BSC to add the OML on the Ater interface between the primary BSC and the TCS.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERCONSL for the primary BSC to add a signaling link on the Ater interface between the BM subrack of the primary BSC and TC subrack.

e.

Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link group). – Add PPP link data. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the primary BSC. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the primary BSC. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack. NOTE

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one PPP link at a time. If multiple PPP links are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operation repeatedly.

– Add MLPPP group data.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the primary BSC. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the primary BSC. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.


917


244 Configuring TC Pool NOTE

You can perform the preceding operation to add only one MLPPP group at a time. If multiple MLPPP groups are to be added, you need to perform the preceding operation repeatedly.

2.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the primary BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the primary BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC).

h.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the primary BSC. In this step, set Adjacent Node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

i.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the primary BSC. In this step, set Adjacent node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

Configure the A interface link for the primary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the primary BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the A interface. In this step, set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC).

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the primary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the primary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the primary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route. NOTE

The TCSs are configured on the primary BSC. When you add MTP3 links to the primary BSC, MTP2 links are automatically added to the primary BSC.

3.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Configure the Ater interface link for the secondary BSC. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the secondary BSC. In this step, set Service mode to SEPARATE(Separate), set Is Support TC Pool to YES(Yes), set Is Main BSC to NO(No), and set Ater Interface Transfer Mode to TDM(TDM). In addition, specify TC Pool ID and ID of a BSC in TC Pool.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the secondary BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the BM side. In this step, set BM/ TC config flag to CFGBM(BM).

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERE1T1 for the primary BSC to add an E1/T1 link on the Ater interface on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the secondary BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the BM side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGBM(BM).


918



e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATERSL for the primary BSC to add an Ater signaling link on the TC side. In this step, set BM/TC config flag to CFGTC(TC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool.

f.

Determine the type of link carried on the E1/T1 link (PPP link or MLPPP link group). – Add PPP link data. a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the secondary BSC to add a PPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK for the primary BSC to add a PPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.

– Add MLPPP group data.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the secondary BSC to add an MLPPP group on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP for the primary BSC to add an MLPPP group on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TCS.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the secondary BSC to add an MLPPP link on the BM side. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the BM subrack.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPLNK for the primary BSC to add an MLPPP link on the TC side. In this step, set Slot No to the number of the slot that houses the IP interface board in the TC subrack.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the secondary BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to BSC(Ater Interface on BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID.

h.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE for the primary BSC to add an Ater interface adjacent node on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent Node Type to TC(Ater Interface on TC).

i.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the secondary BSC to add an IP path on the BM side. In this step, set Adjacent node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the BM side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER (ATER Interface).

j.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH for the primary BSC to add an IP path on the TC side. In this step, set Adjacent node ID to the ID of the adjacent node on the TC side. In addition, set Interface Type to ATER(ATER Interface).

Configure the A interface link for the secondary BSC. a.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AE1T1 for the primary BSC to add an A interface E1/T1 link to the secondary BSC. In this step, set BSC Flag to SUBBSC(SUB BSC). In addition, specify ID of slave BSC in TC Pool.


919



b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LKS for the secondary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link set. In this step, specify Signalling link set index, DSP index, and Signalling link set name.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3LNK for the secondary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling link.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MTP3RT for the secondary BSC to add an MTP3 signaling route. NOTE

The MTP2 links cannot be automatically added with the addition of the MTP3 links, because the secondary BSC is not configured with the TCS.

e.

l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK for the primary BSC to add an MTP2 link to the secondary BSC. In this step, set Application Type to MTP2(MTP2). In addition, specify Semipermanent Link Rate and BSC ID in the TC pool.


In a cell under the primary BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the primary BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to MAINBSC(MAIN BSC). Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the primary BSC works properly.

3.

In a cell under a secondary BSC, use the MS to perform voice services.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ACIC. In this step, set OPC Index and DPC Group No to those of the secondary BSC, set Query mode to BYDPC (BY DPC Group), set CIC state to OCCUPIED(OCCUPIED), and set BSC Flag to SUBBSC (SUB BSC). In addition, specify BSC ID in the TC pool. Expected result: The occupied CICs are displayed and the secondary BSC works properly.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the primary BSC. In this step, set Is Support TC Pool to NO(No).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC for the secondary BSC. In this step, set Is Support TC Pool to NO(No).

----End

Example l

Configuration on the primary BSC //Setting the TC Pool and the transmission mode on the Ater interface SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=YES, TCPOOLID=0,ATERTRANSMODE=IP; //Configuring the Ater conpath on the primary BSC ADD ATERCONPATH: ATERIDX=1, BMSRN=0, BMSN=14, BMPN=1, TCSRN=3, TCSN=14, TCPN=1; //Configuring the Ater OML on the primary BSC ADD ATEROML: ATEROMLINX=0, ATERPIDX=0, TSMASK=TS1-0&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&T S11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0& TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


920


244 Configuring TC Pool &TS31-0; //Configuring the Ater CONSL ont the primary BSC ADD ATERCONSL: ATERIDX=0, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0; //Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the BM side for the primary BSC ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1 &TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS201&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30 -1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.2", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; //Configuring the Ater PPPlink on the TC side for the primary BSC ADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1 &TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS201&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30 -1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; //Configuring the Adjnode ong the BM side for the primary BSC ADD ADJNODE: ANI=0, NAME="adjnode0", NODET=BSC, BSCID=0; //Configuring the Adjnode ong the TC side for the primary BSC ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC; //Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the primary BSC ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=0, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the primary BSC ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Configuring the A E1/T1 on the primary BSC ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=0, DPCGIDX=0, OPCIDX=0, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=MAINBSC, STCIC=100; //Configuring the MTP3 links on the primary BSC ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DPX=1, LNKSLSMASK=B0001, EMERGENCY=OFF, NAME="BM1"; //Configuring the MTP3 link on the primary BSC ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGSLC=1, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_PRINCIPAL, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=16, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1& TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1 &TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS301&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM1"; //Configuring the MTP3 route on the primary BSC ADD MTP3RT: DPX=1, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="BM1"; //Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the TC side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=1, SRN=3, SN=20, PN=0; //Configuring the Ater RSL on the TC side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGTC, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


921


244 Configuring TC Pool //Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the TC side for secondary BSC ADD PPPLNK: SRN=3, SN=14, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1 &TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS201&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30 -1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; //Configuring the adjnode on the TC side for the secondary BSC ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=TC; //Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the TC side for the secondary BSC ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Configuring the A E1/T1 on the secondary BSC ADD AE1T1: SRN=3, SN=16, PN=2, OPCIDX=2, ALLTSTYPE=ALLCIC, BSCFLAG=SUBBSC, SUBBSCTID=1, STCIC=0; //Configuring the semilink for the secondary BSC ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=MTP2, LNKRATE=64K, BSCTID=1, ATERIDX=2, INMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&T S11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1& TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1 &TS31-1, OUTSRN=3, OUTSN=3, OUTPN=16, OUTMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1& TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1 &TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS301&TS31-1;

l

Configuration on the secondary BSC //Setting the TC Pool and the transmission on the Ater interface SET BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=SEPARATE, IsSupportTcPool=YES, IsMainBSC=NO, BSCTID=1, TCPOOLID=0, ATERTRANSMODE=TDM; //Configuring the Ater E1/T1 on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERE1T1: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, SRN=0, SN=16, PN=0; //Configuring the Ater RSL on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD ATERSL: BTCFLAG=CFGBM, ATERIDX=2, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30 -0&TS31-0, TNMODE=TRRS; //Configuring the Ater PPPLink on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=16, BRDTYPE=POUc, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=6, TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1 &TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS201&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30 -1&TS31-1, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="1.1.1.2", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="1.1.1.1", IPHC=No_HC, PFC=Disable, ACFC=Disable, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF; //Configuring the adjnode on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="adjnode1", NODET=BSC; //Configuring the Ater IPPATH on the BM side for the secondary BSC ADD IPPATH: ANI=1, PATHID=1, ITFT=ATER, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.2", TXBW=2000, RXBW=2000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, PATHCHK=DISABLED; //Configuring the MTP3 links on the secondary BSC ADD MTP3LKS: SIGLKSX=1, DPX=2, NAME="BM2"; //Configuring the MTP3 link on the secondary BSC ADD MTP3LNK: SIGLKSX=1, SIGSLC=2, BEARTYPE=MTP2, TCMODE=SEPERATE_SUBORDINATE, ATERIDX=1, ATERMASK=TS1-1&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-0&TS9-0&TS10-0 &TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&TS19-0&TS200&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


922


244 Configuring TC Pool -0&TS31-0, ASRN=3, ASN=18, MTP2LNKN=0, APN=0, ATSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1& TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1 &TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS301&TS31-1, LKTATE=64K, NAME="BM2"; //Configuring the MTP3 route on the secondary BSC ADD MTP3RT: DPX=2, SIGLKSX=1, NAME="BM2";

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


923



245

Configuring OML Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113728 OML Backup. When the operation and maintenance link (OML) backup function of the BTS is enabled, the BTS automatically switches to anther port to set up an OML if the established OML is disconnected, thereby reducing service interruption duration.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BTS3900B, BTS3900E, and BTS3X series base station do not support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117801 Ring Topology, GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass, GBFD-118601 Abis over IP, GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1, or GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization. – When this feature is enabled simultaneously with the GBFD-113801 TRX Mutual Aid feature: – The value of Flex Abis Mode of the BTS must be set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). – TRX mutual aid is triggered by the active link. The static PDTCH on the active link is unavailable due to transmission faults. Therefore, you are advised to change the static PDTCH to dynamic PDTCH.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


924



CAUTION l The BTS in TDM or HDLC transmission mode supports this feature. The BTS in IP transmission mode does not support this feature. l OMLs on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS basic cabinet group support this feature. OMLs on other ports of the basic cabinet group and OMLs of the main and extension cabinet groups do not support this feature. l The active and standby OMLs between the BSC and the BTS must not be carried by the same E1/T1 cable, including the same E1/T1 cable of an upper-level BTS. When the upper-level BTS is connected to the BSC by using only one E1/T1 cable and the lower-level BTS requires the OML backup function, a secondary link must be added to directly connect the upperlevel BTS or lower-level BTS to the BSC.

Context l

If the OML between the BSC and the BTS fails, the BTS cannot work. The OML Backup feature allows a pair of OMLs to be configured on two independent E1 cables (one for each). When the active OML is faulty, the BTS uses the standby OML. This prevents the BTS and cells from being out of service due to transmission failures or port failures.

l

When this feature is used, one OML is configured on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS, respectively. After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish OMLs on the two ports in turn. If the BTS establishes an OML on a port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is reset or the OML is disconnected. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts to establish an OML on another port. If the OML is established successfully, the BSC triggers an OML switchover procedure.

l

After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are not switched over. That is, for ports 0 and 1, if the transmission link or port where the active OML is located is faulty, all TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots configured on this port become unavailable. The TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots on a normal port, however, are still available. Therefore, cells under the BTS continue to provide services.

l


Procedure

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

1.


2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > The Information on the Active/Standby Switchover of the OML; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Configure Backup OML to YES (Yes) and set Wait Time before OML Switch and Try Switching Duration Time to appropriate values.

3.

Optional: Adjust the timeslot used by the active and standby OMLs of the BTS.


925


245 Configuring OML Backup NOTE

l The active and standby OMLs configured on ports 0 and 1 of the BTS must use the same timeslot. l The BTS must be one of 3012 or 3900 series base stations (excluding BTS3900B and BTS3900E). l The BTS works in TDM transmission mode.

4.

l

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLDETECT (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > BTS OML Timeslot Detection Function; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Whether to Enable OML Detection to OMLDET (OML timeslot automatic detection) and BTS Bar Code to an appropriate value.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > TimeSlot Management > OML Timeslot; CME batch modification center: not supported) to specify the timeslot used by the active and standby OMLs of the BTS.



Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSOMLBACKUP to query the value of Configure Backup OML. Expected result: Configure Backup OML is set to Yes, and other parameters are set based on configurations.

l



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSOMLBACKUP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Extend Attributes > The Information on the Active/Standby Switchover of the OML; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Configure Backup OML to NO (No).

3.


----End

Example //Activating OML Backup DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=YES, WTBS=30, TBS=30; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Verifying OML Backup LST BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; //Deactivating OML Backup DEA BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0; SET BTSOMLBACKUP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, OMLBKUP=NO; ACT BTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


926


246 Configuring Access Control Class

246

Configuring Access Control Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC).

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The MS and its SIM card meet the ACC-related requirements specified by the protocols.

Context This feature enables special users and some common users to access the network preferentially when the network traffic is excessively high. When the ACC feature is enabled, the MS checks the access control class set in the SIM card based on the access control class included in the cell broadcast message. If the access control class is an allowed one, the MS can preempt the RACH to access the network. If the access control class is a forbidden one, the MS cannot access the network.

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BSCACCCTRLP (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Access Control Policy; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches) with Access Control Policy Index, Access Control Window Size, Starting Point of the Access Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window set as required. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

927


246 Configuring Access Control Class NOTE

A maximum of 32 access control policies can be set. You can run the command in Step 1 for multiple times to set multiple access control policies. When the Access Control Policy is enabled and the system message is sent by the BSC, the access of the MSs of classes 10 to 15 is not affected regardless of the Access Control Policy configuration.

2.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Access Control Allowed set to YES(Yes) and Access Control Policy to the value of Access Control Policy Index specified in Step 1.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLCCBASIC. Expected result: Access Control Allowed is set to YES(Yes), and Access Control Policy is specified.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BSCACCCTRLP. Expected result: The values of Access Control Window Size, Starting Point of the Access Control Window, and Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window are those specified during configuration.

3.

Trace RSL messages on the Abis interface by referring to Tracing CS Domain Messages on the Abis Interface. NOTE

The access-control-class in the RACH Control Parameters IE is called the ACC field. The ACC field contains two octets and is 16 bits in length. Each bit indicates a level of the SIM users and its value is 0 or 1. When a bit is 0, the SIM users of a certain level are allowed to access the network. When a bit is 1, the SIM users of a certain level are forbidden to access the network.

Expected result: The Information Element (IE) RACH Control Parameters is included in the system message, and within the sliding window range the value of the bits in the ACC field of the RACH Control Parameters is 1 from the starting point onwards. 4.

l

When an MS is used to make a call in the period specified in Step 1, the MS cannot access the network if the level of the SIM card of the MS belongs to the forbidden levels. If the level of the SIM card does not belong to the forbidden levels, the MS can access the network normally.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLCCBASIC (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Call Control > Call Control Basic Parameters of Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches) with Access Control Allowed to NO(No) so that the ACC feature in a cell is deactivated.

----End

Example //Activating ACC ADD BSCACCCTRLP: ACCINDEX=0; SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACCCTRLEN=YES, ACCCTRLPY=0; //Deactivating ACC SET GCELLCCBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ACCCTRLEN=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


928



247

Configuring Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BSC6900 has been configured with an POUc, OIUa, or EIUa board that supports TDM transmission.

l


l


Context The transmission quality, especially the quality of microwave transmission, is vulnerable to bad weather, leading to degraded service quality and increased call drop rate. To prevent this problem, the BSC monitors transmission quality in real time. The BSC automatically blocks an E1 link if the transmission quality of the E1 link is lower than the specified threshold. After being blocked, the E1 link carries no service. After the transmission quality of the E1 link becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link. After being unblocked, the E1 link carries services.

WARNING This feature blocks an E1/T1 adaptively, leading to service interruption on the E1/T1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


929



Procedure l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Board > E1/T1 Port Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) with High BER Auto Isolation Switch set to ON(ON) and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4(OCCUR:1E3, RECOVERY:5E4) on the POUc/OIUa/EIUa board.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS E1/T1 BER Threshold; CME batch modification center: not supported) with BER OOS Switch set to ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold set to O1E3_R5E4(OCCUR:1E3, RECOVERY:5E4). NOTE

Step 1 and Step 2 uses an example for your reference only. Set High BER Auto Isolation Threshold and BER OOS Threshold based on the field configuration.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST E1T1 to query High BER Auto Isolation Switch and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold. Expected result: High BER Auto Isolation Switch is ON(ON) and High BER Auto Isolation Threshold is the same as that set in the activation procedure.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSE1T1BER to query BER OOS Switch and BER OOS Threshold. Expected result: BER OOS Switch is ON(ON) and BER OOS Threshold is the same as that set in the activation procedure.

3.

Use the MS to make a call and wait for BER. Expected result: The BER is higher than 1E-3.

4.

Log in to the LMT or M2000 to view the alarms reported in real time. Expected result: An ALM-21207 E1/T1 Excessive Bit Error Rate alarm is reported with the cause value of BER within one minute exceeds the allowed limit. After 10 seconds the alarm is reported, ongoing services are interrupted.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET E1T1 (CME single configuration: Device Panel > Board > E1/T1 Port Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) with High BER Auto Isolation Switch set to OFF(OFF).

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSE1T1BER (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS E1/T1 BER Threshold; CME batch modification center: not supported) with BER OOS Switch set to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BSC SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=ON, BERAUTOISOTHRD=O1E3_R5E4;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


930



//Configuring the switch and threshold for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BTS SET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=ON, BEROOSTHD=O1E3_R5E4; /*Deactivation procedure*/ //Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BSC SET E1T1: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=OIUa, PS=SINGLE, PN=3, BERAUTOISOSW=OFF; //Turning off the switch for blocking an E1 link when the BER exceeds the specified threshold for BTS SET BTSE1T1BER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, BEROOSSwitch=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


931


248 Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection

248

Configuring Semi-Permanent Connection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection.

Prerequisites l


l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The BTS3900B does not support this feature.

Context After a semi-permanent connection is configured, the information received by the E1 timeslot at the receiving end is exchanged to an E1 timeslot at the transmitting end by the internal timeslot switching function of the BSC. In this way, the collected information is transparently transmitted in the BSC. Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connection: l

Semi-permanent link The input and output of a semi-permanent link are located at the BSC interface board. In this case, the BSC performs timeslot switching between the input timeslot and the output timeslot.

l

Monitoring timeslot One end of the channel associated with a monitoring timeslot is a BTS port, and the other end of the channel is a BSC interface board. In this case, the BTS and the BSC together perform timeslot switching.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


932



Procedure l

Activation Procedure – Activating a semi-permanent link 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SEMILINK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Semipermanent Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a semi-permanent link in the BSC. In this step, set Application Type to OTHER (OTHER) and Semipermanent Link Rate to an appropriate value as required. NOTE

In BSC Start Timeslot No. and Out BSC Start Timeslot No. need to be set based on network planning. Ensure that the associated timeslots are not occupied.

– Activating a monitoring timeslot 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSMONITORTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > TimeSlot Management > Monitoring Timeslot; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a monitoring timeslot. In this step, set Time Slot Rate to an appropriate value based on the site requirements. NOTE

If the transmission mode of a BTS is IP over FE/GE, the BTS does not monitoring timeslots.

l

Verification Procedure – Verifying a semipermanent link 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SEMILINK to query the state of a semipermanent link.

Expected result: The value of State is OK. – Verifying a monitoring timeslot 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSMONITORTS to query the state of a monitoring timeslot.

Expected result: The information about the monitoring timeslot is displayed. l

Deactivation Procedure – Deactivating a semi-permanent link 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SEMILINK (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > BSC Basic Configuration > Semipermanent Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a semi-permanent link.

– Deactivating a monitoring timeslot 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSMONITORTS (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Right click BTS > TimeSlot Management > Monitoring Timeslot; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a monitoring timeslot from a BTS.

----End

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


933



Example //Activating a semi-permanent link ADD SEMILINK: IDX=0, APPTYPE=OTHER, LNKRATE=16K, INSRN=1, INSN=14, INPN=0, INTSN=10, OUTSRN=1, OUTSN=14, OUTPN=2, OUTTSN=20; //Activating a monitoring timeslot ADD BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSRATE=16K, BSCSRN=0, BSCSN=26, BSCPN=6, BSCTS=10, BSCSUBTS=6, STPN=7, STCN=0, STSRN=0, STSN=6, STTS=10, STSUBTS=2; //Verifying a semipermanent link DSP SEMILINK: IDX=0; //Verifying a monitoring timeslot LST BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0; //Deactivating a semi-permanent link RMV SEMILINK: IDX=0; //Deactivating a monitoring timeslot RMV BTSMONITORTS: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, TSIDX=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


934



249

Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-116401 End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – This feature requires support from the MSC and M2000.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – This feature requires support from the MSC. – The M2000 feature WOFD-190600 GBSS Enhanced Subscriber Tracing and WOFD-191400 G&U CS Subscriber Tracing have been enalbed.

Context The end-to-end MS signaling tracing function creates or removes a user tracing task in the HLR. The HLR sends a tracing activation message to the MSC or VLR where the MS is located. When the traced MS requests services, the MSC instructs the BSC to start user tracing. After the MS moves to another MSC and initiates location update, the HLR sends a new tracing activation message to the new VLR. The original user tracing task ends. By using the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function, the system can collect information about a specified MS when required. This function occupies a small number of system resources. By recording the signaling about an MS, this function helps to identify the NE where the fault occurs, facilitating fault handling.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


935



Procedure l


l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support End-to-end User Tracing Function to YES(Yes), and set A Interface Msg [End2end User Tracing] and Spt BSS Invoke Trace Rpt[end2end user trace] to appropriate values.


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST OTHSOFTPARA to check the value of Support End-to-end User Tracing Function. Expected result: Support End-to-end User Tracing Function is set to YES(Yes).

2.

On the M2000, choose Monitor > Signaling Trace > Signaling Trace Management from the main menu. In the navigation tree, double-click 2G End-toEnd User Trace. Expected result: A 2G End-to-End User Trace dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the 2G End-to-End User Trace window, select User ID type from the drop-down list and enter the user ID. Then click OK. Expected result: The M2000 generates a report on the end-to-end MS signaling tracing.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA (CME single configuration: GSM Global Configuration Express > Software Parameter Configuration > Other Software Parameters of BSC; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying GBSC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Support End-to-end User Tracing Function to NO(No).

----End

Example /*Activating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*/ //Enabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=YES, AInterMsgTrace=YES, SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=YES; /*Deactivating End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing*/ //Disabling the end-to-end MS signaling tracing function SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=NO, AInterMsgTrace=NO, SENDBSSINVOKETRACE=NO;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


936



250

Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The BSC6900 is configured with an OMU board running the Linux operating system.

l


l


l

Other Prerequisites – The port 6200 and the port 8200 used to communicate with the VNP have been enabled on the OMU. – The ciphering function has been enabled on the CN side. – The Vendor Network Probe (VNP) has subscribed to events Cipher Mode Complete, Clear Command, Handover Command, Handover Complete, Measurement Report Small, and MS Identity Established. – The BSC can connect to the Ericsson VNP. The BSC and Ericsson VNP use a protocol whose version is Category3 or later. – The BSC can connect to the Huawei VNP. The BSC and Huawei VNP use a protocol whose version is Category4. The Huawei VNP works in Nastar-TS V100R001C00 or a later version.

Context Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation enables the BSC to send measured MS-related radio data to the VNP, which then sends the data to a thirty-party Collection Unit (CU). The CU processes the data and then sends it to GPS users to instruct the users to avoid congestion. Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


937



Assume that the active workspace of the OMU is version_a.

Procedure l

Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the external virtual IP address of the OMU for communicating with the VNP) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GVNPADDR. In this step, set VNP IP Address and Category Version to appropriate values based on the network plan. Note that Category Version must be the same as that on the peer VNP.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Event Report Switch to ON, BSC Protocol Version No., BSC Application Version No., and Access Cause to appropriate values based on the network plan. Note that BSC Protocol Version No. and BSC Application Version No. must be the same as those on the peer VNP. NOTE

If a Huawei VNP is used, set BSC Application Version No. to 13.

3.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLSOFT. In this step, set Index Type (Not required on the CME), Cell Index, and Cell Name to appropriate values, and Real-Time Event Report Switch to ON.

Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP) 1.


2.



Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

3.


4.

Use the debugging IP address to log in to the target OMU at the local end. For details, see Logging In to the OMU.

5.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud stop command and press Enter to stop the omud process.

6.

Run the cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam command and press Enter to enter the directory under which the omutool is located.

7.

Run the ./omutool vlan_for_om VLAN ID command to add a VLAN for interconnecting the OMU and the M2000 based on the network plan.

8.

Run the ./omutool vlan_for_vnp VLAN ID command to add a VLAN for interconnecting the OMU and the VNP based on the network plan.


938


250 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation NOTE

The VLAN ID ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN ID in Step 7 and Step 8 cannot be set to the same value. If you have configured VLAN in Step 7 and Step 8 twice, you must restart the PC or server running the OMU before starting the OMU.

9.

Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutool vnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to set the local IP address and mask of the BSC.

10. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process. 11. (Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps from Step 4 to Step 10 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same value. 12. Store related configuration information in Information Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation. l

Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP. The VLAN remains unchanged.) 1.


2.



3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutool vnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to set the local IP address and mask of the BSC.

8.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.

9.

(Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps from Step 4 to Step 8 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same value.

10. Store related configuration information in Information Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation. l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP. The VLAN has changed.)


939



1.


2.



3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

Run the ./omutool vlan_for_om VLAN ID command to modify the VLAN for interconnecting the OMU and the M2000 based on the network plan.

8.

Run the ./omutool vlan_for_vnp VLAN ID command to modify the VLAN for interconnecting the OMU and the VNP based on the network plan. NOTE

The VLAN ID ranges from 2 to 4094. The VLAN ID in Step 7 and Step 8 cannot be set to the same value. If you have configured VLAN in Step 7 and Step 8 twice, you must restart the PC or server running the OMU before starting the OMU.

9.

Run the ./omutool vnpvip IP Address Mask command (for example, ./omutool vnpvip 10.144.188.101 255.255.255.255) to modify the local IP address and mask of the BSC.

10. Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process. 11. (Optional) If an active and a standby OMUs are configured, perform the steps from Step 4 to Step 10 repeatedly on the standby OMU. Set the VLAN ID to the same value. 12. Store related configuration information in Information Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation. l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Use an MS to process call services and trace IP packets at the BSS.

2.

Check the IP packet information. Expected result: The IP packets contain complete information collected at the BSS and the reported events comply with protocols.


940


250 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation NOTE

The IP packet information consists of the events reported by the MS, including Cipher Mode Complete, Clear Command, Handover Command, Handover Complete, Measurement Result Small, and MS Identity Established. Where, events Cipher Mode Complete, Clear Command, and Measurement Result Small are always reported for an ordinary call. When inter-BSC call handover occurs, events Handover Command, Handover Complete, and MS Identity Established will also be reported besides the preceding events.

3. l

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GVNPLOCALIP to query on the OMU the IP addresses used for connecting to the VNP.

Deactivation Procedure (Using the external virtual IP address of the OMU for communicating with the VNP) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Real-Time Event Report Switch to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GVNPADDR and specify VNP IP Address to remove the IP address of the VNP.

Deactivation Procedure (Using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BSCBASIC. In this step, set Real-Time Event Report Switch to OFF.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GVNPADDR and specify VNP IP Address to remove the IP address of the VNP.

3.


4.


5.


6.

Run the ./omutool delvnpvip command to remove the local IP address of the BSC.

7.

Run the ./omutool delvlan VLAN ID command to remove the VLAN that is used for interconnecting the OMU and the M2000.

8.

Run the ./omutool delvlan VLAN ID command to remove the VLAN that is used for interconnecting the OMU and the VNP.

9.

Run the /etc/rc.d/omud start command and press Enter to start the omud process.

10. Store related configuration information in Information Record Sheet of OMU Software Installation. ----End

Example l

\\Activation procedure (Newly-configured, and using the external virtual IP address of the OMU for communicating with the VNP) ADD GVNPADDR: VNPIP="10.10.12.3"; SET BSCBASIC: ENTCAUSE=PERIOD_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&NORMAL_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&IMSI_ATTACH-0&SMS-1 &CALL_SETUP-0&PAGING_RESPONSE0&IMSI_DETACH-0&OTHERS-0, ENTSWITCH=ON, BSCPVN=1, BSCAVN=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTSWITCH=ON;

l

Activation procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP) ADD GVNPADDR: VNPIP="10.10.12.3"; SET BSCBASIC:

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


941


250 Configuring Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation ENTCAUSE=PERIOD_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&NORMAL_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&IMSI_ATTACH-0&SMS-1 &CALL_SETUP-0&PAGING_RESPONSE0&IMSI_DETACH-0&OTHERS-0, ENTSWITCH=ON, BSCPVN=1, BSCAVN=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTSWITCH=ON; /etc/rc.d/omud stop cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam ./omutool vlan_for_om 3 ./omutool vlan_for_vnp 4 ./omutool vnpvip 10.10.11.4 255.255.255.0 /etc/rc.d/omud start

l

Activation procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP. The VLAN remains unchanged.) ADD GVNPADDR: VNPIP="10.10.12.3"; SET BSCBASIC: ENTCAUSE=PERIOD_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&NORMAL_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&IMSI_ATTACH-0&SMS-1 &CALL_SETUP-0&PAGING_RESPONSE0&IMSI_DETACH-0&OTHERS-0, ENTSWITCH=ON, BSCPVN=1, BSCAVN=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTSWITCH=ON; /etc/rc.d/omud stop cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam ./omutool vnpvip 10.10.11.4 255.255.255.0 /etc/rc.d/omud start

l

Activation Procedure (Newly-configured, and using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP. The VLAN has changed.) ADD GVNPADDR: VNPIP="10.10.12.3"; SET BSCBASIC: ENTCAUSE=PERIOD_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&NORMAL_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&IMSI_ATTACH-0&SMS-1 &CALL_SETUP-0&PAGING_RESPONSE0&IMSI_DETACH-0&OTHERS-0, ENTSWITCH=ON, BSCPVN=1, BSCAVN=1; SET GCELLSOFT: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, ENTSWITCH=ON; /etc/rc.d/omud stop cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam ./omutool vlan_for_om 3 ./omutool vlan_for_vnp 4 ./omutool vnpvip 10.10.11.4 255.255.255.0 /etc/rc.d/omud start

l

Deactivation Procedure (Using the external virtual IP address of the OMU for communicating with the VNP) SET BSCBASIC: ENTCAUSE=PERIOD_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&NORMAL_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&IMSI_ATTACH-0&SMS-1 &CALL_SETUP-0&PAGING_RESPONSE0&IMSI_DETACH-0&OTHERS-0, ENTSWITCH=OFF, BSCPVN=1, BSCAVN=1; RMV GVNPADDR: VNPIP="10.10.12.3";

l

Deactivation Procedure (Using the local IP address of the BSC for communicating with the VNP) SET BSCBASIC: ENTCAUSE=PERIOD_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&NORMAL_LOCATION_UPDATE-0&IMSI_ATTACH-0&SMS-1 &CALL_SETUP-0&PAGING_RESPONSE0&IMSI_DETACH-0&OTHERS-0, ENTSWITCH=OFF, BSCPVN=1, BSCAVN=1; RMV GVNPADDR: VNPIP="10.10.12.3"; /etc/rc.d/omud stop cd /mbsc/bam/version_a/bin/bam ./omutool delvlan 3 ./omutool delvlan 4 /etc/rc.d/omud start

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


942



251

Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (GSM).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – Only the multi-mode RF modules support GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing at present.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can not be configured with dynamic spectrum sharing. – GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing is not supported in GSM dynamic transmit diversity. – It is not recommended that GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing coexists with the baseband frequency hopping algorithm involving two power amplifiers. Their coexistence results in a certain level of performance loss. – This feature can't be activated with WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO or WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO simultaneously. – This feature has to be activated with MRFD-221801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS) simultaneously.

l


l

Other Prerequisites – The UMTS cell must exist HSDPA Carry.

Context In the case of a 3900 series multi-mode base station, the GSM and UMTS TRXs can share one power amplifier. When there is unbalanced traffic in the GSM and the UMTS, the power can be Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


943



used more efficiently in an effective way, namely, sharing the power amplifier. The overall network quality of the GSM and the UMTS is therefore improved. NOTE

l The feature may fail to retake the shared power in one second when the GSM services increase suddenly. As a result, internal GSM peak clipping occurs, which affects service quality. l Enabling the feature may cause the UMTS coverage to shrink and therefore increase the drop rate. The problem can be addressed by handing over services in marginal coverage to a GSM/UMTS cell under the same coverage as the original UMTS. l The switch and other parameter configurations are performed only on the GSM side. The UMTS side requires no configuration.

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Power > BTS GU Dynamic Power Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set the period for enabling GU power sharing.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RXU Board Type to MRRU(MRRU) or MRFU (MRFU), set GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switch to YES(YES), and set parameters Minimum Number of Non-BCCH TRXs in GSM for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Load Threshold for GU Power Sharing, Number of Checked Timeslots for Retrieving Shared Power, Num of Timeslots Meet Requirements for Retrieving Shared Pwr, GSM Power Reserve Coefficient for Retrieving Shared Power, GSM Idle Channel Threshold for GU Power Sharing, GSM Idle Channel Hysteresis for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in Low Load for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in High Load for GU Power Sharing, Maximum Accumulated Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept, Maximum Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept In Each Period to actual conditions.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches), set GU Power Share Flag to TRUE(TRUE).


Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP and LST BTSRXUBP and check the returned message. Exception result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled and GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switch are YES.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL, and check the returned message. Exception result: GU Power Share Flag is YES.

l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches), set GU Power Share Flag to FALSE(FALSE). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

944



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Power > BTS GU Dynamic Power Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP (CME single configuration: BTS Device Panel > RXU Topology > Right click RXU Board > RXU Board Porperties > RUX board Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set GU Dynamic Power Sharing Switch to NO(NO). NOTE

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can be deactivated by performing either of the two steps discussed above.

----End

Example //Activation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GUPWRSHARESTM1=07&00, GUPWRSHAREETM1=09&00, GUPWRSHARESTM2=10&00, GUPWRSHAREETM2=12&00, GUPWRSHARESTM3=14&00, GUPWRSHAREETM3=16&00, GUPWRSHARESTM4=20&00, GUPWRSHAREETM4=22&00; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=YES, GUPWRSHARETRXNUM=1, GUPWRSHAREPWRLOAD=80, GUPWRSHAREN=8, GUPWRSHAREP=6, GUPWRSHARERSVFACTOR=50, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLETH=12, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLEHS=2, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLERSVPWR=5, GUPWRSHAREGSMBUSYRSVPWR=10, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWR=15, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWRPD=5; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=TRUE; //Verification procedure LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=0; //Deactivation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=NO; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=NO; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


945



252

Configuring GSM and UMTS

Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). This feature enables the spectrum resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load, improving frequency utilization.

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – The 900 MHz MRFU and RRU3908 must support this feature.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing. – − This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO, GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

l


l

Start Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to GU DSS Management of the M2000 Online Help.

Context The dynamic spectrum sharing (DSS) between GSM and UMTS increases network throughput and reduces the total cost of data services because UMTS has higher spectral efficiency than GSM. In theory, the maximum throughput gain is about 50%. After this feature is used, the total cost of ownership (TCO) of mobile broadband (MBB) can be reduced, and dynamic GSM/ UMTS refarming can be implemented. Thus, the maintenance cost of manual refarming is reduced.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


946



Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Configuration on the RNC side a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) with DSS NodeB Flag set to TRUE.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP (CME single configuration: Main View > Right click NodeB > Add UMTS Cell, UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set up a DSS cell, set DSS Cell Flag to TRUE, and set Maximum TX Power in Small DSS Coverage and PCPICH TX Power in Small DSS Coverage based on network conditions.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Access Restriction Information; CME batch modification center: Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with both Cell barred indicator for SIB3 and Cell barred indicator for SIB4 of DSS cells set to BARRED.

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Inter-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the neighbor 3G cells of DSS cells as inter-frequency neighboring cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE and DrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE.

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the neighboring GSM cells for DSS cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > GSM Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the neighboring DSS cells as intra-frequency neighboring cells.

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with both DRD switch for single RAB and HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH set to ON.

h.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Directed Retry Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set to UserNumber.

i.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDRD (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented DRD Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) with Load balance DRD switch Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

947



for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set to UserNumber. j.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the cell.

Configuration on the NodeB side – Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add local DSS cells, and set GU Power Share Flag to FALSE.

3.

Configuration on the BSC side a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > GSM Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > BSC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.21 Modifying BSC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add 3G external cells.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > BSC 3G Neighbor Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add 3G neighboring cells.

c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Spectrum Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Spectrum Sharing Allowed set to YES(Yes).

d.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) with Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed set to YES(Yes).

CAUTION The parameter Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed for all TRXs to be shared under a base station should be set to YES(Yes) except for the BCCH TRX. l


Start spectrum sharing on the M2000 manually by referring to GU DSS Management of the M2000 Online Help.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UNODEB to query the DSS status of a NodeB. Expected result: The value of NodeB DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to query the DSS status of a cell. Expected result: The value of DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.

4.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check the value of GU Power Share Flag. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

948



Expected result: The value of GU Power Share Flag is TRUE. 5.

l

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to query the value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing. Expected result: The value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing is Yes.


Stop Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to GU DSS Management of the M2000 Online Help.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB; CME batch modification center: not supported) with DSS NodeB Flag set to FALSE.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA (CME single configuration: BTS Configuration Express > BTS Basic Attributes > BTS Spectrum Sharing Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) with Spectrum Sharing Allowed set to NO(No).

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV (CME single configuration: TRX Configuration Express > Site TRX Dev Property > Site TRX Dev Property; CME batch modification center: 3.22 Modifying GSM TRX Parameters in Batches) with Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed set to NO(No).

5.

Remove the neighboring cell by referring to Reconfiguration Guide.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate a cell.

----End

Example //Activation procedure MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=TRUE; ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=102, CellName="dss102", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNDownlink=412, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="102", LoCell=102, SupBmc=FALSE, DSSFlag=TRUE, DSSSmallCovMaxTxPower=431, DSSSmallCovPCPICHPower=331; MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT: CellId=102, IdleCellBarred=BARRED, IdleIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, IdleTbarred=D320, ConnCellBarred=BARRED, ConnIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, ConnTbarred=D320; ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=105, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE; ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=2, CellId=102, GSMCellIndex=120, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=3, NCellId=121, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UDRD: LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, LdbDRDchoice=UserNumber; ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=120, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, ReDirBandInd=DependOnNCell; ACT UCELL: CellId=102; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102, STN=1, SECN=0, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


949



ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=120, EXT3GCELLNAME="120", MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=412, SCRAMBLE=0, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1; ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=102, NBR3GNCELLID=120; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=YES; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1002, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES; SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1003, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES; //Deactivation procedure MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=FALSE; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=NO; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1002, DSSENABLE=NO; SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1003, DSSENABLE=NO; HO UCELL: CellId=102, CellChoice=ALLCELL; DEA UCELL: CellId=102; RMV UNRELATION: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellType=IntraFreqNCell&InterFreqNCell&InterRatNCell;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


950


253 Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)

253

Configuring IP-Based Multi-mode

Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission on BS side (GBTS). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Transmission in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Transmission in the GBSS Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


951


254 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS)

254

Configuring TDM-Based Multi-

mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211504 TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(GBTS). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Hardware – A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature. – When the TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission feature is supported by a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, a UTRP should be configured for the BTS. The UTRP type must be UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4.

l

Dependencies on Other Features – WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface or WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface

l


Context This feature enables the BTS and NodeB to share E1/T1 transmission resources through a backplane clock channel with the effective TDM timeslot cross connection function. Backplane-based co-transmission is classified into the following scenarios: l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

In the scenario of GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, E1/T1 timeslots on the UMTS side are transmitted to the GTMU through the backplane TOP channel on the WMPT. E1/T1 ports on the GTMU are connected to the transmission network. The TDM timeslot cross connection function enables GSM data and UMTS data to be multiplexed on the transmission network. Therefore, E1/T1 transmission resources are shared by the GSM and UMTS modes by timeslot, as shown in Figure 254-1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

952



Figure 254-1 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

l

In the scenario of GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, a UTRP is configured on the GSM side. Therefore, extra E1/T1 resources can be shared by the UMTS mode through the backplane TOP channel to extend E1/T1 transmission resources for the UMTS mode, as shown in Figure 254-2. NOTE

l The number of E1/T1 on the BTS backplane is within the range of 16 through 19. E1/T1 numbers 16 through 19 on the BTS backplane correspond to E1/T1 numbers 0 through 3 on the NodeB backplane. Cross connection is not supported. For example, E1/T1 No. 16 on the BTS backplane only corresponds to E1/T1 No. 0 on the NodeB backplane. l E1 timeslot numbers configured on the BTS side must be consistent with those configured on the NodeB side.

Figure 254-2 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

Procedure l

Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) 1.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to OTHER. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

953



2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP switching parameters. – Set Port Subrack No. and Port Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot where the BTS port connected to the NodeB interface board is located. Set TOP Board Subrack No. and TOP Board Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot where the NodeB interface board is located. – Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT. – Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane. NOTE

When E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

l

Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) 1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link. – Set Subrack No. and Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot that house the Iub interface board. – Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD. – Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the GTMU. NOTE

Similar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It, however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, and online and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/ FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actual networking mode.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add it to the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD or BASE_BOARD.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link. – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL). – Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node). – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP(NCP Port).

8.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set Port Type to CCP(CCP Port). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

954


254 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (GBTS) NOTE

Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP port on the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

l

Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based) 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type (select Connect to BSC on the CME) to OTHER.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOP switching parameters. – Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT. – Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane. NOTE

When E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

l

Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based) 1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link. – Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet, subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board. – Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD. – Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the UTRP. NOTE

Similar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It, however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, and online and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/ FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actual networking mode.

2.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add it to the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD or BASE_BOARD.

4.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link. – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL). – Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value is H'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path. – Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node). – Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD. – Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore, rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


955



7.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set Port Type to NCP.

8.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set Port Type to CCP. NOTE

Before a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP port on the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

----End

Example //Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) //Configuring a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=OTHER; //Configuring the TOP switching relation between the GTMU and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the GTMU provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the GTMU ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; //Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=6; //Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; //Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980"; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512; //Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5; ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6; //Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based) //Configuring a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=0, DESTNODE=OTHER; //Configuring the TOP switching relation between the UTRP and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the UTRP provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the UTRP

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


956



ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS111&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&T S22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1; Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=0; //Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD; //Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256; //Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980"; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512; //Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5; ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


957


255 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS)

255

Configuring Multi-Mode BS

Common Reference Clock (GBTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-211601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (GBTS). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Clock in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Clock in the GBSS Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


958



256

Configuring Dynamic MA for GU

Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-211803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM). (For details about operations performed on the CME, see the Configuring a GU DSS Task in the M2000-CME documentation.)

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(GSM) and MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(UMTS). – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO.

l


l

Requirements for the Operating Environment – The BTS is configured with the 900 MHz MRFU or RRU3908.

Context After this feature is activated, the BSC starts spectrum sharing when the traffic volume of a cell is lighter than what can be carried on two or three TRXs, increasing the spectrum sharing time. Operators are advised to enable this feature in the scenario where the GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing feature is enabled. l

Precautions – After this feature is activated, dynamically changing an absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) of a cell leads to cell reset. – This feature affects the following algorithms: – Handover algorithm: During dynamic MA changing, the BSC performs an intra-cell handover on MSs in the GSM cell.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


959



– Admission algorithm: During dynamic MA changing, the BSC preferentially allocates timeslots with new MA to new MSs. l

Data Preparation Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

FH Index Used After Frequenc y Spectrum Sharing

TRXDS SHOPIN DEX

FH index of channels after spectrum sharing

Network planning

MAIO Used After Frequenc y Spectrum Sharing

TRXDS SMAIO

MAIO of channels after spectrum sharing

Network planning

Procedure l

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GCELLMAGRP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mobile allocations (MAs) before and after dynamic spectrum sharing is enabled.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set FH Index Used After Frequency Spectrum Sharing and MAIO Used After Frequency Spectrum Sharing for the channels in the cell.


l

Check that this feature has taken effect by viewing the value of the Number of dynamic MA changing requests counter.


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXCHANHOP (CME single configuration: BTS Topology > Cell > Configure MA Group; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set FH Index Used After Frequency Spectrum Sharing to 255.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ //GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing must have been configured before this feature is activated. //Setting the cell frequency hopping (FH) group

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


960



ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=100, HOPINDEX=1, HSN=0, TSC=0, HOPMODE=1, FREQ1=802, FREQ2=804, FREQ3=806, FREQ4=808; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=100, HOPINDEX=2, HSN=0, TSC=0, HOPMODE=1, FREQ1=802, FREQ2=804; ADD GCELLMAGRP: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=100, HOPINDEX=3, HSN=0, TSC=0, HOPMODE=1, FREQ1=806, FREQ2=808; //Setting the FH groups for a channel SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=2, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=2, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=3, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=3, TRXDSSMAIO=0; //Deactivation procedure SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1001, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=0, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0; SET GTRXCHANHOP: TRXID=1003, CHNO=1, TRXHOPINDEX=1, TRXMAIO=0, IDTYPE=BYID, TRXDSSHOPINDEX=255, TRXDSSMAIO=0;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


961



257

Configuring GSM Power Control on

Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (GSM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-211804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (GSM).

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – The feature GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) has been configured before this feature is activated.

l


l

Requirements for the Operating Environment – Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.

Context This feature is recommended for the GU refarming 3.8 MHz or 4.2 MHz scenario where the number of FH TCH frequencies is greater than or equal to 6. l

Precautions – The interfering frequencies must join in FH. – Operators are not advised to enable this feature together with the feature MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(GSM) or MRFD-221801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(UMTS). – This feature affects the following features: GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation), GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing, GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell, GBFD-115507 WB AMR, and GBFD-115830 VAMOS.

l Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Data Preparation Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

962



– When this feature is used together with the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode, operators only need to prepare the data for the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode. – When this feature is used together with the function GU Refarming 4.2 MHz of the Flexible Frequency Bandwidth of UMTS Carrier feature, the data for this feature is the same as the data for the function GU Refarming 4.2 MHz. – The following table describes the parameters that are specific to this feature.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

Cell Index

CELLI D

Cell in which frequency-based power control is enabled

Network planning

Frequenc y-based Power Control

GUDegr atePwrC trl

Whether to enable frequency-based power control.

Network planning

Interfere nce Coordina tion Policy

GUDegr atePwrP ri

Frequency-based power control policy. If this parameter is set to GSM (GSM), this feature preferentially guarantees the GSM network quality while minimizing interference to the UMTS network. If this parameter is set to UMTS(UMTS), this feature preferentially guarantees the UMTS network quality. The specific setting depends on customers' requirements.

Network planning


963


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

GU2.0 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interferin g Frequenc y

GU2000 KHzMa xVal

Maximum power decrease for the interfering frequency when there is a 2.0 MHz frequency spacing between the GSM and UMTS networks. The expected transmit power of the interfering frequency can be calculated with the following formula: Expected transmit power of the interfering frequency = Maximum TRX transmit power GU2.0 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency. The larger the parameter value, the lower the expected transmit power of the interfering frequency is, and the more GSM users are affected in terms of service quality. In this case, if this parameter is set to UMTS(UMTS), the UMTS network has more performance gains; if this parameter is set to GSM(GSM), the GSM users on which power compression is performed are more closer to the cell center.

Network planning

GU2.2 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interferin g Frequenc y

GU2200 KHzMa xVal

Maximum power decrease for the interfering frequency when there is a 2.2 MHz frequency spacing between the GSM and UMTS networks. The expected transmit power of the interfering frequency can be calculated with the following formula: Expected transmit power of the interfering frequency = Maximum TRX transmit power GU2.2 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency. The larger the parameter value, the lower the expected transmit power of the interfering frequency is, and the more GSM users are affected in terms of service quality. In this case, if this parameter is set to UMTS(UMTS), the UMTS network has more performance gains; if this parameter is set to GSM(GSM), the GSM users on which power compression is performed are more closer to the cell center.

Network planning


964


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

UMTS Center Frequenc y1

UMTSF reqNum 1

Downlink absolute radio frequency channel number (ARFCN) for the first UMTS frequency that has a 2.0 MHz or 2.2 MHz spacing with the GSM frequency in GU refarming scenarios. When one UMTS frequency is deployed in GU refarming scenarios, one ARFCN is configured. When multiple UMTS frequencies are deployed in GU refarming scenarios, multiple ARFCNs are configured. Currently, a maximum of two such ARFCNs can be configured.

Network planning

UMTS Center Frequenc y2

UMTSF reqNum 2

Downlink ARFCN for the second UMTS frequency that has a 2.0 MHz or 2.2 MHz spacing with the GSM frequency in GU refarming scenarios. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 1023. When one UMTS frequency is deployed in GU refarming scenarios, one ARFCN is configured. When multiple UMTS frequencies are deployed in GU refarming scenarios, multiple ARFCNs are configured. Currently, a maximum of two such ARFCNs can be configured.

Network planning

NonAHR Power Compens ation Proportio n

NAHR CompC oeff

Proportion of power compensation for the non-interfering frequencies to power decrease each time the transmit power of the interfering frequency is decreased by 1 dB for enhanced full rate (EFR), full rate (FR), half rate (HR), and adaptive multirate (AMR) FR calls. Increasing the value of this parameter increases the power compensation amplitude.

Network planning


965



Paramet er Name

Parame ter ID

Description

Data Source

NonAHR Power Compens ation Offset

NAHR CompO ffVal

Power compensation offset for EFR, FR, HR, and AMR FR calls. Power decrease amplitude that requires power compensation = NAHRCompOffVal/ NAHRCompCoeff. When NAHRCompCoeff is set to 0, this parameter does not need to be configured. When this parameter is set to a smaller value, the power decrease amplitude that does not require power compensation increases.

Network planning

AHR Power Compens ation Proportio n

AHRCo mpCoef f

Proportion of power compensation for the non-interfering frequencies to power decrease each time the transmit power of the interfering frequency is decreased by 1 dB for AMR HR calls. Increasing the value of this parameter increases the power compensation amplitude.

Network planning

AHR Power Compens ation Offset

AHRCo mpOffV al

Power compensation offset for AMR HR calls. Power decrease amplitude that requires power compensation = AHRCompOffVal/ AHRCompCoeff. When AHRCompCoeff is set to 0, this parameter does not need to be configured. When this parameter is set to a smaller value, the power decrease amplitude that does not require power compensation increases.

Network planning

Procedure l


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > GSM/UMTS Small Frequency Spacing Interference Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Frequency-based Power Control to ON and set the other parameters to appropriate values. The other parameters are Cell Index, Interference Coordination Policy, GU2.0 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency, GU2.2 MHz Max. Power Decrease for Interfering Frequency, UMTS Center Frequency 1, UMTS Center Frequency 2, Non-AHR Power Compensation Proportion, Non-


966



AHR Power Compensation Offset, AHR Power Compensation Proportion, and AHR Power Compensation Offset. l

l


When this feature is used together with the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode, the procedure used to verify this feature is the same as that used to verify the feature 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode.

2.

When this feature is used together with the GU Refarming 4.2 MHz function of the Flexible Frequency Bandwidth of UMTS Carrier feature, the procedure used to verify this feature is the same as that used to verify the Flexible Frequency Bandwidth of UMTS Carrier feature.

3.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to query whether the license controlling this feature has been activated.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST GCELLNONSTANDARDBW to query whether Frequency-based Power Control is set to ON and whether Cell Index is set to the index of the cell where this feature is to be enabled.

5.

Check the values of the counters in the following table. Counter ID

Counter Name

Description

1282449360

CELL. 2MDISTURB.AVG.FAL L.POWER.RANGE

Average Power Decrease on GSM 2.0 MHz Interfering Frequency

1282449361

CELL. 2.2MDISTURB.AVG.F ALL.POWER.RANGE

Average Power Decrease on GSM 2.2 MHz Interfering Frequency

1282449362

CELL.UNDISTURB.AV G.UP.POWER.RANGE

Average Power Increase on GSM Non-Interfering Frequency


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW (CME single configuration: Cell Configuration Express > Power Control > GSM/UMTS Small Frequency Spacing Interference Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.20 Modifying GSM Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Frequency-based Power Control to OFF.

----End

Example /*Activation procedure*/ SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, GUDegratePwrCtrl=ON, GUDegratePwrPri=GSM, GU2000KHzMaxVal=10, GU2200KHzMaxVal=3, UMTSFreqNum1=0, UMTSFreqNum2=0, NAHRCompCoeff=5, NAHRCompOffVal=-15, AHRCompCoeff=5, AHRCompOffVal=-15; /*Deactivation procedure*/ SET GCELLNONSTANDARDBW: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=2, GUDegratePwrCtrl=OFF;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


967


258 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(GSM)

258

Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (GSM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-211602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(GSM). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites l

Dependencies on Other Features – This feature depends on the features GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface. – This feature cannot be used together with the feature GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch or WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode.

l


l

Requirements for the Operating Environment – An MBTS must be configured with a UTRPc board to implement IPSec. If a GU dualmode base station does not support IPsec, a security gateway (SeGW) must be configured to implement IPsec. – If the SEG will authenticate the base station connected to the bearer network by using the digital certificate, the PKI function must be enabled on both the base station and the SEG, and a KPI system must be deployed in the operator's network. – If the base station controller connected to the base station does not support IPSec, an SEG must be deployed in the network to use IPSec. If the base station is configured with a primary IPSec tunnel and a secondary IPSec tunnel, the SeGW must be configured with a dynamic routing protocol.

Context IPSec Networking of an MBTS l

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

IPSec networking for a GU, GL, and UL dual-mode base station: IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with the highest priority. During secure base station deployment, all security-related configuration data is configured by the mode with Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

968



a higher priority. The mode with a lower priority does not participate in secure base station deployment. l

IPSec networking for a GUL triple-mode base station: – GU+L (BBU interconnection): IPSec is implemented on the LMPT board, and the UTRPc board forwards the LTE service data and processes UMTS and GSM IPSec data. IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with a higher priority. If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, the LMPT and UTRPc boards use their respective digital certificates to authenticate with the SeGW. – GU+L (BBU interconnection): IPSec is implemented on the UMPT board, and the UTRPc board forwards the UMTS service data and processes LTE and GSM IPSec data. IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with a higher priority. If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, the UMPT and UTRPc boards use their respective digital certificates to authenticate with the SeGW. – In other BBU interconnection scenarios: The UTRPc board performs IPSec-related processing. IPSec-related data on the UTRPc board is configured by the mode with a higher priority. If digital certificates are used for identity authentication, the UTRPc board uses its digital certificate to authenticate with SeGW, and the three mode of the base station share the same IPSec tunnels and digital certificate.

l


Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Local Name

IKELNM



Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Keepalive Interval

IKEKLI

Keepalive Timeout

IKEKLT

NAT Keepalive Timeout

NATKLI

DSCP

DSCP

ACL ID

ACLID

Description

ACLDESC

Rule Type

RULETYPE

Rule ID

RULEID

Action

ACTION

Protocol Type

PT

Source IP Address

SIP

-


Network planning

969


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Source Wildcard

SWC

Match Source Port

SMPT

Source Port Operate

SOP

Source Port 1

SPT1

Source Port 2

SPT2


DIP

Destination Wildcard

DWC

Match Destination Port

DMPT

Destination Port Operate

DOP

Destination Port 1

DPT1

Destination Port 2

DPT2

Match DSCP

MDSCP

Differentiated Services Code Point

DSCP

Match Fragment Message

MFRG

VLAN ID Filter Criteria

VLANIDOP

VLAN ID 1

VLANID1

VLAN ID 2

VLANID2

Proposal ID

PROPID

Encryption Algorithm

ENCALG

Remarks

Data Source




970



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Remarks

Data Source

Authenticatio n Algorithm

AUTHALG

Authenticatio n Method

AUTHMETH

-

Network planning

DiffieHellman Group

DHGRP


Network planning

PRF Algorithm

PRFALG


Network planning

ISAKMP SA Duration

DURATION


Network planning



Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

IKE Peer Name

PEERNAME

-

Network planning

Version

IKEVERSION

Exchange Mode

EXCHMODE



Local ID Type

LOCALIDTYPE

-

Remote IP Address

REMOTEIP

Network planning

Remote Name

REMOTENAME

Pre-shared Key

PKEY



DPD Mode

DPD

DPD Idle Time

DPDIDLETIME

Network planning

DPD Retransmissio n Interval

DPDRETRI

DPD Retransmissio n Count

DPDRETRN

The dead peer detection (DPD) is enabled by default. It is recommended that DPD-related parameters be set to consistent values on the two ends of the Internet Key Exchange (IKE). Otherwise, the end with a shorter timer interval first detects that its peer end becomes ineffective and triggers IKE negotiation again.

NAT Traversal

NATTRAV

-

Network planning


971


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Local IP Address

LOCALIP

Pre-shared Key

PKEY

IPSec Proposal Name

PROPNAME

Encapsulation Mode

ENCAPMODE

Transform

TRANMODE

AH Authenticatio n Algorithm

AHAUTHALG

ESP Authenticatio n Algorithm

ESPAUTHALG

ESP Encryption Algorithm

ESPENCALG

Policy Group Name

SPGN

IPSec Sequence No.

SPSN

Perfect Forward Secrecy

PFS

SA Duration Mode

LTCFG

Lifetime Based On Time

LTS

Lifetime Based On Traffic

LTKB

Anti-Replay Window

REPLAYWND

Remarks

Data Source

You are advised to use the tunnel mode.

Network planning




-

Network planning



-


Network planning

972


Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


Parameter Name

Parameter ID

Cabinet No.

CN

Subrack No.

SRN

Slot No.

SN

Port Type

PT

Port No.

PN

Policy Group Name

SPGN

Master Policy Group Name

MSPGN

Master IPSec Sequence No.

MSPSN

Slave Policy Group Name

SSPGN

Slave IPSec Sequence No.

SSPSN

BFD Session ID of Master Tunnel

MBFDSN

BFD Session ID of Slave Tunnel

SBFDSN

BFD Session No.

BFDSN

Source IP Address

SRCIP


DSTIP

Hop Type

HT

Time for Waiting to Restore

BTSWTR

Minimum TX Interval

MINTXINTERV AL

Minimum RX Interval

MINRXINTERV AL

Detect Period

DETECTMULT

Remarks


Data Source

973



Parameter Name

Parameter ID

DSCP

DSCP

Remarks

Data Source

Procedure l

Activation Procedure To configure active and standby IPSec tunnels, perform Step 1 to Step 12. Otherwise, perform Step 1 to Step 9. 1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIKECFG to set IKE local configurations.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSACL to add an access control list (ACL).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSACLRULE to add access rules in the ACL.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIKEPROPOSAL to configure IKE security proposals.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIKEPEER to add an IKE peer.

6.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECPROPOSAL to add IPSec security proposals.

7.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECPOLICY to add IPSec security policies.

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECBIND to bind the IPSec security policy to the output port to validate the security policy.

9.

Optional: When the BTS uses an IP clock, the clock server is in a non-security domain, and Clock Topology Mode is set to PTPOVERUDP, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIPCLKPARA. In this step, set Clock Protocol Type to PTP (PTP Protocol), Clock Topology Mode to PTPOVERUDP(PTP over UDP Unicast), and Client IP Address to the IP address used for the communication between the BTS and the clock server.

10. Optional: Repeat Step 1 to Step 9 to configure the second IPSec tunnel. 11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSBFD to configure a Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) session for the two IPSec tunnels respectively. 12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPSECDTNL to configure the active/standby relationship between the two IPSec tunnels. l

Verification Procedure If the active and standby IPSec tunnels have been configured, perform Step 1 to Step 3. Otherwise, perform Step 1 and Step 2. 1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSIPSECSA to check the IPSec tunnel status. Expected result: The results contain IPSec security association (SA) data, indicating that the IPSec tunnels are set up.

2.

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSACLRULE to determine whether service data is protected by the IPSec as planned by checking ACL rules and check Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

974



whether the protected services are normal. For example, if speech services are protected by the IPSec, you can check whether the speech services are normal by initiating calls. If management packets are protected by the IPSec, you can check whether the corresponding BTS is online from the topology window on the M2000. Expected result: Service data is protected by the IPSec as planned and the protected services are normal. 3.

Remove the Ethernet cable connecting to the active channel, and Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSIPSECDTNL to check whether Current Used IPSec Policy is Slave IPSec Policy. Use an MS to initiate a call and observe whether the call is normal. Check whether the corresponding BTS is online from the topology window on the M2000. Expected result: Current Used IPSec Policy is Slave IPSec Policy, the call initiated by the MS is normal, and the corresponding BTS is online.

l


Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV BTSIPSECBIND to delete the binding relationship between the IPSec security policy and the corresponding port.

----End

Example The following descriptions assume that the BTS is in IP over FE transmission mode. //Activation procedure //Setting BTS IKE basic configurations SET BTSIKECFG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, IKELNM="IKECFG1", IKEKLI=20, IKEKLT=60, NATKLI=20, DSCP=48; //Adding a BTS ACL ADD BTSACL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, ACLID=3001, ACLDESC="Acl Group is created"; //Adding rules in a BTS ACL ADD BTSACLRULE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RULETYPE=ADV, ACLID=3001, RULEID=10, PT=IP, SIP="1.1.1.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="2.2.2.2", DWC="0.0.255.255", MDSCP=YES, DSCP=25, MFRG=YES; //Adding BTS IKE security proposals ADD BTSIKEPROPOSAL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PROPID=10, AUTHALG=MD5, DURATION=86400; //Adding a BTS IKE peer ADD BTSIKEPEER: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PEERNAME="ike", PROPID=10, IKEVERSION=IKE_V1, EXCHMODE=MAIN, LOCALIDTYPE=IP, REMOTEIP="2.2.2.2", PKEY="*****", DPD=PERIODIC, DPDIDLETIME=20, DPDRETRI=4, DPDRETRN=6, LOCALIP="1.1.1.1"; //Adding BTS IPSec security proposals ADD BTSIPSECPROPOSAL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, PROPNAME="prop1", ENCAPMODE=TUNNEL, TRANMODE=ESP, ESPAUTHALG=MD5, ESPENCALG=DES; //Adding BTS IPSec security policies ADD BTSIPSECPOLICY: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, SPGN="policy", SPSN=1, ACLID=3001, PROPNAME="prop1", PEERNAME="ike", LTCFG=LOCAL; //Binding a BTS IPSec policy group to a port ADD BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=0, SPGN="policy"; ADD BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=1, SPGN=" PolicyGroup1"; //Adding a BFD session on the BTS side ADD BTSBFD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BFDSN=1, SRCIP="1.1.1.1", DSTIP="2.2.2.2", HT=SBFD, MINTXINTERVAL=100, MINRXINTERVAL=100; ADD BTSBFD: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, BFDSN=2, SRCIP="3.3.3.3",

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


975



DSTIP="4.4.4.4", HT=SBFD, MINTXINTERVAL=100, MINRXINTERVAL=100; //Adding IPSec dual channels ADD BTSIPSECDTNL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DUALID=0, MSPGN="policy", MSPSN=1, SSPGN="PolicyGroup1", SSPSN=1, MBFDSN=1, SBFDSN=2; Verification procedure //Querying the BTS IPSec SA status DSP BTSIPSECSA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, SPGN="policy", SPSN=1; //Querying the configuration information about the rules in the BTS ACL LST BTSACLRULE: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, RULETYPE=ADV, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Querying the status of the IPSec dual channels DSP BTSIPSECDTNL: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, DUALID=0; //Deactivation procedure //Deleting the binding relationship between the IPSec security policy group the corresponding port RMV BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=0; RMV BTSIPSECBIND: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=ETH, PN=1;

Issue 06 (2013-04-15)


976

GBSS14.0 Feature Activation Guide(06)(PDF)-En

Recommend Documents